ge
eta
yy a ve On
ees
is minal \ aA Atay f SAN Fe 3 opis ahr w _ ek peat uri y 1. Sine oNetyh DREN
Sant
1A,
1
fiw iys ‘ NAN
Sesh saed 3 “*
i! Pk * i
1 iN iN
s Sst * »
t > * a it
va ’ er Ova Use if
4 NY , A
Saal A Wass EN AG Faso bie
y Sh en ,
ey ~
~ ta x
=
Belden
pike Cake a ey ise
rh
a
i WE
ste ; i " a8 ‘ hy Hh! ANU RN EEN tip ty OPE aya tS AREAS ) “th RUN. sis x
ANSE COMER TS nye sors
La
>
HANDBOOK
Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2008 with funding from Microsoft Corporation
https://archive.org/details/nandbooktogramma00greerich
HANDBOOK
To
THE GRAMMAR
OF THE
GREEK TESTAMENT.
TOGETHER WITH
A COMPLETE VOCABULARY, AND AN EXAMINATION OF THE CHIEF NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
ILLUSTRATED BY NUMEROUS EXAMPLES AND COMMENTS,
LONDON :
THE RELIGIOUS TRACT SOCIETY,
56, “PATERNOSTER ROW; 65, ST. PAUL’S CHURCHYARD; AND 164, PICCADILLY.
[All rights reserved.]
PA BIS ak b we ss ; 176
PREFACE.
THAT a knowledge of the New Testament in its original tongue is a thing to be desired by intelligent Christians none will question. No _ book can be thoroughly known in a translation only ; and the Bible,
although ‘‘ the most translatable of books,” is no exception.
Many, who would gladly undertake the study, are deterred by the manifold and unquestionable difficulties of the Greek Language. It seems worth while to ask whether this obstacle cannot, in some measure, be removed.
Undoubtedly, the Greek of the New Testament, as a later dialect of an elaborate and polished language, can most effectively be studied through the medium of the elder forms of the tongue. This method, accordingly, is in general chosen; and the historians and orators, the philosophers and poets of Greece, have led the way to the Evangelists and the Apostles.
Yet many persons have no opportunity for hattled so extended and difficult. Are they, therefore, to be forbidden all access, save through translators, critics, and interpreters, to the words of the Divine revelation ?
In attempting to reply, we note that the Greek of Reniistaes is, for most purposes, a language complete in itself. Its forms and rules are definite, its usages in general precise. Its peculiarities, though best approached from the classic side, may be reached by a shorter way, and be almost as well comprehended.
Many circumstances, again, facilitate the special study of the Now Testament tongue. The language of orators and philosophers had descended to men of simpler mind and less artificial speech, Com- paring the Sacred Volume with Greek literature generally, we find
ARG 8BSZ5
iv | PREFACE.
a smaller vocabulary, fewer grammatical forms, less intricate etymo- logical rules, with scantier lists of exceptions, and a far less elaborate syntax ; while the student has the advantage of being confined for the time to one limited, but intensely interesting, field.
The following pages are then intended as a sufficient guide to Biblical Greek for English students, that is, for those who have not studied the classical languages. It may also be of service to those who have made some progress in classical studies, but who wish to concentrate their chief regards upon the language and syntax of the New Testament.
The plan of the volume, and-the method recommended for its study, are sufficiently set forth in the Introduction. To specify all the sources, English and German, from which valuable aid has been derived, would be unnecessary. Winer’s comprehensive work (Sixth Edition, Leipsic, 1855; Edinburgh, T. & T. Clark, 1859, by Masson) has of course been consulted throughout. Scarcely less useful have been the researches and discussions of the late Dr. Donaldson. The New Testament Grammars of the Rey. W. Webster, and of the Rey. T. 8S. Green, have afforded some very yaluable hints. On Greek Testament Lexicography, it will suffice to name the admirable Clavis Novi Testamenti recently published at Leipsic by Dr. 0. L. W. Grimm.
The work has been carefully revised throughout in MS. by the Rey. Dr. Jacob, late Head Master of Christ’s Hospital, author of the Bromsgrove Greek Grammar, and other classical works; and, in the proof sheets, by the Rey. R. B. Girdlestone, M.A., Editorial Superintendent of the British and Foreign Bible Society. To the important suggestions of these gentlemen the volume in its present state owes very much. It is now commended to attentive students of the New Testament, in the hope that it may lead not a few to the better understanding, and therefore to the higher appreciation of the Divine oracles.
SAMUEL G. GREEN.
Rawpon CoLuLeGE.
INTRODUCTION,
Tue following work so far differs from other manuals of the Greek language, both in its method and in the persons for whom it is intended, that some preliminary words on the plan by which its several parts should be studied will not be out of place.
On OrtnocrapHy, the sections should be thoroughly mastered, not only for the sake of facility in reading, but because most of the difficulties and so-called irregularities in the inflection of substantives, adjectives, and verbs depend on letter-changes, of which the rules are comparatively few, and really simple. To know these laws at the outset is to be provided with a key to varieties and intricacies which might otherwise prove hopelessly bewildering. It will be advisable that no student should advance beyond this portion of the work before being able to read the lessons on pages 11, 12 with fluency, and accurately to transcribe the paragraph on page 13. Great attention should be paid at this stage to pronunciation, especially to the distinction between the long
and short vowels; and those who may be studying the work _ by themselves are strongly recommended to take an oppor- tunity of reading a chapter or two in Greek to some scholar who can criticise and correct their mistakes.
In Erymotoey, the forms must be carefully and completely learned. Everything in the student’s further progress depends upon this. It is believed that the systematic and
vi _ INTRODUCTION.
progressive plan on which the substantives and verbs, as the groundwork of the whole, have been discussed, will but lightly burden the memory, while the judgment will be kept constantly at work. The chief point to be noted is the place and power of the srem in Greek words. The first and second declensions of SuBsranTIvEs will be seen to be mainly reducible to the same law; the third declension, instead of perplexing the learner by countless varieties, will exhibit one normal form. The inflection of Apsxcrivzs will appear but a repetition of that of the Substantives; while the Pronouns only slightly differ. Of the Vrrss, the termina- tions should in the first instance be carefully learned. The first Paradigm will be found to exhibit the simplest way in which these terminations can be combined with the verbal root; those that follow being but variations on the same model, according to the character of the Stem. The Verbs in wt, or of the Second Conjugation,* are classified in a way which, it is believed, will give no serious difficulty to the student.
The Exercises up to this point are simply for practice in declension and conjugation, consisting almost exclusively of words occurring in the “Sermon on the Mount:” they are fair specimens of the ordinary vocabulary of the language; and the learner is strongly recommended to write them out in all their forms, not neglecting the accents, which, by the help of the rules given under the several heads, will present but little difficulty.
A stock of words will thus have been acquired, with a
* In strictness, of course the First. The normal forms of the Verb are really to be found here; and the terminations of Verbs in w might be deduced from these, by the aid of ‘‘the connective vowels.” See especially Professor Greenwood’s Greek Grammar. It has not, however, been thought necessary, in the present work, to carry analysis so far.
INTRODUCTION. i knowledge of forms of inflection quite sufficient for ordinary cases. Some chapters of greater difficulty follow, treating of the Verbs, tense by tense, and exhibiting the chief variations and anomalies in particular words. These sections may be omitted on a first study of the volume, but it will be important to read them carefully afterwards. The aim has. been, so to classify the verbal forms that most apparent irregularities may be seen to be only exemplifica- tions of some more extended rule; and, without trespassing on the more extended field of classical literature, to leave -no word in the New Testament without the means of ready analysis and explanation.
The Exercises which succeed these sections are for still further test. Here for the first time some easy sentences are introduced for translation. Logically, these should no doubt have been deferred until some rules of Syntax had been laid down; but the interest and utility of such Exercises may be held a sufficient defence of the irregu- larity, especially as they contain scarcely any usages but such as are already familiar to those who have gram- matically studied any language. Here, a Greek Testament Lexicon or Vocabulary will be found necessary.
The chapters on the indeclinable Parts of Speech call for no remark. ‘Their complete discussion belongs to Syntax: but it was held necessary to the completeness of the Ety- mology to give at least a general view of their formation and meaning. So far as they extend, these sections should be closely studied.
The reader will then be prepared for the Synrax, the study of the intermediate chapters being postponed, if pre- ferred, to a subsequent stage. These sections, on the different Languages of which the New Testament contains the trace, and on New Testament Proper Names, will suggest topics of
Vill INTRODUCTION.
interesting inquiry, which, in a manual like the present, could be pursued only for a very little way.
The Synrax embodies the simplest laws of concord, _ government, and the connection of sentences, as well as others of a more special and less obvious kind. The doc- trines of the Article, of the Preposition, and of the Tenses, have received careful attention, as throwing light on many obscure or misunderstood passages. The arrangement of the Syntax has been adopted with a view to the learner’s con- venience, and for the most part follows the order of the Parts of Speech.
The student is specially and strongly recommended to study the order of the whole work, and especially of this part, in the AnatyricaL Taste or Conrents. To this Table much care has been devoted, in the hope that it might be convenient not only for ordinary reference, but as an out- line and conspectus of the volume; suggesting at one view the leading principles of the language, and especially useful in recapitulatory examinations.
The sentences from the Greek Testament, so numerous in this division of the work, are intended partly to exemplify the rules to which they are appended, the illustrative words being printed in a thicker type; partly also to form together a series of Preparatory Reading Lessons or Primer, introductory to the sacred volume, The student is therefore earnestly counselled to study these sentences in order. Most of them, of course, belong to the easier parts of New Testament Scripture; others again are more difficult and unusual in their structure; while in very many will be discovered shades or specialties of meaning which the English Version does not exhibit, and which perhaps no translation could reproduce. The study, therefore, of these sentences will be an introduction to Biblical exegesis,
INTRODUCTION. ey 4
which may prepare not a few readers for more extended inquiries.
A VocasuLary to the whole New Testament, and a brief discussion of the chief New Testament Synonyms, complete the plan of the work.
The work claims, be it remembered, to be an Introduction only. By its means, a not inadequate beginning may be made in what is surely the noblest of studies. Its aim is to familiarise many readers, who else had despaired of the possibility, with the words of Curisr and of His Apostles. Should its purpose in any way be accomplished, it will give access also to those criticisms by which expositors in our own land and age, as in others, have so variously and nobly illustrated the “living oracles.” The labour followed by such rewards will have been well spent: and readers of the New Testament in its own tongue, whether they advance or not to that high critical discernment which only the few attain, will have found in the acquisition a pure and life-
long joy.
Notre ON THE REFERENCES TO CRITICAL EDITIONS oF THE NEW TESTA- MENT.—Several words and phrases of the New Testament differ in the best MSS. from the reading of the ordinary text. In a few cases the variations are of some grammatical importance, and it has been necessary, therefore, to refer to them. These references have mostly been made by the help of the _ Critical Editions of the New Testament published by J. J. Griesbach (1796- 1806); by Dr. Tischendorf, Leipsic, seventh ed., 1859; by Dr. Lachmann, Berlin (1842-1850); and by Dr. S. P. Tregelles (including as yet only the Gospels, the Acts, and the General Epistles), 1844-1861.
4
he ee es
oo ee
Min D.
ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY.
PAGE
pe ‘THE ALPHABET. Names, ies and numeral values of the letters ; ‘ : . ‘ : 1 2. Notes on the Alphabet ‘ - ‘ ‘ ee ee 3. THE VowELS: (a) their Deon AnSiabion: long and shiek ; ° View (b) The diphthongs (regularly long) . 4 ‘ ° . Peat (c) The ‘‘ breathings” of initial vowels . ° ‘ : ae (d) The ‘‘breathings” of initialp . ° . ; - 8 (ec) The lengthening of vowels in inflection .- : . : oe
'(f) Tae contraction of vowels. Table.
Exercise 1. Vowel Contractions . . . . 4 (g) Dieresis . . - ; - eee (A) Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding it 1. The nw suffixed (vy epeAkvotucdy) . ‘ ° ° oem 2. Elision eee ‘ ° ° : : . 4 3. Crasis . : . ° . . ‘ ; ae 4. THE CoNSONANTS . ; : ‘ ° : : te it: (a) Division into mutes ai liquids ° . ‘ ° : Ps (b) Classification of mutes . é . ° 4 - PSS 3 (c) The sibilant oc, and its couibinkticide ° ° F - 6
(d) Rules of consonant combination— . Labials or gutturals, withe . ; : . Labials or gutturals, with a dental : ; : . Dentals beforec . ‘ ‘ , . Mutes before p . Combinations of v with other cone aittn “e A sharp mute before an aspirated vowel . Consecutive syllables not to begin with an aspirate . . Consonants that may be final . ms Exercise 2. On the Combinations of ‘Consonants. ze Changes of Consonants by assimilation, duplication, transposition, omission, or insertion . ° °
eee see
~~] Ws AWAAAI VIAN
xi ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT. 6 THE ACCENTS ...
(a) Use of the accents ° ° ° ° ° ° ° (6) The different accents . ° ° . ° ° . (c) Rules of accentuation . . .« « «© © (d, e) Enclitics and proclitics . ° ° ° ° > 7. On the transference of Greek words into English . : . Latin the usual medium . > ° ° Equivalents of «, v, at, ot, €1, ov, initial I wad 5 ‘
8. Punctuation : _ Marks of pause, interrogation, quotation, and for ** &e.” ‘Reading Lessons— -l. Acts ii, 1-13 ° ° . ° ° ° ° ° 2. Romans iv. 1-16. “ ‘ ; R ‘ 3. Matt. v. 1-16, in Roman chants ° . °
PART ILI.
ETYMOLOGY.
CHAPTER I.—INTRODUCTION.
g. The ‘‘ Parts of Speech” . ; ‘ vise . . 1o. THE ROOT and STEM . ere 6 ists ka ° Pure and (impure) liquid or mute stems . . . .
(The stem to be marked by thick letters) .
CHAPTER II.—THE NOUN OR SUBSTANTIVE. 1 GENDER, NUMBER, and CASE. . . :
General significance of the Cases 12, 13. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE and Indefinite Pronvat Types of Substantive and Adjective Declension . 14. Characteristics of all declensions of Nouns . . (a) Neuter Nominatives and Accusatives alike Their plural termination alwaysa : . (b) The Dative Singular in « (‘‘iota pubeceiuk i é ° (c) The Genitive Plural in wy ° (dz) Masculine like the Neuter in Genitive oui Dative. . 1c. Rules for determining the GenpErR of Nouns. . « «+ (a). Masculine: names of males, rivers, winds . . .
SECT. 15.
16.
30.
>
ETYMOLOGY.
(b) Feminine: names of females, trees, countries, islands, and
abstract nouns .
(c) Neuter: diminutives, indeeinables, aa the wubel noun
(infinitive) . : $ (Note on common and dulodiae svelte’
DECLENSI-N OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE
Three leading types. ° ; Illustrations: mdAn, hvdpenbll, + mais,
Resemblances between the first and second .
The A and O declensions (parisyllabic)
The Separable declension eeRAEIEN.
. Tue First DECLENSION (A) .
Feminine Paradigms (juépa, ddéa, wiih pe and Bupa Masculine Paradigms (uaénrhs, veavias) and Remarks . Exercise 3. Nouns of the First Declension
Irregular forms of the First Declension
. Tae Seconp DrcLension (QO) Masculine (Adyos) and Feminine (634s) Piirndigcn anal Rentirks
Neuter Paradigm (cixov) and Remarks
Paradigm of Contracted Nouns in ¢0-, 00-, vos, orroty » ’Amoards)
Declension of *Incots .
Exercise 4. Nouns of the Second Declonsiok . Tue Turrp DECLENSION (imparisyllabic)
-Importance of knowing the stem General Paradigms: aidy, pijya . ° Terminations of this Declension . . Varieties according to stem-endings ,
Consonants and vowels that may be stem-endings
Rules for the Nominative . . : 1. s added to the stem . . 2. Thestem lengthened . 3. Digammated stems (ev-, av-, ov-) . 4. Neuter stems in es- (os) 5. Stem unchanged . é Paradigms illustrating these five roles: 1. “Apa, «hpvt, ixObs, mérus 2. rouhy,.Aéwv, aidds, marhp, avip . 3. BasiActs, Bots. ‘4 - z 4, yévos . ‘ : . 5. Referred to 'g 26 ‘ .
Exercise 5. Nouns ofthe Third Declension
Irregular Nouns of the Third Declension SUBSTANTIVES OF VARIABLE DECLENSION
PAGE
18
xiv ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
_ (a) Interchanges between the second and third (b) The word odBBarov, Sabbath . .
(c) Proper names, especially Moses, Jeutilon Hebrew indeclinables . °
Exercise 6. Promiscuous List of Nouns
CHAPTER IL—ADJECTIVES.
33. THREE FORMS, correspondent with substantive declensions . 34. First Form . : : . Paradigms of aeyads, Biahine, aR pias Rncabsie , .
35. Contracted .g copphe xXpvoovs; Remarks . . . :
36. Seconp Form . ete! He eee eee General Remarks ‘ 3 : PR ° ° ° 37. Paradigms of éfts, was, Exdv 5 = ; . a
38. Participles of this class (declension of ‘ved ° ‘ . 39. Adjectives of double form: péyas, woAds, mpais . 40. THIRD Form . . : . General Remarks ‘ ° . . 41. Paradigms of dAnéjs, shieey ‘ COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
42. First Mernop . ‘ . : ° Comparison of zicros, aandhs, beads véos. ‘ :
43. Seconp Meruop. ; o> Comparison of taxis, 2 cane ise shoes . °
44. Declension of comparatives in -fwv (uel{wv) . ‘
45. Irregular and alternative comparisons . . dyabds, kaxds, pixpds, modvs ; 3 ;
46. DEFECTIVE CoMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES .
47- EmpxHatic Meruops or ComPaARIsoN. ‘ ° ‘ .
Exercise 7. Adjectives for Practice . - NUMERALS ; ‘ ; ealPQg ofthe 48. THe CarpinAL NuMBERS. . . 0 4h aah ae
(a) Signs of numeration . ° ; poriig . (b) Disused letters as numeral signs . $ é ‘ (c) Composite numerical expressions : . :
49. Declension of the cardinalnumbers . . . . els, 500, Tpeis, Téooapes ° : ° ° .
So. THE OrnpDINAL NUMBERS . 51. Table of Cardinals and Ordinals, and ‘Bemark . 52. DisrrisuTive NUMBERS Exercise 8. Numbers: Numerical ‘symbols, and phrases for translation . o> (ie ee ee Die Pa
B6ececresances
43
50
8 53:
54 55°
56.
37°
58.
a9:
60.
61.
63.
ETYMOLOGY.
CHAPTER IV.—PRONOUNS.
ECT. PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
1. SUBSTANTIVE-PERSONAL (‘‘ personal”) . : é . First person, éyé, eis ; ee ov, tmets . . Third person, by ards, 4, 6 : : é ; é
2. REFLEXIVE . P : First person, diarired: ‘acd; ceavrou:
Third, éavrod (airov) . i ‘ ‘ ; ‘ ‘
3. ADJECTIVE-PERSONAL (possesstve) : (a) éuds, quétepos, ods, buérepos . ; ; (6, c) Genitive of the personal pronouns as iiideaavten DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Framed upon the model of the Article (a, b, c, d) 85¢e, otros, éxetvos, b adrdés: (e) towovTos, ToTOvTOS, THALKOVTOS ‘ THE RELATIVE PRONOUN (a, b) bs, H, 8; (c, d) boris, Somep, Bove é , (e) Relatives of quality, quantity, number, dcatiés : é INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS . ‘ 3 : (a) The simple Interrogative, tis; rf; , (b) Correlatives of quality, quantity, aonb depres (c) Direct interrogatives in indirect construction (d) Interrogatives properly indirect INDEFINITE PRONOUNS ‘ (a, b) The ordinary Indefinite, tis, and negative somigouiel (c) The old Indefinite, 6 deiva DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUN s (a) &Ados, (b) evepos, (c) &AAHAwY, (d) Exacros
. Table of Correlative Pronouns
CHAPTER V.—THE VERB.
THE VOICES ‘ ; ‘ ‘ ; ‘ Four things predicated by the Verb : ; , : ° Threefold modification of the verbal stem: . ‘ « .
Active, Middle, Passive .
WE MOODS wk hk ee
Four Modes or Moods. 3 ; Pe P ; ]. The Iyprcarive, and its use ‘ ie g BY é 2. The IMPERATIVE te a ; we é iy ‘
Oy CRIM MUREHMOPRIVR | A. SQgsb eS ae tae te ten Saas
65.
66. 67.
68.
69.
70
71.
ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
4. The OpraTIvE (properly a division of the Subjunctive) 5. Interrogative Forms . , ‘ a 5 . > ; 6. The INFINITIVE, Pt do 7. The PArticrPzs, } Participials . : * : THE TENSES , ° ° ; ‘ ‘ Fae Time and State jointly paiidied ; ‘ : “i Nine possible Tenses. Scheme : Seven actual Tenses (in common use, six) . . A ; ‘* Principal” and ‘‘ Historical” Tenses Arrangement of Tenses. Tenses of Atvw . ° ° : NUMBER AND PERSON. Tue Two ConsueaTions . . ° : é Remark on the Greek and English typinel terms é : ‘ : THE VERBAL STEM. ui: 30 ait) gid ae ieee How ascertained : affixes aia wifes ‘ AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION . : . ° (a) Augment in the historical tenses, nee ea . 1. The syllabic augment—with initial consonants 2. The temporal augment—with initial vowels . ‘ (b) Reduplication in the perfect tenses throughout. An initial consonant repeated, with e. ° 6 . : An initial vowel lengthened (like temporal augment) . (c) Augment and reduplication in compound verbs INFLEXIONAL TERMINATIONS . ° : ‘ .
(a) Denoting voice, mood, tense, Bb V8, par person . (6) Personal endings originally fragments of pronouns Normalforms . . : ; ‘ TENSE-CHARACTERISTICS (consonavt) . ; . Active Future and First Aorist, ¢ . », Perfect and Pluperfeet, « ; , Passive Future and First Aorist, @
. Mopat VowerLs
Subjunctive—lengthened indicative vow wea. Optative—diphthongal forms
. Terminations of all the Moods. and Tenses.
PARADIGM OF THE First ConJUGATION: pure uncontracted motetw. Principal parts . : : é : : ‘ Conjugation throughout. . . .
. All other forms variations of this type : : ; .
Exercise 9. On pure, uncontracted Verbs
. Verbs of the pure uncontracted class . Possible stem-endings
Pure, mute, and liquid verbs
ETYMOLOGY. XVli
SRCT. PAGE
78. Pure Verses. Special Rules . ; ; : ‘ ‘ - 72
(a) The stem-vowels . : 7 3 . ‘ ° « 42
(b) Contraction with a, e,oro . ; é.42
(c) Contraction confined tu Present ead Taipentect Denton wi de
(d) Peculiarities of contraction. Compare § 3, f. - 80
79 PARADIGMS OF Tiudw, piréw, SnAdw, Present and Imperfect . 80
80. Note on remaining Tenses . ' ‘ . 83
Exercise 10. On pure, oontracted Verbs. Z oe
81. Mure Verss. Special Rules ; ‘ ‘ : é 3 . 84
8°, Stem unaffected by a fo.lowing vowel. ‘ . 84 $3. (a) Tense-characteristics (§ 71) and terminations betinuing
with a consonant modify the stem. . “ ‘ . 84
(b) Rules of modification : ‘ , . 84
1. As caused by -o after the verbal ees, Sui Be . 84
2. is by -0 +" is ; ‘ +) 94
3. me by -t ‘ re , ? . 84
4, ie by -z oa oe é r eee)
5. PP by -o8 ¥ f ‘ . . 85
6. PY} by -vr Be ae ; a » 85
7. by -K Sy is i p » 85
$4. PARADIGMS OF otics More Verss. Remarks sees b,c). 4 . 85
Conjugation of tplBw, tyw, meldw . j t ; . 86
85. Modification of the Present (and Ten pallet: ; -. 90
(a) The stem of the Present not always the stem of thi Verb « 90
: Labial verbal stems, that addr . 2 90 . Guttural verbal stems, that change the shades feaaieciaak
togcor¢ . 90
3. Dental verbal itll that chivaied the sheonn: ccpaamraiint to ¢ $0
(6) All other tenses formed from the stegliell stem , ? «90
(c) Vowels changed to diphthongs in short stem-syllables . Pee}
Here the Futnre and Perfect formed from the Present stem 91
86. The Secondary Tenses of modified Verbs é F , os ae
In these Tenses, the simple verbal-stem always vimana : Ree)
87. THE SEconD AorRIst 91 Conjugated like the Imperfect ludidalive fin other moods as
Present) . , 2 “ é - 92
Tiustrations from gvy- (pede), TUT- febwre) ‘ ° <. 9Se
Active, Middle, and Passive 5 0. ee ss
Note on Accentuation . ‘ ° . P : on)
$3. Tue Szconp Furure (Passive) . . . .« «. . 98
Illustration from téz- (réarw) - % : " 3 + OE
. 89. Tux Seconp Perrecr (Active) . # As ° oth: on
Illustration from apay- (mpdoow) . ° ° . . aii, eon
xvii ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT. PAGE go. General Rules for the Second Tenses , ; ; See 1. In what verbs they do not occur ‘ 93 2, 3. Seldom found in First Tenses in the same yer << penne © in Passive . : . ‘ A 93 4. First and Sbocnd Poiteots, Aative : : A : 94 Exercise 11. On mute Verbs py she eee ge ign ee 94 gt. Liquip Verps. Special Rules. ° ° ° : . 1 a (a) Present stem mostly modified ; . > . , 95 (6) Future Active and Middle, contracted . . ° . 95 (c) First Aorist Active and Middle . 2 . . ‘ 95° (d) Perfect Active, variations . ‘ : ‘ ‘ . 95 (e) Perfect passive, variations . ‘ : 95 gz. PaRapbiIcMs oF Liquip VERBS. : ue . . 96 ayyéAAw, Kplyw, alpw . . , : 96 Exercise 12. On liquid Verbs ; . 100 93- Nores on THE TENSES. [These Sections, to the ‘ble of g 99, dating chiefly with minute variations and seeming irregularities in par- ticular verbs, may be omitted in the first study of the book.] . 101 94. THE Present AND ImperFecT. I. The Present . Sie . 101 1-4. Details of modification, as § 85 ; 101 5. Modifications of pure and impure stems by y, ve, ay . . 101 6. Alternative stems, consonant and e- 102 7. Inchoative forms in ox- oricr- . ~ ; > ; . 102 8. Reduplicated stems P ; 102 II. The Imperfect ; ; ; P , ‘ : . 103 Peculiarities of hsichenk ‘ . . 103 Double p-. Double augment. Attic augment in he + . 103 gs. THe Sreconp Aorist, Active and Middle . . 103 Contains the simple verbal stem : . 103 (Reduplicated Second Aorist. Change of shock siemicaceral) . 168 The Vowel Aorist, as of Second Conjugation . ; - 103 96. Tne Future, Active and Middle . : : , : . 104 , (a) Lengthening or otherwise of pure stant . ° : . 104 (b) The Attic Future of Verbs in -18 (i(w) . . ° ; - 105 (c) The digammated future of verbs in ¢f- (éw) . : ‘ - 105 (zd) Future in middle form, with active meaning. S tales - 105 97- THE First Aorist, Active and Middle ; r ; ; 106 (a) Connection of Aorist with Future stem ° ° ° . 106 (1) In pure and mute ; (2) in liquid verbs . . . . 106 (b) Peculiarities of Augment . ° : : . : - 106 Note on Accentuation sO. 9 hs aan 2 & > ee 98, THe Aorists AND Fururzs Passive , , : : . . 107 (a) Modified like the Perfect Passive. . . . «© » 107
ETYMOLOGY.
SECT.
98. (b) Vowel stem-endings, lengthened, shortened, or with ¢
(c) Transposition of vowel and liquids in short roots . (d) Change of a weak vowel into a ; (ce) First and Second Tenses seldom in the same vere. Notes on Irregularities of Augment, and.on Accentuation 99. Perrect and PLUPERFECT . . (a) Varieties in reduplication 1. é- before a double consonant 2. efAnda from AaB- (AauBdyw) . : ; 3. Double reduplication and augment . 4, Pluperfect generally omits augment (6) Third person plural Perfect Active in -a . .
(c) The Second Perfect active: its special sense . ‘
(d) The Pertect Passive: its peculiarities . ‘ :
(e) The Future Perfect passive (or mid.) . . Note on accentuation p . ‘ ‘ .
iov. DEPONENT VERBS. Active and Passive, as determined by the ‘hoeiat 1or. IMPERSONAL VERBS Their use ‘ List and usual fortis of the ohias Tnipersonails ‘ 102. DEFECTIVE VERBS Originally caused by redundancy 103. PRINCIPAL DEFECTIVE VERBS AND THEIR PARADIGNS aipéw, epxouat, eobiw, dpdw, tpéxw, pépw, elroy . Exercise 138. On the Defective Verbs .
.
104. THE SECOND CONJUGATION, or Verbs in -u.
The chief peculiarity of these Verbs ‘ Future, First Aorist, and Perfect like Verbs in -w . 105. Modifications of the Verbal Stem. . (a) Vowel of a pure stem se Sai (b) Reduplication yee (c) The syllable -vv- (-vvu-) affixed . (zd) Two classes thus Sed : ; 106. First CLiass—Paradigms in two divin é ° First division—regular forms ae er 107. PARADIGMS of fornut, TiOnus, Sidwur =. P ‘ 108. Remarks on the Paradigms . ‘ . 1. First Aorist Active, with -«- (xlOnu, BLBcopt) 2. Peculiarities in augment of fornm : 3. Active Aorists of forny:—their difference 4. The verb orhnw . Z ‘ 109. List of Verbs in this division ‘ , P
xX
SECT. 1 Og.
110,
IIt.
T32..
113. 114. 115.
116. ry.
118.
119. 120. 121. 122.
123.
124. 125.
126.
ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS,
A-stems: a. Active; b, Deponent . . : . ‘124
E-stems: Deponent only . } m . 125
- Second Division—Stems éo- (eit), ilu), (mus) ‘ 125
CONJUGATION OF eimi (elva:), tobe . ‘ 126
vs eit ( (Yevou), to go 127
tyme in its compound adinur 128
SECOND nies Verbs i iu -vume or -yyupe . 130
Remarks . ; . 130
Paradigms of delxvyu and Chern 130
Remarks on Paradigms 134
New Testament Verbs like Staci * 134
New Testament Verbs like Savy. é 134
A-stems . P ; 134
E-stems . ‘ é : ‘ ; ‘ ~ 135
O-stems 135
Exercise 14. On the Verbs in -u ee
Exercise 15. General, on the Verbs tivgin 2 Thess.) . 136
Exercise 16. Short Sentences 3 } 136
i. The Beatitudes . , ‘ ; : ‘ . 137
ii. Parts of John i. 5 . : . 188
iii. Selected Sentences : ‘ . . " . 139 CHAPTER VI.—PREPOSITIONS.
THE THREE CASES: general relations of place, &e. 140 Prepositions extend these relations indefinitely . 140 They may govern the Genitive, Dative, or mice one,
two, or all, . . 140
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE Gririves ONLY, ask and, ék (éé), mpd . 140
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE Dative onEy, &y, avy 141
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE ONLY, avd, eis. 141
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE, 8:d, Kard, etd, epi, imép, bro . ya
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE Genirrve, DArivz, AND Accu- SATIVE, él, mapd, mpds ; 142
Synoptical Table of the Prepositions ‘ 142
Note on the various meanings of the Prepositions. . 143
CHAPTER VII.—ADVERBS. ADVERES IN THEIR ORIGINAL Form, FROM SUBSTA)YTIVES . 144
ELYMOLOGY. : XX]
BECT. bth PAGE 126. (a) As an Accusative Noun, Adjective, or Pronoun. : . 144 (6) As a Dative ‘3 aS oe) ME (c) As a Genitive $ ys . . 144
(d) As a Preposition, with its Case . . ° wl Be . 144 (e) Old Case-endings in -Oey, -6:, and -8e . , ‘ - ° . 144 127. Adverbs from ADJECTIVES (in-ws) ° ves 6 146
128. Comparison of Adverbs . . : . 145 129. PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. Table, with Correlatives «he 46 130. NUMERAL ADVERBS (in -kis or -aeis ‘ : ‘ . . 147 131.. ADVERBS FROM VERBS ; 9 RE RT te MOON ch ae
Ancient verbal forms, dedpo, Seire : ‘ ‘ ‘ . » 147
Derivatives from Verbs in ifw. ; ‘ ; 2 ; . 147 132.. ADVERBS FROM PREPOSITIONS (or in -w) . ‘ ‘ . 147
133. PREPOSITIVE ADVERBS (‘‘ improper Prepositions’ , List. . 147 134.. NEGATIVE ADVERBS, od and wh . ‘ ‘ ‘ : : . 148
CHAPTER VIII.—CONJUNCTIONS AND PARTICLES.
135. Meaning of the word Particles . ; F , ; é . 150 36. Classification of Conjunctive Particles . ; ; ° ; . 150 1. Conjunctions of ANNEXATION . : ° ° , . 150
A xr CoMPARISON . ‘ - . . - 150 3. pi DISJUNCTION . é ; . 5, a ee 4, eS ANTITHESIS P é P ° ‘ . 151 5. ah ConDITION ‘ % . . ‘ ars 43 | 6. rn CAUSE ; - = “ ° . » Idi 7. EF, INFERENCE ; : 4 : + SO) 8. INTENTION or ati ‘ ‘ ‘ 2 ESE
137. (a) Particles of Empuasis, yé, 5, “TED, TOL é P ‘ «' 16) (b) Particles of INreRROGATION, el, 4, dpa . ‘ é : « 151
138. INTERJECTIONS . ‘ ‘ : . , ‘ . 152 (a) Natural instinctive sites, K : ‘ : . 152
(6) The Interjection te, idod! behold ! . : ‘ : . 152
3 CHAPTER IX.—ON THE FORMATION OF WORDS. [Chapters IX., X., XL, XIL., may be omitted in the first reading of the book.]
139. 1. ROOTS, with primary, pacusais &c., formations . wi!) set ae 2. Classes of Words . ‘ y 3 Pip 8%: _ 8. Modification of Stem- endings : . ‘ A r ‘ . 154
XXxil ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS,
SECT. 140. Classes of SUBSTANTIVES . . ‘ - 5 . : . 154 (a) First Declension . ; ‘ : * ‘ : : . 154
1. Masculine, in -r7s ‘ z - . " : . 154 2. Feminine, in -fa, -oodvn 5 x ‘i ; . . 154 (b) Second Declension . . ti tianee mecha as 3. 1. Masculine, in -yos > ; : . 154 2. Neuter, in -rpov, -foy (- alee £3.07) ‘ é See | 3. Masculine and Feminine Acar -ioKos, [oKn . 155 (c) Third Declension ; ‘ . ; : : . 155" 1. Masculine, -eds, tip, Twp. ; . ‘ ‘: . 155 2. Feminine, -cis, -rys_.. : ‘ < ; : . 155 3. Neuter, -ua,-os . . 156
141. Scheme of Terminations of Derivative Nouns. . 156 142. Classes of ADJECTIVES. ; : : ‘ ‘ : : . 157 1. First Form. ; A ; oe oe . ‘ é - 157
(a) In -tos (-fa), -sov . ; . : = . ; . 157 (h) In -cxds, -f, -ov . : ’ : ‘ ‘ . . 157 (c) In -twos, -ivy, -wov : : ; : ; . . 157
(So -eus, contr., -ovs, -ovvy) . : : ; . 157 (d) In -pds, -pd, pov . : : , : ; > . 157
(ec) In -(c)mos, -ov . : ‘ : . ; : . 158 (f) Verbals in -ros and -réos_. , ‘ ° : . 158 2. Second and Third Forms . ; : . 4 . 158 (a) In -hs, -és . ; ; A 3 ; oi itine . 158
(b) In -pwv, -yoy ; . 158 143. Scheme of Terminations of Derivative Adjectives. 158 144. Classes of VERBS. : : . 159 (a) Verbs from subst. or adj. rong (« deneminalns® (pe . 159 Their principal terminations. . 159 (b) Verbs from verbal stems (‘‘ lates eee F Seqneavbabines” (or emphatic), ‘‘ Causatives,” &c. : ‘ ; . 159 145. General remark on Derivation . . arte e i eiy
CHAPTER X.—ON THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS.
146. “ Parathetic” and ‘‘ Synthetic” ae ag ys ‘ ; ‘ . 161
147. PaRATHETIC COMPOUNDS .. je ee The former element a Particle 5 » em
(a) Significance of the Preposition in : Compoaition ; . 162
(b) ys Adverbs 5 . 162
(c) ve Inseparable Particles i in Compisiiioit 163
(a, Compound Nouns and Adjectives generally from Verbs) . 163
ETYMOLOGY. XXill
° PAG
hae (b, ¢, Adverbs and Inseparable Particles not found with Verbs,
except @-) . 4 A P - ; ° . 163
(d, Combination of Puspesstinns) ; ; ‘ ‘ é . 163
148. SynrHETIC CompounDs : : : : ; . 163
The former element a Noun or Verb ; ‘ ‘ ‘ . 163
Connective vowels -o-, -i- . : ‘ ; . 164
Compound Verbs usually from Conipousid Nouns ; . . 164
The chief significance, in the latter element . ‘ et hee me
Illustrations . . 164
149. Derivation and Composition illustrated by the Viste: tions and Combinations in the New Testament of the root xpt-, verbal stem, xpw-, to separate, tojudge . é ° . 164
CHAPTER XL—FOREIGN WORDS IN NEW TESTAMENT
GREEK.
1so. Languages of Palestine: Hesprew . é . 167. What was the ‘‘ Hebrew tongue” in New Peatanient tinea 2 167 Questicn as to St. Matthew’s Gospel : P ; ; . 167
151. The introduction of GREEK . : : A ‘ i . 167 Various influences contributing to this : ° : ‘ . 167
Greek the usual language of our Lord. ‘ : : . 168
The Dialect of Galilee. i , : ‘ . 168
Difference of New Testament writers in wets ; ; . 168
152. Infusion of Latin : é ¥ . ‘ : . 168 Influences contributory to ‘i ; : R ‘ : . 168
Classes of words derived from Latin é : : . 168
153. Aramaic (Hebrew) Words and Phrases : ‘ . 169 (a) Assimilated words . ‘ ; ‘ é ° : . 169
(b) Indeclinable words . . ‘ ‘ ‘ ; . 169
l. Proper Names. ° ‘ . : . . « 469
2. Common Nouns . * 5 ‘ ' 3 R . 170
3. Special Phrases . ; ; . . ‘ P . 170
154. Latin Words ; : ‘ ‘ ‘ é . ; ea Wy g | (a) Names of Coins. - ‘ . : ‘ ¢ «AE
(6) Judicial terms . ‘ é ‘ : : ‘ $ ehh (c) Military terms . é ; é é ; F ogee (d) Political terms . : é : ° ° . , s Vix (e) Articles of Dress : $ & 4 . ‘ . oe (f) General terms . ° ‘ ° é . Z ‘ «
XXIV ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
| CHAPTER XII.—NEW TESTAMENT PROPER NAMES.
SECT. PAGR i55. These Names from the three Secsadannset prog ora XI.) . ; : 173 156. Heprew NAMEs . ; ‘ : . 178 (a) Indeclinable Hebrew toons : : ; 4 3 . 173
(4) Indeclinable and assimilated . ) : : . 173
(c) Assimilated, Hebrew, -ah ; Greek, -as . : ; . 174 (d) Later forms, Hebrew, -a ; Greek, -as : ; ‘ . 174
157. DousLE NaMEs . ‘ - agtigess . 174 (a) Greek the translation ‘al the deen . . ‘ ‘ ° . 174
(bd) ua vocal imitation 5 é ; 4 n . 174
(c) Name and Surname . , e f : . 174
‘1. The latter being therasterintic : z . ° . 174
2. - patronymic ; , ; : . 174
3. Pe local . . : . 174
(d) Different names of the same man among ce ews aaa Giseks . 174
158. GREEK NAMES . ; ‘ : . ; . 175
(a) Pure Oreck“ The. oven” : . . : : . 175 (b) Contracted forms ; " : ‘ R : é . 175
159. LATIN NAMES . ; . ‘ . . . . . 176 (a) In connexion with ome : : ‘ . . ; . 176 (b) Names of the Emperors . : ; ‘ ; 2 . 176 (c) The name of ‘‘ Paul” : ‘ ; : . 176
(d) Contractions, ‘* Luke,” « Silas, ¥ > &o, : ‘ > ° ; a%6
tie es Ea a I:
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER 1.—CONSTRUCTION OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
161. The SenrENCE—as consisting of Propositions . : : vage 162. The Propostrion—Subject and Predicate . i é ‘ rae | 163. The SupyEect—a Substantive or its equivalent . : : ie
164. The PrepicaTE—a Substantive, Adjective, or equivalent . . 177 165. The CopuLa—a tense of the verb ‘‘tobe”. . oy arene 166. Omission of the Copula . F ° ‘ , . : . 178 167, The VERBAL PREDICATE _ . ‘ . ° Pet te Ys
168. The Substantive verb as Dadiinats’ , ; . ‘ see
SECT
169.
170. 17I. 172.
193; 174. 175.
176. 177:
178.
179.
180. 181. 182. 183. 184. 185. 186. 187. 188. 189. 190. IgI. 192.
193. BOA. 195. 196. 197: 198. 199. 200.
SYNTAX.
Omission of the Pronominal Subject Its insertiou for emphasis. Examples .
Omitted in third person plural, ‘generalized siebantion"
Omitted in third person singular, ‘‘impersonals” The Nominative the case of the Subject THE FIRST CONCORD
Exceptions, (1) Neuter plural Nominative with nisiailna Ver b
Variations in this idiom, a, b, c, d
(2) ‘* Rational Convard, ” Collective singular Sidsieet
with plural Verb, a, } Combined Nominatives, a, b. Agreement of substantival Predicate swith the Subiack: Law of Apposition. : Agreement of adjective Predicate wiki the Sadie THE SECOND CONCORD . ‘
‘* Rational Concord,” (1) Collective ciao Subjocs with
plural Adjective
(2) Masculine or Feminine Sisbient wil piace! pe cnen:
Rule for Copulative Verbs ‘ ‘ Complements of the simple Sentence . :
Extension of the Subject ‘ 3 Substantival Predicate. eh Adjective-Predicate a Verbal Predicate.
Accessory Clauses Co-ordinate . Subordinate . ‘ Methods of jubteducing caleedtaate Banton Difficulties in the resolution of Sautausbe--dllumeaiad P Rule for the resolution of Compound Sentences ‘ .
CHAPTER II.—THE ARTICLE. Construction of the Article .
Employed with Substantives; by the Seound Gianoads : Originally a Demonstrative Pronoun 3 . Shown by its often standing alone . ° By its being followed by a Genitive Or by a Preposition and its Case ‘ . By its construction with Adverbs. :
The Article with ADJECTIVES . ‘ F With PARTICIPLES ‘ Often equivalent to a Hilativs and Verb .
XXV1
SECT. 201.
202. (203. 204.
205. 206. 207. 208. (209.
210. ©
211. 212.
213.
214. 215.
216. 217.
218. 219.
220.
22I. 222. 223. 224. 225. 226. 227.
228.
229.
230.
ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
With the InFrnirTIve, in all the Cases . ; : ‘ 192 Note on the verbal in ing (Lat., gerund) - “ 192
With Purases oR SENTENCES . ; j : : 192 With Pronouns. (See $220) . > P : : . 193 Substantivized Words or Phrases . -. 193 Significance of the Article: its babaniont or omission . 193 The Article strictly definite . é : ; . é . +193 The Article marks the Subject . ; : ‘ : . 194 Definition of the Predicate by the ‘Article : 194 (The Article may be omitted before words Steady defined). 195 Use of the Article with Monadic Substantives : 4 195 For individual emphasis : A ; : : ‘ 195
In collective expressions . . 196
To make renewed mention 197 (This sometimes implicit) 197
Passages where the Article, omitted in our Version, orl be
supplied from the original es ° . . 200 The Article with ABSTRACT Susicianclives.* a, ne ce 200 The Article as an UNEMPHATIC POSSESSIVE. . 5 201 The Article with PRoPpER NAMES : “ é ‘ . . 201
With the Divine Names. ° Sey é , 202
(a) @ceds, God . ‘ ‘ : ; 5 ° ‘ 202
(b) Kupios, Lord : “| é : . ° 202
(c) vis @cod, Son of God . : 204
(d) "Incods, Jesus. ; : 5 P : 204
(e) Xpiords, Anointed, Christ ‘ ; : ; : 205
(f) Mvetpa (&yiov), Holy Spirit . 206 Monadic Nouns (as Proper Names) without the Article : 207 Prepositional Phrases without the Article . ° . . 207 The Article with DeEMoNSTRATIVE PRoNoUNS . . . . 208
Omitted with ¢xarros, tocotros ; ° ‘ oe eee - 208
The Article with airds, the same . ; ° . ° ; 209 With PossEsstv—E Pronouns : ° ° ° ; 209 With was, wayres, all . . ‘ : A 3 - 209 With 8dos, whole . ; ‘ a = : a 211 With &aAdros, erepos, other : ‘ ° 4 : 211 With moav, much ; moddvl, many . . . : . 212 With the Nominative for Vocative 213
The Article separated from its Substantive by qualifying words 213
(a) A Preposition with its Case . . ° . ° (6) An Adverb. : ‘ ° . Repeated after its Substantive for oneal ‘ é . ; (5) Sometimes where no Article precedes . ° . °
SECT. 231. 232
233> 234.
235.
236. 237+ 238. 239 240.
241. 24.2
243.
244. 24.5. 246. 247 248.
24.9-
250. 251. 252.
SYNTAX.
The Article with PARTICIPLES . ‘ . ° .
The Article in Enumerations ; ‘ ° © 4epe (a) Combined Enumeration . ° ° . . (b) Separate Enumeration . . .
The Omission of the Article marks Tadelintioneen’ The Article with véuos, law—illustrations . é ‘
CHAPTER III.—THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE.
NUMBER. Singular and Plural weet as in other langage Singular Nouns for a whole class . ‘ Nouns predicated of several individuals (as capa, ‘kapdia) Abstract Substantives in the Plural . The Plural, by a speaker of himself Plural to denote a single agent or object (a) As viewing it in iés constituent parts . (>) As generalizing the statement, (1), "7
CASE ° ; ‘ ‘ ‘ Tue NoMINATIVE AND Voorn ° é ‘ ° Nominative as Subject and Predicate . ; ‘ °
The Suspended Nominative . ‘ ‘ ; . ° The Elliptical Nominative . , ‘ ‘ ; : (a) After es behold (b) 4, OSvoua, name . . * (c) The phrase, 6 dv kal 6 jv ii 6 Biciaiias . .
Nominative for Vocative: an elliptical usage . .
The Vocative, with and without @
THE GENITIVE . P ‘ ‘ ° ‘ °
Primarily signifying motion ‘from é ‘ : ‘ é Moditications, 1—7 i i : .
I. Genitive of origin ; i
After Substautives, to Sandte the ingrid! or nithor After Verbs of sense, or mental affeetion (1) Of sense, as hearing, taste, touch (2) Of affection, as desire, caring for, despising (3) Of remembrance and forgetting . After Verbs of accusation, condemnation, &c.
After Verbs and Adjectives of plenty, want, -fiibuse’: kee.
II. Genitive of separation or ablation. After Verbs of separation, removal, hindrance, &e,
XX Vil
PAGE « 2S - 215 . 215 . 216 - O17 OFF
xxviii. ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT. , PAGE
253. ' Genitive of comparison. s ete gt Ai alps y . 229 (1) After Verbs .. . . . 229
(2) After Adjectives in the Comparative Degree : . 230
254. III. Genitive of Possession . 3 % . 230 After Substantives, ‘‘ the Possessive Case” ° ; . 230
255. The Genitive Personal Pronouns so aiea : a . 231 256. Words of kindred, &c., omitted before Possessive, 1—-7 231 2.57. Attributive Possessive Genitive . é : ‘ . 232 258. Special Possessive phrases. A 4 3 ‘ ose 259. The Genitive of Apposition . , A - : . 233 260. PosITION OF THE GENITIVE 4 s . 233
(a) Generally after the governing S Substatiiive : . 233 (b) Instances where the Genitive precedes. ; . 234
Sere. 1V..enitive of Partition .« 609 6). oe AS ae 262. After Partitive Adjectives . ‘ 4 . 3 ; . 234 Pronouns. . ; : . . ° ‘ . 235
Numerals . F : oe : ; . . 235
Superlatives . ‘ ‘ ‘ : ; ‘ ; . 235
263. After Verbs of partaking ; é , 235 264. After Verbs of taking hold of, pinion: hoe : ; . 235 Different usage of Active and Middle . ‘ ’ . 235
265. After Adverbs of time . : ; . ¢ : . 236 266. Partitive Phrases of Time or Place ; ‘ ; : . 236 257. Partitive Genitive after Verb, tobe . < " P » "236 268. V. Genitive of Object. « 237 May be expressed by various Praranieeies ; ‘ihistrations . 237
269. Phrases that may be Possessive or ee . é . 238 270. VI. Genitive of Relation . 4 . 229 In respect of, as shown by the semictahis Whastestious ‘ . 239
271. After Adjectives, generally . ‘ . 240 272. Specially after Adjectives of wor ohinideia fitness, &e. : . 240 273.. Genitive of price, penalty, &. . : . 240 274. Genitives of different relations with ¢he same Substantive . 241 275. VII. The Genitive Absolute : : 3 P ‘ . 241 Originally causal . : : : ‘ ‘ ° . 241
THE Dative. ; ‘ 242
276. Primarily signifying juctanciiiten ‘ d : ‘ . 242 Modifications, 1—4 . * é ; é ; : . 242
277. I. Dative of Association ; ‘ , J ° 3 . 242 (a) After Verbs of intercourse, companionship, &c. : . 242
(b) After Verbs and Adjectives of likeness, fitness, &e. . . 242
(c) After the Substantive Verb: to express property . . 242
Verb sometimes omitted 5 ; ‘ : . 242
SYNTAX. Xxix
SECT. PAGE 278. IL Dative of Transmission . ee Maas (a) After Verbs of giving Gndliwet Object) . 3 ‘ . 243
(b) i information, command, &e. . ; . 244
(c) = succour, assistance, Ke. . ; . 244
(d) se mental affection, obedience, faith 3 . 244 Distinction from Genitive . : é ; . . 244
279. III. Dative of Reference : : . 245 May be expressed in English by jor (oF sgidoety s . 245
280. LV. Dative of Accessory Circumstance . ... . 246 (a) Expressing the modes of an action . ‘ . 246
(6) Sometimes repeating the notion of the Verb (Habkeistn)., 246
(c) Dative of cause or motive : ‘ : F d . 246
(d) if instrument ‘ ‘ ; F ‘ 3 . 247
Dative after xpdoua, to use . . : 3 . 247
(ec) Dative of agent (rare) . ‘ . 247
(f) 5 sphere, that in which a quality Poa es ‘ . 248
(9) PS Time ; ‘ ‘ . 249
(1) A space of time: for ‘ ‘ ‘ : i . 249 (2) A point of time: at, on , ‘ 4 ; . 249
281. THe ACCUSATIVE “ : ‘ ‘ ; : . 249 Primarily signifying motion anand ‘ : : . 249 Hence used as the Object of Transitive Verbs : . 250
(a) Verbs intransitive in English, transitive in Greek . . 250 (b) The same Verbs sometimes transitive and intransitive . 250 (c) Especially those denoting faculty . ; ‘ . 250 (dq) The direct Object omitted after certain Ver a : . 251 282. The internal Object of Verbs, or ‘‘ ene Accusative”’ ; » 251 283. Accusative of Definition . . ‘ ‘ : ; » 252 Dative of Accessory more common . ; . 252 284. The Double Accusative, ‘‘ nearer” and ‘‘remoter Object” : . 252 285. The Accusative as Subject of Infinitive Verbs. eon OR To be rendered as Nominative with thaé . . 253 Generally different from the Subject of the winced Veeb . 253 Accusative with the substantivized Infinitive . ‘ . 253
286. Accusative of Time and Space . ; ‘ , ; . 254 (a) Space: Distance . ; . P ; ‘ : . 254
(b) Time: (1) a Point; (2) Duration ; or (3) Succession . 254
287. The Accusative in Hiliptical, or unusual constructions . : . 255 288. THE CASES WITH PREPOSITIONS . ; . 255 Two elements to be considered, the Preposition and the Case . 255 Variety of combinations hence resulting . "ae . 255
229. Interchangeable Prepositions : not identical . ‘ . ‘ . 256 290. Note on the correspondence of words in different languages . » 256
XXX
SECT. 290. 291. 292. 293-
294.
295.
296.
297+
298.
299.
300.
301.
ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE ONLY . - ° . 257 ayrl, over against: opposition as an equivalent . : é . 257 _ Hence, instead of, for ; adverbial phrase, av@ dy . ‘ . 257 amd, from the exterior . ‘ . 258 Hence, (1) from; (2) of; (3) on anus he O elliptical use ; (5) use with Adverbs . j . . 258 éx, ef, from the interior ‘ eee : ; 5 . 259 Hence, (1) out of; (2) Wiis (3) by; (4) made of; (5) belonging to; (6) springing from ; (7) temporal use . 259 mpd, in frout of . j : . 260
Hence, before in (1) Bini: : (2) plates (3) depres : . . 260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE ONLY. " 4 : - 260
év, in . : . 261 Hence, (1) in, of aces (2) saieads (3) "eethe ev of in- vestiture ;’’ (4) in ‘‘the sphere ;” (5) special uses, by; (6) aerathisl phrases; (7) ersten: use; (8) ‘*‘constructio pregnans” . . . ; . . 261 abv, in conjunction with (co- ciperibints : $ A . . 263 Hence, with, together with (beside) : ; _" ‘ . 263 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE ONLY . ° . . 264 dvd, up to, up by . ‘ ‘ . 264 Only in special phrakea’ in the Nev ew ‘Dekariant ‘ ; . 264 eis, to the interior . : : ; . 264 Hence (1) of place, inte (2) anid; to; (3) ase: against ; (4) in order to, for; (5) into, a state; (6) for, as, of equivalence ; (7) ms time, during, or up to; (8) ‘‘con- structio pregnans” ‘ © : , . 264 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE AND " ACCUSATIVE ‘ . 268 bid, through . ‘ . . 268 a, Genitive: (1) dirough of lacs ; ; (2) of agency : . of time, during or after . : . : . 268 'B. Accusative: on accountof . . . « « + 269 kard. down . : ; ‘ : . : P : ‘ - 270 a. Genitive: (1) down from; (2) set r (3) by; (4) throughout, as Accusative . 270 B. Accusative: (1) throughout; (2) over agatust:: (3) it the time of; (4) distributive use; (5) according to; (6) adverbial phrases . . . ‘ . : . » 271 uerd, in association with ‘ y . . 272 a. Genitive: (1) with, among ; (2) together with; ; * (3) with and on behalf of” . : ° . . é ‘ . 272 B. Accusative: after (beyond) . é . ° : . 273 mepl, around . ° . . ° ° , : . » 273
SECT.
302.
393-
304.
$25»
306.
397+
308. 309. 310. 311. 312.
313. 314.
a.
B.
imép, over . , . ° ° Genitive: (1) ’on zs: of; @) few the sabe of:
a
B. Accusative : beyond; ice imo, under . . a. Genitive : by of the Agent B. Accusative: (1) under; (2) close upon
SYNTAX.
Genitive: about, concerning
Accusative: (1) around; (2) about, of time; (3) about,
in reference to
reference to
"(8) in in
XxXx1
PAGE
» 273
« 277
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIY2, ae AND Aseouiatrs 277 eri, Wpon Ganiives (1) 0 on, of bekidts ; (2) over, viel dapebtabenldeiien: $
(3) upon, fig.; (4) oeone 7 (5) im the time of ; (6) ‘‘ con-
a,
B.
Y:
structio preegnans”’
- 277
Dative: (1) on, of basis ; (2) one of nti niéeistandeaie ; (6) **constructio
(3) upon, fig.; (5) in addition to;
preegnans”’
Accusative: (1) wpon, motion implied ; (2) over; (3) to (for, against); (4) with regard to; (5) up to, of quantity ;
(6) during, of time. °
mapa, beside .
a. Genitive: from, of eclidul only
Dative : (1) with, near ; (2) in the esteem or sehbe st
La
B. y. Accusative : (1) by, near ; hs sy mi to ; (3) above; consequence . . é mpés, towards. ‘ ° ‘ : a, Genitive: conducive to. .
B. Dative: near .
y. Accusative: (1) to
On THE INTERCHANGE OF CERTAIN Piaroerne’ Mutual approach in meaning ;. real distinction
estimate ; (5) intdwtion
Interchange of dia with éx, dad, év (eis, emi, nard) . Interchange of é« and amd
9°
» 99
9?
év and the simple Dative
cis with mpds, ert and Dative (also &)
Note on 2 Cor. iv. 17 wept with did and brép
o
. 279
. 280 . 282 . 282 . 282
(4)
. 282
. 283 . 283 . 283
: (2) with s 5 (8p isabel dimthinns : (4)
. 284
. 285 . 285 , 285 . 287 . 287 « 287
. 288 . 289
Repetition or otherwise of Prepositions governing ‘pevinia wont . 289
we
Xxxll_ ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
CHAPTER IV.—ADJECTIVES.
_ SECT. PAGE 315. ‘SECOND CONCORD, re-stated Ee Ee AEE 316. Omission of Substantives . . po SAE Wie as a Occasional ambiguities ‘ ah te 4 291 List of Substantives frequently caniabd. > 2 : 292 317. ‘*Rational Concord” in Number and Gender ‘ : ' . 292 318. Adjectives referring to several Substantives “. pe . 293 319. Adjectives in adverbial relations . ‘ ‘ . ‘ ; 294 The Degrees of igus taeiaria ‘ A ‘. é : 294 THE CoMPARATIVE : ‘ oe he , . 294 320. Followed by a Genitive of bien , : . ; ° . 294 321. Or by ?, than, as a Conjunction . ‘ ° 55) te . 295 Employed in special cases, 1, 2, 3 : : . 295 Omitted before Numerals after more, less . 295
(uaadov) } after the enmity: sometimes after a Subsiantivs or Verb . : . : ‘ : 296 322. Comparative strengthened by rep or ‘apis : s . ; . 296 Emphatic Comparatives, asin § 51... . : : 296 323- Comparative without expressed Object * é d ; . 296 (1) Where the context supplies it : : . . 296 (2) Where the Comparative is a familiar phrase . ; . 297 (3) Where the Object may be supplied ee E . 297 THE SUPERLATIVE. . ° ° . : . 298 324. General significance . : : : gp (ceil : : . 298 325. Emphatic Superlatives : . ‘ : : . 299 Followed by zévrwyr, preceded by ee re . ‘ . . 299 326. Use of xparos : ; ‘ STIG ‘ . 299 327. Hebraistic Superlatives : : ° 299 (1) By Preposition év after simple Adjective pi teg ‘ » 299 (2) By Adjective repeated in the Genitive . ; : 299 . Other so-called Hebraisms to be rejected . : . 299 Pine Mamerala:: i-) .:[<i.inh-ct eRe 300 328. Special uses of the Cardinal eis, one . ‘ . 300 (1) As an Indefinite Pronoun (Indefinite Article) . 300 (2) For the Correlatives, one... other . ° . 300 (3) Its proper Negative combined with the Predicate ‘ . 301 : (4) Ordinal first instead of it ; ; 5 > : . 301 329. Adverbial Particles-with Numerals. : . ‘ ‘ . 301 330. Omission of Names of Quantity after Numerals . ‘ : . 301 . The Ordinals in Enumerations , . : ; : ° . 302
SEcrT. 331- 332-
333-
334
335.
336.
337-
338. 339: 340.
341.
342.
ae 3°
344.
34.5 346.
347- 348. 349:
350.
SYNTAX. XXXIli
CHAPTER V.—THE PRONOUNS.
The Personal Pronouns . . . . . Subject to the rules for Substantives . . . ‘ ‘ Omission of Pronominal Subject . Possessive Genitive of Pronouns instead of the Aibjesiins
Possessive Adjective Pronoun instead of the Genitive . Redundant or repeated Personal Pronoun . ‘ Use of airdés, self, in apposition . ‘ : , As a Nominative, always coutintip ; : . [The reflexive éavrod for the Second Person . me éavt@v for First and Second] .
** Rational Concord,” with vbr ds—Gender—Number : The Possessive Pronouns ree ; P >
Their various uses exemplified . ‘ ‘ :
In apposition with a Genitive Substantive . ; . Unemphatic Possessive Pronouns by the Article . : ; Emphatic Possessive Pronouns by i8:0s, own : é ;
The Demonstrative Pronouns eto Aled al yy Use of od7os, this (near), and éxeivos, that . : 2 ; Use of 65¢, this (here) . : ‘ ; ‘ Exceptions to the ordinary use of. ouTos, Aeatbos a :
éxeivos, the Emphatic Demonstrative . °. A Emphatic (or redundant) Demonstrative Ootisbrassiina’ is Special uses of todro, Tatra . ° ° : °
The Relative Pronoun
Agreement of the Relative. THE T THIRD GONCORD
A clause as Neuter. Antecedent ** Rational Concord” with the Relativ et-@ snide Niner. Attraction (a) Udeubtion of the Ratstive to the Fiadioats (5) Attraction of the Relative to the Antecedent . Inverse Attraction (transposed Antecedent) . Demonstrative Antecedent omitted ‘ avtés complementary to the Relative (a Sfebraienn} : The Compound Relative, dcr:s, strictly Indefinite . : ‘ But also explicative, and logical . ‘ ‘ Used often with Proper Names 4 The Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns Various uses of the Interrogative, ris ; . ‘ i (1) Simply, with or without a Substantive . y . (2) Elliptically, as fa ri, why? . °
XXXIV ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
SECT. PAGE 350. (3) Adverbially, how / : ‘ 5 : ; . . 314 (4) In alternative questions . : : ‘ ‘ ; . 315
451. The Interrogative in indirect questions ‘ ¥ 5 . 815 352. Transition from the Interrogative to the Indefinite A é . 815 Uses of the Indefinite, tis . . " 2 . 316
(1) Simply, with or without a Substantive: ie > is eae - 316 (2) Emphaticaily, somebody ! ‘ : ‘ ‘ . 316
(3) As ‘‘akind of” . : ‘ ‘ ; . 317 (4) ‘*Some” approximately with diambers ; : . . 317 (5) In alternative expressions. . ° ° . 317
[Negatives of tis, i.¢., ovdels, ynBels] “ : ~ OL7
CHAPTER VI.—THE VERB.
VOICE . : . . . ‘ . 318
353. Voice: the distinction i in form aaa Donikeauns . : e . 318 354. THE Active VoIcE . . m ; ‘ < : . 318 . Intransitives used as iPphrinthisnen ‘ " ; . 318 Variations in meaning Seoporsling to form (lori). ; . 319
Special use of Exw . ° . . , : . 319
355. THE MIDDLE VoIceE ; its three senses . . . - . . 319 ' 1. Reflexive (the ‘‘ Accusative Middle”) . oa . 819
But Pronouns generally employed with rye ‘ . 319
2. Appropriative (the ‘‘Dative Middle”) . , ; . 320
The direct Object of the Active retained , , . 320
3. Causative (nearly resembling the Passive) E : . 321
This meaning sometimes becomes reciprocal . : . 321 356. Tue PASSIVE VOICE . ‘ - ee Its Subject. The primary or ¢ acindnc Object of the ative 322
(In the latter case, the primary Object remains in the Acc.) 322
357 Agent after Passive Verbs . ‘ ws th eee 358. Frequent difficulty of distinguishing Papier’ and Middle . 322 THE MOODS AND TENSES . ° : > . 323
359. Significance of the Moods . : . 323 The Indicative—Declarative avd Interrogatixe > . 324
360. The Zenses. The six employed (the, three others essential to completeness) ‘‘ Historical’ and ‘‘ principal” Tenses . 324 361. THe Present TENSE . * ; ° . . . 324 General meaning, and lavicetiona.. s 5 . 4 . 324 (a) A state as now existing, a process , . ° . . 324 (6) An habitual or usual act . ° . : o -» 325
SECT. 361.
362.
363.
364.
365.
366.
367. 368.
369- 370-
372.
SYNTAX. XXXV
' PAGE (c) Past time, in vivid narration (the Historical Present) . 325 (ad) Certain futurity . : . ‘ P < A . 325
THE IMPERFECT TENSE. : : : ‘ ° . 326 General meaning, with listeationd ‘ . ‘ ‘ . 326 (a) An act unfinished at a past time . . d . . 326
(6) An act statedly repeated : ‘ ° . . 326
(c) To be distinguished from the Movies . . : . 326 (dz) An inchoative act . é ‘ 2 ‘ e r . 328 (e) The ‘‘ resolved Imperfect” . ° ; : ° . 328
THe Furure TENSE . . ‘ . ‘ ‘ . 329 General meaning, with Didivietonds ‘ ; . . . 329 (a) Indefinite futurity . ; ‘ : é . 329
(6) Command, especially in peokibitions . : : . 329 (c) General truths or maxims, ‘‘ Ethical Future” A . 329
(dZ) Future with od, uh (see § 377) ‘ ‘ A . 330
(ec) The ‘‘ resolved Future,” or Future Teapertooks ; . 330
(f) The Future Auxiliary, wéAdrAo. ; ‘ . 330
Use of @€Aw, to will, emphatic ; with Hixamplas : . 331
THe Aorist TENSES . : 4 , : . . . 331 General meaning, with Ties traticne: ‘ ‘ ‘ : . 331 (a) The absolutely past, ‘‘ Preterite” . ; . 331
Distinction between Aorist, Imperfect, ond Perfect . 331 (b) The Aorist, as Pluperfect . ‘ . : , . 332
(c) The ‘‘ Epistolary Aorist” ; . ° . 333
(d) Sometimes equivalent to our Present Ladiehive: , . 333
(ec) Marking the completeness of an act , ° . . 333
THe Prerrect TENSE . ‘ é ‘ ery : . 333 General meaning, and Whidira dons ; ; ; : . 333
(a) A completed action, or one whose cbuseannnges remain . 333
(5) Distinction between the Perfect and Aorist . ; . 334
THE PLuperRFecT TENSE . é wr « 334 Rare in the New Testament: an ait letiedied.; in the past . 334 The ‘‘ Perfect Present,” and ee deisnek Pluperfect . . 335
INTERROGATIVE Forms F : ° : . 335 With or without interrogative wats ‘ ‘ ° ‘ . 335 Elliptic questions . ‘ eae ; : : . 336
Peculiar forms of affirmative epty ‘ ‘ ‘ . : . 336 Negative questions ; : : : : » 336.
(a) With ot; (6) with pf; (c) euithe sbi ‘ ¥ ‘ . 337 The Imperative Mood . é ‘ é ‘ ‘ ‘Bae Used for command or entreaty : ‘ ‘ é ‘ . 337 uf its proper negative Adverb~ . . ‘ eg Greene Employed in simple permission é . : ‘ . - 338,
XXXVI ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS,
SECT. 373-
374 375- 376. 377-
378.
383.
384.
Tenses of the Imperative . 4 ; (a) The Present—generality, woabasias ranelebion ‘ (0) The Aorist—instantaneousness, completeness. (c) The Perfect (very rare) . ; Contrast between Present and Aartt Mestaated The Subjunctive Mood . : : : ; Always really dependent. Elliptical forms The Subjunctive in independent sentences 1. As a hortatory Imperative—First Person 2. As the Imperative in prohibitions . 3. In questioning or doubt, ‘‘ Deliberative Subjusctive 4 4, In strong denial (Aorist), with od, uA 5. For the Future Perfect (Aorist) : ‘ ; The Optative Mood . ; F , ‘ , Always really dependent . ‘ The Optative in independent sacibeaiien
1, To express a wish . ‘ So with uh (uh yévorro 1) : 2. With & for Potential . - .
Tue Moops In DEPENDENT CLAUSES. Different kinds of Subordinate Clauses . Mood and Tense in such Clauses r The Subjunctive after words enenennded with he
. OBsEcT SENTENCES . ° sees : 87: with the Indicative : ° . ° (a) Direct quotation: Pleonastic 8m: . ; ‘ : ‘
(b) Indirect quotation: ‘‘ Oratio obliqua” . ‘ ‘
(c) Indirect interrogation . Use of the Indicative, the Subinnetive, saa the Dinbative .
(d) Object and Objective Sentence after some Verbs . CoNDITIONAL SENTENCES . ; hake The ‘‘ Protasis” and ‘ koodiuie’?. ‘ , : Four forms of the Conditional Sentence ‘ ‘ ‘
a. The supposition of a fact (ei, Indicative) . ‘ 8. The supposition of a possibility (édy, eo y. Entire uncertainty («i, Optative) “ s
5. A condition unfulfilled (ei, Indicative ‘past a
Indicative past) . : ‘ : INTENTIONAL CLAUSES: expressive of purpose or ‘inten : The Intentional Particles (iva, dmws, wh) «x (a) With the Subjunctive, to express intention . oayte (Distinction between Intentional and Object Sentences) Does iva ever mean so that? ‘ ; ,
SECT,
384.
385.
386. 387-
388. 389.
390.
291. 392. 393-
394
SYNTAX. XXXVil
Passages relating to Scripture prophecy | ‘ The negative intentional particle . .
force .
PAGE
. 351
(2) With the Indicative Future (infrequent), conveytig emphasis
An apparent tadihites Piesont't in Tateutiuiat Senbanteu :
The Infinitive ee te Pou a
(a) Properly a Verbal Substantive : ° p : ‘ (b) Negative Adverbs with the Infinitive .
(c) The Infinitive governs the same cases as the Verb
Tenses of the Infinitive . : . ‘ Present, Aorist, Future, Perfect X . : Subject of the Infinitive (compare § 285) . ; ‘ The Infinitive as Subject (substantivized) The Infinitive as Object (a) After Verbs denoting fanaiiey, ‘me Siac ci &e. (6) To denote intention or result . ° ‘ 3 (1) After a Verb ‘ : ‘ j ; (2) After a Substantive . ‘ ° :
(3) After an Adjective . A : The Infinitive in oblique cases (as Lat., envasilt) : ‘ (a) Genitive, with rod . 3 . ‘ . :
(1) After Substantives ° ° . .
(2) After Verbs . ‘ A : ; .
(3) To express design . , . ° .
(0) Dative, with 7g, to express cause . é . (c) With Prepositions (tod, 7g, 7d) 5 ; : Illustrations : did, eis, év, werd, mpd, mpds, dvri.
Infinitive of result, with éare (so Indicative) . Infinitive as Imperative ‘ : ‘ . ‘
The Partistplées 0a) 200 4 eed
Properly verbal Adjectives . : . : ‘ ‘ Negatives with the Participles . . . Subject of a Participle (Genitive Absolute)...
PREDICATIVE uses of Participles . :
1. After the Substantive Verb: ‘* the veal ved Tenses”
2. Complementary to the verbal Predicate 3. Adjuncts to the verbal Predicate . x (a) Modal . : : ; . ‘ . (6) Temporal . é 4 (1) Contemporaneous (Presaiit Participle) (2) Preceding (Aorist Participle) . (3) Succeeding (Future Participle) . (c) Relations of cause, condition, &c. . ‘
352
XXXVili SECT. 394- 395:
396.
0
398. 399:
400.
40L.
402. 40}3-
404.
ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.
(d) Intensive (Hebraistic) :
A Predicative Participle may be modified “skye os .
ATTRIBUTIVE use of Participles
Epithetic (like Adjectives)
With the Article : like the peda tvs aad a Finite 7
The Temporal reference sometimes lost .
Usual force of the Present Tense Participles in broken constructions
Anacolouthon (compare § 412)
CHAPTER VII.—ADVERBS.
Their general use. Adverbial phrases (a) A Substantive seikh or vihthitat Preniaition (b) An Adjective. c) A Participle . ; (d) The combination of two aaa Adverbs as Prepositions (see § 133) Combinations of Adverbs The Negative Adverbs, od and ph. Combinations of Negatives . Comparison sometimes expressed as davis!
CHAPTER VIII.—CONJUNCTIONS.
Rule for words connected by Conjunctions . ; Conjunctions OF ANNEXATION: especially xal, and Special uses of raf ; ‘ (a) For rhetorical emphasis . (b) In the enumeration of particulars (with ae (c) Marking points of transition . (d) Explanatory: ‘‘ xa sasiertin (e) As Also, Even Frequently in Sonapasitebiani anda in ‘the rising cline 374 Conjunctions oF ANTITHESIS: especially aad, 5é 1. &AAd, but, marks opposition, interruption, transition (1) To throw emphasis on its clauses
(2) In the Apodosis of a Conditional Rentence, sith (3) After the interrogative, &AA’ H, except 2. 5€, but, unemphatic adversative
. 375 . 375
375 375
. 376
376
SECT.
404.
405.
406.
407.
408.
SYNTAX.
Often may be rendered, and, then, now, &e. .
kal... €, yea ... moreover . . ‘ ; F
Antithesis with péey...5€ . ‘ é wév occasionally without 5é (three anc) , : Tue Dissuncrives: especially 4, etre. 5 h ...H. Hrow... R, etre... etre . : ° }} nal, or even; % ‘‘interrogative” THE INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS : especially Hoi me: Their distinction. Slighter meanings . Other Inferential Particles . , THE CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS: especially phe (a) Relative Conjunctions, as 671, because (6) The Demonstrative Causal ydp, for Introduces a direct reason . , ‘ Or the reason of some fact implied (c) Sometimes refers to a suggested thought (d) The combination xal ydp, its two senses . ‘ ASYNDETON : or the omission of Conjunctions . : (a) Of the Copulative . ; : , ‘ . (6) Of nal, Epexegetic . ‘ ‘ ° ° , (c) Of the Antithetic . ; ; ‘ “ : (d) Of the Causal Particle . P ‘ : ‘
CHAPTER IX.—ON SOME PECULIARITIES IN THE STRUCTURE
409.
410.
41t.
412.
OF SENTENCES.
The ARRANGEMENT of Words (a) General rules . (6, c) Emphasis gained by varie of sernsuacnet
SPECIAL FORMS OF ELLIpsis ‘ . ‘ : 3 1. Aposiopesis 2. Zeugma , 3. Inartificial Saitacakicn of Clauses
APPARENT REDUNDANCY . 4 :
(a) For special emphasis ; frenumaily ; in three wis :
(b) Object and Object-sentence tie § 382) . ANACOLOUTHON , ‘ : (Not to be linstily nee. : : (a) Transition from indirect to direct speech (6) Transition trom a Participle to a Finite Verb
(c) Nominative Participles standing alone (see § 397) .
(zd) A sudden change of structure B ‘ ‘
. 382 . 382 . 382. » 383 . 383 . 383
xl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS,
. PAGE ak. (ec) The non-completion of a Compound, Sentence ‘ . 385 413. ATTENTION To SounD AND RuyTHM. . . . .~ . 886 (a) Paronomasia . : . ; - ; ‘ . . 386
Simple alliteration . : . 386
Alliteration associated with Sista sini ° . 386
(6) Parallelisms, after the manner of Hebrew . : . 386
Christian hymns x ‘ . 387
Rhythmic constructions in eslongtes of phan casiniben 387
“‘Chiasmus” . . 387
(c) (1) Quotations of Greek Seidbey i in the Mave Petacwenk . 388 (2) Metrical lines apparently unconsciously introduced . 388
ANALYTICAL EXERCISE ON 2 THESS. . - ; é x ‘ . 389 On somE New TESTAMENT SYNONYMS ; ‘ ; A > . 403 Introductory Remarks : ‘ ° ° . ; . 403
List of Words illustrated . ; - i : 4 . 405
I. Verbs in ordinary use , ‘. : ; . 408
II. Words chiefly expressive of cal epee ‘ . : . 412
IIL. Theological and Ecclesiastical words . . : ‘ . 415
IV. Miscellaneous . . , ° ° . . . . 419 VOCABULARY . ° Be hte ° eine ees" » I—143
PR. ORTHOGRAPHY.
1. The Greek Alphabet contains ey -four letters, arranged and named as follows :—
Name. Capital. Small, Sound. Numerical value. Alpha A a. a 1 Beta B B or 6 b 2 Gamma Tr y sometimes 52 g (hard) 3 Delta A 8 d 4 Epsilon 1D) € € (short) 5 Zeta Z Cor & 7 Eta H y é (long) 8 Theta (0) 0 or 3 th 9 Tota I t t 10 Kappa K K k 20 Lambda A r i 30 Mu M Me m 40 Nu N v n 50 Xi 5 & x 60 Omicron O 0 © (short) 70 Pi Il qr sometimes @ Dp 80 Rho r pre i 100 Sigma = g final g 8 200 Tau £4 T sometimes 7 t 300 Upsilon YT v u 400 Phi ® ob ph 500 Chi xX Xx ch (guttural) 600 Psi Y y ps _ 700 Oméga Q @ O (long) 800
2 «3° NOTES @N. THE ALP{EABET—THE VOWELS. [§ 2.
} € ¢ ce es c(i e¢ a lve ©. et wév << -
2. Notes on THE ALPHABET.
a. The word Alphabet is derived from the names of the first two letters, alpha, beta. The forms of the Greek letters, which, it will be seen, greatly resemble those of our own language (the Roman letter), are originally modified from the Phoenician.
6. The second forms of certain letters are used interchangeably with the first, but less frequently. Those of gamma and taw are almost obsolete. The final s, besides being always employed at the end of words, is often used in the middle of compound terms when _ apart of the compound ends with sigma. Thus, mposdepo.
c. For an explanation of the numeral use of letters, and espe- cially of omissions in the list, see § 48.
3. THE VoweELs.
The vowels are a, €, 7, t, 0, %, @.
a. In this country they are generally pronounced according to the English sounds. The Continental pronunciation of a, 4, 4, is undoubtedly the more strictly correct ; but the matter is of little practical importance. Absolute conformity to the ancient mode is unattainable, and it is most convenient to adopt the method of pronunciation current among scholars of our own country.
H and » are long vowels. Care must be taken to distinguish them from the short « and o. Thus, pey is pronounced like the English men; pny, like mean. In ror, the o is pronounced as in on; in tov, aS in own; a, 1, v, may be either long or short.
b. The diphthongs are a, av, «1, ev, ot, ov, pronounced as in Eng- lish ; also G, 7, @ (or, with capitals, Ac, Hi, Q), where the t occurs with a long vowel, and is not pronounced, being, therefore, written underneath the vowel (excepting in the case of capitals), and called iota subscript. It will be important to note this in the declension of nouns and the conjugation of verbs.
Hv is pronounced like ev, ew; and u: like wi.
§3,¢.] THE VOWELS. 3
c. Every vowel, when standing as the first letter of a word, has what is called a breathing over it, written as an apostrophe, either turned outwards, as (”) or inwards, as (‘). The former is termed the soft breathing, and shows that the vowel is simply to have its own sound ; the latter the hard, and is equivalent to the English fh aspirated. To note the latter is most necessary for correct pro- nunciation. Thus 6, 7 must be pronounced ho, hé.
The initial v is always aspirated. So tmep, huper.
d. At the beginning of a word, the consonant (or semivowel) p always takes the aspirate, becoming rh. When two p’s come toge- ther in the middle of a word, the aspirate and soft breathing are successively employed. Thus feo, rhed ; appnros, arrhetos. When a word begins with a diphthong, the breathing is placed upon the second letter : airov, auton ; avrov, hauton.
e. In the lengthening of vowels for purposes of inflection or derivation, & becomes a, or more generally 4; ¢ becomes y, or a; i, 0, become respectively t, ¥; 0 becomes @, or ov.
J. Two vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, occurring together in different syllables are often contracted into one, according to the following Table :—
followed by ... a €
BO ..@ Gb Sb on Ot oe G; WEGOMECR eile BO UO! Oy Bo ENO VB w c € Si | soviacs! Qor ty Gh: OD ed.) MEE 9 OFT Oe Be 0 bes gee cage: @ OA Ok GU. ak ten OA OME a ca
The left perpendicular line in this table gives the former vowel in each combination, the upper horizontal line the latter, and the result of the contraction will easily be found. Thus eo gives ov; ae, long a; and so of the rest. It must be noted that where the letter o occurs in inflection between two short vowels, it is generally dropped, and contraction takes place according to the table.
* Or ov, when the e is the contraction of ec, as in the infinitive of verbs contract in o,
4 VOWELS— CONTRACTIONS —HIATUS. [S3,f
Té will be observed by inspection of the table that an o sound
always preponderates in contraction with the other vowels; that an
_ a sound, when first, prevails over an e sound following it, and vice versd.
Some special and exceptional methods of contraction will be found noticed in EryMoLoey.
Exercise 1—Vowel Contractions.
Write the contracted forms of tizaw, tipaeis, Tia, TYpaoper, Tiysacre, Pilew, pireeis, Gireer, Hireomerv, Hireere, Snow, SnyAoeis, Syroee, SnArooper, Sydoere, Gidrens, Tipaot, Onronre, voos, voov, yeveos, avdoa, dpea,
Baothees, petoa.
g. Dizresis is the opposite of contraction, and is expressed by two dots (“) over the second of two vowels which are to be sepa- rately pronounced. Thus Kaivay, Ca-t-nan, not Cai-nan.
h, Hiatus, and the ways of avoiding it.—The hiatus (¢.e. yawning) caused by the meeting of vowels at the end of one word and the beginning of the next is often prevented by one or other of the following ways :—
1. The vi eernvorixdy, or nu-suffixed. This v is added to datives plural ending in u, and to the third persons of verbs ending in € or +, when the following word begins with a vowel, or at the end of a sentence. ‘These words will be marked in declension and conju- gation by a bracketed (v) ; thus, aidou (v), exiorevoe (v). In a similar manner, ovra, péxpt, and dypt, as a rule adds when followed by a vowel. In the last two words, however, the New Testament text is not by any means uniform ; and on all three the best MSS. greatly differ.
The negative ob becomes odk when the next word begins with a vowel,* and the preposition é« becomes éé.
2. Llision marked by an apostrophe.—The following words lose their final vowel before an initial vowel in the next word: the
* Compare § 4 d, 6.
§3,/.] | VYOWELS—ELISION AND CRASIS—CONSONANTS. 5
prepositions dé, dud, émi, mapa, perd, and the conjunction addd ; with (occasionally) the participle dé and its negative compound ovd¢; also (before Sv) the preposition dvri. When the initial vowel is aspi- rated, +, r, become 9, @ (see § 4, b). Thus, drs airy becomes dn’ aitay, and dro éavrav, ad’ éavréy ; so for pera dddAndor, per’ GAA7jAa?, but for pera nudv, peO judy ; and for dyti dv, avO dy.
This elision was, in classical Greek poets, used much more fre- quently in words ending in a, e, 4 0; and hence, in one passage of the New Testament, in a poetical quotation, the adjective ypyord suffers this elision (1 Cor. xv. 33), ypno@” Guidia.
3. Crasis.—An hiatus is sometimes prevented by a Crasis (lit. a “mixing”), or the union of the two words; the vowels forming a long vowel, or diphthong. This takes place but rarely, and only when the former word is very short and closely connected with the latter. The breathing of the vowel in the second word is retained, to mark the fusion, and is then called a Coronis. Thus, for ra aird, the same things, ravra is sometimes written ; for cai ¢ya, and J, kay ; for 76 evavtiov, the contrary, rodvavriov ; and once for rd dyvopa, the name, rovvona (Matt. xxvii. 57).
4. Tur Consonants.
a. As in the orthography of other languages, the four con- sonants, A, pw, v, p, are termed iguids ; the nine consonants, 8, y, 3, 1, Kk, T, P, x, 9, are mutes.
b. The mutes may be evidently arranged according to the organs of speech specially concerned in their formation,
Thus, 7, 8, Q, are labials (p-sounds) ; Ky Vy Xs are gutturals (k-sounds) ;
T; 6, @, are dentals (t-sounds). Each of these divisions has, it is also plain, a sharp, flat, and aspirate consonant. Hence the highly important classification of the following Table :—
6 CONSONANTS. [8 4, 5.
Sharp. | Flat. | Aspirate.
Labials . . T a)
o p-sounds. Gutturals . k y x k-sounds, Dentals . 5 6 ¢-sounds.
_ The guttural y is pronounced, before a &-sound or ¢, like the nasal ng. Thus, dyyedos, ang-gelos (the second y, as always, being hard) ; dyxvpa, ang-kura.
c. = is the simple sibilant, which, in composition with a p-sound, gives =o, Bo, or oo; in composition with a k-sound gives é=xe, yo, xv; in composition with 8 gives (=e; these three, 6 & x, being double letters.
d. The following eight rules must be carefully observed, as they relate to the changes which are imposed by the necessities of orthography on the conjugation and declension of words, and will explain much hereafter that would otherwise be found very perplexing.
1. As above, a labial followed by o becomes ¥; a guttural followed by o becomes &.
2. A labial or guttural before a dental must be of the same order, i.e. must be changed, if not already so, into a sharp, flat, or aspirate, according to the nature of the dental.
3. A dental, followed by o, .disappears.
4. Before the letter u, a labial becomes wp; a guttural becomes 7; a dental becomes oc.
5. The letter vy becomes p before labials ; y before gutturals ; hefore a liquid is changed into the same liquid ; and before o or § is dropped.
The combination of v with a dental and the sibilant, as vro, becomes simply o, with compensation by the lengthening of the preceding vowel; « becoming «1, and 0, ov. Thus,
yryavtot becomes yryact; éAuivOor e éAuiot ; Tupeevtot 9 Tupeec: ; TUMTOVTOL = 99 TURTOVGL,
§4,d.] | CCMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 7
§. A sharp mute before an aspirated vowel is changed into the cor- responding aspirate. Sometimes this change will take place when the mute occurs at the end of one word, and the vowel at the beginning of the next. Thus, ad’ dv for am’ dv; odx dpaw for odx dpaw.
7. When two consecutive syllables of the same word begin with an aspirate, the former often loses its aspiration. Thus, @p:xos is changed into tptxos; and éxw into éxw. But affixes generally lose their aspi- ration in preference to the stem, whether they are placed first or last ; as Ti-Oe-71, for 6:-0¢-61, where the last syllable is a mere adjunct to the root.
8. No consonant can end a Greek word, except v, p, o, %, Y; the last two being compounds of s. The preposition 颫 before a consonant, and the negative adverb ob« before a vowel, are apparent exceptions; hut, having no accent, they may be counted as parts of the following words.
Exercise 2.—On the Combination of Consonants.
Rule 1. Write down the proper forms of ypadoet, ura, deyoor, exoo, orpepoets, TpiBcopuer, Neyoas, TEepmoov.
2. Of reidow, eAmidces, Gdcovres, dvuToet.
3. Of rerpiBrat, yeypaprat, AeAeyrat, BeBpeyrar, érpiBOnv, mrexOnvat, AeyOnva, emepmrOnv.
4. Of rerpiBya, yeypappat, BeBpexpat, memeOpat, qvuTpat, memAEKpat.
5. Of mavrodus, cuvpynut, cvvyvapun, cvvyaipa, auvtvyos, ovvotpa tiwtns ; also of mays, Avovrat, AvGevrouy.
5. CuHanceEs or Consonants.
Some other changes of consonants may be noticed, though they do not so invariably conform to general rules as the preceding.
1. Assimilation.—The labials a, B, @ before p, and v before the other liquids, are regularly assimilated to the following letters ; te. changed into the same letter (see § 4d, 5). Sometimes a latter consonant is assimilated to a former one; as, gdduue for GA-vupe.
2. Duplication. The letter p is regularly doubled when a vowel is placed before it. Thus, dro-pimrw becomes droppinro.
, 8 CONSONANT CHANGES—THE ACCENTS. ——-[§ 8,
Sometimes 4 is doubled, to compensate for the loss of a vowel ; as, #G\oy for padtor, dyyAAw for dyyeXeo. In comparatives and in verbs, eo or tr is sometimes put for a guttural x, y, x, with a fol- lowing vowel ; as, facor for’ jxov, rapdoow for rapayew. In some words, ¢ appears instead of oo : as peifor for peyor.
3. Transposition.—A_ vowel with a liquid is often transposed ; as, Ovnocxw for dav-cKeo.
4. Omission.—Any consonants which make a harsh sound may be omitted in the formation or inflexion of words.
5. Insertion.—Sometimes, though rarely, a consonant is inserted to assist the sound; as, from dvjp, gen. (dvepos, dv-pos) dvBpds; 80 avOporos is from dvjp ay, making ay-pwros, and, with @ inserted, avOpwros. !
6.. Tue Accents.
a. Every Greek word, except the proclitics and enclitics, which will be noticed under their respective parts of speech, has an accent expressed on one of its last three syllables. The accents are used in writing, but mostly disregarded in pronunciation. Their use was to mark a certain stress (or “rising” or “falling” inflexion) on the syllables where they are placed. It is said that they were invented by Greek grammarians, as a guide to foreigners in pro- nouncing the language. Some linguists of our own day have endeavoured to reinstate them as helps in this respect, but without much success.
b. The accents are the acute (’), the grave (‘), and the cir cumflex (* ).
The accent is marked upon a vowel, and in diphthongs upon the latter vowel ; as airés, ovrws. The acute and grave are placed after the breathing, and the circumflex over it; as és, odros. ‘The acute on the last syllable becomes grave, unless the word ends a sentence ; except ris the interrogative, which always keeps its acute. Every unaccented syllable is said to have the grave tone;
£6, 6.] THE ACCENTS. 9
but the grave accent is not marked, except where it stands for a final acute.
ce. Words are called, with reference to accent—Ozxytone (lit. sharp- toned), when the acute is on the last syllable, as édxis ; Paroaytone, when the acute is on the penultima (last but one), as otras ; Pro- paroxytone, when the acute is on the antepenultima (last but two), as gidwos,; Perispomenon (lit. drawn-out), when the circumflex is on the last syllable, as adrod ; Phoperigpomenont when the circum- flex is on the penultima, as odros. The circumflex cannot be farther back than the penultima.
If the last syllable of the word contains a ihe vowel, the acute accent must be on the last or last but one, the circumflex only on the last. Should, therefore, the final syllable of a proparoxytone be lengthened by declension, the accent is thrown forward, 7.¢. the word becomes paroxytone. Thus, dvOpamos, dvéporev. But if the final syllable of a properispomenon is lengthened, the accent is changed to the acute, ze. the word becomes paroxytone. Thus, AiBeprivos, AiBepriver.
It should be observed that the circumflex accent is always the result of contraction, t.e.of an acute and grave (’ ‘)—not of a grave and acute ( ‘’ )—as will be shown under Etymology.
d. Enclitics are words which merge their accent into the word immediately preceding, which are affected as follows :—A pro- paroxytone or properispomenon takes an acute accent on the last syllable also. Thus, dvéperés ris, ofkds rus. An oxytone that would otherwise (see above) take the grave accent retains the acute. Thus, paOnrns tis. Paroxytones and perispomena show no alteration.
e. Proclitics lose their accent in the words following. In an emphatic position, a proclitic becomes oxytone. Thus od witha verb is not; ot alone, no/ A proclitic followed by an enclitic is also oxytoned, as of ris. The two may be written as one word.
Special rules of accentuation will be given under the sections of Etymology. The learner is recommended to accentuate from the first, in writing Greek ; especially as the accent of very many words can only be known by acquaintance with the words themselves, and if neglected at first, will be extremely difficult to acquire afterwards.
10 ORTHOGRAPHY, GREEK AND ENGLISH. Be ie
7. On THE TRANSFERENCE OF GREEK Worpbs INTO ENGLISH.
Most proper names, and some few other words, are literally transcribed from the one language into the other. The medium of transference is almost always the Latin, and therefore the ortho- graphy conforms to Latin rules. For the most part, the Greek letters are represented by the equivalents given ($1). The fol- lowing exceptions must, however, be noted :—
« is always c¢, the letter & not being found in the usual Roman alphabet. Where the ¢ would be soft in ordinary English pro- nunciation, it is generally so in Greek names, as Kupnyn, Cyrene. In some words of infrequent use, good speakers sometimes deviate from this rule, saying, e.g. Akéldama, not Aséldama,
The vowel v is represented by y, as Supia, Syria.
The diphthong a. becomes @, as Kaicap, Cesar. Occasionally, the diphthong is made simply e; so, Atyymr(os), Lgypt; Tpvpawa, Tryphena.
‘The diphthong o becomes @&, as Soi8n, Phebe; sometimes, as above, only ¢: thus, Bowikn, Phenice.
The diphthong « becomes @ or 2, a8 Aaodixera, Laodicéa ; Ovdrepa, Thyatira: sometimes (in practice) %, as Bedevxera, Seleucia. But the 7 ought really to be long, or long e; so Attalia.
The diphthong ov appears as wu, aS Aovxas, Luke; or, before a vowel, as v, as, SiAovavds, Silvanus.
The initial I before a vowel becomes J, as Iovdas, Judas.
The initial P, always aspirated in Greek (§ 3,d), is generally without the aspirate in English. Thus, ‘PaS8i, Rabbi. But ‘Phyor, Rhegium ; *Pédn, Rhoda; and ‘Pédos, Rhodes, are exceptions, being original Greek words.
Changes in the terminations of these transferred words belong to Etymology. No rule can be given but usage why some should have their endings changed, while others are exactly transcribed. Occa- sionally, the same word appears in two forms. Thus, Marcus and Mark, Lucas and Luke. The learner is recommended to read carefully parts of the New Testament where many proper names occur, comparing the English with the Greek. No better portion for the purpose could
_ be found than Romans xvi.
§ 8.] PUNCTUATION—READING LESSONS. il
8. PuncrvaTIon.
Four marks of punctuation are used for the division of sentences ; the comma, the colon, the period, and the note of interrogation. The comma (, ) and the period (.) are like our own.
In modern typography, it is very usual not to begin new sentences with capital letters; reserving these for proper names, for the com- mencement of quotations, and for the beginning of paragraphs.
The colon (sometimes called semicolon) is expressed by a poiut above the line, thus (°).
Interrogation is marked by a sign, after the question, resembling our semicolon (; ). |
Inverted commas, as marks of quotation, are sometimes, though rarely, employed in printed Greek.
The Greek equivalent for &., e¢ cvtera, is in the initials x. +. X, for kai ra Nowra, and the rest.
The following sentence exhibits the different marks of punctu- ation (John, ix. 40) :—
Kal eimov aitd, Mi kal qyeis rupdoi eopev; elev adtois 6 "Inoois, Ei tuprol Are ovx dy elyetre duapriay’ viv b€ Néyere, “Ore Bderopev. 1) ovr dpaptia tpav pevec.
READING LESSONS. I. Acts ii. 1-13.
Write the following in Roman letters, carefully inserting the initial aspirate wherever it occurs, and discriminating between the long and the short o and e, as in Lesson III below :—
Kal év to ouptAnpodoba ryv* juepay ths Tevrynxoorijs,
2 Houv aravtes duoOvpaddv ént ro avtd.t Kal éyevetro adv éx TOD ovpavod jXos Somep hepouevns Tvons Biatas, Kal ésdz-
3 pwoev GAov tov olkov ob joav Kabjpevor. Kal SPOnoav avtois diauepiCouevar. yAGooat @oel Tupds, exabioet Te ef’
* According to what rule is the accent on the final syllable made grave? + Why does this accent remain acute ? ¢ Why has this word two accents ?
4 5
6
12
13
READING LESSONS. [§§ 1-8.
Eva €kacTov adtap,. i eadijoOnoay dmavres [Iveduaros “Ayiov, kal ipeavro Aadety érépats yAdooas, Kabas Td IIvedpa edid0v adiroits antopbéyyecOar. "“Hoay 8 ey ‘le- ‘\ n > a x b] a 3 \ povoadnu Katoixovyvtes lovdaior avipes evdAaBeis ard mav- A ” an € \ \ > / XN ~ we Tos €Ovovs T&v vTO TOV otpavdv. Tevouerns b& Tis Hovis TavTys, ovvnprOe 7d TAOS Kal ovvexvOn* drt ijKovoy els Exaotos TH idia biadext@ Aadotvtwyv abtév. “Egioravro dt mdvres kal eOadvpacov, A€yovtes mpds GAAHAOvs, Odx idov mavres obrol* eiow ot Aadodvres TadtAator; kal mds tueis P) /, eRe / ¢ nt > . eee / axovoumev Exactos TH idla diadextT@ Huav ev 7 eyevvnOnusy, Ildp00c kal Mydou xat ’Edapira, cat of Kxaroixodvres Thy
‘Mecororaplay, *lovialay te cal Karzadoxiay, [Idvtov kal
tiv ’Actav, Ppvylav te Kal Tlaydvdlav, Alyumrov, cal ra f Cal , 2 s K / , eS: | 5 a
Bépn THs AtBins ths Kata Kupyrynv, cal of émidnpotvres ‘Pawpaior, lovdato’* re cal mpoondvror, Kphres xal “ApaBes, dkxovowev AadotvTwy aitdy tals Huerépats yAdooas TA pe- yareia tod Ocod; “Eficravto 8@ mdvtes Kal dinmdpovr, GAXos pds GAAov A€yovres, Ti av Oédou Todro elvar; Erepor be xAevadorres EAeyou, “Ore yAevKovs peperTwpevor clot.
II. Romans iv. 1-16.
Read the following, carefully attending to the punctuation, which in this passage is marked with unusual decisiveness :—
2 5)
Ti ov épodpev ABpadp tov narépa judy. etipynkévar Kara odpxa; ei yap “ABpadp e€ Epywy edixadOn, Exec Kadxnua, G\N od mpos Tov Oedv. Th yap % ypady A€éyer; *’Em- “orevoe 6 "ABpadp TO Oe@, Kal EAoylcOn avt@ eis Erxato- ‘otvnv. Toe 5 épyagouévm 6 pioOds ov Aoyierar Kara xapw, GAA Kata TO dhetAnua* TO be pi Epyalouéva, muotevovTt b@ ent tov dixalowvta Tov doeBH, AoylCeras 7H mioris avrod els diuxaroctvnv. Kaddmep wal AaBid A€ye Tov pakapiopov Tod dvOpdrov, @ 6 Oeds oylCerar dixato-
* Why has this word two accents ?
88 1-8.] | READING L¥SSONS. 13
7 ovvnv yxopls Epywv, §Maxdpior dv apéOnoav at dvopula., 8 ‘Kal dv érexaddpOnoay ai duapriar. Makdpios dvip 6 oft 9 ‘un Aoylonrar Kvpios Gyapriav. “O paxapiopos ody otrtos, énl tiv mepirounv, 7) Kal ent rihv axpoBvotlay; Aé€youev
‘ ix4 3 / ad > \ € >] 4 yap Ott édoyicOn to “ABpadu 7 alotis «is dixaroodvnp. 10 mds ody edoylcOn; ev mepirouH dvtt, H ev adxpoBvotia ; 11 otx ev mepitoyn, GAN ev axpoBvorla: xa elov édAaBe
L & Tepitouns, oppayida ris dSixatootyns ths mlotews THs ev 7 akpoBvotia* els TO elvat adrov marépa mdvrwv tap muotevdvtay o: adxpoBvortas, els 76 AoytoO7vat Kal adrois 12 rhv dixavocdvynv* Kal warépa mepitouns Tols ovK ex Tepi- Towns povov, GAAG Kal Tots oToLxodor Tois txveot THs ev — 13 rh axpoBvotla mlorews tod Tarpos judy ABpadu. Od yap n~ > x n
dua vouov emayyeAla To “ABpady 7) TO oréppate adrod,
\ , 9754% = nn , 3 i \ / TO KAnpovdpov adroy elvat Tod Kdopov, GAAG bia SiKarocdvns 14 amlorews. Ei yap of €« vduov KAnpovdpo., Kexévwrar 7 15 aiotis, kal xatnpynra. » émayyeAla* 6 yap vopuos dpyiy / e Kol \ > 7 , XOX ‘4 X\ Katepyacerat* ob yap ovK Eott vdyos, ovd8 TapaBacis. Ard
16 rodro éx tiorews, iva kata xdpw.
The quotation-marks (inverted commas) introduced in verses 3, 7, 8,
are used, as is the practice in some editions of the Greek Testament, to indicate a citation from the ancient Scriptures.
III. Matruew v. 1-16.
Write the following in Greek characters, punctuating the sen- tences, inserting the soft and aspirate “ breathings,” but not attempting accentuation. The usual marks (~) and (*) discri- minate the long and the short vowels. In the diphthongs, the short o and e are to be used. Where an iota is to be subscribed, the vowel is italicised ; thus, d=.
1 Iddn dé tous Schlous, anébé eis t5 Srds; kai kathisantds
2 autou, prosélthin autd hoi mathétai autou; kai anoixas 3 t stdma hautou, édidaskén autous, légon, Makarioi hoi pté-
-14 READING LESSONS. __ | [S§ 1-8:
4 choi t6 pneumati; hdti autén &stin hé basileia tin ourandn. 5 Makarioi hoi pénthountés; hdti autoi parakléthésintai . Makarioi hoi praeis; hdti autoi klérdndmésousi tén gén. 6 Makarioi hoi peinéntés kai dipsdntés tén dikaidsunén ; hodti 7 autoi chortasthésintai. Makarioi hoi ¢lééménés; hoti autoi 8 éléethésdntai. Makarioi hoi katharoi té kardia : hdti autoi tin 9 Thédn Spsdntai. Makarioi hoi eiréndpoioi ; hdti autoi huioi 10 Théou kléthésontai. Makarioi hoi dédidgménoi héntékén dikai- 11 Ssunés ; hdti auton éstin hé basileia tén ourandn. Makarioi ésté, hdtan dneidisésin humas kai didxdsi, kai eipdsi pan ponérin rhéma kath’ humdn pseuddménoi, hénékén &mou. 12 Chairété kai agalliasthé, hdti hd misthds huméin pdlus én tois ouranois ; houtd gar édidxan tous préphétas tous prd humon. 13 Humeis ésté td halas tés gés; an dé td halas moranthé, én tini halisthés&tai? eis oudén ischuei &ti, ei mé bléthénai &xd, 14 kai katapateisthai hupd ton anthrdpon. Humeis ésté td phos tou késmou ; ou dunatai pdlis krubénai épand Srous keiméné ; 15 oud’ kaiousi luchndn kai tithéasin autdn hupd tin mddisn, all’ 16 &pi tén luchnian, kai lampei pasi tois én té oikia. Houts lampsatd t8 phos humdn &mpristhén ton anthrdpin, hdpds. iddsin humdn ta kala &rga, kai doxasdsi tin Patéra humGn tin én tois ouranois.
The Greek Testament will furnish many other exercises, which should be repeated until the learner can read the language with perfect facility. A little care and time now devoted to this point, even before the meaning of a single word is understood, will very greatly contribute to future progress.
ie)
PART IF.
ETYMOLOGY. Cuaprer I. INTRODUCTION.
9. Erymotoey treats of the classification, the derivation, and the inflection of words.
a. The parts of speech in Greek, and in all other languages, are substantially the same.
b. More important than any others are the Noun and the Verb. These, as the necessary elements of a sentence, will first be treated of, in their various inflections. With the Noun are closely con- nected the Article, Adjective, and Pronoun. The Verb also has its noun, the Infinitive, and its adjective, the Participle. Of these two the latter only is inflected.
10. The elementary part of every word is called its stem, as every inflection presupposes it, and branches from it.
The Root of a word is its yet simpler element in the same or another language. With this, practical grammar has comparatively little to do ; but to know the stem is of the utmost importance in the analysis of any word. Throughout the etymology the stem will be marked by thick letters, with a hyphen indicating the (general) . incompleteness of the stem until some letter or syllable be added by way of inflection.
The last letter of a stem is called the stem-ending. If the letter is a vowel, the stem is called “ vowel,” or pure. Soa stem ending with a liquid is called a liquid stem; ending with a mute, a mute stem. Liquid and mute stems are sometimes called impure.
16 _ ETYMOLOGY—THE NOUN. > eae
Carter II. THE NOUN, or SUBSTANTIVE.
11. Nouns have three genders, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter; also three numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural. The dual number denotes two, or a pair of anything; but as it is not found in the Greek Testament, it will not be noticed in the forms of declension given.
There are five cases: the Nominative, or case of the Subject; the Genitive, or Possessive; the Dative, or Con- junctive ; the Accusative, or Objective; the Vocative, employed in direct address.
Strictly speaking, the Nominative and Vocative are not cases: the word implying dependence. Of the three true cases, often called oblique,* the Genitive originally signifies motion from, then, more generally, separation ; the Dative, rest in, hence conjunction with ; the Accusative, motion towards, hence denoting simply the. _ object of the transitive verb. This general description of the three cases, for the further illustration of which see Synrax, will explain most of their uses.
In the paradigms of Nouns Substantive, a convenient English ren- dering of the Genitive is by the preposition of, and of the Dative by to. It must, however, be remembered that these words are used for the sake of distinction merely, and not as intimating that such are the most correct or usual renderings.
12. Before proceeding to the sflection of Nouns, it will be convenient to give the Definite Article in its numbers, genders, and cases. This must be thoroughly committed to memory.
There is no indefinite article in Greek, the nearest equivalent being the Indefinite pronoun ms, any.t This is also subjoined, chiefly for the reason that the two words together furnish a model, nearly complete, of the declension of ALL SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES,
* Oblique, or slanting, from the habit among old grammarians of expressing the forms of the noun by a diagram, the nominative being an upright stem, from which the cases branched at different angles.
+ Or the numeral efs, one, as waiddour év, a lad (John vi. 9).
§ 12.] FORMS OF THE NOUN. 17
Definite Article, the. Stem, m. n. TO-, fem. Ta~
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. ahs N. N. 6 n TO ot ai Td. G. TOD THs TOU TOV TOV TOV D. TO TH TO Tots Tais Tots A. Tdv THY 76 Tous Tas Ta
Accentuation.—The nominative, masculine and feminine, singular and plural, is proclitic ; the genitive and dative of both numbers are perispo- menon ; the rest oxytone.
13. Indefinite Pronoun: any, a certain, a. Stem, Tly -
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. and F. N. M. and F. N. N. Ts TL TLVES TLVAa G. TLVOS TLVOS TLU@V . TLU@V D. TLL TLWt TLOL TLOL A. TwWa TL TiLVas TWa
Accentuation.—The word is generally enclitic, as here given; the accent being regarded as transferred to the previous word (§ 5, d). When accented, the forms are oxytone, except the genitive plural, which is perispomenon. Thus, tivds, roi, Tivdv.
14. A comparison of the two forms now given will show four particulars, applicable to all nouns, adjectives, and pro- nouns; and, therefore, at the outset, important to remember.
a. Neuters have but one form in each number for the nomina- tive and accusative. Perhaps this might have arisen from things without life being regarded as objects only. Neuters plural, nominative and accusative, always end in a (short), except when contracted, as reiyn for reiyea (Heb. xi. 30).
b. The dative singular always ends in t; though, where the letter preceding is a long vowel, the iota is subscript.
c. The genitive plural always ends in av.
d. Masculine and neuter forms are always alike in the genitive and dative.
18 GENDER AND DECLENSION. 3 [§ 15.
15. GenpDER oF SussTantTiIvEs. General Rules,
Many names of inanimate objects are of the masculine or femi- nine gender. This fact, no doubt, arose from the habit of personi- fication, common in early ages. The English, indeed, is the only great language in which masculine and feminine, with almost undeviating strictness, denote male and female. The French idiom, in the opposite extreme, entirely rejects the neuter.
- Considerable difficulty, therefore, is felt by beginners in deter- mining the gender of many nouns.- In some cases, it will be neces- sary to consult the Lexicon ; in others, the termination of the ‘ word will be a guide, as is shown under the several declensions, The following rules, however, are of general application :—
a. The names of males are Masculine* ; so of rivers and winds, which were regarded by the early Greeks as gods,
b. The names of females are Feminine*; so also of trees, countries, islands, most towns, and abstract terms.
c. Diminutives in -ov are Neuter, even though the names of persons. To the class of neuters also belongs the verbal substan- tive, or infinitive verb, with wdeclinable nouns generally.
16. Descitension or Nouns SuBSTANTIVE.
There are three leading types of inflection, under one or other: of which all declinable nouns may be classified. These are called the Three Declensions, and, as has been stated, the model of each may be traced in the Article and the Indefinite Pronoun.
The First Declension corresponds with the feminine of the article, 4. The Second Declension corresponds with the masculine or neuter of the article, 6,7ré. The Third Declension corresponds with the form of the indefinite pronoun, ris, ri.
A model of each declension is here given.
* The generic names of animals are sometimes common, i.e., of either‘mase. or fem. gender, according to circumstances (so also mais, child); more fre- quently epiceene, i.e., of one gender, used indifferently for both sexes. Thus in Greek, wolf is always masc., fox always fem., even in Luke xiii, 32,
g 16.]
ap ye 2
LEADING FORMS OF THE DECLENSIONS. 19
First DEcLENSION.
TvAN, @ gate.
SINGULAR. N. mvAn, a gate (subj.) G. avAns, of a gate D. avtdAn, to a gate A. TvAnv, a gate (0b7.) v. mvAn, O gate!
Stem, 7vAa-
PLURAL. mvAaL, gates (subj ) mvardy, of gates mvAas, to gates mtAas, gates (007.) mvAat, O gates !
Seconp DEcLENSION. > avOpwnos, aman. Stem, avOpwio-
SINGULAR. &vOpwros, a man (suby.) avOpd7ov, of a man av0par, to a man dvOpwrov, a man (0b/.) avOpwnre, O man!
PLURAL, avOpwror, men (subj.) avOpérwv, of men avOperois, to men 3 , . avOparovs, men (0b7.) dvOpw7o., O men!
Accentuation.—-The reason why the place of the accent varies in the
genitive and dative is explained, § 6, c.
THIRD DEcLENSION.
mais, a child, boy, servant. Stem, Talo - (Accent of this word irregular.)
SINGULAR. mais, a child (swdj.) matdos, of a child mawdt, to a child maida, a child (007.) mat, O child!
PLURAL. maides, children (swbj.) maidwv, of children tmatot, to children matdas, children (00/.) maides, O children !
These three paradigms having been committed to memory, the several declensions, with their rules of formation, their analogies and variations, may now be more particularly discussed.
A certain likeness will, on examination, be detected between the First and Second, especially in the plural number. The plural terminations may be set side by side, thus :—
20 THE FIRST. AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. [§ 16.
N. and v. First Declension, -at Second Declension, -or
G. ue -@V ” -@v D.. 39 aus ” - OLS A. 9 as ” - OUS
In the former, the predominant vowel is evidently a; in the latter, o. So in the singular, the first declension in the dative has q (for a lengthened, § 3, ¢) ; the second, (for o lengthened). In the accusative, the first has av, or nv; the second, ov.
The two may accordingly be discriminated as the A declension and the O declension ; a distinction which the further examination of their structure makes yet more plain.
Both, again, are distinguished from the third by admitting the termination which marks the case into the last syllable of the word ; while the latter adds the termination as a distinct syllable.
The First and Second Declensions are, on account of this last peculiarity, called the Jnseparable, or Parisyllabic ; the Third, the Separable, or Imparisyllabic declension.
All three admit, however, of many variations, as will now be shown in detail.
17. Frrst (inseparable), or A Dreciension.
This declension includes both masculine and feminine nouns. The stem invariably ends ina. As the feminine has already been given as containing the typical form, that may be placed first,
18. Feminine Parapiems. First Declension.
neepa, day. dd£a, opinion. Stem, neEpam Stem, doéa- SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. 1yuépa Hepat dd£a dd€au G. tpuepas LE pOV dons d0€av D. 1eéepa HpEpars bd£n dd£ais A. tpépav iepas bofav defas v, teepa Hye pat d6£a ddfat
§ 18.] THE FIRST DECLENSION. ee
ruin, honour. oxida, shadow.
Stem, Téua- Stem, oxKla- SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Ne Tyla Tipat oKLG oKiat G. Tis TLL@DV oKLas oKLOV D. TUyh TYAS oKLG oK.ais A. Tuyuny Tyas oKiay oKias / 4 , , Ve. oTysy TYal oKLa oxial
REMARKS.
a. The stem-ending a becomes 4 in the nominative and accu- sative singular whenever preceded by a consonant ; except by the liquid p, the double consonants, or ¢, sometimes v preceded by a diphthong or long vowel. In these cases, the a remains, long after p, short in the other cases. Preceded by a vowel, the a remains, generally long. Thus we have the nominatives évrodn, cuvayayn, ux; but dvipa, dééa, yAdooa, Bacikiooa, Aéawa, oxia, Bact- Aela, aAnGera.
6. In the genitive and dative singular, the stem-ending a, when not preceded by a vowel or p, becomes y. After a vowel or p, it remains, Thus, Nn. ddfa; G. ddéns; D. df; but jucpa, Auepas, neépa, and oxid, oxids, oKia.
ce. The plural terminations in all forms of this declension are exactly alike, the a in -as of the accusative being long.
d. Accentuation.—Whatever syllable is accented in the nominative retains the accent throughout, so long as the laws in § 6, c, permit. The only apparent exception is in the genitive plural, which in this declension is always perispomenon. This, however, is accounted for by its being a contraction of -dwv, Oxytone words become perispomenon in the genitive and dative of both numbers. For purposes of accentua- tion, the termination a. in the plural nominative is considered short,
22 THE FIRST DECLENSION. “+ [See
19. Mascurine Parapiems. First Declension. pabnrns, disciple. veavlas, a youth. Stem, waOnra- | Stem, veavia- SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. padnris padnral veavias veavlat — G. padnrod padnrav veavtou veaviGv D. pant padnrais veavia veaviats A. padnrny padnras veaviav veavlas Vv. padnra padnrat veavia veaviat REMARKS.
a. All masculine nouns of the first declension form the nomina- tive from the stem by adding s, lengthening a into y after all consonants except the liquid p, and retaining a after vowels and p. The vowel of the nominative is retained in the dat. and acc. sing.
6. The genitive singular of all masculine nouns of this declen- sion ends in ov, originally ao. The vocative gives the simple stem. Other cases conform entirely to the feminine type.
c. Accentuation.—The remarks under the feminine paradigms are applicable to maseuline also. Exercise 3.—Nouns of the First Declension, for Practice. (Selected from the ‘‘ Sermon on the Mount.”)
]. Masculine.
KpiTys, judge reAdvns, tax-gatherer, “ pub-
dpevderns, debtor lican ”’
mpopytns, prophet danperns, attendant, servant 2. FEMININE.
Baowrcia, kingdom xepadn, head
dixatocdvn, righteousness . | Avxvla, lampstand
évToAn, commandment olxia, house
(wn, life meétpa, rock
dupa, gate oxy, soul, natural life
The learner should commit these words to memory, with their mean- ings, and should then write them down in different numbers and cases, with and without the corresponding articles, until all the forms are mastered. So with the other Exercises,
§ 20.] THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 23
90. IrrecuLtaR Forms or THe First DECLENSION.
a. Masculine proper names in as of this declension form the genitive in a, excepting when preceded by a vowel. Thus, "lavas, Jonah, gen. "lava; Knpas, Cephas, gen. Knpa; BaprdBas, gen. BapvdBa 3 “Iovdas, Judah or Judas, gen. lovda. The accent of the genitive corresponds with that of the nominative. But ’Avdpéas, Andrew, makes ’AvSpéov.; ‘Hoaias, Isaiah, ‘Hoaiov. These names are from the Hebrew, with the exception of -’Avdpéas.
6. In Acts v. 1, we find Samgeipy, dative of the proper name Sapphira ; and in Acts x: 1, omeipys is used as the genitive of onetpa, cohort—in both cases contrary to the rule in § 19, a. Similar variations from the regular form are found in good MSS. in the case of other substantives.
21. Sxrconp (inseparable), or O-DEcLENsIon.
This declension contains masculine, feminine, and neuter nouns. The stem invariably ends in o, to which -s is added to form mascu- line and feminine nominatives, and -v to form the neuter.
22. MascuLInE AND Feminine Parapiems. Second
Declension. Adyos, word, masc. 600s, way, fem. Stem, Aoyo- Stem, 0do-
SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. Adyos - Adyou 0dds ddof G. Adyov Adyav 6500 6dr D. Ady@ Adyous 630 -dd0ts A. Adyov Adyovs — 6ddv dd0vs Vv. Adye Adyot 60€ ddol -
é
oa
24 _ THE SECOND DECLENSION. oe ae,
REMARKS.
a. As before noticed, this paradigm corresponds with that of the first declension, o- being substituted for a-. The differences are, that in the nominative singular the stem-vowel is not lengthened, and that the vocative singular changes this vowel into « In the accusative plural, the termination ovs is for -ovs (§ 4, d, 5), as in the first declension -Gs is for -avs; in each case, s being added to the accusative singular.
Accentuation.—The remarks on the first declension are mostly appli- cable. The syllable accented in the nominative retains the accent throughout wherever possible ; oxytones becoming perispomena in the genitive and dative of both numbers. The genitive plural of other nouns is not, as in the first declension, perispomenon. In the nomina- tive plural, the termination o is treated with reference to the accent as a short syllable.
93. Neuter Parapiam. Second Declension.
odor, fig-tree. Stem, @uKO-
SINGULAR. : PLURAL. N. ovdKov ovKa G. ovKov oUKWY D. ovK® oVKOLS A, ovKov ovKa Vv. odKov , odka REMARKS.
The only difference between this paradigm and that of the masculine and feminine is that already stated, § 14, a. The accu- sative of all neuters is the same form with the nominative and vocative ; and in the plural these cases end in 4.
Accentuation.—For the accentual changes in the declension of cixop, see § 6, c.
94. Parapicm or Contrracrep Nouns. Second Declension.
Nouns of this declension whose stem-vowel o- is preceded by ¢ or 0, generally suffer contraction, according: to the scheme in § 3, 7
§ 24.] SECOND DECLENSION—CONTRACTED NouNS.- 25
Thus, vdos, mind, becomes vois ; daréov, bone, darodv. The con- tracted forms of these words are not invariably employed in the Septuagint or New Testament. On voids, see Variable Nouns, § 32, a.
To this head may also be referred some nouns in -as, like the
proper names, *AzroAas, Kas.
voos, mind,m. Stem, voo- SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. (vdos) vods (vdor) vot G. (vdov) vod (vdwy) vov
daréov, bone, n. Stem, oa7TEo- SINGULAR. PLURAL.
(dc0réov) dcrody (d0réa) doTa
(d0réov) dorod (dcTéwy) darav
D. (vd) v@ —(vdors) vois (d07é) doTS (daT€oLs) doTots
A. (vdov) vodv (vdovs) vots | (dcréov)dcTotyv (d0réa) dora
v. (vde) vod —(vdou) vot (d07€ov) dorody (doréa) dora *AToANGs, Apollos.
N. "AzroAAGs G. “AmoAAd D. *AToAAG
A. Amoddgdy, or ’AmodAAG (irreg.)
v. ’AmoAAd
25. The word "Incods, Jesus, is thus declined :—
N. ‘Inoods G. "Inood D. ‘Incod
A. ‘Insobdy v. ‘Inood
Exercise 4.—Nouns of the Second Declension, for Practice. Selected from the ‘‘Sermon on the Mount.” 1. MAscuLINnE.
adeAgds, brother €xIpes, enemy dvOpemos, man HAvos, Sun
AvKos, wolf voyuos, law 6pOadpyds, eye moTapos, river
2. FEeEmInine,
&ppos, sand
|
doxds, beam
,
26 : THE THIRD DECLENSION. Tg 86.
3. NEUTER. -8@pov, gift kptvor, lily épyov, work mpéBarov, sheep peéTpov, Measure rexvov, child
26. Turrp (or Separable) DEcLENston.
Nouns in this declension are masculine, feminine, or neuter.
Their varieties necessitate the giving of several paradigms, although all are reducible to a simple form, already illustrated in the inde- finite pronoun ts, and shown in the two nouns declined below. _ The one essential thing, in this declension especially, is to know the stem, which may end in a consonant (impure, mute or liquid), or in a vowel (pure). From this the nominative, as well as every other case, is derived ; but the stem-ending is better seen in the genitive, which, in Vocabularies and Lexicons, is therefore given with the nominative. |
The termination of the genitive singular in this declension is always os. Z'ake this away, and the remaining part of the word is the stem.
2°77. GENERAL PARADIGM OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
M. or F, N. aidyv, age, duration, masc, phya, word > ‘ e vv Stem, ala@v~ Stem, p7Mar- SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. aidv alaves pha pypara G. aldvos ° aidvev piparos pnearov n lal [a4 c/s D. aloe. ataou(v) phyare phpact(v) A. aldva aldvas pijpa pywara v. aldv aldves pea phpara.
§ 28. | | THE THIRD DECLENSION.. 27
28. TERMINATIONS OF THIS DECLENSION.
These paradigms are essentially alike in termination, setting - aside the invariable differences between neuter and other forms (§ 14, a).
We thus find that the terminations of the third declension are, in the sINGULAR—
Genitive, os, appended to the stem.
Dative, t, also appended to the stem. |
Accusative, &. This, however, is really a substitute for v, which we find in the first and second declensions, and which in pure stems often appears in the third also.
Vocative, the stem, subject to necessary modifications (§ 4, d, 8), or like the nominative.
In the pLURAL—
Nominative, «s, appended to the stem. Genitive, wv, appended to the stem. Dative, o1, added to the stem, with necessary modifications (§ 4, d, 1, 5). On the vy éperkvorixdy, see § 3, h, 1. Accusative, as, the a short ors added to the accusative singular. Compare the First and Second Declensions, § 22, a. Vocative, like the nominative. : Accentuation.—The accented syllable of the nominative, as in other nouns, retains the accent throughout, wherever possible. For a special
rule respecting monosyllables, see § 29. In the above paradigms, aiév in the nominative is written for aidv.
29. VARIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION ACCORDING TO STEM-ENDINGS.
The stem of this declension may end in any consonant (except » and the double consonants, f, ¢, ¥) and in the vowels t and v,
First Rule.-—The most usual termination of the nominative singular is s added to the stem, in accordance with the orthographic law, § 4, ¢.
‘ 28 VARIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION.
Thus (1), a labial stem makes the nominative in Y.
EXAMPLES. “Apa, Arabian, from paB-, gen. dpaBos Aidioy, Hthiopian, ,, atOior-, gen. aidioros
(2) A guttural stem makes the nominative in ¢.
[s 29.
EXAMPLES. prog, flame, from dpoy-, gen. droyds knpvé, herald, a KNpUK-, geN. KnpuKos wok, night, os vukT-, gen. vuerds Opié, hair, 7 Oprx-, gen. tpixds (§ 4, d, 7.) (3) A dental stem drops the stem-termination before s. EXAMPLES. ais, child, from mas-, gen. madds dps, bord, WA épvi-, gen. dpriGos xapis, favour, ” Xapir-, gen. xdpiros édovs, tooth, a s8ovr-, gen. dddvros (§ 4, d, 5.) (4) Vowel stems add s simply. EXAMPLES, mors, city, from modt-, gen. roves, for méduos ixdus, fish, ~ tx@v-, gen. iydvios
- Second Rule.—Stems ending in v and vr (generally), in p (almost always), and in § (invariably, except in neuters), form the nomi-
native by lengthening the vowel preceding the termination.
EXAMPLES. mony, shepherd, from momev-, gen. romévos héav, lion, Sala Aeovr-, gen. A€ovros pyrep, orator, e pyTop-, gen. pyropos aidws, modesty, c alSos-, (gen, aiddaos)
The genitive of this last word is contracted by dropping the s between two short vowels, and combining them; aildédos, aldoie.
(See § 3,7, Table and Note.)
‘
§29.] © VARIETIES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION. 29
Certain nouns with the stem-ending p preceded by e are synco- pated, t.¢., omit this vowel in some of their cases. One, dnp, man, avep-, in omitting ¢, inserts the letter 8 between vand p. (See § 5, 5.) The dative plural: of these nouns also adds a after p. (See the Paradigms.)
Third Rule-—Siems in ev, av, ov, while adding s in the nomina- tive singular, according to the first rule, drop the v in the genitive singular and other cases, thus forming an apparent exception to the rule that the genitive gives the stem by taking away the termination os. The irregularity is only apparent, as the v of the stem is in reality the old consonant v (written in Greek. F, and called, from its shape, digamma), which originally belonged to the genitive, like the other consonant stem-endings. Thus, Bois, ox, Bof-, gen. Bofos, now written Bods. Some of the cases of these | nouns are also contracted, as the paradigm will show. Stems in ev take a special form of the genitive singular, called the “ Attic Genitive,” ending in ews.
Fourth Rule.—Neuter stems in es change this termination in the nominative into -os, and suffer contraction in other cases by
§ 3, 7. EXAMPLE.—épos, mountain, dpes-, gen. (Specos, dpeos) dpovs, nomina- tive and accusative plural (dpeca, dpea) dpn. (See P aradigm.)
fifth Rule.—Other neuter nouns, together with those masculines and feminines which have liquid stems preceded by a long vowel, retain the stem in the nominative unchanged, save by the general orthographic law. Thus, aidv, piya, already given. The latter becomes pjya from fnpar-, according to § 4, d, 8.
Accentuation.—Monosyllabic neuters are oxytone in all their dissyl- labic forms, except the genitive plural, which is perispomenon. Mascu- line and feminine monosyllables accent the penultimate in the accusative singular and nominative and accusative plural; in other cases follow the rule of neuters.
\
30 THIRD DECLENSION—PARADIGMS, [§ 30.
30. PARADIGMS ILLUSTRATING THE FIVE FOREGOING RULEs.
I. The letter s affixed ri the stem.
_@, Consonant Stems (mute), labial and guttural.
"Apa, Arabian knpvé, herald, masc. Stem, “Apas- Stem; Knpuk-
SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.
nN. “Apay “Apapes Knpvg KY]PUKES G. ~ApaBos "ApaBov KnpvKos ——s- KNpvK@Y D. "ApaBu *Apayi(v) KNPUKL kypvé.(v) A. “Apafa *ApaBas _sKjpuKa KnpUKas v. “Apay "ApafBes — Knpv€ K|PUKES
For example of a dental stem (neuter), see Introductory Paradigm of the Declensions, § 16. The feminine noun ydprs (xaper-), favour, makes acc. xdpw}; Kreis, key, fem. (kda8-) has acc. sing. kdeida 3 ace. plur. by syncope and contraction, «rcs (Matt. xvi. 19; Rev. i. 18).
6. VoweEt Stems.
ixOds, fish, masc. modus, city, fem. Stem, tyOv- | Stem, 770AL- SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. ix0ds ixOves mOoXus (woAeeS) TOAELS G. lx@vos ixddwv TOAEWS (Attic gen.) TOAEWY D. lydiu ix Ovou(v) (wodei) TAEL TdAECL(V) A. lxOdv (ixOvas) tyO8s | wodw (wéA€as) odes v. lxdd ix Oves TON (modees) TOAELS REMARKS.
One neuter noun, civam, mustard (singular only), is declined - like wd\us, excepting that the accusative is, of course, like the nom.
Accentuation.—For accentual purposes, the genitive termination, ews or ewv, in these nouns, is considered as one syllable, and does not, there- fore, require the acute accent to be thrown forward.
§ 30.]
mouunny, shepherd, muse. Stem, 7rouwev—-
THIRD DECLENSION—PARADIGMS.
II. The vowel of the last syllable stem lengthened.
\éwv, lion, mase. Stem, AeovT-
PLURAL. éovTes eovTwv A€ovor(v) Aéovtas A€ovTes
avnp, man.
Stem, avep-
PLURAL. avopes avdpev avdpaot(v) dvdpas avdpes
SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. TOLULAY- TOLLEVES Aéwv TOLLEVOS TOULEVOV déovTos TOULEVL Touert(Y) d€ovTe TOLeva TOLMLEVAS Aéovta “TOLLND TOULEVES €ov aldés, modesty, fem. Stem, aidos- SINGULAR ONLY. N. aides G. (aldd(c)os) aidods D. (aidd(c)t) aldo? A. (aidd(c)a) aid6 Vv. aidds SyncopateD Nouns or THIs Form. matnp, father. Stem, 7aTep- SINGULAR, PLURAL. SINGULAR. Tarp mMarepes avnp maTpos TaTépwv avopos marpt Tatpacu(v) avdpt Tarepa TarTépas avdpa TaTEp Tarepes dvep REMARK,
plural, but is not syncopated in any other case.
Accentuation.—These words are paroxytone in the cases that retain e,
To this class of syncopated nouns belong pnrnp, mother ; Ovydrnp, daughter ; yaornp, belly. Aarip, star, has dorpdou(v) in the dative
and throughout the plural (excepting &vfp, which is irregular).
syncopated cases of the singular are oxytone, and the vocative throws back its accent as far as possible.
32 THIRD DECLENSION—PARADIGMS. [§ 30.
III. Nouns in -avs, -evs, -ovs, with original digamma.
Bactreds, king, masc. Stem, BactAeF- SINGULAR. PLURAL, N. Basdreds (Bactr€es) Bactdels G. Paciréws Bactr\€éov D. (Baciréi) Bactre? Bactdedou(v) A. Baciréa BaciAéas Vv. Baoired (Bacthées) Bacwreis
Bods, ov, masc. Stem, BoF-
SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. Bods Boes © G. Bods Bowv D. Bol Botou(v) A. fBodv (8cas) Bods v. Bod Boes REMARK,
Nouns in -evs form the accusative singular in -ea (the a long) ; _ those in -avs and -ovs take v.
Accentuation.—Nouns in -€vs are all oxytone in the nominative singuiar, and perispomenon in the vocative.
IV. Neuter nouns in -os, from the stem ending es-.
yévos, race. Stem, yeves- SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. yevos (yéve(a)a) yévn G. (yéve(c)os) yévous yevéwy and yevav D. (yéve(o)t) yéever yéveot(v) A. yévos (yéve(o)a) yévn Vv. yevos , (yéve(a)a), yévy
V. The simple stem as nominative. See aidy and pia, already given, § 27.
§ 30. | | THE THIRD DECLENSION. 33
Exercise 5.—Nouns of the Third Declension, for Practice. Selected from the ‘‘Sermon on the Mount.”
*,* The learner should assign each noun to its proper class.
MASCULINE. ypapparevs, -ews, scribe ddovs, dddvTos, tooth xiTéy, -Gvos, vest, inner dds, dp€ws, snake garment
: FEMININE. dvvapus, -ews, power kptous, -ews, Judgment Opié, rpixds, hair xelp, xevpds, hand, dat. plur.
xepat NEUTER.
Z6vos, -ovs, nation 6pos, -ovs, mountain 6éAnua, -aros, will mop, Tupos, fire évopua, -aTos, name Gs, pwrds, light
31. Irrecunar Nouns or tHe Turrp DEcLENSION.
These are irregular, chiefly in the nominative. Thus, yf, woman, takes gen. yuvaixés, and forms all its cases from the stem yovax-, the vocative being yiva by § 4, d, 8.
Tévv, knee, is declined regularly as from the stem yovar- (neuter), gen. ydvaros, nom. plur. ydvara, Ke.
Kir, dog (masculine, also feminine in singular), is declined as from xvv-, gen. kurds, &e. ; but voc. sing. xvoy, dat. plur. kuoi(r).
Mdprvs, witness (masculine), is from the stem paprvp-, which it follows throughout, except in dat. plur. pdprvoi(y).
*Y8wp, water, is declined regularly as from the neuter stem t8ar-, gen. vdaros, nom. plur. ddara, &e.
Some neuter stems in -ar- form the nominative by changing the t into s, instead of dropping it. Thus, kepar-, horn, nom. sing. xépas, NOM. piu, Képara, gen. Kepdtwy ; Kpear-, flesh, nom. sing. kpéas, nom. plur. xpéa, by Ayneope from xpéara 3 tepat-, prodigy, nom. sing. répas, nom. plur. répara, dat. répacu(r).
34 IRREGULAR AND VARIABLE NOUNS, [§ 31.
The accusative plural form, dpvas, lambs, is once found (Luke x. 3}, and may be referred to the stem dpev-, nom. sing. dpn», the « dropped in infiection by syncope.
In one passage, the name of the Greek deity Zeus is found (nom. Zevs) gen. Aids, acc. Aia (Acts xiv. 12, 13).
32. Nouns OF VARIABLE DECLENSION IN THE NEw TESTAMENT.
a. A few substantives in -os are found with forms both of the second declension and of the third (neuter stem -es- like yévos). Thus, cxdéros, darkness, is generally neuter of the third, but once masculine of the second (Heb. xii. 18, oxdr@); mAodros, wealth, is properly masculine of the second, but is found in good MSS. neuter of the third ; edcos, mercy, is also of both declensions in the accu- sative case only (2dcov, Matt. ix. 13, Titus iii. 5, Heb. iv. 16, &c.), but the genitive is always édéous, dat. edée. Novds, mind (see § 24), second declension, occasionally takes a genitive and dative as of the third declension ; vods (1 Cor. xiv. 19), vot (Rom. vii. 25; 1 Cor. i. 10, xiv. 15). So mdods (Acts xxvii. 9) for mod.
6. The word cdBBarov, sabbath, is a regular noun, second declen- sion, neuter, except in the dative plural, which in the New Testa- ment is cd8Baox (as if from caBBar-, cd88a). But the Septuagint has also caBSdros (1 Chron. xxiii, 31).
ec. In proper names much irregularity exists. Moos (or Mavojs), Moses, is thus declined :—
G. Macéws D. Maogei, or Mocy
A. Maoéa, Or Moony Vv. Meow (LXX).
The name of Jerusalem is found in a threefold form : (1) ‘Iepov- cadnp, indeclinable, a transcript of the Hebrew word; (2) ‘IepocdAvpa, neuter plural, second declension ; (3) ‘IepoodAvpa, feminine singular ° (Matt. ii. 3, only). Many proper names analogous in form to nomi- natives of the different declensions are indeclinable. So Kava, ByOcadd, BynOpayn, ToryoOG, ‘Paya, "Aapdv, Supedy, Kedpav, ‘leptxd.
§ 32.] NOUNS OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. 30 To this class may be referred the indeclinable neuters, rdcya, pass- over ; oixepa, strong drink (Luke i. 15). The last two are, in fact, but adaptations of Hebrew words. “Iéra, jot (Matt. v. 18),”Adda and éyeya (Rev. i. 8), the names of Greek letters, are also treated as neuter nouns without inflection.
Exercise 6.—Promiscuous List of Nouns, for Practice.
*,.* The Genitive case is given, to show the Declension and the Stem. Learners should, wherever possible, infer the gender from the form.
GeTOs, ov, m. eagle atywa, atos, blood av0os, ovs, flower apvtov, ov, lamb Bovdn, js, counsel : yovevs, €os, parent ddxkpv, vos, tear d€vdpor, ov, tree didacKados, ov, teacher éAmls, tdos, f. hope éopty, is, festival “Hpsdns, ov, Herod
Ovydrnp, tpds, daughter Kakla, as, vice
K.Oapa, as, harp pdorwé, vyos, f. scourge wepos, ovs, part
Opis, ews, Md. serpent moXirns, ov, citizen novos, ov, m. labour mpaypua, atos, thing aadmty€, wyyos, trumpet oToua, atos, mouth @oa, as, hour
36 ADJECTIVES. [§ 33. .
CHAPTER II. ADJECTIVES.
33. Adjectives in Greek follow precisely the inflection of Substantives. Every declension, almost every form, re- appears, but in different combinations.
In respect of form, adjectives are divided into three classes :—
34. First Form.
1. Those which combine the first and second declensions. 2. Those which combine the first and third. 3. Those which follow exclusively the type of the third.
In the first two, the form of the first declension is feminine.
PARADIGMS. > ayavo-, -a-, good.
(Stems, o- m. a- f. o- n.)
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
M. F. N. M. F. N. N. dyads dyaby dyabdv ayabot dyabat dyaba G. dyabod dyabijs ayabod ayabev ayabév dyabdv Dp. dyabo dyabh ayade dyabois dyabats dyabois A. dyabdv dyabyv dyabdv esate dyabds dayabd v. adyadé dyadh ayabdv ayabot adyabal dyabd
All participles in -pevos are declined like dya6és. OLKQLO-, -a-, just. N. Olkawos dixala = Sfavov Sikaro. § Slkarat = Slava G. dixalov dixalas dixalov dixaloy dixalwy dixalwy D. dixaim dixalg dixalw dixators dixalais dixalous A. OSfkaiov dixalavy Sdixavov dukalovs dixalas dlxaa v. Olkate dixala dikare Sixavo. Olkavae Sfkara piKpo-, -a-, little.
N. puxpds pikpd —s guKpov puxpol = atxpal = pupa G. plkpod puKpas jprxpod pikpGv = fukpOv —_uLKpO@P D. plKP@ pulKpd —s aK p@ Muxpots pukpats atKpots A. pixpoy puxpdy —ukpdv puxpovs julkpds abd V. puKpé puKpad — aipov puxpol uixpal = uxpd.
§ 34.] ADJECTIVES—FIRST FORM. 3v
REMARKS.
a. The feminine singular of these adjectives, as will be seen in the above paradigms, is formed in strict analogy with the usage of the first declension. The rule is, that where the masculine has -os preceded by a vowel or p, the feminine ends in a long, which vowel is preserved through all the cases of the singular. Os preceded by
a consonant becomes y, which also runs through the singular.
b. Several adjectives belonging to this First Form employ the masculine terminations for the feminine also, conforming thus throughout to the second declension. ‘This is especially the case with polysyllables and compound words. But as there is no definite rule to distinguish these “ Adjectives of Two Termina- tions” from those of three, it will be necessary in doubtful cases to.consult the Vocabulary or Lexicon.
c. Accentuation.—The rules in § 18 are strictly observed. Observe, however, that the feminine plural is not, like that of the first declension, necessarily perispomenon, but like the other cases, follows the stem of the word. Thus from dixaos, f. pl. gen. d:ixaley (the accent being thrown one syllable forward by the terminal long syllable (§ 5, a) ; but pixpéds
makes mixpav. 35. ConTRACcTED ADJECTIVES OF THE First Form.
Adjectives in e- and oo- belong to this class, The explanations given with Contracted Substuntives (§ 24), and the scheme in § 3 f will sufficiently show the reason of each contraction.
Xpvaeo-, -a-, golden. By contraction, xpvaois (eos), <j (€), -odv (cor).
SINGULAR. | PLURAL.
M. F. N. . M. F. > N. xpucotds yxpvo xpvoody Xpvoot xpvoat ypvoa G. xpuvcod § xpvons xpvood | xpvoGv yxpvcdv xpvody D. Xxpvv@ = Xpvonh-=xpvoG =| xpuoois xpvoais xpvoois A. xpvoodv xpvojy xpvaody Xpucot’s xpvoas xpvoa V. xpvoee xpvoq xpvoody xpucot xpuvoat _xpucd
38 ADJECTIVES—SECOND FORM. [§ 35. —
REMARKS,
a. “Apyvpeos, silver (adjective), occurs in the New Testament in two forms: ace. plur. dpyupois, neut. nom. and ace. plur. dpyupa.
6. These adjectives occur very infrequently. It will be observed that the feminine of ypiceos is formed irregularly; as -os preceded by a vowel, according to rule, requires -a, The adjective crepeds, ed, edv, firm, is declined without contraction.
c. Accentuation.—The final syllable in these adjectives, when con- tracted, is circumflexed throughout. Thus we have, not ouly amaois from amAdos, simple (regular, see § 6, c), but xpucots from xptoecos, and &pyupovs from apytpeos, anomalous.
36. Second Form. ficewe nt REMARKS.
Masculine.—The nominative is formed from the stem, according to the methods of the Third Declension. Thus, égv- gives nom. mase. dévs, sharp (§ 29, i. (4); wavr- becomes was, all (§§ 29, 1.(3) ; 4d 5); and éxovr- gives éxay, willing (§§ 29, ii. ; 4, d, 8).
Feminine.—The nominative always ends in &; the other cases in the singular follow the model of the First Declension (§ 18, a). The stem-ending v becomes -aa, as déis, décia ; ve- becomes -ca, as was, waca, and. éxov, éxovoa. But stems in -v- insert an t before that consonant, as pédas, black, pedav-, f. wedawa ; and or- (originally For) becomes -va. Thus, Acdveds (participle), having loosened, Aeducor-, f. NeAvKvia.
Neuter.—The neuter nominative contains the simple stem, altered only by the general euphonic rules ; as dé, wav, éxdy, peAav, NeAvKds. 37. ParapicMs oF THE Seconp Form.
6&u-, -€la-, sharp.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. F. N. N. dvs 6feta 6&0 b€eis dfeta. df€a
G. 60s dfelas df€éos 6féwv d€eiav dor D 6&7 dfela 6€er dféou(v) d&elars d€€or(v) A. 6d€vv éfeias = 6 bfets dfelas d€€a
v. 6&0 d€eia b&b d€ets dfeia, ofa
§ 387. | ADJECTIVES—SECOND FORM. og
\
Note. The stem-ending v becomes ¢ in the genitive and dative ‘Singular, and throughout the plural: ¢, dative singular, being contracted into «7; and ées, éas, in the plural, into eis. But éos, genitive singular, and ¢a in the neuter plural, are uncontracted. A. very few substantives also change v into e; the only instance in the New Testament being wnyav (John xxi. 8; Rev. xxi. 17) for ‘ anxéwv, from miyvs, cwbit.
TAVT-, ~aca~-, all, every.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. A Sr} N. N. Tas Taca Tay - TaVTES Tacal TavTa G. tmavtés amdons Tavtds TavTWVY TacGv TavTwv D. Tavti mdon Tavrl maci(v) Tacas Tact(v) A. ™dvTa Tacay Tap mdvtas Taoas Tavta Vv. was Trace Tav TaVTES Tacal TdvTa
Participles in -as are similarly declined (stem, avr-) as Avcas, having loosed. The participial stem-ending evt- makes, nom. -¢s, -eioa, -év, gen. -évros, -elons, -évtos, &c.; as Bovrevbels, having been counselled. |
EKOVT-, -OUVTa-, willing.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. F. N. e , e n e Ye € , 4 a e ,
N. €KOV €xovoa €KOV EKOVTES €EKOvGaL €EKOVTA G. €xdvTos Exovons €ExdvTOS ExOVT@Y EkOVTGY EKOVTMYV e , € , € , e n c y . € nm D. €KOVTL éxovon EKdvTL Exodou(v) Exodcas €éxodat(v) A. €KOVTG €kOvCaY. EKOV Exovtas €éxkovoas €xdvTAa
c , fal a V. EKOV Exovoa €KOV EKOVTES EkodvoaL €EKOVTAa
Participles in -ev, -ovea, -ov, are declined on this model.
38. The declension of adjectives like pédas, pédawa, péray, black, gen. pedavos, pedaivns, pédavos, dat. plur., m. and nm. péAaor(y), and of participles like NeAukds, ANeAvevia, Aedveds, having loosened, gen. AeAvKdTos, AeAvevias, AeAvKdros, Will not now present any difficulty. One participle, éornxas, having stood, from the verb torn, takes the alternative form, ears, the result of syncope and contraction,
and is thus declined :— f
40 —s IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES—SECOND FORM. [§ 38.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F, N. M. i. N. N. €oTos éoTH@oa ECTS EOT@TES EGTMTAL €ECTaTA
G. €oTaTOs éoTéons EoTwTOS | EoTOTa@Y EoTHTMV ECTOeTOV c od c
D. €oT@Tt + éoTdon EoTatL | EoTwoL(v) EoTdoais EoTaor(v) A. €0T@TA €oTwONY EOTHS éoT@tas €éoTécas éoTaTa
The contraction is from éorads. (See § 6 c.) Accentuation.—Oxytones circumflex the feminine. Adjectives of the second class otherwise follow the ordinary rules. It will be observed that in the genitive and dative singular, masculine and neuter, mas takes oxytone forms, otherwise accenting the stem-syllable throughout. 39. Two adjectives of common occurrence are irregular in the singular masculine and neuter, owing to a combination of forms.
Their declension is as follows :—
1. peya- (peyado-, peyada-), great.
Sing. ™M. F. N. N. peyas peyaaAn peéya. G. peyddov peydAns peyddov D. peyad@ peyaadn peyadw A. péyav peyaadnv peya
Plural regular, as if from péyanos.
2. moAv- (mroAAo-, TOAAG ), many.
Sing. M. F. N. N. woAdvs | TOAAN TOA G. 7moAAod TOAANS Todd D. TOAAM ToAAH TOAAG A. Todvy TOAAHY TOAD
Plural regular, as if from moddés.
The adjective rpavs, or mpaos, meek, is found in different forms of declension. Thus, in Matt. xi. 29, we have nom. sing. mpaos, some- times written mpaos;* in xxi. 5, mpavs; in 1 Pet. iii, 4, gen. sing. mpgéos; and in Matt. v. 5, nom. plur. mpgeis.
ee
* Lachmann and others read moais here, thus removing the irregularity.
§ 40. | | ADJECTIVES—THIRD FORM. 4]
40. Third Form. Generat REMARKS.
Adjectives of this class being altogether of the third declension, have no special form for the feminine, and are, therefore, of two terminations or (sometimes) of only one. Compare tis, § 13.
For the most part, the declension of these adjectives is without peculiarity. It should be noted that an adjective in -ov (nominative singular) may be from one or other of the stem-endings ovr and ov. if from the latter, it belongs to the third class. Thus, éxo», from éxovr-, has three terminations ; but cddpav, from cwdpov-, only two.
By far the largest and most important class of adjectives in this division are those in -ys, neut. -es, where the stem-ending ¢s is not changed into os in the nominative and accusative singular, as in the corresponding class of substantives (§ 29, iv.), but where similar contractions to those of nouns take place in the other cases.
41, Parapicms or tHE Turrp Form,
adnbes-, true.
SINGULAR. M. and F. N. N. dAnOys adnoés G. (dAnb€os) aXnOots dAndods D. (aXAnOEi) ANODE? aAnbet A. (dAnOéa) GdnOq adnbés v. ddnbés adndés PLURAL. M..and F. N. N. (adAnOées) ddnOets (arkyOéa) ddrnOF G. (ddAnOéwv) ddAndav GAndav D. adnOéoi(v) adnbéor(v) A. (dAnOéas) ddnOeis (aAnOéa) ddnOA V. (ddAnO€es) GAndets (GAnOéa) ddAni
42 ADJECTIVES—COMPARISON. , [§41.—
cappov-, sober-minded.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. and F. N. M. and F. N. N. oddpov cGdpov ooddpoves ooddpova G. oddpovos addpovos codppdvev cwppovev D. oddporvr tdgporr cdppoct cdppoct A. oddpova ocdppov coppovas odppova ‘Vv. oddpov oOppov ooppoves odppova
To this class belong comparatives in wy. (See § 44.)
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
42. There are two regular methods of forming the Greek comparative and superlative.
The first and most usual is by adding to the stem of the positive the further stem-ending repo- for the comparative, taro- for the superlative. These forms are then declined exactly like the first form of adjectives:
Thus, from morés, faithful, stem moro-, we have— Comparative, nom. sing. miordrepos, microrépa, muatdrepor. Superlative, nom. sing. moréraros, miorordrn, muordratov.
From ddnOis, true, stem &dnbes-
Comparative, ddnOéarepos, ddnbeorépa, dAnbéorepor. Superlative, ddnbécraros, ddnbeordtn, adnbéorarov. Adjectives of the first class which have a short syllable before the stem-ending o- change this vowel into a. Thus, copds, wise, makes— Comparative, copwrepos, copwrépa, coparepor. Superlative, cod¢draros, copwratn, coperaror. From véos, new, we have in like manner— Comparative, vearepos, vewrépa, vewrepor. Superlative, vedraros, vewrdrn, vedrarov.
Accentuation.—Comparatives and superlatives of this form are always proparoxytone, except when the final syllable is long; then paroxytone, In other words, the accent is thrown back as far as possible,
§ 43. ] ADJECTIVES—COMPARISON, - 43
43. The second form of comparison is by adding, generally to an abbreviated form of the positive stem, -iev (stem-ending vov-) for the comparative, and -wros (stem-ending wro-) for the superlative.
EXAMPLES. taxvs, swift, raxlov,* TaxXLoTos aicxpés, disgraceful, aicxior, aioxioros kadés, fair, Ka\Xlov, KaAALoTos peyas, great, peifov (for peyloy), peyoros
Accentuation.—In these, as in other comparative and superlative forms, the accent is thrown back as far as possible.
44. ParapiGcM OF COMPARATIVES IN -tov OR -ov.
These follow the third form of adjectives (see cdppav, § 41), but are sometimes contracted by the omission of the v before a or ¢ and the combination of this vowel with the o of the stem. This con- traction is, however, infrequent in the New Testament.
peiC@v, petCov, greater.
SINGULAR. M. and F. N. N. peiCov petCov G. pelCovos pelCovos D. petovr pelCove A. pelCova or pelo petCov Vv. petcov petov PLURAL. M. and F. N. N. peloves or pel ous pelCova or pelo G. pet(ovev perCovav D. pelCoor(v) pelCoor(v) A. petCovas or pelous petCova or peivw ve pelCoves or pelCous pelCoves or pelCovs
* See John xx. 4, In classic Greek, @dértwy is the form generally used,
44 ADJECTIVES—COMPARISON. — [§ 465.
45. To this form of comparison belong several irregular
comparatives and superlatives, of which the following list will suffice :—
adyoOds, good, comp. Bedrior, sup. BeArioros 9 ~«—- Kpeloowv, » Kpatioros
xaxés, bad, » —~Kakiov, 9) KaKLoTos
» xelpar, 9 © Xelptorros 5» puxporepos (regular
» €Adooor,
puxpds, litéle, 9» €AdXLoTOS =
» ooor, 9)“ WKLOTOS
Todvs, MANY, 54, ‘TAciwy OF mA€wv, 5, MAcioTos
Some adjectives, it will be seen from the above, have an alterna- tive comparison, having recourse to different roots for the purpose. The respective forms are now interchangeable, or nearly so. For
shades of difference between them, see Vocabulary and the Chapter ~ on Synonyms.
46. The following comparatives and superlatives have no answering positives :—
(From ava, adv. up) dvorepos, upper ; averaros, topmost. (From xdro, adv. down) xarwtepos, lower ; xatdraros, Lowest. (From éca, adv. within) éoarepos, ner ; éowratos, inmost (From zpé, prep. before) mpdrepos, former ; mparos, first.
Many of these forms are but seldom used,
4'7. Empuasis in CoMPARISON.
(a) An emphatic comparative is made by the adverb paddov, more. So Mark ix. 42, caddy eorw aire padrov, “it is far better for him.” The same adverb is sometimes prefixed to a compara- tive, as in Mark vii. 36, paddAov mepioadrepor,' “ much (lit. more) the more abundantly.” In Phil. i. 23, yet another adverb of intensity is affixed to paXAov with the comparative, rodAG paddov xkpeiooor (lit, “by much the more better”). Compare “most unkindest
§ 47. | ADJECTIVES—COMPARISON — EXERCISE. 45
cut of all” in Shakspeare (Julius Cesar, iii. 2). So Psa. ix. 2 (Prayer Book version) “‘O Thou Most Highest.”
(b) Another form of securing emphasis is by affixing a compa- rative termination to a comparative or superlative form. Thus, from peifov, greater (3 Ep. John 4), pec{orépay odk exw xapdy, “I have no greater (more greater) joy ;” and from é\dxioros, least (Eph. iii. 8), T® €haxtoTorép@ mdvtov Tov dyiwy, well rendered in E. V., “less than the least of all saints.”
Exercise 7.—Additional Adjectives, for Practice.
Selected from the ‘‘Sermon on the Mount.”
First Form. dytos, holy TTwXOs, poor, pauper adikos, unjust oTevds, Narrow apxaios, ancient tédevos, full-grown, perfect xa0apds, pure davepds, evident movnpds, wicked. dpovimos, prudent
Seconp Form.
dras, dnxaca, &rar, all, altogether peéAas, méeAaiva, pedav, black mdatvs, Thareta, TAaTY, broad
TuirpD Form. &omag, -ayos, rapacious | éAenpwr, -ovos, merciful
In practising with these forms, they should be combined with the nouns of the previous Exercises. The adjectives should also be put into the different forms of the comparative and superlative. Almost countless combinations will thus result, by which the learner, either with or without the aid of an instructor, may become versed in these parts of speech,
\
46 | NUMERALS. [§ 48.
NUMERALS.
48. Tue Carpinat NumBErs.
(a) For the signs of the respective numbers, the letters of the Alphabet are used, according to the listin § 1. When a letter is employed numerically, an acute accent is appended, Thus, a', 1 ; 8, 2,and soon. To express thousands, an accent is placed beneath,
a, 1,000; , 2,000; 4, 10,000, &e.
() It will be seen that the places of some numbers are vacant, owing to letters having dropped, in very ancient times, out of the Greek Alphabet : the Digamma (F) having come between e and ¢; while the space between m and p was occupied by Koppa (0), a guttural with a hard 4-sound, the original of the Latin and Eng- lish letter g. As the alphabet ends with o’, 800, another discarded letter, Sampi (7%) was used for 900.* Three signs have therefore been added, as follows: ¢’ (the sign of a double consonant, sé, used instead of F), 6; 0’, 90; 7, 900.
(c) Combinations of tens and units, or of hundreds, tens, and units, are expressed, not as in our Arabic numeration, by the collocation of unit-signs, but by addition. Thus, ca’, 11; 8’, 12; xy’, 23; pd’, 104; awén’, 1868; xés’ (Rev. xiii. 18), 666. In these expressions, the numeral accent is only written ‘sai excepting with thousands.
49. The cardinal numbers, «fs, one; dv0, two; tpets, three; téacapes, four, are declined as follows. The rest are inde- clinable up to two hundred, which, with the other hundreds, follows the plural of the first form of adjectives in -o, -a, -a,
. 4 - els, pla, &y (stem, €V-), one.
M. F. N. M. F. N. nN. els pla éy D. €évi pea évt G. évds puas évds A. éva plav éy
* Hebrew students will recollect that these are the places of Vau, Koph, and Shin respectively.
§ 50. | "NUMERALS, 47
Like eis are declined its compounds, oddels, no one (absolutely), and pndeis, no one (hypothetically). The accentuation of all three is irregular, as seen above.
dvo, two. nN. G.* and a. dvo | D. . dvai(v)
tpets, tpla, three.
M. and F. N. M. and F. N. N. Tpeis Tola D. Tprol(v) tpiot(v) G. Tplov TPLOV A. Tpets Tpia
Téaoapes, TEcoapa, four.
M. and F. N. M. and F. N. N. Téooapes Téooapa D. tTéocapo.(v) Téccapor(y) G. Tecodpev TETTAPOV A, TETOOp.s Tevoapa
50. Tue Orpinat NuMBERS.
For jirst, the superlative form mpéros (§ 46), is used. The suc- ceeding ordinals are derived from the stem of their cardinal num- bers, and are declined like adjectives of the first form. Cardinal numbers are sometimes used instead of ordinals in reckoning the days of the week, &c. (See SynrTax.)
51. Taste oF CARDINALS AND ORDINALS.
CARDINAL. ORDINAL. 1, eis, pla, Ev mpatos, first 2, dvo devrepos, second 3, . Tpets, Tpla tplros, third 4, Tégoapes, TETTApA téraptos, fourth 5, TEVTE méuntos, fifth
* In classic Greek the gen. is dvoiv or dveiy (dual forms.) So also the dative, sometimes.
100, 200, 300, 400, 500,
NUMERALS.
CARDINAL.
ef
€ f
énTa
> ,
bxT@
3
evvea
déxa
Evdeka
d0dexKa, Or Sexadvo (Acts xix. 7)
TpioKaloeKa
Tecoapeckaideka, or dSexa- técoapes (Matt. i. 17)
mevrekaideka, Or Seka TEVTE (John xi. 18)
e
exkxaldexa
.4
emraxaldeka
éxtoxaldexa, or déxa Kal éxT@ (Luke xiii. 4)
évveaxaloeka
etxoot(v)
elkoot kal els, pla, ev
elkoot Kal dvo
TplakOvTa
TEcoapaKovTa
TEVTHKOVTA
é&jxovra
€BdopunKovTa
dydonKovra
évevnKovTa
éxarov
diaKdotoL
- / | TPLAKOOLOL
v / TETPAKOTLOL ‘TEevTaKdctot
sg 51.
ORDINAL. €xtos, sixth EBdouos, seventh dydoos,* eighth évvatos, ninth tenth Evdéxatos etc.
d€Karos, dwoeKaros
TploKadéKaTos TETTApAKaLoEeKaTos
/ MEVTEKALOEKATOS
© ld EKKQLOEKATOS
: ETTTAKALOEKATOS OKT@KQLOEKATOS
évveakaidéxaros elkooTos
eixoords Kal mpatos eixooTos Kal SevTEpos Tp\aKooTOs TEeToApaKooTos MEVTNKOOTOS eEnxooros €BdounKoords dydonKxoords évevnKkoortos éxaToorTos dvaxociooTds TplakooLooTos TETTApAaKoTLoaTOS TEVTAKOTLOOTUS
NUMERALS.
§ 51.) 49 CARDINAL. ORDINAL. 600, éLaKOoLOL é£aKootooTds 700, EMTAKOTLOL émTAKOGLOOTOS 800, bKTAKOTLOL 6KTAaKOTLOGTOS 900, €vaKOotoL évaxoo.ocTos 1,000, XtALoe xtALooros 2,000, duoxfALot dutxtALogTos 3,000, TpLoxtAuot TplLoxXtALooTos 4,000, TETPAKLOX tALOL TETPAKLOXLALOOTOS 10,000, puptoe pupltooTos REMARK.
In compound numbers, the largest is placed first,* and the
smaller follow in order, with or without the conjunction kat, and. The smaller numbers are in many copies treated as enclitics, and attached to the larger as one word.
EXAMPLES.—Teocapdkovra dv0, “ forty-two” (Rev. xi. 2, xiii. 5) ; éxarov sevtnkovra tpiov, “of a hundred and fifty-three” (John xxi. 11); Opdvos eikoot réacapes, “twenty-four thrones” (Rev. iv. 4); reooapdkovta kai é& ereow, “for forty-six years” (John ii. 20); erav dySonkovrareacdper, “of eighty-four years” (Luke ii. 37); déka cat oxt® érn, “ eighteen years” (Luke xiii. 16); ra évevnxovraevvéa, “ the ninety-nine” (Matt. xviii. 12; Luke xv. 4).
‘52. DistriputivE NumBeErs.
The distribution or repetition of a number is variously expressed. In Mark vi. 7, the simple cardinal is repeated: d8%0 dvo, “two and two.;” Luke x. 1, for the same thing, more classically employs a preposition, dvd 6v0; Mark xiv. 19, and John viii. 9, combine another preposition with the cardinal : efs xa «fs, “one by one.”
* The rule in classic Greek is to place the smaller number first, Re kal, or the larger without xa).
50
NUMERALS. [§ 52.
Exercise 8.—Numbers.
1. Interpret the following numerical symbols :—@, «’, «8, us’, pd’, TAB’, ZQG, voe', wra’, Chpy’, BoB’, wr", xn’.
2. [Vocabulary.—épa, -as, howr; jpépa, -as, day; odSBarov, -ov (lit. sabbath), week, sing. or plur. ; piv, unvds, m. month ; eros, -ovs, n. year; m\eiov, comp: adj. more; kal, and; #, or; ev (prep., proclitic), im, governing the dative. ]
Translate the following :—
1.
9. 10.
In oO — & bw
> »* , €v €TeEL TEVTEKALOEKATO.
> at A ~ & - TO pyvl TO Exto. . 7) pa n Sexarn. : €v T@ evi kat EEakociooTe Eret, ev TO SevTépw pnvi M4 t @ ? ry PS BP) 7 . 1 pia (jpépa) rév caBBdrey. (See John xx. 1, &e.) . 2} mpatn caBBarov. (See Mark xvi. 9.)
7H tpitn npepa. Supply on, to express the force of the dative.
jpépar mAciovs xt 7) Seka. Supply than, after the com- parative. : Siaxdaror €BdoprKovra €&.
od > , id €rn oyOonkovra Téocapa.
3. Render the following into Greek :—
i, 2. 3. 4, 5.
Thirty years.
Eleven months.
In the fourth month, on the sixth day. (See 7, above.) Twelve hours in the day.
On the first day of the week.*
* In what two ways might jirst-and week respectively be expressed? See 5, 6, above.
§ 53. | PRONOUNS—PERSONAL. 51
CuarteR IV. PRONOUNS.
53. Persona PRonovuns.
These are divided into (1) the simple substantive-pronoun, (2) the reflexive, and (3) the adjective-personal or possessive.
The Substantive Pronouns of the first Two Persons.
First person— | Second person— SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. eyo, I nmets, We ov, thou duets, you G. “od or pov = yuan god or cov DOV D. €uolor po. = Hiv got or cot dpty A. pe or pe meas | o€ OF oe jpas
Accentuation.—In the singular, genitive, dative, and accusative, the unemphatic pronoun is enclitic. (See § 6.)
54. For the third personal pronoun, he, she, tt, the New Testament employs the three genders of the adjective-pronoun abtos, self (airo-, -a-).
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. F. , N. b) / > / > 4 > > , > , N. avtds avy avTé avtot avral avTa G.. avrod = avtns ~—s adrod avTov avTav auTov D. avT@ avri) avT@ avTots avtats adrois > ‘ > / > 4 > 7 > / b] / A. avTov avTny atrtd avTovs avTas aura
The nominative of this pronoun, when used in the personal sense, is always emphatic.
vf
52 PRONOUNS—REFLEXIVE AND POSSESSIVE. [§ 55.
55. ReEFLeExivE Pronouns.
These are formed by the combination of the personal pronouns with the oblique cases of atrés.. In the singular, the two are written as one word. :
SINGULAR. SINGULAR. G. épuavrod, -js, of myself ceavtod, -js, of thyself D. e“avT@, -7, to myself ceavt@, -7, to thyself
A. épaurov, -nv, myself (obj.) | ceavrdyv, -nv, thyself (ob}.) The plurals of these forms are written separately. Thus, jpar aitav, of ourselves ; iptv adrois, to yourselves, &c.
Third person (from the old stem, &, him), of himself, herself, itself, &.—
SINGULAR. PLURAL. M. F. N. M. F. N. G. €éavtod. éavtns éavTod €avTGv éavTav éavTav D. €av7d EavTH EavT@ €avtois €avtais €avrtois A. €avtév €avTny €éavTo €avtovs éavtds €avTd
This reflexive pronoun is sometimes written without the é as atrov, airdv, &c., and is only distinguished from the cases of airds by the aspirate. This must be very carefully marked.
Where there is no risk of ambiguity, this reflexive pronoun may be used for the first and second persons likewise. Thus, év éavrois, “in ourselves” (Rom. viii. 23); riv éavréy cwrnpiay, “ your own salvation” (Phil. ii. 12.)
56. PossEssivzE, or ADJECTIVE-PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
(a) These are declined precisely like adjectives of the first form, and are as follows :—
First person, yds, enn), €ndv, my. " TMETEPOS, Huerepa, TuerEepov, OUP. Second person, ovs, on, ody, thy.
» buérepos, tperépa, tperepor, YOur.
§ 56.] PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE AND DEMONSTRATIVE. 53
(b) There is no possessive pronoun in the New Testament for the third person singular or plural, the genitive case of airés or of éavrod being used instead. Thus, vids éavrod, or abrov, his own son, 1.¢., the son of the person who is-subject of the sentence ; vids adrod, his son, t.¢., the son of another person. In Heb. i. 3, r@ pyyare ris Suvdpews abrod is “by the word of His own power,” 1e., that of Christ himself; airot, the reading of some editors, would denote “of His power,” 2.¢., that of God the Father. Again, 1 John iii. 3, tiv edmida en’ arto, “the hope in* Him,” 7e., in Christ, not airé, which would have referred the hope to the subject of the sentence, “every one.”
(c) The genitive cases of the other personal pronouns are also used most frequently with the force of the possessive.
5'7. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
The chief original demonstrative was the article, already given (§ 12), and all other demonstrative pronouns are formed upon its model.
They are—(a) dde, de, rdde, this (here).
‘(b) obros, atrn, odro, this (near).
(c) exeivos, éxeivy, éxetvo, that (yonder).
(d) 6 airés, 7 airy, ro abrd, the same. (a) 68e is simply the article declined with the enclitic de. (6) obros is thus declined (stem, rovro-).
SINGULAR. © PLURAL. M. F. N. M « Fs N. e a a a a re N. ovros atrn TOTO ovToL avrat TavTa G. TovTov TavrTns Tovrov ToUTwy TovTwY ToOvTeY D. TovT@ ta’Tn TovTo TovTos TavTats Tovrors A. TovTov tavtyy TodvrTo TovTovs TavTas TadtTa
Care must be taken to distinguish the feminine of the nomina-
tive singular and plural, airy, adrat, from the corresponding cases of avutdés, V1Z. avTn, avrai,
AY
* The preposition employed in this passage further marks this meaning.
i
a 54 PRONOUNS—DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE. _ [§ 57.
(c) exeivos is declined exactly like the article.
(a) 6 airés in all its cases is only airés (§ 54), with the definite article prefixed. The neuter plural, nominative and accusative, is sometimes written raird, being distinguished by the coronis over the d (§ 3 43), as well as by the accent, from raira, these neuter plural of odros.
(e) The demonstrative pronouns of quality, quantity (number), and degree, are declined like (6) preceding :—-.
Quality, rowdros, roatrn, Towiro, such. Quantity, rocodres, rocavtn, TocodTo, 80 great. Number, rocotra rocaidrat, TogauTa, 80 Many. \ Degree, rndtKxodros, rnAtkatrn, THALKodTo, 80 very great.
The last-mentioned pronoun is found only in 2 Cor. i. 10; Heb. i. 3; James ili. 4; Rev. xvi. 18.
58. Tue RELative Pronowun.
(a) The relative és, 7, 6, who or which, is thus declined :—
SINGULAR. ; PLURAL, M. F. N. M. F. N. N. Os q 3 ot ai G. ov 7s ob ov ov Ov D. © H) © Os) 7 ges ois A. Ov hv 6 ous ds &
(b) The similarity between this pronoun and the article will be seen at once. In the nominative singular feminine and the nomi- _ native plural masculine and feminine, the only difference is that the article is proc/itic. The stem of the relative is 6-, while that of the article is to-.
(c) An indefinite relative, whoever, whatever, is made by com- bining the enclitic ms with és, 7, 4. Both parts of the word are devlined, as follows :—
§ 58.] |PRONOUNS—RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE. 55
SINGULAR, PLURAL, M. F. N. M. F. N. isd iad isd if ef e N. .doTls TLS 6,Tt oirwes airwes driva G. oUuTWWOsS oTWos ovTWoSs OVTWOV OVTWaV OVTIWO?Y & a D. OTWLe = TWE OTE oloriot alotice olorior A. OvTWa fvtTwa 4,Tt ovotivas dotiwas arwa
The nominative and accusative neuter singular is divided as above (sometimes by a space without the comma), to distinguish the word from the conjunction én, that.
The genitive masculine singular is sometimes written drov, used in the New Testament only in the adverbial phrase ws drov, as long as, until (Matt. v. 25, &c.).
(2d) Sometimes the relative is declined with the particle -aep (marking emphatic identity), and means the very one who. Thus (Mark xv. 6) évrep jrotvro, the very person whom they demanded. Other indeclinable suffixes are often used, e. g., dye (Rom. viii. 32), esymrote (John y. 4). (See Synrax, on the Particles.) For the relative adverb od, consult § 129.
(e) Derivative relative pronouns are employed to express quality, quantity, and number. Quality, ofos, such as. Quantity, dcos, so great as. Number, goo, plural of écos, so many as.
Also the relative of degree, jrixos, of what a size, used only in uwo passages (Col. ii. 1; James iii. 5).
59. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
(a) The simple interrogative is ris; ri; who? or what? The declension of this pronoun is identical with that of the indefinite ris (§ 13), except that in the interrogative the t of the stem syllable is accented throughout, the dissyllabic forms being paroxytone.
For the adverbial interrogative form, pir, see § 134, ¢.
(6) Other interrogative forms are employed, correlative ‘to the
g
56 PRONOUNS—INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE. [§ 89.
relative pronouns under § 58, e, and, like them, denoting quality, quantity, number, and degree. ‘They all prefix the letter w- to the © relative forms.
Quality, woitos, of what kind ?
Quantity, récos, how great ?
Number, réca, how many ?
Degree, mhixos, how great ? used in the New Tes- tament only indirectly: Gal. vi. 11, “with what large letters” (probably to mark emphasis) ; Heb. vii. 4.
(c) Direct interrogatives are often themselves used in the indirect construction, as John v. 13, “ He that was healed knew not who (ris) it was.”
(d) The properly indirect interrogatives prefix the letter 6- to the direct forms beginning with the letter +. ‘Ozoios, of what kind ? is the only one of these employed in the New Testament.
60. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
(a) The ordinary indefinite pronoun ms, any, a certain one, has been given, § 13. The genitive and dative singular are ocra- sionally rov, rm, enclitic.
(6) Compounds of this pronoun are oiris, pyris, no one. For the distinction between them, see § 134, b, and compare under ¢is, § 49.
(c) The old indefinite pronoun déiva, such a one, used with the article, is once found (Matt. xxvi. 18).
61. DisrrRIBuTIvE PRONOUNS.
These are mostly declined like adjectives, and are as follows :—
(a) dos, An, Ado, another (numerically). Plur. dro, dat, addr, others. (0) érepos, érépa, érepov, other (different).
Plur. érepoi, repair, €repa, others.
For the force of the article with these pronouns, see SynTAX.
§ 61. ] PRONOUNS —TABLE OF CORRELATIVES. 57
(¢) adddnrwv, of each other, only used in the genitive, dative, and ' accusative plural.
(d) ékacros, éxdorn, Exacrov, each, used only in the singular; with doubtful exceptions, in Phil. ii. 4; Rev. vi. 11.
62. The number of the pronouns being so limited, it is unnecessary to give exercises for further practice. The fore- going forms and inflections must be very accurately com- mitted to memory, and the distinctions between similar words carefully marked.
The following table of correlative pronouns will be found useful as & summary :—
Demonstre- | netative, | Emterto-| "itterroe | Je ; gative. * Simple .... | otros bs tls ont baie Quality .... | rovodros ofos motos | Omotos Quantity | rocodros éc0s TOoos ae dss Degree .... | tyAtkodros | Aikos vocy, | RNALKOE 1 cece ‘
58 ‘THE VERB—VOICE AND MOOD. — [§ 63.
v Cuarrer V. THE VERB. 63. Tue Voices.
There are four principal things which verbs are employed to predicate concerning a given subject :—
1. Its state.
2. Its action upon an object.
3. Its action upon itself.
4, The action of the object upon it.
Hence arises a fourfold division of verbs: into newter (or intran- sitive), active (or transitive), reflexive, and passive.
The Greek language employs a threefold modification of the verbal stem to express these varieties of meaning. The modifications, or ‘ voices,” are named as follows :—
The Active Voice, as Avo, I loosen.
The Reflexive, or Middle Voice, as \vopa, I loosen myself. The Passive Voice, as \toua, J am loosened.
Neuter verbs borrow the Active or the Middle form, as récya, I suffer ; Botdoua, I wish.
64. Tuer Moons.
The Greek verb has four modes, or moods :* the Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive.
1. The Indicative asserts absolutely, as €\vca riv deopeov, J loosened the prisoner.
2. The Imperative commands, as dvere rdv déops0r, Loosen ies the prisoner !
* Compare ‘‘ Handbook of the English Tongue,” § 277.
-
§ 64.] MOODS OF THE VERB. «59
3. The Subjunctive asserts conditionally, as drav Avante rdv décprov, when you have loosened the prisoner. A subjunctive clause, it is evident, requires another to complete its meaning ; hence the name of the mood, the “subjoined” mood. It is often also called the “ Conjunctive.”
4, A division of the Subjunctive is called the Optative Mood, because sometimes employed to express a wish, as in the frequent phrase, pi yévoro (rendered KE. V. “God forbid”) may tt not be / lt is really the subjunctive of the historical tenses. Thus, in the phrase, He asks if it be so, the verb be, subjoined to the principal tense “asks” (present), would, in Greek, be subjunctive: He asked if it were so, would require were to be in the optative after the historical tense “asked” (aorist). For further detail, the Syntax must be consulted.
5. For the Interrogative, either the Indicative or the Subjunctive may be employed, according to the nature of the question. (See Synrax.)
6. The Infinitive expresses the action or state denoted by the verb, as in itself an object of thought, as Avew Tov déopuov, to loosen the prisoner, i.¢., “the act of loosening him.” The Infinitive, it is plain, partakes of the nature of a substantive, and is often called the verbal noun; being, moreover, employed as an uninflected singular neuter, with the article in all its cases. (See Synrax.)
7. To the Moods must be added the Participles, which are verbal adjectives, and agree with substantives expressed or understood, as 6 décpuos Avoecis, the prisoner, being loosened ; 6 Aedovpevos, he who has been washed.
As the Infinitive “ partakes” the nature of the substantive, and the Participle that of the adjective, they are sometimes both called participials. It is, however, more common to distinguish them by the phrase “the infinitive verb,” the remaining moods being known as “the finite verb.”
Both the Infinitive and the Participles are used in different tenses, for which see the paradigm of the Verb.
60 TENSES OF THE VERB. : [§ 65.
65. Tue TEnsEs.
a. Time is present, past, and future. In each, an action may be predicated, as indefinite (i.c., having regard to the act itself rather than to the time), imperfect (i.e., going on), or perfect (i.e., finished). Hence nine possible tenses, of
which the Greek language has seven, as follows :—
_
Indefinite state. Imperfect state.
Perfect state. Present time | ——— (I write) | Present (Iam writ- | Perfect (I have writ- ing) ten) Past time ... | Aorist (I wrote) | Imperfect (I was | Pluperfect (I had writing) written) Future time. ; Future (I shall (I shall | Future-perfect* (I write) be writing) shall have written)
b. More detailed exposition of these tenses, the names of which the table gives in italics, will be found in the Syntax, where it will also be explained how the meaning of the deficient tenses, the Present Indefinite and the Future Imperfect, is supplied.
The Aorist (dépicros, ndefinite) is properly an indefinite past, but it has other uses, which will also be afterwards explained.
c. Of the above, the Present, Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect, are called principal tenses; the Imperfect, Aorist, and Pluperfect, historical tenses.
d. The tenses are usually arranged as follows :— 1. Present, as \tw, J loosen. 2. Imperfect, as ¢dvov, J was loosening.
3. Future, as \ico, J shall or will loosen. 4, Aorist, as ¢dvoa, I loosened.
* Very rare. See d, 7.
§ 65. | FORMS OF THE VERB. . eae
5. Perfect, as \étvca, I have loosened. 6. Pluperfect, as (é)AcAvcew, I had loosened.
7. Future-perfect, found only in the passive or middle, AeAvoopa, L shall have been loosened.
66. Numbers AND PERSONS.
There are in the Greek verb three persons, corresponding with those in other languages, and three numbers, the singular, dual, and plural, of which the dual is disused in the New Testament. (See § 9.) Only the singular and plural, therefore, are given.
67. CoNJUGATIONS.
There are two principal forms of conjugation. In the most ancient, the first person singular, present indicative active of the verb has the termination pt; in the later, the termination o The latter being the easier, the more symmetrical, and embracing the far larger number of verbs, is generally given first, and is called the First Conjugation, The other is termed the Second Conjuga- tion, or, more generally, the verb in -pt.
REMARK.
The first person singular, present indicative active, is the form of the verb given in almost all Vocabularies and Lexicons, and is generally explained by the English infinitive. Thus, Adw, J loosen ; more pro- perly, J am loosening.
68. Tue VERBAL STEM.
The chief thing necessary to be known in a verb is the stem, which is easily found by abstracting from any given verbal form the adjuncts of mood and tense. Thus, a glance over the forms of the verb “to loosen” in the preceding section will at once disclose its stem, Av-.
Additions to the stem are made either at its beginning or its end. An addition at the beginning is termed augment or reduph-
62 THE VERB-—-AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. [§ 68.
cation ; an addition at the end, the inflexional termination. The former belongs alike to the two conjugations; in the latter, the conjugations vary.
69. AvuGMENT AND REDUPLICATION.
a. The augment characterises the historical tenses (§ 65, c) in the indicative mood.
(1) Verbs beginning with a consonant prefix the letter é called the syllabic augment. Thus, from Avo, imperfect Avoy, aorist Avea.
(2) Verbs beginning with a short vowel augment by lengthening it: & into 4, « into y- (in a few cases into e-), t- into tL, 3- into 3-, and o- into w-. This is termed the temporal augment. Verbs beginning with the (‘changeable ”) diphthongs at, av, o, are aug- mented by changing the former vowel. Thus, a- becomes q-, av- is changed to nv-, and o- becomes @-. Sometimes, also, ev- is aug- mented into nv. The other diphthongs and the long vowels are (“‘ unchangeable,” 7.¢.) incapable of augment.
b. The reduplication, 7.e., the repetition of the initial consonant of the stem with ¢, belongs to those tenses which mark a com- pleted action (the perfect, pluperfect, and future-perfect), and is continued through all the moods. It takes place, in general, only when a verb begins with a single consonant or a mute and a liquid. Thus AéAvxa, perf. from Avo; Be-BovdAcvca, from Bovdevw ; yé-ypadha, - from
In verbs beginning with a vowel, only the Temporal Augment is employed in these tenses, but it is continued through all the moods. To distinguish this augment from that of the historical” tenses, it is sometimes called the improper reduplication.
c. Verbs compounded with prepositions almost invariably take the augment or reduplication after the preposition and at the beginning of the proper verbal stem. Thus, from ék-dva, to set free, comes the Aorist é¢éavea (é« changed into éf by § 3, 4, 1), and from dra-hio, to dismiss, the Aorist is dréAvoa, the o disappearing by
- § 69.] THE VERB—-ITS INFLECTIONS. 63
elision before the augment vowel (§3, h, 2). The prepositions mept and mpd, however, do not elide their vowels; and a few other exceptions will be noted in their place.
-
70. INFLEXIONAL TERMINATIONS,
a. As a verb is distinguished by voice, mood, tense, number, and person, five different elements will evidently concur in fixing the termination in any given case. Thus, if the phrase, We were being loosened, is to be translated into Greek, it will be necessary to fix ‘the personal ending” of the first person plural passive, the “tense-characteristic ” of the imperfect, and the “modal vowel” of the indicative.
6. The Personal endings are no doubt the fragments of ancient personal pronouns, affixed to the verb ;* but the original forms are in a great measure disused or lost. The attentive student will observe the recurrence of -s in the second person singular, and of -pev, -re, in the first and second persons plural, throughout the active. It will be seen, also, that in the active principal tenses the third person plural ends in -ot (-cw before an initial vowel in the next word), and in the historical tenses in -v. In the passive and middle, the normal forms are, for the principal tenses— Sing., -pat, -car, -rat; Plur., -peOa, -00e, -vrar; historical tenses— Sing., -pyv, -0o, -ro; Plur., -pela, ofc, -vro. The Summaries of Terminations which follow will suggest other points of comparison,
'71. 'TENSE-CHARACTERISTICS.
The Tense-characteristics most important to be noticed are the following :—
a. The Future and (First) Aorist Active have -c-. So from the verbal stem morev- we have the Future stem motevo-. When’ the verbal stem ends with a short vowel, it is generally lengthened in the Future: thus, from Av- is formed Ave-; from Tipe, rYyAo- (see § 3, e); and from Sydo-, Syrac-.
* See Miiller’s ‘‘Lectures on the Science of Language,” Ist ser., espe- cially p. 272, seq.
64 THE VERB—ITS INFLECTIONS. [§ 71.
b. The Perfect and Pluperfect Active take -«-. Thus, movrev- (with the reduplication, § 69, 6), makes wemorevk-. Here also a final stem-vowel is usually lengthened; as from tia-, rerink-, and from 8ydo-, S<Syrox-. But Av- makes Acdi«-.
ce. The Future and (First) Aorist Passive take -@-, lengthening the vowel. where lengthened in the Perfect Active. Thus, from the verbal stems already given, muorrev0-, X¥0-, TiyO-, Syrwd-.
d. In the Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive, the normal forms (see § 70, 6) are affixed to the verbal stem without any connecting letter.
The successive paradigms will show how the tense-characteristics are modified by the consonants of the verbal stem.
72. Mopat VowELs.
The modal vowels will be sufficiently traced in the Summary of Terminations. It will be especially noted how the Subjunctive throughout lengthens the vowels of the Indicative, and how the Optative abounds in diphthongal forms. In the third person plural, it will also, be seen that the Subjunctive takes the termina- tion of the principal tenses, the Optative of the historical.
The Imperfect and Pluperfect tenses occur only in the Indi- cative Mood ;* the Future, also, is absent from the Imperative and Subjunctive.
S73, TERMINATIONS OF THE SEVERAL Moops AnD TENSES.
The following terminations are, in the simplest form of verbs in - -, affixed directly to the verbal stem, and will all be found exem- plified in the conjugation of moretdo. The preliminary study and comparison of the terminations will much facilitate the acquisition of the Verb.
* It will be seen under Synrax that the Optative Mood really is the historical Subjunctive. Hence the Present and Perfect Optative are the_ Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. The ordinary names have, however, been retained to prevent unnecessary difficulty to the learner,
§ 73.] VERBS IN #: THEIR TERMINATIONS. 65 It will be observed that the Middle and Passive Voices are alike in four tenses :—Present, Imperfect, Perfect, and Pluperfect.
Accentuation.—The accent of Verbs is generally thrown as far back as possible. Observe, however, some exceptions in the following
scheme. Indicative Mood. Present Tense. Active— Sing. -o, -S, “EL Plur, -opev, —--ere, -ovei(v).
Middle and Passive—
Sing. -opa, -y*, -erat; Plur, -opeda, -eote, -ovrar,
Imperfect, with Augment. Active— :
Sing. -ov, -s, -e(v); Plur. -opev, — -ere, -0v, Middle and Passive— Sing. -dpnv, -ovt, -ero; Plur. -cpeOa, -er0e, -ovro.
Future (compare Present).
Sing. -ca, ~cers, -oer; Plur. -copev, -oere, -covor(y). Middle—
Sing. -copar, -oy, -oerar; Plur. -odpeba, -cerbe, -covrar,
Active—
(First{) Aorist, with Augment. Active—
Sing. -ca, -cas, -oe(v); Plur. -copev, -care, -cav. Middle— !
Sing. -cdpnv, -cwf, -caro; Plur. -cdpela, -cace, -cavro. Passive—
Sing. -Ony, -Ons, -%; Plur. -Onpev, -Onre, -Onoav.
* Contraction of -eoa:. The contraction into -e: is very unusual.
t+ Contraction of -eco,
t The consideration of the Second Aorist (and the Second Tenses gene- rally) is deferred to §§ 85-90.
§ Contraction of -caco,
66 VERBS IN -®: THEIR TERMINATIONS. [§ 73.
Perfect, with Reduplication. Active— Sing. -xa, -kas, -Ke(v); Plur. -kapev, -Kare, -Kdow(v). Middle and Passiwe— Sing. -pat, -car, -rav; Plur. -peba, -cbe, = -vras,
: Pluperfect, with Reduplication and Augment.* Actwe— « | Sing. -kew, -xes, -ker; Plur. -kepev, -kerre, -Ke(t)oav.
Middle and Passive— Sing. -pyvy, -0o, -ro; Plur. -pea, -o6e, -vro,
Imperative Mood.
Present. Active— Sing. (2nd pers.) -, (3rd pers.) -éra; Plur. -ere, -érworav.t Middle and Passive—
Sing. (2nd pers.) -ov}, (3rd pers.) -€c0o ; Plur. -er0e, -€r8wcav.
First Aorist, without Augment.
Active—
Sing. -coyv, -chTe ; Plur. -care, -céracay. Middle—
Sing. -ca, -cicbe ; Plur. -cace, -rdcbwrav, Passive—
Sing. -Oy7, -BATe ; Plur. -@nr«, OATrocay.
Perfect, with Reduplication (compare Present).
Active — :
Sing. -Ke, Kero ; Plur. -xere, -kérooay. Middle and Passive—
Sing. -oo, -7 Ow ; Plur. -oe, -obwoay.
-—— +.
* Augment generally omitted in the New Testament. + There is an alternative form in -vrwy, Pass. -céwy, seldom used. t Contracted from -evo,
§ 73.] VERBS IN -#! THEIR TERMINATIONS. 67
Subjunctive Mood.
Present. Active— Sing. -o, “18, -13 Plur. -opev, -yte, — -worr(v). Middle and Passive— Sing. -opar, -y, -qrar; Plur. -dpeba, -node, -wvra.
First Acrist, without Augment (compare Present).
Active—
Sing. -ca, -oys, -7y; Plur. -cope, -onre, -cwor(v), Middle—
Sing, -ropar, -0y, -onrat; Plur. -cdpela, -cnobe, -cwvras, Passive—
Sing. -64, -Ojjs, -69; Plur, -Odpev, -Ofjre, — -Boru(v).
Perfect, with Reduplication (compare Present).
Active—
Sing. -Ka, -kys, -ky; Plur. -kopev, -Kyte, -Koor(yv).
Middle and Passive—Made by Perfect Participle with Auxiliary Verb.
Optative Mood.
Present. Active—
Sing. -oupt, -ors, -o1; Plur. -ousev, -otre, —-otev. Middle and Passive—
Sing. -ofynv, -o1, -orro; Plur. -ofpe€a, -ovrbe, -ouvro.
Future (compare Present). Active—
Sing. -coww, -cows, -cot; Plur. -cowev, -covre, -coicv. Middle— Sing. -colpyv, -cowo, -covro; Plur. -colpela, -cowrbe, -cowwvro. Passive— | Sing. -Oncolpyy, -Ohcov, -Ojcouro; Plur. -Syoolpela -Cheroie be, -Ofcoivro,
68.
Active— Sing.
Middle— Sing.
VERBS IN -@: THEIR TERMINATION. [§ 73. First Aorist, without Augment.
-Tat, -cas,-cat; Plur. -camev, -catre, -cavey.*
-caiyny, -caio, -caito; Plur. -caipeda, -carcbe, -cawwro,
_ Passive—
e
Sing.
Active—
-Ociny, -Getns, -Oein; Plur. -Ocinnev, -Oelyre, -Oe’qoav.
Perfect, with Reduplication (compare Present).
Sing. -Kous, -Kows, -Korg Plur. -kourev, -koure, -Kovev.
Middle and Passive—Perfect Participle with Auxiliary Verb.
Active, Active, Active,
Active,
Active,
Infinitive Mood. Present. -ev ; Middle and Passive, -er8ar.
Future. -cav; Middle, -verdar; Passive, -OhrerOar. First Aorist, without Augment. -car; Middle, -cracia ; Passive, -Ojvar.
Perfect, with Reduplication. -kévat ; Middle and Passive, -oar.
Participles. Present. -wv (stem, -ovr-, see $37); f. -ovow; n. -ov. Middle and
Passive, -dpevos, -opévy, -dpevov (see § 34).
Active,
Future. -cwv, -covod, -cov; Middle, -odpevos, -ropévn, -cdpevov ;
Passive, -Onrdpevos, -Onropévy, Onodpevov.
Active,
First Aorist, without Awgment. -vas (stem, -ravr-, see § 37), -caca, -cav; Middle, -rdpevos,
-capévn, -cipevov ; Passive, -Oels (stem, -Oevr-, see § 37), -Octora, -Oév,
* The termination -e:av (AZolic), for third person plural, is found twice in the New Testament (Luke vi. 11; Acts xvii. 27).
§73.] VERBS IN @: TicTeva. 69
Perfect, with Reduplication.
Actwwe, «és (stem, -for-, see $ 38); -kvia, -Kés; Middle and Passive, -pévos, -pévy, -pévov.
The Verbal Adjectives.
Many verbs have, in addition to their passive participles, a kind of participial adjective, to signify capability or duty. The former is generally expressed by the termination -rds, -rh, -rév, appended to the verbal stem ; the latter by the, termination -réos, -réa, -réov. Thus, from Av- may be formed Nirdes capable of being loosened ; Auréos, that ought to be loosened.
/ 4, Parapiem or THE First Consucarion, oR OF “THE VERB IN -o,.”
The verb moredo has been chosen as a model, because it is a characteristic word of the New Testament, and because all its forms contain the unaltered stem. The verb Bovdedva, to’ advise, employed by Kiihner and others, only occurs in the New Testa- ment in the middle voice ; and va, to loosen, chosen by Professor Curtius and Principal Greenwood, though easy to conjugate, has the disadvantage of having the stem long in some forms, and short in others, although unaltered to the eye.
Stem, m/aTev-, to believe or trust ; Mid., to trust one’s sejf or to confide; Pass., to be entrusted.
a. Principal parts.
Present Indicative Active, TLOTEVH Future i, is TLSTEVTO Perfect a TETLOTEVKA
Perfect Indicative, Mid. and Pass., aemtlorevpat (First) Aorist Indicative Passive, émuoredvOnv
To know these five parts thoroughly, with the addition, in many verbs, of the Second Aorist (§§ 86-88), is TO KNOW THE VERB,
<a
THE VERB IN -@: ACTIVE VOICE. [§
Active Voice. INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. I am believing.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLITEVO TLOTEVOMEV TUITEVELS TLOTEVETE TiOTEVEL moTevovaet(y)
Imperfect. I was believing.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. émlotevov eTLOTEVOMEV emlaTeves ETLOTEVETE éniateve(v) , émloTevov
Future. J shall or will believe.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVTW TLOTEVTOMEY TLOTEVOELS TLOTEVOETE TLOTEVTEL _ . meatevoovat(y)
Aorist (First Aorist*). I believed.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. emloTevoa ETLOTEVT AME émlotevoas eTLOTEVTATE émloTevoe(v) éenlorevoay
Perfect. J have believed.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. menlarevKka TETLOTEVKAPLED nenloTevKas TETLOTEVKUTE meToTevKe(V) TeTLOTEVKaCL(V)
Pluperfect. JI had believed.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. ETETLOTEVKELY ETETLOTEVKELLED eremiotedxets ETETLOTEVKELTE ETETLOTEDKEL érreTLoTEvKE(t)oay
* See § 86.
§74.) THE VERB IN -#: ACTIVE VOICE. wt
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. Believe (continuously).
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 2nd pers. wioreve TLOTEVETE 3rd pers. morevéTw TLOTEVETWOAY
Aorist. Believe (at once).
SINGULAR. PLURAL. alorevoov TLOTEVTATE TLOTEVTUTH MLOTEVTATWO AP
Perfect. Have believed (i.e., remain so).
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TETLOTEVKE TETLOTEVKETE TETLOTEVKETO TETLOTEVKETWOAL
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. I may believe.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVW TLOTEVW LEV TLOTEVNS TLOTEUNTE
, 4 TLOTEUN morevact(v)
Aorist. I may believe, or shall have believed.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVO® | TLOTEVT WED TLOTEVTNS | TLOTEVONTE TLOTEvoN | TLoTEvowot(V)
Perfect. I may have believed.
SINGULAR. + ; PLURAL. TETLOTEVKW TETLOTEVKMLEV TETLITEDKNS aoe TETLOTEUKNTE |
TETLOT EDK { TeTLoTEvKwor(i)
THE VERB IN -@: ACTIVE VOICE. «(8 74
=~ a&
OPTATIVE MOOD. (Or, Subjunctive of the Historical Tenses.) Present (or Imperfect). I might believe.
SINGULAR, PLURAL. TLOTEVOUAL TLOTEVOLLED TLOTEVOLS TLOTEVOLTE TLOTEVOL TLOTEVOLEY
Future. J should believe.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. HLOTEVTOUAL , TLOTEVTOWMED TLOTEVTOLS TLOTEVOOLTE TLOTEVTOL TLOTEVTOLED
Aorist. I might or am to believe.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVO ALLL | TLOTEVTALED TioTEevoals | mlaTevoare TioTevoat | TLOTEVoaLEY OF ELaV
Perfect (or Pluperfect). I might have believed.
SINGULAR. | PLURAL. TETLOTEVKOLLL _ TETUOTEVKOLLED METLOTEVKOLS TMETLOTEVKOLTE TETLOTEVKOL TETLOTEVKOLED
INFINITIVE.
Present, miarevew, to believe.
Future, moredvcesv, to be about to believe. Aorist, mioredoat, to believe immediately. Perfect, memorevxévat, to have believed.
PARTICIPLES. Present nom.,‘ micTevwr, miotevovoa, Toteiur, believing;
stem mo-revovr-. Future nom., miorevowy, miorevcovoa, micteveuy, about to
believe ; stem morevrovt-.
§ 74. ] THE VERB IN -@: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 73
Aorist nom., miorevoas, mioretodca, Toreduav, having believed ; stem morevoavr-,
Perfect nom., memiorevxeés, TeTmLoTEVKLIa, TeTLOTEUKCS, having now believed ; stem mwemorevkor-. Middle and Passive Voices—Forms common to both.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. J am confiding (trusting myself), or an being entrusted.*
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVOMAL muorevopeda TLOTEUN , me TustTeverOe TUT EVETAL TLOTEVOVTAL
Imperfect. J was confiding, or was being entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. ETLOTEVOMNY emuoTevopeba eTLOTEVOU emurTever Oe eTLOTEVETO €TLOTEVOVTO
Perfect. I have.confided, or have been entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TeTLOTEVPAL TETLOTEVULEDA mTeTOTEVTAL nenlorevabe TETIOTEVTAL mTEeTLOTEVVTAL
Pluperfect. I had confided, or had been entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. eTETLOTEVLNY evTeTLoTEvpEOa, éemeTHLoTEVTO éevreTIiorevabe éTETLOTEVTO émreTIia TEVVTO
* The collocation am teing is doubtlessly inelegant ; but the true force of the tense could be given in no other way. The Greek language has no present indefinite,
74 THE VERB IN -#: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. |§ 74
IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present. Con/fide, or be thou entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 2nd pers. morevov moTever Oe ord pers. morevecdw tTioTevecOwoav or -écbwv
Perfect. Have confided, or have been entrusted (i.e., remain so).
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TETLOTEVTO TetioTevabe nEemTLOTEVTOM nmetioTevobwoay or -cbwr
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present. I may confide, or be entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVWUAL TLoTEvoueda. 4 U4 TLOTEVN muoTevnode
/ TLOTEVATAL TUGTEVWVTAL
Perfect. I may have confided, or have been entrusted.
SINGULAR. | PLURAL. TETLOTEVLEVOS @* TMETLOTEVAEVOL @ILEV
TETLOTEVJLEVOS 1}S TETLOTEVLEVOL ITE > : = TETLOTEVLEVOS 7) TETLOTEVMEVOL Wot(V)
OPTATIVE MOOD. (Or, Subjunctive of the Historical Tenses.)
Present. JI might confide, or be entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLoTEVvoiuNnV mioTevoipeda TLOTEVOLO miorevoirbe TLITEVOiTO TLITEVOLI'TO
* These forms are made by the perfect participle, with the substantive verb ‘‘¢o be” as an auxiliary,
§ 74.] THE VERB IN -®: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
Perfect. I might have confided, or been entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. METLOTEVEVOS ELNV TETLOTEVEVOL ELNLEV TETLOTEVLEVOS €LNS meTLoTEevpevot ENTE METLOTEVPEVOS €LN | TETMLOTEVKEVOL ELNTAY
INFINITIVE.
Present, mucreverOan, to confide, or be entrusted.
Perfect, wemuctedabat, to have confided, or have been entrusted.
PARTICIPLES,
Present, mucrevdpevos, micTevouern, TmioTevomevoy, confiding,
or being entrusted.
Perfect, memicrevpévos, memioTevuevyn, TemioTevpervor, havin > B be 3
confided, or having been entrusted.
Forms peculiar to the Middle. INDICATIVE MOOD, Future Tense. J shail or will confide.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVTOPAL mTioTevodpeba. TLaTEvoN misTevoerde MLOTEVTETAL TLOTEVOOVTAL
(First) Aorist. J confided.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. emioTEvT apn eTLoTevo dpcda emiorEevow emicTevoacbe emLOTEvTATO eTLOTEVTAVTO
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Aorist. Confide (at once). SINGULAR. PLURAL, 2nd pers. mloTevoat mistTevoacbe
3rd pers. mioTevodcdw mioTevoacOwmoay or -dcbwv
76 THE VERB IN -@: MIDDLE, [§ 74.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Aorist. JI may confide, or shall have confided.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVTOpAAL TloTevoopeba TLTEVON ’ mTLaTevonobe TLOTEVNTAL | TLOTEVTWVTAL
OPTATIVE MOOD, (Or, Subjunctive of the Historical Tenses.) Future. J should confide.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLoTEevcotuny TLoTevoolweba _ MLaTEvooLo TLoTEvooLoOe TLOTEVTOLTO TLOTEVTOLVTO
Aorist. I might, or am to confide.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TioTevoatuny mioTevoalueda TioTEVoALO TLoTEevoacbE TLOTEVTALTO TLOTEVO ALTO
INFINITIVE.
Future, mucretvoecOat, to be about to confide. Aorist, ‘morevcacbat, to confide immediately.
PARTICIPLES.
Future, murevoduevos, mustevoonern, Tictevodpevoy, about to confide.
Aorist, muocrevodpevos, mictevoapévn, TuoTevodwevov, having
confided. | Forms peculiar to the Passive. INDICATIVE MOOD.
(First) Future Tense. I shail be entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. micrevOnoopat miorevdnardpneba murtevOnon murtevOnoerde
4 TLoTEvOnoETaL TioTEvojTovTat
§ 74. ] THE VERB IN -@: PASSIVE. TV?
(First) Aorist. J was entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. emuoTevOnv emLoTEevOnmer emuarevOns eTLaTEVONTE eTtoTEvOn emurTevonoar
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Aorist. Be thou entrusted (at once).
SINGULAR. | PLURAL. 2nd pers. moredvOnre muoTevOnre 3rd pers. morevOitw | mTioTevOnTacay
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. :
Aorist. I may be, or shall have been entrusted.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. TLOTEVOO 3 | TLOTEVOGUEV muaTevOns | TLOTEVONTE muoTEvOn meoTevdasru(v)
OPTATIVE MOOD. Future. J should be entrusted.
SINGULAR. - PLURAL. T.oTevOnoolunv muotevOnooleda TLaTEvOnooLo muotevOnoo0e TioTEVvOncoLTo TioTEvOnoowrTo
Aorist. I might be, or am to be entrusted.
SINGULAR. l PLURAL. miorevbetny | miaTevdcinuey miarevbelns muotevdeinte muorevbely TLOTEVOELEV
INFINITIVE.
Future, risrevOjcecOat, to be about to be entrusted. Aorist, mucrevOqvat, to be entrusted immediately.
78 THE VERB IN -®: EXERCISE. [§ 74.
PARTICIPLES,
Future, mucrevOnoopevos, -n, -ov, about to be entrusted.
Aorist, muorevdeis, -eica, -év, having been entrusted; stem, muorrevbevt:. - VERBAL ADJECTIVE.
TLOTELTOS, -TH, -Tdv, capable of entrusting, or of being entrusted ; muotevteos, -Téa, -Téov, that ought to be entrusted.
75. The learner who has thoroughly mastered the different forms of mioTevo now given, is ready to encounter with com- parative ease the manifold variations of verbs in ». First, however, let the following Exercises be written :—
Exercise 9.—On Pure Uncontracted Verbs.
1. Write out the whole of the regular verb Bovdedw: active, to advise; middle, to deliberate, to advise oneself; passive, to be advised.
2. [Vocabulary of Verbs selected from the “Sermon on the Mount.” —dxoiw, to hear ; Sovdeta, to serve ; diw, to loosen (com- pound derivatives, drohio, to put away; xatradiw, to abrogate) ; morteva, to fast ; mpopyreva, to prophesy ; povetw, to murder. |
Analyse and translate the following forms :—8ovdevew, xaraddoat, ion, nKovoate, hovevoets, povevon, amodvon, amodeAuperny, vnorednre, MNOTEVvOVTES, TpoepnTrevoaper.
Also the following i—Karehoon, dwodeAvrat, morevoov, mepovevkacw, AeAvKevat, KaTadeAvKos, YnOTEVTw, mpopyrevoov, mpodnrevoveat, T po- gyreinre, SedovdevKaper, Sovdevovres, edovdevcev, Sovdevérwoay, amodv- Oevres, arrodeAva Oat, amedvVovTo.
76. The verbs in the foregoing Exercise, as well as the conjugated verb morevw, are all distinguished by a vowel stem-ending, which, in the great majority of cases, is the letter v in a diphthongal or simple form. They are, there- fore, called pure verbs; and inasmuch as the stem appears throughout without contraction or alteration, they are further termed uncontracted,
S640) | PURE VERBS IN -o, 79
To the class of pure uncontracted verbs belong most with the ~ stem-ending v or t, but no others, It is, therefore, necessary to see how the verbal terminations are to be adapted to other kinds of stem ; and to do this thoroughly in the case of all regular verbs, little else is needed than the remembrance and application of the elementary laws of euphony, as stated in § 4.
It must be noted by the learner that, when the terminations of the voices, moods, and tenses are once known, and a very few simple general rules of conjugation impressed on the memory, the acquisition of all the multifarious ‘‘ classes” and ‘‘species” of verbs in -@ is a matter of euphony, and nothing else.
77. Let us take the possible verbal stem-endings according to the alphabet. It will appear that the stem may terminate (1) in a vowel or (2) in a consonant; and that the consonant may be (1) a mute, (2) a liquid, or (3) a double letter. The last may be rejected from the account, as no verbal stems, in fact, do so terminate. We have, then, three main divisions: the pure verbs, tne mute, and the liquid. :
78, Pure Verss.—Speciat Ruts.
a. A verbal stem may end in a, ¢,t, 0, or v; @e., in any short vowel. Those ins and v, the uncontracted, have been considered already,
b. From the rules and tables given under § 3, f, and the partial illustrations of them seen in the nouns and adjectives, it has been seen that when a, «, or o, precedes a vowel, long or short, it is generally contracted with it into one syllable. . Hence, verbal stems ending in these vowels form a second class of pure verbs— viz., the contracted.
c. As, however, it appears from the paradigm that the last letter of the stem precedes a vowel only in the Present and Imperfect tenses, it follows that the contraction will be confined to these parts of the verb, and that there will be no deviation in other parts from the general form of mortedvo.
80 CONTRACTED VERBS IN -, [§ 78,
d. For the Table of Contractions, see §3, f£ Note especially that with -ov the stem-vowel a- makes o-, while « and o- disappear
before the diphthong. In the Infinitive, also, the combination -oe becomes -ovv,
79. The following paradigms will now present no diffi- culty :—_ 1. A-stem, ride, to honour. 2. E-stem, firca, to love. 3. O-stem, d7Ada, to manifest.
Stem, Tiua- pire- OnAo- Active. InDIcATIVE—Present. -@ TLUL@ pire dnrAG ~€us TLLGS ides dnAots ~€ TUL iret dnAot ~opev TLPL@WLEV probe dnAodpev ~ere TULATE pircire dnAovrTeE -over(v) | Tiudaou(v) pidodor(v) dnAoda1(v) Imperfect. &..-ov | érivwr edidouv ed7Aouv -e ériwas eplrets €djAovs “ eriva epider e€d7jAou -opev eTLUL@PEV epiAodpev ednAoduer “ere CTLIMLATE EbiAcire €dnAovre op érluwv ediAovv éd7jAovr ImMPERATIVE—Present. -€ Tia. pire djAov -éro TiLaT@ pireita dnAovTw ~€Te TULATE pidcire dnAodre _ séraray TIaTwoaY pirelrwoav dnAovTwoav
81
§ 79. ] CONTRACTED VERBS IN -@: ACTIVE. Stem, Tiva- pire- dnA0- SupsuncTIvVE—Present. “oO TLL® g pire dn\o ~1s TULAS 3 pris dnAots -1 TUL E pry dnAot ~opev | TIM@HEY pirOpev dnA@pev ~nTe TIWMATE” = > giaAre dnAGTE wooly, | TLudou(y) ra pirrdot(v) dnAGou(v) OprativE—Present. -o, | TIU@pL Or -anv dtAoius or -olny SnAotut or -olnv* -ous TIL@S OF -eNs gidots or -olns dnAots or -ofns eet TYL® OF -GN ido? or -ofn dnAo? or -oin -oysey | THL@meEv OF gidotpev or dnAotwev or -(NnLev -olnwev -oinwev Sates TyusOTE OY -@nTE tdoire Or -olnre SnyAotre or -oinre SRC TLL EDV gidotev dnAotev INFINITIVE— Present. oe TYLA gudeiv dnAoby ParticreLE—Present. -wv TLLOV pirrav énAor f. -ovea | Tiuooa pirotoa dnAOvEG n. -oy | TILOV idobv dnAody Middle and Passive. InpicaTive— Present. -opar | TYU@paL pirodpat dnAodpat -y, -e «| TYG pry, -et dnAot ~erar TULATAL \ piAciras dnrodvrat -dpeda | Tiua@pea pirovpeba dnAovpeda -eo-Ge Tiacbe prretobe dnAotade -ovrat | TYL@VTAL , gtAodvrar dndodvTaL
* The latter are the more usual terminetions.
82 CONTRACTED VERBS—MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. [§ 79, Stem, Tipa- pire- OnAo- Inpicative—Imperfect. & 2. -dpny | erinaduny epiAdovpnv ednAovpny -ou eTLIULO epiAod €dnAod ~€TO €TLUGATO eptAreiro €dnAodTo dé peBa eripaueba epidovpeda ednAovpeba. | -o0e era be edireiobe ednAodade -ovTo ETLULGYTO €dtAovrTo €dnAovvTo ImpERATIVE—Present, -Ov TLUL@ gidrod dnA0d -éobo Tidobe pircicOw dnAovrOw ~co0e TYyLaobe dirciobe dnrodvabe -trbwrav § | TiudcOwoay pirslaOwoay dnAovcOwoay or -r0ev | Tysacdov pirelobav dnAovobwv Supsuncrive—Present. OL. TYLO@pat © pirGpat dnAGpat -1 TUG 8 pidy dnAot Tou TwaTra, 3 pidryrat dnAGrat -bpeda, Tinapweba ‘2 propecia dnAGpEOa -node Tywacbe = pirjabe dnAGobe -ovrar TLA@VTAL ra piravrat dnA@vTAaL Oprative—Present. -olpny TILOUNY g:holuny dnAoluny -0v0 TUULO ¢ptAoto dyAoto -ouro TUL@TO dtdotro dnAotro -oipeba Ty@ueba piroipeda dnAoiveda -uigOe Tip@ade prroicde dnAoto be -owro TLL@VTO pidoirto dnAoivre InFinitive— Present. -eoOar Tiarbat pireto Far dnAodo bat
§ 79. ] CONTRACTED VERBS. 83
Stem, Tia- pire- dndo- PARTICIPLE. m, -dpevos | Tyu@pevos pirovpevos dnAovpevos » -onevn | Tiuwpevn pirovupevn dnAovpevny n. -dpevov | TLu@pevov iAovpevov dnAovpeEvor
80. Nore on THE REMAINING TENSES.
These are regularly formed. The lengthening of the vowel before the future, aorist, and perfect tense-endings must be marked.
Principal tenses of ride, of diréw, of dnrAda— Present active TLLe pire dro Future active TYLnO@ prjoo dnocea Perfect active Teriunka mepirnka dedjA@Ka Ist Aor. passive erunOnv epirnOnyv edniw@bnv Perf. mid., and pass. — rerivnpat mepiAnpat dedjA@pat
Exercise 10.—On pure Contracted Verbs. [Vocabulary of Verbs, selected from the “ Sermon on the Mount.” —<dyarde, to love; airéw, to ask; Supdw, to thirst ; Oedouat, to behold (dep.*) ; Oepedido, to Sound; (nréw, to seek; perpéw, to measure ; puoéw, to hate; oixodopéw, to build; spo, to liken; ewido, to hunger ; row, to do, make. |
Analyse and translate the following words :—zewavres, dupavres, ToLel, AyaTHTELS, pPLONTELS, GyannsrnTE, ayaravras, wowTat, Tovovat, ToLEtre, movety, Oeabjvat, mons, airnoa, (nreire, perpetre, airnon, airovow (dat.
a ~ a D 2 , ’ ¢ as plur.), rodow, Toody, dpoidow, @xoddpnoe, TeOepedioro, duorwOncerat
£ Also the following : —@edcacOa, reOéarar, jryamnoev, dyana, jyarn- pevnv, ayaray, aireiade, nrovvro, nrnoavro, airapev, e{nrovy, (yrav, (nreira, é{nreiro, suormOnuer, émeivaca (see § 96, a), mewwa, edipnoa, dia.
* Deponent, i.e., middle form with active meaning: an active form not being used. See § 100,
64 MUTE VERBS—THEIR CONJUGATION. [§ 81.
Ys 81. Mure VERBS.—SPECIAL RULEs.
_° The large class of mute verbs comes next in order—i.e., verbs _ whose stem-ending (or ‘characteristic”) is either a labial, 7, B, $; a guttural, «, y, x; or a dental, r, 8, @ It will be convenient to retain the names of (§ 4, 6) p-sounds (labials), &-sounds (gut- turals), and ¢-sounds (dentals). The cross-division, into sharp, flat, and aspirate, must also be remembered.
82. Whenever, in the conjugation of a verb, the stem is followed immediately by a vowel, the mute stem-ending is unaffected. In the Present and Imperfect tenses, therefore, the mute verb precisely resembles miorevo.
83. a. Many tense forms, however, begin with a conso- nant : as those of the Future and First Aorist with -o-, that of the Perfect with -«-, that of the First Aorist passive with -8- ; while in the different parts of the Perfect middle and passive, there occur four several consonants immediately fol- lowing the stem, the terminations being -pat, -cat, -rar, -ye0a, -r0e, -vrat, So with the Pluperfect.
b. The rules, therefore, in § 4, d, will be applied to modify the mute stem-endings.
(1) Thus, with -e (Fut. act., First Aorist act. and mid., Perf. mid. and pass., second person sing., and imper.)—
m-, B-, p-, become wp. K-y Y> X ” é- r-, 8-, 0-, disappear. (2) Before -0 (pass. Fut. and First Aor.)— m- and B- become 9. k-and y- 5, -e r-, 8-, 0-, ,, o, (3) Before -r (mid. and pass., Perf. ind., third person sing.) — a-, B-, -, become Ky Yr Xy on M. tr, 8,6, whe
[§ 83. MUTE VERBS—THEIR CONJUGATION. 85
(4) Before -» (mid. and pass., Perf., first person sing. and plur., ° and Perf. participle—
m-, B-, -, become p. K-) Y> Xo ” Y: t-, §-,0-, ,, o,
(5) Terminations commencing with -c@ drop the o after a consonant ; the remaining @ affecting the mute according to rule. Thus, from rtpiB-, ré-rpi8-06e (mid. and pass., Perf. ind., second person plur.) becomes first ré-rpi8-e, then rérpupe.
(6) The combination -vr in the terminations of the middle and passive Perfect (-vrat) and Pluperfect (-vro) is impracticable after a consonant. Hence the form is dropped altogether, and the per- fect Participle, with the substantive verb, put in its stead, as in the Perf., subj., and opt. Thus rpiB- would regularly give the combination (3rd pers. plur., Perf., mid. and pas.) ré-rpiB-vra, which cannot be dealt with by any of the foregoing laws.* The compound form rerpippévor eiot(v) is therefore employed. ’
(7) There only remains the -«- of the Perfect active. Before this letter the dentals r-, 8-, 0-, are dropped. Thus, wé- re6- xa becomes wémexa. But when the stem-ending is a labial or a guttural, the x is treated as an aspirate or hard breathing, the mute being changed into its corresponding aspirate, and k disappearing. So dy gives #ya for #y-Ka=ify-d, and rpi8w gives ré-rpi-pa, from ré-rpiB-Ka = ré-rpiB-d.
¢ \X 84, Parapviems or THE Mute VErss.
a. To facilitate comparison, all the tenses are given. It has not, however, been thought necessary to go through all the numbers and persons, excepting in the Perf., mid. and pass.
b. It will be seen that the sharp labial, the flat guttural, and the aspirate dental have been selected. No difficulty will be found in | applying the laws of inflection to mutes of the kindred classes.
* In the older Greek writers, the v is sometimes replaced by the aspirate 4. Thus the word would become rerpiparat ; but this usage is not confined to mute verbs or to the Perfect tense,
86
MUTE VERBS—ACTIVE.
[s 84.
ce. The verb dya, :beginning with a vowel, takes the temporal augment instead of the reduplication in the perfect tenses. See |
§ 69, b. LABIAL. GUTTURAL. DENTAL. p-sounds. k-sounds. t-sounds. Stem, TpiB- ay- Te.0 - Active. INDICATIVE. Present, -o TpiBw, IT rub ayo, I lad weidw, I persuade Imperf. é.. -ov | érpiBov iyo ézretov Future, -co tphpw aéa— melo Ist Aor. &..-0a | érpupa nea émeioa Perf. redup. -4* | Térpug¢a Xa TETELKA Plup. redup. -ev | (€)retplpew —7jxew (€)zreme(Kew IMPERATIVE. Present, -e TpiBe aye Tet0e Ist Aor. -cov Tptov a&fov Tetrov Perf. redup. € | rérpide WX€ TETELKE SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, - TplBo ayw T€lOw Ist Aorist, -co | tpipw age Telow Perf. redup. -6 | tetpidw Xo TeTELKw OPTATIVE. Present, -ouse TplBouut &youse mrelOouput Future, -couse Tplyouss &Eouue Trelooupat Ist Aor. -caue | tphpaie &Earpe Teloatp Perf. redup. -oips | retpipouue HXOUYAL TETELKOLL INFINITIVE. Present, -ew tplBew dyew melOew Future, -cev Tpipew afew Teloeww Ist Aor. -cat Tpiat a&at Teton Perfect, -évas TeTpipevat nXevat TETELKEVAL * In labials and gutturals, (See § 83, b, 7.) any
§ §4.] | MUTE VERBS—ACTIVE, MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 87 Stem, 7pi8-- ay- met0- PARTICIPLES, Present, -ov tplBav dyov TelOwv Future, -cov tpipwp agov Telowy Ist Aor. -cas | TpiwWas agas Teloas Perf. redup. -ds | TeTpidws NXOS TETELKOS Middle and Passive. INDICATIVE. Present, -opas TptBopat jyop.at TelOouat Imperf. é. .dpny | €70480nnv Hy opnv emer opny (-pau TETPiLpaL Hy pat TETELT UAL peor TéeTpiat HEL TETELTAL Perf ckiorai TETPLTTAL HKTOL TETELOTAL redup. \-peda | TeTpPlupeDa = yea meTeloucba (ode | TETpPLPOe 7X9 TéTero0e \-(vrar) | TETPYLMEVOL nypévorelou(y) memeropevor eiou(v) eiou(v) (-pyy (é)rerplupny ipypnv (€)memelounu -5o (é)rérpiyro 70 (€)wémrerro Plup. (€)] -T0 (€)rérpumto —jKTO (é)wéme1oTo redup. |-peCa | (€)reTplypefa rypycda (é)weweloueba (oie | (€)rérpipOe 7x Oe (€) emer de \(vro) | TeTpyupévor ~ Hypevor joay TEeTELopévoL Oav Hoa IMPERATIVE. Present, ~ov tptBov ayou melOov -o TéTpuyo £0 TETELOO Perf. bee: reTpipdw nx0@ méTELoOw redup. | -() 6 Térpip0e 7x0 méeTELoOE
-( o)Oaray
teTplpIwoay, or 7xIwoay, or
TeTpipdwr
nXOwv
meTreLoOwoar, or Trev Elo Our a
88 MUTE VERBS—MIDDLE AND PASSIVE,
[§ 8&4. Stem, TpuB- ay- reiO- SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, -opar. | tplBopac d&ywpar Te lOmpat Perf. part. with é| rerpiypévos @ ypwevos ® TETELOMEVOS @ OPTATIVE. Present olpny TpiBolunv ayotunv TeOotunv Perf. part.with) | Terpympevos ypévos einv meTELop€vos elny anv \ env INFINITIVE. Present, -er0a. | tplBecbar ayerOau melOecbar Perfect, -(o)Par TET pipbar nx Oat TeTrEeto9ar PARTICIPLES. Present, -dpevos | TpLBduevos ay opevos TeLOouevos Perf.redup. -pévos| TeTpiypevos NYEVOS TETELTMEVOS Middle only. INDICATIVE. Future, -ropa. | Tplyopar a&&opat meloopat I[stAor.é. .cdpyv eTpupdpnv 7EGUNv eTEo apn IMPERATIVE. Ist Aor. -car Tpiyau aéae Tele SUBJUNCTIVE. Ist Aor. -copa | Tpiyopat aéopat Telowpat OPTATIVE. Future, -cotpyy | tpuyolyny agotunv Tevooluny Ist Aor. -catpny | tpupalunv agatunv Tmeoaipny INFINITIVE. Future, -cerOar | tplperdar agerdar meloecOar Ist Aor, -cac0a | tplyacdas agacdat meloacOat
§ 84.] MUTE VERBS—MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 89 Stem, TptB- ay- me.O- PARTICIPLE. Future, -odpevos | Tpuouevos a&Edmevos TELTOMEVOS Ist Aor. -cdpevos | Tpuyydyevos a€apevos TELTAMEVOS Passive only. INDICATIVE. 4 b / , Future, -O4copar ; THLPIjoopar ax Djcopar mero Ojcopar Ist Aor. & . .-Oqv | €tp’POnv XO éveioOny IMPERATIVE, Ist Aor. -Oqrt TpipOnre dx Onre meloOnre SUBJUNCTIVE, 1st Aor, -04 TpLpga ax 06 TELTOe OPTATIVE. Future, -Oyrolpyv | TeLPOyoolunv axOnootuny merc Onoolwnpy Ist Aor. -Oeinv | TerpOetnv ax Oeinv mevoOeinv INFINITIVE, Future, -O4cer8ar | TprpOjocecOat ayOnoecOar TeicOjcecOat Ist Aor. -Ofvar | TpupOnvar ax Ojvar Tero Onvat PARTICIPLES. Fut. -OQnodpevos | terpOnodpevos axOncomevos TetcOnodpevos Ist Aor. -Qets Tpipdets ax Jets Tevobels VERBALS, -rés and -réos TpimTOs GKTOS TELOTOS TplTTEos GKTEOS TELOTEOS
Note.—The Future Perfect, “ Paulo-post Future” (see § 65, d, 7), is once found in the New Testament: xexpafovra: (Luke xix. 40), from xpd(w (stem, Kpay-, § 85, a, 2,11.) But as this is the only - instance, the tense has not been given in the paradigm.
‘
99. MUTE VERBS—MODIFIED STEMS. [§ 85.
85. Before treating of the remaining class of consonant- verbs, #.¢., those with a liquid stem-ending, it is necessary to notice a most important modification to which very many mute verbs, as well as those of other classes, are subjected.
a. In the examples given, the stem appears full and unaltered in the Present tense. TpiSo is from the stem tpiB-, dyw from dy-, ° and weidw from wad-. There are, however, many verbs in which the stem is modified in the formation of the Present. It is there- fore requisite to note two main points : first, the stem of the Verb, from which all the tenses are derived; and secondly, the stem of the Present, as found in Lexicons and Vocabularies.
(1) Labial stems are modified by the introduction of -r- before the termination. Thus;—stem rtvr-, strike, Present rimrw ; stem PraB-, hurt, Present Bddrrw (for PraB-r-w, § 4, d, 3); stem frd-, throw, Present pimrw (for pid-r-w, § 4, d, 2).
(2) Guttural stems are modified by changing the stem-ending (i) into -oe-, or its equivalent -rr-- Thus from the stem rtay., set in order, we have Present racow or rdrrw ; (ii) into -t-, e.g., stem Kpay-, cry out, Present xpato.
(3) Dental stems are modified by changing the stem-ending ~ into -t-: thus, from the stem $pa8-, tel/, comes the Present pata.
It will be seen that, as the Present termination -fe may be derived either from a guttural or a dental stem, a knowledge of the verb will be required before deciding to which of the two to refer it.*
b. The tenses of these “strengthened” verbs, as they are called, are formed, from the verbal stem, according to the rules before given, Thus—
* The original modification of guttural and dental stems was probably by the insertion of a short vowel (t or ¢) after the characteristic. So TOY-, tayiw, Tdoow; hpad-, ppadéw, ppdfw. The softening occasioned by the vowel may be compared with the effect of i upon ¢ in the termination -tion.
goo. MODIFIED VERBAL STEMS. 91
rinto, tostrike tun fut. rivro perf. rérupa Br\arre, to hurt BAaB- » Paavo », BeBrapa pinta, to throw pi- » pio 9» eppipa TATT, to arrange Tay- » «TaEw 9) TeTaya kpdga, to cry Kpay- » kpago 9» kékpaxa ppate, to tell ppad- » Ppaco » medppaxa
c. Every class of mute verbs (as well as others, on which see hereafter) may receive modification by the insertion of a vowel in a short stem-syllable, so as to form a diphthong. Thus $vy., flee, gives etya, and dAum-, leave, reinw. Only, in this case, the Future and Perfect are formed from the stem of the Present, as Aeir@, Aeirw, heeuha.
86. The most.important point connected with the modifi- cation of the stem is the introduction, into the verbs so characterized, of a set of ‘‘secondary”’ tenses, in which the unmodified stem appears. These tenses, except in special cases, are of precisely similar meaning to the corresponding “primary” tenses. Jor example, the difference between the First and the Second Aorist is a difference of form only. The same remark can hardly be applied so unreservedly to the First and Second Perfect; but the instances of difference belong rather to the Lexicon than to the Grammar, and will be explained in the Vocabulary.
A few verbs unmodified, as €xw, have a Second Aorist, as will be
afterwards noted. Occasionally, too, the Second Aorist differs in meaning from the First. The above rule, however, is general.
87..Sreconp Aorist.
f The Second Aorist Active in the Indicative resembles the Imperfect, in the other moods the Present, except that the
Imperfect is taken from the modified, the Second Aorist from the original stem.
*
92 THE SECOND AORIST. [§ 87.
Thus from ety ($vy-), to flee—
Imperfect, eevyov, eEpevyes, eEqpevye(v), ehedyomev, x.7-d.
Sec. Aorist, epuyov, epvyes, epvye(v), epuyopev, K.T.A.
The augment and the terminations of the two tenses will be seen to be exactly alike.
In the moods after the Indicative, the Second Aorist drops the augment and follows the Present in termination, but accentuates the final syllable of the Infinitive (perispomenon) and Participle (oxytone).
With these explanations, the Second Aorist Active paradigm
_ will present no difficulty.
Tinta, to strike. deiza, to leave.
Stem Tu7r- Aut Indicative, . éruTrov é\uTrov Imperative, TUTE Aime Subjunctive, TUT | ito Optative, TUTOLUAL Almroust Infinitive, TUTE Auteiy Participle, TuTeV, Odoa, Ov ALTOP
nae * b. The Second Aorist Middle follows exactly the same analogy. _ The Imperative, however, is perispomenon, the Infinitive
paroxytone. Indicative, éruTounv eAurropnv Imperative, TUTOd Aurob Subjunctive, TUT@pPLAL Aimopat Optative, TuTolunv Autotuny Infinitive, TuTécbat Aitréo Oa Participle, TUTOPLEVOS Aum@omevos
c. Second Aorist Passive-—Here the mood and tense-endings are like those of the passive First Aorist, the difference being that the unmodified root is used instead of the aspirated form with -0-. First Aorist, érip6nv ; Second Aorist, érimnyv. In the Imperative
§ 87.) SECOND AORIST, FUTURE, AND PERFECT. 93
second person, -6 is found instead of -m. One paradigm of this tense will suffice :— ;
Indicative, ériéanv Optative, rumelny Imperative, rimn6t, rurjirw | Infinitive, rumvat Subjunctive, ru7@ Part. tumels, rumeioa, TuTev
88. Szeconp Furure.
a. In the Passive vbice, there is a Second Future connected with the Second Aorist, exactly as the First Future is connected with the First Aorist. Thus from rimr we have, First Aor. pass., éripOnv ; First. Fut., rupOncouac; Second Aor., érémnv; Second Fut., rump- goua. The paradigm is as follows :— | |
Indicative, rtumjoopat Infinitive, tumjoecbau Imperative, rtumnoolunv Participle, tumnoduevos
89. Srconp PERFECT.
b. The Second Perfect belongs to the Active voice only, and is distinguished from the ordinary Perfect of mute verbs by having the unmodified stem without the aspirate. Thus: rimro (rvt-). First Perf., rérupa; Second Perf., réruma. The tense is of rare occurrence, and its special significance will have to be explained in individual cases. It occurs in some verbs that do not modify their stem. The Second Pluperfect accompanies it, where found. One paradigm here also will be sufficient. Second Perfect of rodcow (mpay-), to do :—
Indicative, 7éxpaya Optative, mempdyouyn » Llup. (é)rexpdayew | Imperative, rémpaye Subjunctive, aempdyo Infinitive, mempayévar
Participle, tempayds, -via -ds.
90. GerneRAL RULES FoR THE SEconp TENSES.
(1) These do not occur in the pure verbs, or in verbs having a dental, r, 8, @ (£), for their characteristic,
(2) The same verb very seldom takes both First and Second Aorists in the Active or Middle.
94 | MUTE VERBS—EXERCISE. [§ 90.
(3) The Passive may have both First and Second Aorist and Future.
(4) When both First and Second Perfect active are found, the former is often transitive, the latter intransitive. érpaya, IJ have done; mérpaya, I have fared (compare English, “‘How do you do ?”),
Remark.—F or the vowel-modifications of; the second tenses, see the sections on Tense-formation, §§ 93—99.
Exercise 11.—On Mute Verbs.
[Vocabulary, from the “Sermon on the Mount.”—(1) Laxiat STEMS: Bdéra, to see; dreido, to anoint; OdjiBe, to straiten ; kponra, to hide ; vinrw, to wash ; orpépa, to turn ; rpépw (Opedp-), to nourish.
(2) GurrurAL STEMS : Gyo, to lead ; didkw, to pursue ; exw (&), to have ; héyo, to say ; mpocevxona, to pray (dep.).
ae (3) Dentat Stems: Wevdonar, to lie (dep.); dvedigo, to reproach ; Soédfo, to glorify; vopitw, to suppose ; wnbw, to spin; ayiatw, to hallow.
Analyze and translate the following words :—8ediaypevor, dvedi- cactr, Sidtovor, pevddopevor, ediwkay, xpuBnva, Sogdowor, vopicnre, €xet, oTpéewor, mporevxerbe, Siwxdyvtwr, exere, BAéerwv, mpocedyn, mpdcevEa, mpocevxopevot, aytacOntra, Gdewpar, virar, Bréerav, Kdérrover, ve, ' Aéeyorres, arpaevres (See § 98, d), reOdtppern.
Also the following : #reupe, jyracpévor, ayrdoa, ediwxkor, kexpupperva, Kpuware, elyov, Ew, Exov, eredow, Wevoarba, eOpépaper, viyns, earpewe, Aeydpevos, Aex Geis, mpoondyero, mpovevEduevar, Opera.
91. Liquip VERBs.
Verbs with the stem-endings A, p, v or p, present many variations from the foregoing models, which will be noticed
§ 91.] ‘LIQUID VERBS. 7 95
in the sections on Tense-formation. It will be sufficient, as introductory to the paradigm, to observe—
a. The stem of these verbs is generally modified in the Present: é. g., stem GyyeA-, announce, Present act. dyyéAkw; pav-, appear, Pres. gaive,
b. The Future active originally ended in -érw, middle -éropa: ; but the o being dropped (see a similar case in Nouns, § 30, iv.), two vowels are brought together, and contraction ensues. Thus, dyye-, Fut. (dyyedé-o-a, dyyedé-w) dyyed ; middle (dyyed-€-c-opat, dyyeh-€é-onar), dyyedotpat. The Future, active and middle, of liquid verbs is there- fore declined like the Present of contracted pure verbs with stem- ending e-.
ce. The First Aorist active and middle follows the Future in the omission of the o, but lengthens the vowel of the preceding syllable. Thus :—
oav-, fut. dave, lst Aor. éfnva dyych-, » ayyerd, ” Pyyeha Kptv-, Judge, 5, Kpiva, a expiva gip, drag, 4, avpa, 4 éovpa
d. In the Perfect active, as v- and p- cannot come before -x, various expedients are adopted. xpiva, to gudge, krdiva, to bend, mrive, to wash, drop the v (kéxpixa, &e.) Other verbs, as daive, adopt a Second Perfect, lengthening the vowel as in the Aorist (wépnva). Others, again, form the Perfect as from a pure root in €-, aS péva, to remain, pepévnea, as if from pevéo.
e. In the Perfect passive, v- is changed into o- or into p before -pat, as, from av-, meacpa instead of médav-ya, and from Enpav-, efjpaypae instead of eénpav-ua. The three verbs which drop v- before -«a in the Perfect active lose it also in the Perfect and First Aorist passive. Thus, xéxpipa, éxpiOnv. Those verbs which assume a root in e for the Perfect active, construct the passive Perfect and First Aorist after the same analogy.
96 LIQUID VERBS—THEIR .CONJUGATION. [§ 92.
92. PARADIGMS.
— Stem, ayyeA- Kplv= ap- Strengthened, ayyeAA- Kply- aip- Active. INDICATIVE. _
Present, ayyédrAw kplve alpw Imperfect, | #yyeAAov €xptvov 7] pov Future sing. | dyyeA6 KpLvO ape
9 9 ayyereis Kpwvets apeis
” 9 ayyeret Kpivet apet
» plur. | dyyedoduev Kplvodwev Gpoodmev
ee ms dyyedeire Kpwweire apetre
os i ayyehodou(v) Kpwodou(v) dpodor(v) Ist Aorist, | yyetAa Expiva pa Perfect, NYYEAKa KeKplka 7pka Pluperfect, | yyéAxew (€) kexpixeuw TpKEW Qnd Aorist, | 7yyeAov pov
IMPERATIVE. Present, tiyyeAXNe kpive aipe Ist Aorist, | dyyesAov kptvov dipov Perfect, HY YVEAKE KEKPLKE 7)pKE 2nd Aorist, | dyyeA« ape SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, ayyerw kplvw alpw Ist Aorist, ayyelho kplvw dpa Perfect, (| NYYEAKo@ Kekplk@ Hpkw 2nd Aorist, | ayyéAo dipw OPTATIVE.
Present, dyyéAAouut Kplvout atpount Future, dyyedotworoiny Kpivoiws or olny § dpotys or olny Ist Aorist, | dyyelAaus kplvatpt dparus Perfect, NY YEAKOLL kexplroupt 7) PROULL 2nd Aorist, | dyyéAous a pouus
$92.)
LIQUID VERBS—PARADIGMS. i Stem, ayyeA- Kptv- ap Strengthened, ayyeAA- Kplv~ alp- INFINITIVE. Present, ayyédAew kplvew alpeuw Future, ayyehetv Kpivety dipety 1st Aorist, ayyeivae Kpivat dapat Perfect, NyyeAKevat KEKpLKEVaL PKEVAL 2nd Aorist, | dyyeAeiv dipety PARTICIPLES, Present, ayyé\Awv kplvwv alpwv Future, ayyedOv KplvO@v dpGv Ist Aorist, ayyethas kpivas dpas Perfect, NYYEAKOS KEKPLKOS npkos 2nd Aorist, | dyyeAdv dpav Middle and Passive. INDICATIVE. Present, dyyédAopar kplvowat alpowat Imperfect, NyyeddAounv Expwvopunv npdopnv Perfect, NyyeApar KeKpl at 7ppae Pluperfect, | jyyéAunv (2) kexpiynv npynv IMPERATIVE, Present, dyyéhaov kplvov alpou Perfect, nyyedco, -Ow Kéxpioo, -70w hpao, 7jp0w K.T.A. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, dyyéh\Aopar Kplv@j.at alpwyat Perfect, NYYEALEVOS @ —_—«KEKPULEVOS @ ppevOS @ OPTATIVE. Present, dyyeddotunv kpwvoluny aipotuny Perfect, nyyeApeévos einv Kexpysevos elny npwévos einv
[§ 92.
98 LIQUID VERBS—PARADIGMS, Stem, ayyeA- Kptv- ap- Strengthened, ayyeAA- Kply- aip- INFINITIVE, Present, ayyéd\Aeo Oat kplvecOau aipecbau Perfect, nyyerdat KexpioOat npat PARTICIPLES. Present, GyyeAAGuevos —K piv djevos aipdwevos Perfect, NYY€ABEVOS KEKPLLEVOS 7pKEvos Middle only. INDICATIVE, Future, dyyeAodpat Kplvovmat apodpat 1st Aorist, | myyetAdunv expuvdunv npapnv 2nd Aorist, | dyyeAdunv npoynv IMPERATIVE. Ist Aorist, | dyyeAa Kptvat dpat 2nd Aorist, | dyyeAod apod SUBJUNCTIVE, Ist Aorist, ayyetAwpat kplywpat dpopar Qnd Aorist, | dyyéAopat dpwmat OPTATIVE. Future, ayyeroluny, gio, Kpwolunv, oto, apoluny, oto, otro
1st Aorist, 2nd Aorist,
Future, lst Aorist, 2nd Aorist,
K.T.As
dyyeivalynv Kpwalunv dyyeAolunv
INFINITIVE. dyyedetobat kpivetoba dyyelracbau kpivacOat
dyyedéoOat
apalunv dipolunv
apetcbat dpacbat dpéobat
§ 92.] LIQUID VERRS-—PARADIGMS. 99 Stem, ayyeAr- Kply- ap- Strengthened, ayyeAA- Kpiv- aip- PARTICIPLES. Future, ayyeAovmevos Kptvovpevos dpovpevos Ist Aorist, | dyyetAdwevos Kpivdpevos dpdapevos 2nd Aorist, | dyyeAdpevos dpowevos Passive only. INDICATIVE. Ist Future, | dyyeA@joopar KprOnocopwar apOnoopas Ist Aorist, | 7yyeAOnv explOnv npOnu 2nd Aorist, | nyyeAnv npnv 2nd Future, | dyyeAjoopar dpyoropat IMPERATIVE, Ist Aorist, | dyyéA@yru KolOnre d&ponre 2nd Aorist, | ayyéAnde apo. SUBJUNCTIVE. Ist Aorist, | dyyed0d Kp.oo ap9o 2nd Aorist, | dyyeds dpa OPTATIVE. Ist Future, ayyedOncoluny KpiOnootuny apOnooiunv Ist Aorist, | dyyedAeinv Kp.Oeinv apbeinv 2nd Aorist, | dyyeAetnv apeinv 2nd Future, | dyyeAncoluny apnoolunv INFINITIVE. Ist Future, | dyyeAOjoeoOar xpiOjoerOa dpOncecOar Ist Aorist, | dyyeAPqvar KpOnvat dpOnvat 2nd Aorist, | dyyeAfjvat aphvat 2nd Future, | dyyeAnoecOau apnoecOau
100 LIQUID VERBS. [§ 92,
Stem, ayyeA- Kptv- ap- Strengthened, ayyeAA- ss piv- aip- | PARTICIPLES. Ist Future, | dyyedOnoduevos xpiOnodpevos — pOnodpevos Ist Aorist, | dyyeddels kp.dels apbets 2nd Aorist, | dyyedels apels 2nd Future, | dyyeAnoduevos dpnodpevos VERBALS. | ayyeATos KpiTos aptos ayyeAréos KplT€os diptéos
**,* Tt is not to be supposed that all the above forms are actually in use. They are given as sapadetypatra, examples, of words that may occur.
Exercise 12.—On Liquid Verbs.
I. | Vocabulary, from the “Sermon on the Mount.”—avédva, to grow, to increase; Bdddo, to throw, cast; bio, to will (augment with n, see § 94, ii.); xpive, to judge; popaiva, to corrupt; oneipa, to sow; daiva, to show (Second Aorist, passive or middle, appear) ; xaipeo, to rejoice. |
II. Analyze and translate the following forms :—yaipere, pwpavO7; Brnbjva (see § 98, c), BAnOnon, Bare, BnOR, O€dovri, KprOjvar, paris, omeipovow, avéavet, Badddpevor, kptOnre, kptOnoeaOe, Badnre, OeAnre.
Also the following :—6é\«, #Ocedov, 7OAnoa, Oédovres, Kpiver, Kptvel, kpivate, enwpdvOnoav, eudpavey, omeipwr, omapels, eomrappévov, earn,
paiverbe, paveira, Bade, BAYOnt1, Baddew, Badeiy, Barro, Bade.
> ? a 2 > > ’
VyuuUN ] v
») } s) ” 2 2 2
73 , ae
by 2.257 ho 2 Pit ,)
; Semele I >
)
§ 93. ] ON TENSE-FORMATION
93. Norss on THE TENSES.
The foregoing paradigms have fully given the typical forms of the First. Conjugation, 2.e., of the great majority of verbs, and of most of the tenses in a// verbs. Many minute variations must now be noticed, with apparent irregularities, which for the most part can themselves be reduced to rule, or explained by some early usage of the language.
Accentuation.—It may be repeated at the outset from § 73, that verbal forms mostly retract the accent, i.e, throw it back as far as possible. Exceptions are noted below under the different Tenses. When the accent falls on the penultimate, e.g., in dissyllables, a long vowel is circumflexed, in certain forms, as has been already shown.
94, Tue Present anv Imperrecr: Active, MippLz AND PAssIveE.
I. The Present Indicative Active, first person (the form usually given in Lexicons, Vocabularies, and Concordances*) contains the verbal stem, often modified.
The principal forms of modified stem are as follows :—
1. Labial stem-endings, strengthened by t-. (See § 85, a, 1.)
2. Short stem-syllables lengthened. (See § 85, ¢.)
3. The euphonic oo-, tr-, for a guttural characteristic; {- for a dental, or occasionally for y-. (See § 85, a, 2, 3.)
4. \d- for the characteristic \-. (See note, § 85.)
5. The letter v- affixed to the stem-syllable.
This may take place in different ways. a. To a pure stem, simply affixed : Thus from $0a-, p@dvw, to anticipate. from m-, mivw, to drink. b. Two consonant stems follow this model :
from kap-, nduvw, to be weary. from dak-, ddxvw, to bite.
* Bruder’s Concordance, 4to (Tauchnitz), gives the Present Injinitive.
Cc € Pann 9 « Pa Se A Bn Chive ‘ t c<
Pee eOae cl yce sic rie. 102 0 ON TENSE-FORMATION, [§ 94,
c. One affixes ve-, adik-, adixveduat, to arrive. d. To a pure stem lengthened, two verbs only :
from Ba-, Balyw, to go. from éAa-, éAatvw, to drive.
e. To a consonant stem, with connective a: from Guapt-, auaptdyw, to sin. from AaB-, AauBdve, to take. In the last-mentioned verb, it will be seen that »is also inserted in the stem-syllable. This is for -v- (made w before a labial, § 4, d, 5). So pavOavw, to learn, from pad-, and other verbs. The stem appears in the ‘Second Aorist, juaprov, éAaBov, Euabor.
6. An alternative pure stem in e-.
This appears generally in the Future, Aorist, and Perfect.
Thus éx- and oxe-, to have, tx, tw, or oxhow, tcxnea; Second Aor., éoxov.
OeA- and @eAe- (also é0eA-), to will, OédAw, OeAhow, eOeANTO.
pev- and peve-, to remain, Mévw, peuernka.
Occasionally the ¢-stem appears in the Pres. Thus d0«- und doxe-, iv appear, Sone (Soxéw), Sdiw, C5oka.
Some of the verbs under 5, e, have a similar alternative stem. Thus from jpaptdve we find auapticw, hudpryna,
7. The inchoative form (so called because some verbs of this class denote the beginning of an action), in ox- or wr-.
Pure stems add -cx-, generally lengthening a short stem-vowel. So 6va-, transposed from Oav-, to die, Ovicxw, Bavov, Perf. ré@vnxa.
Consonant stems add -icx-, and often, as in 6, have an alternative stem in e-. Thus eip-, edpe-, to find, edploxw, eiphaw, eipnna, epov. mdoxw, to suffer, (wa0-, with alternative stem, mevé-) has Second Aor. érafov, Second Perf. némov0a, d:ddoxw, to teach, originally from da-, assumes a mute guttural stem: Fut., d:ddfw; First Aor. pass., ed:5dx@nv.
Verbs of this class are very various in form, as exhibited in the Lexicon or Vocabulary.
8. Reduplicated stems, the initial consonant repeated with 1. Four verbs of this class are of very common occurrence.
a. ylvoua (deponent intransitive), to become, stem ‘yev-, by reduplication yryev-, shortened into yyv-, the second y- being dropped for the sake of euphony; Impf., éywdunv; Inf., yivec@ar; Second Aor., eyerduny, yevéoOa,
§ 94.) ON TENSE-FORMATION. 103
b. ywdonw, to become acquainted with, to know. Stem yvo-, which becomes yvwon-, after the model of class 7; then by reduplication yryywox-, when y- is dropped, as in the last instance; Fut., yvdéooun; Perf., &yywxa; Second Aor., @yvwv (like second conjugation).
C. pipviokouat, to remember (deponent), from pra-, urhoopa, euvfony, pléuynuat,
d. nintw, to fall. This is not a labial verb strengthened by t-. Its root is rer-, by reduplication maer-. The weak vowel -e- is then dropped, leaving mimt-, Second Aor., érecov, the o- being softened from r-; Fut., recoduar; Perf., rémtwxa. (Compare § 96, d.)
II. The Imprerrect Tense always follows the stem of the Present, the Augment being prefixed.
For the Augment, consult § 69. After the Augment, an initial -p- is doubled, as from piopa ; Impf., eppudunv ; First Aor., ppic06nv. A few verbs have the Attic double augment y instead of « Thus, pdra, to be about to do a thing, has %uchXov and #yeAdoy inter- changeably. ‘Opdw, to see, has a double augment also: Impf, éopov ; Perf., éapaxa. (See further, under the Aorist, § 97.)
95. Tue Srconp Aorist, AcTIVE AND MIDDLE.
This is the simplest of the Tenses (see § 87), and in general contains the exact verbal stem. Hence it is mainly found in verbs whose Present-stem is modified. So Imperf., érumrov; Second Aor., ¢rumov. In one verb, éyw, to lead, where the Present-stem is un- modified, the Second Aorist is distinguished from the Imperfect by a reduplication ; Impf., #yov ; Second Aor., #fyayov; Inf., ayayeiv.
Note.—Some short stem-syllables with ¢- change this into a in the Second Aorist, as from omelpw, to sow (omep-), Exmapoy.
The Vowel Aorist.—A few pure stems (like the second conjuga- tion, or “verbs in -p.”) affix the tense-endings to the stem, with lengthened vowel, rejecting the usual modal vowel.
Thus, ywacke (yvo-, see § 94, 8, b), éyvar. dvvw, to set, as the sun (8v-), Suv. Baive, to go (Ba-), e8nv.
5
104 ON TENSE-FORMATION. - [§ 95.
For the conjugation of these forms, see paradigms of verbs in
ope.
Accentuation.—The Second Aorist active infinitive circumflexes the final syllable; ruweiy; in the participle accents the stem-syllable -ovr, with a circumflex on the fem. where possible, trimév, rumovca, Tumdv. In the middle the imperative is perispomenon, tvrov; the inf,
paroxytone, turécOa,
96. Tue Fururr, AcrivE anp MIpDLE.
For the relation between the Future stem and the simple stem of the verb, consult § 85, 8, ¢.
a. In pure stems, the vowel is lengthened before the Future characteristic -r-. The stem-endings a- and e- become 1; o- becomes w-; - and v- are made long. Thus, riudo, rysnow; pirtéa, pidjoa ; dnrdo, Snroca 3 ia, Adow.
Exceptions: (i.) a- becomes &- after a vowel or p. Thus :—
edo, ta permit, Fut. ddcopar. idopa., to heal, 9» tdoopat. metpdopuat, t0 try, = 5y_-—- etpdoopat. So rewdw, to hunger, 4, mewdoo. xadrda, to loosen, 4, yxaddoo.
But ypdopa, to use, makes ypjoopa. (ii.) The following verbs do not lengthen their stem-endings for the Future :—*
a-forms: yeddo, to laugh, Fut. yeddoo. - xraw, to break, » kAdoo.
¢-forms: dpkéw, to suffice, 4, dpxcoo. érawéw, to praise, ,, émaweow.
karéw, to call, » kadéoo. tehéw, to finish, » TEAETO. dhopéw, tocarry, ,, popeca.
b. Verbs in if (stem W8-) usually drop the -c- Future charac-
* Some of these verbs are regular in classic Greek.
§ 96.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 105
teristic, replacing it by a contraction similar to that of the liquid verbs. This form is called the Attic Future.
Thus: dpopi{a, to separate, makes Fut. ddopid. errrife, to hope, a. €ATLO.
Kopila, to carry, ae kopid, mid. Koprodpat. kabapifo, to purify, - kabapid and Kabupicw. Barrifa, to baptize, 3 Barricw only. cadrifw, to sound a trumpet, ,, gadriow Only.*
But the verbs of this class which drop -c- in the Future, resume it in the First Aorist ; so far differing from the liquid verbs.
c. Three verbs in -é, originally -é, show the digamma (see § 29, ili.) in inflection, as v:—
mhréo, to sail, Fut. mredcouan mvéew, to blow, 4, mvevoo. péw, to flow, 99 pevow. Another digammated verb, xéo, to powr, omits the « altogether, and conforms to the Attic Future, retaining, however, the ¢ before the circumflexed final: éxyed, J will pour forth (Acts ii. 17.)
Tn this class the First Aorist characteristic conforms to that of the Future. So érvevoa. From é«xe# is formed First Aor. ééxea, uncontracted.
To the digammated verbs may be referred kaiw, to burn, Fut.
Kavow; KAaiw, to weep, Fut. kaavow and kdratcopa (Luke vi. 25 ; Rev. xviii 9). (See d.)
d. Several active verbs of frequent occurrence have a Future in
the middle form, still with active meaning ; as—
dxovo, to hear, Fut. dxovcopa, or dxovca.
(ao, to live, » (jooua or (noo.
AapBave, to take, ,, Anwoua (from AaB-, Anf-) Oavpatea, to wonder, ,, Oavpdoopa, once.
hevyo, to flee, 9 pevéopat.
mive, to drink, »» mlopat, -eoat, -erat (Luke xvii. 8).
* In classic Greek, cadalyiw, from stem cadmyy-.
106 ON TENSE-FORMATION. [§ 97.
97. Tue Frresr Aorist, AcrivE AND MIppLE.
a. Connexion of the Aorist stem with that of the Future.—1l. In. the pure and mute verbs, the o of the Future is retained.
2. In the liquid verbs, the Aorist lengthens a short vowel before the stem-ending. Thus, owep-, to sow; Fut., omepd ; First Aor., éomeipa; and from dyyed-, #yyerda.
Verbs in aivw, from the stem -dyv, generally have a in the Future, a in the First Aorist. So Aevxalyw, to whiten; Fut., AevxavG; First Aor., éAevdnava. onualyw, to signify; First Aor. inf., onjuava: (Acts xxv. 27). Similarly, émpava (Luke i. 79), from em, galvw,* to show, appear. But xepdaive, to gain, Fut. xepdava, makes éxépSnoa, as from an alternative pure root, xepda-.
b. Peculiarities of Augment.—The double augment is occasionally found : dvolyw, to open, avéwéa, also #voéa; similarly, BovdAopua, to will (deponent), 7Bovdnénv (2 John, 12). Compound verbs gene- rally prefix the augment to the verbal stem ; but where the com- pound has lost its force, or has usurped the place of the simple verb, the augment may precede the whole verb. Thus, from mpopntevo, empopyrevoa, instead of mpoepyrevoa. The prefix, ed, well, is sometimes augmented into %-, sometimes left unaltered. So from eiSoxéw, to be well pleased, cidéxnoa (Matth. iii. 17), and nvdéxnoa (Luke iii. 22). But a verbal stem after ed, beginning with a, ¢, 0, is itself augmented. So from evayyedifoua, to preach the Gospel, we have einyyeducdunv, not niayyeAtodyny.
The root &ay-, to break (second conjugation, &yvuue (with prefix, kata, makes First Aor. xaréata (John xix. 32), instead of xdrnta. But as the e- is found in the Future of the same verb («aredtw, Matth. xii. 20), and in the Second Aor. subj. pass. (careayaor, John xix. 30), it may mark a collateral form of the verb, and not be intended as an augment. f
The Aorist augment of the verb a%pw (see § 92) is variously printed 7 or %. The latter is correct, as it is the simple stem which is lengthened,
Note. Some verbs in the LXX. have a kind of compound Aorist tense (** Alexandrian”), like the First in termination, but like the Second in tense-
* The classical First Aor. of palvw is Epyva. t Or it may be simply to distinguish the forms from those of xardyw, to lead down,
8 97.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 107
form: i.e., attaching First Aorist terminations to the simple verbal stem. So in classic Greek, fveyxov or frveyra. See § 103 (6). An instance in the New Testament of the Alexandrian Aorist is Heb. ix. 12, edpduevos. Many others occur in the most ancient MSS., and have been adopted into critical editions, as érecay (compare § 94, 8, d), and ela in different numbers and persons; in imper., eimdtwaav (Acts xxiv. 20).
Accentuation.—The active First Aor. Infinitive accents the penultimate, circumflexing all diphthongs and long vowels, as pvAdia, motedoa, The act. Optative third pers. sing. has an acute accent on the same syllable, the a being here regarded as long, as motetom. The same form again is found in the middle Imperative; the a, as usual, being treated as short, and the accent thrown back, as mlorevoat. Only in monosyllabic stems, where the accent must be on the penultima, a long vowel is circumflexed, as Avcat. To present the three cases at
one view : Act. Opt., Ist Aor., third pers. sing., mistedoar Avo pvddtat Active, lst Aorist, infinitive, _ TioTedtat Atoa dgrAdtat, Middle, 1st Aorist, imperative, miorevoat Atdoat gpvdAatat
98. Tuer Aorists AND FuturEs PAssive.
a. The First Aorist, Future and Perfect (with the Pluperfect), Passive, have generally the same modification of the verbal root. Thus, from tipa-, éeryunOnv, terivnuac; from dAv-, €dvOnv, AVOncopat, AAvpa; and from me0-, ereicOnv, meccOnoopar, wémerccpar. To know one of these Tenses is, therefore, a help to the knowledge of the rest. But cola, to save, makes éooOny and cécwopar
b. The chief variation in the stem-syllable of these tenses from the ordinary model is in the case of pure verbs. Usually, these lengthen the vowel stem-ending. In several verbs, however, the short vowel remains, as in éd€6nv, éhvdnv, and others. In many, again, the letter o is inserted after the stem, as in éredéoOnv (Perf., rerehecpat), éxardolny (2 Cor. xi. 33), and from pioux, to deliver, éppvoOnv (2 Tim. iv. 17). Thus, also, from dota, to hear, jrovebny, dxovaOnoopat, iKovopat. |
c. The transposition of a vowel and liquid, in short monosyl- lahic roots, is very common in these tenses, Thus, Bad-, to throw, becomes Bda-, and gives ¢8d7Oyv, BrnOjcoua, BéBrAnva. The root
198 ON TENSE-FORMATION. [s 98.
kare, to call, is treated as xad-, Kda-; First Aor. pass., exAnOzv3 Fut., crnOnoopa; Perf., xéxrnpas.
d. A weak vowel in a'short liquid stem is often changed into a, This rule generally applies to the Perfects, Active and Passive, and to the Aorists and Futures Passive (sometimes also to the Second Aorist active: see § 95, note). Thus, from émocré\da, to send forth (ered-), améoradka, dréorapat, dreotddny, adrooTaAncopat. The verb iva, to drink (xararive, to swallow), changes t into o. So we find réraxa, xarerd6nv, kararobnoopat.
é. The First Aorist and Future passive are chiefly found in pure stems and derivative verbs; the Second in original consonant- verbs. Where, too, the First would give an inharmonious con- currence of letters, the Second will usually be employed. Both are seldom used in the same verb. Buta verb that has the First Aorist in the Active, may have the Second in the Passive, and vice versa.
For the usage of particular verbs, consult the Vocabulary. mwAfhcow, rAny-, to strike, makes Second Aor. érAfynv ; but in compounds 7 becomes a, as eterAdynoav (Luke ii. 48) ; pbw, to grow, has the Seeond Aor. participle pve», (Luke viii. 6, 8).
Irregularities of Augment in the Aorists passive.—xaredhpén, in many copies of John vill. 4; &rexareord@n (¢ after both prepositions) : Matth. xii. 13. From évolyw (compare $ 99, a, 3), we find jvolxOnv, avedxOnv, rivedxOnv (Rev. xx. 12); and Second Aor. jvolyny, with Second Future, avoryhoouat,
Accentuation.—The Aorists passive circumflex the Subjunctive mood- vowel throughout, and the penultimate of the Inf. -jva:. The participle accents the stem-syllable -evr throughout, with a circumflex on the fem., wherever possible,
Thus: Avéels, Aveioa, Avo, Avdévros, Avdelons, AvOévros, K.T.A.
99. Tue Perrecr anp Pruperrectr, Active, Mrppiz, AND Passive. a. For the Reduplication, see § 69, The following variations must be noted :— 1. A verb beginning with two consonants, other than a mute
§ 99.] ON TENSE-FORMATION. 109
followed by a liquid, or with a double consonant, takes «-. Thus, orehavda, to crown, €otepavaxa, eorepdvapa; Enpaivo, to wither, e&npaypa. So when v follows y-, as from yvo-, éyvwxa.
2. The verb AdpBave, AaB-, takes et- instead of the reduplication,* etAnha.
3. Some verbs beginning with a, ¢, or o, take a double redupli- cation in the active.
dkovo, to hear, axnxoa.
(€Av6-), to come, ednrvba. See § 103 (2).
The verb dvotyo (see §§ 97, 98) may have a double augment in the perf. pass., qvewypevn (Rev. iv. 1).
4, The Piuperrect in the New Testament generally omits the augment, taking only the reduplication, as reOepedioro, it had been founded (Matt. vii. 25).
b. Termination of the Active Perfect third person phon ed MSS. frequently give this as -av, like the First Aor. In John xvii. 7, the rec. text reads éyvwxap.
c. The Seconp Perrect active takes the termination of the First without the characteristic -«- or aspirate, and often modifies a vowel in the stem-syllable, preferring 0. Thus, Aero, Aédouza, nacyo (alternate stem, ev0-), wérovda,
This tense is often intransitive ; as from e/@w, to persuade, First Perf., méreixa, I have persuaded ; but Second Perf., wemol@a, I have confidence, I fully believe. To the class of Second Perfects belong the forms gona, J am like (Fux-) ; oi8a, I know (fi5-). (See § 103.)
When the stem-ending of the verb is an aspirate—mute, labial or guttural—the Perfect is in the Second, or unaltered, form: as from ypa-, to write, yéypapa.
d. Some peculiarities of the Prrrect PasstvE have been noted under the head of the Aorist. Vowel changes in the stem-syllable are given in the Lexicon or Vocabulary. So, also, the insertion or otherwise of -c- after a vowel stem-ending.
* So in classic Greek some other verbs, as Aayxdvw, efAnxa.
110 . TENSE-FORMATION—DEPONENT VERBS. [§ 99.
£g., tpégo, to nourish (Opep-), rérpopa, réOpapya. Again, Opava, to crush, makes réOpavopa (Luke iv. 18); but wavoua, to cease, méravpai (1 Pet. iv. 10).
ce. The Fururre-Perrect (passive in classic Greek ; called often the paulo-post Future) is but the middle Future reduplicated. Luke xix. 40, is the only instance in the New Testament: xexpdfovra, will immediately cry out. Accentuatton.—The Perfect Infinitive accents the penultimate -éva:,
In the active Participle, the stem-syllable, masc. -or, fem. -u, is accented all through, the latter circumflexed wherever possible.
AeAuKos, AeAvkuia, AeAuKés, AeAuKéros, _ AeAuxvias, AeAuKéros,
In the middle and passive, the Infinitive accents the penult., circumflex on diphthongs and long vowels, BeBovrciobat, rerinjoba, teTdpOa. The participle accents the penultimate; as AcAupévos, AcAuméevn, AcAumévory,
100. Depronent VErss.
Deponent verbs have no active voice, but may be either middle or passive in form. This is decided by the Aorist. |
Thus: déxonat, to recewe; First Aor., édeEdunv (middle). Bovropa, to wish; First Aor., é8ovAnOnv (passive). aicOdvopat, to percewe; Second Aor., 7oOduny (middle)
Some verbs have both Aorists, active and passive, with the same meaning; as droxpivoya, to answer; First Aor., dmexpwapny and dmexpiOnv, I answered q ‘
Deponent transitives often have each tense with its proper force,
Thus: idowa, to heal; iacdunv, I healed ; idbnv, I was healed. Aoyifona, to reckon; édoyodpny, I reckoned ; édoyiacbnv, I was reckoned. The verb yiyvoua, to become (yev-, see 94, 8, a) has the forms, Fut., yevqoopa ; First Aor., éyevnOnv ; Second Aor., éyerdunv; Pert, yéyova (Second Perf.); rarely yeyévnua.
§ 101.] IMPERSONAL AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 111
101. ImpERsoNAL VERBs.
Impersonal verbs are used only in the Third Person singular, and are generally rendered into English with the pronoun #¢. _ For the grammatical construction of impersonals, see § 171.
The chief impersonal verbs are det, ié is necessary ; one ought, xpn, it is expedient, or fitting ; mpéme, it becomes ; Soxei, t& seems; peédet, 1 U8 @ care.
The following forms of these verbs almost all occur in the New Testa- ment. The participle, it will be observed, is neuter. Some of the verbs are also found personally :—
Indic. Pres. de?, xpnh, permet, doxe?, merci. Imperf. ei, expny, enpere(v), eddKet, ai First Aor. hs tbe ay eote(v) tea Subj. 5én ids vide ro peu Inf, diy, Xpiivat, ‘se vat eke Part. Pres. déov, cas ™mpérov, Soxovy, oP
From ci, the substantive verb, is formed the impersonal ééeor, it is lawful ; part., ¢&ov.
102. DerecrivE VERBS OF THE First ConsJUGATION.
The explanations given under the several Tenses have suf- ficiently accounted for most of the so-called “irregularities ” in the conjugation of verbs in -.
Some verbs, however, of very frequent occurrence, are anomalous in another way.
The ancient Greek tongue, like all early languages, while destitute of words expressing the more complex ideas, had a redundancy of terms denoting some of the simplest actions. Hence arose many synonymous words, some of which, being evidently unnecessary, were afterwards dropped. But in several instances, of two or three verbs meaning the same thing, different tenses were discontinued in each, so that forms of distinct verbs had to be brought together to con- stitute a whole. Compare in English go, without a Preterite, and went, without a Present, except in some phrases, wend.
112 DEFECTIVE VERBS. © [§ 102.
Occasionally, again, where the same tense of two syno- nymous verbs has been retained, it expresses two different shades of meaning.
103. The following are the principal verbs which thus derive their forms from different roots :—
(1) aipéw, to take (in comp., xabatpéw, to take down ; mpoatpéw, to take beforehand, &c.) ; Mid., aipodpa, to choose ; Principal Tenses, aipnow, aipnoowat, npnka, ypnuat, npeOny, aipeOnoopa. From stem &- ; Second Aor. act., eftov; Inf, Aciv ; mid., eiAdunv; Inf, AéoOa.
(2) €pxoua, to go, come; Impf., npydunv. Other tenses from stem év00-, lengthened into é&evd- (Fut.), contracted into é@- (Second Aor.) ; Fut., &dedoouat; Perf, &nrvda; Plup., ednrwdew ; Second Aor., #\ov ; in the several moods, ¢Ae, Ow, EAOoip, eAOeiv, EAD. So many compounds. :
(3) éo6iw, to eat; Impf., #o6uv; Second Aor. from day-, épayor, ghayeiv; Fut., pdyoua, payeoa, payerat, x.r-A. So xareobia, to devour,
(4) dpdw, to see; Impf., édpov; Perf., édpaxa. Tenses from stem dn-, dar-: Fut. dyopar, dyer, dperar; First Aor. subj., dyoua (once, Luke xiii. 28) ; First Aor. pass., dpOnv, 6h6jva ; First Fut. pass., 6p6joona. Tenses from fis-: 2nd Aor., efor, ide, iSeiv, dav (i8o%, an old Imperfect middle used as an interjection, behold /) ; Second Perf., I know (= have seen) oida, oidas, ofde(v), otSapev, otdare, otSaci(v) (in Imp., to6, tore; Subj., cid; Inf., eidéva ; Part, eidds ; Plup. ind., I knew, fdew) ; Fut., cidjoo, shall know (Heb. viii. 11). (5) rpéxa, to rwn; Second Aor. from Spep-, ¢Spapov; Fut., dpa-
podpa (LX X.)
(6) pépw, to bear ; Fut. from stem ot-, ofaw. Tenses from éveyk- or évex-: First Aor. act., veya; Second Aor., fveyxov, éveyxeiv; First Aor. pass., qvéxyOnv ; Perf., évnvoya, with double reduplication. Compare rpoodépa, eiadépa, k.7.A.
(7) elrov; Second Aor., J said (supplies Present and Imperfect from dypi, second conjugation) ; stem, ér-; First Aor., era. Tenses from ép-: Fut., épéw, ép4; Perf., efpnxa; Perf. pass., efpnua. Tenses from fe-: First Aor. pass., éppéOnv or éppiOnv ; Part., pndeis.
SUMMARY OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 118
g 103.]
— wmroolighd rorlooligXra2 noe mnoolgpo = *** s* ronlo.oligsdy aligadda ¢ eee ese ee H aiglidd> } aligXpale aligpe alig2dt
*OAISSUG eee eee eee eee eee eee 19 9-.09X2 ese eee eee eee coe ose alloy eee eee eee eee ee eee wnoolidyp *OIPPIAL monlid> eee eee coe eee eco ronlid li “ rorlodap bie mrloapsuo 8 —*** “28 rorlaodyp ‘OAISSBT PUB O[PPIA eee eee eee 7043Q13 eee eco eer 13193 mayha1a —-aiarindg me) =aahod M39 QX? a13\? (10ap) anrdap = a9X3d4 ando =a1319.03 ~~ 109.939Xd2 a3d10 eos een eee m0l1913 eee eos eee ese eee eee anrQli eee eco eee ee eee eee 0Q10 ees eee (‘Jr1uSts [Teroedg) ao> aowhzak —aorloda> aogia doko aogylu aoy> eee eee eee maxpdm coe magayly> eve oxlid23 nXoaluaa “ee pypd@> = *** DpAyuy? puldli DiL19 pyAzali ose aurlppom + eee eee : @d3 010 11laorlode wrlospo rorlodnd rrlooasy> moldy (aup>) aodap? Nee awdm2 aorigol alirloXdle os (aru) dah oXad4 opdo 19093 — 10Nl0Xd3 3070 hivs 03 pag 02 Und 02 a08 07 gna 02 awoa ‘ob 02 ayn} 07
emgjn iy
"10V ST —"AN]
‘IOV pug — "ANT ‘10V pug 91nyn {J —"aNn]
qooj.1o gq "sdlgq—aNn]
JHO_ Puy “LOW PUG ‘solg—‘AN] o1n4n iT ‘jaodnuy gq FIST Puy “LOY Pug ‘jaoduyg q00}.10 7 "LOW IST ein yn iT ‘jrod uly ‘sold —‘aNn[
114 | DEFECTIVE VERBS. . [§ 103.
These forms are not all actually found in the New Testament, though most of them are. Other forms occur in Greek authors, and, if required, may easily be formed by the usual analogies.
Exercise 13.—On the Defective Verbs.
[The following forms, which should be carefully analyzed, are all from the “Sermon ‘on the Mount,” and illustrate the frequency with which this class of verbs occurs. .
In addition to the meanings of the verbs. given in their para-
-digms, and unnecessary, therefore, to repeat, it must be noted that the prefix eis denotes into ; éé, out of ; mapa, by or aside (mapépxopuat, to pass away); and mpos, in addition to. For further details, see § 147, a, 1, and the Vocabulary. |
Forms.—dypovra, wow, olde, otdare, eirwor, éppebn, eimn, épets, €povat, HAOov, mapéerOn, cicédAOnre, eAOwdv, ‘eEEAOns, ctoedOe, edOEra, cicéOere, cioepydpevor, eloedevoerar, mporpepns, mpdadepe, eloeveykns, ede, payne, Payopuer.
104. THe Sreconp ConJuGATION, OR VERBS IN -pt,
The chief peculiarity of the Second Conjugation is that the Present and Imperfect tenses, and in many verbs the Second Aorist active and middle, affix the ancient terminations (see § 70)* to the stem, without a connecting vowel. The mood- vowels, however, of the Subjunctive and Optative are retained. The old Infinitive ending, -vat, reappears.
The other tenses conform to the paradigm of the First Conjugation, with occasional exceptions, that will be noted in their place.
* These terminations are, in the Active, for the Present (as a principal tense), singular, -m:, -o1, -r:; plural, -pev, -re, -vo.; for the Imperfect and Second Aorist (as historical), singular, -v, -s, -y (generally dropped) ; plural, -“ev, -te, -cav. The ancient Imperative ending, -, also appears. In several eases the terminations are slightly modified, as the paradigms will show. The analogy to the Aorists passive of the First Conjugation will be observed throughout, in form and accentuation.
§105.]. - VERBS IN -pt, 115.
105. MopiFIcaTIONS OF THE STEM.
Verhs in -p modify the verbal stem in one or more of three ways.
a. A pure stem lengthens the vowel in the active indicative singular. ‘Thus from ¢$a-, say, we have first person, $y-pi; third
person, dn-ct.
b. Most stems prefix a reduplication in the Present and Imper- fect tenses. Thus, 80-, give, first becomes 8w-, as above; then, di do-m. So ridnu, from Ge-, put. The vowel preferred in this reduplication ist. The root era-, place, accordingly makes torn, and é, send, inu Sometimes the stem is reduplicated within itself (the Attic reduplication, see § 99, a), as, from éva-, profit, évivnut. In other cases, a nasal -v- is inserted, modified before labials into -p-; thus mpa-, burn, gives mipmpnpt.
c. Several verbs add the syllable -vv- to the stem before the per- sonal endings in the Present and Imperfect tenses. Pure stems take -vvv-. Thus, Sax-, show, gives Seikvups; and otpo-, strew or spread (with lengthened vowel, as above), orpavvups.
d. It is convenient, then, to mark two chief classes of verbs in -pu.
The first exhibits the simple lengthened stem, lawsuits with reduplication preceding.
The second inserts -vv- or -vvv- between the stem and the per- sonal endings.
106. Parapicms oF THE First Cuass.
These also fall into two divisions. The former exhibits the ‘normal forms; the latter contains a few verbs, with short mono- syllabic stems, somewhat irregular in their conjugation, and, from their importance, requiring separate treatment. To the latter class*belongs the substantive verb : eiul, [ am; etva, to be,
116 VERBS IN -pt—FIRST CLASS—PARADIGMS. _[§ 107.
107. Rercuiar Forms, Srems A-, E-, O-. The tenses conjugated like those of verbs in -w will be given at the
end of the paradigms. The accent throughout is generally thrown back as far as possible. Exceptions will be noted.
lornus, to place ; riOnur, to put; dou, to give.
Stem, o7Ta- Ge- do- Active. ; INDICATIVE.
Present, torn TiOnput SfSwpe lorns rlOns dldws tornou(v) TiOnou(v) dfdwor(v) tordpev™ TlOenev didouer loTare rlOere didore toraou(v) TLOéacu(v) diddacr(v)
Imperfect, tornv ér(Onv edldwv iorns ériOns edldws torn érlOn or éridect edldw or édidovt lordpev érlOeuev ed(douev lorare ériOere edldoTe
toraocay ér(Oecavt edld0cav 2nd Aorist, | éorny éorns €oTn EOTHPEV €Oewev Edomev €oTNTE edere €doTe éoTnoav é0ecav édocav
* Rom. iii. 31, has forauev, a doubtful reading, as from a form of the First Conjugation contracted. + 2 Cor. iii. 13; Acts iii, 2, have éri@ovy, as from a form of the First Conjugation contracted.
~ Matt. xxvi. 26, &e.
As from a form of the First Conj, contracted.
§107.] VERBS IN -#'—FIRST CLASS—PARADIGMS. 117 Stem, oTa- Oe- do- IMPERATIVE. Present, torn for torad. rider for ridert Sldov for dfd00e iordrw TLIOETH d15d67@ torare TlOere dldoTe ioraTwoav TUWéTwoay dddTwcar 2nd Aorist, | o770c or ora* és for Oéru dds for 804¢ OTHTW béTw ddTw OTNTE Oére dore OTHTwWO AY dérwoav ddrwoav SUBJUNCTIVE, _ Present, ioTO TLO®@ 8150 toris TOS dud0s torn TLO7 5150 tor@yev TLOGuEV didGpev torre TLOnTE d1dGTe toraou(v) T0G01(v) d1dG01(v) 2nd Aorist, | 074, K.T.A. 08, K.T.A. 06, K.T.A. like Pres. like Pres. like Pres. OPTATIVE. Present, toralny Tieinv dvdotny toratns TLOeins d.d0ins iorain TiUOeln dud0lr toTatev TU etwev d.dotwev ‘toratre TiOetre did0tre ioratey TiWWetev dudotev 2nd Aorist, | crainv Oetny dofnv or danv oTains Oeins doins or dens otain dein dofn or dq
* Only in compound verbs, as ardora (Acts xii. 7; Eph. v. 14), and
similar words.
118 VERBS IN -#t—FIRST CLASS—PaRApDIcMs. [§ 107.
Stem, oTa- Oe- do-
OPTATIVE—continued.
2nd Aorist, | cratnpyev Oeinuev Solnuev orainre Oelnre doinre orate Oetev dotev ! INFINITIVE. Present, ioravat TiOévat diddvat 2nd Aorist, | oTHvar Oeivar dotvar PARTICIPLES, Present, tords, -aoa,-dv TtiOels,-eica,-€v d1d0vs, -odca, , -Ov
2nd Aorist, | oTds, -Goa, -dv Oels, -eica, -év dovs, -odca, -dv
Middle and Passive,
INDICATIVE. Present, torapat TlOenar dfdopac ioracat TiOecat or TiOn didocat torarat riderau didorat iordpeba, TiOéue0a d1ddpucda toracde Tl0ecbe dldoc0€ ioravTat ridevrat diSovrat Imperfect, iorapnv ervdéunv ediddunv ioraco érlOeco or éridov édidoc0 or édid0v iorato erlOeTo ed(d0rT0 iordpeda érvOéucba ed.ddueda iorac0e etiOeabe edld0c0€ ioravro éridevro €d(dovTo IMPERATIVE. | Present, ioraco or torw Tideco or Tidov didoco or didov iordcOw Ti0écOw 51dd600w toracde ri0ec0e didocb€
iordcOwoav ri0écOwoar d:dd00wcar
VERBS IN -}t—FIRST CLASS—PARADIGMS. 119°
§ 107. ]
Stem, OTa- Ge- do- SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present, ioTOpar TLOGpaL d1dGpat torn TL07 d100 tornrar TUOnTaL b1dGTaL iaTOpeda TLOGpE0a dddpcOa iornode TLOno0e bu0G00€ ioT@vTaL TLO@rTaL d1dGvTat
OPTATIVE,
Present, toraluny riOelunu dtd0lunv iorato TLOeto dud0te ioratro TLEiTo 6Ld07TO toraiueba TUciueba did0tpea ioratade TLOciabe did0tcGe ioTatvTo TLOEtvTO d.d0ivTo
INFINITIVE. Present, toracOau tidecbat didocbar PARTICIPLES. Present, toTdpevos TLOEWEVvos dudduevos ! Middle only. INDICATIVE. 2nd Aorist, eO€unv edduny €0ov (-eco) édov (-oco) €0ero -€00TO edencba eddpe0a eOecbe édo0be €0evTo €dovTo IMPERATIVE. 2nd Aorist, dod (-€c0) 08 (-oco) ! béc0w ddc9w béa0e ddcbe décbwoar ddcbwaav
1z0 VERBS IN -}\—FIRST CLASS—PARADIGMS. [§ 107. Stem, orTa- Ge- do- . SUBJUNCTIVE 2ad Aorist, OGp.08 d@pmat 67 do Onrat dorat Odpc0a ddpcda Onobe d6a0¢€ Odvrat davrat OPTATIVE. 2nd Aorist, veipnv Sotuny Oeto dato Oeitro dutTo belucba dofueba Ociobe dotcbe Oeivro doivro INFINITIVE. 2nd Aorist, décbat ddo0ae PARTICIPLES. 2nd Aorist, O€uevos Sdwevos Tenses after the Model of the First Conjugation. Active. INDICATIVE. Future; oTHTw Onow déco Ist Aorist, éornoa éOnka SHwKa Perfect, éornka rédeuka dfdwxa €oTnkas * Eornke(v) ECTIKApLEV or €orapev™
* This syncopated or shortened form is very usual, So in Perf., Inf. and Part.
§ 107.] VERBS IN -p\—FIRST CLASS—PARADIGMS. =—=s_-C121
Stem, oTa- Oe- do- INDICATIVE—continued, Perfect, éoTHKATE or €oTare éoTyKact(y) or €oract(v) Pluperfect, | «lorjxew or (@)reOelkew (€)deddxew EOTIKELY IMPERATIVE. Ist Aorist, oTHoOoV Perfect, €oTNKE TéOeuke d€dwKe SUBJUNCTIVE. Ist Aorist, | otic décw* - Perfect, EoTHKO TeOelKo Bedd5Kw OPTATIVE. Future, OTHTOULL Onrouue dHooupue Ist Aorist, OTHOAUYLL Perfect, EGTHKOLUL TeOelKouue Sed@Kolpe INFINITIVE. Future, | oTHoew Ojoew dacew Ist Aorist, oThoat - Perfect, EOTNKEVAL, TeOerkevat Sedwxevar or éoravat PARTICIPLES. Future, OTHO WY Onoav décwr Ast Aorist, oTHoas Perfect, EOTNKOS, -Via,-0S TEDELKOS — ded@Kos or éoTos, -600, -wst
* See John xvii. 2; Rev. viii. 3, xiii. 16, in which passages the form décy occurs. The best editors, however, read Séce:, fut. indic. t See § 38.
122 VERBS IN -#t—FIRST CLASS—PARADIGMS. [§ 107+ Stem, o7a- Qe- do- Middle and Passive. INDICATIVE. Perfect, EoTapat TEOeyar dédouat Pluperfect, | ecraunv (€)reOelunv (€)deddunv SUBJUNCTIVE. Perfect, EoTapevos @ TeOeimévos w dedouevos ® OPTATIVE. | Perfect, Eatapevos elnv TeOeysevos elnv Sedouévos einv or: INFINITIVE. Perfect, éotdobat rebeloOar - deddc00at PARTICIPLES. Perfect, éxrapmévos TeOeuuevos dedouevos Middle only. | INDICATIVE, Future, | oTNTOMAL Onoomar ddcouat Ist Aorist, eoTNT anv IMPERATIVE. Ist Aorist, oTHoaL SUBJUNCTIVE. Ist Aorist, OTHTMPAL OPTATIVE. Future, oTnoolunv Onoolyny swootunv Ist Aorist, oTnoatunv INFINITIVE. Future, oTnoecOat Onoec bau ddoerbat Ist Aorist, | orjoacda PARTICIPLES, Future, OTNOOMEVOS Onodpevos dwodpuevos 1st Aorist, oTnodpevos
§ 107.]
Stem, oTa- Ge-
*
VERBS IN -#t—FIRST CLASS—PARADIGMS, 123
Oo-
Future, Ist Aorist,
Ist Aorist, Ist Aorist,
Future, 1st Aorist,
Future, Ist Aorist,
Future, Ist Aorist,
Passive only.
INDICATIVE.
, / oTabnoopat TEOnoopar > , En eoTadnv €TEOnv
IMPERATIVE. oTdénrt TéOnte SUBJUNCTIVE. oTade TEDO OPTATIVE. 4 oradnootuny TeOnoolunv atadetnv TeOelnv INFINITIVE. orabynoecbar TeOnoecOar oTadivat TeOnvat PARTICIPLES, oTradnoduevos TeOnadpuevos otaGels, -eloa, TeOeis, -eica, -ev -€v VERBALS.
, , oTaros Oeros oTaTéos Oeréos
do0Onoomat ed00nv
ddOntt 6090 »
d0Onooiuny d00elnv
S00jcecOar do0jvat
do00nodpevos do0cls, -etca, -€y
doTds dsoTeos
Note.—It will be observed that several Aorist forms are omitied: the
alternative tense being in use.
For example: in the Active indicative of
TlOnue and df5wur, the First Aorist is employed for the singular, the Second for the plural, while in the Middle throughout fornu: has the First, ri@npe and d{8wu: the Second. The Active First Aorist of tornu is transitive, the
Second Aorist intransitive, as will be shown hereafter.
124 VERBS IN -#t—FIRST CLASS—REMARES. _[§ 108. 108. Remarks on THE ParRapics.
1. The First Aorist Active of ri@nuc and didom, and, as will be seen hereafter, of iu also, takes -x- instead of -c- for tense- characteristic. This peculiarity is confined to these three verbs ; and their First Aorist is found only in the Indicative mood.*
2. The Perfect tenses of torn, from the stem ora, take the hard breathing, with «© as an “improper reduplication ;” éornxa. The augmented tenses have @, as gornv ; but the Imperfect retains t.
3. The First Aorist of fornu is transitive, the Second intran- sitive, in meaning: éoryca, [ placed ; éorny, I stood.
4, A verb, orjxe (intransitive), fo stand, of the First Conjuga- tion, derived from the Perfect of cra-, is found in a few forms in
“the New Testament. It must be distinguished from the’ Perfect forms of tornpu.
109. VERBS BELONGING TO THIS CLASS.
The number of verbs which conform to the above paradigms is very small, The principal are subjoined.
A-stems,— Like torn, are conjugated the following :—
a. 1. dvivnn, to benefit (stem éva-, with Attic reduplication), only once in the New Testament; Second Aorist, Optative, middle, dvainny (Phile. 20), may L have joy!
2. mipmpnus, to burn (stem mpa-, reduplicated, with nasal), only once in the New Testament, Present Infinitive, passive, miumpacOa (Acts xxviii. 6), to be burned, or inflamed.
3. dpi, to say (stem ga-). The Present Indicative is usually enclitic, except second person singular, otherwise oxytone; third person singular, ¢yoi(v); plural, daci(v); Imperfect, énv; third person singular, én. (See § 103, 7). °
* To this remark there is one exception if the reading décp (on which see note, p. 121) be genuine,
§ 109.] VERBS IN -pi—FIRST CLASS—REMARKS. 125
4. xpn, it is fitting (stem xpa-), impersonal. (See §§ 101, 171.) Once in the New Testament (James iii. 10).
b. Deponent Verbs.—1. divapa, to be able (stem Suva-). Present Indicative, -ya:, -ca (or in MSS., dvvy), -rat, » r.d.; Imperfect, éSuvdpny, or (with double augment) jduvduny ; Present Subjunctive, Stivapat; Optative, dvvaivnv; Infinitive, ddvac6a; Participle, durd- pevos; Verbal, duvardés, possible, capable; Future, duvycopa; First Aorist, éduvi6nv, or ndvvnbny (occasionally in MSS. 7duvac6nv).
2. éricrapa, to know, or to feel sure, ze, “to take one’s stand upon” (stem émi, preposition, and -cra-, but without aspiration), only in Present in New Testament; Indicative, -ya, -ca, -rat, -peOa, -obe, -vrat; Participle, émucrdpevos.
3. kpéuana, to hang, neuter (stem xpepa-); Present Indicative, third person, xpéyarac; plural, xpéuavrac; Participle, xpepdpevos ; First Aorist, éxpeudoOnv; Subjunctive, xpeuacdG; Participle, xpe- pac eis. ;
E-stems. Deponent Verbs.—l. fa, to be seated (stem ¢), properly a Perfect middle or Passive, as from éo, I set, or seat ; gona, I seat myself (like éfouat ; see also xabifw); fya, I have seated myself, and so am now sitting. Only found in the New Testament compounded with the preposition xard, down. xabjpa, I am sitting down, second person, xa6j, for xabjoa ; Imperative, xddov, for «éénoo; Infinitive, cadjc6a; Participle, caOjpevos ; Imperfect Indicative, éxa@npny, properly a Pluperfect.
2. xetpat, to lie down (stem xe-), properly also a Perfect, “I have
laid myself,” or “have been laid down ;” Infinitive, xeic6a:; Par- ticiple, xeiyevos ; Imperfect Indicative, éxeipyny, -co, -ro.
110. The three stems, ée-, t-, and &, being marked by special peculiarities, must be placed alone. The first of the three is by far the most important, as the stem of the sub- stantive verb, esse, to be. With the personal termination, -p+,
the stem (éo-u1) becomes eiui, J am; and with the Infinitive ending, -vat, eivai, to be.
126
VERBS IN -pt—FIRST CLASS—SPECIAL FORMS.
[s 110.
Several tenses are wanting in the conjugation of this verb, which
is as follows :—
> Stem, €o- INDICATIVE MOOD. Present, am.
5) , EO MEV bp] / €OTE
eiol(v)
Imperfect or Aorist, was.
7 Or pny 7o0a. 7
Future, shall be.
éorat (for écerat)
toe
€oTw OF Tw
a ee
Fe)
einv eins ein
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Be thou.
|
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present, may be.
| |
OPTATIVE MOOD. Present, might be.
neev or 7ye0a TE Hoa
3 , éecoueba w 2 éeceabe €covrat
y éoTe éorwoay
= GEV HITE
wou(v)
elnuev elnre elnoav
§ 110.] VERBS IN -pt—FIRST CLASS—SPECIAL FORMS. 127
INFINITIVE. Present, fo be, etvat. Future, to be about to be, érecOar.
PARTICIPLES,
Present, being, dv, odoa, dv; gen. dvtos, ovens, OvTOS, K.T.A. Future, about to be, €oduevos, -n, -ov, -ov, -ns, -0v, K.T.A.
Note on Accentuation.—In the Present Indicative, with the exception
of the second person singular, this verb is an enclitic, excepting (1)
where it follows a paroxytone, when it retains its accent as above; and
(2) in the third person, where it is a predicate, when it becomes paroxy-
tone, as zor: cds, there is a God. It is also paroxytone after ds, ovk, ei kal, TovT’, GAA’. Thus, ode gor, it is not; Tov7’ Eort, that is to say.
111. Not unlike the substantive verb in conjugation, and therefore to be carefully distinguished from it, are the verbs ett (stem t-), go, and inus (stem é-), send. Neither of them is — found in the New Testament,* except in composition. It will suffice to give a few forms of ety, to show the differences between it and the substantive verb; while the most impor- tant compound of ft is subjoined in full.
Forms of ety, to go (stem t-) :—
Inp.—Pres. clu eiot = Yuen tre tacr(v) + + of + * + » imp. pew jes nel Nemev yerre necav IMPER. tOu irw ire irwoay ¥ ” ¥ x Sups.—Pres. ts ins ty twmev inre twor(v) L's Orr.—Pres. tow tous tou touwev tore = touev Inr.—Pres. lévar Part.—Pres. idv iotoa = iov
* Some MSS. read in John vii. 34, 36, for eiul, IT am, elu, I (will) G0. This present tense has in classic Greek a Future significance, equivalent to the English idiom, J am going.
tap) VERBS IN -}t—FIRST CLASS. [§ 112.
112. ConsuGATIoN oF tu, to send, in rts ComPoUND, adn.
The stem is é, which, reduplicated, gives tu. Prefixed is the preposition dé, from, away from; the o being lost before « by elision, and the changed by the aspirate into ¢.
Hence agin, to send away, let go (permit), forgive.
The tenses which follow the analogy of the First Conjugation are included, so far as necessary, in the following paradigm, and will readily be traced.
Active.
INDICATIVE.
Pres., sing., aint, -ins or -ets,* -inov(v)
» plur., -ieuev -lere -aou(v) or aprodor(v)
Impf., sing.,+ jgiov pues nove
Fut., adjoo Ist Aor., ana, (See § 108, 1.)
Perf., adeika Pluperf., adefkew
2Aor.,sing.wantmg. Plural, ddecivey adeire . ddeioar IMPERATIVE.
Pres., die dduéra Plural, adfere adiéraoay
2 Aor., des aero » aere adérwoav SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., agua, “Us, “4 “LOMEV, -UTE, -LGou(v)
2 Aor., ap, -is, -7) -GpEV, ~hTe, -Gou(v) OPTATIVE.
Pres., dduelnv, -ns, -7 ddieipev, etre, -elev
2 Aor., aden, -ns, -9 deter, -eire, -€tev INFINITIVE.
Pres., davévat 2 Aor., adeivat PARTICIPLES.
Pres., aduels, -cioa, -€v 2 Aor., adels, -cica, -év
* Rev. ii» 20, criticaledd. § ¢ Preposition augmented. Plural wanting.
§ 112.] VERBS IN -pt—FIRST CLASS. 129
Middle and Passive.
INDICATIVE. Pres., dbieyar, -cat,-trat ~=—Ss- Plural, dduéyeda, -o0e, -vras Imf., ddieunv, -co, -To » adbreyeda, -o0e, -vTo Perf., sing., dpeiuat adetoar . addeiras 3 | 5 plur., ddetucda adetobe adetvrat or adewvrar* Plup., agefunv adetoo Gdetro, K.T.A. IMPERATIVE, Pres., adleco or adiov adiecdo, K.T.A. SUBJUNCTIVE. ; Pres., dgi@pat, -t7, -ufjrat, x.7.A. -tdueOa, -lnode, -lwvrat OPTATIVE.
Pres., aduotunv or aduelunv, -oto or -efo, -ofro or -€iro, K.T.A. INFINITIVE.
Pres., dadlecdar PARTICIPLE,
Pres., ddieuevos
Middle only. INDICATIVE. Fut., ddjoopar 2 Aor., ddelunv, as Plup. IMPERATIVE, 2 Aor., adod, apécdw aperbe, apecbacay SUBJUNCTIVE. 2 Aor., dpGyat, -7, -rat, K.7.A. OPTATIVE. Fut., dadnoolunv 2 Aor., ddotuny, -oto, -oiro INFINITIVE. Fut., adjoecda 2 Aor., adécbau PARTICIPLES. Fut., ddynodpuevos' 2 Aor., adépevos Passive only. INDICATIVE. Fut., ddeOjoouar 1 Aor., aféOnv
* This is the more common form, and is taken from the Doric dialect.
130 VERBS IN -ft—FIRST CLASS. [§ 112,
IMPERATIVE,
1 Aor., apéOnre SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., ape06 OPTATIVE.
Fut., ddeOnoolunv 1 Aor., ddedeinv INFINITIVE.
Fut., adeOjoeoda 1 Aor., dpeOjvar PARTICIPLES.
Fut., ddeOnodpuevos 1 Aor., adedels _VERBALS.
aetos Ss aderéos
113. Srconp Crass. VERBS IN -vupt OR -vvupt.
1. These verbs have no Second Aorist.*
2. Most of them have a kindred form of the First Conjugation, in -véo or -vvio. From this form are taken—often, the Indicative Present and Imperfect, with the Present Infinitive; generally, the Present Participle ; and always, the Subjunctive and Optative moods. Thus, from Sex-, show, we sometimes find the forms Sexvia,. ~eis, -€t, Oeckvvetv, Secxviov ; while the only Present Subjunctive recog- nised is Secxvia, -ns, -7 ; and the only Present Optative, decxvdorps.
In the paradigms, these forms of the First Conjugation are marked by a dagger (f).
3. All the tenses but the Present and Imperfect are formed from
the stem (without -vv-), These are placed separately for comparison.
114, Parapiems oF delxvupn, to show, AND Cévvvp, to gird.
Stem (consonant), dexx- (vowel), Co-
Active. INDICATIVE, Pres., defkvips or tdeixviw Cévviys or tlwvviw Selkvus _— deuKvvets, (évvus Covviers, ’ Belkvior(v) .T.A. Covvior(v) K.T.A.
* With one exception, in classic Greek, oBévyupu, to quench ; 2nd Aor., teBny.
§ 114.] VERBS IN -Bt\—SECOND CLASS. 13]
Stem (consonant), Sexx- (vowel), Co-
delkvipev COvvvpEV delKvuTe COVVUTE delxvvot(v) Cévvvor(v)
Impf., ed¢efkviv or tédelxvvov eCaévvov or Fécovvvor edelkvus edelKvues, eCavvrs —- EC@v VUES, K.T.A. edelkvu K.T.A. eCOvLD edelkvipev ECOVVU LEV edelKvuTE €COvVUTE edelkvvcay eCovvvcay
IMPERATIVE.
Pres., defkvt or delxvvO Cévvv or Cvvvbu SELKVUT@ CavviTw delkvite COVvVUTE detkyUTwoay (ovviTwcav
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres., tdeuxviw torvrie OPTATIVE.
Pres.,f decxvvousr Tovvdoue INFINITIVE.
Pres., Sevxvivar or tdecxview Covvivar or tC@vvveu PARTICIPLES. Pres., derxvis, -doa, or foerxvdov Cwvvis, -tca, or tlovrior
Middle and Passive.
INDICATIVE. Pres., defkvipar derxvipeOa = Gevvipar «= Cw vd Oa delxvvcat detxvucde Cdvvica. evvvabe SefxvuTat — SelxvvvTat COvvvTat (SvvvvTat Impf., édecxvipny edecxvineda eCwvvipnv eCwvvdipeda ae 23 7 Yl oe oe .L édelkvvco = edeixvucOe §=— Evv0——s EC Oe 3 4 3 7 P] , v 3 , edeikvuTo —s- Ede (KVUVTO ECavvvTo eCevvvVTO IMPERATIVE. en th Pres., defkvico delixvucbe Cévvico Cévvvabe
BexviaOw = deixvicbwoay Qwovviciw Cwvvicbacay SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres., fdecxviopat tovviopat
182 VERBS IN -#¥—SECOND CLASS. [§ 114.
Stem (consonant), Sexx- (vowel), Co-
OPTATIVE. Pres.,f decxvvolunv twvvvolunv INFINITIVE. : Pres., defkvvcdai or FderxvierOar Cévvvoba or Flwvvierdar
TENSES AFTER THE MODEL OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
Active.
INDICATIVE.
Fut., deffo (dow 1 Aor., gdevéa éCooa
Perf., déde.ya éCoxa Plup., (é)dedeixew é(c) ew IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., defor (Goov SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., deffo - bow Perf., Sedefxw eCaxo OPTATIVE.
Fut., deffoupu Cécot 1 Aor.,delfayu oa
Perf., dedelyouse ECOKOUpL INFINITIVE.
Fut., detfew Goew 1 Aor.,de?far (oat
Perf., dederxevar éCwxévar
Middle and Passive.
INDICATIVE.
Perf., déderyyar EQwouar Plup., ededelyynv e(1)Coounv
IMPERATIVE. |
Perf., déde.£0 dedelxyOw, K.T.A. Efwoo edo Oa, K.T.A, SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perf., dedevypévos @ eCaopéevos ® OPTATIVE.
Perf., dederypévos elny é(wopévos etny
§ 114. | VERBS IN -#t—SECOND CLASS. | 133
Stem (consonant), derx-
(vowel), Co-
INFINITIVE. Perf., ded<txdar
€(ao0a-
Middle only.
INDICATIVE.
Fut., de(foua. éoopar
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., de7fau
SUBJUNCTIVE. 1 Aor., deffouar
OPTATIVE.
Fut., decfofuny Cwcolunv
INFINITIVE.
Fut., deffeoOa. éoecdar
PARTICIPLES.
1 Aor., ddeEdunv eCoodunv (oa Sinai
1 Aor., decEatunv Cooalynv
1 Aor., det£ac8ar Gcacbar —
Fut., deréduevos Cwoduevos 1 Aor., dergduevos Cwodpevos
INDICATIVE. —
Passive only.
Fut., dexOjoopar CacOjcowar 1 Aor., edelxOnv — eC@aOnv
IMPERATIVE.
1 Aor., defxOnre SUBJUNCTIVE.
1 Aor., 51x96
OPTATIVE.
Fut., devxOnootuny
1 Aor., det Oelnv INFINITIVE.
Fut., deyOjnoecdar
1 Aor., dex Ojvas VERBALS. | |
SEuKTOS deukTéos
(ooOnTe (ao06
Cacdnootuny (modeinv
Coobjnocec Oat CooOnvat
(aartds (woréos
134 | VERBS IN -pi—SECOND CLASS. [§ 115.
115. Remarks oN THE PARADIGMS.
_ @ The quantity of the v is marked in a sufficient number of
cases to indicate the rest. Where in the first class of verbs in -1, the stem-vowel a, ¢, or 0, is made long, the v of the second class is also lengthened. Thus rin, Seikvdps, but rideper, deixviper.
6. Verbs of this class seldom occur in the New Testament, with the exception of deckvyys and dwdd\uu. (See below.)
116. VERBS witH CONSONANT-STEMS, LIKE delxvupt.
1. piyvups, to mix (stem, pry-), only found in the New Testament in forms like the First Conjugation ; First Aorist, guwéa; Perfect Participle, péueypar.
2. Drv, to destroy, to lose (stem, 6d-, or -dde) ; hence dd-vuus, and with the v assimilated, d\Avpx), only found in the New Testa- ment with the prefixed preposition, dwé. Present Indicative, dwéddvpt ; Middle and Passive, dwé\d\vpa. Chiefly found in tenses derived from collateral stem dmode-, Active Future, drodéow, once drone ;* First Aorist, dradeoa; Perfect, with neuter meaning, I perish! awddorda; Middle Future, drododpa; Second Aorist, droddpunv ; Present Participle, of drod\ipeva often, the perishing.
3. durum, to swear (stem, -dp- or -dpo-). The forms used in the New Testament are Present, as of First Conjugation, éuvio, durview (but in Mark xiv. 71, the best MSS. read éuviva) ; First Aorist, épooa; Infinitive, duédca, from épé-.
4, piyvup, to tear (stem, fay-). Present Passive Indicative, third person plural, pyyvuvra (Matt. ix. 17); but generally with forms as from pjoow, png.
117. VxErss with VOWEL-STEMS, LIKE (évyupt.
1. A-STEMS:—xepavyvn, to mix (stem, xepa-). Only twice, First Aorist, éxépaca (Rev. xviii. 6); Perfect Puarticiple Passive, kexe- pacpévos (Rev. xiv. 10).
* 1 Cor. i. 19, from LXX,
§ 117.] VERBS IN -#t—SECOND CLASS. (135
2. E-sTeMs.—évvuyu, to clothe (stem, fe-), only found with the prefixed preposition, dupé, about. Present Active Indicative, third person singular, duduervver(v) (Matt. vi. 30; Luke xii. 28), and Perfect Passive Participle, with augment prefixed to the prepo- sition, nudueopévor (Matt. xi. 8; Luke vii. 25).
kopevvyu, to satisfy (stem, Kope-), First Aorist Passive Participle, kopevOeis (Acts xxvii. 38); Perfect Passive Participle, cexopeapévos (1 Cor. iv. 8).
oBéevvupn, to extinguish (stem, cBe-), Future Active, cBéow ; Future
Passive, cBecOnoopa.
3. O-STEMS.—povrvvjn, to strengthen (stem, po-), found only in the Perfect Middle Imperative, ¢foco; plural, épwc6e, be strong! 2.6., Farewell.
otpavvun, to strew, or spread (stem, orzpo-), Present forms as from otpwwviw; First Aorist Active, éerpeca; Perfect Participle Passive, éorpapévos. If the above verbs, with their significations, are now committed to memory, some trouble may be saved at subsequent stages,
Exercise 14.—On the Second Conjugation, or Verbs in -P.
[The following examples of verbs in -~ occur in the “ Sermon on the Mount,” and are here presented for analysis. In addition to explanations already given (see Exercise 13, on the Defective Verbs), it must be noted that the prefix dro- (/rom, away front), with the verb dieu, has the sense of return; drodidopi, to qive back ; and ém-, with the same verb, may be rendered over; dyn- signifies against. |
ForMs.—éorw, éore, torat, tbr, ef, gotw, fcecbe, 7, dvta, ovTEs, riOéacwv, mpocbeivar, mpooreOnoerat, avtiativat, dds, Sdta@, Sidov, anodas, rapadd, dare, emidacet, SoOncerat, Siddvar, apes, apieuer, apnre, apn: ety Sivaca, dSdvara, divacGe, Kemmévn, amrdAnrat, dudcat, dpdons, pygosW, apdievyvaow.
mm
s
136 _— VERBS—EXERCISES. [§ 117.
Exercise 15.—General, upon the Verbs.
*,* The learner should now be expert in tracing any verbal form to its stem. As a test of proficiency, the following list of verbs is subjoined, taken in order from the Second Epistle to the Thessalonians. let the stem,. conjugation, .class, voice, mood, tense, and, when necessary, the number and person, of every one be written down; if possible, without reference to any paradigm. Prefixes not belonging to the root are printed in thick type. The Vocabulary or Lexicon must be consulted
. for the meaning of the words.
CHAPTER I.
3. Hbyapioretiv, dfetopev, tmepav§dver, wreovdfer. 4. kavyacba (how do you distinguish in such a word between the First and Second Conjugations 1), dveyerOe. 5. karakbqva, racyere. 6. dvrarododvat, OriBovow (Participle). 7. OriBopévors. 8. 8:ddvros, ciddat, dmaxovover (Participle). 9. ricovow. 10. €dOn, evdogacOjvar, Oavpacbjva, mored- now (Participle), émoredOn, 11. tporevydueba, déiaon, mAnpoon. 12. evdoacG7.
CHAPTER II.
1, "Eporapev. 2. cadrevOjvar, OpocicOa, eveornker. 3. &ararjon, €On, Gmoxartuphj. 4, dvtixeiwevos, dmeparpdpevos, Aeydpevov, Kalica, Gmodexvivta. 5. pynwovevere, EXeyov. 6. Katéxov, vidare, &troxaupOjvat. 7. evepycirat, karéxov, yevnra. 8, dmoxatuPOjoera, avadooe, Karap- yioe. 10. GmrodrAvpéevors, ed€Eavro, coOqva. Ll. méuper, moredoa (distinguish this from Optative forms, as in ver. 17). 12. xpiddor, mistevoartes, edoKnoavres. 13. deidoper, edyapioreiv, nyamnpévot, ethero (eckaro is read by Lachmann and Tischendorf; see § 97, note).
14. ékddecer, 15. orneere (see § 108, 4), xpareire, ediddyOnre. 16. : ayarjoas, Sovs. 17. wapaxadreoa (Optative), ornpigac (Optative). CHAPTER III.
1. Tlpocetyerde, rpéxn, So€dtnra. 2. pucOdperv. 3. ornpiéer, puddée.. 4. merolOapev, TapayyéAdAopev, mroveire, mounoere. 5. Karevdiva. (Opta- tive). 6. ordd\decOa, wepuraroivros, mapédaBe. 7. pipeioOat, nrakri- capev (from Grakréw). 8. epdyoper, épyafspevor, em8apioa. 9. Exoper, Sayer. 10. jpev, TapyyyéAAoper, Gere, épydferOa, eoOierw. 11. dkovouer,
§ 117.] EXERCISES. 187
épyatopévous, tweprepyatouevous. 12. wapaxadodpuev, ecbiwow. 13. éxxa- Knonre, Kadorowowvres. 14. tmaxover, onperoiade, cuvavanlyvuade, é évrparri}.
15. yciobe, vovbercire. 16. dan. 17. ypado.
Exercise 16.—Short Sentences. I. Tue Beatirupes (Matt. v. 3-10).
These and the following Sentences are given chiefly as practice in applying the rules of conjugation and declension. As the clauses are complete in sense, they necessarily involve the princi- ples of Syntax ; but no difficulties in construction will be found. For the use of the Cases, see 11. The references in the Notes to succeeding parts of the work will also be useful.
Observe that throughout the Beatitudes the substantive verb are
must be supplied with the predicate, wardpio, blessed. (See $166.) or is because (§ 136, 6).
ol 2
1 ? € ‘ bed Lis big aA > c , “ . Makdptot of tr@xot To mvevpati’* Ore ad’tav* éatw H Bacidela TOY oupavar.
+3
2. paxdptor of mevOodvres *® Sr adrol mapaxAnOnoovrat.
4 2 $29 % , \ a OTL AUTOL KANPOVOLNGOVGL THY v7.
3. paxdptoe of mpacts |
4. paxdpos of mewavres kai Supavres® rhv Sixacocdvyy* re adrod xop- tacOnoovra..
5. paxdproe of éXenpoves’ Ste adrot éhenOnoovrat.
6. paxdptor of kaOapot rH Kapdia* Ore adrol rov Ocdy drovras.§
7. pakdpror of etpnvorroioi* Stu adrot viol? Geod minicar
8. pakdpior of Sedi@ypéevor evexev® Suxatoodyns * étt aitav éotw 7
Bacirela TOY ovpavar.
1 Dative: in (the) spirit, as hereafter explained, § 280, f. Compare rn Kapdia, 6.
2, Of them = theirs.
3 The mourning ones = those who mourn, § 200. Compare the Parti- ciples in sentences 4, 8.
4 See § 39. ,
5 Hungering and thirsting for righteousness (acc.), § 281, a.
8 See § 103 (4).
7 Nominative after.a copulative verb. See § 165, note.
8 For the sake of (gen.), § 133.
=e EK; ”
138
EXERCISES.
[s 117.
II. From Jown 1
Prepositions. and, with Gen., from, of (a place). by means of. out of. év, with Dat., in, with plural, among.
, dea, 5
napa, With Gen., from (of persons).
mpés, With Acc., unto, with (§ 307,
Y 2). Further details, Ch. VL, and Syntax.
Adverb used as Preposition. xepis, with Gen., without.
Negative Adverbs.
ov, Not. ovde, not even.
Conjunctions. kal, and (§ 136, 1). as, as (§ 136, 2). »
Verses 1-5.
"Ev dpxn fv 6 Adyos.} 7]
\ ‘ > ae Le > ‘ A a , Kal xwpis avrov éyéveto ovde Ev, 6 yéyover.
. > Adyos ; Kal 6 Adyos hv mpds Tov Cedv, Kal eds Hy odtos iv ev apxn mpos tov Oedp.
6 > a Ildvra &:’ aitovd eyévero,
y ita (wn F i Cor €v aUT@ (@n nV, Kal ) C@7
> ca - > s - a fv to pas trav avOpomey, kai rd has €v tH oKorig haiver, kai 7 oKoria
avro ov KaréAaPev.
Verse 14.
, r Kal 6 Adyos cdp& éyévero, kal eoxnvacer ev piv, (kai ecardpeda thv
SéEav airov, Sdéav &s povoyevods mapa marpds*) mAnpns xaptros Kai
adnbeias.
Verses 46, 47.
Eiipicxet Bidurmos tov NaOavaid, kai éyer aiTe,®
? “~ , ‘ c a 5 év T@ vouw kal of mpopjrat,
rov’ amd Nagaper.
rif > “a 6
evpnkapev, Inaovy > ~
kal elev ait@® Nadavaia,
*Ov* éypaye Masijs \ e\ a > A Tov vidv Tov ‘Iaond
"Ex Nafapér Svvarai tt
9 -~ ayabdy eivar;® déyer aro? Didurmos, “Epxov kai ide.
1 6 Adyos is the subject, § 206.
2 Singular verb, with plural neuter nominative, § 173. 3 To him, dative after the verb of saying, § 278, 6. 4 Understand him as antecedent: ‘*him whom,” § 347,
5 Understand éypaypay.
6 (Namely) Jesus, in apposition (§ 177) with the antecedent (2) above, 7 Simply refers to vidv (§ 230, a), not to be translated. 8 The infinitive dependent on divara (§ 389, a): can anything good be,
§ 117.] EXERCISES. | 139
Ill. SeLectep SENTENCES.
Prepositions (additional). Conjunctions. eis, with Acc., into. 32. but € ° emi, ” iy or that 9 e
perd, With Gen., together with.
‘Erousdoare! ryv 6ddv Kupiov. > A Inood, €dénodv! pe. . Odpoe!, éyerpar', hovel ce. ¢. ’ , i) H miotis cov TET@KE Ce. > Adéwvrai cov ai auapriat. . Suvédpape” mpds adrovs mas 6 dads, , ‘ a a > , . Merexadéoato rovs mpeaBurepous THs exkAnoias. » Makdpidy éore diddvac paddov 7) AapBaverv.
WCHOAIANAF wwe
. Kaicapa® émixéxdAnoa, émt Kaioapa mopevon.
10. *Avdorn6c}, cat or7jOc' emt rods mddas cov.
11. ‘H alors buav karayyéAXera ev do TO kdopo.
12. ’EvdpavOnre', 2Ovn, pera rod aod adrod.
13. ‘Qs codds dpxiréxrav Oewedrov réOerxa, Gros Se errorkodopet.
14, BOcipovow On xpyo@* dusdiat Kaxai.
15. ‘H dydry rod Xpiorod cuvexer jpas. :
16. Xwpycare’ juas, oddeva Ndiknoaper, ovdéva épbecipauer, ovdéva er covekTnoaper.
(17. Tdvra Soxipagere*! rd Kaddv karéxyere’) dd mavrds €tdSous movnpod® dréyeobe.' ;
18. Iords® 6 Adyos kal maons amodoyjs’ déios, dre Xpiords "Inoods HrOev eis tov Kdopov apaptorods cdaa.§
> , ¢ 4 is! a a , b] fod ? rod 19. ’Hvolyn 6 vads rns oxnvns Tod paprupiou év T@ ovpavo.
1 For the sense of the Aorist Imperative, and its distinction from the Present, § 373 may be consulted.
2 See § 103 (5).
3 7'o Cesar: prep. implied in verb (§ 281, a). See (°) on the Beatitudes. |
4 See § 3, h.
5 From every form of evil, 1 Thess. v. 22.
6 Understand éor:. Compare on the Beatitudes, prefixed note.
7 Genitive, by &f:os, worthy of (§ 272).
8 Infinitive, expressing purpose, as in English. (See 389, 3, 1.)
eae PREPOSITIONS. [g 118.
Cuaprrer VI.—PREPOSITIONS.
118. It was stated in § 11 that three forms of inflection, or “cases,” in Nouns are used to denote three several relations of place: the Genitive implying motion from; the Dative, rest in, or connexion with ; and the Accusative, motion towards. The cases thus severally answer the questions, Whence? Where? Whither? |
With this general distinction are connected very many other relations, which are expressed by the same three cases, with the aid of PREposiTIons.
To Syntax it belongs to exhibit the various meanings of the prepositions, and their place in sentences. For the present, it will suffice to give a list of the chief of them, with their general significations. This is necessary, partly because several adverbs (see § 132) are derived from prepositions; but chiefly because of the important place which prepositions hold in the composition of verbs. (See Chapter X.)
Prepositions may govern— 1. The Genitive only : Whence ? 2. The Dative only: Where ? 3. The Accusative only: Whither ? 4, The Genitive and Accusative: Whence ? Whither ? 5. The Genitive, Dative, and Accusative: Whence ?
Where ? Whither ? 119. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE ONLY.
dvri (opposition, equivalent), over against, opposed to, instead of.
dzé (motion from the exterior), from, away from.
§ 119.] ~ PREPOSITIONS. 141
éx, ¢€ (motion from the interior), from, out of. mpd, before, whether of time or place. To these may be added most of the “improper.” prepositions, as
they are often called; being really adverbs with a prepositional government. (For a list of these, see § 133.)
120. PREposITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY.
_ &v, tn, of time, place, or element; among.
ovv (union of co-operation), with.
121. PREposITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE ONLY. dvd (up in), used in the phrases dvd pécov, in the midst of; ava pépos, in turns (1 Cor. xiv. 27).
eis (motion to the interior), into, to, unto, with a view to.
122. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE.
_ dd, through. Grn (through, as proceeding from), through, by means of. Acc, (through, as tending towards), on account of, or owing to.
card, down. Gen. (down from: so, literally, 1 Cor. xi. 4),
against. Acc. (down towards), according to, throughout, during, over. é ) .
pera (union of locality; compare civ). GEN., together with, among. Acc., after.
nepi, around. GEN., about, concerning, on behalf of; once, above (3 John 2). <Acc., about, rownd about. imép, over. GEN., above, on behalf of, for. Acc., beyond.
ind, under. GeEn., by (of the agent or efficient cause). ACC., under, in the power of, close upon (as Acts v. 21, close upon morning, t.e., “very early”).
“142 PREPOSITIONS. [s 123.
123. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE, Dative, AND ACCUSATIVE.
éni (superposition). GEN., upon (as springing from), over, in the presence of, im the time of. Dat., upon (as resting on), in addition to, on account of. Acc., up to (used of place, number, aim), over (of time, place, extent).
mapa (juxtaposition). Gen. (from beside), from, used of persons, as dé of places. Dar. (at the side of), near, with, of persons only, except John xix. 25. Acc. (to, or along the side of), beside, compared with, t.e., so as to be shown beyond, or contrary to, instead of.
mpés (in the direction of). GEN., wm favour of, only in Acts xxvii. 34. Dart., at, close by. Acc., towards, m reference to.
124, Synoprican TABLE oF THE PREPOSITIONS.
The Prepositions are here exhibited in groups, both because their meaning may thus be more easily remembered, and because the com- parison, both in meaning and form, suggests some interesting points of relationship. For further details the student may consult Dr. Donald- son’s ‘‘ New Cratylus,” Book ii., chapter 2. Only the general meaning of every preposition is given in the following table; and the initial capitals denote the cases governed. Cases found in classic Greek, but not in the New Testament, with certain prepositions, are bracketed.
G. *Aro, in reference to the exterior, from. G. *Ex, in reference to the interior, from, proclitic. } D. Ey, ” ” m, ”
(D.) A. ’Avd, up; opposite of xard. { G. A. Kard, down; opposite of ava. G.D. A. "Emi, superposition, wpon. G. D. A. Tlapd, juxtaposition, beside. G. D. A. Ilpds, propinquity, towards. G. (D.) A. epi, circumvention, entire ; around. (a. D, A.) “Api, circumvention, partial; about.
§ 124.] | PREPOSITIONS. 143
G. A. ‘Ymép, over; (super). \ G. A. ‘Yad, under ; (sub).
| G. A. Merd, association, with, after. Sv, co-operation, with.
G. IIpé, opposition, general, in front of, before. G. A. Ard, through, kindred with dvo0, and regarding the object as divided into two parts.
{ G. *Avri, opposition, specific, over against.
Api is not used in the New Testament, except in composition. In classic Greek, its use is comparatively rare. With all three cases it means about, or around.
Accentuation. —The Prepositions are all oxytone except the proclitics, eis, ex, ev.
125. For further details as to the meaning and use of the prepositions, see Chapter X., especially the Table, § 147, a; also SynTAX.
In explanation of the very various significance which may belong to the same preposition, two points should be noted : (1) that its meaning will be necessarily modified by the signification of the verb that it may follow, and by that of the noun which it governs, as also by the case of the latter ; and (2) that as all lan- guages have a far smaller number of words than there are shades of thought to express, one word must often have many applications. Then, as no language is exactly parallel, word for word, with any other, the variations of meaning included under one Greek term, for instance, will not be the same as those embraced by the nearest English equivalent. Thus, imép may often be translated for; but the applications of the two words, though perhaps any various, are very far from being identical.
144 | ADVERBS. [gs 126.
CuarTER VII.—ADVERBS. 126. The simplest, and perhaps the original form of an
Adverb, is some case of a substantive, a pronoun, or an adjec- tive agreeing with a noun understood ; fixed absolutely in that shape to express some quality, manner, place, or time.
a. The Accusative is very often thus employed, as axujy (Matt. xv. 16), yet, lit., “up to (this) point ;” mepdv, on the other side. In like manner is used the accusative neuter of many adjectives, both singular and plural ; often with the article: as, rd Noudy, further- more (once, rod Aowrod, Gal. vi. 17) ; ra woddd, for the most part. So, possibly from obsolete adjectives, onpepov, to-day; atpror, to-morrow ; x6és, yesterday.
b. The Dative (sometimes in an obsolete form) is also frequently found: as idia, privately; metn, by land. Here the iota subscript is often omitted: mdvrn, always (Acts xxiv. 3, in some copies, mavtn) ; «ik, without a cause.
c. The Genitive occurs in airod, there, as well as in other forms, which will be noticed immediately.
d. In some instances, a preposition with its case written as one word, is used adverbially, as mapayphpa, immediately, lit., “along with the business ;” ¢é£aipyns, suddenly, lit., “from a steep descent ;” xaOcéjs, in order, lit., “according to a special course.”
e. The older form of the language employed the terminations -Oev, -@, and -8 as case-endings of nouns (Gen., Dat., Acc.), and when they became obsolete in ordinary declension, they were retained as adverbial terminations to denote whence, where, and whither. Thus: oipavdber, from heaven; maddbev, from childhood (Mark ix. 21); mépvox (the -o. standing for the older -6:), last year (2 Cor. viii. 10; ix. 2). These terminations are also found in adverbs derived from prepositions and other adverbs, on which see § 132.
§ 127.) . ADVERBS, 145
_12'7. ApvERBS IN -as.
The most common form of adverbs is, however, that in -os. This termination, which answers exactly in meaning to our final syllable -/y,* is affixed to adjective-stems of all forms, the stem-ending, where needful, being modified.
For example :
First form (§ 34), dikatos, gust, Sixato-; dixaiws, justly. Second form (§ 37), was, all, wavt-; mdvras, wholly. Third form (§ 41), ddnOjs, true, édndeo-; ddrnbds, truly.
Participles may also yield this adverbial form, as dvrws (from dy, stem évr-) really.
Sometimes an adverb formed from an adjective appears in two forms ; as rayv and rayéas, quickly ; ed0ds (probably a corrupt form of 060) and edOéws, immediately.
128. ComMPaRISON OF ADVERBS.
The comparative of adverbs is generally the neuter singular accusative of the corresponding adjective; the superlative, the neuter plural. Thus: rayéws (or rayd) quickly; raywv, more quickly (John xx. 4); rdxtora, most quickly (Acts xvii. 15); ed, well (probably from éis, an old equivalent of aya6és) ; BeAriov, better (2 Tim. 1.18). Adverbs of other than adjective derivation -con- form to this model. So from dye (see § 132) is found dvérepov.
Some comparatives take the termination -ws, as mepiroorépas, more abundantly.
An irregular comparative and superlative are paddor, more ; padiora, most. So, docov, nearer (Acts xxvii. 13), attributed to the adverb (in classic Greek); dyx., near; superlative, dyxiora.
* It is possibly an old dative plural: -ws = -os. The accentuation generally follows that of the genitive plural of the adjective; as dialoy, Sixalws, GAnOar, GAnOds.
146 | | ADVERBS. [§ 129. |
129. PronominaL ADVERBS, USED ALSO AS CONJUNCTIONS.
Several adverbs are formed indirectly or directly from pro- nouns ; and, like pronouns, are demonstrative, relative, inter- rogative, dependent interrogative, and indefinite (enclitic).
The following Table gives the chief pronominal adverbs found in the New Testament :—
Demonstrative. Relative. Interrogative. insetoneatays: Indefinite. Time... | tére, then bre, when | wére; when? | dxdre, when | rote, some- viv, vuvi, now | hvica, when, time in parti- cular Place...| abrod, here | ob, where | mot; where? | drov, where | rov, some- ade, here where éxel, ekeElce, there, thither évedde, hither , évrevbev, hence, | Sev, whence | wé0ev; whence? thence Manner! ofrw(s), thus, | ds, as nos; how? | émws, how | mw(s),some- 80 nérepov, whe-| how ther
The correlatives in the above Table will be immediately per- ceived. For further details compare under Pronouns, especially § 62, and SynTAx. Odra, so, becomes otras before.a vowel, and the indefinite ro is always mas, except in composition.
It will be observed that the scheme of adverbs is incomplete in the relative and interrogative divisions, by the omission of the (accusative) form whither. Classic Greek supplies the omission by the words ol, moi; dro, but these are not found in the New Testament, the genitive forms od, rod; émod being used. Compare in English the tendency to say ‘‘ Where are you going?” for “ Whither are you going ?”
»
§ 130.] ADVERBS. 147
130. NumeraL ADVERBS.
Numeral adverbs end in -ts, -xis, or -axts, as Sis, twice ; rpis, thrice; énrakis, seven times ; €Bdopunxovrdks, seventy times (Matt. xviii. 22); modAdkis, many tunes. dma, once for all, is exceptionally formed ; dodxis, as often as (1 Cor. xi. 25, 26), is from the relative,
131. ApvERBS FROM VERBS.
Ancient verbal forms, used as adverbs, are deipo, hither, with its plural, Sedre. These are generally employed as imperatives, “Come thou (or ye) dither!” The imperative dye is also employed as a kind of adverb, Go to! (James iv. 13; v. 1.)
Some verbs in -(fo, expressing national peculiarity, form an adverb in -tori, Thus, from éddnvito, we find &drnnuori, in the Greek language ; similarly, é8paicri, in the Hebrew language.
132. Apverss FROM PREPOSITIONS.
Many prepositions have a corresponding adverb in -w (par- oxytone). Thus, from dva is formed dvo, upwards; and from katd, kato, downwards. So, écw, within; t&o, without. The termination -Gev is added to these adverbs also, with a genitive force ; as dvwber, from above ; tEwber, from without.
Once a preposition without change is employed as an adverb (2 Cor. xi. 23), inép eyo, I (am) more.*
133. Prepositive ADVERBS, OR IMPROPER PREPOSITIONS.
Several adverbs may be used like prepositions to govern nouns, and are then termed “improper” or “spurious” prepositions, The following is an alphabetical list of the principal found in the New Testament :—
dua, together with. avev, without. dypu(s), or péxpr(s), until.
* So, mpds, too, often in classical Greek.
148 ADVERBS. [§ 183.
éyyus, near, in time or space. eumpoober, before.
évavriov, in front of, agvinst.
évexa (-ev), for the sake of.
evariov, before, in the presence of.
céw, without.
eave, above.
gow, within.
éws, as far as.
pécov, in the midst of (Phil. ii. 15, MSS.). perakv, between.
dricw, dmicbev, behind, after.
oye, at the end of (Matt. xxviii. 1). TAnv, except.
TAnciov, Near ; mapamAnciov, very Near. trepéexewa, beyond (2 Cor. x. 16). xapw, by favour of, for the sake of. xepis, separated from, without.
Some of the above, it is evident, are originally adverbial forms of adjectives and substantives. All govern the Genitive, except aya (Matt. xiii, 29), and wapamAnoiov (Phil. ii. 27), which take the Dative ; as does éyyis sometimes.
1384. NercativE ADVERBS.
a. The negative adverbs are od (before a vowel, ovx; before an aspirated vowel, odx), not, and pj, not.
Accentuation.—ov is proclitic, excepting where emphatic; as o#, Vo! (John i, 21).
b. For an explanation of the difference between these two words, see Syntax. It must suffice now to say that od denies absolutely, pj, oO some expressed or implied condition. The former is called the “ categorical,” or “ objective” negative ; the latter, the “con- ditional,” or “subjective.” Both words are used in composition
§ 5184) ADVERBS. 149
with zis, re (see § 60) ; also with the indefinite adverbs in the Table, § 129, as otra, not yet; phmore, never in any case.
c, My is also used as an interrogative adverb, expecting the answer, 0; and, in composition with the interrogative ris, adds a kind of appeal to the hearers, as though enlisting their assent to the negative : thus, pyri éyo; (Mark xiv. 19), Zs 7? te, “It is not I, is it?”
150 CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 135.
CuarterR VIII.—CONJUNCTIONS AND OTHER PARTICLES.
135, Besides the Conjunctions properly so called, used, as in other languages, to unite words and sentences, there are in Greek several indeclinable words, employed sometimes separately, often in combination with other words, for the purpose of emphasis. These cannot always be translated, the degree of emphasis being too slight for the words of other languages to convey.
These indeclinable words, together with the conjunctions themselves (and sometimes the primitive adverbs), are gene- rally called Particles.
It belongs to Syntax to discuss the place and power of the particles in a sentence. All, therefore, that is now necessary is, to classify the chief of them, and to indicate their general meaning.
136. CLASSIFICATION OF THE CoNngUNCTIVE PARTICLES.
The Conjunctions denote (1) annexation, (2) comparison, (3) dis- junction, (4) antithesis, (5) condition, (6) reason, (7) inference, or (8) result. The relative forms of the adverbs (see § 129) are also really conjunctions, )
1. Annexation.—The copulative conjunctions are xai, and, also, even; te, und, also. The latter is generally subordinate: re... xai, both... and, not only... but ; sometimes kal... re, or re... re. Very generally, however, both...and is expressed by xai...xai, as in 1 Thess. ii. 14, 15, d&e.
2. Comparison.—As conjunctions of comparison, the particles ios, a8; domep, just as; xadas, like as, are used; generally in cor- relation with the adverb otras, so. (Compare § 129, Table).
4
§ 136. ] CONJUNCTIONS. 151
3. Disjunction.—The disjunctive particles are #, or; 7... 7 either ...or, (in general); #ro... 7, either... or, (as an exclusive alternative) ; cire... etre, whether ... whether.
4. Antithesis.—The antithetic conjunctions are d\hd (originally neuter plural of fos) and 8é¢, both signifying but. The adversative sense is much stronger in the former than in the latter. With dé the particle pév often stands in the preceding sentence, and may be rendered indeed or on the one hand (dé, on the other), or, more
’ frequently, may be left untranslated, marking simply that the two clauses stand in real or formal antithesis. Etymologically, pév is (probably) “the first thing ;” dé, “the second thing :” the anti- thesis is, therefore, often very slight, a distinction rather than opposition.
5. Condition.—The conditional particles are ei, if; «lye, f at least ; eimep, if at all; édv (et dv), of (possibly). For the important rules as to their use with verbs, see SYNTAX.
6. Cause.—Particles expressive of a reason (causal) are, dru, that, because; yap, for; dirt, because ; émei (see § 129), since.
7. Inference.—The chief inferential particles are, od», there- Sore; roivuy, then; dpa, consequently ; 56, wherefore ; rovyapodv, accordingly.
8. Result.—The “final” conjunctions are iva, in order that; as and das, so that; un, that not, lest.
137. Parrictes of EMPHASIS AND INTERROGATION.
a. The chief emphatic particles are ye, at least, indeed (enclitic); and 8n, certainly, now. To these may be added the enclitics zep, very, verily, and ro, certainly, found in combination with other words, as éemevdnmep (Luke i. 1), since verily ; pévror, however.
b. As interrogative particles the following are employed: «i, a, used elliptically, “Tell us if— ;’ #, simply denoting that a question is asked, and requiring no English equivalent save in the form of the sentence ; and dpa (not to be confounded with dpa, § 136, 7),
which makes the question emphatic (only in Luke xviii. 8; n
152 PARTICLES. | [§ 137.
Acts viii. 30; Gal. ii. 17). For the interrogative adverbs. see § 129; and for the structure of interrogative sentences, consult the SynTax.
1388. INTERJECTIONS.
a. An Interjection is generally but the transcript of a natural instinctive sound, and therefore scarcely ranks among the “ parts of organized speech.” Words of this kind in the New Testament are ®, O! oh! éa, ah! expressive of pain and terror (Mark i. 24 ; Luke iv. 34); ota, ah/ expressing scorn and hatred (Mark xv. 29); ovai, woe! alas! often governing a dative; oval iyi, woe unto you!
adlas for you!
6. The imperative form, ide, see, is often treated interjectionally, but still more frequently the old imperative middle of the same verb is employed, accented as a particle : i8ov, lo! behold f
§ 139. | WORD-FORMATION—SUBSTANTIVES, 153
CuapreR IX.—ON THE FORMATION OF WORDS.
139, 1. Roors.—Words of all kinds are derived from some Root. For the distinction between root and stem, see § 10. The root is that part which remains after taking away from a whole family of kindred words all the parts which are different in each. Thus, AK- is the root of dx-py, dx-pds, dk-avba.
The root expresses the leading idea, or general meaning, which runs through all the kindred words, though differently modified in each; thus, AK- expresses the general meaning of “sharpness” or ‘pointedness.”
In the formation of words, some are derived directly from the root; as dxyy, from AK-. Others take as a (“secondary”) root the stem of words already-formed ; as dxudto, from dxun (akpa-).
Hence we find primary, secondary, tertiary, &c., formations. * Thus :—
Primary. Secondary. Tertiary. "AK-un, point "AKy-dlo, to flourish ) "“AK-pos, pointed ~“AKpi-Bis, accurate “AK piPera, acewracy. "AKp.B-as, accurately.
2. Classes of Words.—Without attempting here any extended statement of the methods and laws of derivation, it will be useful to specify some of ‘the leading terminations which occur in the formation of Greek words. Each of these terminations has a particular force and meaning of its own, whatever be the root or stem to which it is joined: thus, xpi-rns, (ndw-rhs, Kdén-T7, roXi-rns, have all the same termination, -rys, and with the same meaning, |
Classes of words may thus be formed, by caren ene together
* See, for greater detail, the * Bromsgrove Greck Grammar,” by Dr. G. A. Jacob, § 78.
164 WORD-FORMATION—SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 189.
those which have the same terminations, and marking their signi- fication; and this may be done with words of all kinds—sub- stantives, adjectives, pronouns, verbs, and particles.
3. Modification of Stem-endings.—The final vowel or consonant of the root or stem will be affected by the termination according to the general usages of the language, as illustrated especially in the inflections of the verbs. Thus, zon-rns, from move (compare § 96, a, &c.), and xadtm-ra, xddup-pa (see § 4, d, 4), from Kadvur- or KadvB-,
140. Crasszs or SUBSTANTIVES.
a. First Dectrnsion.—l. Masculine nouns in -rys express a male agent, or person belongimg tosomething. Thus, xpirns, a judge; rowunrns, a maker, doer, poet. ‘Some nouns of this termination are formed from the root of simpler nouns: as moAirys (rds), citizen ; oixérns (otxos), domestic, ;
Accentuation.—Dissyllables of this class, and polysyllables with short penultima, throw back the accent as far as possible, except xprrjs. So weborns, Seanrdrns, edorat, Séorora (voc.) The rest are oxytone, except woAlrns.
2. Feminine Nouns.—i. The termination -(a@ (paroxytone) ex- presses quality. Adjective stems in «s- or oo- give the forms (pro- paroxytone) -ea, -od. So, copia, wisdom (codpds) ; adnOera, truth (dAn Ons) ; e¥vora, good-will (etvovs). A few nouns in -ea (paroxy- tone) are from verbal stems in -ev, and denote the result of action ; as Baownela, kingdom (Bacidevw) ; madeia, instruction (maideva).
ii. Substantives in -ortvn connected with adjective stems in ov-, rarely in o-, also denote quality; as cwppoovrvn, prudence, from copper, Stem ov-; eAenuootyn, compassion (édenpwv) ; dixacoovyn, righteousness (Sixavos) ; aywovvn, holiness (ay:os), the o- becoming -e, because of the short preceding syllable. (Compare § 42.)
b. Seconp Deciension.—1. Masculine Nouns.—The termination -6s (oxytone) appended to verbal stems denotes action; as from biw (Ov-), to rage, Oupss, passion. Sometimes o intervenes, as in
§ 140. | WORD- FORMATION — SUBSTANTIVES. 155
Seopds, bond, from 8¢-, d¢w, to bind; or 6, aS kdavOuds, lamentation, from kdaf-, kraiw, to weep. (See § 96, c)
2. Neuter Nouns.—i. The ending -rpov, from verbal roots, denotes instrument. Thus, Av-, Adw, to release ; hirpov, ransom.
ii. The termination -tov, from substantive stems, is diminutive: as from ats (watd-), @ child; wadiov, a little child. To -wv is sometimes prefixed the syllable ap- or 18-: as maddprov, @ little boy ; kduvidior, @ little bed, from krivy, a couch; docdpwor, a farthing, from Latin as. (See § 154, a.)
Diminutives in -1ov must be distinguished from neuters of adjectives in -tos, used as substantives: e. g., ikacrhpov, propitiatory.
The masculine and feminine terminations -texos, -foxn, are also occasionally used as diminutives. Thus, veavias (stem, a-), a youth ; veavicxos, @lad. So madioxn, a damsel.
Accentuation of Neuters.—Neuter nouns generally retract the accent.
Diminutives in wy are, however, paroxytone, except when a short syllable precedes this termination.
ce. TH1RD Deciension.—1. Masculine Nouns.—i. The suffix -es (oxytone), stem ¢f-, denotes an agent: aS ypapparevs, a scribe, from yeappar-, ypdupa, a letter. (For the declension of these substantives, see § 30, ii1.)
ii. The terminations -rip (oxytone) and -rwp (paroxytone, stem top-) also signify an agent: as @wornp, luminary, from das, light ; pyrep, an orator, from fe- (in the obsolete verb, péw, to speak).
2. Feminine Nouns.—i. The ending -ovs (gen. -cews, root ov), from verbal stems, expresses action. Thus, Stkavo- (d:xaido, to justify) gives O:xalwors, justification ; and mpay- (xpdoca, to do), mpdéis, action. These nouns, a very numerous class, retract the accent. (For their declension, see § 30, i. 5.)
ii. The termination -rys (gen. -rytos, root tyt-) denotes quality, and is attached to adjective stems. Thus, ioos, equal, gives icdrns, equality ; dys, holy, ayrns, holiness. These also retract the accent.
156 WORD-FORMATION —SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 140.
3: N euter Nouns.—i. The termination -pa (stem par-) denotes the resulé of an action, and is affixed to verbal stems. Thus, mpdoow, Tpay-, gives mpaypa, a thing done, an action; and the obsolete péw, pe-, forms pnya, a thing spoken, a word.
ii. The ending -os (from stem ¢s-, see § 30, iv.) denotes, from verbal stems, result; from adjective stems, quality. Thus, from Fi8-, Second Aor. <«idov, J saw (see § 103 (4), we have «ides, an appearance ; and from BaGv-, in Babis, deep, Bibos, depth.
141. The following scheme exhibits at one view the principal terminations of derivative nouns. The nominative and genitive endings are given, as in Lexicons and Vocabularies ; but the stem
and declension will easily be traced.
Signification, Nom. and Gen. Terminations. Gender. Agent -ebs, -€os M. Do. -TNS, -TOU M. Do. -THP, -THpOs M. Do. -Top, -TOpos M. Instrument -Tpov, ~Tpov M, Action -pds,* -p0d M. Do. -C1S, -TEWS F. Result -ela, -elas F. Do. -pa, -paros N. Do. -0, -ovs N. Quality TNs, -THTOS F. Do. -ta, -las F. Do. -ootvn, -ootvns F. Do. -0, -ovs N. Diminutive -Lov, -tov N. Do. -LrkOs, -(oKov M. Do. -(oKn, -loKys F.
* Occasionally with prefix -@ or -o.
§ 142.] WORD-FORMATION—ADJECTIVES. | 157
142. Cxasszs or ADJECTIVES.
1. The most common derivative Adjectives are of the First Form, and the usual terminations are the following :—
a. From substantive roots, the ending -tos (-la*), -rov, is posses- sive, 7.¢., has the sense “of, or belonging to.” Thus, from odpavo-, otpavés, heaven, is derived ovpdnos, heavenly ; from tyya-, remy, honour, tisos, honourable, precious. The v of this termination sometimes forms a diphthong with a final stem vowel; so from Sikn (Stxa-), justice, comes dixaos, just; from dyopd, market-place, dyopaios, public. To this class also belong the adjectives formed from the names of cities or countries, and denoting their inha- bitants. Thus,’Edéo.os, Zphesian ("Epecos) ; "Iovdatos, Jew ("Iovdaia).
Accentuation.—The diphthongal forms are generally properispomenon ; the others are proparoxytone, i.e., retract the accent.
b. The termination -ixds, -4, -év (oxytone), from verbal or sub- stantive roots, marks ability or fitness: as xpirixés, capable of judging (kpivw) ; Bacvukéds, royal (Bacirevs).
c. The ending -tvos, -y, -ow (proparoxytone), from substantive roots, expresses the material of which anything is made: as £vdwos, wooden (£dXov).
Note.—The same substantive stem may have a derivative of each of the two last-mentioned forms. Thus, from capk- (capt-), flesh, are formed odpxivos, made of flesh, ‘‘ fleshy ;” and capkixds, of the nature of flesh, ‘‘fleshly.”” The former is only found in the received text of the New Testament in 2 Cor. iii. 3; but on the authority of MSS., many critics substitute it for the latter in Romans vii. 14.; 1 Cor. iii, 1. The internal evidence in these passages seems, however, against the alter- ation.
Sometimes the termination -eos (contr. -ovs) denotes material . as dpyvpeos, apyupous, of silver (dpyvpos). d. The termination -pés, -pd, -pdv (oxytone), denotes the complete
* Some of these adjectives are ‘‘of two terminations.” (See § 34, dD.)
158 WORD-FORMATION—ADJECTIVES. [§ 142,
aieatted of a quality, like the English -/ul or able : as, from ioxv-, icyis, strength, icyupds, powerful.
e. Adjectives ending in -tpos, -ov, -cipos, -ov (proparoxytone), are occasionally formed ani verbal stems, and express ability or Jitness: as Sdéxipos, receivable, current (of coin), so approved, from Sex-, Séxopuar, to receive ; xpnomos, useful, from xpa-, ypdopar, to use. Some proper names are of this class, as Ovjouos (lit. profitable, see Philem. ii.)
J. The verbals in -rés and -réos have already been noticed (§ 73, p- 69).
2. Second and Third Forms.—Here the derivative stem-endings _ -es and -pov need only be noticed.
a. Adjectives in -ys (see § 41) are generally correlative to nouns in -os, the stem of which, it will be remembered, is also in e-
(§ 30, iv.) So Wetdos falsehood ; yevdis, false.
6. Adjectives in -pov, derived from verbal stems, attribute the action of the verb to the person: as é\ee-, Aca, to pity; eheqpor, conupassionate.
143. Scueme oF DERIVATIVE ADJECTIVES.
Signification. | Terminations of Nom. Sing.
Quality ~nS, -€S
Do. complete -pds, -pd, -pdv Attribute, locality -tog (-atos, -elos, -ofos) [-1a], tov Property -Kds, -tKf, -UKdy Material -wos, -(vn, -tvov
Do. (-cos) -ots, [-éa], (-cov) -odv Fitness -(o)ypos, -(o")yov Attribute -Hov, -Lov Possibility (verbal) -r6s, -Th, -Tdv Obligation (do.) ~réos, -Téa, -réov
eS
§ 144.] _ WORD-FORMATION—VERBS. 159
144. Crasses oF VERBS.
a. Verbs from substantive or adjective roots (‘denominative verbs”) may signify the being, doing, or causing that which the noun imports. Verbs in -é, -éo, -ejw, generally denote simply state or action ; verbs in -de, -alvw, “ive, causation. Thus, dovrcia, I am @ slave; 80vdba, I make a slave of another, I enslave. The distinction is not always: observed ; for instance, mAnéivw may be either J multiply, transitive, or I abound, intransitive. Verbs in -(tw often have the sense of becoming or acting that which the noun denotes. Thus, Iovdaios, a@ Jew; iovdaito, I act the Jew (Gal. ii. 14).
The principal denominative verbal terminations are as follow :—
-40, aS tipde, to honour (ripi).
-o, ,, modepea, to make war (modéu0s).
-do, ,, Sovddo, to enslave (doddos).
-dfo, ,, épydtoua, to work (épyor).
-ifo, ,, éAdmita, — to hope (édmis).
-alvo, ,, Aevkaive, to whiten (Aevkds).
-o, ,, Baciredo, to reign (Bacrdevs).
-bvo, .,, mAnOiva, . to abound, multiply (mriGos,.
b, Verbs from simpler verbal stems are “ inceptives” in -cxa, as ynpdoko, to grow old; “frequentatives” or “emphatic verbs,” as Banritw, to baptize (Barro); and “ causatives,” as pebicxw, to intoxicate (webdw) ; yapifw Or yapioxa, to gwe in marriage (yapéw). To these, as anomalous derivatives from Perfects, may be added atnke, to stand, from the Perfect éornxa; and yenyopéew, to watch, from éypyyopa, the reduplicated Second Perfect of éyeipa.
145. Genera REMARK oN DERIVATION.
It often happens that the original of a derivative does not appear in the language in its simpler form; and still more fre- quently, that it is not found in the New Testament. On the other hand, the actual derived forms are far fewer than the possible.
160 WORD-FORMATION—VERBS. [§ 145.
The copiousness and fertility of the Greek as a living language depended especially on the power which it possessed of expressing new thoughts and shades of thought by words framed according .to. strict analogy, and therefore competent to take their place at once without question in the vocabulary. The language of science among ourselves—which, in fact, is borrowed from the Greek—fur- nishes an illustration of the same power to accompany, with equal step, the progress of knowledge and of thought.
§ 146.] WORD-FORMATION—COMPOUNDS. : 161
CuapreR X.—ON THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS.
146. Compound words are either parathetie or synthetic in their formation. :
In parathetic* compounds, both words retain their form and meaning, subject only to the laws of euphony. They are, therefore, merely placed side by side, as it were, though they are written as one word. This is the case with all verbs compounded with prepositions, as éxBdAAw, from é« and BaddrAw ; anépxowat, from amd and Epyouat; xadlornps, from Kara and tornur; ovyxaipw, from ody and xafpw. (The changes in the terminations of some of the above prepositions need no explanation.)
In synthetict compounds, the former word, a noun ora verb, loses all inflection; while the latter often takes a form which it could not have had out of composition. The words are therefore placed in close union, and really make one word: as piAdcodos, from gidos and codia.
147. Paratuetic Compounps.
The former word of a parathetic compound is almost always in the New Testament a particle, ¢.e., a preposition or an adverb ; never a verb. :
The signification of many compounds can be satisfactorily ascertained
_ only from the Lexicon, as the meaning of the prefix is often modified by that of the principal word.{ It will, however, be helpful to the
* From apd and @e- (ri@nus), ‘‘ set side by side.”
¢ From odv and é¢-, ‘* set together or com-posed”
+ So in English: ¢.g., the particle over varies its meaning in the words overthrow, overtake, overrun, overtime, overbearing; the fundamental sig- nification being, however, discernible in all.
162 WORD-FORMATION—COMPOUNDS. [§ 147.
learner to have at one view the chief significations of the particles used in composition. The following table (a) should be compared with that in § 124; and a little thought will trace the connexion in each case between the primitive significations (printed in ¢falics) and the secondary meanings that follow.
a. ‘The Prepositions, as used in Composition.
dpe, round about.
dva-, wp, back again.
avrt-, instead of, against, in return for.
atro-, away from, dismission, completeness.
Sia-, through, thorough, between.
els-, ento.
é&- (&- before a vowel, éy- before a guttural), owé of, forth, utterly.
év- (é2- before a labial mute, or p), im, upon, intrinsically.
émt-, wpon, to, in addition.
kara-, down, downright, against.
pera, with, participation, change.
mapa-, beside, beyond, along.
mepr-, around, over and above, excess.
apo-, before, forward.
mpos-, towards, in addition to.
cuv- (svp- before a labial, mute, or p; cvy- before a guttural), with, association, compression.
imep-, above, excess.
tro-, under, concealment, repression.
6. Separable Particles (Adverbs) in Composition.
&- (from dua), together, as das (-vt-), all together.
dpri-, lately, only in dpreyévynros, new-born (1 Pet. ii. 2).
e-, well, prosperously.
wahw-, again, only in madvyyeveoia, regeneration (Matt. xix. 28; Titus iii. 5).
may-, all (from neuter of rayvr-).
mmre-, afar off, only in rpdavyas, distinctly (Mark viii. 25).
§ 147.] - WORD-FORMATION—-COMPOUNDS. 163
ce. Inseparable Particles:in Composition.
a- (from dvd), intensive: perhaps only in drevito, to gaze steadfastly.
a- or dv-, not, the usual negative prefix, answering to our wn-.
8us-, hardly or wl, like our dis-, mis-, or un-.
tpt-, half (Latin, semi-), only in jysbavns, half-dead, and jpidpiov, half an hour.
The Prepositions (Table a), when used in the composition of nouns and adjectives, generally mark a secondary formation, 1.¢., a derivation from a compound verb. ‘Thus, drécrodos, apostle, is not from dé and orddos, but from dmrogréAdo, to send forth. So drootokn, apostleship. Again, from éexdéyoua, to choose out, come éxdexrds, chosen, elect ; and éxroyn, election. Some such nouns and adjectives, however, are found, without any corresponding com- _ pound verb.
The ADVERBS and INSEPARABLE PARTICLES (Tables b, c) (except G- negative) are generally used with substantives and adjectives, not with verbs.
Two Prepositions may be combined in the formation of a word, the characteristic formative force of each being retained. Thus, kabiornu, to establish, dmoxabiornu, to restore; mapaxadéouat, passive, to be comforted,* ovpmapaxaddopa, to be comforted together ; cicdya, to introduce, mapecaya, to introduce by the bye (2 Pet. ii. 1). So mapeonrAbev (Romans v. 20), entered by the way. Again, dvyridap- Bdvopa is to help, generally (lit., “to take hold of, over against”), but cuvayriAapBavopa is to help by coming into association with (as Luke x. 40 ; Romans viii. 26).
148. Synrueric Compounps.
In synthetic compounds the former word is a noun or a verb, never a particle. When the former word is a noun, if its stem does not already
* Literally, to be called to one’s side: i.¢., for purposes of consolation, or, it might be, of exhortation, or advocacy. Hence the word Napd«Anros has the threefold meaning of Comforter, Hxhorter, Advocate. (See John xiv. 16, 26; 1 John ii. 1.)
164 _ -WORD-FORMATION—COMPOUNDS. [§ 148.
end in -o, the- vowel -o- is commonly added as a connective, when the latter word begins with a consonant, as, from xapdia, xapd:-0- yvoorns.
When the former word is a verb, the connecting vowel is usually --, as from dpyo, dpy-i-cuvdywyos ; but sometimes -o-, as €6eh-0-Opnoxeia. The form of a verbal noun is often used, as from deidw (Seiois), Serot-Saipov.
Compound verbs of this class usually take their form from a compound noun ; the verb thus appearing in a shape which it cannot have out of composition: as, edyapioréa, to give thanks, from edydporos, not from « and yapioréo; idoripéopa, to be amlitious, from gdirdripos, not from Piros and ripéopar.
In synthetic compounds the latter word generally has the leading significance, and is defined or modified by the former.
The following compounds illustrate the foregoing remarks :—
oixo-Seonérns, householder.
kak-oopyos, evildoer (xaxés épyor).
aipat-exyvoia, bloodshedding (aina, ékxvots from éx and xé(F)w).
Kapdt-o-yvaarns, one who knows the heart.
apx-t-cvvaywyos, ruler of the synagogue.
paxpo-bupos (adjective), paxpodupia (substantive), long-suffering.
dadexa-pudrov (neuter substantive), ten tribes (Acts xxvi. 7).
Sevrepd-mpwros, second-first (Luke vi. 1), probably, “the /irst Sabbath in the second year of the Sabbatical cycle df seven years.” See Wieseler’s “Chronological Synopsis of the Four Gospels,” 11. ii. 4. Wieseler fixes the year as 782, A.U.c.
149. IcuusrraTIoN oF THE VARIETIES OF DERIVATION AND CoMPOSITION.
The root xpt-, verbal stem xpw-, primary meaningsfo separate, may be taken as illustrating the variations and combinations of a Greek word.
First, we have simple derivatives, formed as in Chapter LX. :—
kpive, to separate, or judge. kpiots, the process of separation, or judgment.
\
§ 149. | _WORD-FORMATION—COMPOUNDS. 165
kpiua, the act or result of judgment, sentence.
kpirjpiov, a standard of judgment, or tribunal.
Kpitns, a judge.
xpirixds (adjective), able to judge, a discoverer (Heb. iv. 12).
Next, we note the composition of the verb with different prepositions :—
avaxpive, to inquire, estimate.
diaxpive, to distinguish, separate, decide ; middle, to hesitate. éykpiva, to judge, or reckon, among (2 Cor. x. 12).
éemixpive, to adjudge (Luke xxiii. 24).
kataxpive, to give judgment against, condemn.
ovykpive, to judge together, compare.
dmrokpivopat, to answer.
dvrarokpivoya, to awswer against (Luke xiv. 6 ; Rom. ix. 20). tmoxpivopa, to dissemble (Luke xx. 20).
ovvurroxpivopat, to dissemble with any one (Gal. ii. 13).
We may then note the various compound substantives, which may be compared with the corresponding verbs :—
dvdkptois, an examination (Acts xxv. 26).
amdéxptows, an answer.
Sidxpors, the act of distinguishing, discernment.
katakpiots, condemnation.
indkpiors, dissimulation, hypocrisy.
ardxptya, & sentence, as of death, or, response (2 Cor. i. 9). kaTdxpia, a sentence of condemnation.
mpdxpima, a prepossession, prejudice (1 Tim. v. 21). broxpirns, lit. a stage-player, a hypocrite.
We now take a group of negative compounds :— adiakpiros, not subject to distinction, impartial or sincere (James iii. 17).
dkardxpiros, wncondemned. dvumdkpiros, unfergned
& 166 WORD-FORMATION—COMPOUNDS. ‘[g 149.
Finally, the New Testament contains three instances of the composition of this root with nouns and pronouns :—
aitoxardkpiros, self-condemned (Titus ii. 11).
eihixpuns (from cidn, sunshine, cognate with j.0s), judged of in the sunlight, pre, sincere (Phil. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 1).
cidtxpiveta (from the above), sincerity.
Many other compounds of this root exist, but these are all which the New Testament contains.
§ 150. | LANGUAGES OF PALESTINE. 167
CuaPreR XI.—FOREIGN WORDS IN NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.
150. LanauacEs oF PALESTINE.—HEBREW.
Two languages were spoken and understood in Palestine. The one, called in the New Testament “the Hebrew tongue” (Acts xxii. 2; xxvi. 14), was in reality a very considerable modification of the Old Testament Hebrew, and is generally now termed “the Syro-Chaldaic,” or “the Aramaic” (from Aram, the Hebrew ‘word for Syria). This was the language of the people, and, to some uncertain extent,* remained in colloquial use until the destruction of Jerusalem.
Some critics believe that St. Matthew's Gospel was originally written in Aramaic, and that the book as it appears in the New | Testament is a more or less literal translation. In this opinion we do not concur ; but there can be no doubt that in the days of our Lord the ancient language was still most fondly cherished by the people. Expressions that fell from the Saviour’s lips in moments of deep emotion, in the performance of signal miracles, in Gethsemane,‘and on the Cross, are carefully recorded; and other | words of technical character, or religious association, or homely use, are also found in the native tongue of Israel.
151. Inrropucrion or GREEK.
But as a direct result of the conquests of Alexander the Great and his suocessors, the Greek tongue had been carried into almost all the countries of the civilized world, and had become the medium of commercial intercourse, the language of the courts, and, in fact, the universal literary tongue of the provinces after-
_- ee
* See on the whole subject, Dr. Roberts’ ‘‘ Discussions on the Gospels,” ON.
¥
168 LANGUAGES OF PALESTINE. [§ 151.
wards absorbed in the Roman Empire. ‘The natives of Alex- andria and of Jerusalem, of Ephesus, and even of Rome, alike adopted it; everywhere with characteristic modifications, but substantially the same. Hence it had become a necessity to trans- late the Old Testament Scriptures into Greek ; and as this great work was executed by Alexandrian Jews, its language not only shows the influence of the Hebrew original, but’ contains special forms and peculiarities of expression indigenous to Egypt. This translation, or “the Septnagint,”* naturally became the basis of all subsequent Jewish Greek literature, and in particular of the New Testament, which, however, to the Egyptian superadds Palestinian influences. It was in the Greek of the Septuagint thus modified that, in all probability, our Lord and His apostles generally spoke. The dialect of Galilee (Matt. xxvi. 73) was not a corrupt Hebrew, but a, provincial Greek.
The New Testament writers, it should be noted, differ consi- derably from one another in style. The Book of Revelation, for instance, is very unlike the writings of the Apostle Paul. All, again, vary greatly from classical models, both in vocabulary and syntax, exchanging the elaborate harmonies of Attic Greek for simpler constructions and homelier speech.
152. Inruston or Latin.
The Roman conquest and tenure of Palestine may be thought likely to have stamped some lasting traces on the language. Such traces undoubtedly appear in the New Testament; but, considering the might of the dominant people, these are mar- yellously few. The Romans could impose their laws, their polity, their military power, upon vanquished nations, but not their speech. Certainly, there are some Latin words in the New Testament ; but these are almost wholly nouns denoting military rank or civil authority, coins, or articles of dress; a valuable
* That is *‘the Seventy” (often quoted as LXX.), from the traditional number of translators.
§ 152.] LATIN AND HEBREW IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 169
historic testimony, were there none beside, how “the sceptre had departed from Judah, and a lawgiver from between his feet.” By way of illustration to the foregoing remarks, lists are here
appended of the chief Aramaic (or Syro-Chaldaic) and Roman terms contained in the New Testament.
153. Hesprew Anp ARAMAIC WoRDS AND PHRASES.
The Hebrew root is in a few cases assimilated to the forms of the Greek language ; but is oftener simply transcribed, and used without declension or conjugation,
a. ASSIMILATED WorDs are the following :—
Mesoias, Messian, “the Anointed.” This word occurs only in John i. 41, iv. 25; the Greek equivalent, Xpiords, from ypio, to anoint, being everywhere else employed.
Papioaios, Pharisee, from a Hebrew word, meaning to separaie, and Saddovkaios, Sadducee, from another, meaning to be righteous, are of constant occurrence—“ Separatists” and ‘ Moralists.”
pappovas (gen. -a, dat. -i), Mammon, riches (Matt. vi. 24; Luke xvi. 9, 11, 13). Its derivation is uncertain ; but there is no reason for supposing that it was anywhere the name of a false deity,
appaBav, -avos, a pledge, or earnest (2 Cor. i. 22, v. 5).
On cdBBarov, sabbath, see § 32, b.
yéevva, -ns, from two words signifying valley of Hinnom ; hence, metaphorically, for the place of future punishment (see 2 Kings, xxiii, 10; Isa. xxx. 33; Jer. vii. 31).
6. INDECLINABLE WORDS are more numerous, i. The following may rank among proper names, on which class of words see fur- ther, § 157 :—
’AxehOazd, field of blood (Acts i. 19).
» BeedCeBovr, lord of dung (Matt. xii. 24, &c.), a contemptuous Jewish turn to the name of the Ekronite god Beelzebub, “ lord of flies” (see 2 Kings i. 2, 3). Hence “ prince of the demons.”
Boavepyés, Sons of thunder (Mark iii. 17).
- ‘VaBBata, the Pavement, or Tribunal (John xix. 13).
170 HEBREW WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT, [§ 153.
Todryo6d, the Place of a skull, or of skulls (Matt. xxvii. 33; Mark xv. 22; John xix. 17), called in Greek Kpaviov (Luke xxiii, 33), where our word Calvary is taken from the Vulgate.
‘Peuday, probably the planet Saturn (Acts vii. 43, from Amos v. 26, LXX.)
ii. Other Syro-Chaldaic nouns are as follow :—
‘ABBa, Father, in confidence, endearment, or entreaty (Mark
xiv. 36 ; Rom. viii. 15 ; Gal. iv. 6). kopBav, gift (Mark vii. 11), xopBavas (decl. Matt. xxvii. 6), treasury.
pavva, lit. “ what is this?” manna (Exod. xvi. 15 ; John vi. 31, 49,58; Heb. ix. 4; Rev. ii 17).
_popé, fool | (Matt. v. 22) may be a Greek vocative (uwpds), but is more probably an Aramaic word of similar sound, denoting _ utter mental and moral worthlessness. nmaoxa, Passover. paBsi, my master! lit. “my great one!” (Matt. xxiii. 7, &c.) So fa8ort (Mark x. 51), and pa8Bovvi (John xx. 16).
paxa, a term of contempt, from a Hebrew root signifying emptiness, or vanity (Matt v. 22).
caBaoé, hosts, i.¢., the hosts of heaven (Rom. ix. 29; Jas. v. 4).
aikepa, strong drink (Luke i. 15).
xepouBip, cherubim, Hebrew plural of cherub (Heb. ix. 5).
c. ARAMAIC PHRASES.—dAdndovia, praise ye Jehovah! (Rev. xix. 1, 3, 4, 6.)
dunv, after ascriptions of praise, so let it be; before assertions, verily.
éppabd, be opened ! (Mark vii. 34.)
"HAL, ‘HAI, Aaua caBaybavi; My God, my God, why hast Thou forsaken me? (Matt. xxvii. 46,) from Ps, xxii. 1; the last word being the Aramaic equivalent of the original Hebrew verb. “Hi is my God, from the Hebrew Ex, Mark xv. 34, reads ’Enoi.
papavabd, The Lord cometh ! (1 Cor. xvi. 22) (The word pre- ceding, dvdeya, accursed, is pure Greek, and should be followed by
a colon or period.)
§ 153.] HEBREW WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. 171
radi6a xovp1, Maiden, arise ! (Mark v. 41 ) eaavva, Save now! (Matt. xxi.9; Mark xi. 9,10; John xii. 13,) taken from Ps, exviil. 25.
154. Larix Worps.
a. NAMES OF CoINS.—xodpavrns, “quadrans,” farthing” (Matt. v. 26; Mark xii. 42), the fourth part of the
doodpior, “as,” (diminutive term), also rendered farthing in E.V. (Matt. x. 29; Luke xii. 6), the sixteenth part of the.
Snvdpioy, ‘‘ denarius,” rendered penny (as in Matt. xviii. 28, &c.), silver coin, worth about 74d.
6. JuDICI AL.—ouxapios, is sicarius,” assassin ( Acts xxi. 38). dpayerrov, ppayedAdow, “flagellum, flagello,” scowrge (noun and verb) (John ii. 15 ;, Matt. xxvii. 26 ; Mark xv. 15).
c. MILITARY.— kevrupioy, “centurio,” centurion (Mark xv. 39, 44,45). Elsewhere the Greek éxarévrapxos (or ys) is employed.
covoro@dia, “ custodia,” guard (Matt. xxvii. 65, 66; xxviii. 11).
Aeyedv, “legio,” legion (Matt. xxvi. 53; Mark v. 9,15; Luke viii. 30).
mparop.ov, “preetorium,” officer's or governor's quarters, palace (Matt. xxvii. 27; Phil. i. 13, &c.).
omexovdatwp, “ speculator,” member of the royal guard (Mark vi. 27).
d. PoLiTicaL. — kqvoos, “census,” tribute (Matt. xvii. 25; xxii. 17).
kodovia, ‘‘colonia,” colony (Acts xvi. 12).
AtBeprivor, “libertini,” freedmen (Acts vi. 9).
e. ARTICLES OF DRrEss.—d¢vriov, “lenteum,” towel (John xiii. 4, 5).
ouptxivOroy, “semicinctium,” apron (Acts xix. 12).
covdapioy, “sudarium,’’ handkerchief (Luke xix. 20, &c.).
J. GENERAL.—(ifdmov, “ zizanium,” wild darnel, “lolium” (Matt. xlil. 25-40).
kpaBBaros, “ grabbatus,” mattrass or small couch (Mark ii. 4, &e.)
ail
172 LATIN WORDS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. [§ 154.
paxeddoy, “macellum,” shambles, meat-market (1 Cor. x. 25).
peuBpavn, “membrana,” parchment (2 Tim. iv. a
pidtov, “ milliare,” mile (Matt. v. 41).
pddios, “modius,” a measure (about an English peck, Matt. v. 15, &e.).
Eéorns, “sextus, sextarius,” a small measure (about an English pint), pitcher (Mark vii. 4).
péon, “rheda,” chariot (Rev. xviii. 13).
raBépyn, “taberna,” tavern (Acts xxviii. 15).
rirhos, “titulus,” title, superscription (John xix. 19, 20).
gépor, “forum,” part of the name Appit Forum (Acts xxviii. 15).
xaprns, “charta,” paper (2 John 12).
(For Latin Proper Names, see Chapter XIT.)
§ 155.] PROPER NAMES. 173
CHAPTER XII.—NEW TESTAMENT PROPER NAMES.
155. The personal names of the New Testament are in general derivative or composite words, originally with a specific meaning. They belong to three languages—Hebrew, Greek, and Latin (compare Chap. XI.)—a circumstance which occasions some little difficulty and confusion, especially since the Hebrew names sometimes appear in the forms of the Greek declension, sometimes, as in their original shape, indeclinable. Our translators, too, have occasionally adopted — different renderings of the same Greek name, and in many cases have made the New Testament English form different from that in the Old.
156. Hesrew Names.
a. The original indeclinable Hebrew forms may end in almost any letter; as, e.g, "ABi0vd, "ABpaap, "Iopand, ’EXuraBer, IepOae, Nae, *"Hqai, “Ieptxd. Such forms are generally oxytone. So ’Eppavounh, GoD WITH US. s
b. The following names are found both in indeclinable and declinable forms :—
‘lepovoaAjp and ‘lepooddupa, -wv,* Jerusalem.
Saovr and Sairos, Sauwl.t
IaxoB, Jacob (Old Testament), and "IdxwBos, James (New Testa- ment).
* Once ‘IepoodAuua appears as a feminine singular (Matt. ii. 3; 80, perhaps, ili. 5?).
+ The Hebrew form occurs only in the accounts of Saul’s conversion (Acts ix., xxii, xxvi., except xiii, 21, in reference to the Old Testament king).
174 PROPER NAMES. [§ 156.
Supeoy, Simeon (Old Testament), and Sipev, -wvos, Simon* (New Testament),
Aevi, Levi (Old Testament), and Acvis, Levi (MSErner New Testament). Compare § 32.
ce. Hebrew names in ah appear in the form -as (see § 20, a). Those in iah, or jah, a form of the name of the Supreme Being, JEHOVAH, are rendered into Greek by -ias: as "HAlas, Hlijah ; *Hoaias, Isaiah. These, however, take a genitive in -ov. (Meccias, Anointed, is of a different derivation.)
d. The circumflexed termination -as (gen. -é) marks some names belonging to the later Hebrew (or Aramaic) : as Kynddas, BapafBas. To these must be added, "lavas, Jonah, Jonas, or Jona.
More frequently, however, -Gés indicates the contraction of a
Greek or Latin name, as shown §§ 158, 6, 159, d.
157. Dousie Names.
a. When two names are applied to the same person, one is sometimes the Hebrew (or Aramaic) appellation, the other its translation into Greek. Thus, Zabitha (Hebrew) and Dorcas: (Greek) both signify “ gazelle ;” Zhomas (Hebrew) and Didymus (Greek) both stand for “twin.” So also Cephas (Hebrew) is translated by Peter, “ stone.”
6. Some Greek names are mere vocal imitations of the Hebrew, the sound being imperfectly transferred. Thus, Judah, or Judas, becomes Z'heudas (Acts v. 36) ; while Levi may have given rise to the form Lebbeus. Some, again, have thought Alpheus (Matt. x. 3, &c.), and Clopas (John xix. 25), to be only two forms of the same Hebrew word. Oleopas (Luke xxiv. 18) is a different name from the latter. It is possible that Paul, Matdos, may in like manner have sprung from the Hebrew Saul; or it had a Latin origin ; see § 159, c.
c. In many cases, again, where two names are borne, one is
* Twice, however, the Apostle bears the Old Testament name (Acts xv. 34; 2 Pet. i. 1).
§ 157.] PROPER NAMES—HEBREW. 175
a surname, either (1) from some characteristic circumstance, as Cephas or Peter of Simon, and Barnabas of Joses; or (2) a patronymic formed by the Aramaic Bar, “son,” as Baryesus (son » of Joshua, "Incois) of Elymas, and possibly Bar-tolmai, BapOodopaios, of Nathanael; or (3) a local appellation, as Jscariot (Hebrew, “a man of Kerioth,” see Josh. xv. 25), and Magdalene (Greek, “a woman of Magdala”). Observe that Canaanite, properly “ Kananite,” Kavavirns (Matt. x. 4; Mark iii. 18), is not a local name, but probably the Greek form of the Hebrew word for zealot, rendered (Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 13), Zndoris.
d. When the name of the same person appears in a Grecised and a Hebrew style, the former would naturally be employed among the Gentiles and Hellenists; the latter among the Pales- tinian Jews. So Saul becomes Paul, when he starts on his first missionary tour (Acts xiii. 9), and ever afterwards retains the name.
158. Greex Names.
a. Pure Greek names are common, whether of Hellenists (2. e., Greek-speaking, or foreign Jews) or of Gentile converts. It has often been noticed that the names of all “the seven” (Acts vi.) are Greek. So throughout most of the Epistles. “ Euodias,” ©
Evodia (Phil. iv. 2), is a feminine form, and should have been rendered Luodia.
6. Many Greek composite names are contracted into forms in -ds: as Epaphroditus into Epaphras (Col. i. 7; iv. 12); Artemi- dorus into Artemas (Titus iii 12); Mymphodorus into Nymphas (Col. iv. 15); Zenodorus into Zenas (Titus iii. 13); Olympiodorus into Olympas (Rom. xvi. 15); Hermodorus into Hermas (Rom. xvi. 14). The termination ddrus is from 8épor, gift; and the former parts of these compounds are from the Greek mythology.
Other contractions are, Parmenas for Parmenides (Acts vi. 5) ; Demas, probably for Demetrius; Antipas, for Antipater ; Apollos, for Apollonius. amarpos (Acts xx. 4) and Swoirarpos (Rom. xvi. 21) seem to be the same name in different forms.
176 PROPER NAMES—LATIN, [§ 159.
159. Latin NamEs.
a. The Latin names occur chiefly where we might expect them, in letters written to or from Rome. The chief are Cornelius, Aquila, Priscilla or Prisca, Caius, i.e., Gaius, Urban, Rufus,* Julia, Tertius, Quartus, Fortunatus, Marcus or Mark, Clement (Kdjuns, -evros), Pudens, Claudia, and perhaps Linus (2 Tim. iv. 21). Some have thought that the last-mentioned was a Briton, Zin, of the household of Caractacus.
b. Three names of Roman Emperors are also found in the New
Testament in a Latin form, Augustus, "Avyovoros (Luke ii. 1; but
the Greek equivalent, 2<8acrds, is found, referring to Nero, Acts xxv. 21, 25); Tiberius, TiBépios (Luke iii. 1); and Claudius, KAavdwos (as Acts xi. 28). The surname Cesar, Kaicap, is applied to Augustus (Luke it 1), to Tiberius (Luke iii 1, &.), to Claudius (Acts xi. 28), to Nero (Acts xxv. 8; Phil. iv. 22, &.). Caligula is not mentioned.
ce. If the word Maidos be not, as is most likely, an imperfect Greek transcript of the Hebrew name Saw, it must also be referred to the class of Latin words, as in Rome it was the name of a noble house. Some have thought that the Apostle's family, on receiving the rights of Roman citizenship, had been adopted into this house; others, with even less likelihood, connect his assumption of the name with the conversion of Sergius Paulus (Acts xiii. 7—12).
d. Latin names, like Greek, may be contracted. Thus Luke, Aovkcas (rendered Lucas in E.V.; Philem. 24), is an abbreviated form of the Latin name Lucanus. Similarly, Silvanue (S:Aovavds) and Silas denote one person. Amplias (Rom. xvi. 8) is probably a contraction of the Roman name Ampliatus.
For the significance of these various names, the Lexicon may be consulted,
* Rom. xvi. 9. This name is written in E.v. ‘‘ Urbane,” but it must be pronounced as a dissyllable.
§ 161.7 SUBJECI—-COPULA—PREDICATE. 177
Paw Eid
SYNTAX.
Cuarrer I.—CONSTRUCTION OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
° Subject—Copula—Predicate.
The laws of Universal Grammar, with regard to the con- struction and arrangement of Sentences, should be clearly borne in mind, that their special exemplifications in the Greek language may be understood. For the most part, it will be convenient to show the application of these laws under the heading of the parts of speech or forms of inflexion severally affected by them. A brief summary may, however, first of all be given, with the essential rules of construction.
161. A Sentence, or “thought ye han ath in words,” consists of one or more Propositions.
162. The essentials of a Proposition are, the Supsecr and the PREDICATE. .
163. The Sussect expresses the person or thing of which something is affirmed, desired, or asked, and must, therefore, be a noun substantive, or the equivalent of one.
Equivalents to nouns substantive are (1) personal pronouns, or (2) substantivized expressions, for which see § 202.
164. The Prepicate expresses that which is affirmed, denied, or asked respecting the subject ; and in its simplest form it is (1) a noun substantive or its equivalent, or (2) an adjective or its equivalent.
The equivalent of an adjective is a participle.
7
178 SUBJECT—COPULA—PREDICATE. _—«[8, 165.
165, The simplest form of : Proposition is that which connects Subject and Predicate by a tense of the substantive verb, to be, called the Copuza.
Acts xxiii. 6: éya bapicaids ear, J am a Pharisee.
Matt. xvi. 18: od Iérpos, thou art Peter.
Matt. xiii. 38: 6 dypds éorw 6 kécpos, the field is the world.
Phil. li. 3: jpets éopev 9 wepiropn, we are the circumeision.
Acts xix. 15: tyeis rives toré; who are ye ?
Eph. v. 16: af jyépar rovnpal cor, the days are evil.
Luke v. 1: avrés Av éoras, he was standing.
Luke xxi. 24: ‘IepovoaAjp tora rarovpévn, Jerusalem shall be
trodden down.
The verb «iul, to be, is the true copula; but some other verbs admit a similar construction, such as bmdpxw, to be essentially ; yiyropat, to become ; daivoua, to appear; Kadodua, to be called; knabloraua, to be set down as, or constituted. These are called Copulative Verbs, as they agree with eiuf in their construction, although in reality embodying part of the predicate. See § 181.
166. The Copula is often omitted, where ambiguity is not likely to arise from its absence.
Matt. v. 5: paxdpiot of mpacis, blessed (wre) the meek.
2 Tim. ii. 11: mords 6 dASyos, faithful (is) the word.
Heb. xiii. 8: "Incots Xpiords ... 6 airdés, Jesus Christ (is) the same.
For the way to distinguish between an attributive adjective and a predicate in such cases, see § 206.
167. The Copula and Predicute are most generally blended in a verb, which is then called the Prepicare. Thus, éya ypdapa, [ write, is very nearly equivalent to ¢yd epe ypddov, J am writing.
§ 167.] SUBJ ECT—COPULA——PREDICATE. LTE.
The careful student will observe that the term predicate is applied to the adjective and the verb in different senses. In the latter case, it really means copula and predicate combined. An adjective or sub- stantive predicate is sometimes called the ‘‘complement” of the verb with which it stands connected.
168. The substantive verb may become itself a Predicate, involving the notion of existence.
John viii. 58: ... éyd ett, Before Abraham was, J am. Rev. xxi. 1: 4 OdXaoca oik torw én, the sea is no more.
But the phrase, éyé eiu:, i is ZT, occurring in the Gospels (as Matt. xiv. 27; Mark vi. 50; John vi. 20, xviii. 5, 6, 8), may mean one of three things; éyé being (1) subject or (2) predicate, or (3) the verb being predicate.
169. The Subject, when a personal pronoun, is generally omitted, if no special emphasis or distinction is intended; the number and person of the verb sufficiently showing its reference.
Thus, A\éyo juiv (Matt. v. 18, 20; viii. 10, 11, &c.), LZ say unto you, is unemphatic ; but in éyd Aéyo tyiv, J say unto you (v. 22, 28, 32, 39, 44), our Lord pointedly contrasts his own teaching with that of the Rabbis. So (v. 21):0d qoveicers, thow shalt not murder. Had the reading been od od ¢..., the meaning would have been, “ t¢how, in particular,” shalt not. In Luke x. 23, 24, we read, “ Blessed are the eyes which see the things that ye see (Brérere, unewphatic): for I tell you that many prophets and _kings have desired to see those things which ye see” (ipets Brémere, emphatic, by way of antithesis to ‘prophets and kings.” Again, coos is he shall save; airs coon, he (emphatically, and none other) shall save (Matt. i. 21). See also Mark vi. 45, “until he (atrés) should send away the people,” for no one else could do it. Observe also the repetition of avrot, they, in the Beatitudes (Matt. v. 4-8).
The emphasis conveyed by the insertion of the pronominal subject is often too subtle to be expressed by translation ; but it is always worth noting. (See Acts iv. 20; 1 Cor. xv. 30, &.) The emphatic éyé (1 Cor. i. 1, 3, ili. 1), is very noticeable. So in many other passages.
180 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. eh [§ 170.
170. The omitted Subject of the third person plural is often to be understood generally. Compare the English expressions, They say, Xe.
Matt. v. 11: Grav dvaSicwow ipas cal Sidgwor, when they reproach and persecute you, 1.€., men in general.
John xx. 2: fpav rév Kupior, they have taken away the Lord, 7.é., some persons or other have.
See also Matt. viii. 16, Mark x. 13, they were bringing, «.e., from time to time ; Luke xvii. 23, John xv. 6, where E.V. reads “men ;” Acts iii. 2, &e.
171. Verbs in the third person singular, without a subject expressed, frequently imply some necessary or conventionally- understood Subject of their own.
1 Cor. xv. 52: cadmioa, lit., he shall sound the trumpet, a clas- ~ sical expression, implying 6 cadmvykris, the trumpeter, equivalent, as E.V., to the trumpet shall sound.
To this head are to be referred many so-called impersonals: as Bpéxe, tt rains (in First Aorist, James v. 17). The Greeks originally understood and sometimes expressed Zeis, or Oeds, with all such words. “He rains, thunders,” &c.; hence passing into the impersonal usage. Again, dyol, Aya, he or tt says; once dipyxe, he or tt hath said (Heb. iv. 4); once ewe, he or tt said (1 Cor. xv. 27), are used as formulas of quotation ; 4 ypadn, the Scripture, to be supplied (compare Rom. iv. 3, &c.); or 6 Ocds, God (see Matt. xix. 5).
See, for Aéya, 2 Cor. vi. 2; Gal. iii, 16; Eph. iv. 8, a, ; for noi, 1 Cor. vi. 16; Heb. viii. &
Once, @nvi seems to be used in the general sense, as plural ; they say (2 Cor. x. 10); but many MSS. (and Lachmann) there read
act,
1'72. The Nominative is the case of the Subject, and the Sub- ject and Predicate must correspond in number and person ; whence the grammatical rule called the
§ 172.) SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. — 181 .
First Concord. A Verb agrees with its nominative case in number and person.
For other uses of the Nominative, see §§ 242-244, All. these are connected with its true use as Subject. It cannot be too strongly im- pressed upon the learner that the key to every proposition, however complicated, is in the nominative case and verb; that is, in the Subject and Predicate. To these all the other words are only adjuncts. .
173. The great apparent exception to the First Concord is that a Neuter Plural nominative often takes a singular verb.
John ix. 3: iva pavepwOf +a epya rod Ocod, that the works of God may be manifested.
Acts i. 18: &ext0y mdvra ra omdéyxva airod, all his bowels gushed out,
2 Pet. ii. 20: yéyovey ra écyxara xeipova, the lust things have become worse.
So in many other passages.
The reason for this idiom is undoubtedly that, as neuters generally express things without life, the plural is regarded as one collective mass.
174. Variations in this idiom are as follow :—
a. When the neuter nominative plural denotes animated beings, the verb is commonly in the plural number.
Matt. x. 21: éwavacriwovrar tékva... cai Oavardcovew, Children shall rise up against ... and kill.
James ii. 19: ra Sapdvia morevovrw kai ppicrovew, the demons believe and tremble.
b. The usage, however, is by no means fixed. Thus, things without life are occasionally associated with a plural verb.
Luke xxiv. 11: épdvycav... ra phyara, the words appeared.
John xix. 31: ta xareayaow ra oxédy, that the legs might be
broken.
c. Living Subjects are also found with a singular verb.
182 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. — [§ 174,
1 John iii. 10: Gavepd éorw ra teva, x.7.d., the children of God and those of the Devil, are manifest.
Luke viii. 30: Saipéva modda eoqdOev, many demons went out.
d. In some passages the singular and plural seem used indis- criminately with the same Subjects.
John x. 4: ra mpéBara ait@ aKkodovbet dri ol8acry, k.T.r., the sheep JSollow hom because they know his voice.
Ver. 27: ra mpdpara ... dxoter kal dkorovdotel po, the sheep hear my voice and follow me. . .
1 Cor. x. 11: ratra wévra cvvéBawov ... éypidy de, all these things - happened, ... and were written.
The uncertainty of the usage in this matter has been a fruitful source of various readings. It is often difficult, if not impossible, to decide whether the singular or the plural is in the original text.
175. a. When the Subject is a collective noun in the singular, denoting animate objects, the verb may be put in the plural number. This construction is known as Rational Concord.*
Matt. xxi. 8: 6 3€ mrcioros Bxdos korpwcay, «.r.d., the greater part of the multitude strewed their (plural) garments in the way.
Luke xix. 37: #pgavro dmav rd mAAOos, x.7.d., all the multitude of the disciples began to praise God, rejoicing (also plural).
Rev. xviii. 4: &é@ere, 5 Aads pov, Come forth, my people |
b. The Singular and Plural are combined in some passages. John vi. 2: toot ... SxA0s words dre édpwv, a great multitude was following ... because they were seeing. Acts xv. 12: éolynoe rav 1rd wAP0S Kai Hxovov, the whole nwmber became silent, and were listening. | The singular, however, is the more usual construction.
176. a. When two or more nominatives, united by a copn-
* Constructio ad sensum, or Ex animo loquentis, or Synesis,
§ 176.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. | 183
lative conjunction, form the Subject, the verb is generally in the plural.
If the nominatives are of different persons, the first is preferred to the second and third, the second to the third ; that is, J (or we) and you and he are resolved into we; you and he into you.
Acts iii, 1: Iérpos cai "Iwdvvns avéBawov, Peter and John were going up. ;
John x. 30: éyd cai 6 warip & éopev, J and iny Father are one.
1 Cor. ix. 6: éyd cai BapvéBas otk exopev, x.7.A., have not I and Barnabas authority ? &e.
1 Cor. xv. 50: oadpe xai atpa ... od Sivavrar, flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God.
b. The verb, however, often agrees with the nearest Subject.
In this case the Predicate is to be understood as repeated with the other Subjects, or that with which the verb agrees is thrown into prominence, the others being subordinate.
It should be observed that in this construction the Greek verb usually precedes the nominatives.
Acts xvi, 31: cadfog od cai 6 olkds cov, thow shalt be saved and thy house.
1 Tim. vi. 4: && Sv ylverat POdvos, eps, BAardypiar, «rAd. from which comes envy, strife, ratlings, &c.
In these two cases the verb is repeated in thought.
John ii, 12: karéBy... airds cai of pabyral airod, He went down, to Capernaum, himself and his disciples Here the one Subject is thrown into prominence; and the construction is the common one when the principal Subject is placed nearest the verb, Compare Matt. xii. 3; Luke xxii. 14; John ii. 2, iv. 53, viii. 52, xvili. 15, xx. 3; Acts xxvi. 30;- Philemon 23, 24, where the approved reading is aomdferat,
177. When the Predicate of a simple sentence is a noun or P
184 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [§ 177.
pronoun, united to the Subject by the copula, it corresponds with the Subject by the law of apposition, viz. :—
A substantive employed to explain or describe another, under the same grammatical regimen, is put in the same case.
John xv. 1: 6 Ilarfp pov 6 yewpyds ori, my Lather is the husband- man.
It is unnecessary that the substantives should correspond in gender or number.
2 Cor. i. 14: Katynpa dyadv ecpev, we are your boast.
2 Cor. ill. 3: éoré émurrodh} Xpicrod, ye are the episile of Christ.
178. When the Predicate is an adjective, including adjective pronouns and participles, its agreement with the Subject comes under the Second Concord, viz. :—
Adjectives, pronouns, and participles agree with their substantives in gender, number, and case,
For further exemplification of this concord, see Chapters IV., V.'
In simple sentences the case is of course the nominative. The agreement in gender and number may be illustrated by the following :—
Matt. vii. 29: jv 88dcKev, he was teaching.
Matt. xiii. 31, &e.: Spola éoriv 7 Bactdcla, x.7.d., the kingdom of heaven is like, &c.
Mark v. 9 : woddoi éopev, we are many. Luke xiv. 17: trod dor: wavra, all things are ready. John iv. 11: rd dpéap eori Badd, the well is deep.
1 John v. 3: ai &rodal adrod Bapetar otk ciciv, his commanaments are not grievous.
Rev. vii. 14: otrot elow of épxspevor, «.7.d., these are they that are coming ovt of the great tribulation. |
§ 179.] SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 185
179. When the Subject is a collective noun, the adjective Pre- dicate is sometimes plural. - (Compare § 173.)
John vii. 49: 6 8xAos obros ... érdparol cigw, this multitude are accursed.
180. An adjective Predicate is occasionally generalized by being put in the neuter gender, though the Subject is masculine or feminine.
1 Cor, vi. 11: tatrd ties ire, lit., some of you were this (these things). |
1 Cor. vii. 19: 4 weprropy ot8€v or, circwmcision is nothing.
181. The laws of apposition and concord, as above applied, may be restated in the form of the following rule :—
Copulative verbs require the Nominative case after as well as before them.
For the chief copulative verbs, see § 165, note.
John i. 14: 6 Adyos éyévero wdpg, the Word became flesh. Acts xvi, 3: “EdAnv imijpxev, he was a Greek.
2 Cor. xiii. 7: iva fpets Sdkipor havapev, that we should appear approved, or “be manifestly approved.”
Matt. v. 9: viol cod KrnOfrovra, they shall be cailed sons of — God.
Acts x. 32: Siveva, 8s émikadeirar Iérpos, Simon (accusative), who is surnamed Peter. :
Romans v. 9: dpapradol Karerrd@yrav of roddol, Sika. KaTacra- BArovrat of woddol, the many were made (lit., set down as) sinners, the many shall be made (lit., set down as) righteous. :
182. Hitherto the rules and examples given have been designed to show the main elements alone of the simple sentence. Other words, however are very generally added to the Subject to the Predicate, or to both, for the purpose of further explanation.
ts
186 COMPLEMENTS OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. [§ 182.
These words are called the complements of the simple sentence, and are variously said to complete, to extend, or to enlarge the Subject or the Predicate, as the case may be.
183. The Subject, which is essentially a noun substantive, may be extended by apposition with another noun, by the qualifying force of adjectives, pronouns, or the article, by depen- dent nouns, or by prepositional phrases,
For Apposition, see § 177.
For Adjectives, see Chapter IV.
For the Article, see Chapter IT.
‘For the dependence of nouns one upon another, and for pre- positional phrases, see Chapter ITI.
184. The Predicate, when a noun, may be extended in the same manner as the Subject.
185, When an adjective is Predicate, it may be extended by dependent nouns, by adverbs, or by prepositional phrases,
186. Verbal Predicates may be variously extended. Any verb may be qualified by an adverb. Prepositional phrases may be employed in this connection also. Especially, the meaning of a verb transitive requires to be completed by the Object or Objects, direct or indirect.
For the direct Object, see § 281.
For indirect Objects, see on the Genitive and Dative cases, Chapter ITI.
187. The complements of a simple sentence cannot include a verb,’as this would introduce a distinct predication. Verbal clauses, therefore, forming part of a period are termed accessory clauses, and a sentence with one or more accessory clauses besides the principal one, is called a COMPOUND SENTENCE.
Accessory clauses, as related to the principal, are either co. ordinate or subordinate.
§ 188. ] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 18T
188. Co-ordinate accessory clauses are similar in construction to the principal, and are often connected with it and with one another by conjunctions. (See § 402, seq.)
189. Subordinate clauses are dependent upon the principal or | upon the accessory clauses, or upon single words or phrases in either.
It is plain that subordinate clauses may be co-ordinate with one another.
190. The methods of introducing subordinate clauses are very various. The chief are, by the Relative Pronoun (§§ 343, 344), by the use of the Participials (participle or infinitive) (§$ 385— 396), and by the Particles (§§ 383, 384).
Otherwise : subordinate clauses are Substantival, Adjectival, or Ad- verbial. A substantival clause expresses the subject or object of a verb, or stands in apposition, and usually employs the infinitive; an adjec- tival clause, qualifying a word or sentence, is introduced by a relative pronoun or conjunction, or employs a participle; and an adverbial clause is introduced by a conjunction, or employs a participle, or the oblique case of a noun,
191. It is often difficult to determine whether a certain phrase is a complement of the Subject, or of the Predicate.
Many illustrations might be given from the Epistle to the Romans. For instance: ch. i. 17 (ii. 4), 6 Sixatos ex mictews (noerat, lit. the righteous (man) from faith shall live. Are we to under- stand the prepositional phrase ek wiztews as the complement of the Subject 6 dicaos, or of the Predicate ¢yaerac? In other words, are we to translate “The righteous man from faith (he that is
righteous, or justified by faith) shall live?” or, “The righteous man shall live from faith ?”
Again, iv. 1: are we to attach the prepositional heee Kara cdpxa, according to the flesh, with the word mpordropa, forefather, in apposition with Abraham, the Subject of the accessory clause, or to | the Predicate hath found ?—that is, does the Apostle ask, “ What shall we say that Abraham, our father as pertaining to the flesh,
Ma COMPOUND SENTENCES. [§ 191.
' hath found?” or, “ What shall we say that Abraham our father
hath found as pertaining to the flesh ?”
The true connection of accessory clauses is also occasionally doubtful.
For instance, in Acts iii, 21, it-may be fairly discussed whether the relative clause, which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy prophets, belongs to the word times, or to all things.
Such questions of interpretation are not proposed for consideration here; their settlement must often depend, not only on the laws of construction, but on the signification of individual words. Reference is made to them only to show the necessity, to a right interpretation of a passage, of distinctly analyzing the parts of every compound sentence, and of assigning to each its right position. In our own language, this is comparatively easy, as the order of the sentence in general indicates the mutual relation of its parts; in Greek, through the number and variety of the inflections, the order is of little importance to the structure of the sentence, though of much to its emphasis.
192. As hints for disentangling a compound sentence, the following may be valuable :—
‘Search: first for the predicate, or thing affirmed—usually, of course, a verb—then for the subject. These once fixed, every other verb will mark an accessory clause, which will have to be regarded apart. The remaining words, generally in close grouping with the Subject and Predicate, must be assigned to them respectively as their complements, according to the usages of the several parts of speech and forms of inflection. To these it is nuw necessary to turn, in order.
§ 193. ] THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 189
Cuaprer II.—THE ARTICLE.
Latin, Articulus; Greek, ap0pov (a joint). Hence, anarthrous, “‘ without an article.”
Construction of the Article.
193. The Article, 6, 4, 7, the (see § 12), is usually em- ployed, as in other languages, with nouns substantive. The
Second Concord applies to this relation ; the article agreeing with its noun in gender, number, and case.
194, This general usage, however, admits of many varia- tions, attributable to the fact that the Article was originally a demonstrative pronoun.*
Its demonstrative use is clearly seen in the Apostle Paul’s quotation (Acts xvii. 28), rod yap kal yévos éopév, we are his offspring.
195. A remnant of the old demonstrative use is, that the Article often stands without a noun expressed, like our this, that ; the sense of the phrase showing who or what is to be understood.
For example, the phrase 6 piv... & 8€ signifies this ... that, or the one ... the other.
Acts xiv. 4: of pév foav ody trois Iovdaiors, of 8 civ Trois drocréXoats, some were with the Jews, others with the apostles.
In Matt. xiii. 23, dé is repeated: & pev exardv, 6 8& EEjKovra, 6 8 tpidxovta, some a hundred, some sixty, some thirty,
See also Matt. xxii. 5; Mark xii. 5; Acts xvii. 32; Gal. iv. 22; Eph. iv. 11; Phil. i. 16, 17 ; Heb. vii. 20, 21.
* The student may be reminded that the English article the, the German der, the French le, are also original demonstratives. So in other languages,
ie
-_*
192 THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 195.
When 6 6€ is used in narration, even without a preceding péy, it always implies some other person previously mentioned, as—
Matt. ii. 5: of 3 elwov, and they said. Mark xiv. 61: 6 38 écidma, and he was silent. Acts xii. 15: 7 8 diicxuplfero, and she steadfastly asserted.
So in innumerable passages.
196. The Article, disconnected from a noun, is often followed by a genitive. Y ;
Matt. x. 2: "IdxwBos & rod ZePcSatov, James the (son) of Zebedee.
Mark xii. 17: dwd8ore ta Kaloapos, render the (things or rights) of Cesar. |
Gal. v. 24: of rod Xpioros, the (servants or disciples) of the Christ, i.e., of the Anointed one.
2 Pet. ii, 22: 1d ris dAnOois wapowstas, the (saying) of the truthful proverb.
The plural neuter ta is very frequently used in this construction, as in the second of the above instances. So ra rod vdpov, the things of the law ; t& rod Ilvetparos, the things of the Spirit; ta éavrav, their own interests (lit. the things of themselves), and so on.
197. Similarly, the Article precedes a preposition with its case, |
Matt. v. 15: rots év rij olxia, to those in the house.
Mark i. 36: Sipe kai of per’ abtrod, Simon and those with him.
Luke ii. 39: ra kard tov vépov, the (things) according to the law.
Eph. i. 10: ra & tots otpavois .. rd éml ris yijs, the (things) in the heavens ... the (things) on the earth.
Acts xiii. 13: of wept rov Ilatdov, those about Paul, including himself (by a classic idiom), te, Paul and his associates. (See John xi. 19, Martha and Mary with their friends.)
Any of the prepositions may follow the Article ; for their several significance, see Chapter II. § 288, ec.
§ 198. ] THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. I9t
198. A construction essentially similar is that of the Article with adverbs, the noun being supplied in thought.
Instances of this are: 1d viv, the (thing) now: the present (Matt. xxiv. 21; Luke v. 10); 4 otpepov, to-day; 4 adpiov, the morrow (feminine, as if from jyépa, day; Matt. vi. 34; xxvii. 62). So, in many passages, 6 mwAyolov, the (man who is) near, one’s neighbour; ta dvw, the (things) above; ta Karo, the (things) beneath ; ot %w, those without ; ta dmiow, the (things) behind; ra tumpooev, the (things) before, &e.
In effect, the Article with an adverb is equivalent to an Adjective.
199. The Article is frequently placed before adjectives, the substantive being implied.
This construction belongs to all genders, and to both numbers. Instances of its occurrence are numberless, Thus :—
Mark i. 24: & &yws, the Holy (one).
Matt, vii. 6: 1d &yov, the holy (thing).
Matt. xxiii. 15: rv gnpdv, the dry (land).
Luke xvi. 25: ra aya0d, the good (things).
Eph. i. 3: év rots érovpavtois, in the heavenly (places).
1 Thess. iv. 16: of vexpol dv Xpiord, the dead in Christ.
Titus il. 4: iva cadpovifaor tas véas, that they may school the young (women).
Compare the ordinary English phrases, the good, the great, the wise, with the abstracts, the true, the right, the beautiful. In Greek, however, the usage is much more extended, and is exemplified also by anarthrous adjectives.
200. The Article is commonly also used before participles; the sense again supplying the noun.
Matt. i. 22: +d 6nOév, the (thing) spoken. Matt. v. 4: of wevOotvres, the (persons) mowrning.
Matt. xi. 3: 6 épxspevos, the coming (One).
192 THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 200.
Matt. xiii. 3: & omelpwv, the (man) sowing, 7.¢., “a sower.”
Matt. xxiii, 37: robs dmerradpévous, the (persons) having been sent.
2 Cor. ii. 15: ey rots cwfopévors ... ev rots dmoddupévors, in the (persons) being saved ... in the (persons) perishing.
It will appear from these and other instances that the most conve- nient way of translating the Article with the participle will often be by changing the phrase into a relative and finite verb. Thus, in the last two examples, we idiomatically and accurately render, those who have been sent, and those who are being saved ... those who are perishing.
For further details on this frequent and important construction, see Chap. VI. § 396.
201. The Infinitive Mood in all its tenses is treated as an inde- clinable neuter substantive, and is often thus qualified by the article, the phrase expressing the abstract notion of the verb (See Chapter VI. §§ 388—390.)
Matt. xx. 23: 1d kabioa ex defiar, the ang (lit., “the to-sit”) on my right hand.
Matt. xiii. 3: tot omelpeaw, (for the purpose) of sowing.
Matt. xiii. 4: év 1 omelpew, in the sowing. * Mark xiv. 28: perd rd éyepOijvar, after the rising.
Phil. i, 21: 7d fv Xpicros... 7d amolaveiv xépdos, Living (is) Christ ... dying (is) gain.
This construction will be more fully illustrated under the head of the Infinitive. One caution here may not be out of place. The English form in ing may be either an adjective or a substantive. Thus we may say, a living man, or Living is enjoyment. In the former case, the word
is a participle; in the latter, an infinitive ; and in rendering into or from Greek, the two must be carefully discriminated.
202. Sometimes, again, whole phrases or sentences are qualified by a neuter Article ; especially quotations, before which some such word as saying, proverb, command, may be supplied, or expressions of a question, problem, or difficulty.
§ 202.] THE ARTICLE AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 193
Quotations are as in Matt. xix. 18: 1d od hoveiceas, od porxeioreis, the (command) “ thou shalt not steal, thow shalt not commit adul- tery.”
See also Luke xxii. 37 ; Rom. xiii. 9; Gal. iv. 25, 7d ”Ayap, the (name) Hagar; Eph. iv. 9; Heb. xii. 27.
Expressions of the latter class are as in Luke i. 62: 1d ré av Odor kadetobat, the (question) what he would like (him) to be called.
Luke ix. 46: 1d ris av ely pelfov, the (dispute) which should be greater.
Luke xxii. 4: 13 ws atrdv mapas, the’ (scheme) how he might betray him.
Rom. viii. 26: 1d ti mpocevgdpeba, the (question) how we should pray.
See likewise Luke xix. 38; Acts xxii. 30; 1 Thess. iv. 1, and a few other passages.
203. The employment of the Article with Pronouns is reserved for discussion in § 220.
204. Generally, an Infinitive, Participle, Adjective, or other word or phrase, qualified by the Article, is said to be substantivized, i.¢., made virtually a Noun, and treated similarly in the sentence.
Significance of the Article: its Insertion or Omission.
205. The Article is strictly definite ; and is used, as in other languages, to mark a specific object of thought.
Matt. vi. 22: & Adxvos Tod capards eorw 5 ShOarpds, the light of the body is the eye.
206. Hence arises the general rule, that in the simple sentence the Subject takes the article, the Predicate omits it. The subject is definitely before the mind, the predicate generally
denotes the class to which the subject is referred, or from which it is excluded, but the notion of the class is itself indeterminate.
194 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 206.
Matt. xili. 39: of Oepierral dyyedo! cio, the reapers are angels.
John ili. 6: rd -yeyevynpévov ex ris capkds odpE cor, that which-is born of the flesh is flesh, 2.¢., ‘* partakes of that character.”
John xvii. 17: 6 Adyos & ods GAHVEE Cori, thy word is truth. John i. 1: @eds fv 6 Adyos, the Word was God. 1 John iv. 8: 6 Odds aydan Ears, God is love.
The Copula being frequently omitted (§ 166), the presence or absence of the Article with a nominative adjective will often decide whether it is a Predicate or an attribute of the Subject. Thus, muords 6 Adyos, 2 Tim. i. 11, must be rendered faithful is the word ; 6 motos Adéyos would have been the faithful word.
Matt. v. 5: paxdpror of mpgets, blessed (are) the meek. Rom. vii. 7: 6 vopos dpapria; is the law sin ?
From an examination of these examples, it will appear that the use of the Article with the Subject, and its omission with the Predicate, is no grammatical expedient, but arises from their respective definiteness. Had the article been employed with the predicate in the above case, the sentences would have read thus: Zhe reapers are the angels, the whole host ; that which is born of the flesh is the flesh, i.e., is the part of human nature so denominated; Thy Word is the Truth, and nothing else can be -so described; the Word was the entire Godhead, and God and Love are identical, so that in fact Love is God; the blessed are the meek, and none others ; is the Law Sin? (see on the Article with abstracts, § 214) i.e., are Sin and Law the same thing? The meaning of every proposition would thus have been materially altered.
207. When the Article is found with the Predicate, an essen- tial identity with the Subject is asserted. *
John i. 4: 4 Loi jv 7d bas trav dvOpdrer, the life was the light of men, the only light.
2 Cor. iii. 17 : 6 Kipios 1d avedpd dori, the Lord is the spirit, to which the passage relates.
* This form of sentence answers to the affirmative proposition (in Sir W. Hamilton’s Logic), in which the Predicate is ‘‘ distributed.”
§ 207.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 195.
1 John iii. 4: 4 Gpapria eoriv h dvopta, sin is transgression of law ; and conversely, all transgression of law is sin. Personal and other pronouns are very frequently the Subject when
the Predicate is thus defined. (Matt. v. 13, xvi. 16, xxvi. 26, 28; Acts xxi. 38, &c.)
208. When a word is defined by some other expression occurring with it, the Article may be omitted. So in English, we may say, “The house of my father,” or ‘‘ My father’s house,” the word father’s in the latter phrase rendering house definite.
This most frequently occurs in Greek when the qualifying word, being a substantive, omits the Article.
Matt. i. 1: BiBros yevéorews, the book of the generation. 1 Thess. iv. 15: év Ady Kuplov, in the word of the Lord. But 1 Thess. i. 8: 6 Adyos rod Kvplov, the word of the Lord.
In the four following cases, the Article, in conformity with the general rule, marks definiteness.
209. Monadic Nouns.—Objects of which there is but one of the kind, or only one of which is present to thought, are uswally defined by the Article.
Thus, & otpavds, heaven; 4 yh, earth; 4 Obdacca, the sea; & péyas Bactrets, the great king.
_ Exceptions to this usage, and their reason, will be noted further on. 210. Individual Emphasis.—When some member of a class
is singled out as bearing a distinctive character, the Article is employed.
Hzamples.—* xpiors, the judgment, 7.e., the final judgment, as Matt. xii. 41, 42; Luke x. 14.
4 ypupy, at ypabal, the writing, writings, i.e, the Holy Scriptures, as Matt. xxii. 29; John x. 35; Rom. iv, 3, xv. 4,
196 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 210.
A &pnpos, the desert, i.e, that of Judea, Matt. xi. 7 ; or that of Sinai, John iii. 14, vi. 31 ; Acts vii. 30; and perhaps Matt. iv. 1.*
6 mepdfwv, the tempter (participle, according to § 200), ¢.e., Satan.
6 épxdpevos, the coming one (participle, present), ¢.¢., the Messiah. Matt. xi. 3, xxi. 9, xxiii. 39; Heb. x. 37. Compare Rev. i. 4, 8, iv. 8.
211. Singular for Collective.— A noun in the singular number with the Article occasionally stands for the whole class. Compare such English expressions as “he looked the king,” “the good man is a law to himself.”
Matt. xii. 35: 6 &yabds avipwros, the good man, denoting good men generally.
Matt. xii. 29: rod texupod, of the strong man, any one who pos- sesses that attribute.
Matt. xv. 11: dv Silene’, the man, whoever he may be.
Matt. xviii. 17 : 6 @vixds cai 6 reAdvns, the heathen man and the publican.
Luke x. 7 : 6 épydrns, the labourer, generally.
2 Cor. xii 12: onpeia tod droorddov, signs of the apostle, u.¢., of any rightful claimant of that character.
Gal. iv. 1: 6 KAnpovdpos, one who is heir.
James v. 6: tov Sixaov, the righteous man, generally.
To this head also, perhaps, belongs John iii. 10, ob «f 6 S:ddoKadros ; art thou the teacher? 7.e., is that the position thou hast taken? Or, as in the preceding instances, the word may mark a special emphasis, Nicodemus having in someeminent way the character of Rabbi.
* Strong reasons have been assigned for the belief that ‘‘ the wilderness” of our Lord’s temptation was the same as that through which the Israelites journeyed to Canaan. See Mark i. 13, and compare our Lord’s quotations with their original reference. Note also the parallels between our Lord’s history and those of Moses and Elijah. Webster and Wilkinson on Matt. iv. 1 may be usefully consulted on these points,
§ 212.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. peg 8
212. Renewed Mention.—A person or thing is often made definite by mention (without the Article) in a paragraph, the Article being employed in subsequent reference.
Matt. ii. 1: there came wise men, péyo. Ver. 7, Herod having called the wise men, rors péyous. :
Matt. xiii. 25: the enemy came and sowed tares, tifavia. Ver. 26, then appeared the tares, ra tlévia.
In like manner compare Luke ix. 16 with ver. 13; John iv. 43 with
ver. 40; xx. 1 with xix. 41; Acts xi. 13 with x. 3, 22; James ii. 3 with
ver. 2; 2 Thess, ii. 11, the falsehood, referring to ver. 9 (lit.), wonders of (in support of) a falsehood.
Sometimes the reference is ¢mplicit, the second expression, bearing the article, being equivalent to the former, though not identical.
Acts xx. 13: éni 1d mhoiov, on board the ship, implied in ver. 6, “we sailed away.”
Heb. v. 4: rhv typhv, the honour, referring to the first verse, 7 “that he may offer gifts and sacrifices.”
1 Pet. ii, 7: 4 ty «7.d., the preciousness is for you who believe, 2.¢., that spoken of in the previous verse, ‘a corner-stone, elect, precious.”
213. It is a remark of great importance (Winer) that “it is utterly impossible that the Article should be omitted where it is decidedly necessary, or employed where it is quite superfluous or preposterous.” “It would be a revolution of the laws of thought _ to express as definite that which is conceived indefinitely.” Atten- tion to this will add vividness and suggestiveness to many a passage in which our Authorized Version has failed to reproduce the force of the original. From a great number of texts to which this remark applies, the following may be selected :—
Matt. i. 23 (Isa. vii. 14): 4 wapOévos, the virgin, i.e, the per- sonage so denominated.
198 _ SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 2138.
Matt. v. 1: 1d &pos, the mountain; the high ground over- looking the spot. (See also Luke vi. 12.)
Matt. v. 15: rav pddvov, tiv Avxviav, the modius, the lamp-stand, recognised articles of furniture in every house.
Matt. ix. 1, xiii, 2: 1d mdoiov, the ship, belonging to the disciples, or hired for their use. (So John xxi. 3, &c.)
Matt. xv. 26: rots xvvaplois, to the little dogs, i.e., belonging to the household. (So Mark vii. 27.)
Matt. xvii. 24: 1d Si8paxpa, the half-shekels, the well-known, customary payment.
Matt. xxi, 12: tds mepiorepds, the doves, the accustomed offerings of the poor. :
Matt. xxiii. 24: tov kdvera, tiv Kapnrov, the gnat, the camel, of some popular fable or proverb.
Luke xii. 54: tiv vehd&ny, the cloud, “rising out of the west,” of that peculiar character which foretells much rain. (1 Kings xviii. 44, 45.)
John iv. 22: 4 cwrnpla, the salvation, expected by Israel.
John xiii. 5: tov vurriipa, the basin, used on such occasions.
John xvi. 13: racay riv ddfSeav, all the truth, in reference. to this particular subject. (Compare Mark v. 33.)
John xviii. 3: tiv ometpay, the band, on duty at the time.
Acts xvii. 1: 4 cvvaywyh trav "Iovdaiwr, the synagogue of the Jews, i.¢., the chief or only synagogue of that particular district.
Acts xx. 9: én rijs QupiSos, at the window, or open lattice of the apartment,
Acts xxi. 38: robs rerpaxiryidlovs, the four thousand, the noto- rious band of desperadoes.
Acts xxiv. 23: 1@ tkarovrépyy, the centurion, i.¢., the captain of the cavalry who had sole charge of the Apostle when the infantry (xxiii. 32) had returned to Jerusalem.
1 Cor. i, 21: 8:a ris pwplas tod Knypdyparos, by means of the
§ 213.) SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 199
foolishness of the proclamation, 1.e., by the (so-called) folly of the preached Gospel.
1 Cor, iv. 5: 6 trawos, the praise, which is due, respectively, to each.
1 Cor. v. 9: & tH émorodg, in the letter, referred to thus as well known by the Corinthians. Whether the Apostle speaks of the letter he is thus writing, or of some previous one, is a question of interpretation. iScsgee 2 Cor. vii. 8.)
1 Cor. x. 13: rhv &Pacw, the escape, the appropriate means sf deliverance,
1 Cor. xiv. 16: 73 Apfy, the Amen, the appointed and usual response in Christian worship.
1 Cor. xv. 8: aomepel TH extpdparr, as to the one “born out of due time,” the one Apostle specially bearing that character.
2 Thess, ii. 3: 4 dwoorracta, the falling away, or apostasy, which the Thessalonians had been taught to expect.
1 Tim. vi. 12: rév kaddv dySva tis ticrews, the good fight of the JSaith, the Christian faith.
Heb. xi. 10: riv rods Ocuedious éxovoav wodw, the city which hath the foundations, i.e., the New Jerusalem.
Heb. xi. 35: od mpocdeEdpevor Thy &roditpwcw, not accepting the deliverance, proffered us the reward of apostacy.
James i. 11: ctv 76 Katoon, with the burning wind from the east, fatal to vegetation. (Compare Matt. xx. 12; Jonah iv. 8 ; Luke xii. 95.)
Rev. 11. 10: rov orépavov tis twfis, the crown of the life, the promised crown of the life immortal.
Rey. vil. 14: ék rhs Odtipens ris peyddns, owt of the great tribula- tion (lit., the tribulation, the great one), the reference being toa snecial trial.
In ascriptions of praise, also, the Article is generally found.
q
200 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. {§ 213:
Thus, Rey. iv. 11, rav Sdgav kai Thy tyhy, the glory and the honour, ee aa eos Vit, 12, 05°
214. Before abstract nouns the Article denotes that the con- ception is individualised, as an object of thought. It is often difficult to trace the distinction, and it may even be impossible to say in some instances whether the insertion or the omission of the Article before abstracts would give the better sense ;* but there are many cases in which the difference is clearly marked. For example, the Article is employed :—
a. When the abstraction is personified.
1 Cor. xiii. 4: 4 dydarn paxpobvpei, x.r.d., Love suffereth long, ke.
Acts xxviii, 4: dv 4 Siky Civ otk ciacev, whom Justice permitted not to live.
1 Cor. xi. 14: odd€ airy 4 pois SiddcKxer; doth not Nature ttself teach ?
So when the abstract term is used for the whole mass of individuals,
Rom. xi. 7: #4 dé ékdoyh, the election, i.e., the mass of the elect.
Phil. iii. 3: 4 wepvroph, the circwmeision, t.e., the community of
the circumcised.
b. When the abstraction is made a separate object of thought.
1 Jobn iv. 10: & rovr@ eoriv 4 Gyan, in this is love, we., not merely “this is an act of love,’ but, herein Love in its very essence stands revealed,
1 Cor. xv. 21: 80 dvépamov 6 Savaros, by man \came) death, the universal fact, apart from the consideration of special instances.
Matt. v. 6: mewavres cai Sxpavres Thy Sixaroctyny, hungering and thirsting after righteousness, as in itself a good to be obtained.
* In fact, the subtlety of this distinction has given rise to a large number of various readings.
§ 214. ] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 201
c. But where the abstract word expresses merely a quality of some further object of thought, the article is omitted.
Matt. v. 10: of Sedtaypévos Evexev Stxarorivys, the persecuted for righteousness’ sake, such being an element in their character.
Romans v. 13: Gpapria jv ev kdopo, sin was in the world, 1.¢., as an attribute of human conduct; illustrating the more general assertion of verse 12, that Sin, in the abstract, _ épapria, entered into the world.
1 Cor. xiii. 1: dydrnv py exo, (Zf) I have not love, as a feature in my character. ?
In determining the reason of the omission or the insertion of the Article before abstract nouns in any given case, it should be considered whether there is any grammatical rule requiring it, apart from the meaning of the term. (See especially § 212.)
215. A definite attribute or property of an object is marked in Greek by the Article.
Thus, instead of saying, He has large eyes, the Greeks would say, He has the eyes large. But when the connexion was only accidental, the Article would be omitted; thus, He had a deep wound would be ex- pressed without the Article, unless the wound had been previously mentioned, when the case would come under § 212. The Article may, therefore, in such sentences as the following, be rendered by the pos- sessive pronoun,
Acts xxvi. 24 : 6 Bijotos peyddn TH ova én, Lestus said with his voice upraised, or “ with a loud voice,” as E. V. So ch. xiv. 10.
1 Peter iv. 8: riv cis Eavrods &ydany exrevi Exovres, lit., having your love to one another fervent. ‘Heb. vii. 24: dmapd8arov exer riv tepwotvyy, he has his priesthood
unchangeable.
The Article, in effect, must often be rendered as an unemphatic possessive ; the Greeks saying the, where we say his, her, its, their.
216. With proper names, the Article may or may not be em- ployed. The only rule, probably, that can be safely laid down on the subject is that a name does not take the Article on its first
202 ARTICLE WITH PROPER NAMES. _ ~ [§ 216.
mention, unless in the case of personages well known or specially distinguished. For the rest, the habit or taste of the writer seems to have decided his usage.*
It may, however, be noted that indeclinable names in the oblique cases most frequently employ the Article. Thus we find roi, +4, tov, “Iopaidk. So also in the genealogies.
When a name is followed by some title or descriptive word, the Article is generally inserted. So Mapia { May8$arnv4, Vary the Mag- dalene ; "lotvdas 6 Ioxapidrns, Judas the Iscariot ; Swabévns 6 aSedés (1 Cor. i. 1), Sosthenes the brother.
Of geographical names, those of countries, generally feminine in a, almost always take the Article. The probable reason is that they were originally adjectives, agreeing with ya, land. Thus, 4 Tov8ata, Judea, properly “the Judean land,” or “land of the Jews,” Atyvrros, Hgypt, is always used without the Article.
Names of cities greatly vary in their use, most generally omit- ting the Article after prepositions. ‘Iepoveadfp (indecl.), “Tepooddupa (neut. plur.), Jerusalem, is almost always anarthrous. ,,
2177. The Divine Names appear to be acters irregular i in their use or rejection of the Article.
a. We find Qeés, God, almost interchangeably with 6 Oeks. It is certain, however, that an explanation may very generally be found in the rules already given.
Apart from these, the general distinction seems to be that the name without the Article throws the stress rather upon the general conception of the Divine character—‘“ One who is Omnipotent, All-holy, Infinite, &c.”+—whereas the word with the Article (the © ordinary use) specifies the revealed Deity, the God of the New Testament. Parts of the second and third chapters of the First Epistle to the Corinthians may be taken by way of illustration :—
* Thus, in the Acts, the name of Paul almost always has the Article ; that of Peter much more seldom, but still frequently. Both in the Gospels . and the Acts, the names of the other Apostles usually omit the article,
+ Compare a line of Dr. Watts’s—
‘* This was compassion like a God.”
§ 217 | ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. 203
Chap. i. 1 : The testimony of God, rod Ocos.
Ver. 7: We speak the wisdom of God, Got (without the Article), i.e., the wisdom of an Infinite and Perfect being, as contrasted with the world’s wisdom, which God, 6 @eéds (the God revealed in the Gospel), foreordained.
Chap. iii, 7-9: 6 @eds ndéavev (our) God caused the seed to grow ... for we are God’s fellow-workers, ye are God's husbandry, God's building. In these three clauses the word is used without the _ Article, as though the Apostle reasoned, “It is a God for whom * we are labouring, a God who is moulding you, training you for himself ;” resuming, then, in verse 10 with the Article, “ according to the grace of God, rod Got, which is given me.”
» Thus, again, 2 Cor. v. 18, “ All things are of God, rod Qcod, owr God... who hath given to us the ministry of reconciliation, that God, Océs—all we can understand by that Name—was in Christ... We are ambassadors, then, as though this God, rod Ocod, were beseeching ... Be ye reconciled to this God, 76 Oc... Him who knew not sin, He made sin on our behalf, that we might become dixatoovvn Oe0d, God’s righteousness,” partakers of a Divine righteous- ness, ‘*in Him.”
b. The name Kips, Lord, generally prefixes the Article. The contrary usage, when not accounted for by ordinary rules, arises from this word having been adopted in the Septuagint as the Greek equivalent for the Hebrew name Jenovan. In the Gospels it usually signifies God; in the Epistles it commonly refers to _Christ.t Instances of its occurrence without the article are (1) in direct renderings from the Old Testament, as 1 Cor. iii. 20, Kipuos ywwwoket Tods Siaroytopovs, xt... Jehovah knows the thoughts, &c. So 2 Tim. ii. 19; Heb. vii. 21, xiii 6. In 1 Pet. i 25, it is substituted for the other Hebrew Divine name (LXX., @eo8) ; (2) after prepositions, as in the ordinary phrase, év kvpie; or in the
genitive case (very often) (3) preceding the appellation, Incois
* Or, with whom, a less probable interpretation. t+ The name above every name, Phil. ii. 9, is Kipios, JEHOVAH.
204 ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. [§ 217.
Xpurrés, Jesus Christ, as in the superscriptions (Rom. i. 7; 1 Coy. i. 3; Gal. i. 3). So im Eph. vi. 23, and strikingly Phil. iii, 20.
c. The title vis cot, a or the Son of God (more emphatically Geo viés, God’s Son), is found both with and without the Article. The usual form is 6 vids to} cod, the Son of the (revealed) God (comp. under Qedés). Yids trod Geos occurs, as in the Tempter’s interrogatory (Matt. iv. 3), where the supremacy of the revealed Deity is recognised, but the exclusive relationship of our. Lord to the Father is at least left an open question ; while vids Qeod expresses a view altogether less definite of our Lord’s dignity. Thus, in their first confession, the disciples said, “Truly thou art Son of God,” cot vids. But afterwards Peter acknowledges, “Thou art the Son of the living God,” 6 vids tod Ocod, xr.d. (xvi. 16). The centurion amid ihe miracles of Calvary expresses a certain measure of faith: “Truly this man is Son of God,” @cod vids, without an Article to either (Matt. xxvii. 54; Mark xv. 39; compare Luke xxiii. 47). But we read of Saul, the convert, how he preached at once in the synagogues of Damascus that “this man is the Son of God,” 6 vids ro Ocod (Acts xi. 20).*
d. The name "Ingots, Jesus, when used alone, in the Gospels and Acts, almost always has the Article. The reason undoubtedly is that the word is strictly an appellative, being but the Greek form of the Hebrew for “Saviour.” To the disciples, therefore, and the evangelists, the significance of the word was ever present: the Saviour. When others employed the name, or it was used in converse with thern, the Article might be omitted. See John vi. 24 (where for the moment the point of view taken is that of the spectators). So viii. 59 (and, in critical edd., xi, 51, xviii. 8); Acts v. 30, xiii. 23, 33, and a few other passages. When the name stands in apposition with others, as Kips or Xpwords, the article is generally omitted. In the Epistles, this combination is most usual. The Apostle Paul, for instance, only has 6 "Incots alone four times, and "Iyvots nine; his preference being for the
* Apparent exceptions to this course of remark occur, Jake i, 35; Rom, i. 4, which may be left to the thoughtful reader.
§ 217.] ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES. 205
appellative Xpirrés, while his fervour adopts many variously-com- bined titles for the Lord his Saviour.*
e. The employment of the Article with Xpuords, “the Anointed One,” Christ, shows aremarkable difference between the Gospels and the Epistles. Strictly speaking, the name is a verbal appellative, the Greek equivalent of the Hebrew word Messiah, “* Anointed.” Hence in our Lord’s time it was customary and natural to speak of the Christ. This, accordingly, is the almost invariable form of speech in the Gospels and the Acts. Thus, Matt. ii, 4, we should read, “ where the Christ is born;” Matt. xi. 2, ‘the works of the Christ,” 1.e., such works as attested his possession of that cha- racter; Matt. xxii, 42, “ what think ye of the Christ?” John xii. 34, “the Christ abideth for ever ;” Acts xvii. 3, “that it behoved the Christ to suffer.”
Already, however, the tendency was at work which in later days changed this appellative into a recognised proper name. Traces of this may be seen in Matt.i.1; Marki. 1, ix. 41; Acts ii. 38; and in the Epistles of Paul the usage appears entirely reversed, the omission of the Article being the rule (in the forms Xpirrds alone, Inrots Xpioerdés, and Xpirrds Invots), and its reten- tion the exception. The descriptive title, “Tue ANornTeD,” has not been wholly lost, but the personal name of Curist has laid a yet deeper hold on the mind and heart of the Church. Some- times, again, the Apostle employs one form in close repeated recur-
* Mr, Rose, in his edition of ‘‘ Middleton on the Greek Article,” gives a list of the appellations used by St. Paul, with the number of times they respectively occur. They are—
6 ’Incods we) ae”) CA times. | 6 Kdpios *Inoods... .... 10 times. *Incovs ... ims oie Petes "Incods 6 Kuptos... Sena ube 6 Xpiords ee Oe Se) oh 6 K. 71. Xpiords... sa NEBL Ly Xpiords ... abe Sh yt Kipws I. X.... eS by die *Inoovs 6 Xpiords Sa Sat 6 X. “I. 6 Kdpios fy Ores - 6 Xpiotds *Incods (read- Xpisrds “1. K. ... ie 280 Begs ings doubtful) winters Ma) py 1. X. 6 K. nuav ae Oo py "Inoovs Xpiortos ... eer ae 6 K. hpav “1. X. odd BO pe Xpiords "Inoois ... enki OO ae X. 7L. 6 K. jyov ota’ | eae
206 ARTICLE WITH THE DIVINE NAMES.~ [§ 217.
rence, as in Col. iii. 1-4: “If ye be risen with the Christ, seek the’
things that are above, where the Christ sitteth .. your life is hid with the Christ... when the Christ shall appear.” Without the Article, we have the name thus recurrent in Phil. i 18-23. After speaking of those who preach the Christ out of envy and strife, the Apostle adds, as with a more personal love, “ nevertheless Christ is preached” ... uttering then his earnest hope “that Christ shall be magnified ... for me to live is Christ ... yet to depart and to be with Christ is far better.”
It is not asserted that the thoughtful reader will always discern the reason of the employment or the omission of the Article in connexion .
with these sacred names. Often, however, unquestionably, most inte- resting and valuable suggestions will arise; and the whole subject is worth the most painstaking investigation. *
Jf. The name of the Holy Spirit, TIvetpa &yvov, requires the Article when he is spoken of in himself; but when the reference is to his operation, gifts, or manifestation in men, the Artigle is almost inva- riably omitted. In other words, “‘the Spirit” regarded objectively takes the Article, regarded subjectively is frequently anarthrous.
Apparent exceptions to this rule are but instances of more general
, grammatical laws, as, for instance, when the term, although definite, follows a preposition or precedes a genitive.
Accordingly, when disciples of Christ are said to be filed with the Spirit, to receive the Spirit, to walk in the Spirit, the Article is omitted. See, e. g., Luke i. 15, 41, 67, ii. 25, xi. 13; John iii. 5, xx. 22; Acts i. 5, ii. 4, iv. 8, vi. 3, viii. 15, 17 (the Article in 18 is a case of renewed mention), xi. 16; Romans viii. 9, ix. 1, xv. 13, 16; 1 Cor. ii. 4, 13, vii. 40; 2 Cor. ili. 3; Eph. v. 18, vi. 18; Col. i. 8; 2 Thess. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet.i. 2; 2 Pet.i. 21; Jude 19; Rev.i. 10, &e.
An instance of the force of the Article may be seen in John xiv. 17, 26, xv. 26, xvi. 13, in all of which passages we read +d IIvetpa, But when the Spirit is imparted, the Article disappears (xx. 22),
dere TIvedpa &yov, “ Receive ye (the) Holy Ghost.”
+ See a striking Essay on ‘“‘the Greek Testament,” in the Quarteriy Review for January, 1863.
§ 218. ] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 207
218. Some monadic nouns, (see § 209) being regarded as proper names, may be used with or without the Article. Such are #Avs, sun; kécpos, world ; otpavds, otpavot, heaven, or heavens ; yh, earth or land; Oidacca, sea; hpépa, day; vig, night; exdyyoia, church, and some others. The Article, however, is most generally inserted.
219. Some prepositional phrases omit the Article; in most instances denoting time, place, or state. Compare the English expressions, at home, on land, by day, in church.
_Lxamples.—aw aypot, from the country (Mark xv. 21; Luke | Xxill. 26); els dypsv, into the country (Mark xvi. 12); & ayp%, in the country (Luke xv. 25).
& apxfj, in the beginning iy a oy ae 2; Acts xi. 15); am dpx iis (Matt. xix. 4,8; Luke i 2; Jobn viii. 44; 1 John i. 1, &e.) ; & dpxijs, from the beginning (John xvi. 4).
&« Sefidv ... & apiorepdv, on (lit., off) the right ... the left (Mark x. 37; Luke xxiii. 33, &c.)
els olxiay, into the house (2 John 10).
év éxxdynoig, i (the) church (1 Cor. xiv. 19, 28, 35).
éml mptcwrov, on the face (1 Cor. xiv. 25).
amd dvatoddv, from the Hast (Matt. ii. 1, xxiv. 27); dard Sucpav, from the West (Luke xii. 54; Rev. xxi. 13; both phrases com- bined, Matt. viii. 11; Luke xiii. 29) ; tas Sucpav, wnto the West (Matt. xxiv. 27). :
&x vexpav, from the dead. This phrase is of constant occurrence, as Matt. xvii. 9, &c. Occasionally, dé is employed; very rarely the Article is found. Perhaps the omission is intended empha- tically to mark the condition, “from dead persons ”—those, inde- finitely speaking, who are in that state.
Other instances of this idiom might be added. The student, however, must be cautioned against supposing that the preposition is itself a
reason, to be applied promiscuously, for the omission of the Article before a term intended to be taken as definite. *
* See, for instance, Alford on Matt. i. 18, é« mvevparos ayiov. The Article is omitted, not account of the cic lac but according to the distinction illustrated, § 217, f.
208 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICL». ~ FS 220.
220. Nouns defined by the demonstrative pronouns, odros, this, exeivos, that, directly agreeing with them, take the Article, which always immediately precedes the noun ; the pronoun being placed indifferently, first or last. Thus we may have 6 &v@pamos odros (Luke ii. 25), or otros 6 &vOpwmos (xiv. 30), this man, but never 6 odros @Operos or odros dvOpwmos, and scarcely ever dvOparos obros.*
When the Article is omitted with the noun and demonstrative pronoun, the latter implies a predicate. Thus (Rom. ix. 8), ov... Taira tékva Tov Geod, these are not the children of God.
These rules apply for the most part to proper names, as Acts xix. 26, 6 Ilatdos otros, this Paul; Heb. vii. 1, otros 6 MeAxucedéx, this Melchisedek ; John vi. 42, ody otros éoriw "Inoots, Is this not Jesus ?+ Odros after a name often implies contempt.
The pronoun tovdros, rovairy, totoiro, such, is found with the Article when the person or thing which is the subject of com- parison is definitely before the writer’s mind ; the omission of the Article shows that the reference is more general, to quality or _ attribute.
Matt. xix. 14: r&év rowdrev, «7... of such (as these children) is the kingdom of heaven.
2 Cor. ii. 6: ixaviv 76 rovodtre, sufficient to such a man (as the offender of whom I write).
Matt. ix. 6 : Goveiav rovavrny, such (kind of) power.
John ix. 16: rowatra onpeta, such (kind of ) miracles.
It is observable, however, that the two forms of expression, being separated by so slight a shade of difference, may often be used indif- ferently. The Article is generally omitted in the Gospels, generally inserted in the Epistles, except that to the Hebrews.
221. The distributive pronominal adjective tkaeros, each, never takes the Article in the New Testament,
* The demonstrative 85¢ only once occurs in the adjective construction, and follows the same rule: James iv. 13, eis rhvde rhv wddw, into this city.
+ The learner should be cautioned against rendering, ‘‘Is this Jesus not the son of Joseph?” which would have required é’Ingods, The comma at Jesus in the E. V. conveys the proper stress,
f
§ 221.] SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 209
Before rootros, so much (plur. so many), the Article is not found in the New Testament, with the exception of Rev. xviii. 17, & roroites tAodTOs, the wealth, which was so great.
922. The Article prefixed to the pronoun airés gives it the meaning of the swme. (See § 957, d.)
2 Cor. iv. 13: 1d adtd wveipa, the same Spirit.
But Rom. viii. 26: adrd rd mvedpa, the very Spirit, the Spirit himself.
The New Testament MSS. often vary between the contracted plural raitd and tadra (plur. neut. of obros). See Luke vi. 23, vi, 26, xvii. 30; 1 Thess. ii. 14.
22:3. a. A possessive pronoun agreeing with a noun not a Pre-— dicate, invariably takes the Article.
John xvii. 10: rd && mavra od eorw Kal Ta od eud, all (things) mine are thine, and thine are mine.
Acts xxiv. 6 : kara tov fpérepov vdpoy, according to our law.
John vii. 6: 6 kalpos 6 tpérepos, your opportunity.
b. The possessive sense is, however, generally given by the geni- tive of the personal pronoun ; the article preceding the noun, as & warhp pov, my father ; ot warépes tpav, your fathers.
224. a. The adjective was, all, in the singular number, without the Article, signifies every; with the Article, it means the whole of the object which it qualifies. Thus, rica adds is every city; mace 4 weds, Or waa wédts,* the whole of the city. 4 wédts waca would have a meaning slightly ditferent—the city, all of it—‘‘the city in every part.” So with abstracts.
Luke iv. 13: ovvredécas wévra mwepacpdy, (the devil) having ended every temptation, t.e., every form of temptation.
2 Cor. iv. 2: mpds tacav cuveldyow davOpadrav, to every conscience of men, 2.e., to every variety of human conscience,
* A construction only twice found: Acts xx. 18, tov mdvta xpdvov; and 1 Tim. i, 16.
210 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. ' [§ 224,
Eph. iii. 15: wéoa warp, «7. Every family in heaven and eurth.
Some critics have questioned this translation on the authority of ch. ii. 21, where many critics read waca oixodoun, and render, the whole building. This, however, is quite contrary to usage
2 Tim. iil. 16: mica ypaph Oedmvevoros, «.7.r., Lvery writing (z.e., of those just mentioned, v. 14) is divinely inspired,* &c., or Every divinely inspired writing is also profitable,t+ &e.
Luke ii. 10: wavri + Aa, to all the people of Israel.
The phrase in ch. ii, 31 is different: ‘‘ before the face of all the peoples,” i.e., the nations of mankind.
1 Cor. xiii. 2: dav ty waicav tiv miotw, «7.d., if TD have all the Jaith requisite for such a task.
Col. i. 23: &v wéoy TH Ktice, in ik whole of the creation ; not “to every creature,’ as E.V. Compare ver. 15, wéeons xricews, where the rendering is accurate, of every creature.’
1 Tim. 1. 16: tiv aca paxpoduplay, all the long suffering which belongs to the Divine character.
John v. 22: riv xpiow macay, x.7.d., the judgment (of men), all of wt. The Father has committed this wholly to the Son.
With proper names, as of countries, cities, &c., the Article after mas may be omitted by § 216; the signification being still the whole. (Matt. ii. 3; Acts ii. 36.)
b. The plural, wévres, almost always has the Article when the substantive is expressed ; almost always omits it when the sub- stantive is implied. The few exceptions to the former are chiefly when the noun is &v@pwro, men.t The exceptions to the latter are where the idea is collective. Thus, révra is all things, seve- rally ; 7a wévra, all things, as constituting a whole.
* Middleton.
+ Ellicott.
t See also Acts 3 xvii. 21, xix. 17; 1 Cor. x. 1; 1 Thess. v. 26; Heb, i, 6; 1 Pet. ii. L
§ 224. ] | SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 211
Phil. iv. 13: w&vra icyto, I can do all things.
Col. i. 16: 1a wévra 80 airod, All things are by Him (Christ). See also 1 Tim. vi. 13; Heb. ii. 8, &e.
The usual position of the plural, rdvres, is before the Article and substantive. Twice (Acts xix. 7, xxvii. 37) with a special meaning, it stands between them: of mdvtes &vdpes, the men in all; af maou Wuxal, the souls (persons) in all. Occasionally, employed after the Article and substantive, it takes a strong emphasis: as John xvii. 10, 7a euda mavta od ort, Mine are ali thine.
225. The construction of 8dos, whole, in respect of the Article, is similar to that of mas. Generally the Article stands between it and its noun, as 8dos 6 Kéopos, the whole world (Rom. i. 8). Occa- sionally the noun and Article precede, with an added emphasis on dros, aS & Kdopos Bros, the world, (yea) the whole (of it) (Matt. xvi. 26).* <A few times it is found without the Article, and its force is expressed by the English indefinite, as John vii. 23, 8dov &vOpwrov, a whole man I have restored to health. The other instances are Acts xi. 26, xxi. 31 (before a proper name), xxviii, 30; Titus i. 11.
226. The employment of the Article with the adjective pro- nouns 4AXos, other (numerically), and érepos, other (properly implying some further distinction), is analogous to the English idiom.t
Singular, the other; plural, the others (érepos only once so used, Luke iv. 43).
John xx. 3: 6 & dos padyris, the other disciple. John xx. 25: of &ddow pabnrar, the other disciples. Matt. vi. 24: rv trepov dyamjoe, the other (master) he will love.
Luke iv. 43: tats érépais aédeour, to the other cities.
* The observant reader may trace the emphasis in the other passages where this order is found: Matt. xxvi. 59; Mark i. 33, viii. 36; Luke ix. 25, _ xi. 36; John iv. 53; Acts xix. 29, xxi. 30; Rom. xvi. 23; 1 Cor. xiv. £3; 1 John.v..19; Rev. iii. 10, xii. 9, xvi. 14
+ In classical Greek, 6 &AAvs means the rest of.
{¢ Perhaps also Matt. xi. 16 (Tischendorf).
J: |: aaa SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. TS 22.
(227. The Article with the neuter wont (“the much”) is equi- valent to “the abundance.” (See 1 Pet. i. 3.) More common, however, is its use with the plural, woddol, roddal, roddd, many, to which it gives the significance of the many, the generality, the whole mass of the particular objects of thought. The only instances are the following :—
Matt. xxiv. 12: 4 dydzn trav woddév, the love of the many shall wax cold.
Luke vii. 47: ai dpapria ... at woddat, her sins—the man», 7.e., the whole of them—are forgiven.
Acts xxvi. 24: rd moda ypdupara, lit., the many letters ; the mass, the quantity of thy learning.
Rom. xii. 5: of woddol, the many of us—the whole mass—are one body in Christ. So 1 Cor. x. 17.
1 Cor. x. 33: 75 t&v woddayv, the (advantage) of the many.
2 Cor. ii. 17: & of woddol, (we are not) as the many.
Rev. xvii. 1: ray iddrav tav woddGv, of the many waters.
Rom. v. 15-19: This most important passage, containing this idiom, has been thus translated * :—
[We have noted by italics the Articles which the English version omits.]
15 Howbeit not as the trespass, so also is the gift of grace. For if by the trespass of the one the many died, much more did the grace of God and his free gift abound unto the many by the grace of the one man Jesus Christ.
16 And not as through oné that sinned, so is the gift ; for the judg- ment came of one unto condemnation, but the gift of grace came of many trespasses unto justification.
17 For if by the trespass of the one death reigned through the one, much more shall they which receive the abundance of the grace and of the free gift of (thet) righteousness reign in life through the one, Jesus — Christ.
_ * “The Epistle of St. Paul to the Romans, after the Authorized Version, newly compared with the original Greek, and revised. By Five Clergymen. Second edition. Parker & Son. 1858.” . + In the Greek, but not in the ‘‘ Five Clergymen’s” translation.
§ 227.1 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE ARTICLE. 213
18 Therefore as through one trespass, [the issue was] unto all men to condemnation, even so through one righteous act [the issue was] unto all even to justitication of life.
19 For as through the disobedience of the one man the many were made sinners, even so through the obedience of the one shall the many be made righteous.
228. When the Nominative is used for the Vocative in direct address, the Article is prefixed. For an explanation of the idiom, see § 244.
Matt. xi. 26: val, 6 warhp, Hven so, Father !
Luke viii. 54: 4 wats, éyeipov, Damsel, arise !
John xix. 3: yaipe 6 Baowdeds, Hail, King !
John xx. 28: 6 Kupids pou kai 6 Geds pov, My Lord and my God !
Heb. i. 8: 6 Opdvos cov 6 Ocds, Thy Throne, O God! See also ver. 9, and x. 7.
229. The Article is often separated from its substantive by qualifying or explanatory words.
a. These are, generally, a preposition with its case, other dependent words being sometimes added.
Matt. vii. 3: rhv b€ & 1h oG dPOarya Soxdv, but the beam in thine own eye. |
Luke xvi. 10: 6 &y Aayiore duos, the (man) wnjust in the least.
1 Pet. i. 14: tats mpérepov év Th ayvoia tpav erbupiats, the former (lit., formerly) lusts in your ignorance.
b. Adverbs also are often thus snloged —
2 Tim. iv. 10: dyarjoas tov viv aidva, having loved the present (lit., now) world.
230. a. The Article is very frequently repeated after its noun, to introduce some attributive word or phrase.
Clearly, this is a result of the original demonstrative force of the Article.
The phrase introduced may be an adjective or participle, a preposition with its case, or (rarely) an adverb.
The Article so employed gives the attributive a certain prominence or emphasis,
214 EMPHATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 230,
Matt. xvii. 5: 6 vids pov 6 &yarynrés, my beloved Son.
Titns ii, 11: 9 xdpts rod cod | owrhpws, the grace of God that bringeth salvation, lit., the grace ... the salvation-bringing,
Heb. xiii. 20: rédv woueva trav mpoBatrav tov péyav, the great Shepherd of the sheep. See also Matt. v. 16; Luke xx. 35; I Pet. i. 25; Rev. xi. 2. :
The absence of the Article before an attributive phrase is often significant. Thus Rom. viii. 3: karékpiwe thy Guaptiay év tH capki, he condemned sin in the flesh. The phrase depends upon karéxpwe, Had it been ti év ti capkl, in the flesh would have qualified sin.
1 Pet. i. 25: 76 pia 7d ebayyediobév, the word that was preached lit., the word, the spoken-as-glad-tidings.
Matt. v. 16: rév Harépa ipay tov &y tots otpavots, your Father in the heavens.
Luke xx. 15: rijs dvacrdeews Ths ek vexpdv, of the resurrectwn .
Srom the dead. . Rev. xi. 2: rv aidgy tiv aber, the outer court.
b. Occasionally, this emphatic form of expression is employed when the noun has no Article preceding.
Luke xxiii. 49: yuvaixes at cvvaxohov0iracrat aird, (there stood) women, those who had followed Him. John xiv. 27: eipnyny tiv euiy did@pe tpiv, Peace (which is) mine, I gwe to you. L Tim. v. 3: ynpas ripa tas 8vtws xfhpas, honour widows, those who are widows indeed.
Rom. ix. 30: dcxaroodyny dé rhv & mliorews, (he obtained) righteous- ness, yea that (which is) by faith.
James i 25: els vopov rédecov Tov Tis eemneelat, (whoso looketh) into a perfect law, that of liberty.
In passages like these, the former clause contains the general descrip- tion; the latter limits it to a particular case. See also Gal, ii. 20, ii, 21; 1 Pet. i. 10, ‘‘ prophets, those who prophesied ;” Jude 6, ** Angels, (even) those namely that kept not their first estate,”
§ 231.] EMPHATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 215
231. The defining clause being frequently participial, it may be remarked, in anticipation of the account to be given of Parti- ciples (§§ 393-396), that with the Article the participle qualities the noun, as a simple epithet, while without the Article it implies a predicate. Thus, 6 Gcds 6 woufoas rdv kédcpor is, God who made the
‘world ; 6 Ged: woufeas, x7... would be, God having made, or when
He had made, &. In 2 Pet. i. 18, again, we render, not “ the voice which was borne from heaven,” but ‘the voice as it was borne.”
Sometimes it will be important to observe the force of the anarthrous participle.
Thus, in a much-controverted passage, 1 Pet. iii: 19, 20, rots év @udAaKy mvevpact.. arebnoact more, whatever be the true interpretation, the words must be translated, not ‘‘the spirits in prison who were once disobe- dient,” but ‘‘ the spirits in prison when once they disobeyed.”
This usage will be further discussed in the sections on Participles,
232. In the enumeration of several persons or things, joined by a connective particle, an Article before the first only intimates a connexion between the whole, as forming one object of thought. This is termed “combined enumeration.” The repeated Article, on the other hand, implies a separation, in themselves, or in the view taken of them.
Sometimes, however, the separation seems to be chiefly grammatical, different genders requiring the repeated Article.
a. Combined enwmeration.—Eph. ii. 20: émi 16 Geyedrtlo trav dnogTékwv kai mpopntay, upon the foundation of the apostles and prophets, all together constituting but one basis.
Eph. ii. 18: ri 78 wAdros Kal pijkos Kat Bdbos Kat tvvos, what (is) the breadth and length and depth and height, one image of vast extension being before the mind.
Col. ii. 22: td evrddpara kat didackadrlas Tov dvOporav (obs. the different genders), the commandments and teachings of men, toge- ther constituting one system.
2 Pet. 1.10: tiv KAjow kai exdoyjv, (your) calling and election,
each mutually implying the other, r
216 THE ARTICLE IN ENUMERATIONS. [§ 282
Matt, xvii. 1: rdv Teérpov kai “IdxwBov Kai “Iodvyny, Peter and James and John, one inseparable group.
Titus ii. 13: tiv paxapiay édrida kai erupdveray tis OdEns TOD peydAov Gecod Kal carnpos npav “Incod Xpicrov, the blessed hope and mani- Sesiation of the glory of our great God and Saviour Jesus Christ.
Here are two cases of enumeration, each with a single Article:
_ (1) the “manifestation” is but another expression for the ‘‘ hope ;” and
(2) the latter phrase may imply, on the above-stated principle, either
that God (the Father) and Jesus Christ the Saviour are so inseparably
conjoined, that the glory of each is the same; or else, as many of the best interpreters have it, and as Ellicott renders it in the translation above, that God in this passage is, like Saviour, an epithet of Christ.
Comp. Eph. v. 5; 2 Thess. i. 12; 2 Pet.i. 1. See also the phrase, ‘‘the
God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ,” Eph. i. 3; 1 Pet. i. 3; Rom.
xv. 6; 2 Cor. i. 3, xi. 31 (1 Cor. xv. 24): not God, even the Father, &c. b. Separate enumeration —Luke xii. 11: émi tas cwvaywyas Kat
tas dpyas kai Tas eLovcias, to the synagogues, and the magistrates,
-. and the powers, three different classes of tribunal. The reader may compare Mark xv. 1, whcre the elders and scribes are spoken of as constituting but one class, ¢.¢., in the Sanhedrim.
James iii. 11: 1d yAukd cai Td mixpd., the sweet and the bitter, from their very nature separate.
2 Thess. i. 8: rots 7) eiddou Gcdr, kal Tots pt) traxovovet, K.T.Asy to those who know not God, and those who obey not the Gospel of our Lord Jesus Christ ; two distinct classes, incurring different degrees of punishment.
Heb. xi. 20: eiAdyncev “Ioaak Tov “Iaxe8 kai tov "Hoad, [saac blessed Jacob and Esau. Both received a blessing, but not
- together, and not the same.
The same enumeration may be found in different places, with and without the separating Article. This arises from a difference in the writer’s point of view in each particular case. So in 1 Thess. i. 7, the Apostle writes, 77 Maxedovia nat 77 Axaig; but in ver, 8, 7H Maxedovig nal Axalg. In the former verse, he seems to contemplate the different directions in which the influence of Thessalonian Christianity spread ; in the latter, the uniform spread of that influence.
Such distinctions may be slight, but they are real, and even where they seem, as Winer says of this passage, ‘* indifferent,” should at least be noted.
233. | OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 217
933. The omission uf the Article marks’ indefiniteness, which in translation may be represented by our Indefinite Article in the singular, and by the anarthrous plural. This point, also, has occasionally been neglected in the Authorized Version.
Matt. xii. 41, 42: dv8pes Nuvevirar ... Bacidiooa Nérov, men of Nineveh ... a queen of the South.
Luke ii. 12: eipioere Bpépos, ye shall find a babe, which shall be the sign that the promise is fulfilled.
Acts i. 7: xpévous i) katpots, times or seasons, generally.
Acts xvii. 23: dyvaorm Ocd, to an unknown God.
Acts xxvi. 2-7 (Tischendorf): éyxadotpar td “Iov8atov, T am accused by Jews ; that they should bring such a charge being the wonderful feature in the case.
Rom. ii. 14: drav yap vn, x.7.d., For when Gentiles do the things contained.in the law; not the Gentiles, as though the case were ordinary.
1 Cor. iii, 10: Oepédvov 26nxa, I laid a foundation.
1 Cor. xiv. 4: ékAnolav oixodopei, edifies an assembly, antithetic to himself.
2-Cor. iii. 6: Suaxdvous Kawwfs Sia0qKns, ministers of a new covenant.
Gal. iv. 31: od« éopev madlonns réxva, we are not children of a bondwoman.
Phil. iii. 5: ‘EBpatos e& “EBpatav, a Hebrew of Hebrews, 1.€., ot Hebrew parents.
1 Thess. iv. 16: év dov_ apxayyé&ov, amid phe voice of an arch- angel.
Heb. i. 2: eAddnoev jpiv ev vid, God spake to us by (in) a Son, te, by one possessing that character, in contradistinction to the prophets of former ages.
234. The use of the word vépos deserves special attention. With the Article, it invariably denotes the Mosaic law, except where its meaning is limited by accompanying words. Without
218 ARTICLE WITH vépos, LAW. —— [§ 284.
the Article, in cases where the omission is not required by gram- matical rule, the term appears to have a wider significance ; some- times referring to the Mosaic law as the type of law in general, and sometimes to law in the abstract, including every form of Divine command or moral obligation.
Rom. ii. 12: dco &v vopo Zuaprov, x.7.r., As many as sinned under
law shall be judged by law.
Rom. ii. 23: os & vép@ xavyaoa, x.7-r., who makest thy boast of law, or of a law, through breaking the law, &c. (renewed mention.)
Rom. ii. 25: dav vépov mpdcons, if thou keepest law, 2.e., if thou dost obey, in general; so the verse continues, but if thou be a breaker of law, &c.
Rom. iii. 20: && Zpyav vépov, x.r.r., by deeds of law shall no flesh be justified, for by law is the knowledge of sin. The omission of the Article shows the truth to be universal, applicable to all men and to every form of law. Compare ver. 28, Gal. 11. 16, iti. 2, 5, 10, in all which passages the Article is consistently omitted.
A few passages further need only be mentioned.
Rom. iii. 31: ‘do we make law void ?... yea we establish law.”
Rom. v. 20: ‘‘there came in by the way a law.”
Rom. vii. 9: ‘*I was once alive without law.”
Rom. x. 4: ‘* Christ is the end of law.”
Rom. xiii. 10: ‘‘ love is the fulfilment of law.”
Gal. ii. 19: ‘*I through law died to law that I might live to God.”
Gal. iii. 18: ‘for if the inheritance is of law, it is no more of promise.”
James iv. 11: ‘‘he that speaketh evil of his brother, and judgeth his brother, speaketh evil of law and judgeth law ; but if thou judgest law, thou art not a doer of law, but a judge.”
These passages, taken in connexion with the numerous instances in which the Law is specifically spoken of, will illustrate the importance of a constant attention to the usage of Scripture in respect to the Article.
§ 23d. | THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. — 219
Cuarrer III.—THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. NUMBER.
235. The ordinary usage of the Singular and Plural needs no detailed illustration. The following special rules must be noted.
936. A Masculine Singular Noun, with the Article, often represents a whole class.
Instances have peen given already, § 211. The omission of the Article in passages like Rom. i. 16, ii. 9, 10, "Iovdale re kal“EAAnn, to both Jew and Greek, is owing to the antithetic form. (See § 233.)
237. Some words, like cépa, body, xap8la, heart, when predi- cated of several individuals, are occasionally employed in the singular. The plural, however, is more common. Thus we read, T) copa tuoy and ta cdpara iuav, your body or bodies; 4 KapSta or ai kapSlou airav, their heart or hearts.
The word rpécwroy, face, is always singular in such phrases:as they fell upon their face, except in the Revelation, vii. 11 (edd.), xi. 16.
238. Many abstract nouns are used in the plural, for repeated exemplifications of the quality denoted.
Mark vii. 22: meovegiat, rovnplar, covetousnesses, wickednesses. James ii. 1: éy mporwmodn plas, in regard (regards) to persons:
2 Pet. itt. 112 @ dylas évarrpopats Kal edoeBelas, lit., in holy conducts and godlinesses.
_ 239. The plural is occasionally used, like the English rhe- torical we, by a speaker of himself. See especially the passage,
20" THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. [§ 229.
2 Cor. ii. 14, vii. 16, where the Apostle changes incessantly from singular to plural. The reason, however, may be that sometimes he is conscious of speaking on behalf of himself and his associates ; sometimes, again, for himself alone. In any case, the idiom in
question is not a common one.
240. In some instances, where only one agent or object is actually meant, the plural is employed.
Strictly speaking, these cannot be called instances of the plural put for the singular, but arise, either (a) from the object being regarded in its constituent parts, or (6) from the writer slaving formed the conception generally, without limitation.
a. A familiar instance of the former kind is in the plural names of cities, as *A@fjvar, Athens, Kodoroal, Colosse, where the words expressed in the first instance the several districts of the place, or the different tribes which formed its population. So, in Greek, Jerusalem is often ‘Iepord\vpa (neut. plur.)
Analogous words are évarodat, cast ; Svepal, west ;* ra Seprd, the right ; tu aporrepd or eddvupa, the left, where some such word as parts may be supplied. These words are also found in the singular.
Some miscellaneous terms to be explained in a similar way are—
Luke xvi. 23: Adfapov év rots xéAmas abtov, Lazarus in his (Abraham’s) bosom. In ver. 22 the singular had been used.
John i. 13: od« é aiudrwy, not of blood, lit., bloods—a peculiar phrase, with a reference perhaps to both parents. t
Hebrews ix. 12, &c.: eis ra G&ysa, unto the Sanctuary, ‘‘the Holies,” sometimes, as in ver. 2, dyia ayiwv, Holies of holies,t suggesting that every spot and every object there was consecrated.
Names of festivals are sometimes plural: éyxalua, feast of dedication
* Or perhaps the plural in these words may denote repetition. The sun rises or sets there ‘‘ again and again.’
+ The expression has no parallel in the Scriptures, and only one in the classics (Winer). The plural, however, is often found in the Old Testament . (from the Hebrew), where violent bloodshedding is denoted.
*t In this expression (not in the other), some would read ayla, fem., as referring to a noun, like xépa, place. This is, however, most unlikely,
§ 240.) — THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS. 221
(John x. 22); ava, feast of unleavened bread (Matt. xxvi. 11, &c.) ; verécia, birthday feast (Matt. xiv. 6; Mark vi. 21). So yduo, marriage feast, from the various observances and festivities accompanying.
Aiaéves, ages, is plural, to mark the successive epochs of duration, especially of the Divine plan; the singular either referring to one such epoch, or including all as one mighty whole. Hence the phrase jor ever may be represented either by eis tov aiéva (Matt. xxi. 19; John vi. 51, 58; 1 Pet. i. 25, from Isa. xl. 8, &c.), or by els rods ai@vas (Luke i. 33; Rom. i. 25, ix. 5; Heb. xiii. 8, &c.) ; while the emphatic for ever and ever is expressed by es rods aidvas Tay aidvwr, to the ages of ages (Heb. xiii. 21; 1 Pet. iv. 11, v. 11; and Rev. often).
Obpavol, heavens, is found with meaning indistinguishable from oipdves, heaven. The plural usage probably arose from the Hebrew, where the word is always dual: “ the two parts of the firmament.” There is also ‘‘the third heaven.” Matthew almost always has the plural; Luke almost always* the singular; Mark most usually the singular; John, the singular always, except in Rev. xii. 12. The other poe of the New Testament vary between the two almost equally.
Other plurals of this kind will be sufficiently aynee in the Voca- bulary.
b. 1. In the second above-mentioned class may be included those cases where persons are said generally to do what was really done by one of their number. Thus, Matt. xxvi. 8, “his disciples said, To what beg sae dc. ; while in John xii. 4 we read, “one of his disciples, Judas.” Compare Mark vii. 17 with Matt. xvi. 14; Matt. xiv. 17 and Mark vi. 38 with John vi. 8, 9; Matt. xxiv. 1 with Mark xiii. 1; Matt. xxvii. 37 with J cha xix. 19; Matt. xxvii, 48 and Mark xv. 36 with John xix. 29. So in Luke xxii. 67, Aéyovres, when iv all probability only one is meant. See also the same idiom in John xi. 8; Luke xx. 21, 39, xxiv. 5 (dmov) ; Matt. xv. 1, Myovres; xv. 12, efrov.t
These instances will help to explain apparent discrepancies. Thus it may be that only one of the crucified malefactors actually blasphemed,
notwithstanding the plural in Matt. xxvii. 44; and the narrative of the cure of the blind men at Jericho (Matt. xx. 30-34; Mark x. 46-52;
* Perhaps always, except xii. 33, with Acts ii. 34, vii. 56; the other pas- - sages where the recognised text gives the plural being all doubtful: x. 20, xi. 2, xxi. 26.
¢ Stuart’s ‘“‘ New Testament Syntax.”
222 _ THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS.. [§ 240.
Luke xviii. 35-43) may possibly be harmonized in a similar way, although the probability seems to be that two different transactions of the kind then took place. * rig Somewhat different from the above, yet related under the same head, are those cases in which a general statement suflices, although a particular one might also have been made.
_dohn vi. 45; Acts xiii. 40: Zhe prophets is a general reference, as when we quote from “the Bible” without specifying a parti- cular part.
Matt. ii. 20: reO@vixacw ot fnrotvres, x.r.d., they are dead who seek, &c., when Herod specifically is meant. (See Exodus iv. 19.)
Matt. ix. 8: rév ddvra é£ovciay rovaitny tots avOpdrois, who gave such power to men, %.€., a8 instanced in the case of Christ.
Rom. i. 4: é& dvacrdcews vexpav, by the resurrection of the dead ; the context showing the reference to be to the one great illustration, in the case of Christ, of this general fact. It is, however, incor- rect to interpret 1 Cor. xv. 29, on the authority of this passage, as referring to baptism “in the name of Him who was dead, 7e., Christ.”
Heb. ix. 23: xpelrroo: bvelais, with better sacrifices, t.e., whatever those sacrifices might be; the question being, as it were, left open for a moment, although the aim was to show that in reality only one sacrifice could avail.
For the use of singular adjectives, pronouns, &c., in agreement or apposition with plural nouns, or the contrary, see § 317.
CASE. THE NoMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. 241, Tho Nominative is properly the case of the Subject ;
hence also of the Predicate after copulative Verbs. See §§ 163-165.
* Lee on Inspiration, p. 393; Burgon’s ‘‘ Inspiration and Interpretation,” p. 67. See, however, ‘‘ Bible Hand-book,” Part II., § 148; ‘Trench on the Miracles, p. 429.
§ 242. | NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE CASE. 223:
242. In some passages a Nominative is found, unconnected with the grammatical structure of the sentence ; calling attention, emphatically, to the thing or person spoken of. ‘This is called a Suspended Nominative (“nominativus pendens”).
Matt. xii. 36 : wav papa dpydv...dmrodacover rept av’rovd Adyov, every idle word...they shall give account of %.
Acts vii. 40: 6 Moos odtos...odK otdapyev, «.7.r., This Moses...we know not, &e.
Rev. ii. 26: & vuxdv cal & typdv... dSdcw aird eLovoiav, he that overcometh, and that keepeth...to him I will give authority. So iii, 12, 21.
See also Matt. x. 42; Luke xii. 10; John vii. 38, &
A ‘‘suspended Nominative” is occasionally employed in expressions of time.
Matt. xv. 32; 871, 43y hucpar Tpeis, mpocpévovel por, because they con- tinue with me, now three days. So Mark viii. 2.*
Luke ix. 28: éyévero...dce) jucpar duro, it came to pass, about eight days after the sayings.
Such cases may possibly be resolved into ellipsis, as, in the former case, of the substantive verb; in the latter, of some such word as didoTqua, interval, the true Subject of éyévero; and in apposition with judpa.
Some so-called “ suspended Nominatives” are really instances of appo- sition. Thus (Mark vi. 40), mpacial mpastal, rank by rank, is in apposition with the Subject of avémecor. t
In ver. 39, cvumdora is in the Accusative in apposition with mdvras.
243. The Nominative is sometimes elliptically used, as in the cases following :— a. The Nominative after the adverb i8ov, behold.
Matt. iil, 17: i800, avi ex rav odpavay, behold (there was heard) a voice from the heavens.
Heb. ii. 13: i80b éyd cai ra mou8la, «.7.A., Behold (here am) J, and the children which thou hast given me.
* In both passages the ordinary text has juépas, the usual case in such construction. (See § 286.) But all critical editions give the Nominative. t See Rev. T. 8S. Green’s ‘‘Greek Testament Grammar,” p. 86.
224 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE CASE. [§ 243.
6. The word 8vopa, introducing the name of a person or place, is generally found in the Dative, évéuar, by name. (See § 280.) Occasionally, however, it occurs in the Nominative, with the name as predicate and the copula omitted. So John i. 6, éyévero
avOporos ... 8vopa airod "Iwdvyys, there was a man... his name (was) Jobn.
Luke xxiv. 13: eis xouny... 9 Svopa "Eupaovs, to a village ... whose name (was) Emmaus.
ce. A peculiar Nominative phrase is used in the Revelation as an indeclinable noun, equivalent to the Hebrew name J EHOVAR (ch. 1 4), dws 6 dv Kal & qv Kal 6 épxdpevos, from Him who is, and who was, and who cometh.
244, The use of the Nominative for the Vocative has been already noted, § 228, where see Examples.
The usage is in fact elliptical, the true Vocative being in the personal pronoun, ov or ipeis, omitted: Thou... who art! or ye... who are |
Matt. vii. 23: droywpetre ... of épyatspevor tiv dvopiav, depart (ye who are) the workers of wniquity |
Mark xiv. 36: d88a 6 warhp, Abba (Thou, who art) the Father /
So when the Nominative adjective is in apposition with the Vocative case.
Rom. ii. 1: & dvépare, was 6 xplvov, O man! (thou) who judgest, (I mean) every one !
In Luke xii. 20, the Article is omitted, “Agpwv, and, accordingly, we must understand, not a direct address, as E.V., Thou fool/ but an exclamation, ‘‘ How foolish thou art!” A parallel instance is to be found in Romans vii. 24: radralawpos éyh dvOpwros, O wretched man that I am! and xi, 33, & Bd6os rAodbrov, O the depth of the riches !
245. With the Vocative proper, the interjection & is employed, chiefly in vehement expressions.
Matt. xv. 28: & yivas, peydAn cov 7 ricris, O woman, great is thy faith !
§ 245.] THE VOCATIVE CASE. | 225
Acts xiii. 10: & wdfpys mavros déXov, O full of all deceit ! Gal. iii. 1: 6 dvéqyrot Taddérat, O foolish Galatians !
Sometimes, however, the interjection is employed (as in classical Greek) where no special vehemence is intended. So Acts i. 1, xviii. 14 But in such cases & is more usually omitted (Luke xxii. 57; Acts i. 16, xiii, 15, xxvii. 25).
Tux: GENITIVE.
246. The Genitive Case (see § 11) primarily signifies motion from, answering to our question, Whence ? From this general meaning arise many modifications, including the several notions expressed in English by the prepositions of or from.
24'7. These modifications may be classed under the following heads :*
1. Origin. 4, Partition. 2. Separation. 5. Object. 3. Possession. 6. Relation.
7. The Genitive Absolute.
The Genitive with Prepositions will be treated of hereafter. (See § 291, seq.)
I. Origin.
248. The Genitive is often used after substantives, to mark the source or author.
1 Thess. i. 3: pynpovevovres tuav tod epyou Tis mlorews Kai Tov kdrou Ths &yamns Kal THs tropovas THs EdwlSos, remembering your work
* These significations are again reduced, by Dr. Donaldson and others, to three :— :
1. Ablation. 2. Partition. 3. Relation. The name of the case, yeh, designates it as expressive of the genus to
which anything is referred, whether as belonging to it or classed under it
(Max Miller) ; or, according to others, the source from which it is generated, or suxposed to spring.
226 THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. [§ 248.
of faith, and labour of love, and endurance of hope, t.e., the work springing from faith, the labour prompted by love, the endurance sustained by hope.
2 Cor. xi. 26: xivdivors worapdv Kal Anorav, in dangers of rivers and robbers, t.e., occasioned by them.
Romans iv. 13: did dicatcootvns twictews, through the righteousness of faith.
Romans xv. 4: ris wapaxkjnoews Tv ypapadv, the comfort of the Scriptures.
Col. i, 23: dd rijs eAmidos Tot ebayyedlov, from the hope of the Gospel.
Col. ii. 12: dia ris ricrewas Ths evepyelas rod Cecod, through the Jaith of the mighty working of God, i.e., mightily wrought by him.
249. The Genitive, after many verbs expressive of sense or mental affections of various kinds, indicates the source from which the sensation or affection proceeds.
The full force of the Genitive is evident also in these cases. Thus, to smell a flower, really means to receive a certain impression from the flower. Compare the ordinary phrase, to taste of different viands. In another use, the object of sense itself becomes subject of the verb, and its quality is expressed by the following Genitive, as this rose smells of musk.
Again, to recollect is to remind myself of the object of thought ; the influence being regarded as passing from the object to the person. In
like manner may be explained the phrases denoting other mental affections,
a. Verbs of Sense. (1) dxova, to hear:
Mark ix. 7; Luke ix. 35: atrod axotvere, Hear him!
John x. 3: ra mpdBara ris bovis adrov dkove, the sheep hear his vorce.
Luke xv. 25: jeovce cuppavlas cai xopadv, he heard music and dancing.
It will be seen that this verb is construed with a Genitive either of the person or the thing. Generally, however, the thing is in the Accu-
§ 249,] THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. 227
sative, as the immediate object (especially Adyov, Adyous, Matt. vii. 24, xiii. 20, &c.) When both are expressed together, the thing is in the Accusative, and the person in the Genitive (Acts i. 4); sometimes with a preposition (2 Cor. xii. 6; Acts x. 22). The Genitive of the thing probably inclines to the partitive sense. Compare Acts ix. 7, where of Saul’s companions it is said, dxotovtes ths pwrijs, hearing the voicc, with ch. xxii. 9, Thy pwrhv od Hxovoay, they heard not the voice. They heard of the voice, i.¢., its sound, but not what it said.
(2) yevoua, to taste:
Luke xiv. 24: oddeis... yedoerai pou tod Selmvov, no one shall taste of my supper.
Mark ix. 1: od py yetoorta Oavarov, shall by no means taste death, So Luke ix. 27 ; John viii. 52; Heb. it 9.
In Heb. vi. 4, 5, the Genitive and Accusative are used in
successive clauses, yevoauévous Tis Swpeis, having tasted of the Gift ; yevoapevous Ccod papa, having tasted the word of God.*.
(3) Oiyyave, to touch:
Heb. xii. 20: kav @npiov Oiyn rot 8pous, and even if a beast touch the mountain. So xi. 28.
Wnraddw, to handle, to touch. closely, governs the Accusative (Luke xxiv. 39; Acts xvii. 27; 1 Johni. 1). ‘*The mount that might be touched” (Heb. xii. 18), where this word is used, does not contradict v. 20, as it simply refers to the nature of the mountain, palpable or ‘* material,”
b. Verbs expressive of mental affections; as desire, caring for, despising;
Acts xx. 33: dpyuplov 4 xpuclov 4 iparicpod obdevds éemeddunoa, I desired no one’s silver or gold or raiment.
* Mr. Jelf (Kiihner’s Greek Grammar) explains the difference simply as a variation in the mode of expression; the Accusative calling attention rather to the action, the Genitive to the materiul, as in English, ‘‘ He eats some meat” (Gen.); ‘‘He eats meat” (Acc.). Bengel’s view of this passage is more subtle. ‘‘*The gift,’” he says, ‘‘can be only oavtialiy received in this life; while ‘the Word’ essentially belongs to us now.” But see Alford’s note, comparing the Accusative with that in John ii. 9.
%
2s THE GENITIVE OF ORIGIN. [§ 249.
Titus iii. 8: wa porrifwor kadav tpywv, that they may be zealous of (careful to maintain, E.V.) good works.
1 Tim. iii. 5: was exxdAnolas Meod exieAjnoerat, how shall he care Sor the church of God ?
Heb. xii. 5: pi) ddvyoper wadelas Kupiov, do not slight the chastise- ment of the Lord.
c. Verbs of remembrance and forgetting:
Luke xvii. 32: pvnpovedere ris yovaids Adr, remember Lot's wife.
Heb. xii. 5: ekdAnobe ris mwapaxdhcews, ye have forgotten the exhortation.
Many grammarians prefer to class the Genitive after all these verbs under the head of ‘‘ Partition.” (See § 261, seq.)
250. Verbs of accusing, condemning, &c., take a Genitive of the charge, 7.¢., of the source of the accusation.
Acts xix. 40: éyxadeicba ordcews, to be accused of sedition.
The Genjtive of the person is used after xarnyopéw, to accuse, lit., “to assert against one.”
Matt. xii. 10: iva xarnyopnowow atbrod, that they might accuse Him.
251. Adjectives and Verbs signifying plenty, want, fulness, and the like, are followed by a Genitive of that from which another is filled, &
John i. 14: wAnpns xdprtos Kal GAndelas, full of grace and truth.
John xxi. 11: 7d dikrvoy... pecriv tyObov, the net .. full of fishes.
Luke i. 53: mwewavras évérdnoev dyaddv, He filled the hungry with good things.
John ii. 7 : yeuioare ras idpias U8aros, fill the water-pots with water.
Romans iii. 23: mdvres borepodvra tris Ségns rod Ccov, all come short of the glory of God.
James i. 5: ef ris tyadv eimerat codias, if any of you lacketh wisdom.
This Genitive is referred by some to the head of ‘‘ Separation ;” by others to ‘ Partition.”
§ 252. ] | THE GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. 229
II. Separation, or Ablation
4o4. Verbs or separation, as those denoting removal, difference, hindrance, and the like, take a Genitive as the case of their secondary object. (See § 186.)
Prepositions, however, are more generally inserted.
Luke xvi. 4: grav peracra0S ris oikovoplas, when I shall have been displaced from my stewardship.
Acts xxvii. 43: éxdducev adrods Tod BovAfparos, he hindered them Srom their purpose.
Eph. ii. 12: danAdorpropévor this wodvrelas rod "Iapand, alienated from the commonwealth of Israel.
1 Tim. i. 6: dy rives doroxnoavres, from which some having gone wide in aim.* 1 Pet. iv. 1: wéravrat Gpaprias, he hath ceased from sin.
253. Under this head may be placed the important rule, that’ the object of comparison is expressed by the Genitive, whether after verbs, or, more usually, after adjectives in the comparative degree.
See on the Comparative, § 320. This Genitive, also, is one of Sepa- ration ; the two things compared being mentally set apart from each other. So in Latin, the Ablative case is employed.t
When the word than is expressed in Greek (by the conjunction %), the things compared are put in apposition.
i. Verbs: 1 Cor. xv. 41: dornp dorépos diapeper, star differeth from star.
* Ellicott.
~ The Hebrew language yet more clearly identifies comparison and sepa- ration, by its use of the preposition from with the simple adjective. “Thus, ‘* oreater than he” would be expressed by the phrase, ‘‘ great from him ;” the Hebrews ‘‘conceiving pre-eminence as a taking out, a designating froin the multitude” (Gesenius). So is Homer, é« mévtwrv, more than all. ty modern Greek, the preposition awd is used after the comparative.
230 THE GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. L§ 253.
The verb d:apépw often implies superiority. Matt. x. 31: woAdAdy orpovdlay Siapépere Syeis, ye are beter than many sparrows.
So vi. 26, xii. 12; Luke xii. 7, 24; Gal. iv. 1, ‘fis no better than a slave.”
ii, Adjectives in the Comparative degree:
John xiii. 16: od« fore S0dd0s pellwv Tod Kuplov, a servant is not greater than his master.
John xxi. 15: dyands pe meiov totrwv ; lovest thou me more than these ?
1 Tim, v. 8: gorw dalerov yeipwr, he is worse than an unbeliever.
The subject of comparison is sometimes repeated by sie nun in the object.
Mark iv. 31: puxpdrepos wévtav tv omeppdrov, less than all the seeds, although itself a seed.
1 Cor, xiii. 13: peifav robrav 4 dydmn, love is greater than these ; love, nevertheless, being one of the three.
A comparative and superlative are combined in Eph. iii. 8, so that the following Genitive may be referred to this rule or to the partitive con- struction: éuol r@ éAaxioTorépy wdvTwrv Tay dylwy, to me, who am less than the least of all the saints.
III. Possession.
254. The most frequent use of the Genitive is as the Possessive Case, generally with substantives.
Here, also, the fundamental meaning of the case as denoting whence is very apparent. From the notion of origination, by an easy transition, comes that of possession. Thus, ‘‘the sons of Zebedee” may be taken as ‘‘ the sons begotten by Zebedee,” or ‘‘ the sons belonging to Zebedee ;” **the kingdom of heaven” may mean ‘‘ the kingdom se¢ up by heavenly powers,” or ‘‘the kingdom governed by these powers.” So, again, the notion of ‘‘belonging to” attaches to the Genitive where that of ‘‘originated by” has disappeared. *
* Compare Miiller’s ‘* Lectures on the Science of Language,” Vol. L, p. 105.
§ 254. | THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 221
Mark i. 29: #dGov eds thy oikiay Xlpovos kai “Av8péov, they came into the house of Simon and Andrew.
Romans i. 1: Haidos Soddos “Inoot Xpirrot, Paul a servant of Jesus Christ.
255. The Genitives of the personal pronouns are mostly employed in this sense instead of the possessive adjectival forms. So 4 Ovydrnp pov, my daughter; of pabnrai adtrod, his disciples. (See § 333.)
256. Words denoting kindred, &c., are often omitted before a Possessive Genitive, especially when they would stand in appo- sition with a proper name. Sometimes the Article of the omitted noun is inserted. (See §§ 194, 196.)
1. vids, Matt. iv. 21: "IdkwBov rdv rod ZeBedaiov, James the (son) of Zebedee.
John vi. 71: rov lovdav Sipwvos, (the) Judas (son) of Simon.
John xxi. 15, 16, 17: Sipev Iwva, Simon (son) of Jonas.
2. warip. Acts vil. 16: "Eupop red Svyéu, Hamor the (father) of Shechem.
3. parnp. Luke xxiv. 10: Mapia "laxk®Bov, Mary the (mother) of James. So Mark xv. 47, xvi. 1.
4. d8eabds. Luke vi. 16; Acts i. 13: “Iovdas "IlaxdBov, Judas (the brother) of James ; as expressed, Jude 1. 45. yor. Matt. 1. 6: ék rijs rod Odpiov, from the (wife) of Uriah. So John xix, 25,
6. otkeor. 1 Cor. i, 11: td r&v XAdns, by the (kinsfolk) of Chloe.
7. otkos or Spa. Mark v. 35: dard rod dpywrvvaydyov, from (the house) of the ruler of the synagogue. This is clear, as the ruler was himself with Jesus. So, perhaps, John xviii. 28.
Acts i. 27, 31: cis ddov, “ thou wilt not abandon my soul” to 8
232 THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. [LS 256.
(the habitations) of Hades ; a classical phrase ; or, “ to (the power) of the unseen world.” In Ps. xvi. 10, some copies of the LXX. read gdov, others ddnv. In Luke ii. 49, ev trois rod marpés pov have been variously read, in my Father’s business, or in my Father's house (plural, as in John xix. 27, 7a Sia). The former gives the wider significance : ‘among my Father’s
matters” (Alford). So all the versions of the English Hexapla, Luther, De Weite.
257. Attribute or quality is often expressed by the Possessive Genitive of an abstract substantive.
In such cases the person or thing is spoken of as belonging to the virtue, vice, or other abstraction. The phrase may often be idiomatically rendered by turning the Genitive into an adjective. Thus, Luke xvi. 8, tu oixdvouov Tis adiclas, the steward of injustice, may be read the unjust steward. But such renderings lose the force of the original.
Rom. i. 26 : md6y druslas, lusts of dishonour.
Heb. ix. 10: dixaopara vdpxos, ordinances of flesh.
1 Pet. i 2: & dyacpd mvebparos, “in sanctification of spirit, “a spiritual sanctification.”
James i. 25: dxpoaris émAnrpovijs, a hearer of forgetfulness, “a torgetful hearer.”
James ii. 4: xperai Stakoyicpav rovnpadv, judges of evil thoughks, evyil-thinking judges.”
258. To the strictly Possessive Genitive belong several phrases which have been otherwise interpreted—
2 Cor. iv. 6: ris yréoews tis B6tns Tod Oeod, of the knowledge of the glory of God, i.e, the glory which belongs to God, and which He reveals in Christ; not, certainly, ‘‘the glorious God.”
Eph. i. 6: eis trawvov Sdkns Tis xdpitos abrod, to the praise of the glory of His grace, i.e., the glory which characterizes Divine grace; not ** glorious praise” or ‘‘ glorious grace.”’
Col. i. 11: nara 1rd Kpdros tis Sdtns, according to the power of His glory ; ‘‘not ‘his glorious power’ (Auth., Beza, &c.), but ‘the power which is the peculiar characteristic of His glory ;’ the Genitive belong- ing to the category of the Pussessive Genitive” (Ellicott).
§ 258. ] THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 233
Heb. i. 3: 7H phuati ris Suvduews adrod, by the word of His power ; belonging to it, as its true utterance, ‘‘not,” says Alford, ‘‘to be weakened into the comparatively unmeaning ‘by His powerful word.’”
See also Rom. vii. 24; Col. i. 13; Rev. iii. 10.
959. The Genitive is occasionally used by way of apposition, as if with some such ellipsis as consisting of, or bearing the name of. Compare the English idiom, the City of Jerusalem, where Jeru- salem is the city.
This rule is an exception to the ordinary construction. The usual idiom in Greek is the city, Jerusalem.
2 Pet. ii. 6: médes LoSdpov kal Toudppas, (the) cities of Sodom and Gomorrah.
John ii. 21: epi rot vacd rod cadparos atrod, concerning the temple . of his body.
Rom. iv. 11: onpetov “aBe meprropfjs, he received the sign of cir- cumeision. So Acts iv. 22.
2 Cor. v. 1: 4 otkia rod oKivovs, the house of (our) tabernacle.
2 Cor. v. 5: tov &ppaPava rot IIveiparos, the earnest of the Spirit. So ch. i, 22. Compare Romans viii. 23.*
See also Eph. vi. 14-16 ; Heb. vi. 1 ; and many other passages.
The difficult phrase, Eph. iv. 9, eis ra nkarérepa tis ys, has by many interpreters been regarded as an instance of the Genitive of Apposition : **to the lower earth,” ‘‘to earth beneath,” contrasted with such phrases as ‘*the height of heaven” (Isa. xiv. 14). See Bishop Ellicott’s note, in which the opposite view (the descent into Hades) is maintained.
260. Position of the Genitive.
a. The Genitive is usually placed after the governing noun.
When both nouns have the Article, each.is usually preceded by its own. In classic Greek, the Article of the governing noun usually stands first in the phrase ; then the governed Article and Genitive ; and lastly, _
* «The first fruits (of our inheritance) consisting of the Holy Spirit” (Dr. Vaughan on Rom. viii. 23. So Winer.
234 THE POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. [s 260.
the governing noun. This arrangement is very rarely followed in the New Testament: 1 Pet. iii. 20, 7 rod Ocod paxpodvula, the long-suffering of God; Heb. xii. 2, tov tis xictews apxnydv, the author of the faith. Occasionally the Article of the governing noun is repeated before the Genitive ; also a classic idiom (see § 196), 1 Cor. i. 18, 6 Adyos 6 tov otaupod, the doctrine of the Cross.
b. But the Genitive precedes—
1. When one Genitive belongs to more than one substantive—
Acts iii. 7: adrod ai Baces nal ra opupd, his feet and ankle-bones.
2. When the word in the Genitive is emphatic. The emphasis may arise—
(a) From antithesis—
Phil. ii. 25: tov cvorpariétyy pov, tuav Se ardatrorov, my fellow- soldier, but your messenger. See also Eph. vi. 9; Heb. vii. 22, &c.
(0) From the Genitive containing the principal notion—
Rom. xi. 13: é@vév amdcrodos, apostle of Gentiles. See also
1 Cor. iii. 9; Titus i. 7; James i. 26, &c.
In Heb. vi. 2, Barricuady ddaxjjs, it has been questioned which word is the governing one, doctrine of baptisms, or, baptisms of doctrine. Winer favours the latter (Grammar, § xxx. 3, note 4).
LV. Partition.
261. Closely connected with the fundamental notion of the Genitive is that of participation. The part is taken from the whole.
1 Pet. i. 1: éxdexrois mapemdnpors Siaeropas, to elect sojourners of (the) dispersion.
Matt. xv. 24: ra mpdara ra drodwddra otkov "Iopand, the lost sheep of the house of Israel.
262. This Genitive is most commonly found after partitive adjectives, the indefinite and interrogative pronouns, with the numerals, and adjectives in the superlative degree.
Partitive Adjectives.
Matt. iii. 7: moAdods tav Papiralwv cal LadSovkatov, many of the Phariszes and Sadducees.
WS *
§ 262.] THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 230
Luke xix. 8: ra fpion trav twapydvrav the half (halves) of my goods.
Acts xvii. 12: av8pav otk ddtyor, of men not a few.
Matt. xv. 37: 1d mepiccedov tev KAacpdrov, the remaining (part)
of the broken pieces, Pronouns.
Matt. ix. 3: rivés trav ypapparéwv, some of the Scribes. Acts v. 15: émoxidon tivi airav, might overshadow any of them.
Luke x. 36: ris ody totrav, which, then, of these ?
Numerals—Cardinal, Ordinal, Negative. Matt. v. 29: év trav peddv cov, one of thy members. Acts x. 7: qavicas Sto tav olkerdy, having called two of the domestics. Rey. viii. 7: 1d tpirov tis ys, the third of the land. . So vv. 8-18. Mark xi. 2: oddels avOpdrav, lit., no one of men.
But the preposition é« is more frequently used after numeral adjec-
tives. Superlatives.
1 Cor. xv. 9: 6 éAdyioros tév dtorrdédov, the least of the apostles.
263. Verbs of partaking are followed by a Genitive.
1 Cor. x. 21: rpamé{ns Kupiov peréyeww, to partake of the table of the Lord. Once this verb is found with éx, ver. 17.
Heb. ii. 14: ra waidia Kexowdvnxe capkds Kal aiparos, the children are partakers of flesh and blood. This verb is found also with a Dative, Rom. xv. 27; 1 Tim. v. 22; 1 Pet. iv. 13; 2 John 11.
Heb. xii. 10: peradaBeiv tis dyérntos airod, to partake his holiness.
264. So also verbs which signify to take hold of, to attain, when a part is implied.
236 THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. [S$ 264.
Luke xx. 35: rod aldavos éxelvov ruxeiv, to attain that world. Luke viii. 54: xparqoas tis xepds aizjs, having taken hold of her hand.
The strictly partitive sense is well illustrated by this verb. When the whole is grasped, xparéw takes an Accusative, as in Matt. xiv. 3, &c.
Some verbs of this class are followed in the Middle voice by a partitive Genitive, whereas in the Active they would take an Accusative.
Matt. vi. 24: rod évds dvOéEera, he will cleave to the one.
Matt. xiv. 31: éreddBero atrod, he took hold of him.
For the force of the Middle, see § 355. ‘‘ Holding one’s self by the given object” is implied.
265. Adverbs of time are followed by a partitive Genitive. Matt. xxviii. 1: dpeé d¢ caBBdrav, and late upon the sabbath.
Mark xvi. 2: dlav mpot Tis pds caBBdror, very early on the first day of the week.
Heb. ix. 7: draé rod évavrod, once in the year.
So Luke xvii. 4, xviii. 12. Compare the English colloquialism, late of an evening.
266. Certain Genitive phrases are used, in the partitive sense, to denote time or place.
So Matt. ii. 14: vuerds, by night; Luke xviii. 7: tpépas xai vuxrés, day and night; Gal. vi. 17: rod Aovwod, for the rest (future); Luke v. 19: molas (5300) civevéyxwow adrdév, by what (way) they might bring him i.
Prepositions are, however, more generally employed to define these relations.
267. The verb to be is often followed by a Genitive in the partitive sense, Heb. x. 39: ipeis 8€ odk eopey tmorrodfs... ddAa mlotews, but we are not of a desertion (literally), but of faith.
\
§ 267. | THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 237
Rom. ix. 9: érayyeAlas yap 6 Adyos obros, for this word (is) one of promise.
The Genitive in this connexion may, however, have other signifi- cations, as, e.g., that of Possession—
1 Cor. iii. 21: wdvra duav eat, all things are yours.
1 Cor. vi. 19: ob« éoré Eavtay, ye are not your own.
In general, the verb to be, followed by a Genitive, implies an ellipsis, such as part, characteristic, property, &c.
V. Object.
268. The Genitive case is often objectively employed,* that is, it expresses the object of ‘some feeling or action, and may be rendered by various prepositions, as below.
The fundamental meaning of the Genitive is here also very apparent, — the object of a sentiment being, in another view of it, the source or occasion of its existence. Thus @xere rior @cod (Mark xi. 22), have faith in (or towards) God, really means, ‘‘have such faith as His character excites.” Compare Col. ii. 12.
Luke vi. 12: év ri mpocevx4 rod Gcot, in prayer to God.t
John ii. 17: & £4dos rod otkov cou, the zeal concerning thy house ; compare Titus ii 14.
John xvii. 2: e&ovetavy méons capxds, power over all flesh. For similar constructions of ¢fovcia, see Matt. x. 1; Mark vi. 7; 1 Cor. ix. 12.
Acts iv. 9: edepyertq avOpdirov dobevots, for a benefit conferred on an impotent man.
Heb. xi. 26: dv dvaduepdv rod Xpirrod, the reproach in con- nexion with the Christ (as the hope of Israel),
1 Pet. 11.19 : d1a cvvelBqorw Oecd, on account of conscience toward
God.
* Compare Angus’s ‘‘ Handbook to the English Language,” § 384.
t Some, less naturally, interpret the phrase, in the place of prayer to God, comparing the passage with Acts xvi. 13, ‘‘where there was accus- tomed to be prayer,” as E.V., Alford; a place of prayer, Neander, Meyer, Hackett, &c. ;
238 _ ‘THE OBJECTIVE GENITIVE. —_—«([§ 268.
Rom. x. 2: tidov Ocotd Zyovarv, they have a zeal toward God.
2 Cor. x. 5: eis tiv traxohv rot Xpicrrod, to the obedience ren- dered to Christ. But itmaxoh mliorews, Rom. i. 5, is obedience springing from faith.
Col. ii. 18: Opyoxeta trav dyyAov, worship paid to angels. (See Ellicott, 2 loc.)
269. Some phrases are susceptible of either a possessive (attributive, subjective), or an objective signification, Thus, 4 Gyarn Ocot, the love of God, may mean, the love which God possesses as His attribute, that which He bears to us, or that which is borne towards Him. A few important passages may be subjoined by way of illustration.
Passages with aydrn and a subjective Genitive—
2 Cor. xiii. 13: the love of God ... be with you.
Rom. viii. 35: what shall separate us from the love of Christ ?— So ver. 39.
Eph. iii. 19: to know the love of Christ which passeth knowledge.
2 Cor. v. 14: the love of Christ constraineth us. Not our love to Christ, but His love to us.
In the following, the Genitive seems objectively used—
John v. 42: ye have not the love of God in you. So 1 John ii. 15. 1 John ii. 5: in him is the love of God perfected. 2 Thess. iii. 5: the Lord direct your hearts into the love of God.
In Romans v. 5, ‘‘the love of God is shed abroad in our hearts,” Dr, Vaughan writes of the subjective and objective interpretations, that the two ideas may be included. See 1 John iv. 16, v. 3: ‘‘the two are but opposite aspects of the same love; the sense of God’s love is not the cause only, but the essence of ours. 1 John iv. 19.” m
2 Cor. v. 11; eliéres tov péBov Tod Kuplov, knowing the fear of the Lord, generally taken as subjective, as E.V., ‘‘the terror of the Lord,” belonging to Him as Judge; but everywhere else the phrase is objective—fear, i.¢., reverence towards Him. So Alford renders here, conscious of the fear of the Lord; but doubtfully. For other passages, see Acts ix. 31; Rom. iii. 18; 2 Cor. vii. 1; Eph. v. 21.
§ 270.] THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. 239
VI. Relation.
270. Closely connected with the objective use of the Genitive are cases where a more general relation is signified ; some such prepositional phrase as in respect of being applicable, while’ the context shows the kind of relation intended.
This general way of expressing relation is often not so much ambiguous as comprehensive. Thus, in the frequent phrase, 7d evayyeAtov ToD Xpiotov, the Gospel of Christ, it is needless to ask whether the meaning be the Gospel from Christ as its author,* about Christ as its subject, t or in the prerogative of Christ as its administrator.t Each
- of these thoughts is but one element in the analysis of the phrase.
Mark i. 4: Banricpa petavolas, a baptism which had reference to repentance.
John v. 29: dvdoracw tos... dvacracw Kploews, resurrection in order to life ... in order to condemnation.
John vii. 35: thy diaomopay tév “EdAjvav, the dispersion (of the Jews) among the Greeks (Gentiles. )
Romans v. 18: dcxaiwow fofjs, justification in order to life. Romans viii. 36: mpdé8ara chayfs, sheep doomed to slaughter.
Rom. vii. 2: dad rod vdpou tod av8pds, the law of the ogee i.¢., that which defines the relation.§
Rom, xiii. 3: pdBos trav dyabdv epyov, w terror in respect to good works.
Ephes. iv. 16: dca mdons adis Tis emcxopynylas, through every joint (which is) for the purpose of the supply. See Ellicott, in loc., who compares the phrase with ra oxevn rijs hecroupyias, Heb. ix. 21, the vessels of the ministering.
* So the Gospel of God, Rom. i. 1, &e.
+ Compare the phrase, Gospel of the Kingdom, Matt. iv. 23, ix. 35.
t In the language of the Apostle Paul, my Gospel is evidently the Gospel entrusted to and preached by me, Rom. ii. 16; xvi. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 8.
§ See Winer, who quotes Old Testament parallels, Lev. vii. 1; xiv. 2, xv. 32; Numb. vi. 13, 21.
240. THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. [§ 270.
Phil. iv. 9: & Oeds tis eiphyys, the God who bestows peace, or perhaps a Genitive of quality.
In most of these instances, a preposition with its case would be an equally idiomatic usage.
271. The Genitive is also used after adjectives, as after nouns (§ 256), to denote various kinds of relation. Examples of this in the general sense are such as the foHowing :—
Heb. v. 13: diretpos Adyou Sixavooivns, unskilled in respect of the word of righteousness.
Heb. iii. 12: xapdia movnpa &morias, a heart wicked in respect tu unbelief (Winer).
James i. 13: dmeipacros kaxdv, unversed in things evil (Alford).
272. Adjectives, especially, signifying worthiness, fitness, or their opposites, take a following Genitive. So also their adverbs,
Matt. ili. 8: xaprov dguov ris peravolas, fruit meet for repentance.
Matt. x. 10: dguos 6 epydrns tis tpodis airod, the workman is worthy of his maintenance.
1 Cor. vi. 2: dvdguol gore kpurnplov edaxistev, are ye unworthy of (incompetent the least decisions ?
Rom. xvi. 2: dgias trav dylov, “worthily (in a manner becoming) the holy,” “as anges ele saints,” E.V.
See also Eph. iv. 1; Phil. i. 27; Col. i. 10; 1 Thess. i, 12; 3 John 6.
273. So, in general, price, AEH, penalty, and oe like, are expressed by the Genitive.
Matt. x. 29: oixi dv0 orpovbia Gooaplov mwdcira; are not two sparrows sold for a farthing ? Rev. vi. 6: xotné cirov Syvaplov Kal rpets xolvixes KpiOdv Syvaptov,
a measure of wheat for a denarius, and three measures of barley For a denarius.
ie ya
§ 274.] THE GENITIVE OF RELATION. 241
274. In a few instances, one noun governs two Genitives in different relations.
Acts v. 32: qucts oper abrod udptupes tdy pnudtwr totrwr, we are his (possess. ) witnesses of (remote obj.), or in respect to, these things.
2 Cor. v. 1: 4 émiyeos judv oikla Tod oxhvouvs, our (possess.) earthly house of the tabernacle (appos. )
Phil. ii. 80: 7d duav borépnua tis Aetroupylas, your lack in respect of the service.
2 Pet. iii, 2: rijs Tév drootdéAwy Suey évtorrs Tod Kuplov, the command- ment of the Lord (orig.), given by (remote obj.) your apostles. ‘The ordinary reading has juav, but even then the reading of E. V. is inad- missible.
The two Genitives in John vi. 1, 7 O@dAacoa ris TadsAalas, ris TiBe- piddos, are virtually in apposition, the sea of Galilee (as the Jews call it), of Tiberias (as the Gentiles), one name denoting the country, the other the city. So we might say, ‘‘the Lake of the Four Cantons, of Lucerne.”
The dependence of successive Genitives on each other is frequent, as many foregoing examples will show.
VII. The Genitive Absolute.
275. A Genitive noun, in agreement with a participle expressed or understood, often occurs in a subordinate sentence absolutely, 2.e., Without immediate dependence on any other words. The noun, in these cases, is to be translated first, without a preposition, then the participle. In idiomatic English, a conjunction must often be supplied.
It will be observed that the Genitive in this construction refers to some other than the Subject of the principal sentence.
Equivalent idioms are in English the nominative absolute, in Latin the ablative absolute.
Matt. 1. 18: punorevdelons ... Mapias, Mary having been betrothed.
Matt. i. 20: radra 8€ atrod evbupndévros, and he having reflected on these things, 2.¢., when he reflected.
Matt. i. 1: rod “Inood yevvndévros, Jesus having been born, 1.¢., when Jesus was born, .
242 THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. [§ 275.
Matt. ii. 13: dvaxopnodvrav $¢ airav, and they having departed, t.e., when they departed.
Matt. xvii. 9: karaBawdvrev airav ek rod dpous, they descending _ from the mountain, i.e., while they were descending.
Heb. iv. 1: xaraderopévns érayyedlas, a promise being (still) left. (See Alford’s note.) é‘
The Genitive Absolute, says Dr. Donaldson, is originally causal, in conformity with the primary notion of the case. Hence arise, by way of analogy, its other uses as denoting accessories of time, manner, or circumstance. The tense of the participle greatly determines the force of the phrase. (See § 393.)
Tue DaAtIve.
276. In its primary local sense (see § 11), the Dative implies juxtaposition.* Hence the various modifications of its meaning, which may be classed as follows :—
1. Association. 3. Reference. 2. Transmission. 4, Accessory.
The Dative in a sentence is generally an indirect complement of the Predicate, or “remote object.” (See § 186.)
I. Association.
277. a. Verbs signifying intercourse, companionship, and’ the like, are often followed by a Dative.
Matt. ix. 9: dxodovder por, follow me.
Luke xv. 15: éxodAj6n evi rev rodurv, he attached himself to one
of the citizens. Acts xxiv. 26: dpitea atte, he conversed with him.
* The Greek Dative is therefore diametrically opposed to the Genitive. 1. The latter signifies separation, the former proximity. 2. The latter denotes subtraction, the former addition. 3. The latter expresses com- parison of different things, the former equality, or sameness. — Dr.
Donaldson,
§ 277.] THE DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION. 243
Rom. vii. 2: dv&pl dedera, she is bound to a husband,
James iv. 8: éyyicare TH OcG, kal eyyet dpiv, draw near to God, and he will draw near to you.
6. Likeness, fitness, equality, and their opposites, are marked by a Dative after adjectives and verbs.
Matt. xxiii. 27: dpoudfere Taos Kexoviapévors, ye are like unto whated sepulchres.
Luke xiii. 18: rive éuormow airnv; to what shall I liken it ?
James i. 6: Core Kdt8ovi Gadacons, he is like w wave of the sea.
Eph. v. 3: xades mpérer aylous, as it becometh saints.
Matt. xx. 12: tcous iptv adrovs émoinoas, thou madest them equal with us. :
c. After a substantive verb, the Dative often denotes possession or property.
Matt. xviii. 12: dav yévnrai ti avOpdrw éxardv rpdBara, if a man have (if there be to any man) a hundred sheep.
Acts vill. 21: otk gore wou pepis ovde kdijpos ev Th Ady ToiT@, thow hast not (there is to thee) part nor lot in this matter.
The verb is sometimes omitted.
2 Cor. vi. 14: ris yap peroxy Stxatorivy kal dvople, for what participation have righteousness and iniquity ?
Il. Zvransmission.
278. a. Verbs of giving, whether active or passive, are fol- lowed by a Dative of the person.
After the active verb, the thing (Accusative) is the direct, the person (Dative) the indirect object. (See § 186.)
Matt. vii. 6: py) ddre rd dyoy Tots Kol, give not that which is holy to the dogs.
Matt. vii. 7 : atreire, kai Sodncerat iptv, ask, and it shall be given unto you.
244 THE DATIVR OF TRANSMISSION. [§ 278.
Rom. i. 11: ta rt peTad@ yxapiopa tpiv mvevparixdy, that I may impart to you some spiritual gift.
Heb. ii. 5: od yap dyyé&ous inéraée rhv olkovpévny tiv péddovear, Sor he did not subject the world to come unto angels.
6. The Dative also indicates the receiver of information, tidings, command. So in the common A€y iptv, J say unto you.
Matt, xiii. 3: eAdAncev adrots mo\dd, he spake many things to them. -
1 Cor. v. 9: eypaya iptv ev rij émiorodj, J wrote (or have written) to you in my letter.
Luke iv. 18: evayyehicacba wroxois, to preach glad tidings to the poor; LXX., Isa. ]xi. 1 (also with Accusative).
Acts i. 2: évreiXduevos tots drorrédots, having given command- ment to the apostles.
But xedrevo, to order, governs the Accusative,
c. Words denoting assistance, succour, &c., are followed by a Dative.
Matt. iv. 11: kai diunxdvovy aito, and they ministered unto him. Matt. xv. 25: Kupie, Bonber por, Lord, help me /
d. The object of a mental affection, as esteem, anger, worship, &c., also obedience and faith, is often expressed by a Dative.
The Genitive in a similar connexion expresses the source of the feeling. (See § 249.)
But the construction with prepositions is generally preferred, as giving additional precision and emphasis.
Matt. vi. 25: pi) pepypvare th Wuxf, care not for your life. So Luke xii. 22. But with epi, Matt. vi. 28, Luke xii. 26; with imép, 1 Cor. xii. 25; with Accusative, 1 Cor. vii. 32-34.
Matt. v. 22: 6 dpyfopevos re 48eA6G, he who is angry with his brother.* With eri, Rev. xii. 17.
* The following word cixj, without a cause, should probably be omitted, Lachmann, Tischendorf, &c.
§ 278.] THE DATIVE OF TRANSMISSION. 945
Gal. i. 10: Cyra évOpdros dpéoxew 3 do I seck to please men ?
Matt. ii. 2: #AOower mpockvrjca abtg, we are come to worship him; always with Dative in Matt., Mark, and Paul (except Matz. iv. 10, from LXX.), in other books with Dative or Accusative.
Matt. xxi. 25: otk émorevcare adr, ye believed him not; also with én? (Dative), éri (Accusative), and eis. |
Acts v. 36, 37: dco: éreiOovro ait6, as many as obeyed him.
Rom. x. 16: od mdvres imjxovoay tO edayyediy, they did not all obey the Gospel. .
II. Reference.
2°79. The person or thing in respect of whom or which any- thing is done, whether to benefit or injure,* or in any other way, may be expressed by the Dative. This reference may generally be expressed in English by the preposition for. | Matt. 11. 16: dvedxOnoav abr6 of odpavoi, the heavens were opened Sor him. Matt. xvii. 4: roujow de rpeis oxnvds, Tol piav kai Moioe piav kat ‘HAlq piav, let me make here three petiaormests, one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Klas.
Rom. vi. 2: oirives aweOdvopev TH dpaprla, we who died to sin.
2 Cor. v. 13: cire yap e&éornpev, Oe6, eire caodpovorper, spiv, for uhether we were beside ourselves, (it was for God, whether we are sober, (it is) for you.
James ill. 18: xapmrds... omewerat Tots tovotew eipyyny, the fruit of righteousness ts sown ir them that make peace.
Heb. iv. 9: dpa dmodeimerat caBBaticpos TH Aa@ Tod Ceod, there remaineth therefore a sabbath-keeping for the people of God.
Matt. xxill. 31: paprupeire éavrois, ye bear witness against your- selves. See also James v. 3; and compare 1 Cor. iv. 4.
Rom. vi. 20: detdepor fre tH Stxarortvy, ye were free in regard
to righteousness ; not simply “ from righteousness,” which would have required the Genitive.
* Latin, Dativus commodi vel incommodi.
246 ‘THE DATIVE OF REFERENCE. [§ 279.
' To this use of the Dative may be attributed the phrase, rf énor cai cor; what have I to do with thee ? lit., what is for me and thee? t.e., what have we in common ? Mark vy. 7 (Matt. viii. 29); John i. 4, de.
IV. Accessory Circumstance.
280. a. The mode of an action is expressed by the Dative. Acts xi. 23: mapexdder mdvras TH mpobéoe ris Kapdias mpocpéver T® Kupie, he was exhorting all to cleave to the Lord with the purpose of the heart. j 1 Cor. x. 30: ef eyd xGpire pereyo, if I partake with thank- Julness. Phil. i. 18: wavrl rpéme, cire mpopdca, cire GAnOela, Xpicrds Karay- -yArera, in every way, whether in pretence or truth, Christ is preached,
See also Acts xv. 1; 2 Cor. iii. 18; Eph. v. 19, &c.
6b. A modal Dative sometimes emphatically repeats the notion of the verb. See an analogous idiom with the Accusative (§ 282), and with the Predicate Participle (§ 394, i, 3, d.) This Dative may have a qualifying adjective.
James v. 17: wpocevxi mpoonvéaro, he prayed with prayer, w.e., he prayed earnestly.
Mark v. 42: eé€urnoav tkordoea peyddy, they were astonished with a great astonishment, 7.e., were greatly astonished. See also 1 Pet. i. 8.
For other examples, see Matt. xv. 4; Luke xxii. 15; John iii. 29;
Acts iv. 17, v. 28, xxiii. 14. For modal Datives that have become actual Adverbs, see § 400.
c. The Dative is used to denote the cause or motive.
Rom. iv. 20: od Siexpidn ti amore dN’ evedvvapabn TH where, he hesitated not through unbelief, but was strong through faith.
Gal. vi. 12: ta pi To eravpé rod Xpiorod Stdkwvrat, that they may not be persecuted for the cross of Christ.
§ 280. ] THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. 247
1 Pet. iv. 12: ph LeviferOe tH ev ipiv wepdca, be not dismayed (lit., “be not as strangers”) at the conflagration (which has broken out) among you. :
d. The Dative is also the case of the Instrument.
Matt. iii. 12: rd 8€ dyvpoy xaraxaicer tupl aoPiory, but the chaff he will burn with unquenchable fire.
Acts xii. 2: dveide 5ێ "IdxwBov... paxalpa, and he slew James with (the) sword.
Rom. i. 29: memAnpopevovs racy a8ixla, wovnplg, mwheovetta, Kaxla,, being filled (utterly engrossed) by all iniquity, depravity, greed, © baseness. ‘‘ Filled with” would have required the Genitive. (See § 265, and compare 2 Cor. vii. 4.)*
Eph. ii. 5, 8: xdpuri éore ceawopévor, by grace ye have been saved. In Romans viii. 24, rf yap ml8t eodOnuev may be rendered, for we were saved by hope (instrumental), or in hope (modal).
2 Pet. 1. 3: rod xadécavros jas iia SdEq Kal dperg, of him who called us by lis own glory and virtue. The reading is that of Lachmann and Tischendorf, but the received text gives the same meaning. “Zo glory and virtue” is manifestly incorrect. (See Alford’s note.)
See further 1 Cor. xv. 10; Titus iii. 7; 1 Pet. i 18; Eph. i. 13; and many other passages.
Hence the verb ypdopa, to use as an instrument, is followed by a Dative.
2 Cor, iil. 12: woddAq rappnoia ypopcda, we employ much boldness.
So Acts xxvii. 3, 17; 1 Cor. ix. 12, 15; 2 Cor. i. 17; 1 Tim. i. 8, v. 23. In 1 Cor. vii, 31, the best MSS. read the Accusative, rdv Koopdv,
e. From denoting the instrument, the Dative sometimes appears
+o take the signification of the agent, being used after Passive
* In Eph. iii. 19, «is conveys a different notion again, ‘‘that ye may be Silled up to all the fulness of God.”
t
“248 THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. oF § 280.
verbs where we might expect the more usual iné with a Genitive (which see, § 304).
Luke xxiii. 15: odSev &cov Oavdrov éori rempaypévov aittd, nothing worthy of death has been done by him. ,
2 Cor. xii. 20: kaya cipeba tpiv, and I should be found by you. Compare 2 Pet. iii. 14, and Rom. x. 20, from LXX.; Isa. lxv. 1.
Luke xxiv. 35: ds éyvac6n aitrots, how he was known by them. Compare Phil. iv. 5.
The passive Aorist of dpdw, to see (épOnr, see §103, 4), is generally construed with the Dative, as 1 Tim. iii. 16, &p6n ayyéAas, he was seen by angels. Here, however, the notion is rather that of appearing to, so that the Dative is regular. And in some of the other instances a somewhat similar explanation may be given, as in the last: ‘‘ he was made known to them.”
In Matt. v. 21, éppibn tots dpxatos, the best commentators render, it was said to the ancients, not “by them,” as E.V.
f. That in which a quality inheres, “the sphere,” is expressed by the Dative.
Matt. v. 3: of rrayol To mvebpare, the poor in spirit. Ver. 8: oi xaOapol Ti KapSiq, the pure in heart.
Acts xiv. 8: dddvaros tots wociv, impotent in his feet.
1 Cor. vii. 34: ta 7 ayia cai cépare cai rvebpan, that she may be holy both in body and spirit.
1 Cor. xiv. 20: pi radia yiverbe tats ppeciv dda TH Kaxla yymdcere, be not children in understanding, but be infants in malice (Dative of mode).
Eph. ii. 3: jyev réxva dice dpyis, we were in nature children of wrath.
This use of the Dative evidently springs from its original local import. The “‘local Dative” is not found in the New Testament, excepting (1) in the phrase by the way, or ways, 65, 6301s, where the way is regarded as the instrument: James ii. 25; 2 Pet. ii. 15; and (2) connected with the figurative use of mopedoua, meprmatéw, to walk, as Acts ix, 3l, xiv. 16; 2 Cor xii. 18, &c.
§ 280. | THE DATIVE OF ACCESSORY. 249
g. Accessories of time are marked by the Dative, as—
(1) A space of time, for. Acts xiil. 20: as treat rerpaxoclois cal mevtikovTa edwxe Kpirds, for about four hundred and fifty years he gave judges. See also Luke viii. 29; John ii. 20; Acts viii. 11; Rom. xvi. 25. The Accusative is more frequently used. (See § 286; also under &d, § 299.) (2) A point of time, at, on, when particularized or specified. Mark vi. 21: ‘“Hpadns tots yeverlois aitod deizvov eroinoe, Herod on his birthday made a banquet. But where the point is not specified, the Genitive is used. (See § 266.) Matt. xx. 19: ri tplry fpépa eyepOnoera, on the third day he shall be raised. Luke xiv. 3: ef éeore t6 caBBarw Jeparevew; is it lawful to heal on the Sabbath ?
The preposition év is frequently inserted in this connexion. (See § 295.)
THE ACCUSATIVE.
281. The Accusative primarily denotes that towards which motion is directed. Hence its use to complete the notion of the Predicate.*
The Accusative expresses the immediate Object of a transitive verb.
Matt. iv. 21: cidev Udovs Sto aSeApoits ... kal exddecev adbrods, he saw other two brothers...and called them (transitive active).
* «The Accusative,’ says Dr. Donaldson, ‘‘ has the following applications in Greek Syntax :—It denotes (a) motion to an object; (5) distance in space ; (c) duration in time; (d) the immediate object of a transitive verb ; (e) the more remote object of any verb, whether it has another Accusative or not ; (f) the Accusative of cognate signification, 7.e., the secondary predication by way of emphasis of that which is already predicated by the verb itself ; (g) an apposition to the object of the whole sentence ; (i) the subject of the objective sentence, when this is expressed in the infinitive mood.”—G@reek Grammar, p. 497.
250 THE ACCUSATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS. — [§ 281.
Acts i. 18: éxrjcaro xwplov, he purchased a field (transitive deponent).
a. It should be noted that some verbs which in English are intransitive, i.e, complete in themselves as predicates, and which extend their meaning by the use of prepositions, are transitive in Greek, and therefore require an Accusative to complete their meaning.
Thus, English: ‘‘ whosoever shall be ashamed of me and of my works.”
Greek: 6s yap éav émacxuvOj pe Kal tods sods Adyous (Mark Vili. 38). :
Acts xiv. 21: evayyeAtodpevoi re tiv wodw éekelvny Kai pabnredoavres ixavots, and having preached the Gospel in that city and made many disciples, lit., “having evangelized that city and discipled many.”
The two verbs in this passage, however, with some others, vary in their use. (See Vocabulary.)
6. Generally, the employment of the same verb in different places as transitive and neuter may be explained by change of meaning, or a variation in emphasis.
So 1 Cor. vi. 18: qetyere tiv wopvelay, flee fornication, avoid it.
1 Cor. x. 14: qedyere Grd ris elSwdodatpelas, flee from idolatry, make good your escape from it.
Matt. x. 28: pi doBeicbe awd trav droxrewwsvrav 7d cdpa, K.T.A.... poBnOnre Sé pGddov tov Suvdpevov, x.r.d., be not afraid of those who kill the body...but fear him who is able to destroy, &c.
c. Some verbs, denoting the exercise of a faculty, may be read either transitively or intransitively, according to the nature of the expression. So in English we may say, “J see,” or “I see you.”
Matt. vi. 4: 6 Brérawv ev ro kpumre, he that seeth in secret.
Matt. vii. 3: ri dé Bréreis Td Kappos; but why scest thow the splinter ?
Mark iv, 24: Bndémere ri dxovere, look to (take heed) what ye hear.
§ 281.] ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT. _ ge
In Mark viii. 15, xii. 38, Bréewere drd—lit., “look away from !”— signifies beware of. But in Phil. iii. 2, Brérere robs ktvas, x.7.X., literally signifies “look to the dogs, look to the evil-workers, look to the concision !” caution being tmplied.*
d. The immediate Object is omitted after certain verbs, which are nevertheless strictly transitive.
So especially rpocéya, to apply (om. rév voir, the mind), to give heed.
Luke xvii. 3: mpowéxere éavrois, give heed to yourselves.
With dnd, to beware of, lit., to give heed (so as to turn) from. Matt. vii. 15: mpocéxere Se Awd rav evdorpopytay, but beware of Salse prophets.
For the usage of particular verbs, consult the Vocabulary or a Lexicon.
282. Any verb, whether transitive or intransitive, may extend its meaning by a ‘cognate Accusative,” or “internal Object.” This Accusative is always connected with the verb in signification,
often in etymology. For a similar use of the Dative, see § 280, 6; and for the
Participle, § 394, i, 3, d.
Matt. ii. 10: éydpnoav xapav peyddrny, lit., they rejoiced a great joy, v.e., “rejoiced greatly.”
Luke ii. 8: dvAdooortes vrakds Tis wuerds, lit. , watching watches by night, z.¢., keeping watch.
Col. ii. 19: avger rv aignow rod Gcod, increaseth the increase of God, 2.¢., yields the increase. :
See also John vii. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 12; 1 Pet. iii. 14, &e.
Eph. iv. 8: gZyparorevoey alxparwctay, he led captive a captivity, 1.¢., a train of captives. Ps, lxviii. 18.
* Ellicott.
¢ This passage is rather an instance of a cognate external object, the abstract noun representing a multitude (Numbers xxxi. 12, LXX., ‘‘they brought the captivity.”) So Ostervald’s translation, ‘‘il a mené captive une grande multitude de captives ;” and De Wette’s, ‘‘er fiihrte Gefangene.”
252 — _ACCUSATIVE OF DEFINITION. rs 283.
283. An Accusative is often used by way of more exact definition of the Predicate.*
John vi. 10: dvérecay of dvSpes, Tov &ppdv aoel mevraxioyxidiot, the
men sat down, in number about five thousand.
Phil. i. 11: wemAnpwpevor naprdv Sixatocdyns, filled with the fruit of righteousness. So Col. i. 9. Compare under Genitive, § 251, and Dative, § 280, d. The Accusative strictly denotes the respect in which fulness is attained.
More generally, however, the Dative of accessory circumstance, § 280, is employed. In Acts xviii. 3, the approved reading is ri téxvy (Lachmann, Tischendorf) for the received rv réxyqy, “by occupation they were tent-makers.”
284. Many transitive verbs may have two objects, and be, therefore followed by two Accusatives; generally of a person (“the remoter object”) and a thing (“the nearer object”). So verbs of asking, teaching, clothing and unclothing, anointing, with many others.
This Accusative of the thing is analogous to the ‘‘internal object” of the verb. (See § 282.)
Matt. vii. 9: dv airjoe: 6 vids airod Uprov, whom his son shall ask for a loaf. (Occasionally the person with prepp., rapa, ard.)
John xiv. 26: éxeivos tpis didakee wavra, he shall teach you all things. (Once with Dative of person, Rev. ii. 14.)
Mark xv. 17: évddécxovew abrdv moppipav, they clothe him in purple. (The preposition ¢v sometimes found, as Matt. xi. 8.)
Heb. i. 9: expire oe... Aavov dyadrdudcews, he anointed thee with the oil of gladness, LXX.; Ps. xlv. 7. (But the Dative of material is sometimes used, Acts x. 38, and with dd¢lpa always.)
* This Accusative is often said to be governed by kard, in respect of, understood. ‘‘It is only a variety of the cognate Accusative. It defines more exactly the act or state described by a verb or adjective by referring it to a particular object, or part affected. It is the Accusative of an equivalent notion—the part wherein the act or state consists.” —Dr. Jacob,
§ 284. ] Bast THE ACCUSATIVE. 253
The Passive retains the Accusative of the nearer object.
Luke xvi. 19: eved:5icnero moppipay Kat Bicoov, he was clothed with purple and fine linen.
Acts xxvili. 20: thy GAvow syed meplkesuat, I am bound with this chain. (See Heb. v. 2.)
2 Thess. ii. 15: xparetre tas wmapaddces ds ed15dxOnte, hold fast the tra- ditions which ye were taught.
1 Tim. vi. 5: d:eGOappévwr avOpdrwv tov vodv, of men corrupted in mind.
The same remark applies to verbs which in the Active express the remoter object by the Dative.
1 Cor. ix. 17: olxovoulay wemlorevpa, I have been entrusted with a stewardship. So Rom. iii. 2; Gal. ii. 7; 1 Thess. ii. 4; 2 Thess. i. 10; 1 Tim. i. 11.
285. The Subject of an Infinitive Verb is put in the Accusative.
In translation, the Infinitive is generally to be rendered as a finite verb, and the Accusative as the nominative, with the con- junction that prefixed.
For the Infinitive, see § 387. It is really a verbal noun, and is used to complete the predication. The Accusative thus becomes an Accusative of definition* (§ 283).
1 Tim. ii. 8: BotdAopa ... mporetxerOar, “ T wish for...a praying ;” BovrAowa Tpocwesxer Oat Tois dvSpas, “ I wish for a praying on the part of men,” J wish that men should pray.
Luke xxiv. 23: of Aéyovow atrdv tAv, who say that he is alive.
Acts xiv. 19: voplcavres adrov teOvyxévar, thinking that he was dead.
1 Cor. vii. 10, 11: mapayyé\d@ ... yovaika dd dvdpos py Xopro bfvar
.. kal” Gv8pa yuvatca py &brdvar, T enjoin that a wife should not be separaded Jrom (her) husband, and that a man should not desert (his) wife.
Luke 1. 75: rod Sodvac jyir .. . puobévras .. . Aarpevew aire, to grant unto us that we being delivered (pas implied in. fucddvras) should serve him.
* Compare Dr. Donaldson’s Grammar, § 584.
254 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. [§ 285. : a
When the Subject of the Infinitive and of the principal verb is the same, it is not repeated except for emphasis, and adjectives, &c., in agreement with it are put in the nominative case.
Rom. xv. 24: dmigw Staopevspevos Ocdoacrdar iuas, I hope that when I pass through I shall see you. See also 2 Cor. x. 2.
But Phil. iii. 13: éyd euavrdv od Aoyifoua Katredrnpévar, J do not reckon that I myself have attained. So Romans ii. 19; Luke xx, 20.
When the Infinitive is substantivized (see § 201) by the Article, the
relations expressed by the Genitive after nouns are denoted by the Accusative.
Inf. gen. Acts xxiii. 15: mpd rod &yyiom abrdv, before his approach,
Inf. dat. Matt. xiii, 4: é€v r@ omelpew adrov, in his sowing. So xxvii. 12.
Inf. ace. Matt. xxvi. 32: meta Td eyepOjval ue, afler my rising again.
286. Relations of time and space are denoted by the Accu- sative.
a, Space.—Luke xxii. 41: dmeando6n an’ aitav aoei Aidov Bodfy, he withdrew from them about a stone’s cast.
John vi. 19: eAndakdres odv ws orablous elxoovmévre 7) TpLdKovTa, hawing therefore rowed about twenty-five or thirty stadia.
b. Time.—(1) A point of time—
Acts x. 3: eidev... dae) dpav évvaerny, he saw, about the ninth hour. Some (Lachmann) read wepi. But see John iv. 52; Rev. iii. 3.
(2) Duration of time—
Luke xv. 29: rocatra tn dovredw cor, 80 many years do I serve thee. See also Matt. xx. 6; John i. 39, ii. 12, v. 5, xi. 6; Acts xiii. 21, &e.
(3) Succession of time—
Matt. xx. 2: cvpdhavicas ... é« Snvapiov tiv hpépav, having agreed for a denarius a day (or perhaps, rather, this is another instance of (2) the Accusative of duration—a denarius for the day’s work).
§ 287.1 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. - 955 e 4
287. The Accusative is sometimes found in elliptical or apparently irregular constructions.
Matt. iv. 15: 68dv 6dAacons, the way of the sea, stands apparently without government. The regimen is to be sought in its Old Testament connexion, Isa. ix. 1, from which it is a citation. *
Luke xxiv. 47: dptduevory amd ‘Iepovcadhu, beginning at (from) Jeru- salem, the Accusative neuter participle in apposition with the objective sentence.
Acts xxvi. 3: yvéornv bvta ce, K.7.A. The Accusatives here seem to stand without any dependence. A verb is probably to be understood from #ynuat, in the preceding verse: especially as I regard thee as being acquainted, &c.
Rom. viii. 3; 1d adbvarov Tod vduov, the impossibility of the law. The phrase is here probably a nominative absolute (nominativus pendens), (See § 242.) Some, however, read it as Accusative, ‘‘in apposition to’
_ the object of the sentence,t or governed by éxolncev understood, *‘hath wrought.”
1 Tim. ii. 6: 7d papripiov Kaupots tSto.s, the testimony to be set forth in its own seasons, an Accusative, perhaps, in apposition with the preceding sentence. £
ON THE CASES AS USED WITH PREPOSITIONS.
288. Prepositions, as already stated, § 118, govern the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative, and are auxiliary to the sig- nificance of these cases.
Sometimes a preposition is simply emphatic, i.e., it is used where the case alone would have expressed the same meaning, although with less force. More frequently, however, it denotes a relation which the case of itself would be insufficient to specify.
Two points must be considered in relation to the prepositions :
* We often make similar quotations almost unconsciously: e.g., ‘* ‘Christ and Him crucified’ is the theme of the faithful minister.” Him in that sentence appears plainly ungrammatical, until we turn to the connexion,’ 1 Cor. ii. 2.
+ Webster.
t Ellicott. The difficulty here is that the preceding sentence is not objective. It would seem better to take the Accusative as more directly dependent on devs,
256 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 288.
first, their own original force, and secondly, the significance of the case or cases to which they are severally applied.
Thus, rapa is beside, denoting, with the Genitive from (from beside), with the Dative at or near (by the side of), with the Accusative towards or along (to or along the side of). From these meanings, again, others arise through the application of physical analogies to mental relations. Some prepositions from their meaning can govern only one case, as éx, out of (Gen.); &, in (Dat.); «is, into (Acc.). Others may govern two, as implying different directions of motion, but excluding the idea of rest, as card, downwards; with the Gen., down from; with the Acc., down upon: others are found with all three cases.
Every preposition probably denoted at first a relation of place. (See the scheme in § 124.) Hence by an easy transition their - reference to évme, and their use for purely mental relations. It will be seen in the following sections that most have this threefold use.
289. Certain prepositions are very nearly allied in some of their significations. Hence it may be a matter of indifference which is employed, the same circumstance being regarded from slightly different points of view. Thus it might be said of a commission given to a servant, that the act was executed by him or through him. It will be seen, however, that there exists a real distinction in the notions, although they meet in one transaction. We could not, for instance, infer that the words through and by were synonymous, or that one was used for, or interchanged with, the other. Such mistakes, however, have often been made in New ‘Testament criticism; and it is especially necessary, even where these important parts of speech appear most nearly alike in meaning, to observe their real distinction. (See further, § 308.)
290. No mistake is so common with learners as that of supposing that the words of one language must correspond individually to those of another, The fact is, that every word, as it were, fences off a particular enclosure from the great domain of thought ; and each language has its owu method of division, The ways in which the English and the Greek,
§ 290. ] PREPOSITIONS. 257.
for example, have mapped out the vast territory do not mutually corre- spond. Perhaps, therefore, no one word of the former claims a province that has its precise counterpart in the latter. Or, to adopt another illustration, the words of two languages do not run in equal parallel lines, thus :— G. E. cae
Were it so, translation would be easy work. Rather may they be repre- sented thus :—
> Eig Ge aie anes Cok amie rena a nena peels
E. ——
where in each language there are words that overlap those of the other, sometimes containing more meaning, sometimes less; and a single word in one often including the significance or part of the significance of two or three in the other.
Prepositions governing the Genitive only. "Avril, dard, ék, mpd,
291. I. ’Avri, OVER AGAINST,* containing the notion of oppo- sition, as an equivalent: instead of, for.
Matt. v. 38: dfOarpas dvr s0adpos, eye for an eye. Matt. xx. 28: Adrpoy dvrl woddav, a ransom for many.
Heb. xii. 2: dvtl ris mpoxeipérns ard Xapas, in return for the joy set before him.
John i. 16: AdBoper ... xapw avrl xdpuros, we received grace for grace, 4.¢., grace within, as correspondent with grace without, the Divine gift being as the Divine source; or (with most commen- tators), one measure of grace to succeed and replace another: © “grace upon grace.” Tt
This preposition is employed with the neuter relative plural in the adverbial phrase, av@ éy (in return for which things) = because. (Luke i, 20, xii. 3, xix. 44; Acts xii. 23; 2 Thess. ii. 10.)
* The primal significance of each preposition will be shown by SMALL CAPITALS. + ‘“‘ Ununterbrochene, immer sich erneuernde Gnade.”— Winer.
258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE, dad. [§ 292,
292. II. ’ard, FROM THE EXTERIOR,
1, Separation, the preposition expressing removal, the governed noun the point of departure in place or time : from.
Matt. i. 21: cdcer... dd rv dpapriav, he shall save ... from their sins,
Matt. iii. 13: dd rs Todtkalas, from Galilee.
Matt. ix. 22: dd ris dpas exetyns, from that hour.
Matt. vi. 13: fica jyds dd rot rovnpod, deliver ws from evil, or, the Evil one.
2. Derivation, source, descent : from, of.
Matt. vii. 16: dd tpiBddov cixa, figs from thorns.
Matt. xi. 29: pdbere dm’ tnod, learn of me.
3. Hence, especially, cause, occasion : from, on account of.
Matt. xiv. 26: dd tod béBov expatav, they cried out for fear.
Matt. xviii. 7: oval... dmd trav oxdvSadrov, Woe, on account of the
offences ! 7 So, according to some commentators, Heb. v. 7, eicaxovabels ard r7s
evAaBelas, heard on account of his fear (godly fear, or piety). Others, however, understand ‘‘heard (and delivered) from his fear,” i.e, from
the calamity which he apprehended. *
4. This preposition is sometimes used (after transitive verbs) elliptically, a word like some (as the real object of the verb) being - understood.
John xxi. 10: évéyeare dd trav dpaplov, bring of the fish.
Acts li. 17: éxye@ amd rod Tvebparos pov, J will pour out of my Spirit.
5. ’Andé is frequently joined with adverbs, as amd rére, from then, Matt. iv. 17, &c.; am apr, henceforth, Matt. xxiii. 39, de. ; amd
* The verb elcakotw has a similar extended meaning in Ps. exviii, 5, LXX. But see Alford in loc., who cites Luke xix. 3, xxiv. 41; John xxi. 6; Acts xii. 14, xx. 9, xxii. 11, as passages where ard means on account of.
§ 292.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE, G70, éx. 259
paxpdbev, from afar; amd dvalev, from above; dmb rod viv, from now, &c. In all these cases, a substantive of place or time is really understood.
293. III. ’Ex, éé, FROM THE INTERIOR (opposite to <is).
1. Out of, locally.
Matt. iii. 17: hav) & tav otpavav, a voice out of heaven.
Matt. viii, 28: é& trav punpedv cfepydpevor, coming out of the tombs.
To this meaning may be assigned the phrase, é« defiav, on the right hand, literally, ‘‘ off from the right-hand parts” (Matt. xx, 21, &c. But év defi¢ is also employed.
2. Originating in, as place, parentage, from, of.
“Matt. iii, 9: && trav MOev roirar, of these stones.
John iv. 7: yuvi & tis Dapapelas, w woman of Samaria.
Phil. iii. 5: ‘ESpaios & ‘EBpatwv, a Hebrew of Hebrews, 2¢., of Hebrew descent.
3. Originating in, as the source, cause, or occasion, from, by.
Luke xvi. 9: rowmoare éavrois pidous && tot papwva ris ddikias, make to yourselves friends by the mammon of unrighteousness, %.¢., by (the proper use of) your wealth.
Rom. v. 1: Sicawdévres ee wlotews, being justified by faith. So in many passages. |
1 Cor, ix. 14: && tod ebayyedlov (pv, to live from the Gospel.
4, The material or mass from which anything is made or taken, of. Matt. xxvii. 29: orépavov & dxav0dv, a crown of thorns.
5. Belonging to a class, of; often with abstract nouns.
John xviii. 37: 6 dv & ris dAnOelas, he who is (on the side) of the truth.
260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE, ék. [§ 298.
Rom. il. 8: of & épilelas, they who are of a self-secking spirit. Gal. iii. 9; Rom. iv. 12: of & wiorews* of ee meptropis, they who are of faith—of circumcision, t.e., who range themselves under
these opposite symbols. So Rom. iv. 14, of é& vépov, they who are of law, &e. .
This meaning is closely allied with (3).
6. Springing from: of the state of mind giving occasion to any action, from, out of.
2 Cor. ii, 4: && odds OAbhews eypayra, I wrote out of,much affliction.
1 Thess. ii. 3: 4 wapakAnows quar ovk && mrdvys, oddé & dxabapetas, our exhortation was not from deceit nor from uncleanness.
7. Used of time, from, the future being infolded in, and springing out of the present.
John vi. 66: é totrov, from this time.
Acts ix. 33: & érav éxré, for eight years.
294. IV. Upéd, mv FRONT OF.
1. Before, in respect of place.
Acts xii. 6: idaxés te mpd ris Oipas, the guards before the door. So ch. xiv. 13; James v. 9.
_ Matt. xi. 10: mpd mpoodrov cov, before thy face, from LXX.. So Mark i. 2; Luke i. 76, &e.
2. Before, in respect of time.
John xvii. 24: mpd karapodfs kdcpov, before the foundation of the world. | 1 Cor. iv. 5: pa mpd Katpod ri xpivere, judge nothing before the time. 2 Cor. xii. 2: mpd trav Sexareroipwv, fourteen years ago (lit., hefore fourteen years, i.e, counted backward from the present time). See also John xii. 1.
§ 294.] | PREPOSITIONS. 261
3. Before, by way of superiority. Only in the phrase mpd mdvrov, before, or, above all things. Luke xxi. 12; Col.i. 17; James v. 12; 1 Pet. iv. 8.
Prepositions governing the Dative only. "Ev, otyv.
295. I. ’kE», IN, correlative with els and ék.
1. Of place, in; so within, upon, at.
Matt. ii, 1: & BnOdetp ris Iovdaias, in Bethlehem of Judea.
Matt. xx. 3: é ri dyopd, in the market.
John xv. 4: é& rq dpréde, in the vine.
Heb. i. 3: & S8ef14 ris peyatooivns, on the right hand of the Majesty.*
Rey. iii. 21: & 76 Opdve pov, on my throne.
2. Among, with plurals or collective nouns.
Matt. ii. 6: é rots ayepdow Iovda, among the princes of Judah ; LXX., Micah v. 2. )
Luke xiv. 31: & Séka xurtdow, among ten thousands, 2.¢., attended by such a troop. See Jude 14; also Acts vii. 14.
Acts il. 29: éoriy é tptv dyps ris quépas ravrns, vé (the sepulchre) is among us unto this day.
1 Pet. v. 1, 2: apeaBurépous rods év tpiv...7d ev ipiv woiunor, the elders among you ... the flock among you.
3. “The év of investiture,” in or with ; as when we say, “ The general came in his sword, the peers in their robes.” The Greek
of the New Testament extends this use of the preposition to accom- paniments which do not literally invest.t
* Compare the use of é« (1).
+ A usage infrequent in classic Greek, and probably due to the influence ot the Hebrew preposition 3, in, with, by, &¢., for which the LXX. con- stantly uses éy,
262 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE, év. — [§ 295.
1 Cor. iv. 21: é& féB8~ Ow mpds spas; am I to come to you with a rod ?
1 Cor. v. 8: py ev Linq mada. + OX & aLopors, not in old leaven —
.. but mr unleavened bread.
1 Tim. i. 18: ta otparevy év airais, that thou mayest fight in them (prophesyings), ¢.¢., armed with them.
Heb. ix. 25: 6 dpxtepeds eioépxerar ... &v alpate dddorpia, the high preest enters... im the blood of others. Compare ch. x. 19; xili. 12.
So, perhaps, Eph. vi. 2: evrod} mporn & émayyedlg, the first commandment in, or with promise.
To this notion of investiture that of action is sometimes superadded (Luke i. 51). Hence ‘the év instrumental.” Luke xxii. 49: ef rardiouey év paxalpa; shall we smite with the sword ?
See also Heb. xi. 37, and the Revelation frequently, as ii. 16, vi. 8, xili. 10, xiv. 15. In Matt. v. 13, Mark ix. 50, év rim; may be rendered
wherewith ? 4, The sphere in which the subject is concerned, as dwelling or acting, i. So the phrases é dpapria, in sin; & mlora, in faith ; & copia, in wisdom; & d&yéary, in love; & IIvetpan, in spirit, or, im the Spirit. Matt. xxii. 43; Rev. i. 10 (Rom. vii. 5).
The frequent phrase, év Xpior@ (so €v Kuply, &c.), means, not simply attached to Christ as a follower, but in Christ, in the most intimate abiding fellowship.* So ‘‘Christ in us,” Gal. i. 16, & A similar phrase is used of the revelation of God himself.
2Cor. v. 19; eds jv Xpiorg, «.7.A., God in Christ was reconciling, &.
Eph. iv. 32: 6 @ebs év Xpwr@ eéxapicato duiv, God in Christ forgave you.
See also Acts xvii. 31: “‘in a man whom he hath ordained.”
5. In the power of, by. Matt. ix. 34: & ro dpxovts réiv Sapoviwr, by the prince of the demons.
* “Nicht blos durch Chr. beneficio Christi sondern in Chr., in goistig, kraftiger Gemeinschaft mit Chr.”— Winer,
§295.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE, év, ovv. 263
Matt. v. 34: é& 16 otpavo... & Ti yf, by heaven... by earth. So elsewhere in asseverations.
In Matt. iv. 4, the best copies read év wdvr phpar, by every word of God. Compare | Thess. iv. 15.
"Ey guol, 1 Cor. ix. 15; Mark xiv. 6, must be rendered im my case; 1 Cor. xiv. 11, in my apprehension.
6. This preposition with its case is often equivalent to an adverb, Compare (4) preceding. So we may render év Suvdpe, in power, or powerfully ; & 80d, craftily ; ev réxea, speedily, ke. In John xviii. 20, év kpurro is in secret, secretly, different from & to kputro, Matt. vi. 18.
7. Of time, im, upon.
Matt. ii. 1: év fpépaus ‘Hpddov, in the days of Herod.
Matt. x. 15: & ipépa xpicews, in the day of judgment ; xii. 36, &e.
Often with the infinitive treated as a noun.
Matt. xiii. 4: & 1d omelpew airdv, while he was sowing.
With the relative pronoun, év 4, whilst, as Mark ii. 19; év ofs, whilst, _as Luke xii. 1. The only difference between the singular and the plural is that the latter is more general.
8. Constructio pregnans.—This preposition seems occasionally to include the sense of ¢is, and so is used after verbs implying motion :—“ into, so as to be in.”
Matt. xxvi. 23: 6 épBdipas ... & +x tpvBrio, he who dipped... in the dish.
Luke xxiii. 53: @nkev aird & prjpare Aagevrd, they laid it in u rock-hewn sepulchre.
Romans it, 5: Onoavpltas ceavtd dpyiv & tuépa spyns, thou treasurest to thyself wrath (to be poured forth) upon a day of wrath.
296. II. sd», consunction wirH (union, or co-operation). With, together with.
Matt. xxvi. 35: obv col drobaveiv, to die with thee.
264 PREPOSITIONS. [§ 296.
Luke viii. 45: Uérpos cat of oiv aire, Peter and those with him.
» Not merely co-existence, but association is generally implied (see _ peta). Hence, ody is used of the fellowship of believers with Christ, &c. (Rom. vi. 8; Col. ii. 13, 20, iii. 3; 1 Thess. iv. 17, v. 10). There is the further suggestion of co-operation in such passages as 1 Cor. v. 4, xv. 10. In Luke xxiv. 21, together with becomes nearly equal to beside; &Ard
ye kal oiv nao tobros, Moreover, beside all this. Compare Nehemiah v. 18, LXX., “yet for all this,” E.V.
Prepositions governing the Accusative only. *"Avé, dls. 2977. ’Avd, UP TO, or, UP BY.*
This preposition is of infrequent occurrence in the New Testa- ment, and always has a special meaning.
1. dvd pkoov, tn the midst of, Matt. xiii. 25; Mark vii. 31; 1 Cor. vi. 5; Rev. vii. 17.
2. dvd pépos, by turn, 1 Cor. ay: QT.
3. With numerals or measures of quantity or value, apiece, Matt. xx. 9, 10; dvd Syvdpov, a denarius apiece. Compare Mark vi. 40; Luke ix. 3, 14, x. 1 (avd 8t0, two by two) ; John ii. 6; Rev. iv. 8.
4. In Rev. xxi. 21, ava ds tkacros, the preposition must be rendered as an adverb, each one separately.
298. II. Eis, ro THE INTERIOR (opposite to ¢éx, and correlative with év).t
1. Of place, into ; so, figuratively, of a state. Matt, ii. 11: Addvres els viv olxlav, having come into the house. Matt. v. 1: dvéBn els 7d Spos, he went up into the mountain.
* In classical Greek, ava also with a Dative.
¢ In Latin, the preposition in includes the notions of e?s and év, taking the Accusative and Ablative respectively; and els (really évs), in fact, is only another form ot éy, as ¢ of ex.
§ 298.] PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, eis. 265
Matt. vi. 13: py cioeveykns jpas els twaparpdv, lead us not into temptation.
So with collective words,
Acts xxii. 21: ets vy c£arocredd oe, I will send thee forth into the community of Gentiles.
2. Unto, to, where the context or the nature of the case limits the movement to the exterior.
Matt. xvii. 27: mopevdeis es OdAarcav, having gone to sea.
John xi. 38: %pyera: els 7d pvnpetov, he cometh to the tomb. So’ xx. 1, 3, 4 (ver. 5, “he went not in”).
Matt. vi. 26: éuBr¢pare els ra meravd, look to the birds.
Luke vi. 20: éendpas rovs dOadpors eis Tods padyrds, having lifted his eyes towards his disciples.
Rev. x. 5: fpe riv xeipa adrod els rov otpavdv, he lifted his hand to heaven.
3. The meaning towards is especially found in relation to persons, marking direction of thought, speech, &e. Sometimes this implies hostility, agaist; sometimes mere reference, im regard to. ;
Rom. xii. 16: 16 airé els GAAHAOvS gpovoivres, being of the same mind one towards another.
Imke xii. 10: mas ds épet Adyov ds tov vidv rod dvOpamov, whoever shall say a word against the Son of man.
Acts ii, 25: AaBid yap déyer els adrdv, for David says in reference to him.
4. Towards, with respect to a certain result, in order to, for.
Matt, viii, 4, x. 18, &c.: els papripiov airois, for a testimony to them.
Matt. xxvi. 2: mapadidora es Td cravpwlfvat, he is surrendered to be crucified. |
1 Cor. xi. 24: roveire els tiv dvapwnow, do it for the remembrance of me.
268 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACOUSATIVE, «ls. [§ 298,
2 Cor. ii. 12: Ody eis riv Tpawdda, els 7d wish having come to Troas for (the preaching of) the Gospel.
5. Into, symbolically, as marking the entrance into a state or sphere (see under év, 4).
So we enter eds Xpiordv, into Christ, actually by faith, sym- bolically by baptism, Christians being & Xpiora, in Christ.
Rom. vi. 3, 4: éc0u ¢BarricOnpev eis Xprorrdv Incody, els Tov Odvarov atrod €Barricbnuev, as many of us as were baptized into Christ Jesus, were baptized into his death. ,
Compare Matt. xxviii. 19, ‘‘into the name,” &c; Acts xix. 3; 1 Cor. i, 13, x. 2, xii. 13; Gal. iii, 27. So Acts ii. 38, els rhy &peow auapriar, into the remission of sins, or, according to some interpreters, as (4),
6. This preposition is used in some important passages to denote
equivalence,* and may be rendered for, or as.
Matt. xix. 5: fcovra...es cdpxa plav, they shall become one flesh. So Mark x. 8; 1 Cor. vi. 16; Eph. v. 31; from LXX, Gen. ii. 24.
Matt. xxi, 42: éyevnOn els kebadiy ywvias, it became the head of the corner. So Mark xii. 10; Luke xx. 17; from LXX, Ps. exviil. 22. '
Compare Luke iii. 5 (from Isa. xl. 4), xiii. 19; John xvi. 20; Acts vii. 21, xiii. 22; Rom. xi. 9; 1 Cor. xiv. 22, xv. 45 (see Gen. ii. 7, LXX.); 2 Cor. vi. 18, viii. 14; Heb. i. 5; James v. 3. Acts xix. 27: 1d... fepdv es ot8tv Aoyicbijvar, the temple to be esteemed as nothing. Rom, ii. 26: odyt 4 dxpoBvoria airod es mepttopyv AoyoOnoerat ; shall not his uncircumcision be accounted as circumcision ? Rom, ix. 8: doyifera: els owéppa, it is accounted for a seed. Rom. iv. 3, 5,9, 22; Gal. iii. 6: edoyicby aire ets Sixavorivny, uf was accounted to him for righteousness.
* This answers to a common Hebrew use of the preposition } (equivalent to eis) after copulative verbs.
§ 298.] PREPOSITIONS WITIT THE ACCUSATIVE, ls. 267
7. When referring to time, es may mark either (a) the interval up toacertain point, during ; or (6) the point itself, regarded as the object of some aim or purpose, up to, for.
a. Luke i. 50: ets yeveds yevedv, to generations of generations.
Luke xxi. 19: els rov alava, for ever, lit., “unto or during the age ;” also in the Epistles of Paul (not in the Hebrews), és rods alévas, lit., “unto the ages,” in the later Epistles and the Revela- tion. els tods aidvas trav aldvev, to the ages of the ages, “for ever and ever.” 2 Pet. iii. 18, eis qy€pav aidvos, “ to the day of eternity ;” all with the same meaning.
So in the adverbial phrases, «es 7d péAdov, hereafter; eis 7d dSinverés, perpetually.
b. Matt. vi. 34: py odv pepipygcere els Tv atprov, be not anxious for (lit., “project not your anxieties into”) the morrow. —
Phil. i. 10: els tpépav Xpicrod, unto the day of Christ. So 2 Tim.i.12. Eph. iv. 30, is slightly different, expressing more prominently the intent of the Spirit’s “sealing.”
Rev. ix. 15: yrowacpévor els tiv dpav kcal fhpépav cal pfva Kal emaurdy, prepared for (or unto) the hour and day, and month and year, t.e., for the precise time appointed.
Acts xiii. 42: eis rb werath o¢BBarov presents a little difficulty, as ‘on the next Sabbath’’ would be rendering the preposition with undue licence. We must understand either ‘‘for the next Sabbath”—the Gospel being regarded as a treasure reserved for that time—or during the intervening week.
8. Constructio pregnans.—See under éy (8). As év in a similar double construction implies the previous eis, so e’s here implies the following éy.
Mark xiii. 16: 6 ets riv dypdv dv, “he who is into the field,” «e., who has gone into the field and is in it. Matt. xxiv. 18 has év.
Acts viii. 40: @idurmos eipéin els "Afwrov, Philip was found (to have been led) to Azotus.
Acts xxi. 13: dro€avetv els ‘Iepoveadnu, “to die into Jerusalem,” t.¢., to go into Jerusalem and die there.
268 PREPOSITIONS. 7 [§ 288.
Heb, xi. 9: wapdxncev es rqv, yar, “sojourned into the land,” ie., travelled into the land and sojourned in tt.
In one passage, eis is apparently followed by a Genitive: Acts ii. 27, 31 (LXX., Ps. xvi. 10), eis d5ov, to Hades. The phrase contains a classical ellipsis ; oixiay, habitation being understood, and Hades being personified, ** Thou wilt not abandon my soul to the realm of the Unseen.”
Prepositions governing the Genitive and Accusative Cases. Avi, ard, pera, mepl, imép, ind.* 299. I. aid, THROUGH, from the notion of separation, dis- junction. a. With the Genitive—
1. In reference to place: through, literally, z.¢., “through and from.” |
John iv. 4: @€ee d€ adrov diépyecOa 8d THs Dapapelas, and he must needs go through Samaria.
John xiv. 6: ovdels epyerar mpds rdv marépa et pr Sv epod, no one cometh to the Father but through me—the Way.
1 Cor, iii. 15: cadjcera ... ds 8a Tod aupéds, he shall be saved as (one who has passed) through the fire.
1 Cor. xiii. 12: Bréropev yap apr 80 éodmrpov, for we see now through a mirror (the image appearing on the opposite side).
2. In reference to agency: through, by means of.
Matt. i. 22: fnOév id Kupiov 81a tod mpophrov, spoken by Jehovah through the prophet. Here mark the distinction between imé and ia, and compare iz (a).
1 Cor. iii. 5: Stdxovos 80 dy emoredvoare, ministers through whom ye believed.
2 Thess. ii. 2: pyre Sid mvedparos, pyre Sid Adyou, pyre BV émorodfis, ds 80 jpav, neither by Spirit, nor by word, nor by letter as from us (through us as the mediate authors).
* In classic Greek, wepi and iwé may take a Dative ; also nerd in poets,
§ 299.] Avd, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 269
Eph. i. 1, &e. : 88 CAfparos Gcod, by the will of God. Eph. ii, 8, &e.: cecaopévr Sa rhs wirrews, saved by faith.
2 Cor. v. 10: ra 8a rod cdparos, the things (wrought) by means of the body.
3 John 13: od Ode@ 8a pédavos xa’ eae ypapev, I do not wish to write with nk and pen.
This preposition is used, especially in such phrases as 5:8 "Inod Xpio rod, of Christ’s mediatorial work in all its manifestations.* (Rom. ii. 16, v. 1; 2 Cor. i. 5; Gal. i 1; Eph. i, 5; Phil i. 11; Titus iii, 6; and perhaps 1 Peter ii. 14.)
Very rarely it seems to indicate the primary agent. 1 Cor: i. 9: motos 6 @eds 5° ov exAHOnte, «.7.A., God is faithful by whom ye were called, &c. Yet even here the proper force of d:¢ is not lost. The Father is represented as acting on behalf of his Son, to bring Christians into fellowship with him.
3. In reference to time, it marks the passage through an interval: (a) during, or (6) after the lapse of.
(a) Luke v. 5: 80 8dns ris vunrds, all night.
Heb. ii. 15 : 8d wdvros rod tiv, all through his life.
The phrase 84 (ris) vukrés denotes by night, i... during its lapse, no particular hour or hours being specified, Acts v. 19,
xvi. 9, xvii. 10, xxiii. 31. So Actsi 3: 80 tpepdv treroapdxovra, at intervals during forty days.
(6) Matt. xxvi. 61; Mark xiv. 58: 8a rpidv tpepav, three days afterwards. Gal. ii, 1: 8a Sexarerodpwv érav, fourteen years after. Compare Mark ii. 1; Acts xxiv. 17.
8. With the Accusative—
On account of: as in the frequent phrase 8 rtotro, “on this account.” So “because of,” “for the sake of.”
“With the Genitive, da notes the instrument of an action; with the Accusative, its ground, ratio.”*
————<—<—<=$« $m ae
* Winer.
279 Aid, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, Kad. [§ 299.
Matt. x. 22, &e.: 8d 1d Svoparpov, for my-name’s sake.
Matt. xxiv. 12: 8a +d mdnbovOjvar thv avopniary, because of the abounding of the iniquity.
Eph. ii. 4: 8 rhv woddjy dydany adrod, on account of his great love.
Jchn vi. 57: eyo (6 Sa tov Tlarépa, J live because of the Father, v.¢., “because he liveth.”
Heb. v. 12: 8 rdv xpdvov, on account of, i.e., considering the tume that you have been Christians.
Rom. viii. 11: 8d +8 evorcoty airod Tvetpa, on account of his indwelling Spirit.
The distinction between the Genitive and the Accusative should be marked in such passages as Rom. xii. 3, xv. 15. ‘*I say to you,” writes the Apostle in the former, 5:4 rijs xdprtos, through the grace given to me, i.e., ‘*the favour bestowed is the power by which I write ;” but in the latter, 5:2 thy xdpiw, on account of the grace given me, ‘that I may worthily vindicate its bestowal.”
An instance of a different kind is in Heb. ii. 10: 87 dv 7a wdvra Kal 8° ob 7a mdvta, for whom are all things and by whom are all things, i.e., for his honour and by his agency. Compare also 1 Cor. xi. 9 and 12: 5d Thy yuvand, for the sake of the woman ; 3a Tis yuvands, by the woman, i.e., in birth,
300. II. Kara, Down.
a. With the Genitive, “down from”—
1. Literally, of place, down.
Matt. viii. 32: Spunoe kata tod Kpypvod, rushed down the steep. Mark v. 13; Luke viii. 33.
1 Cor. xi. 4: Kard Kepadis ¢xor, having a covering on (depending from) the head. }
See also Mark xiv. 3; Acts xxvii. 14; 2 Cor. viii. 2.
2. Hence the more usual signification, against, in opposition to (the reverse of ixép, which see),
Mark xi. 25: ef re tyere Kard twos, if ye have anything against any one.
§ 800.] Kard, WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 271
Acts xiv. 2: émpyeipay kara tov &8eAdav, they rose up against the brethren. 3. Occasionally in asseverations, by—
Matt. xxvi. 63: é£opkito oe Kata tot cot, I adjwre thee by God.
So Heb. vi. 13-16. 1 Cor. xv. 15, is probably to be referred to the same rule, ‘‘ We have called God to witness,” though the rendering against might be admissible. ‘* Of God” is plainly incorrect.
4, As with the Accusative, over, throughout, a usage confined to Luke, and to the following passages— . Luke iv. 14: Kal 8dns ris weptxdpov, through all the region round about. Luke xxiii. 5: Acts ix. 31, 42, x. 37.
B. With the Accusative, down upon, or along —
1. Throughout (see a, 4), with singular or plural.
Luke viii. 39: xa® 8Anv riv wédw, through the whole city.
Acts viii. 1; xara tas xdpas ris Iovdalas, throughout the regions of Judea.
Acts xxvi. 3: raév xara “Iov8atous eddy, of the customs among the Jews.
2. Over against, locally—
Luke ii. 31: xara mpdcwmov ravrav rdv Aaav, before the face of all the peoples.
So Acts ii. 10; Gal. ii. 11, iii. 1, &c.
3. In reference to time, aé or in, “correspondent with,” “at the period of” (“‘ over against” )—
Matt. i. 20, &c.: Kar’ 8vap, in a dream.
Acts xvi. 25: Kard 7d perovixriov, at midnight.
Rom. v. 6: kara xawpdv, in due time.
4. Of place or time, distributively, from one to another— Mark xiii, 8: ce:cpol Kara rémovs, earthquakes in divers pluces.
272 Kard, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE, perd. [s 300.
Luke viii. 1: d:adeve xara wédw, he was journeying from city to - city.
So xar’ ros, year by year, Luke ii. 41; kar’ olor, at different houses, Acts ii, 46, v. 42; xara wav odBBarov, every Sabbath, Acts xv. 21; Ka? nyépav, daily, Matt. xxvi. 25, &c. (and the phrase xaé’ efs, or xadeis, one by one, Mark xiv. 19; John viii. 9; Rom. xii. 5.)
5. From the meaning “over against” arises that of according to, in reference to some standard of comparison, stated or implied.
Matt. ix. 29: kara thy mlotw tudv yernOjro, according to your JSaith let it be.
Luke ii. 39 : ra xara rév vépov Kupiov, the things according to the law of Jehovah.
So in the phrases rat’ kvOpwrov, as a man; Kar’ Eue, according to my ability or view ; xara xdpw, according to favour ; kat’ etoxhy, by way of pre-eminence, Acts xxv. 23, &. The phrase xara @cdv means, in accord- ance with the character of God, ‘‘divinely,” as 2 Cor. vii. 9, 10, 11. Thus also, Rom. viii. 27, He (the Spirit) divinely intercedes ;* Rom. xiv. 15, nar’ &ydanv, according to love.
Heb. xi. 13: xara rlotw amedavov, they died according to faith, i.e., in a way consistent with, corresponding to the spirit of faith ; contented, though they had not seen the blessing.
6. Phrases like the foregoing often pass into an adverbial meaning—
Matt. xiv. 13, &e.: Kar’ t8lav, alone.
Acts xxviii. 16: xa@ éaurdv, by himself.
301. III. Merd, IN ASSOCIATION wiTH (locally), distinguished from civ, which implies co-operation, and is not necessarily local.
a. With the Genitive, “with and from,” or separable connexion. t 1. With, amidst, among.
Matt. i. 23: Enpavound... 0 hpdv 6 Geds, Lmmanuel, God with us. Matt. xii. 3, &c.: of per’ adrod, those with him, his companions.
* Winer here prefers the rendering before, as (2) above, but, as it seems, without sufficient reason. t Donaldson, Merd is connected with pécos, midst,
§ 301. | Merd, epi. 273
So of two parties to a conversation or controversy— John iv. 27: pera yuvatkds eAdre, he was talking with a woman. See also Matt. xii. 41, 42, &c.
2. Of attendant circumstances, objects, states of mind (not instrumental), together with—
Matt. xxv. 4: pera trav Aaprdbev airy, with their lamps.
Mark vi: 25: ecicedOotoa peta. orovdis, coming in urth haste.
Heb, xii. 17: pera Saxptov ex(yricas, having sought with tears.
1 Tim, iv. 14: per’ émbérews trav xerpav, with (not by) the laying on of the hands.
Matt. xxvii. 66: pera ris KoverwSlas, together with the watch.
3. The object of a deed of love, mercy, or the like, is sometimes spoken of, by this preposition, as associated with the agent—
Luke x. 37: 6 mwounoas 1rd edeos per airod, he who wrought the compassionate deed with him, u.e., “who showed mercy towards him.”
So also in Acts xiv. 27, xv. 4; 1 John iv. 17,
8. With the Accusative, after.
Matt. xxvi. 2: perd 8t0 hpépas, after two days.
Luke v. 27, &c. : pera ratra, after these things.
Luke xxii. 20: pera rd Samvaca, after supper; 1 Cor. xi. 25.
Once only of place, beyond ; to be explained, however, in the same way, the observer arriving at the second point subsequently to the first.
Heb. ix. 3: mera 7d Sedrepov Karaméracua, beyond the second veil,
302. IV. Mepi, arounp. a. With the Genitive, “around and separate from.”
About, concerning ; chiefly as the object of thonght, emotion, knowledge, discourse, &ec.
Acts vill. 12: ra mepl ris Bacwhelas rod Gcod, the things concerning the kingdom of God.
O74 Hepl, Sxép. rs 302,
Matt. vi. 28: wept evSiparos ri pepyvare; why are ye anxious about raiment ?
Luke ii. 18: 26avpacay wept trav dadrnPévrwv, they wondered about the things that were spoken (this verb generally has ém, ‘‘to wonder at”),
Matt. ix. 36: éomdayxvicbn wept aitav, he was compassionate about them (also generally with éri, Dative or Accusative).
1 Thess. v. 25, de. : mpocetixyeobe wep hpav, pray for us.
Rom. viii. 3: 6 cds rév éavrod vidy méuas ... wept apaprlas, God having sent his own Son for sin. Compare Gal. i. 4 (Tischendorf, Lachmann, &c.) ; Heb. x. 6, 8, 18, 26 ; 1 John ii. 2, iv. 10. (See
under izep, a, 2.) B. With the Accusative, “ around and towards.”
1. Around, of place.
Matt. viii. 18: idbv ... dyAouvs mepl airdv, seeing multitudes around him.
Used of dress, &c., Matt. iii. 4: wept rhv éciv airod, about his loins. So xviii. 6; Rev. xv. 6.
For the idiomatic expression, of wept Tlatdov, see § 197.
2. About, of time. Matt. xx. 3: wept tplrnv dpav, about the third hour.
3. In reference to, about, of any object of thought. Luke x. 40: mepieonGro wept tmoddiv Siaxoviay, she was cumbered about much serving (ver. 41). 1 Tim. i. 19: wept riv alorw evavdynoav, they made shipwreck in reference to the faith. See also Mark iv. 19; Acts xix. 25; 1 Tim. vi. 4, &c,
303. V. ‘Yrép, OVER.
a. With the Genitive, “over and separate from.”
1. On behalf of, as though bending “over” to protect (the opposite of card). Of persons,
§ 303. | Yrép, WITH THE GENITIVE. 275
Matt. v. 44: mpocedyeobe imp rav Swaxdvrev ipas, pray for* those who persecute you.
Mark ix. 40: és yap ove gore Kal? ipav tmp tpav eorw, he who is not against us is for us. Compare Rom. viii. 31.
2 Cor. v. 14, 15: tmp wdvrov drebaverv, he died for all. So Rom. v. 6, 7, 8; Gal. ii. 20, iii, 10; Eph. v. 25; Heb. i. 9; 1 Pet. ii. 21, ke.
Philemon 13: iva trip wot por diaxov7, that he might minister to me for thee.
As a service is often rendered on behalf of another by being offered in his stead, the notion of irép may become interchangeable with that of avrt, as in the last passage. The distinction is, that brép of itself leaves undetermined the way in which the service is performed, simply affirming the fact; av7l, on the other hand, is definite. See Winer, § 47, J, n. 2.
2. Of things: for their sake, in various ways,
John xi. 4: tmp ris Sdgns rod Ccod, for the glory of God, 1.¢., to promote it.
Rom. xv. 8: tmp ddrbelas Ccod, for the truth of God, 2.¢., “ to confirm his promises.” |
2 Cor. xii. 19: tmp ris dua olkoSopfis, for your edification, 1.¢., to minister to it.
Phil. ii, 13: trip ris etSoxlas, for (his) good pleasure, i.e. to accomplish it. :
Acts v. 41: trp rod dvéparos, on behalf of the Name of Christ, 1.€., to glorify it. Compare ix. 16; 3 John 7, &e.
1 Cor. xv. 3: dréOavey imip trav dpapriwv judy, he died for our sins, 1.¢., to take them away. Compare Heb. v. 1, &c.; and see under mepi, a.
3. About, “in reference to,” simply; the notion of benefit or service having disappeared.
2 Cor, Vili. 23: eire tmp Tirov, whether (you enquire) about Titus.
* More emphatic than wepi in the same connexion.
276 “Yxép, tr. | [§ 3C3.
se a ee
2 Thess. ii, 1: tmp ris wapovelas rod Kupiov, with respect to the :
coming of the Lord.
The passage, 1 Cor. xv. 29, Barriféuevor iwip Trav vexpay, baptized for, or on behalf of, or in reference to the dead, possibly refers to some observance (perhaps local) in connexion with the act of baptism, of which the trace is lost.
8. With the Accusative, “over and towards.” Beyond, above, used in comparison.
Matt. x. 24: obd« gore evade imp rdv SiSdcxadov, a disciple is not above his teacher.
2 Cor. i. 8: éBapnOnuev imp Sivapw, we were oppressed beyond our strength.
So occasionally after a comparative adjective to add emphasis (Luke xvi. 8; Heb. iv. 12.)
Here, too, may be referred the use of irép with adverbs, as 2 Cor. xi. 5, xii. 11, dwtp Alay or bwepAlav, beyond measure ; also the ‘‘ improper
preposition ” Smepdvw (from avd), up over, governing the Genitive (Eph. i. 21, iv. 10; Heb. ix. 5). See under ind (8, 1, note).
304. VI. ‘yxd, UNDER. a, With the Genitive, “beneath and separate from.”
This preposition marks that from which a fact, event, or action springs, z.¢., the agent; hence its meaning, by, especially after passive verbs.
Matt. iv. 1: dyny6n md rot Tveiparos reipacdjva td rot AvaBdrov, he was led up by the Spirit to be tempted by the devil.
Matt. v.13: xarararcicba imd tav dvOparav, to be trodden under- Soot by men.
Note.—The Agent is signified by iré. The Jnstrument, by the Dative alone. The Minister of another’s will, by did, with the Genitive The Motive or Cause, by did, with the Accusative. The Occasion may be signified by ad,
[§ 804. ‘V6, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 277
8. With the Accusative, “under and towards.”
1. Under, locally or figuratively —
Matt. v.15: riOéaow adrov imd tov pd8w0v, they put it under the modvus. |
Rom. vi. 14: od yap éore tmd vopov Gdn twd xdpw, for ye are not under law, but under grace.
In this sense, joined with the adverb xdrw (from xard), ixé forms the “improper preposition” troxérw, down under, followed always by a Genitive, as Mark vi. 11, &e.
2. Close upon (“ under,” as, ¢.g., under a wall, hill, &.), like the Latin swb, applied in the New Testament to time only, and in one passage.
Acts v. 21: td rdv 8pOpov, close upon the dawn, “very early in the morning.”
Prepositions governing the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. "Eni, wapd, mpés.
305. I. ’Emi, upon.
a. With the Genitive, “upon, and proceeding from,” as, ¢.g., a pillar upon the ground.
1. On, upon, locally—
Matt. vi. 10, &c.: emi ris yfjs, on the earth.
Luke viii. 13: of d¢ éwl ris wérpas, and those upon the rock.
John xix. 19°: él rot oravpod, upon the cross.
Acts xii. 21: xadioas éml tod Bhparos, sitting upon the throne (lit., bema, or tribunal). So xxv. 6. Compare Rev. iv. 9, 10, v. 13, vi 16, &e. In Matt. xix. 28, éni in this sense has both the Genitive and the Accusative.
2. Over, of superintendence, government, &c.
Acts vi. 3: ots xaraorncopev emi ris xpelas ravrns, whom we shall set over this business. Rom. ix. 5: 6 dv él wévrov, who is over all things.
278 "Ext, WITH THE GENITIVE. [§ 305.
_ 3. On the basis of, figuratively, upon. John vi. 2: ra onpeia-d emote emi rev acievotvrav, the miracles which he wrought upon the infirm. | Compare Gal. in. 16, &c. Here, too, may be referred the phrase, én’ dAnOelas, in truth (Mark xii. 14; Luke iv. 25, &c.), i.e, ‘‘on a basis of truth.”
4, In the presence of, especially before a tribunal.
1 Cor. vi. 1: xpiveoOar emi rdv d8lkav Kai odxi em trav dylwv, to be judged before the unjust, and not before the holy.
So Acts xxiii, 30, xxiv. 19, xxv. 9, 26, xxvi. 2; 1 Tim. vi. 13.
1 Tim. v. 19: ém 8i0 4 tprdv papripwr, before two or three wit- nesses. But see 2 Cor, xiii. 1: em oréparos, «r.d., upon the testimony (mouth) where the preposition, from the LXX., denotes basis.
5. In the time of, or under.
Luke iii. 2: él dpxuepéws “Avva, under Annas, the high priest.
Acts xi. 28: ém Kvav8lov, under Claudius.
Matt. i 11: emi ris perouerlas BaSvrdvos, at the time of the deportation to Babylon.
Romans i. 10: él rév mrpowevydy pov, at the time of my prayers, 1 Thess. i. 2; Philemon 4.
1 Peter i. 20: é éoxdrav trav xpdvev, in the last times, Heb. i. 2; 2 Peter iii. 3; Jude 18 (Tischendorf, Lachmann).
In Mark xii. 26: ém) Bdrov, at the Bush, means, “at the Old Testa- ment section entitled ‘The Bush.’”
6. Constructio pregnans.—This preposition with the Genitive sometimes (see under é¢v, 8) implies the foregoing motion,
Matt. xxvi. 12: Badotoa...7d pipoy roiro tml rod cépards pov, having cast this ointment on my body.
Mark xiv. 35: trevay én rijs ys, they fell upon the grownd.
§ 305.] "Ent, WITH THE DATEVE. | 279
8. With the Dative, “resting upon ”
1. On, upon, locally ; like the Genitive, except that the point of view is different. (See y, 1.)
Luke xix. 44: ovd« dfyoovow ... Aidov ent AiOw, they will not leave stone resting upon stone.
2. Over, of superintendence, &c. (See a, 2.) Luke xii. 44: ért rots trdpxover, over the goods.
3. On (at), as the groundwork of any fact or circumstance. Matt. iv. 4: otk ém Spr pdve (noera, shall not live on bread alone. Luke v. 5: ém Tt) phpatt cov yaddow 7d Sixrvor, at thy word I will let down the net. Acts xi. 19: rijs ONixpews ris yevouervns emt Zrehdve, the affliction that arose upon Stephen. Mark ix. 37, &c.: émi 16 évdparl pov, in my name. (Compare Matt. xxviii. 19, with Acts ii, 38.) Rom. viii. 20: é &mib, in hope, t.e., “resting on the basis of a hope that,” &e. 2 Cor. ix. 6: én’ eddoylas, on a groundwork of blessings, %.e., “bountifully.” 1 Thess. iv. 7: od yap ékéderev nuds 6 Geds emt dxabapola, for God did not call us on the ground of wmpurity, or perhaps as (5). So the phrase é9’ ¢, ‘‘on the condition being realized that,” where- fore, because (Rom. v. 12, &e.) 4, Over and above, wm addition to ; as by one fact resting upon another. Luke xvi. 26: él wéot rotros, beside all these. 2 Cor. vil. 13: éwl rH wapaxdfoa 9 pov leaypmane Lachmann), in addition to our comfort. | 5. Constructio pregnans.—(See a, 6.) The force of the Accu- ‘sative aiso is sometimes implied, x
ode?
280 ‘Ext, WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. [§ 305
Math. ix. 16:2 ofdels 80. HABANA |..\tei thardp suhal ‘no One putteth ... upon an old garment.
_y. With the Accusative, “upon, by direction towards.” 1, Upon, with motion implied. : Matt. v.15: ridéacw emi riv Avxvlav, they put (it) upon the lampstand. Matt. vii. 24: Gxoddunoe emt tiv wérpav, he built upon the rock. Matt. xiv. 29: meperratnoev emi 7a. Bara, he walked upon the waters. Matt. xxiv. 2: Aidcs emi AiBov. See the Dative in the same connexion, 8, 1. The notion there is of rest, simply; here, of downward pressure. So after the verb éAmifw, to hope; émi, with the Dat., 1 Tim. iv. 10; with the Acc., v. 5. In the one case, the hope is said to rest upon, as a fact; in the other, to be placed upon, as an act. So after me‘0w, 2 Cor. i. 9, compared with ii. 3. The difference is so slight, that the expressions are easily interchangeable. Constructio pregnans.—In Matt. xix. 28; 2 Cor. iii, 15, and some other passages.
2. Over, of authority, superintendence.
Luke i. 33: Baowdedoes emi tov olkov “Iaxa8, he shall reign over he house of Jacob. Heb. ii. 7: xaréornoas airov ém\ 1a tpya, x.7.d., thou didst set him wer the works of thy hands. The three cases in this connexion seem ‘‘interchangeable,” i.e., the . notions which they respectively express are so nearly allied that any of them may be employed without materially altering the sense. The Dative, however, and not the Accusative, is used when the preposition follows a verb of existence ; the Accusative, aud not the Dative, when the verb is transitive. The Examples (a, 2) show that the Genitive may be with either.
3. Zo, implying an intention (for, against). Matt. iii. 7: épxyopévous emi rd Bdrricpa airod, coming for his haptism.
$308.) — ‘Ex(, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 281
Mark v. 21: cuviy6n ByNos odds én’ airdv, a-great mulittude was gathered together to him.
Matt. xxvi. 55: &s em Agoriv 2éArOcre, are ye come out as against a robber ?
So Luke xxiii. 48. 4. Towards, the direction of thought, feeling, speech.
Luke vi. 35: airds ypnords éorw ém\ tors dxaplrrous cal tovnpots, he is good to the ungrateful and wicked. .
2 Cor. ii. 3: weroWds emi wavras spas, having confidence with regard to you all. :
Mark ix. 12: yéypamrac él tov vibv rod dvOpdrov, tt is written with regard to the Son of man.
Matt. xv. 32: omdayxvitoua emt tov 8xAov, J have compassion on the multitude, This verb and preposition are also found with the | Dative (see 8, 3); 4.¢., the compassion may be conceived as moving towards, or as resting on, the multitude,
5. Of number or quantity, up to.
Acts iv. 17: él mdciov, to a further point, “any further.”
Rev. xxi. 16: ém ora8lous Sadexa xididdwv, to twelve thousands of stadia. |
Matt. xxv. 40, &e.: ep’ dcov, inasmuch as. So of time, as long as, Matt. ix. 15.
With numeral adverbs, Acts x. 16, xi. 10. So in the compound adverb, épdmat, once for all, at once (Rom. vi. 10; 1 Cor. xv. 6; Heb. vii. 27, ix. 12, x. 10).
6. Of time, over, during on. Luke x. 35: én rhyv atprov, in the course of the morrow. Luke xviil. 4: ot« 70éAncev én xpdvov, he would not for a time.
Acts xiii. 31: &G6n él hpépas wrelovs, he was seen during several days.
So in the phrase, én 1d abd, at the same place or time, * together” (Luke xvii. 35; Acts ii. 1; 1 Cor. vii. 5, &c.)
282 Ilapd, WITH THE GENITIVE. [§ 306,
806. TI. Map, Bestpe (of juxtaposition). a. With the Genitive: “ Beside and proceeding from.” 3 With persons only: from, generally with the notion of some- thing imparted. Matt. ii. 4: érvvOdvero wap’ aitav, he enquired of them. Phil. iv. 8: dcEduevos wap’ "ExadpoSirov ra map’ inar, having received of Epaphroditus the things from you. John xvi. 27: apd tot Ocod cépOov, I came forth from God. Compare John i. 14.
Matt. xxi. 42: mapa Kuptov ¢ eyévero avrn, this was 8 from Jehovah— “his doing,” from LXX., Ps. exviii. 23.
Mark iii. 21: of wap’ airot, those from him, 2.¢., from his hore or family.
8. With the Dative, “beside and at.”
1. With, near, of persons only, except John xix. 25.
John xiv. 17: wap’ iptv péver, he remains with you.
Acts x. 6: evitera: mapd tr Xlpon, he lodges with one Simon.
John xix. 25: wapa 16 cravpd, near the cross.
2. With, in the estimation or power of.
Matt. xix. 26: mapa dvOpdmos ... a8ivarov, mapa d¢ Od ravra dvvard, with men ... impossible ; but with God all things are possible.
Rom. ii. 13: dixavor rapa 7 Od, just with God.
Rom. xii. 16: ppdvizor wap’ éavrois, wise in your own esteem. y. With the Accusative, “ to or along the side of.”
a By, near, after verbs implying motion; also rest by an extended object, as the sea. Matt. xiii. 4: érece mapa riv d8édv, it fell by the wayside.
Matt. xy. 30: “see airovs Tapa Tovs ate they cast them at his feet.
, OE
§ 306. | Ilapd, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. . 283
Acts x. 6: @ éorw oixia tapi Oédacrcay, whose house is by the seaside.
2. Beside, as not coinciding with, hence contrary to.
Acts xviii. 13: mapa vépov, contrary to law.
Rom. i. 26: rapa dicw, contrary to nature.
Rom. iv. 18: mapa é&ri8a, contrary to expectation.
Rom. i. 25: mapa rdv xricavra, instead of the Creator; or possibly, rather than, as (3).
3. Beside, with the notion of comparison, superiority, above.*
Luke xiii. 2: duaprodoi rapa wavras, sinners above all,
Romans xiv. 5: kpives jpépav wap’ hpépav, esteems day above day, i.é., one above another.
Heb. ix. 23: xpeirroot Ovoias wapda Tatras, better sacrifices than these. Soi. 4, iii. 3, xi. 4, xii. 243; Luke ii. 13.
4, From juxtaposition arises the notion of consequence, in the phrase rapa todro, 1 Cor. xii. 15, 16, therefore.
307. III. pds, rowarps. a. With Genitive, “ hitherwards.”
Belonging to the part or character of,f{ conducive to, in one, instance only—
Acts xxvii. 34: roiro yap mpds tis tperépas carnplas imdoyet, for this is for your deliverance.
8. With Dative, “resting in a direction towards.”
Near, hard by— Luke ix. 37: wpds +9 KardBaoe, close to the descent.
* See iép. The difference is, that irép affirms superiority, wapd institutes. comparison, and leaves the reader to infer superiority.
+ So in Latin, propter, because of, from prope, near.
¢ So in classical Greek, rpbs xaxod dvipds.
*:
284 Ilpés, WITH THE DATIVE AND accusaTIVE. — [§ 307,
John Xviil, 16: mpds ri Oipg Zéw, close by the door outside.
John xx. 12: va mpds Ti Kepads Kal Eva pds Tots mocly, one at the head and one at the feet. |
Rev. i. 13: apds rots parrots, about the breast.
These are the only undoubted instances in the New Testament. Some copies add Mark y. 11, John xx. 11, in the same sense.
y. With the Accusative, “ hitherwards.”
1. Zo, of literal direction.
Matt. xi. 28: Seire mpds pe, come hither to me!
Matt. xxiii. 34: dmooréAAw mpds tpas mpopyras, I send to you prophets. :
Luke i. 19: AadFoae wpdbs oe, to speak to thee.
1 Cor. xiii. 12: apécwrov mpds tpdcwmov, face to face. 2 John 12; 3 John 14.
2. After the substantive verb (constructio preegnans), with.
~ Matt. xiii. 56: ody) macar wpds Hpas <lov; are they not all with us? John i. 1: 6 Adyos fv wpbs Tov Ocdv, THE WORD WAS WITH Gop.
3. Of mental direction, towards, against.
Luke xxiii. 12: ev %6pa dures mpds eavrots, being in enmity towards themselves.
1 Thess. v. 14: paxpoOupeire mpds mévras, be long-suffering towards all.
Acts vi. 1: yoyyvopis mpds tods “EBpatovs, a murmuring against the Hebrews.
In Heb. i. 7, simple reference is denoted: mpds rods ayyéAous Aéyet, in
regard to the angels he saith.
4, From the general notion of mental direction arises (i) that of estimation or proportion, in consideration of.
Matt. xix. 8: mpds tiv oKxAnpoKapSlav indy, in consideration of the hardness of your hearts.
~~
re > See
§ 307.] Ilpés, WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 285
Luke xii. 47: mpds 7d OAnpa airod, im consideration of (in accordance with) his will.
Rom. viii. 18: ov« déia ... mpds tiv pAddoveray Sdgav droxarupbjvat, unworthy (of thought) ... in consideration of the glory that 1s to be revealed.
5. Also (ii) that of intention, im order to, especially with the Infiuitive.
1 Cor. x. 11: éypadpn Sé mpds vovderlav judy, they were written for our admonition.
Matt. vi. 1: mpds 7d Ocabfjvar avrois, in order to be seen by them.
ON THE INTERCHANGE OF CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS.
308. Although no two prepositions are synonymous, they often approach one another so nearly in meaning as to be apparently interchangeable. It is sometimes important to notice the distinction, however subtle; at other times it appears immaterial to the sense.
Yet it is always safer to look for a real difference in meaning. Com-
pare what has been said on the meaning of éwi in the government of the three cases. (See also § 289.)
The subject is one which often calls for the most delicate criticism. It must suffice here to cite some of the principal instances of real or seeming interchange, with such brief explanations as may indicate the general principles on which these cases are to be judged.
309. Aid, with the Genitive, is especially subject to these alternations of expression.
1. With ék. Rom. iii. 30: ef ¢ Geds, Os Sixarmoer mepiropny eK mlorews, kal dxpoBvoriay 8a ris mirtews, God is one, who will justify the circumcision by faith, and the uncircumeision by means of ths
286 _ INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 309.
(same) faith. In the former case the source of the justification is more distinctly marked ; in the latter, the means.
See also 2 Pet. iii. 5, &e.
2. With awd. Gal. i. 1: Watdos dmdarodos otk am’ dvOpdrwv obdé 8.’ dvOpadmrov, Paul an apostle neither (originally commissioned) from men, nor through {the intervention of) any man; the latter particular being added to show how absolutely independent his designation had been even of human instrumentality. The
_ ordination to the ministry is amd Ocod, but 8V avopdray,
3. With ev, 2 Cor. iii, 11: ef yap 7d xarapyotpevov 8d 8dEns TAD paddov 7rd pevov ev 8cEn, for if that which vanisheth (was) by “means of (through the intervention of) glory (1.¢., a glorious display), much more that which abideth (is) in glory. °
Other instances are in Heb. xi. 2 (compare with 39); Rom. iv. 1], v.10; 1 John v. 6. In 1 Cor, i, 21, the distinction is plain: in the wisdam of God, i.e., according to the wise appointment of Him who
left mankind to make the effort, the world by (5:d) its wisdom, i.e., by the exercise of its reason, knew not God (including both failwre and
perversion).
4, In Romans xi. 36, the respective meaning of ék, did, e’s (the starting-point, the course, the goal), are finely marked: & atrod kat 80 adrod Kul els airdy ra mavra, all things are from him as ‘their author, through him as their controller, to him as their end.
“ Him first, Him last, Him midst, Him without end.”
See also 2 Cor. i. 16.
Eph. iv. 6, presents a somewhat different antithesis: 6 ém aévrev cal Sia wavrov xal dv wacw,* who is over all and through all and in dll. 1 Cor. xii. 8, 9, has another combination: 8a rod IIvebparos ... kara. 7d adrd IIveipo ...év tH air Ivetparr,—* the word of wisdom is given by the Spirit ; the word of knowledge according to the same Spirit; faith, in the same Spirit: the Spirit bestowing the gift, in a degree commensurate with his own might and love, while He himself becomes the element of the Christian life.
* Omit duiv according to the best authorities, Lachmann and Tischendorf,
§ 310. ] INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. 287
310. ’Ex and dé may sometimes be interchanged without injury to the sense.
Matt. vil. 16: pare cvdAdéyovew ard dxavOav crapvryjy ; surely they do not gather grapes of thorns ?
Luke vi. 44: ov yap & dxavOdv oudréyouat aixa, for they do not gather figs of thorns.
Heb. vii. 2: dexdrny &wd wavrav, a tithe of all. Ver. 4: dexdrny .. & Tov dkpobwiev, @ tithe of the spoils. :
1 Thess, ii. 6: otre (nrodvres & GvOpdrav ddEav, ore Ah’ tpav oi're dr’ dddov, nor seeking glory from men, either of you or of others.
See also John xi. 1. In these passages it is immaterial whether the phrase ‘out of a thing” or ‘‘from a thing” be employed; but in the following there is an evident distinction :—
John vii. 42: ék Tod omépuaros AaBid nal &xd BnOdrcéu, from the seed of David and from Bethlehem.
2 Cor. iii. 5: obx Ere ixavol eoper ap’ Eavtav AoyloacOal Ti, ds CF EavTar, not that we are sufficient of ourselves to think anything, as from ourselves.
311. ’E» is occasionally interchanged with a simple Dative.
So Col. ii. 13: vexpoi é&v rots waparradpact, dead in transgressions ; Eph. ii. 1: vexpot rots waparrdpact, So Matt. vii. 2: & @ pétpo petpeire, tn what measure ye mete; Luke vi. 38: re yap aire Hétpy @ perpeire, With the same measure with which ye mete. Again, Luke iii. 16: t8arv Barrifw, J baptize with water; so Acts i. 5, xi. 16; but é& tan, in water, Matt. iii, 11; John i. 26, 33. The expressions are evidently equivalent, however the act be under- stood.
The opposites é¢v and é& may in some cases be even interchanged. Thus, Matthew (xxii. 37) gives “the great commandment” as, Thou shalt love the Lord thy God in (éy) all thy heart, &c. ; Mark (xii. 30), out of (é) all thy heart ; the love being regarded in one case as abiding
in the heart, in the other as manifested by it. The LXX. (Deut. vi. 5) has é.
312. Eis may often be interchanged with other forms of expression.
288 INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 312.
1, With mpés. Rom. iii. 25: es WSagw ... ver. 26 : mpds Weg tis Suxavoovvns avrov, in order to the manifestation ... tending to the manifestation of his righteousness. The former expression refers to a completed manifestation, the latter to one still in progress.
Philemon 5: “thy love and thy faith,” jv eyes mpds tov Kipvoy "Incotv kal els mdvtas Tors aylovs, towards the Lord Jesus and unto all the saints.
This seems nothing more than a variation in expression, although by some it is explained on the principle of reverted parallelism ;
**thy love and thy faith " towards the Lord Jesus
and to all the saints,”
1.€., love to the saints, and faith towards the Lord Jesus.
2. With émi. These instances are. very frequent, and need no special remark.
Matt. xxiv. 16: qdevyéracav ent ra pn, let them flee up to the mountains. Mark xiii. 14: gevyéracar es ra Spy, let them flee into the mountains.*
— Rom. iil, 22: Sixaocivy Geod ... els mavras cal emi mdvras rods muotevovras, the righteousness of God unto all and upon all who believe, 7.e., ‘so communicated fo as to abide upon.”
3. Interchanged with a simple Dative.
Matt. v. 21, 22: fvoyos rh Kploe ... Zvoxos els Thy yéevvav rod rrupés, liable to the judgment ... liable to (up to the point of) the Gehenna of fire.
Rom. xi. 24: evexevtpicOns els KaddAdanov ... eyxevtproOjoovrar TH lq dala, thow wast grafted into a good olwwe tree... they shall be grafted on their own olive.
4, The remarkable phrase, 2 Cor. iv. 17, in which eis is com- bined with xara in one rhetorical expression, claims a reference
* Lachmann, however, reads e¢/s in the former passage; so also Dr, Tregelles. The similarity between different prepositions has moomoo many various readings,
§ 312. ] _ INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. 289
here: xa® ‘trepBoddv els trepBodiv, E.V., “far more exceeding,” literally, according to abundance (on a scale of vastness) wnto an abundance (to the realization of that which is immeasurable),
5, The many instances in which cis seems to be used for év, and vice versa, may be explained by constructio pregnans. (See § 295, 8.) The two prepositions are found in the same connection; Matt. iv. 18, compared with Mark i. 16; Mark xi. 8, with Matt. xxi. 8; Mark xiii. 16, with Matt. xxiv. 18.
313. tepi, about (with Genitive), may be substituted for a more definite preposition, and the converse, ¢.g.—
1. For dd (with Accusative). John x. 32: our Lord asks, 84 motov aitay tpyov ALWateré pe; for which work of these do ye stone me? The answer is, ver. 33: aepl Kkahod epyou ov AvGdCouev oe adda wept Brarpypias, for a good work we stone thee not, but for blas- phemy.
2. For imép. See under imép and epi, §§ 302, 303.
Verbs signifying prayer, thanksgiving, &c., may be followed by either indifferently. J pray about you, wept, “you are the subject of my prayers; or, J pray for you, iwép, “your welfare is the object of my prayers.”
So in the many passages in respect of the death of Christ, which theological inquirers will do well to examine. In some, as in Gal. i. 4, the reading of good MSS. varies between inép and aept.
314. A preposition governing several words in one regimen is repeated before each of them if a distinction, severally, between them is to be marked; but if they are combined in one notion, the preposition is not repeated.
This rule is analogous to that respecting the repetition of the article
* (§ 232). Yet the article is often repeated where the preposition is not.
Thus with the repeated preposition—
Matt. xxii. 37 : @& Ody rh Kapdia cov, kat &v Sdn tH Woy cov, Kal ev 8A TH Siavoia cov, with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and
290 _ INTERCHANGE OF PREPOSITIONS. [§ 314.
with all thy understanding. Compare Mark xii. 30 (é€, see § 311, note). 7
| For other instances, see Mark vi. 4 (év); Luke xxiv. 27 (ard); 1 Thess. i. 5 (é€v); John xx. 2 (xpés), &e.
With the preposition not repeated—
John iv. 23: & mvevpate cai ddAnbeia, in spirit and truth, one state of mind, viewed under a twofold aspect. In like manner we interpret iil. 5, & ddaros kai Hvetdparos, of one spiritual baptism, not of two things (as the outward and the inward). So Matt. iii, 11.
For other instances, see Luke xxi. 26 (a6); Phil. i. 15 (&d); and
very frequently with proper names when closely connected, as Phil. i, 2 Acts vi. 9, &e.
Where the nouns after the preposition are connected by the disjunctive or, the preposition is always repeated; as also where they stand in antithesis. Acts iv. 7: év rota duvaper fj év roi dvdpare é€roinoare TovTo tpeis; in what name or in what power did ye this?
John vii. 22: ody dru & Tov Mavoéws eoriv, ad\dX’ & tay tatépor, not —
that it is from Moses, but from the fathers. But where the anti- thesis is formed by two adjectives agreeing with the same noun, the preposition need not be repeated. 1 Pet. i. 23: ov & omopas apOapris, GdAd& POdprov, not of corruptible, but of incorruptible seed.
a
nx =) —
§ 315. ] ADJECTIVES—-CONCORD.
Cuarter 1V.—ADJECTIVES.
315. According to the Second Concord, § 178, Adjectives, as also Participles and Adjective Pronouns, agree with their Substantives in Gender, Number, and Case.
An adjective may be an Epithet or a Predicate, the rule applying in both cases. For the adjective as predicate, see §§ 178-180.
316. Where the reference of the Adjective is plain, the Sub- stantive is often omitted. Compare § 199.
Matt. xi. 5: rupdol dvaBdérover Kal XoAoL mepimarodor, Aerrpol Kaba- piCovrat kat Kwpol dxovovar, vexpol eye/povrar Kal wraxol evayyeAlforrat, blind (men) are restored to sight and lame (men) walk, leprous (men) are cleansed and deaf (men) hear, the dead are raised and destitute (men) have glad tidings brought to them.
Rom. v. 7: poddus yap trép Suxalov ris drobaveirat, imep yap Tod &ya0ot tdya Tis Kal TOAMG Grobaveiv, for scarcely for a righteous (man) will one die, for on behalf of the good (man) one perchance even dares to die.”
1 Cor. iii, 13: amvevparikots mvevparikd ocvyxpivorres, putting together spirituals with spirituals, .e., ‘ attaching spiritual words to spiritual things,” Alford; or, “interpreting spiritual things by spiritual ;” or, ‘explaining spiritual things to spiritual men,” Stanley ; or, “adapting spiritual language to spiritual matters,” Beza.
The last example shows how an occasional ambiguity will arise. Such cases can only be decided by a careful study of the context and
of the words employed. In general, however, the application of the adjective will be perfectly plain, See further, Eph. i. 3, &e.
Among the substantives most frequently omitted after Adjec-—
292 - ADJECTIVES—CONCORD. [§ 316.
tives, beside the words for man, woman, neg with the three genders respectively, are the following—
xelp, hand, as * Sela, “the right.”
yi, land, as % olxovpévn, the inhabited, “the world.” (Luke ii. 1, &c.)
Nucpa, day, as Ti érwoticy, “on the morrow.”
ddwp, water, as worhpiov uxpod, “a cup of cold.” (Matt. x. 42; compare James iii. 11.)
Acts xix, 35, is peculiar: rod Atorerots, of that which fell from Zeus: not precisely “an image,” probably a great meteoric stone.
For the neuter article, especially, as substantivizing the Adjec- tive, t.¢., making it an abstract noun, see § 199.
Matt. vi. 13: picat qpas dd trod wovnpod, deliver us from evil. So v. 37,39; John xvii. 15. Some with less appropriateness render “the Evil one.” In 1 John ii 13, 14, the adjective (Accusative) is certainly masculine; in Rom. xii. 9 (Accusative), certainly neuter ; but as the Genitive and Dative of both genders are alike, passages like Eph. vi. 16; 2 Thess. ii. 3; 1 John iii, 12, v. 19, can only be determined by the context.
In Matt. xix. 17, the best editors concur in the remarkable reading, wi pe epwrgs wept tod ayabod; Why dost thou ask me concerning the good ?
instead of Why callest thou me good? In Mark x. 18, the received reading stands without any variation.
317. The number and gender of adjectives, participles, and pronouns are often determined (according to Synesis, or Rational Concord) by the sense rather than the form of their substantives. Compare §§ 175, 179.
Acts iii. 11: cuvédpape was & ads... ExOapPor, all the people ran together, greatly wondering.
Acts v. 16: ovmpyero...7d mAGos... hépovres, x.7.d., the multitude came together, bringing, &c, So Luke xix. 37, &e.
Eph. iv. 17, 18: v& Aowa vn wepurare’ ... toKotapévor ... Svres
= x a
§ 317. | ADJECTIVES—CONCORD. 993
d&rnddorpiopévor, the rest of the Gentiles walk ... darkened «.. being estranged.
Luke ii. 13: ahqO0s orpariis ovpaviov, atvotvtav tov Ocdy kai Aeysvrav, a multitude of a heavenly host, praising God and saying.
Rev. xi. 15: eyévovro gwval peyddar... Méyovres,* there were great voices, saying.
In Matt. xxi. 42, mapa Kuplov éyévero airy nat gor Oavuaorh, this (thing) was from the Lord, and it is wonderful, the feminine gender is to be explained by the Hebrew idiom. That language, having no neuter, employs the feminine for abstract notions. See Ps, exviii, 23 (LXX., exvii.)
For Synesis with Pronouns, see §§ 335, 345.
318. An Adjective referring to two or more substantives, if an epithet, commonly agrees with the nearest, or is repeated before each ; if a predicate, is properly in the plural number, and follows the rule, § 179.
Luke x. 1: cis wacav wédAw kal rérov, into every city and place (different genders, agreeing with nearest).
James i, 17: waéoa ddors dyaby Kal wav Sdpnua rédevov, every good and perfect gift. So Mark xiii. 1; Acts iv. 7 (different genders, repeated), |
Matt. ix. 35: Oepareiwy twaicav vécov cal waicav padaxiay, healing every (kind of) disease, and every (kind of) infirmity (same gender, repeated).
Matt. iv. 24: mouidats vdcos kat Bacdvors, with divers discases and torments (same gender, not repeated).
When two adjectives stand as epithets to one substantive, a con- junction generally stands between them. Thus, for ‘*many other,”
the Greeks say, ‘‘many and other.” This rule, however, is not inva- riable in the New Testament.
John xx. 30: oAAd uty ody Kat BAAa onucia, many other miracles therefore, Acts xxv. 7: moAAa@ Kal Bapéa aitiduata, many heavy charges. See also Luke iii, 18; Titus i. 10; and on the'contrary, Acts xv. 35.
kes Tischendorf, Lachmann.
a > i ; * | is a . 204 | ADJECTIVES—CONCORD. [§ 319.
319. An Adjective is often employed in Greek where the English idiom requires an Adverb.
Mark iv. 28: atroparn 4 yi Kapmodopei, the earth yields fruit spontaneously.
Luke ii. 2: avrn 4 droypady mpdtn éyévero, x.7.d., this enrolment was first made* (compare John xx. 4).
For the adverbial use of adjective forms, see § 399.
THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON, The Comparative.
320. An Adjective in the Comparative degree usually takes the object of comparison in the Genitive case. In English the conjunction than is to be supplied.
See § 253, with observations and examples.
The object, as expressed by the Genitive, sometimes corre- sponds, not with the precise subject of the comparison, but with the general notion of the sentence.
Matt. v. 20: mActov trav ypappartwv cai Papioalov (your righteous- ness), lit., more than the Scribes and Pharisees.
John v. 36: éya d3€ eyo rhv paprupiavy pew tod "Iwivvov, the witness which I have is greater than John.
1 Cor. i. 25: rd pwpdv rod Ocod copérepov rav dvOpdrev dori, x.r.d., the foolishness of God is wiser than men, &e.
The beginner must beware of translating these genitives as possessives governed by an understood object of the comparative: ‘‘than John’s (testimony),” ‘‘than men’s (wisdom),” &c. This the construction
* Other translations have been proposed to escape the chronological diffi- culty. Thus, the enrolment first took effect, when, &c., it having been originated some years before; or the enrolment was made before Quirinius was governor (compare mp@rds nov, Johni. 15). But Dr. Zumpt has recently shown the great probability of Quirinius having been goveruor of Syria at this early date, as well as A.D. 6, on the deposition of Archelaus, (See
Smith’s ‘‘ Dictionary of the Bible,” Ari, ‘‘ Cyrenius”),
320. | ADJECTIVES—COMPARISON. 295
will not admit, The form of expression is one of the utmost generality : ‘‘God’s ‘foolishness’ is wiser,”’ not only than men’s wisdom, but ‘‘than men” themselves, with all that they are or can do. So of the other passages, *
321. The comparative particle 7, than, may also be employed ; the object then being in the same case with the subject of com- parison.
Luke ix. 13: otk cio hpiv whetov 4 mévre prot Kal ixOvdes dv0, we. have no more than five loaves and two fishes.
1 Cor. xiv. 5: pellov d¢ 6 mpopnredav 4 6 Aadav yhoooats, greater is he who prophesies than he who speaks with tongues.
This particle is specially employ oa (1) after the comparative adverb paddov, more.
——- Acts iv. 19: ipay dxovew paddov 4 rod Ocod, to hear you rather than God.
It may be hardly necessary to remind the learner that @eod is in the Genitive, not because it is the object of comparison, but because coupled by # with suay, Gen. after axovew, by § 249, a.
So Matt. xviii. 13; John xii. 43 (#mep), &c. M@AAov # may connect two adjectives, as 2 Tim. iii. 4, where a Greek classical idiom, of which there is no instance in the New Testament, would have admitted two comparatives.
(2) When the object of comparison is a clause.
Rom. xiii, 11: éyyérepov ... ) 8re érioretoapev, nearer (our sal- vation) than when we believed.
(3) When a Comparative governs, as an ae words other than its object.
Matt. x. 15: dvenrérepov gora: yi Sodduav % wéder exelvy, zt shall be more tolerable for the land of Sodom (Dative, by § 279) than for that city.
After whelwv, metov, more, and Adrrev, darrov, less, the particle may be omitted before numerals.
eons oe ee eee ee ee
* Winer, § xxxv. 5.
296 ADJECTIVES—COMPARISON. [§ 321. |
Acts xxiv. 11: od mhelous ciot pou fipépor SexaSto, x 7.r., lit., there are to me no more days (than) twelve. So iv. 22, xxiii. 13.
Matt. XXvi. 53: mAclous 848exa Aeyedvas, more than twelve legions.
In some of these passages the received text inserts #.
A peculiar comparative is occasionally made by paddov after the positive.
Mark ix. 42: Kaddv dor aira paddov, «.7.d., tt is better for him.
Acts xx. 35: paxdpuv dors paddov diddvar 4 AauBdvew, it ts more blessed to give than to receive.
Sometimes padXov is omitted.
Matt. xviii. 8,9: Kadév cor éorly cioedOciv ... 4... BAnOAvar, té is better for thee to enter ... than... to be cast, lit., “it is good... rather than.” So Mark ix. 43-47. Compare also Luke xviii. 14 (rec., but the reading is probably map’ éxeivoy ; § 306, y, 3).
Hence also a comparative notion may be expressed by # after a noun or verb.
Luke xv. 7: xapa fora... ext evi... emt evvernxovta evvéa, there shall be joy ... over one... (rather) than over ninety and nine.
Luke xvii. 2: Avovredt aira... } tva cxavdadicn, lit., % is pro- fitable for him ... (rather) than that he should offend.
1 Cor. xiv. 19: @&o mévre Adyous Sia Tod vods pov Aadjoa... puplous Aéyous év yAooon, I would (rather) speak five words with my understanding, than ten thousand words in a tongue.
322. For the Comparative as strengthened by the prepositions imép and mapd, see §§ 303, 306. Other emphatic modes of comparison are specified, § 47.
323. A Comparative is often found without any expressed object of comparison.
a. The object may be supplied by the context, as Acts xvii. 20: dxpiBéorepoy aird e&dbevro riv Tod cod dddv. they expounded to him the way of God more perfectly, v.¢., than he had known before
§ 323.] ADJECTIVES—COMPARISON. _ 297
(ver. 25). Compare John xix. 11; Rom. xv. 15; 1 Cor. xii. 31; Phil. ii, 28; Heb. ii. 1, &ce. So in correlative expressions, Rom. ix. 12; Heb. i. 4.
b. The Comparative may be a familiar phrase, as of mheloves, the majority, Acts xix. 32; 1 Cor. xv. 6; 2 Cor. ii. 6 (not simply “many,” as E.V.), &e.
c. The object is to be tej: mentally, according to the general sense of the passage.*
Matt. xviii. 1: ris dpa pellov early év rh Bacthela tar odpavar ; who then is greater (than the rest) in the kingdom of heaven ?
So Mark ix. 34; Luke ix. 46, xxii. 24. In Matt. xi. 1], 6 uipdrepos
may be rendered, he that is less than all others, t.e., ‘he that is least,”
as E.V., or he that is less than John (in fame and outward honour), i.e., Christ himself ; the sentiment being that of ‘John i. 15.+
The following examples further illustrate this usage of the comparative :—
John xiii. 27: that thou doest do more quickly, téxvov, 1.¢., than you seem disposed to do.
Acts xvii. 21: to tell or to hear some newer thing, tr Katvérepoy, than the last things that they had heard, “the later news.”
Acts xvii. 22: ye men of Athens, I perceive that in all things ye are more addicted to worship, SaucBapoverrépovs, z.e., than heathen nations generally (not merely, like them, worshipping recognised deities, but even the “unknown.”) ft
Acts xxiv. 22: the matters pertaining to the way (the Christian doctrine) more accurately, axpiBéorepov, than to need detailed information.
Acts xxv. 10: to the Jews I have done no wrong, as also thou
* See Winer, § 35, 4.
t+ This latter is the interpretation of many of the Fathers, but is disal- lowed by most modern critics. (See Alford’s note.)
t ‘‘Too superstitious,” therefore, misses the true meaning both of the word and the grammatical form,
298 ADJECTIVES—COMPARISON. _ [§ 323,
knowest better, xé\wv, than thou choosest to confess. Alford compares our current phrase, to know better. So 2 Tim. i 18, better even than I do.
Acts xxvii. 13: they seered closer by Crete, dooov mapedéyovro tiv Kpyrny, u.€., than they had done before ; ver. 8.
On Eph. iv. 9, see § 259.
Phil. i. 12: rather, paiddov, for the furtherance of the Gospel _ than for its hindrance as we feared.
1 Tim. iii. 14: hoping to come unto thee more quickly, réxvov, than to make such injunctions needful. Compare Heb. xiii. 19, 23.
2 Tim.i. 17: he sought me out more diligently, crov8ardrepov, than if I had not been in captivity.
2 Pet. i. 19: Kai ¢youev PeBardrepov tov mpodpnrixdy Aédyov, lit., and we have more sure the prophetic word, .e., we hold that word with a surer confidence even than before, inasmuch as we received a confirmation of its testimony ‘‘ upon the holy mount.”
2 Pet. ii. 11: angels which are greater in power and might, petoves, either greater than other angels,* as the archangel, Jude 9, or greater than these presumptuous, self-willed men.t
From the above explanations it will be seen that the Comparative in such cases is not to be explained as ‘‘ put for the Superlative,” or as
expressing the notions of ‘‘too” or ‘‘ very,’ but retains its true and proper force.
The Superlative.
324. The Superlative denotes the highest quality of any kind, and may be used when the objects of comparison are not explicitly intimated.
2 Pet.i.4: ra peyora kai rimea emayyéApara, the greatest and precious promises, or as E.V. happily, “exceeding great and precious,” |
In Luke i. 3, we read kpdriore Ocdure, most excellent Tieophilus ;
* Huther. + Winer, Alford, &c.
§ 324. ] ADJECTIVES—THE SUPERLATIVE. 299
but in Acts xxiii. 26, xxiv. 3, the same title is applied to Felix, and in xxvi. 25, to Festus. It was simply a designation of rank.
325. For the Superlative followed by a partitive Genitive, see § 262. An emphatic Superlative is made by the addition of wévrov, Mark xii. 28, the first commandment of all (not racdy, as received text).
The particle és (dr), with a Superlative, means “in as great a degree as possible.” Acts xvii. 15: iva ds téXuera éhOwor mpéos airy, that they would come to lim as speedily as possible.
326. The Superlative zparos, first, may be used where but two things are compared.
Acts i, 1: roy peév mp&rov dAdyov émounoapny, the first (former) treatise I made. So 1 Cor. xiv. 30;* Heb. x. 9.
So the expression mprés pov, before me, John i. 15, 30; awp&rog ipav, before you, xv. 18. The Genitive is analogous to the Genitive after the Comparative. On Luke ii. 2, see note, § 319.
327. In Hebrew there are two principal ways of expressing the Superlative ;—(i.) by the use of the preposition in, among, after the simple adjective, as Prov. xxv. 30, a lion, strong among beasts, i.¢., the strongest of beasts ; + (ii.) by the repetition of an adjective or noun in the Genitive relation, as in the commen appellation of the holiest part of the Temple, the holy of holies, and Gen. ix. 25, a servant of servants, 2.e., utterly enslaved.t
The New Testament has instances of both these idioms. (i.) Luke i. 42: etdoynpévn od ev yuvalg, blessed art thou among women,
* But perhaps here the mental comparison might be, not simply with the second speaker, but with the rest of the assembly.
t+ Compare the use of a Hebrew preposition to give the force of the comparative.
} There is yet a third method, i.e., the emphatic use of the adjective with the article, as Gen. ix. 24, his son, the young, i.e., his youngest, But perhaps there 1s no example of this in the New Testament, though see Luke x. 42.
300 ADJECTIVES—THE SUPERLATIVE. - [g8e7.
t.e., most blessed. (ii.) Heb. ix. 3: ya dylov, the holy of holies, Compare | Tim. vi. 15; Rev. xix. 16.
- Neither of these constructions is confined to the Hebrew, although their occurrence in the New Testament may fairly be assigned to Hebrew influence. Other so-called Hebraisms must be rejected.* Thus, Acts vii. 20, doreios TG OcG, must not be rendered, as in E.V., ‘‘ exceeding fair,” but beautiful before God, in his eyes. Much less must the Divine name be taken as giving a simple superlative force in such passages as Luke i. 15; 2 Cor. i. 12; Col. ii. 19; Rev. xv. 2, &e.
NUMERALS.
328. The Cardinal cis, besides its ordinary use, is employed in the following ways.
i. As an indefinite pronoun,t nearly equal to tis.
Matt. viii. 19: es ypaypareds cirev airad, a scribe said unto him.
Matt. xxvi. 69: mpoo7ndOev aird pla madionn, there came to him a maidservant.
John vi. 9: gore waddpiov &v Hdc, there is a lad here.
So Matt. xviii. 24, xix. 16; Mark x. 17, xii. 42; Rev. viii. 13, &c. Often with a Genitive following, as Matt. xvi. 14; Mark v. 22. Some- times with éx, as Matt. xxii. 35, xxvii. 48. Occasionally, eis 71s combined, as Luke xxii. 50.
ii. For the correlatives, one... the other, cis is sometimes employed in both clauses.
Matt. xx. 21; Mark x. 37 : ds ek SeEvav cov, kal els €€ ediovipor sov, one on thy right hand, and the other on thy left.
John xx. 12; 1 Cor. iv. 6; Gal. iv. 22; 1 Thess. v. 11. But kaos, érepos are more frequently used in the second clause, as Matt. vi. 24; Rev. xvii. 10,
* See Winer and others.
+ The indefinite article in the European languages is but a form of the numeral “one.” We say ‘‘a or an;” we should rather say “an or a,’’ the _ longer being the original form, and an=Scottish ane=one. So French, un; Geruian, en, &e.
§ 328. ] ADJECTIVES—THE NUMERALS. : 301
iii. For not one (ovdeis, pndeis), the New Testament writers, following the Hebrew idiom, sometimes say one ... not, combining the negative with the predicate.
Matt. x. 29: &é& abrdy ob meceira, one of them shall not fall, z.e., not one of them shall fall. So ch. v. 18; Luke xii. 6.
But the adjective was, every, is still more frequently employed in such expressions. Thus, “everything is not...” means “nothing is.”
Luke i. 37: otk ddvvarnces mapa TH OeG wav pjpya, everything is not-impossible with God, i.e., nothing is impossible.
So Matt. xxiv. 22; Mark xiii. 20; John iii. 15, 16, vi. 39, xii. 46: Rom. iii. 20; 1 Cor. i. 29; Gal. ii. 16; 1 John ii. 21; Rev. xviii. 22, ‘“‘ Forget not all his benefits” (Ps. ciii. 2), of course means ‘‘ forget not any.” But when ov is connected with was, the meaning is simply not all. So Matt. vii. 21, ob was Acyor ... civeAedoerat, not every one... shall enter. Had the reading been was Aéywr...ob« eiceActoerat, it would have meant ‘“‘no one... shall enter.” (See Matt. xix. 11; 1 Cor. xv. 39;
Rom. x. 16: od mdytes irhkovoay, not all obeyed. mdytes ovx brihKkovcay would have been, ‘‘they all disobeyed.”
iv. Instead of the ordinal mp&ros, the cardinal ¢s is used in the designation of the first day of the week (again a Hebraism).
Matt. xxviii. 1: cis plav caPPdreyv, lit., on the day one of the week.
So Mark xvi. 2 (but ver. 9, mpérn) ; Luke xxiv. 1; John xx. 1, 19; Acts xx. 7; 1 Cor. xvi. 2. In Titus iii, 10; Rev. vi. 1, 3, ix. 12, we find one and the second as correlatives.
329. The particles ds, deel, about, &c., are used with numerals adverbially, i.e., without affecting the case. Matt. xiv. 21; Mark v. 13; Rom. iv. 19, &. So with éréve, above, which in other connexions is followed by a Genitive.
1 Cor. xv. 6: @6n eave mevraxorlos a8eAdois, he was seen by above five hundred brethren. So Mark xiv. 5 (where the Genitive is that of price).
330. .The names of measures and coins may be omitted after numeral designations. Acts xix. 19: dpyvpiov pupuiSae wéyre (five
302 ADJECTIVES—THE NUMERALS. [§ 330. |
myriads), fifty thousands of silver, i.e., dpayuov=denarii. Else- where the plural dpyipia (pieces of silver) is used, as Matt. xxvi. 16, &e.
331. The Greeks used the phrase “himself third,” for “he and two others,” atrds tplros. So airds rérapros, he and three others, &e. Sometimes airés was omitted. This idiom occurs once in the New Testament. 2 Pet. ii. 5: 8ySoov Nae... epirake, he preserved — Noah, and seven others.
The Distributive Numerals have been sufficiently explained, § 52.
§ 332.) _ PRONOUNS—PERSONAL. 303
CuarTteR V.—PRONOUNS. Tue PrErsonaL Pronouns.
332. The rules respecting the cases of nouns, and their employment with prepositions, for the most part apply to the personal and other substantive Pronouns also.
For the oblique cases of the third personal pronoun, in both numbers and all genders, forms of the adjective pronoun atrés are employed.
For the other uses of airds, see § 335.
The Nominative of the personal pronoun, when the subject of a verb, is omitted, except where emphasis is
required. (See § 169.)
333. The Genirivz is very frequently used in a possessive sense; the adjective possessive pronoun being comparatively
rare. (See § 255.)
Matt. vi. 9,10: Tldrep hpav 6 év rots otpavois, aytacbnrw rd bvopd gov, eAGéra H Bacirela wov, x.7.r., Our Father which art in heaven, hallowed be thy name, &e.
Matt. vil. 3; ri d¢ Brérets Td Kappos 7d ev TH 6POaApG Tod a8eAhod gov (personal pronoun), ri d¢ ev tH oH dpOarpe@ (adjective pos- sessive) Soxov od katavocis ; and why seest thow the mote in the eye of thy brother, but discernest not the beam in thine own eye ?
The only possessive for the third person in the New Testament is the Genitive of airds.
Conversely, an objective genitive may be expressed by the possessive adjective pronoun,
304. | PRONOUNS—PERSONAL. —s—s— [83 333.
Luke xxii. 19; 1 Cor. xi. 25: rodro roseire cis Thy eh avapvaow, this do for my remembrance, %.e., ‘for remembrance of me.” So Rom. xi. 31, “through mercy shown to you ;” xv.4; 1 Cor. xv. 31, — “by my glorying in you;” xvi. 17, “the lack of you.”
John xv. 9: peivare ev TH dyary TH eA, abide in my love, has sometimes been taken in a similar sense; but it seems better to take the pronoun there as a true possessive. (Compare § 269.)
In one striking passage, Eph. iii. 18, there seems the omission of a genitive pronoun, “what is the breadth ?” &c., ie, “of the love of Christ.”*
334. Occasionally in a lengthened sentence, a seemingly redundant personal pronoun is found.
Matt. viii. 1: xaraBdvte Sé atte drs rod dpovs jKorovOncay atro GxAor ToARoi, and when he had come down from the mountain, great multitudes followed him.
Acts vii. 21: éxreOévra b€ airiv dveikero aitdvy 7 Ovydtnp Papad, and when he was cast out, the daughter of Pharaoh took him up. Where the object of a verb is expressed in the nominative absolutely, for the sake of emphasis, its place in the sentence is supplied by a pro- noun. (See § 242.)
Rey. iii. 12: 6 vixdy worhow abtoy atiaoy, He that overcometh, I will make him a pillar.
335. As airds properly means very, self, it is used in apposition with nouns of both numbers and of all cases and genders, as well as with the personal pronouns of the first and second persons, When employed in the nominative for the third person, it is always emphatic,t ¢.e., not He simply, but He himself.
Rom. vii. 25: airds éyd... Sovredo, J myself serve. John iv. 42: adrol yap dxnxdaper, for we ourselves have heard.
1 Thess. iv. 9: atrot yap ipets Ocodidaxroi éore, for ye yourselves are taught by God.
* See Ellicott, t See Winer.
«
§$ 335.] PRONOUNS—airés. 805
(1) The reflexive pronoun of the third person may be used for that of the other persons where no ambiguity would be HET to occur.
a. Singular (never for éyavrod).
John xviii. 34: dd’ éavtod ot roiro Aéyers; sayest thow this of thyself ?
So in some other passages where the reading varies; as in quotations of Lev. xix. 18 (Matt. xix. 19; Mark xii. 31; Luke x. 27; Rom. xiii, 9). The approved reading, however, is ceaurdy.
6. Plural (more frequently).
2 Cor. iii. 1: dpydpeba radu Eavrods cunordve ; are we beginning again to commend ourselves ?
2 Cor. xiii. 5: éavrods meipagere ... Eavtods Soxmdtere, try your- selves ... test yourselves.
So in the frequent phrase mpooéxere (or Bdémere) éavrois, take heed
to yourselves. Mark xiii. 9; Luke xii. 1, xvii. 3, xxi. 34; Acts
y. 35; 2 John 8. Also Eph. v.19; Jamesii. 4: one with another. For the use of a’rés with the Article, see § 222. (2) In respect of gender and number, avrés often follows the rule
of rational concord (synesis). (See § 317, and for a similar usage with the relative pronoun, compare § 345.)
a. Gender.
Matt. xxviii 19: paOnrevoare mdvra ra evn, Rierricanse abrots, disciple all the nations, baptizing them.
Col. ii. 15: dmexdvcduevos ras apxds kal ras &oveias ... OprayBevoas airots, stripping away from himself the principalities and the powers ... triumphing over them.
Mark v. 41: kparnoas rijs xeupis rod maiSlov, Xéyer adry, taking the child by the hand, he saith unto her.
6. Number.
Matt. 1. 21: cadce: tov Aadv adrod dd Trav dpapriay atrav, he shall save lis people from their sins,
806 PRONOUNS—airés. | [§ 335.
3 John 9: %ypod mm ri exxdnola, Grr’ 6 ditompatedav atray Avorpéepys, x.r.r., I wrote somewhat to the buck, but Diotrephes who loves pre-eminence over them.
So in reference to dydos, rA#bos, &e.
(3) This pronoun may also refer to a substantive implied in some previous word or phrase.
Matt. xix. 13: of 8€ paénrat érerinnoay atrots, but the disciples rebuked them, t.e:, those that brought the children ; Mark x. 13.
John viii. 44: pevorns ori cal 6 warhp adros, he is a liar and the father of it, 2.e., of lying. _ So Matt. iv. 23; Acts viii. 5; 2 Cor. v. 19, ‘‘to them,” i.e. the inhabitants of the world. Rom. ii. 26, the concrete implied in the abstract, axpoBuorla; Eph. v. 12, ‘‘ by those who walk in the darkness,” or (Ellicott) ‘‘the children of disobedience,” ver. 6.
PossEssIvE PRONOUNS.
336. On the possessive use of the Genitive of Personal Pronouns, and the employment of the Possessives as equivalent to the objective genitive, see § 333. For the Article with posses- sive pronouns, see § 223.
The various use of the Possessives as Adjectives, epithetic and predicative, may be exemplified by the following phrases :—
John v. 30: 9 xpiows q epr Sixaia éoriv, my gudgment is just.
Rom. x. 1: 4 eddoxia ris eps xapdias, the desire (goodwill) of my heart.
Phil. iii. 9: py exov epav Scxacocivyy riv ek vdpov, not having a righteousness of my own, viz., that from lan.
John xvii. 10: ra ua mdvra oh dort, cai TA od ed, all mine are thine, and thine are mine.
The possessive adjective pronoun appears to have a greater emphasis than the genitive of the personal. Thus (1 John ii. 2), ‘‘he és the pro- pitiation for our sins,” jpav, a general declaration; but in the next clause this is thrown into strong antithesis—not for ours alone, but, &e. ; and here, accordingly, the adjective pronoun is employed, ob wep) ray hmerépwv Se wdvov,
§ 336. | PRONOUNS—POSSESSIVE. 307
The genitive of a noun is sometimes found in apposition with the genitive notion in the possessive pronoun.
1 Cor. xvi. 21: rq pf xerpi Tatdrov, by my hand (that is) of me, Paul. Col. iv. 18; 2 Thess. iii. 17.
337. For a possessive pronoun, entirely unemphatic, the Article is often employed (see § 215), and on the other hand an emphatic possessive is expressed by the Adjective iS:os, own.
John i. 42: eipioxer obtos mpadros tiv added Tov Brov Sipeva, this man findeth first his own brother Simon. See also Matt. ix. 1, xxv. 15; Luke vi. 44; John iv. 44, v. 18: *‘ said
that God was his own father ;’ Acts xx. 28; Gal. vi. 9: ‘* its own season ;” also 1 Tim. ii. 6; Titus i. 3; 2 Pet. i. 20, and many other passages. *
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
338. The demonstratives ofros, atrn, rotro, this (the nearer, connected with the second person), and ékeivos, éxeivn, éxeivo, that (the more remote, connected with the third person), with the correlatives (see § 62), obey the laws of adjective concord).
For the use of the demonstratives with the article, see § 220. ‘Ovros
generally precedes its substantive, éxeivos follows; but to this rule there are many exceptions.
Luke xviii. 14: xaréBy otros Sedixatwpévos cis tov otkoy avrov 7} éxelvos, this man (the latter) went down justified to lis house rather than that (the former).
339. The demonstrative Se, this (‘‘ this, here,” connected with the first person), is found only Luke x. 39; James iv. 13; and in the phrase ré8e Aéye, thus (these things) saith, Acts xxi. 11, and the beginnings of the letters to the seven churches; Rev. ii., ili.
“Ode marks a closer relation than odtos. In Greek narrative generally,
Zaete tava is, he said this that precedes; ércte tdde, he said this that JSollows.
* Winer notes the following passages as without emphasis (but query %) : Matt. xxii. 5, xxv. 14; Titus ii, 9; John i, 42; Eph. iv. 22; Titus ii. 5; 1 Pet. iii. Ll, 5.
308 _ PRONOUNS—DEMONSTRATIVE. [§ 339. -
There are a few other passages in which the received text has 88e, but where the best editors adopt other readings, as Acts xv. 23; 2 Cor. xii. 19; Luke xvi. 25, where we should read, he is comforted here.
340. In some passages, odros seems to refer to the remoter subject.
Acts vill. 26: atrn éoriv epnyos, tz, the road, not the city of Gaza, is desert.
2 John 7 : otros éoriv 6 mAdvos kal 6 dvtixpioros, this is the deceiver and the antichrist, t.e., he who bears the character described at the commencement of the verse.
So éxeivos may refer to the nearer.
John vii. 45: kat elroy avrois éxetvor, and they (the chief priests and Pharisees just mentioned) said to them, the officers spoken of before.
*Exeivos is employed as an emphatic demonstrative, and sometimes on that account seems applied to the nearer antecedent. Thus 2 Cor. viii. 9: ‘* Ye know the grace of the Lord Jesus Christ, that for your sakes he became poor, rich as he was, that ye, through. His (érelvov) poverty might be enriched.” So Titus iii. 7. Compare Acts iii. 13,
2 Tim. ii. 26 is difficult: eCwypnutvo: ba’ abrod, eis 7d exelvov OéAnua. The two pronouns can hardly refer to the same subject (compare iii. 9) ; and it seems best to connect the clause beginning with eis with avarhyoow, taking é(wypnuévor bm abtod as parenthetical. Ellicott: ‘‘and that they may return to soberness out of the snare of the devil (though holden captive by him) to do His will,” i.e., God’s. For other explana- “ tions, see Alford, Ellicott, &c.
341. A Demonstrative often repeats the notion already expressed by a substantive. The pronoun thus occasionally seems redundant, but perhaps was always intended to convey some additional emphasis,
Matt, xili. 20-23: 6 8€... omapeis ... otrés éorw, that which was soun ... this is he, &e. So x. 22, xiii. 38, xv. 11, xxvi. 23; John vi. 46 ; John i. 18, 33 (2xeivos), v. ll, x. 1, &.
1 Cor. vi. 4, rodrovs; Rom. vii. 10: compare Acts i. 22; 1 Cor, v. 5: 2 Cor, xii. 2,
§ 341.] PRONOUNS—DEMONSTRATIVE. _ 309
The Demonstrative itself may be repeated ina sentence. John vi, 42: ovx odtds éotiv “Inoois 6 vids *Iwohh ... mas obv Aéye: ovTOS; K.T.A., Is not this Jesus, the son of Joseph, how then sayeth this man? &c. (See also Acts vii. 35-38.)
342. The Neuter Demonstrative sometimes stands as equiva- lent to a clause.
Acts xxiv. 14: épodoyd S€ rotrd cot, tt, x7... but this I confess to thee, that, &c.
So xxvi. 16; Eph. iv. 17, &c.
The neuter plural may be employed for a single object of thought.
John xv. 17: ratra évréd\Xopar ipiv, tva dyamare GAAAAOvs, this I command you, that ye love one another.
3 John 4: petforépay totrav ovk gy yapdy, a more surpassing joy than this I have not. Compare 1 Cor. vi. 11: kai tatrd rives fre, and such were some of you, or, “such were you in some degree.” (See § 352, iii.)
In Heb. xi. 12, the phrase nal ratra, «.7.A,, must be rendered, and
that, too, when he was as good as dead. Compare 1 Cor. vi. 8, received text.
In Rom. xiii. 11; 1 Cor. vi. 6; Phil. i. 28; 3 John, 5 (Lachmann and Tischendorf), «al rodro is similarly reswmptive. On Eph. il. 8, ri yap xapirtl eore cecwopéevor Bid miotews, Kad TOTO ovK ef duav, x.7.A., see § 403, d.
For the ellipsis of the Demonstrative before the Relative, see § 347.
Tuer RELATIVE PRoNovuN.
343. The Relative Pronoun agrees with its Antecedent in gender, number, and person. This rule is termed the Third Concord.
The clause in which the Relative stands is called the Relative Clause, and is Adjectival (see § 190), as qualifying the Antecedent.
The Case of the Relative is determined by the structure of its own clause.
310 PRONOUNS—RELATIVE. —«[§ 843,
Matt. ii. 9: 6 dornp 8v cidov év rH dvarohy mporyev adrovs, the star ’ which they had seen in the East, guided them forward. _ Rom. ii. 6: rod Gcod, 8s dmodéce, K7.d., of God, who will recom- pense, Xe.
344, A clause, or clauses, may form a neuter antecedent to the Relative. So with the Demonstrative (see § 342).
Acts. xi. 29, 30: Spicav éxacros adray eis Staxovlay méupar rots Karot- koto év ry ‘Lovdalq adeApois’ 8 cal éoincay, they determined, each of them, to send to the brethren dwelling in Jerusalem for their relief ; which they also did.
See also Gal. ii. 10; Col. i 29; Heb. v. 11, &c.; and with plural relative, Acts xxiv. 18 (éy ofs), xxvi. 12; Col. ii. 22.
345. Synesis, or rational concord, is very frequent with the Relative. (See § 317.)
a. Gender.
Acts xv. 17: mdvra ta Hn &” ods, x.1.d., all the Gentiles, upon whom, &, So xxvi. 17; Gal. iv. 19; 2 John 1; 2 Pet. iii. 16.
b. Number.
Phil. ii. 15: -yevedis cxodsas cal Sueorpappevns, ev ots haiverbe, K.7.A.5 of a crooked and perverted generation, among whom ye appear, &e.
A plural may be implied in a singular phrase; hence sometimes a plural relative with a singular antecedent. Acts xv. 36: Kara wacay mérw, ev ais, through every city, in which (cities), So 2 Peter iii. 1.
On the contrary, a singular may be implied in a plural phrase. Acts xxiv. 11: tuépa dexaddo ad’ js, twelve days from that on which ; Phil. iii, 20: odpavois... €€ ob. But here é of may be adverbially taken, whence.
In John i, 42, 6 agrees with dvoua, name, implied.
346. The Relative is often drawn, or “attracted,” out of its proper gender or case by some other word.
Attraction is of two kinds.
a. Attraction of the Relative to the Predicate—-The Relative
§ 346. | PRONOUNS—RELATIVE. ell
Subject may take the gender of its own Predicate rather than that of the Antecedent. ;
Mark xv. 16: @gcw ris atdfis 8 ears mpatrdpiov, within the hall which is the Pretorium.
1 Cor, iii. 17: 6 vads rod Ocod dyids eorw, olrwes core tycis, the temple of God is holy, which (temple) ye are.
Gal. iii, 16: 1 oméppart cov 8s ear. Xpiorrds, “ to thy seed” which is Christ.
Col. i. 27: rod purrnpiov rovrov ... 8s ears Kprords ev tyiv, x.7.d., of this mystery ... which is Christ in you, &. This text explains the meaning of 1 Tim. ii. 16, provided the reading of most modern editions be adopted. “ Confessedly great is the mystery of Godliness, 8s épavepd0yn ev capkl, «7.r., who was manifested in thie flesh, z.¢., the Mystery is CuristT.
b. Attraction of the Relative to the Antecedent.—A Relative which would properly, by the rules of its own clause, be in the Accusative case, conforms to a Genitive or Dative Antecedent.
Luke ii. 20: émi waiow ots feovcar, for all things which they heard.
Luke iui. 19: repl mévtov av eroince movnpar, for all the evil things which he had done.
John iv. 14: é« rod Wares ot ey ddcw avrd, of the water which I will give to him.
Actsi. 1: epi mévrav ov fpEato 6 Incods maeiv re kai diddcxery, concerning all things which Jesus began both to do and to teach.
Acts 1. 22: Suvdipert cal tépact cai onpelots, ols eroince, x.t.A., bY mighty deeds and wonders, and signs which (God) wrought, &e.
So in a great number of passages. The Relative is occasionally “attracted” out of other cases than the Accusative. See Acis i. 22; 2 Cor. 1 4.
Sometimes the Antecedent is put in the case of the Relative. This is called «verse attraction.
In other words, the noun to which the Relative belongs is understood in the antecedent clause, and expressed in the relative, instead of being (as usual) expressed in the former and understood in the latter.
&
312 | PRONOUNS—RELATIVE. [§ 346
Mark vi. 16: 8v éya drexepddica “Iwdvvyy, obros nyépOn, this John whom I beheaded arose, instead of dy ... odros "Iwdvyns.
Rom. vi. 17: timnxovcare ... cis bv mapeddOnre titov didayqs, Ye obeyed the form of doctrine into which ye were delivered, for iinet ... T@ TUT® ... els Ov.
See also Luke xii. 48; Acts xxi, 16, xxvi. 7; 1 Cor. x. 16, &c. ; and the repeated quotation from Ps. cxviii, 22. Al@ov dy aredoxiuacay ... obros
éyevnon, K.7.A., Matt. xxi. 42; Mark xii. 10; Luke xx. 17; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (in this last passage Lachmann has Af@0s).
347. When the Antecedent would be a demonstrative pronoun, it is very often omitted, being implied in the Relative.
So in English, for ‘‘he gave me that which I asked for,” we say ‘‘ he gave me what I asked for ;” the relative form ‘‘ what” implying both words. But in Greek the same form is used whether the demonstrative antecedent is expressed or implied.
Matt. x. 27: 8 Aéyo ipiv ev rH croria... kai 8 cis 1d ovs dxovere, what I say to you in the darkness ... and what ye hear (into, § 298) in the ear.
The Relative and the implied Antecedent may be in different cases,
Luke vii. 47: @ 8€ drdiyov ddierat, ddiyov dyard, (he) to whom little is forgiven, loveth little.
John iv. 18: 8v dyes od« ore cou avnp, (he) whom thou now hast is not thy husband.
Heb. v. 8: guabev ag? dv erabe riv imaxonv, he learned his obedience from those things which he suffered.
348. The pronoun adrés is occasionally inserted in apposition with the Relative, as a kind of complement to it.
This is a Hebrew idiom; the relative in that language being inde- clinable, and requiring to be complemented by a pronoun.
Matt, iii, 12: 08 7d mriov vy rH yxeupt adrod, whose fan is in his
hand.
§ 348. | PRONOUNS-——RELATIVE. 313
Mark vii. 25: fs efye 1d Ovydrpiov atris mvedua dxdOaprov, whose little daughter had an unclean spirit.
Acts xv. 17: ed? ods eémixéxAntat 7d dvopd pou én’ abrots, upon whom my name has been called ; LXX.; Amos ix. 12.
So also Mark i. 7; Luke iii. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 24 (not Lachmann), &c.
349. The Compound Relative, 8ers, is strictly indefinite. Thus was 8s dkover, every one who hears, would denote “ every one who is now hearing ;” but was 8ers dover, as Matt. vii. 21, is “every one, whoever he be that hears.”
Matt. v. 39: 8ors famice ... Sots dyyapevoe, whosoever shall smite ... whosoever shall vmpress. :
Luke x. 35: 8, tt dv mpocdanavnons, whatsoever thou shalt have spent more. John ii. 5, xiv. 13, xv. 16, &e.*
From the indefinite meaning of dors arises a suggestion of character, kind, reason, as marking the class to which this Relative is applied.
For example, goris, and not és, is used in the following pas- sages :—
Matt. vii. 15: “beware of false prophets, who come to you,’ 7.€., such as come.
Matt. vii. 24, 26: “a wise man who built his house upon the rock, a foolish man who built bis house upon the sand ;” in each case the kind of man who did what is described.
Matt. xxv. 1: “ten virgins who took their lamps and went forth to:meet the bridegroom,” 2.e., who acted in accordance with their function.
In this way the compound Relative acquires a kind of logical force. Romans vi. 2: “we who died to sin, how shall we longer live therein,” 2.¢e., enasmuch as we died. Compare Phil. iv. 3.
* The instances of 8, 71, neuter, are very few; and there is much varia- tion of reading, ér:, conj., being often preferred (as, e.g., in 2 Cor. iv. 14),
314 PRONOUNS—RELATIVE ; INTERROGATIVE. [§ 849,
7
With proper names, 8oris is frequently preferred to 8s. See Luke ii. 4, ix. 30, xxiii. 19; John viii. 53; Acts viii. 15, xvi. 12 (on the attraction, see § 346), xvii. 10, xxviii. 18; Rom. xvi. 6, 12; Gal. iv. 26; 2 Tim. ii. 18.. In all these passages there is an implied reference to character, position, calling.
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
. 8350. The interrogative pronoun ris; ri; is used in various ways. ,
i. Simply, with or without a Substantive—
Nominative. Matt. iii. 7: tls iméSecev ipiv; who warned you ?
Genitive. Matt. xxii, 20: tlvos eikdv airy kal 4 éetypad) ; whose is this image and superscription ?
Dative. Luke xii 20: 4 68€ jroipacas tin tora; the riches which thou didst amass, for whom shall they be ?
~ Accusative, Matt. v. 46, 47: rlva pucddv eyere;... th meproody moire ; What reward have ye? ... what do ye over and above ? With Prepositions. Matt. v. 13: é& rl ddicbqoera ; wherewith shall it be salted ? | Matt. ix. 11: 8vart (did ri) pera rv reh@vev Kal duaprodar éoier ; wherefore eateth he with the publicans and sinners? So Matt. xiv. 31; Mark xiv. 4; John xiii. 28.
ii, Elliptically, with ta, that (“that what may happen?” or wherefore ?)— Matt. ix. 4: twa rl evOupcicbe movnpa; wherefore are ye imagining malignant things ? 1 Cor. x. 29: tva rl yap 4 edevdepia pov kpivera; for wherefore is my liberty judged ? In quotations from the Old Testament, written ivarl; Matt, xxvii. 46; Acts iv. 25, vii. 26.
iii. Adverbially, neuter, ri; why ? (cr as an exclamation, J/ow /)
ri drt; how (is it) that ?—
ee
§350.] ~ PRONOUNS—THE INTERROGATIVE tls. =) ee
Matt. vi. 28: wepi éevddparos th pepywware; why are ye anxious about raiment ?
So vii. 3, viii. 26, xvi. 8, &e.
Matt. vii. 14 (Lachmann, Wc.): tl orev) 9} ridn! how narrow is the gate! But this rendering is doubtful, as well as the reading itself.
Luke ii. 49: rf dri e€nreiré pe; how is tt that ye were seeking me ?
See also Acts v. 4, 9.
iv. In alternative questions, where the classical idiom requires mérepos, a, ov; whether of the two? the New Testament employs ris.
Matt. ix. 5; tl yap éorw edxorarepov, for which is easier ? (of the two).
Matt. xxi. 31: tls ex ray dbo émoince 1d OAnua Tod matpds; which
of the two did the will of his father ? So xxiii, 17, 19, xxvii. 17, 21; 1 Cor. iv. 21; Phil. i, 22 (see § 382).
351. The simple interrogative, ris, ri, is also used in indirect questions, and after verbs of knowing, thinking, &e., in objective sentences.
See § 382. The classic Greek idiom requires éo71s, 8, 71, eevee: not without exceptions,
Matt. xx. 22: ov« oidare ti aireicbe, ye know not sn ye usk.
Luke vi. 47: imodciéw ipiv tive eoriv duos, I will shew you to whom he is like.
John xviii. 21: épdrycov rods dxnxodras tl edAnoa adrois, ask those who have heard what I said to them.
So in many other passages.
352. The transition from the interrogative to the indefinite pronoun can easily be traced: It comes to almost the same thing whether we say, “ What man is there among you who will give his child a stone for bread?” or, “Is there any man among you who will?” &e.
*
316 PRONOUNS—THE INDEFINITE tts. [§ 352.
So the only difference between the forms of the two is in accent and the position in the sentence.
The indefinite, rs, 4, may be used (i.) simply, with or without Substantive expressed—
Nom, Matt. xii. 47: cize 8¢ rs aird, and one said unto him.
Luke i. 5: éyévero ... iepeds tus, there was ... a certain priest. So very often, d&vOpamds tis, a certain man.
Gen. Luke xxii, 35: pr twos torepjoare; did ye lack anything ?
Dat. Mark viii. 26: pndé eimys TW ev 7h Kopj, nor speak to any one in the village.
Ace, Acts iii. 5: mpoodoxay te map’ abrav dae, expecting to recewe something from them.
Luke xvii. 12: eloepxopevou avrov els Twa KOpNy, as he was entering into a certain village.
Acts xv. 36: pera dé twas jpyépas, And after certain days.
Phil. iii, 15: cat i te érépws ppoveire, and if in anything ye be otherwise minded (for Acc., see § 283). So Bpaxt m, for some short time, Acts v. 34; Heb, ii. 7; pépos m1, in some part, partly, 1 Cor. xi. 18.
With a Genitive following—
1 Cor. vi. 1: rodpa tis tpdv; Dares any of you ?
Acts iv. 32: 1 rav imapxdrtar aird, any of his goods.
So v. 15, &. With aré, Luke xvi. 30; with éx, Heb. iii. 13.
(ii.) pe aOay 5 ; “somebody important,” “something great,’ “anything ”—
Acts v. 36: Aéyor elvai twa ecurdy, saying that he was somebody. Compare viii. 9.
Gal. vi. 3: ef yap Soxet ris elval tr, pydev dv, ppevarara céurdv, for if any one thinks he is anything, being nothing, he deceives himself.
See also 1 Cor. iii. 7; Gal. ii. 6 and (of things) 1 Cor, x. 19; Gal. vi. 15. Compare Heb. x. 7.
§ 352.] PRONOUNS—THE INDEFINITE Ts. 317
(iii.) “ A kind of ”— : James i. 18: eis rd eivar Huas dmapynv twa, that we might be a kind of first fruits. See also Rom. i. 11, 13; and in the opinion of some interpreters, 1 Cor. vi. 11, ‘‘such in some degree were you.” * But see § 342. iv.) With numbers, “some,” approximately (or perhaps simpl 5; Sapp “4 P P pry redundant)— Luke vii. 19: mpockadreodpevos dv0 twas trav pabnrav, having called some two of his disciples. Acts xxill. 23: mpockadeodpevos S00 Twas r&v Exatrovdpyar, havin Pp M4 PX®V, Z called some two of the centurions.
These are the only instances; for the construction in Acts xix. 14 is different. For efs, one, instead of vis, and in conjunction with it, see § 328, 1. (v.) In alternative expressions we find both rwes... res and TIS ... ETEPOS— Phil. 1. 15: wes peév cai da POdvov ... Tks dé kal dv eddoxiay, some indeed even from envy ... but others also from goodwill.
Compare Luke ix. 7, 8; 1 Tim. v. 24.
1 Cor. iii. 4: grav yap déyn Ts ... repos dé, for when one saith ... and another. | :
(vi.) The negatives of ms are ot8els, pnSels, mo one. For their construction, and for the Hebraistic negative, od mas, see § 328, iii.
The compounds, ottis, wftis, are not found in the New Testament For interrogative ht, see § 370.
* Wahl.
313) ‘THE VERB—VOICE. — L$ 353.
CHarTeR VI.—THE VERB. VOICE.
353. The distinction of “voices,” in respect of form (Active, Middle, and Passive), belongs to Erymotocy. The Verb in Syntax is considered as transitive, intransitive, reflexive, or passive.
Transitive verbs may be of Active or Middle form. <A transitive Active verb may in its middle voice retain the transitive meaning with certain modifications, or may become intransitive or reflexive. The passive sense is conveyed by the Passive form.
Intransitive, or “neuter” verbs, in like manner, may be Active or Middle in form.
Tuer ActrivE VoIcE.
354. An intransitive Active verb sometimes takes a transitive meaning.
Matt. v. 45: rdv #duov airod dvar&ddAa, he causes his sun to arise ; évaré\ho being properly to arise, as 2 Pet. i. 19, &e.*
Matt. xxvii. 57: enadqrevoe is intransitive, he was a disciple. Some editors, however, read épabynrety ; and elsewhere the verb is transitive, ch. xiii, 52, xxviii. 19; Acts xiv. 21.
Aigéva, to grow, is generally intransitive, Matt. vi. 28; but in 1 Cor. iii. 6, 7, 2 Cor. ix. 10, is transitive. The English verb is similarly used (“ wheat grows ;” “he grows wheat”). So of many others.
* In this change of intransitive to transitive, we mark the influence of the Hebrew, which language attaches to neuter verbs a causative conjugation (Hiphil). In the LXX., both the neuter and the Hiphil are often rendered by the simple verb. So 1 Kings i. 43, ¢Bactdevoe, he made (Solomon) king : although faciAetw properly means fo be a king.
§ 354. | THE VERB—ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE. 319
=Irpéda, fo turn, generally intransitive in the Middle, but some- times in the Active also. Compare Matti v. 39 with Acts vii. 42.
Some verbs vary between the transitive and intransitive meaning according to form. Thus, torn, a regularly transitive or causative verb, has (with some few others) an intransitive sense in the Per- fect (with Pluperfect) and the Second Aorist, (See § 108, 3.) &yo, to lead, has imperative, &ye, go; subjunctive, &yapev, let us go. The intransitive imperative only occurs in the New Testament interjectionally, go to / (James iv, 13, v. 1).
The verb to, to have, becomes neuter before an adverb, through the ellipsis of a pronominal object, ‘to have one’s self in such a manner ;” hence “to be so,” the adverb being often translated » as an adjective. Matt. iv. 24: rots kaxds txovras (those having themselves evilly), those who were ul; Mark v. 23: Ovydrpidy pov trydros tye, my little daughter is at an extremity. So Acts xv. 36: mas txovor, how they do. (See also John xi. 17; Acts vii. 1; 1 Pet. iv. 5, &c.) So in the participle, rd viv Gov, the present time (that which has itself now).
For variations in other verbs, see Vocabulary.
“Tus Mippie Voice.
355. As compared with the Active Voice, the Middle gene- rally expresses one of three things :— 1. Action upon one’s self: the reflexive sense. 2. Action for one’s self: the appropriative sense.
3. Action, as caused or permitted: the causative sense.* 1. The reflexive sense of the Middle is comparatively rare; reflexive pronouns being generally employed with the Active.
Act. Matt. viii. 25: tyepav airdy, they aroused him. Mid. Matt. xxvi. 46: éyelpecOe, dyapev, rise, let us be going.
* Dr. Donaldson, § 432. (1) May be called the Accusative middle; (2) the Dative middle, (See 2.)
320 THE VERB—ACTIVE AND MIDDLE voice. [§ 355.
Act. 1 Pet. iii, 10 (LXX.): wavedrw rv yAdooay amd xakod, let him refrain his tongue from evil. Mid. 1 Oor. xiii. 8: etre yAdooa, watcovra, whether (there be) tongues they shall cease.
See also Matt. xxvii. 5; Mark vii. 4; Luke xiii. 29; 1 Pet. iv. L. _ In this sense the Active is transitive, the Middle intransitive.
2. As the reflexive sense is equivalent to the Active with the immediate (Acc.) pronominal Object, so the appropriative sense corresponds with the Active and the remote (Dat.) Object. Thus, Luke xvi. 9, woujoare éavrots might have been fully expressed by _ the one word, roifoacbe.
Act. John xvi. 24: atretre xal* \qeobe, ask, and ye shall receive. !
Mid. Matt. xx. 22: ov oidare ri airetode, yg know not what ye ask (for yourselves).
Act. Acts xxii. 20: pvddoooy ra indria, watching the clothes (of
Stephen’s murderers). Mid. 2 Tim. iv. 15: év cai cb pvddeoov, of whom do thou also
beware, t.e., watch him with a view to thy own safety.
Act. and Mid. 2 Pet. i. 10: omovddcare BeBaiav ipar thy Krjow kal ékdoyhy Toto ar * radra yap wowitvres, x.7.r., give diligence to make your calling and election sure for yourselves; for if ye do these things, &c.
For other instances of the Middle of wolew, see Luke v. 33, xiii. 22; Acts i. 1, xx. 24, xxv. 17, xxvii. 18; Rom. i. 9, xiii. 14, xv. 26; Eph, iv. 16; Phil. i. 4; Heb. i. 3, and a few other passages.
In this sense, the Middle is transitive, retaining the direct Object of the verb. Hence the difficulty of always distinguishing between the Active and the Middle signification ; as to perform an action, and to perform it for one’s self, are notions that may approach so as almost coincide. Compare, for instance, wapetxye (Acts xvi. 16) with wape(xero (xix. 24). The same object, épyaciav, gain, follows in both cases. Demetrius had undoubtedly a more direct interest’ in his gains than the damsel in hers.
§ 355. ] THE VERB—MIDDLE VOICT. 321
It is doubtful whether the Middle is ever to be taken as simply con- veying an intensive force. Compare John i. 5, the darkness comprehended it not (act., kavéAaBev), with Eph. iii. 18, that ye may comprehend (mid., Katadabécba) with all saints, what is the breadth, &c. The appropriative sense is here very decided. The careful student may note the middle verbs in Matt. xxi. 16 (LXX.) ; John xiii. 10 (compared with the rest of the passage); Matt. vi. 17; Luke x. 42; Acts ii. 39, v. 2, ix. 39 (émiBeuevdpevau) 5 ; Rom. iii. 25; Acts xx. 28; Gal. iv. 10; Eph. v. 16; Phil. i. 22; 2 Thess. iii. 14, aud many other Panes In 1 Tim. ii. 13, the dative pronoun is redundant.
3. The causative Middle expresses the interest of the Subject in the result, and yet implies a mediate agency ; “‘ to allow a thing to be done,” “to have it done,” “to provide for its being done.” Here the Middle partakes more nearly of the nature of the Passive.*
Luke ii. 5: d&roypdpar8a. civ Mapidp, to get enrolled with Mary.
So Mid., 1 Cor. x. 2: éBamricavro, they got baptized. Compare Mark vii. 4, and especially Acts xxii. 16.
Hence, too, in some words a change of signification ; both voices taking the accusative Object. d:ro8iSmp, to give off, or away ; aro- didopar, mid., éo sell, ie., give off or away for one’s self, 2.e., to get money by the act. Compare Matt. xviii. 26-34 with Acts v. 8, vii. 9. Savetf{o, to borrow ; Saveitoua, to lend, Matt. v. 42; Luke vi. 34, 35.
The causative meaning in some cases becomes reciprocal : “to do ... and cause others to do.”
John ix. 22: cvverewvro of Iovdaior, the Jews had agreed amongst themselves.
See also Matt. v. 40 and 1 Cor. vi. 1: xpiver@a, to contend at law , Rom. iii. 4; kal uenjops ev T@ xptvecbal ce, and that thou mayest overcorne when thou comest into trial, i.e., with the children of men; the image being that of two parties to a suit—not, when thou judgest, as £.V., Ps. li, 4, nor when thou art judged, as in the New Testament quotation.
For the special meanings of different verbs, the Vocabulary must be
consulted. The threefold division now given covers most of the relations of the Middle with the Active. .
* Lat. curare; Germ., sich lassen. So Winer, xxxviii. 3.
oi; es hey i.
50) | ! B22 THE VERB—PASSIVE VOICE. [§ 356.
Tux Passive Voicx.
356. As in other languages, the direct Object of the Active verb becomes the Subject of the Passive.
But in Greek, the remoter Object of the Active may also become the Subject of the Passive.
Genitive. Acts xxii. 30: Karnyopetrat mapa rév “Iovdaiar, he is accused by the Jews (for the gen. with xarnyopéw, see § 250).
Dative. Rom. iii. 2: émoreiOqrav ra Adyia Tod Ccod, they were entrusted with the oracles of God.
So 1 Cor. ix. 17; Gal. ii. 7; 1 Thess. ii. 4, &e.
Heb, xi. 2: épaprupiOqrav of mpecBirepa, the elders obtained a
good report (lit., were attested to). So Acts xvi. 2, xxii. 12, &e.
Heb. viii. 5: xads kexpnparicrat Maojs, according as Moses has been divinely commanded.
For the dative after the Active of such verbs, see § 278,
Where the Active governs two Accusatives (person and thing), or a Dative of the person and an Accusative of the thing, the Passive may take also the Accusative of the thing. (See § 284.)
2 Thess. ii. 15: xparetre ras mapaddces As 84x Onre, hold fast the traditions which ye were taught.
See also Mark xvi. 5; Acts xviii, 25, &c., for verbs of the former
class. For verbs of the latter class, note Rom. iii, 2, quoted above, with the counected passages,
357. After Passive verbs, the agent is marked by iné with the Genitive ; occasionally by other prepositions, as dd, éx, mapd, mpés; sometimes by the Dative without a preposition. (See §§ 280, e, 304.)
358, As many forms of the Middle and Passive are alike, it is sometimes difficult to decide which is intended. In considering
§ 358.] THE VERB—PASSIVE VOICE. 323
this question, regard must chiefly be had to the usage of the parti- cular verbs, and to the general construction of the sentence. The following is a selection of instances :—
Matt. xi. 5: arwxol ebayyedfovrat, poor men preach the Gospel, or have the Gospel preached to them. The verb may be middle or passive, * but the sense of the passage seems decisively for the latter.
Rom. iil. 9: ri odv; mpoexdpeda; What then, are we superior ? (tnid.), or, are we surpassed ? (pass.) The context requires the former meaning. Some, however (see Dr. Vaughan), prefer the passive, but render are we preferred ? a sense without authority elsewhere. For other suggested renderings, see Alford’s note.
1 Cor. i. 2: ovv waot rots émuKadovpévors rd Svopa Tod Kuplov, with all who call upon the name of the Lord, or who are called by the name. The usage of the word clearly pronounces for the former. Compare Acts vii. 59, ix. 14, 21; Rom. x. 13 (Acts ii. 21), com- pared with ver. 14; 1 Pet. 1.17, &e. Acts xv. 17 (from LXX,, Amos ix. 12) is quite different,
2 Cor. 11. 10: Kat yap éya 6 Kexdpropat, ef re Kexdpropar, dv ipas. Some render the verb here, J have been forgiven ; but xapi¢opa nowhere else means “to be forgiven,” and the ordinary rendering gives a sense harmonious with the context.
Eph. vi. 10: év8vvapote@e ev Kupim. This verb is always passive in the New Testament: “be strengthened.” (See Ellicott.)
THE MOODS AND TENSES.
359. The Indicative Mood is objective, describing that which is; the Subjunctive and Optative are subjective, describing that which is conceived to be. Hence the various uses of the three Moods. in independent and subordinate sentences.
* For the middle, see Luke i. 19, ii. 10, iii. 18, iv. 18, 43, and many other passages ; for the passive (with a personal subject), Heb. iv. 2, 6. The passive is also found, Luke xvi. 16; Gal. i. 11; 1 Pet. & 25, iv. 6, the subject being that which was preached,
324 THE VERB—MOODS AND TENSES. “[§ 359.
Tue INDICATIVE.
The Indicative Mood is used in declaration, whether affirmative or negative, and in interrogation.
360. As the force of the Tenses will be best seen in the first instance by their use in the Indicative, an account of them is here introduced. Ey
See the Table of Tenses, § 65. Let it be remembered that Tense expresses both time and state. Time is present, past, and - future ; state is imperfect, perfect, and indefinite.
The Tenses to be considered are—
1. The present imperfect, or “ Present.” . The past imperfect, or “ Imperfect.” The future indefinite, or ‘“ Future.” The past indefinite, or “ Aorist.” The present perfect, or “ Perfect.”
Or go bo
6. The past perfect, or “ Pluperfect.”
The future imperfect, the present indefinite, and the future per- fect, are expressed in other ways. _ The three past tenses are termed “ historical,” the others “ prin- cipal.” Tue Present TENSE.
361. a. The Present expresses a state or action as now exist- ing ; as Myo tpiv, I say unto you.
Matt. iii. 10: 4 d&ivn mpés riv pifav trav Sévdpwv Ketrar, the awe is lying at the foot of the trees, i.e., it is already there.
John iii. 36: 6 morevov els rov vidy me Lwin aldniov, he that
believeth on the Son hath life eternal.
Matt. xxv. 8; ai Aaymddes judy cPévwevrar, owr lamps are going out ; not “are gone out,” as E.V.
Gal. i. 6: Oavpdtw dr cttw rayéws perarier Oe, J marvel that ye are
80 soon changing.
§ 361.] THE TENSES—PRESENT. 325
b. It is also used to denote an habitual or usual act.
Matt. vi. 2: domep of troxpital mowtew, as the hypocrites do.
Matt. vii. 8: was 6 airdyv AapPdve, cui 6 (nrav eiploKa, every one
who asks receives, and he who seeks finds.
c. In vivid narration, the Present is employed of past time (the Historic Present).
Matt. iii. 1: ev 8€ rats fépars exeivars wapaylverar "Iadvyns, and im those days cometh John.
John i. 29: ri ematpiov Bréwe rdv “Incodv ... kat Aye, on the next day he seeth Jesus, and saith.
Sometimes the Historic Present is used with Aorists in the same narration.
Mark v. 14,15: tpvyov cai dafyyedav...xal iAOov ... Kal Epxovrar... kat Oewpoter ... kai époBAonray, they fled, and reluted ... and came... and they come ... and behold ... and they feared.
Variations may here be noted in the comparison of different evan- gelists in the same narrative. Thus, Matt. xxi. 23, xxii. 23, we read,
mpoo7jardov, they came to him; Mark xi. 27, xii. 18, Epxovra, they come.* Compare also Matt. xxiv. 40; Luke xvii. 34.
d. The Present is employed to express certain futurity, as when we say, ‘“ To-morrow is Sunday.”
Matt. xxvi. 2: pera S00 nuépas ro maoya ylverat... Kal 6 vidos rod avOparov twapadiSorar, after two days is the passover, and the Son of man is betrayed.
_ Luke xix. 8: 1a qylon pov ray irapydvrav kipte tots Traxois SiSopn, the half of my goods, Lord, I give to the poor; not “I am in the habit of giving” now ; but “I will give,” immediately.
John xx. 17: dvaBatve, J ascend. Compare xvi. 16.
John xxi. 23: Ore 6 paOnris exeivos otk amobvicKxea, that that disciple dieth not, z.e., “is now and will be exempt from death.”
* Asa rule, the narrations of Mark are more vivid than those of the other evangelists.
826 THE TENSES—PRESENT. [§ 361.
1 Cor. xv. 25: éoyaros éxOpis Katrapyetrat 6 Oavaros, death the last enemy is destroyed, or more lit., 7s being destroyed. In this case, and in some others, the notion of futurity is perhaps associated with that of the process now being conducted.
The verb épxoua, because of its meaning, carries with the present tense a future reference. So in English, ‘‘J am coming.” (See Luke xii. 54; 1 Cor. xiii. 11.) So Matt. xvii. 11: "HAlas tpxeras, Hlijah is coming ; and especially John xiv. 3: mdAw &pxoua kal mapadrhyoun suas, I am coming again, and will receive you. 1 Cor. xvi. 5: Makedoviay d:épxoucu must be rendered, J (am about to) pass through Macedonia, not “I am passing through,” which would be contrary to fact. The participle of this verb, 6 épxduevos, the Coming one, is a frequent title of the Messiah (see § 210), and in the Revelation denotes the eternal self-existence of Deity, ‘‘who wast, and art, and art to come,” lit., ‘* who comest.”
On the other hand, the verb x, in the present, has a perfect signi- fication: J am come. Luke xv. 27: 5 d8eApds cov fixe, thy, brother is come! John ii. 4; Heb. x. 9 (not simply ‘‘ Lo, I come,” but Lo, J am come/); 1 John v. 2,
Tuer Imrrerrect TENSE.
362. a. The Imperfect expresses what was in progress at a past time ; as éxfpvoce ro edayyeduov, he was preaching the gospel ; Bamrltovro, they were being baptized.
b. Hence the Imperfect may refer to an action not continuous, but statedly repeated ; also to anything customary.
Acts iii. 2: dv érlbovv kal? quépary, whom they used to lay day by day. Mark xv. 6: xara 8¢ éopriy &méAdvev adrois eva déopi0v, and at each passover he used to release to them one prisoner. See also 1 Cor. xiii, 11. c. The Imperfect should carefully be distinguished from the Aorist, or simple Past, although our translators have generally
rendered the two tenses alike. So Luke xxiv. 32: “while he was talking with us by the way,
and opening to us the Scriptures.” Matt. ii. 4: Herod was enquiring of the priests and scribes, not
§ 362. | THE TENSES—IMPERFECT. | 327
once for all, but ‘repeatedly ; and when they had replied, he ascertained (Aorist, one act) of the Magi what they had seen.
Matt. ix. 35: Jesus was traversing all the cities and villages: and on one ogcasion, being touched, he sazd (ver. 36), the harvest is great, &c.
Luke vi. 19: the whole multitude were seeking to touch him, for power was going forth from him, and was healing all.
Luke xiv. 7 : how they were selecting the chief seats.
John v. 16: the Jews were persecuting Jesus, and were seeking to kill him, because he was doing (used to do) these things.
Acts xvi. 4: as they were going through the cities they were delivering the decrees to the churches,
The above are but a few instances, and the reader should always note the special force of the tense. Probably the Imperfect is never really equivalent to the Aorist, or used for it; though, undoubtedly, the dis- tinction is often slight. In such cases as the following, where both tenses are used, the difference is very marked. The Aorist, it will be
seen, often marks a single occurrence; the Imperfect its continuous result.
Matt. iv. 11: dyyedor mpooAA8ov Kal Sinxdvowy aira, angels cume and were ministering to him.
Matt. xiii. 8: other seed fell (trerev) upon the good ground, and was yielding (e&t8ov) fruit.
Matt. xxv. 5: they all fell asleep (évioragav), and were slumbering (éxdBevSov).
Mark vii. 35: his ears were opened (8unvolx@yrav), and the bond of his tongue was loosed (di), and he was speaking (e&dda) plainly.
Luke vill. 23: a@ whirlwind came down (katéBn), and they were filling (cvverdhpovvro) and were in danger (éxwSivevoy).
1 Cor, iii 6: I planted, Apollos watered, God was giving the increase. The transitory acts of human teachers are expressed by Aorists, the continual bestowal of Divine grace by the Imperfect. So 1 Pet. ii, 23, 24, we have three Imperfects to denote continual
a O
ae
328 THE TENSES—IMPERFECT. [§ 362.
and aepemed acts ; but an Aorist to denote an act (“he bare our s”) once for all.’”’*
See further, Matt. xxi. 8-11; Mark xi. 18; John vii. 14, xi. 13, xx. 3-5; Acts xi. 6; 1 Cor. x. 3, 4, xi. 23 (the night on which he was being betrayed) ; Gal. ii. 12; James ii. 22, and many other passages.
In parallel passages we occasionally find different tenses (compare Matt. xix. 13 and Mark x. 13). From the latter passage we might gather that the incident was a repeated one. In such cases, the con- ceptions of the two writers are slightly different: one regarding the action as momentary, the other as continuous.¢ But in narrative some common verbs, as Aéy#, are generally used in the Imperfect rather than in the Aorist.
d, The Imperfect sometimes denotes an inchoative act, 7.e., one begun, but not carried out.
Matt. iii, 14: Sexddrvev airév, he was hindering him, %.e., was doing so until checked by our Lord’s words.
Luke 1. 59: xai ékédovv aird ... Zayapiav, and they began to call him Zacharias.
Luke v. 6: Sveppqyvuto dé 7d Sixrvov airav, and their net was breaking, began to give way.
Luke xxiv. 27: Sunpphvevev, began to*interpret, entered upon the explanation, rather than “expounded” all, as E.V.
Heb. xi. 17: rdv povoyern mporépepev, he was offering up his only begotten, when the angel’s voice arrested him.{
e. A compound (or “ resolved”) Imperfect (imperf. of eiyi, and pres. part. of the verb) throws emphasis.on the continuity of the action.
Matt, vii. 29: fv yap 88dcKxov airots, for he was teaching them.
Matt. xix. 22; Mark i. 39; Luke i. 10, 21, ii, 23; John iii. 23;
Acts i. 10, x. 24; Gal. i. 23; Phil. ii. 26, &. (See § 394, i. 1.) For the Imperfect in conditional expressions, see § 383.
* Webster.
+ See Jelf’s ‘‘Ktithner,” § 401; Winer, xl. 3, d, note,
t Winer objects to the inchoative sense in this passage. The offering was already completed in will, But had this been meant, the Aorist would have been needed,
ei
fe
§ 363.) THE TENSES—FUTURE. 329
Tur Furure TENSE.
363. a. The Future expresses, in general, indefinite futurity 5 as 8400, I will give ; and is employed in prophecies, promises, «ec,
Matt. v. 5: avrol mwapaxdnOAcovrar. So in all the Beatitudes, save vers. 3, 10.
Phil. iii. 21: 5 peracynparioe rb cdpa tis rareworews Yuav, who will transform the body of our humiliation.
Rom. vi. 14: dyapria yap ipav od xvputoea, for sin shall not have dominion over you. Not a command, but a promise. :
2 John 3: torar pel ivav xdpis, grace shall be with you, as marg., E.V.
In Matt. xxvii. 4, 24, Acts xviii. 15, the second person future has the force of a threat: ‘‘ you shall see to that.” But compare next paragraph.
6. Commands are often expressed by the Future second person (by the third, if speaking of the person commanded). Matt. i. 21: Kadéreas 7d dvoua adrod "Incodr, thou shalt call his name Jesus. Luke i, 13, 31. So Matt. v. 48, xxii. 37, 39. (and parallels, as Rom. xiii. 9; Gal v. 14); 1 Cor. v. 13, rec, text; but Lachmann, Tischendorf, &., read imperative. f In 1 Tim. vi. 8, the expression of a resolution as to the future is
indirectly a command: todtros dprecOnodpueba, we will be content with these things.
Especially in prohibitions (from Old Testament, but not only so).
Matt. vi. 5: ob« treode Soep of soxpirai, ye shall not be as the hypocrites.
So ch. iv. 7, v. 21, 27, 33; Acts xxiii. 5; Rom. vii. 7, &.* c. The Future sometimes denotes what is usual, and is employed
in maxims, expressions of general truths, and the like (‘ethical future”).
* The difference between this and the classic idiom is, that in the latter the future, with od, is the mildest form of prohibition. In Hebrew, and gO | in New Testament Greek, it is the special language of legislative authority. So Winer.
330 THE ‘TENSES—FUTURE. [§ 363. |
Eph. v. 31: karadelbe. dvOpwros marépa kat pyrépa, KT... @ man shall leave father and mother, &e. +
Gal. vi. 5: ékacros yap idvov dopriov Bacrdce, for each man shall - bear his own load. So with a negative. Rom. iii. 20: e &pyov vdpou od dixawOhoera nace cdpt, by works of law will no flesh be justified.
d. A strong negative is expressed by the Future with the double negative ot py. The Subjunctive, however, is more generally employed ; and the idiom will be found explained, § 377.
- Instances with the Future are, Matt. xvi. 22: this shall never be! Mark xiv. 31: [ will never deny thee! Luke x. 19: nothing shall ever harm you.
e. A Future imperfect (“resolved future”) is formed by the Future of the verb to be with the Present participle.
Luke i. 20: try cwrdv, thou shalt be silent.
So Matt. x. 22, xxiv. 9; Mark xii. 25; Luke v. 10, xvii. 35; 1 Cor. xiv. 9. (See § 394, 1.) ; The Future Perfect has been sufficiently explained, § 101, i.
Jf. Auxiliary Future Verbs are pédo, to be about to; and 6a, to will, The former, which is scarcely ever represented in the E.V., gives emphasis to the notion that the thing is to happen, and hence is often used of fixed and appointed purpose.* The reader may study the following passages in which pAddw occurs—
Matt. ii. 13, xvii. 12, 22, xx. 22, xxiv. 6; Mark xiii. 4; Luke vii. 2 (was at the point of death), ix. 31, 44, x. 1; John vi. 6, xiv. 22, xviii. 32; Acts v. 35 (what are we to do?), xvii. 31; Rom, viii. 13 (you are swre to die); 1 Thess. iii, 4; Heb, xi. 8 (which he was to recewwe),and many other passages. 1d péAdor, part. neut., is the futwre. Once the verb is used in the sense of delay, tl p&Aas; why tarriest thou? Acts xxii. 16.
Still more important is it to mark the use of 6, as implying conscious volition. The English auxiliary, wil/, ought here to be read as emphatic.
* See Ellicott on 1 Thess. iii, 4
§ 363. | THE TENSES—FUTURE. 331.
Matt. v. 40 (¢f any man wills to do so), xi. 14, xvi. 24, 25: “if any man wills to come after me... for whosoever wills to save his life will (future) lose it ... but whosoever shall lose his life for my sake will find it (simple futurity). So exactly Mark viii. 34, 35 ; Luke ix. 23, 24; John v. 6, 40, vii. 17: ¢f any man wills to do his will, he shall know of the doctrine ; viii. 44: the lusts of your Sather ye choose to do; Acts xvii. 18: what does this babbler want to say? Rom. xiii. 3; 1 Cor. xiv. 35: if they wish to, or, as in other passages, if they would learn anything; 1 Tim. v. 11: they want to marry; James ii. 20: willest thow to know? 3 John 13, &e.
Tue Aorist TENSES.
364. a. The Aorist denotes what is absolutely past, and answers to the English Preterite, as dvéBn ets 1d Spos, he went up into the mountain.
The First and Second Aorists have precisely the same meaning, except in the few cases specified, §§ 100, 108, 3.
The distinction between the Aorist and the Imperfect is noted, § 362, c; between the Aorist and the Perfect, § 365, 0. When the past time is not strongly marked, the English idiom often
includes a past act in a period reaching to the present time, and bence uses the Perfect, where in Greek the Aorist is the usual tense.
Luke i. 1: émetdjmep moddol emexelpnorav ... Boge xauol, forasmuch as many undertook, it seemed good also to me (“ have undertaken,” “it has seemed good).”
Luke i. 19: dmrerrddnv Aadjoa mpds oe, I (Gabriel) was sent to speak unto thee (“have been sent”). Luke ii. 48: rékvov, ri éroiqeras juiy otras ; child, why didst thou thus deal with us ? (‘‘ hast thou dealt’). Matt. xxiii. 2: the Scribes and the Pharisees seated themselves in the chair of Moses (not “sit,” simply). “They found the seat virtually empty, and occupied it,”*
* T. S. Green.
Pt ¥
~ 832 THE TENSES—AORISTS. [§ 364.
I John iv. 8: he who loves not, never got a knowledge of (tyvo)
God ; experimentally, by having at any time known what love is.””*
See also Luke xiv. 18, 19; John viii. 29, xvii. 4; Rom. iii. 23, all sinned, and so are coming short, &c. ; 1 Cor. vi. 11.
2 Cor. v. 15: ef cis imep mavrov arébavey dpa of madvres drélavov, if one died for all, then they all died. Compare 2 Tim. ii. 11.
Phil. iii. 8: J suffered the loss of all things, i.e., at the crisis of his life, ver. 12. James i. 11 (a vivid, descriptive delineation). So ver. 24 (a Perfect interposed).
2 Pet. i. 14: knowing that I must shortly put off this my tabernacle, even as the Lord Jesus Christ showed unto me. By the hath showed me (of E.V.) we lose altogether the special allusion to an historic moment in the Apostle’s life, to John xxi. 18, 19, which would at once come out if &fAwoeé por had been rendered “showed me.” t
b. In narration, an Aorist that starts from a time already past may be translated by the Pluperfect.
Matt. xxviii. 2: cewrpds éyévero péyas, there had been w great earthquake.
Luke ii. 39: as ér&tseav dravra, when they had accomplished all things.
‘See also Matt. xiv. 3; John vi, 22, xi. 30, xviii. 24, &.
c. The Epistolary Aorist, so called (as ¢ypaa), takes the reader’s point of view, in which the writing of the letter is viewed as past. Our idiom requires us to take the writer’s point of view, “J have written.”
Rom. xv. 15; 1 Pet. v. 12 (referring to the whole letter); 1 Cor. ix. 15; 1 John ii. 21, and perhaps 1 Cor. v. 9, referring to a part of it.t Gal. vi 11, referring either to the whole or to part, according to the interpretation adopted.
* Other passages in which @yvwy has been regarded as standing for the Present may be explained in a similar way.
¢ Archbishop Trench on the Authorized Version of the New Testament, p. 146. , t See Ellicott on Gal. vi. 11.
§ 364. | THE TENSES—AORISTS. 333
But %ypaya has, in other cases, its ordinary Aorist force, referring to a former letter, ‘J wrote,” 2 Cor. ii. 3, 4, 9, vii. 12; probably 3 John 9; and perhaps 1 Cor. v. 9. The word éreypa also exemplifies the Epistolary Aorist, “J have sent,” 1 Cor. iv. 17; 2 Cor. ix. 3; Eph. vi. 22; Rev. xxii. 16.
d. In classical Greek, the Aorist is frequently used to describe an act which has taken place in time past, and may take place at any time again. Here in English the Present is the usual tense. Accordingly, in the New Testament there are a few passages where the Aorist may best be translated by the Present.
Matt. iii, 17: & @ et8édnnoa, im whom I am well pleased, 1.¢., “T was, and am.” So in parallel passages.
Rom. viii. 30: edreoe... Srcatwoe ... Bdgace, he calls ... justifies ... glorifies ; “he did, and does.”*
e. The completeness of an act is occasionally marked by the Aorist.
John xiii. 31: viv BogdcOy 6 vids rod dvOpamov, now is the Son of man glorified ; the whole series of events being brought to a crisis.
1 Cor. vii. 28: thou didst not, she did not commit a sin.
So in several of the parables: dpow6n, is likened (Matt. xiii. 24, Xviil. 23, xxii. 2), “as if the mould had already received its shape, though the cast was yet to issue.”+
Compare Luke i. 51-53; John viii. 29.
Tue PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES,
8365. a. The Perfect denotes an action or event as now com- plete ; its point of view is, therefore, in the present, as 6 yéypada, yéypapa, what I have written, I have written. It denotes also a past act whose consequences remain, as yéypumra, “it has been written, and abides ;” “it is written ”t :
* Alford interprets differently. See his note. ¢ T. S. Green. } Luther, steht geschrieben.
334 THE TENSES—PERFECT. [§ 365.
6. The distinction between the Aorist and Perfect is thus very marked: reOvfkact (Matt. ii, 20), they are dead. ®avov (drébavor) would have been, they died. Compare Mark xv. 44. Even where either tense would be suitable, the proper force must be given to the one employed.
Matt. ix. 13: od yap AAOov Kadéoat Sixaious, for I came not to call righteous persons.
Luke v. 32: otk &Ahdrv0a Karéoat Stxaiovs, J am not come, &e.
In the following passages, among many others, the distinction of tenses is strikingly apparent :—
Mark iii. 26: ef 6 Saravas avéoty éf? eduriv, kat pepépiotar, for if Satan rose up against himself, and has become divided.
Acts xxi. 28: he brought (eotyayev) Greeks into the temple, and has profaned («exotvaxe) this holy place ; the single act, the abiding result.
1 Cor. xv. 4: Kal Gre eran, cai dre eyhyeptor, and that he was buried, and that he is risen again. So all through this chapter. The simple historical fact is announced by the aorist, jyép6n, Matt. xxviii. 6, 7; Mark xvi. 6; Luke xxiv. 6, 34 (John xxi. 14) ; Rom. vi. 4, &c. For the perf. part., see 2 Tim. ii. 8, compared with the aor. part., 2 Cor. v. 15.
Col. i. 16: dre &v air eerie Oy ra mdvra... ra mavra SV adrod Kal eis avrov txriorar, because in him were all things created ... all things have been created by him and for him.
Col. ili. 3: GareBdvere yap kal 4 Co ipav kékputra... for ye died, and your life remains hidden.
Rey. v. 7: #AGe cai etrAnde, he came, and he hath taken the book (which he still retains, as Lord of human destiny).
See also Luke iv. 18; John viii. 40; Heb. ii. 14; 1 Johni. 1.
366. The Pluperfect, or Past Perfect, is but rarely used in the New Testament. It denotes that which was completed at some
§ 366. | THE TENSES—PERFECT. 335
past time ; as, rePeyediwro emi ri» mérpay, it had been founded on the rock.
Acts xiv. 23: mapébevro abrods r@ Kupio eis bv werurreikacayv, they commended them to the Lord, on whom they had believed.
367. The Perfects of many verbs are used as Presents; and correspondingly the Pluperfect takes a Past signification. This arises in each case from the simple meaning of the verb, as coming into a state; Perf., being wn (having come into) that state.
So xrdoua, to gain; xéxrnua, to possess, which does not, however, occur in the New Testament. See Luke xviii. 12: wavra dca kréucu, not
of all that I possess, but of all that I gain—the income, not the capital. So xxi. 19, ‘‘ win your souls.”
For example, Kadifeo, KaOnpar, Mark xi. 7: éxdduoev, he mownted. Luke xviii. 35, &c.: éd@nro, he was sitting. Kopdopar, I fall asleep ; xexolynpor, T am asleep. 1 Cor. xi. 30: Koupdvrat ixavoi, many are falling asleep. John xi. 11: Adgapos ... kexolpnrar, Lazarus sleepeth, Ot8a, I have seen ; hence J know. (See § 13.)
“Iornwe and its compounds especially exhibit this “ Present Per- fect.” “Eoryxa, I stand, as Acts xxvi. 6. So évéornxe, is imminent 2 Thess. il. 2; dv0éornxe (trans.), resisteth, Rom. ix. 19, xiii. 2; ibéornxe, is at hand, 2 Tim. iv. 6. From éornea comes a new Present (intrans.), orjxo, Rom. xiv. 4, &e.
For other words used in a similar sense, see Vocabulary.
Interrogative Forms.
368. The several tenses of the Indicative are employed inter- rogatively, each with its proper force. The interrogative may be indicated by the appropriate pronouns or particles, or simply by the order of the words, or the general sense of the passage.
a. With interrogative words—
Matt. xxv. 37: qwére ce cidSopev mewarta; when saw we thee hungry ?
John i. 19: od tis ef; who art thou ?
336 THE INDICATIVE—INTERROGATIVE ForMs. [§ 869.
John v. 47: ws rots cuots pnuact moredcere; how will ye believe my words ?
John xi. 34: wot redeixare abrév; where have ye laid him ?
Acts vill. 30: dpa ye y.wooxes & dvaywookers, understandest thou then what thou readest ?
Luke xviii. 8; Gal. ii. 17. 6. Without interrogative words—
Matt. ix. 28: morevere drt Sivana rodro mohoa; believe ye that I am able to do this ?
Rom. vii. 7: 6 vdéuos dpapria; ts the law sin ? So John xiii. 6; Acts xxi. 37; Rom. ii. 21-23.
Hence arises occasional ambiguity.
1 Cor. i. 13: penépiora 6 Xpiords ; is Christ divided ? Lachmann reads this as an assertion: Christ is divided, i.e., by your dissensions, which rend asunder his body.
Rom. viii. 33, 34. Many critics read this as a series of questions, not question and answer, as E,V. ‘‘ Who shall lay anything to the charge of God’s elect ? Shall God who justifieth ? Who is he that condemneth ? Is it Christ who died ?” &. (See Alford’s note on the passage.)
An elliptic question is made by the use of the particle «i, if, some such phrase as, Say, or Zell us, being understood. In this case the sentence is really dependent. (See § 383.)
Matt. xii. 10: e& fear: rots od8Baor Ocpamevew ; is tt lawful to heal upon the sabbath ? (tell us if—). Acts xix. 2; e Iveta “Ayiov eddBere morevoartes ; received ye the Holy Ghost when ye believed ? So Acts vii. 1; xxi. 37; xxii. 25.
369. An affirmative answer is given, in three passages, by the formula od déyas, thou sayest, with or without addition: Matt. xxvii. 11; Luke xxii. 70; John xviii. 37. od ewas, thow didst say, is similarly used, Matt. xxvi. 25, 64.
370. Negative questions are framed according to the answer expected.
§ 370.] | THE INDICATIVE—INTERROGATIVE FORMS. 337
a. of presumes an affirmative reply. Matt. vii. 22: 0b rd o@ dvduare mpoeynredoaper; did we not pro- phesy in thy name ?
1 Cor. ix. 1: od« eipi édedOepos; ob eiut dadarodos ; K.7.r., am I not free? am JI not an apostle? &e.
Acts xiii. 10: 0d rain Siacrpépov; wilt thou not cease from perverting ? the affirmative answer being intimated as that which ought to be given. So Mark xiv. 60: dost thow not answer anything ?
Once ovkoiv is found. John xviii. 37: thou art not then a king, art thou }
b. ph expects a negative answer.
Matt. vii. 9: ph Aidov emidahae airo, will he give him a stone ?
Rom. ix. 14: ph ddicia mapa ro Ged, is there unrighteousness . with God ?
c. pare suggests an emphatic negative.
Matt. vii. 16: pate ovddéyovow dd dxavOdv crapudds, 4} amd rpiBdrov dca; men do not gather grape-clusters of thorns, or figs of thistles, do they ?
Matt. xxvi. 22, 25: pire eyo eis, xipte; (from the disciples), pare éyé ely, paBBi ; (from Judas), a ts not I, is tt, Lord ?—is it, Rabbi ?
See also Mark iv. 21; John xviii. 35 (** J a Jew!”)
It would sometimes appear as though dawning conviction would fortify resistance by a strong negative. So Matt. xii. 23 may be understood : pate ovrés éotw 6 vids AaBis; This is never the Son of David ?
‘Tue Imperative Moon. 371. The Imperative is used for command or entreaty. Matt. v. 44: dyamare robs éyOpods spar, love your enemies. Matt. vili. 25: Kipse cdoov, droddipeba, save, Lord, we perish! The negative with imperative forms is always 7. John vi. 20: ey eius* ph doPeiobe, it is J, be not afraid.
388. «° THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. | [$ 372.
372. The form of command is sometimes employed where simple permission is intended.*
Matt. xxvi. 45: KaedSere 75 Aowrdy Kal Gvarraterbe, sleep on now, and take your rest.t
See also 1 Cor. vii. 15, xiv. 38. ‘‘ Rey. xxii. 1] isa summons (Aufor- derung): ‘the fate of all is as good as already determined.’ ” +
373. Of the Imperative tenses, the Present expresses a com- mand generally, or implies continuance or repetition.
The Aorist implies that the action is instantaneous, or complete.
The Perfect (very rare) refers to an action complete in itself, yet continuous in its effect. Its meaning coincides with that of the Present in verbs where the Perfect indicative has a Present meaning.
a. The Present. Matt. vii. 1: pi xptvere, judge not. .
1 Cor. ix. 24: otrw tpéxere iva KataddByre, so run that ye may obtain.
1 Thess. v. 16-22: mavrore xalpere, ddiadeirrwas mporetyxerbe, ep mavti edxapirreire, x7... Tejoice evermore; pray without ceasing ; in everything give thanks, &e.
b. The Aorist.
Matt. vi. 6: eloehe cis 7d raptcidv cov Kal... mpdcrevgar, enter into thy chamber ... and pray.
Matt. vi. 9-11: in the Lord’s prayer, dyvacOATw ... yevnO4ro ... Sds ... Eces.
John xi. 44: Meare airov, kal ere adriy trdyew, loose him, and let him go.
c. The Perfect. Mark iv. 39: cidra! weplpooo! peace! be still |
* Winer, xliii. 1. + Bengel. ‘‘Sleep, if you feel at liberty to do so;” not in irony, not (as some) a question.
§ 3738. | | THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 339
The contrasted force of the Present and Aorist is shown where both are used in the same passage.
John v. 8: dpov rév xpdBBardv cov kai wepurdra, take wp thy bed and walk.
Rom. vi. 13: pydé wapurrdvere ra edn tuav Smda adikias tH dpapria, GAL Taparricate éavtods 7H OcG, yield not your members (as the habit of your lives) as instruments of unrighteousness, wnto sin, but yreld yourselves (a single act, once for all) wnto God.
For the employment of the Future Indicative in commands and pro-. hibitions, see § 363, b.
For the similar use of the Subjunctive, especially in prohibitions, see § 375.
The Infinitive may also be employed. (See § 392.)
In many instances, the force of the Aorist and that of the Present seem nearly identical. The former is the more vigorous expression, ‘set about it at once.”
Matt. v. 16: otrw Aap Paro 7b has ipov, x.7.rA. Here the Present might have been employed :—“ let your light beam continuously.” The Aorist means, let your light shine forth at once.
John xiv. 15: édv dyanaré pe, ras évrohds Tas éuas THPHTaTE, If Ye
love me, keep my commandments: adopt this as the law of your
lives.
Romans xv. 11: atvetre rov Kipioy rdvta ta eOvn kai érawerdrocav avrov mavtes oi Aaol, praise the Lord, all the nations: and let all the peoples burst into a song of praise to him.
See also John ii. 8, 16; 1 Cor. xv. 34 The consideration of such examples will bring to light many subtle
beauties of expression, which no translation, perhaps, could accurately represent.
THE SussuncrrvE Moop.
374, The Subjunctive, strictly speaking, cannot stand in an independent sentence. Where it appears to do so, there is in reality an ellipsis. Thus iwpev, le¢ ws go, is really a final clause (ia understood) dependent on some implied verb or phrase. In
\ heey ! “4,
640 4 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. ts 874,
such cases as the following, however, this distinction may be disregarded, and the sentences taken as to all intents and purposes independent,
The tenses in the Subjunctive and Optative are distinguished as in § 373. Compare also § 386. The Present implies continuity, the Aorist completion.
375. The Subjunctive is used as a hortatory Imperative of the first person.
John xix. 24: ph oxlowpev atrdv, ddrdd Adxopev, let us not rend it, but let us cast lots.
Rom. v. 1 (according to many) :* cipyyny qapev pbs tov Ccdr, let us have peace with God; and ver. 2,3: Kavxapela, let ws glory. So 1 Cor. xv. 32; 1 Thess. v. 6.
The Subjunctive Aorist is-used instead of the Imperative in prohibitions.t
Matt. i. 20: ph poBAeys, fear not. Matt. v. 17: pi voplenre, think not. Matt. vi. 2: ph cadrmicys, sound not a trumpet.
This usage also depends upon the ellipsis of some phrase like ‘ see,” ‘take heed,” &c., with a. In a few instances, a positive command is expressed by #a with the subjunctive (Mark v. 23; 2 Cor. viii. 7;
* The MS. evidence for this reading is very strong; indeed, in any ordi- nary case would be overwhelming. On internal grounds, however, Tischen- dorf and others prefer the rec. text, we have peace. In such a case, even the testimony of MSS. must be taken with great caution; as it seems to have been a practice with some ancient transcribers to make Scripture, as they thought,
more emphatic by turning a declaration or a promise into an exhortation. ~ It could easily be done, as nothing more was needed than to change the o of the indicative into the w of the subjunctive. So John iv. 42, ‘‘let us believe ;” Rom. v. 10, ‘‘let us be saved ;” Rom. vi. 8; ‘‘let us believe ;” 1 Cor. xiv. 15, ‘‘let me pray ;” 1 Cor. xv. 49, ‘‘ let us bear the image of the heavenly” (so Lachmann); Heb. vi. 3, ‘‘ this let us do;” James iv. 13, *‘let us go,” &c., and many similar passages. (See Alford’s note on Rom. vy. 1.) Mr. Westcott adopts the reading, éxwmev.
t This is the regular classical idiom,
§ 375. ] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 341
Eph. v. 33). For the complete phrase, see 1 Cor. xvi. 10; and with ellipsis of fva, Matt. viii. 4.
But the third person of the Aor. Imp. may be used with wh (Matt. vi. 3; Mark xiii. 16).
376. The Subjunctive is used in questions expressive of deliberation or doubt; thus, ri mwowpev; (John vi. 28) what are we to do? but ri wowipev; (John xi. 47) what are we doing? “ what are we about ?” and ri woo ; (Matt. xxi. 40) what will he do?
Mark xii. 14: Sapev 4 pi) Sdpev; are we to give, or not to give ?
Matt. xxvi. 54: més ody wAnpobdcw ai ypagat, how then should the Scriptures be fulfilled ?
1 Cor. xi. 22: ri elrw ipiv; erawiow ipas; what am I to say to you? Am I to praase you ?
The second of these verbs might be the fut. indic., the connexion only showing it to be aor. subj. As the two tenses are alike in the first pers. sing., it is often doubtful which is meant. So in the pres. of contracted verbs, ri mud ;
377. A strong denial is expressed by the Subjunctive Aorist with od pn, as od ph ce dvd, odd od ph ce éyxaradinw (Heb. xiii. 5), I will assuredly not leave thee, nor will I at all forsake thee.
This idiom arises from a combination of two phrases: uh, with the subjunctive elliptical, ‘‘fear lest” (see § 384); preceded by od, with
the word (understood) on which wf depends. ‘‘ There is not any fear or possibility lest [ should.”
Matt. v.18: tara & 7} pia Kepaia od ph wapédOy, one iota (the smallest letter of the alphabet), or one tittle ~ fragment of a letter*) shall by no means pass.
Matt. v. 20: od pa clo&Onre, ye shall in no wise enter.
Mark xiv. 25: ovkérs od ph wlo, never will I drink at all.t
See also Matt. xxiv. 2, xxvi. 35; Mark ix. 41; Luke vi. 37 (twice), xvill. 17, xxii. 67, 68; John vi. 37, viii. 51, x. 28, xiii. 8; Acts
* As, for instance, that which distinguishes A from A, or in Hebrew: n from nm. t The additional negative adds strength to the negation.
Sy THE SUBJUNCIIVE MOOD. [§ 377.
XXvVili. 26. (twice, from the LXX.; so elsewhere); 1 Cor. viii. 13; 1 Thess. iv. 15 (shall by no means precede), v. 3; Heb. viii. 11, 12 (LXX.); 2 Pet. i. 10; Rev. xviii. 21-23; with many other passages. The study of these emphatic negatives of Scripture is fraught with interest.
In the following passages only (in the best MSS. and edd.), the future is found (see § 363, d) :—-Matt. xvi. 22, xxvi. 35; Mark xiv. 31; Luke x. 19; John iv. 14, x. 5, xx. 25 (qy ?)*
For the Aorist Subjunctive in a Future-perfect sense, see
§ 383, B.
- Tyr Oprative Moon.
378. a. The Optative is used in independent ‘sentences to express a wish, as 2 Pet. i. 2: yapis tpiv cal cipnyn wAnOvv0etn, grace and peace be multiplied unto you |
As stated with regard to the Subjunctive (§ 374), the independence of the sentence is seeming only, a verbal notion on which the Optative depends being implied, as desire, pray. The Optative is in fact only another form of the Subjective mood, ‘‘ the Subjunctive of the historical tenses.” But this characteristic is almost lost in the New Testament, where the Optative is comparatively rare.
Rom. xv. 5: 6 dé Geds ... 86 ipiv, now may God grant unto you!
Philemon 20: vai, ddedde, eyo cov dvatunv ev Kupio, yea, brother, let me have joy of thee in the Lord!
So Acts viii. 20; 1 Thess. iii, 11, 12; 2 Thess. iii. 5, &c.
So with the negative, py. ,
Mark xi. 14: prkére ex cod... pydels xaprov payor, let no one ever eat fruit of thee.
2 Tim. iv. 16: ph adrois Aoywobeln, may it not be laid to their charge !
The formula pi yévorro! may at not come to pass! rendered in E.V. “God forbid!” illustrates the same usage. Luke xx. 16; Rom. vi. 2, 15, vii. 13, &e.
* The future indic. with od uf has no perceptible difference of meaning from that of the aor. subj.—J/advig, § 124, a, 3.
Fv
§ 878. | THE OPTATIVE MOOD. 343°
But a wish respecting something past is sometimes expressed by &peroy (really representing an old Second Aorist of a verb, J ought, and in classic Greek followed by an infinitive) used in the New Testa- ment as a particle with the Indicative. 1 Cor. iv. 8; 2 Cor. xi. 1; Gal, v. 12; Rev. iii. 15.
b. The particle dv gives a potential sense to the Optative, Loth in affirmations and in questions.
Acts xxvi. 29: edgaipny dv 7G Ocd, I could wish to God. Acts viii. 31: més yap &v Swvalyny ; nay, for how could I?
The Moods in Dependent Clauses.
379, A Compound Sentence (see § 187) consists of co-ordinate clauses, or of a principal clause with subordinate ones.
Subordinate clauses may be infinitive or participial, or they may be connected with the principal sentence by relatives or con- junctions. ,
For the Infinitive and Participle, see §§ 385-397. For the Relative, see §§ 343-349. For the Conjunctions uniting co-ordinate clauses, see §§ 403-407,
380, As a general rule, the moods and tenses in subordinate clauses are used as in principal ones.
It must be especially noted that relatives or conjunctions, with év (édv), the hypothetical particle, generally take the Subjunctive.
Matt. v. 19: 8s éav ody Aton, whosoever therefore shall break.
Matt. v. 20: édv (et dv) pi} mepioceion, if it shall not surpass.
Matt. vi. 2: Srav (dre dv) mrovijs Aenuocivny, when thou doest alms. For ére with Indicative, see ch, vii. 28.
Matt. xvi. 28: tos av wor, until they shall have seen.
So with many other passages.
But the Imperfect Indicative is occasionally found when a matter of fact is spoken of. Mark vi. 56; Acts ii. 45, iv. 38. 1 Cor, xii. 2.
The use of the moods in object-sentences, in conditional expres stons, and in intentional clauses, demands separate consideration.
66
-
¥ ve, 344 DEPENDENT CLAUSES—OBJECTIVE. [§ 381.
Object-Sentences.
381. When the dependent clause expresses the object of any of the senses, or the matter of knowledge, thought, belief, é&c.,* it is often introduced by é6r with the Indicative; although the Infinitive is more usual.
Luke xvii. 15: iday Sri t46n, seeing that he was healed.
Matt. ix. 28: miorevere St. Sivapat rodro motjoa ; believe ye that I am able to do this ?
Mark v. 29: @yva... dt tara, she percewed that she is healed. So John xi. 13, xx. 14.
When the verb in the principal clause is in past time, the subordinate — verb is either put in present time (Indicative), or else in the Optative.
382. a. In the New Testament, guotation is generally direct, and is introduced without any conjunctive particle.
Matt. viii. 3: paro airod, Aéyor Oddo, KalaploOynri, he touched him, saying, “I will, be thou clean.”
The particle 67, however, is often used to introduce the quoted words, and is not to be translated, as it answers exactly to our inverted commas (“ ”),
Matt. vii. 23: dporoynow adrois, br oddémore. Eyvav tyas, J will avow unto them, “I never knew you.”
Luke viii. 49: épyerai ris mapa rod dpxtovvayeyov ... Kéyav adra, bru réOvnxev Ovydtnp cov, pi) oKvAde tov SiddoKadoy, then cometh one from the house of the ruler of the synagogue, saying unto him, “Thy daughter is dead, trouble not the Master.”
b. In indirect quotation (oratio obliqua) the substance of the — speech is given, not the words. Here, also, the Indicative is generally employed.
Mark iii. 21: €deyov yap br. &orn, for they said that he was beside himself. It is, however, possible that the verb here is a direct quotation (Aorist, see § 364), as E.V., they said, “‘ he is mad,”
* ‘* Verba sentiendi et declarandi.”
§ 382. | OBJECTIVE CLAUSES—INTERROGATION. 345
Of the Optative in the oratio obligua, so common in Greek classics, there is no example in the New Testament except in indirect inter- rogatives, as in the following paragraph, c, 7.
c. Indirect imterrogations, another form of the oratio obliqua, may be connected with the principal clause by interrogative pro- nouns or adverbs, or by the particle el, if, whether.
In such clauses, (a) the Indicative shows that the inquiry con- cerns matter of fact; (@) the Subjunctwe expresses objective possibility — what may or should take place—and always has respect to present or to future time; (y) the Optative denotes subjective possibility—that which may be conceived to exist—and refers especially to the past.
a. Mark xv. 44: eOatpacev & #bn teévynxe, he wondered whether he were already dead.
Acts xii. 18: jv rdpaxyos otk ddlyos év Trois orparimras th dpa 6 Ilérpos éyévero, there was no small stir among the soldiers—whatever had become of Peter.
Acts x. 18 (Pres. after Imperf.) : érvv@dvovro ¢? Sivay ... dvOdde teviterar, they were asking whether Simon ... lodges here.
Luke xxiii. 6 (Pres. after Aor.) : érepdrnoev ci 6 dvOpaos Tadidaids tor, he asked if the man is a Galilean.
For the Future in the dependent clause, see Mark iii. 2; 1 Cor. vii. 16; Phil. i. 22.
B. Matt. vi. 25: py pepivare ... tl pdynre cal rh winre, be not anxious ... what you are to eat and what you are to drink. Com- pare Luke xii. 22.
Luke xix. 48: ovy edpicxoy rb tl roujowow, they found not what they should do. Compare Mark xv. 24.
In Rom. viii. 26, the reading varies between mpocevgdpela. (rec., Lachmann) and mpocevgdpeba, (Tischendorf).
y Luke i. 29: duehoyifero worams ely 5 domacpds odros, she was discussing with herself of what kind this salutation might be.
346 OBJECTIVE CLAUSES. [§ 382.
Acts xvii. 11: dvaxpivoyres ras ypadds, et txor radra otras, searching the Scriptures if these things were so.
Acts xvii. 27: ¢yreiv rév Ocdv, & pa ye nradtoeaav adrdv kad eipouev, to seek G'od,* if by any chance ‘ad might feel after him and find him.
The Indicative and Optative constructions are combined in Acts xxl. 33: émivOavero tis av ely Kai Tl éore memoinKds, he asked who he might be, and what he had done. He must have done something, this was clear ; but who he was seemed altogether uncertain.
d. After verbs of perceiving, knowing, declaring, and the like,
_ both an object and an objective sentence are often found.
Luke xix. 3: é(jret idetv tov “Ineotv, tis éore, he was seeking to see Jesus, who he was (is).
1 Cor. ili. 20: Kupws ywooker Tods Staroyirpods ray copay Sri elor parato. (LXX.), Jehovah knoweth the reasonings of the wise, that they wre vain.
See also Mark xi. 32, xii. 34; John iv. 35, v. 42, vii. 27; Acts iii. 10, xv. 36; 2 Cor. xii. 3, 4, xiii. 5; 1 Thess. ii. 1, &&. Compare 1 Cor. xv. 12,
A similar construction is occasionally found with ‘intentional ” clauses, as Col. iv. 17; Gal. iv. 11.
Conditional Sentences.
383. A conditional or “hypothetical” sentence contains two clauses, often called “protasis,” or condition, and “apodosis,” or consequence. ‘The former expresses the condition ; the latter, the thing conditioned, Of these two the protasis is really the depen- dent sentence, though the apodosis contains the dependent fact.
Prorasis (condition). Apoposis (consequence). a. I®f he speaks, I always listen, 8. If he speak, _ I will listen. y. Ifhe should speak, I should listen. 3 { If he spoke, I would listen. ' ( Ifhe had spoken, I would have listened.
* Unquestionably the true reading, not roy Kipioy, as rec,
§ 383. ] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 347
These four sentences illustrate four kinds of hypothesis—
The supposition of a fact.
a.
B. re eo of a possibility.
y: “ af of uncertainty.
8. a i of something unfulfilled.
Hence arise four distinct forms—
a. The conditional particle «i, 7f, with the Indicative, in the protasis, assumes the hypothesis as a fact. The apodosis may have the Indicative or Imperative. [So the Subjunctive with od y7, equivalent to future Indicative; or in exhortations, equivalent to Imperative. ]
Matt. iv. 3: e& vids & rod Ocod, cle, «7r.d., UY thow art the Son of God, command, &c., t.e., assuming that thou art.
Acts xix. 39: e 8€ mepairépm emi{nretre, ev rH evvdum éxkdnoia émuduOqoerar, but if ye enguire further, it shall be determined in the legal assembly.
1 Cor. xv. 16: e yap vexpot od« éeyelpovrar, ovdé Xpecris eyhyeprar, Sor of the dead arise not, neither has Christ arisen.
Romans iv. 2: e ABpadp e& epywv BucarhOyn exer xavynpua, if Abraham was justified by works (assuming that he was so), he hath a ground of boasting.
See also many other passages, e.g., Matt. xix. 17; John vii. 4 (present, condition; imperative, consequence); Rom. viii. 25; 1 Cor. vi. 2 (pres. pres.) ; John v. 47 (pres. fut.) ; 2 Pet. ii. 20 (pres. perf.) : Matt. xii. 26 (pres. aor.); Matt. xxvi. 33 (fut. fut.); Acts xvi. 15 (perf. imperf.); 2 Cor. v. 16 (perf. pres.) ; John xi. 12; Rom. vi. 5 (perf. fut.); 2 Cor. ii. 5 (perf. perf.), vii. 14 (perf. aor.); Rom. xi, 17, 18 (aor. imper.); 1 John iv. 11 (aor. pres.); John xv. 20 - (aor. fut.) ; Rom. v. 15 (aor. aor.) [1 Cor. viii. 13, has pres. and aor. subj. with ob uf; Gal. v. 25, pres. ind., pres. subj. ]
8. Possibility, or uncertainty with the prospect of decision, is expressed by éav = ei dv (very rarely by ¢? alone*) with the Sub-
* See 1 Cor. xiv. 5; Phil. iii, 12 (Luke ix. 13), and a few var. readings, as Rev. xi. 5.
*
348 | CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 383. -
4 | junctive in the conditional clause, and the Indicative or Imperative
in the apodosis. The eondition hence refers to future time. The Subj. Aor., with édy, may be rendered in most cases by the Future Perfect.
Matt. xvii. 20: dav exnre riot as Kéxkov owwdrews, épeire, K.T.r., if ye have faith as a grain of mustard-seed, ye shall say, &e.
John iii, 3, 5: gv ph mis yevvnQ dvaber, od Sivara ieiv rhyv Bacirelay rod Geov, excepting one shall have been born from above,
he cannot see the kingdom of God.
2 Tim. 11.5: ev 8€ Kail GOAG Tis, 0d orehavoira ev pr vopinws Aon, and if any one strive in a contest, he is not crowned except he shall have striven according to the rules of the game.
y. The Optative in a conditional sentence expresses entire un- certainty—a supposed case. Here the particle ¢ is always used.
1 Cor. xiv. 10: e& rbxor, if tt should chance. So xv. 37.
1 Pet. iii. 14: & cal wacxorre Sia Sixaiocdynv, paxdpio, if ye even should suffer for righteousness’ sake, happy (are ye). See ver. 17.
Acts xxiv. 19, xxvii. 39; ed Sivawro, 7f (by any possibility) they could.
8. When the condition is spoken of as unfulfilled, the Indicative is used in both clauses, with the particle «i in the protasis, and a in the apodosis.
1. The Imperfect (in the apodosis) with ad points to present time, “ If this were so now” (which it is not).
2. The Aorist with a points to the past, “If this had been so then” (which it was not). Sometimes the Pluperfect is used, more emphatically, in the same sense.
1. Luke vii. 39: odros, et Av mpodnrns, tyivwrke av ris Kal moram)
h yun, this man, if he were a prophet, would know who and what the woman is.
John v. 46: e& yap émoretere Maun, emioredere dv eyoi, for if ye believed Moses, ye would believe me.
os
¥' § 383. | CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 349
Heb. iv. 8: e yap atirods "Incots Karémavoev, otk Av mepl dAdAns dédra, for if Joshua had given them rest, he would not speak of another day. -
So (with Impf. in the protasis) John viii. 42, ix. 41; Acts xviii. 14; 1 Cor. xi. 31; Heb. xi. 15 (with Aor. in the protasis) ; Gal. iii. 21, &c. Sometimes &v is omitted. See John ix. 33, xv. 22, &c.
2. John xiv. 28: e& tyawaré pe, exdpyre dv, if ye loved me, ye would have rejoiced. “Ye would rejoice” would have been expressed by éyaipere.
So with the Impf. in protasis: Luke xii. 39; John xviii. 30; Acts xviii. 14,
1 Cor. ii. 8: et yap tyvacray, odk dv roy Kipioy ris ddEns erratpacay, for had they known, they would not have crucified the Lord of glory.
So with the Aor. in protasis: Matt. xi. 21; Mark xiii, 20; Romans ix. 29 (Matt. xii. 7 has plup.)
John xi. 21: Kupue, et fs Bde, odx Av 6 ddeAdds pov érebvqxa, Lord, if thou hadst been here, my brother would not have been dead. Mary, ver. 32, uses the Aorist.
See 1 John ii, 19.
John xiv. 7: ei éyvanerré pc, kal rov marépa pov éyvonere dy, if ye had known me, ye would have known my Lather also.
Intentional Clauses.
384. Intentional clauses are those which express a purpose or _design, following the particles tva, to the end that (with emphasis
on result) ; 8rws, in order that (emphasis on method) ; ph, (that) not or lest.
a. (1) In intentional clauses, the Subjunctive is employed in its general meaning, to signify objective possibility or intention. Matt. xix. 13: mpoonvéxOnoav... va ras xeipas emi] avrois Kal
mpocetgnrat, they were brought ... that he might put his hands upon - them and pray.
350 INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. [§ 384.
Luke vi. 34: 8aveifovorw twa amrohéBwow, they lend that they may receive back.
Matt. ii. 8: dmayyeidaré pot, Stas Kady eOdv mporKvvice, bring me back word, that I also may come and worship.
Matt. vi. 16: ddavigovor... ras davdor, they disfigure ... that they may appear.
So in a great number of passages.
The final intentional clause with a particle of design must be distin- guished from the objective clause with dr. So Aéyw iuiv bn, I say to you that, introduces the matter of the communication; but elre ta (Matt. iv. 3), say that, specifies the purpose of what is said, and there- fore implies command. Now, after verbs expressive of desire, prayer, and the like, where the matter is coincident with the purpose, the final and the objective particles seem equally appropriate. As a matter of fact, however, it will be found that while hope has ér, prayer has fa, érws. *EAmi(w bri, J hope that, i.e., ‘‘such is the object presented to my hope ;” e¥xopuai tva, I pray that, t.e., ‘‘such is the purpose to be secured by my prayer” (2 Cor. i. 13; Philemon 22 ; Phil. i. 9; 2 Thess. iii. 1, &c.) In 2 Thess. i. 11, 12, va marks the primary, and émws the secondary result. In 1 Cor. xiv. 13, it is not meant that the disciple is to pray for the power to interpret, but that his gift of prayer is to be so exer- cised as to involve the power of interpretation. Again, 2 Cor. xiii. 7, the matter of the prayer is expressed by an infinitive clause; the intention by two clauses with iva.
The Evangelist John often (with, occasionally, others of the New Testament writers) seems to employ iva simply as explanatory. Thus, ch. xvii. 3: ‘this is life eternal, that they should know thee,” &c. So xv. 8; 1 John iv. 17, v. 3, &c. (often epexegetic of ofros); but in other passages the usual meaning of the particle may be taken, as 1 John iii, 1.
Compare Matt. x. 25; Luke xvii. 2; even Phil. ii, 2. (‘* Fill up my joy by being of the same mind.”—7’. 8. Green.)
(2) It has been a question with grammarians whether tva ever means merely so that, expressing event without any reference to purpose, The former presumed use of the particle has been called its eventual (or ecbatic) sense, the latter its final (or telic*), Most, however, now agree that the final significance is generally,
* “Iva exBatiucdy (from éxBalvw, to issue from) ; iva reAukdy (from téAos, cnd).
§ 384. ] INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. 351
if not always, discernible. Mr. Webster quotes 1 Thess. v. 4, as a passage in which “ the notion of finality seems lost in the eventual sense:” Ye are not in darkness, that the day should overtake you as a thief. But it would seem appropriate enough to represent it as the intention of darkness that those surrounded with it should be suddenly surprised. Again, in John xii. 23, xvi. 2, 32, Meyer justly remarks, “that which shall happen in the dpa is regarded as the object of its coming.” On Galatians v. 17, Professor Lightfoot says, “tva here seems to denote simply the result, whereas in classical writers it always expresses the purpose.” But surely this is unnecessary. Bishop Ellicott renders, “ ‘to the end that ye may not,’ not ‘so that ye cannot, Auth.; but with the usual and proper telic force of tva. The object and end of the 7d dyrixcioOa (the antagonism) on the part of each principle is to prevent a man doing what the other principle would lead him to.” __
For other passages in which the final sense has been questioned, but where Winer and most modern critics maintain it, see Luke ix. 45 (purposely hidden, as a part of the Divine plan) ; John iv. 36, vii. 23, ix. 2, xi. 15; Romans ix. 11, xi. 31; 2 Cor. i. 9, v. 4; Eph. ii. 9, iii. 10. In these, and in many similar texts, sound criticism seems to require the meaning, not so that it was, but in order that it might be.*
The importance of the discussion is chiefly seen, in relation to the passages which speak of a Divine purpose, in prophecy or otherwise. For instance, the words of Old Testament prediction, Isa. vi. 10, are quoted, Matt. xiii 14; Mark iv. 12; Luke vii. 10; John xii. 40; Acts xxviii. 27 (Matt. and Acts have from the LXX. pirore, the rest, tva ... ph). Is the passage to be read, in order that seeing they may not see, &c., or, so that seeing they see not, or even, because seeing they see not? We believe that the former interpretation is the only one admissible. The blindness was judicial—a punishment inflicted by God on dis- obedience and hardness of heart.
Again, in the phrase, tva (dros) wAnpddy, that it (the Old
* Undoubtedly in the later forms of the language the ecbatic sense became established. Thus, in modern Greek the Infinitive itself has become super- seded by a form of the verb with the particle vd for iva,
BHO oe INTENTIONAL CLAUSES, -[§ 884.
Testament prophecy) might be fulfilled (Matt. i. 22, ii 15, 23, iv. 14, viii. 17, xii. 17, xiii. 35, xxi. 4, xxvi. 56; Mark xiv. 49 ; John xiii, 18, xv. 25, xvii. 12, xviii. 9, xix. 24, 36), are we to understand the statement to be that so the words were fulfilled, sometimes, as it would seem, by an accommodation of their mean- ing, or that the occurrence took place in order that they might be fulfilled? To answer this question fully, would lead into a discus- sion of the whole scope and meaning of prophecy.. But, as a point of grammar, there seems every reason why the usual meaning of the telic particles should be retained. It is the expositor’s business to translate in order to interpret; not to interpret in order to translate. In some cases, at least, the words quoted could not . primarily have had the meaning attached to them in the New Testament ; but in their original acceptation they fell into the line of the “increasing purpose” which runs through the ages, and so revealed their highest significance in Messiah’s day. The true key to the passage is not to be found in a perverted use of the particle, but in an accurate comprehension of the verb.*
See, especially, the transaction recorded John xix. 28-30.
Acts iii. 19: peravonoare ody cai emorpéware, cis rd eEadrerpOjva tyav tas dpaprias, Sas Av WOwor Kcarpol dvayvEews, x.r.d., can only be translated, repent then, and be converted, that your sins may be blotted out, in order that seasons of refreshment may come, &e. The meaning when, as E.V., cannot be sustained. Whatever be the special reference of xaipot avayvéews, they are set forth as the purposed result of the people’s repentance, and denote in some way the blessings of Messiah’s kingdom.
(3) As a negative final particle, standing alone after verbs ex- pressing fear, caution, anxiety, pf has the force of tva ph, bras pt.
Matt. xviii. 10: dpare ph Karahpovhonte évds Trav pixpdy TovTar, see that ye do not despise one of these little ones. So 2 Cor. viii. 20; Gal. vi. 1; Heb. xii. 15, 16.
* See Olshausen on Matt. i. 22. Grotius, and those who have followed his criticisms, attach to the verb some such meaning as consummated,
*
§ 384. | INTENTIONAL CLAUSES. | 3 353
After verbs of fearing, pj may be translated Jest, or that.
2 Cor. xii. 20, 21: hoBotpar yap, ph mos €AOdv odx oiovs Heda eipo ipas, x7. for I fear that when I come I shall not find you such as I desire, Xe.
Acts xxiii. 10, xxvii. 17.
b. A particle of intention may be followed by an Indicative Future (never with gros. In Mark v. 23, read (jp).
The instances of this idiom are few, and most of them are contested readings. The Future, where admitted, must be taken as conveying the idea of duration more vividly than the Aorist Subjunctive.
Gal. ii. 4: tva jas Kata8ovldécovew, that they should enslave us.
Rev. xxii. 14: paxdpioe of mAvvovtes Tas oToAds ad’tay, Wa trrar 7 eLovola adrav, x.t.r., blessed are they who wash their robes,* that theirs may be the access, &c. John xvii. 2; 1 Cor. xiii. 3; 1 Pet. iii. 1; Rev. iii. 9, xiv. 13. In all these cases the received text has Subjunctive Aorist.
ph (wore) is found with the Indicative Future, Heb. iii. 12: Brémere, ddeAqoi, ph wore tortor ey rin buav Kapdia movnpa amorias, take heed, brethren, lest there should (shall) be in any one of you an evil heart of wnbelief.
Col. ii. 8.
The Indicative present or perfect after uw) shows the ellipsis, not of tva, but of 67: ; 7.e., the sentence is not intentional, but objective. Luke xi. 35: ‘‘lest the light 7s darkness.” Gal. iv. 11: ‘‘lest I have laboured.”
There are three passages in which the Indicative present seems to be used in intentional clauses :—
1 Cor. iv. 6: wa wh efs trip Evds puowitcbe Kata Tov éErépou, that ye be not puffed up one for another against yet another.
Col. iv. 17: ta abrhy wAnpois, that thou fulfil it (the ministry).
Gal. iv. 17: a abrobds (ndodre, in order that ye may zealously affect them.
It will, however, be noted that all these verbs are of the contracted conjugation in -dw; and it is easier to suppose them examples of an
irregularly formed Subjunctive than of.a syntax so anomalous as an Indicative would be.
* Note here the various reading, accepted by the best*critics.
st
354 THE INFINITIVE. | [§ 388.
THE INFINITIVE.
385. a. The Infinitive Mood is a Verbal Substantive, and expresses the abstract notion of the verb.
Like the verb in other moods, it admits the modifications of tense and voice. It may have a subject, or may govern an object, near or remote ; and it is qualified by adverbs. Like a substantive, it may be the subject or object of a verb ; it is often defined by the article, and is employed in the different cases.
b. The Negative Adverb with the Infinitive may be od or p7.
Since od denies as matter of fact, uh as matter of thought, and since the Infinitive generally depends on some verb or clause implying thought, will, design, the latter will generally be the appropriate particle,
Matt. ii. 12: ypnparicbervres ... ph dvaxdprbat mpds ‘Hpddny, being divinely warned not to return to Herod.
Matt. v. 34: Aéyo tpiv pr dpooa dros, J enjoin you not to swear at all.
So viii. 28, and many other passages. Where od is found, it may generally be connected with the principal verb. (See John xxi. 25.)
ce. The Infinitive governs the same case as the other parts of the verb.
Matt. vii. 11: ocidare Sdpara dyad SiSdvar rots rékvos iuav, ye know how to give good gifts unto your children.
Luke xx. 35: of S€ xcaraiwOévres Tot aldvos éxelvov Tuxeiv, cal Ths dvarrdcews ris ex vexpav, they who are deemed worthy to obtain that life and the reswrrection from the dead.
Compare the rules on the use of the cases after verbs.
386. The distinction between the Tenses of the Infinitive is analogous to that in the Imperative and Subjunctive. The Present marks continuity; the Aorist, a single act; the Future (very rare in the New Testament), intention or futurity ; and the Perfect, a completed act.
.
§ 386. | _ THE INFINITIVE. | 305
Matt. xiv. 22: nvdyxace rods pabnras epPfivar ... kal mpodyew aidrdy, he made the discvples embark (a single act), and go before him (continuous).
Acts xxvii. 10: péAAXew ererOar rov mrodv, that the voyage is gowg to be.
Acts xxvi. 32: daodedicba edvvaro 6 dvOpwros obros, this man could have been set at liberty.
The Present Infinitive might more properly be called the Imperfect,
referring, like the Perfect, to state rather than to time. The time is fixed by the principal verb.
387. The Subject of the Infinitive, when expressed, is always in the Accusative case.
For the explanation of this rule, with examples, see § 285.
But the Subject of the Infinitive, when the same with that of the preceding verb, is generally omitted, words agreeing with it being in the nominative.
Rom. xv. 24: Amite Svamopevdpevos Oedcacba dyas, I hope to see you (in) ei through.
2 Cor. x. 2: Séopar 8é, 7d ph twapdv, but I pray that I may not (when) ane be bold.
388. The Infinitive, with or without the Article, may form the Subject of a sentence.
Rom. vii. 18: 7d yap CAew mapdkerrai pot, Td de karepydter Oat TO kadov ov, for to will is present with me, but io accomplish the good is not. | Gal. vi. 14: eyot d€ py yéevorro Kavxdcbar, but fur be it from me to glory ! :
Eph. v.12: aicypdév éore kat dAeyew, even to mention...is dis- graceful. ;
A peculiar kind of extended subject is formed by the Infinitive with
eyévero, it came to pass that... Thus, Acts ix. 3: éyéveto abrdy eyylCew TH Aapack®, tt came to pass that he was approaching Damascus, lit., ‘* His
856 THE INFINITIVE. we « FEBSS,
ate
approach to Damascus occurred.” So Mark ii. 23; Luke vi. 1, 6; Acts iv. 5, xvi. 16, &. Acts xxii. 17 has a combination of construction: Jt happened to me when I had returned (uo éxoorpéyayrt) to Jerusalem, and as I was praying (mpocevxouevou pou, gen. abs.) in the temple that I was (yevéo@at pe) in an ecstasy, &e.
- The Subject Infinitive may have its own Accusative Subject. Matt. xvii. 4: xaddv dori fpas Sde evar, it is good for us to be here. 1 Cor. xi. 13: apérov éori yuvatka dxaraxdAurrov 7G Ged mpocev- xeo0a, it is becoming for a woman to pray to God uncovered. Matt. xviii. 8: xadév coi éorw cicedOciv cis riv (wiv xoddv 7
xvddév, tf is good for thee to enter into life halt or maimed, the _ pronoun oé being understood from cox before eiceddeiv.
389. a. The Infinitive regularly stands as the Object of verbs denoting a mental faculty, impression, or act—such as to be able, to hear, see, believe, know, wish, hope, endeavour, &c.; and an assertion of thought or will, as to say, announce, proclaim, com- mand, forbid, &.*
In this connection also the Infinitive may have its own Subject, and may take or omit the Article.
Matt. vi. 24: obdeis Sivarat Svoi Kupiots Sovdebav, no man is able to serve two masters.
Rom. i, 22: ddckovres elvat codol euwpavOncav, professing to be wise they became fools.
Phil. ii. 6: ody dpwaypdv fryhoaro 7d elvat ica Oca, he esteemed not his being on an equality with God a prize to be seized on.
Here the object Infinitive is defined by the article; ta ©- is the pre- dicate of the Infinitive in apposition with the subject (fca is adverbial) ; and aprayyéy is in predicative apposition with the Infinitive itself.
b. The Infinitive may be employed, for the expression of inten- tion or result, as an adjunct (1) to a verbal predicate.
Matt. ii. 2: #ASopev rpockvvijoa aira, we came to worship him. Matt. xx. 28; 1 Cor. i. 17; Rev. xvi. 9, &c.
* “Verba sentiendi vei declarandi,” &e.
£889.) . THE INFINITIVE. 307
(2) An Infinitive in this sense may depend upon a Substantive, as in the frequent phrase 6 tyov dra dkoteav, he that hath ears to hear. So Acts xiv. 5; Heb. xi. 15, &e.
(3) It may depend upon an Adjective, as Luke xv. 19 : obkért ciui Agios KAnOAvar vids cov, J am no longer worthy to be called thy son.
So with 8Swards; Acts ii. 24; 2 Tim. i. 12; txavés, Mark i. 7 ; &\jcbOepos, 1 Cor. vii. 39; trowos, Luke xxii. 33, &ce. Once with &uxos, Heb. vi. 10, “ God is not unjust to forget.”
390. The Infinitive with the oblique cases of the Article substantivized 201, 204) is employed as follows :— ( ’ ? ) pioy
a. Genitive.
1. Dependent upon nouns—
Luke x. 19: didop0 piv thy Eovelav rod waretv, x.r.d., I give to you the power of treading, &e.
Acts xx. 3: éyévero ywopm tod trorrpépew, he had an intention of returning. |
Acts xxvii. 20: mica Amis tod célerOar jas, all hope of our being saved.
Acts xiv. 9; 2 Cor. viii. 11; Phil. iii. 21, &. So with words signi- fying time (time for), Luke i. 57, ii. 6, 21, xxi. 22; 1 Pet. iv. 17; Rev. xiv. 15.
2. Dependent upon verbs that usually take a genitive—
Luke i..9: Baye rod Oupidoar, he had obtained the lot of sacri- JSicing. 7
2 Cor. i. 8: dore earopnPfvar judas cal tod tiv, so that we despaired even of life.
1 Pet. iii. 10 (LXX.) So after adjectives, Luke xxiv. 25; Acts xxiii, 15, Especially, with verbs signifying hindrance, Luke iv. 42; Rom. xv. 22. 3. Expressive of design, like va with Subjunctive, or évexa with Genitive—
358 THE INFINITIVE. . [§ 896.
Matt. ii, 13: wedre: yap ‘Hpadns Cyreiv rd raidiov Tod &modeoat aird, jor Herod will seek the young child to destroy tt. So Matt. iii. 13, xxi. 32, xxiv. 45; Luke xxiv. 29; Acts xiii, 47 (LXX.); Heb. x. 7 (LXX.), &c. But sometimes the notion of design seems almost or entirely lost in that of result. See also under wa (§ 384).
Acts vil. 19: obros... éxdxwoev rods marépas Hudy Tod worely rad Bpéhy &kOera airay, this man... il-treated our fathers, so that they caused their babes to be exposed.
Compare Acts iii. 12; Rom. i. 24, vii. 3. b. Dative. The Dative of Cause. (See § 280 c.)
2 Cor, ii. 13: ov foynka avec ... TH ph ebpelv pe Tirov rév ddeddy nov, L had no rest through my not having found Titus my brother.
In 1 Thess. iii. 3, TG, rec., should be 76. The above instance is ihe only one. c. The Genitive, Dative, or Accusative, with Prepositions. A few illustrations of this usage will be sufficient, as the pre- positions are taken in their ordinary meaning. (See §§ 288-307). 84, with Genitive, “ through.” Heb. ii. 15: 8:4 ravrés tod tiv, through all their lifetime.
8:4, with Accusative, “‘ on account of.”
Matt. xiii. 5: Sa 7d ph Bxew Bados... 8a Td ph Bxew pilav, on account of its having no depth ... on account of its having no root.
So, with acc. subject, Matt. xxiv. 12; Mark v. 4; Luke ii 4, xi. 8, &e.
els, “to the end that.”
Matt. xx. 19: es rd epraigar cal partiydoat kal cravpdcoa, to mock and scourge and crucify.
So Mark xiv. 55; Luke v. 17, with subject, &, oth es and mpés express purpose, but mpés the more emphatically.
§ 390. ] | THE INFINITIVE. 359
év, “in, during,” especially of time. .
Matt. xiii. 25: év dé xadedSew rovs dvOparovs, and while men slept. So also Matt. xxvii. 12; Mark ii. 15; Lukei. 21, &c.
pera, with Accusative, “after.”
Matt. xxvi. 32: perd d¢ 7d eyepOfval pe, but after I have risen. So Luke xii. 5, xxii. 20; Actsi. 3, &e.
apd, “before,” opposed to perd.
Matt. vi. 8: mpd rod ipas airijoat airdy, before ye ask him. So Luke ii. 21, xxii. 15; Johni. 49, &e.
apés, with Accusative, “in order to.”
Matt. vi. 1: mpds 7d Oeabfvor adrois, in order to be gazed at by them.
So Matt. xiii. 30, xxvi. 12; Mark xiii. 22, &c. Once, in reference to, Luke xviii. 1.
Once dévrt is found, James iv. 15, instead of your saying ; and Wena, 2 Cor. vii. 12, for the sake of your zeal being made mani- fest. “Eos, “until,” occurs with Gen. inf, Acts viii. 40, wnéd he came.
391. To express result, the particle dere is often prefixed to the Infinitive. It should be noted that dere is properly ecbatic, as distinguished from ¢elic particles. Compare § 384.
Matt. viii. 24: cesopds péyas éyévero ... ote TS TAoioy KaAdTrer Oar, there arose a great storm, so that the vessel was being covered.
Matt. xili. 32: adore &Oeiv ra merewvd, so that the birds came.
Luke vili. 52: dove érowdoat air, so as to make ready for him.
Acts xvi. 26: dove cadevOfvar ra Oepédia, so that the fowndations were shaken.
So in a great number of passages. Twice only Sore is found in this meaning with the Indicative.
John ui. 16: otras yap nydancev 6 Ceds tov kédcpoy OoTE Toy vlor cc
860 THE Gettin vn: [§ 391.
avrov Tov povoyer7 Baxev, x.7.d., God so loved the world that he gave his only-begotten Son, &e. - So also Gal. ii. 13. :
The proper distinction between the Infinitive and Indicative in this connection is, that the former expresses the result as the natural and logical consequence of what has been previously enunciated the latter states it simply as a fact which occurs or has occurred. *
392. In Phil. iii. 16, we find the Infinitive employed for the Imperative: cis 6 épéacapyer, ro avtG ororxev, whereto we have attained, in the sume direction walk ye onward.t
The use of xalpev in salutation is similar, “greeting,” Acts xv. 23, xxiii. 26; Jamesi. 1 (2 John 10, 11, suggests an ellipsis here). This habitual phrase reappears as a more decided Impera- tive. Rom. xii. 15, with an antithetic verb: xatpav pera yxarpdvrar, kAatew peta KAadvrav, Tejoice with the rejoicing, weep with the weeping. PARTICIPLES.
393. The Participles “ partake ” the nature of Verbs and of Adjectives.
Like verbs, they have the modifications of Voice and Tense; and may have an object, immediate or remote. Like adjectives, they agree with substantives, expressed or understood; and are subject to the exceptional constructions of Synesis, or ‘‘ rational concord.”
On these points, therefore, nothing need be added to the rules already given.
The tenses of the Participle conform in meaning to those of the Indicative. Their various use will be seen in the examples given under the following sections.
The negatives used with Participles follow the general law. Thus, od« ciddres, “not knowing,” as a matter of fact ; pr ciddres, “not knowing,” as a matter of supposition, such ignorance being presumed as the ground of any further assertion respecting them.
* See Bishop Ellicott on Gal. ii. 13. He adds, ‘* The distinction is not always observed.” + Ellicott. The rest of the verse (rec.) is omitted by the best critics.
§ 393.] PARTICIPLES. | 36]
Compare Gal. iv. 8, with 1 Thess. iv. 5; 2 Thess. i. 8. Ag, however, the Participle is generally expressive of some condition, the negative employed is in most cases p4.
When a Participle has a Subject of its own in a separate clause, the construction is the Genitive Absolute, for which see § 275 The following rules give the use of Participles referring to th’ Subject or Object of another verb.
394. Participles are predicative or attributive. Their pre dicative uses may be classified as follows :—
1. After the forms of the substantive verb, a Participle may be used as a simple or “ primary” predicate.
This construction is confined to the present and perfect Participles, With the latter, certain parts of the verb to be make regular compound tense-forms, as the third person plur., perf. and plup. Passive. (See Paradigms.) The usage is extended, however, to the singular number and to other persons. Luke iv. 16: 08 jv reOpaypévos, where he had been brought up. John iii. 28: &mectoAuévos eiul, I have been sent. With the present Participle, the substantive verb gives a continuous sense. forming what are called the ‘‘resolved tenses.” (See §$§ 362, ¢, 363, e.)
The resolved tense must be distinguished from the use of the Parti- ciple as secondary predicate. For example, 2 Cor. v. 19 is not to be read, God was reconciling the world in Christ, but as E.V., God was in Christ reconciling, &c.
Luke xxiv. 32: ovyxt 9 xapdia quay Karopévy Fv ev quiv; was not our heart burning within us ?
Sometimes this construction appears very nearly equivalent to the simple verb, as Mark xiii. 25 (compare Matt. xxiv. 29.) So Acts ii. 2; James i. 17, iii. 15. In other cases, there is a greater stress upon the notion of state or duration: Pres., Acts xxv. 10; Rev. i. 18; Matt. x. 26; Luke vi. 43; 2 Cor. ix. 12; Gal. iv. 24 (not ‘‘ which things are an allegory,” but are allegorized, i.e., susceptible of allegorical application; drwa being used, not &, see § 349.) ; Col. ii, 23; 1 Cor. xv. 19; 2 Cor. ii. 17; Impf., Matt. vii. 29, xix. 22; Mark i. 39; Luke i. 22, xv. 1, xxiii. 8; Acts xxi. 3; Gal. i. 22, 23; Fut., Matt. x. 22; Luke i. 20, v. 10, xxi. 24.
In Luke iii. 23, airds Fv 6 *Incots aoel eray tpidKovta apxduevos, we must understand, Jesus himself was commencing (his ministry) at about — the age of thirty (for gen., see § 266), not ‘‘ began to be about thirty.”
262 PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. [§ 394,
. Certain verbs, expressive of perception, or the conditions of an eae are complemented by a Participle, instead of an Infinitive.
If the verb is neuter or passive, the Participle agrees with the Subject;
if active, with the Object. | Such verbs in the New Testament are (1) neuter; ratowat, redéo (Btarclrw, éyxaxéw), all variously signifying desistence from a thing ; gatvopar, to be manifest, and AavPdva, to be secret, in doing anythitie (2) active ; dxoto, ywdoka, dpdw, Bréra, ce.
Luke v. 4: as ératcaro Nadav, when he ceased speaking.
Acts v. 42, vi. 13, xiii, 10, xx. 31, xxi. 32; Eph. i. 16; Col. i. 9; Heb. x. 2. Matt vi. 18: py davis trois dvOpamos vyorebwv, that thou appear not to men as fasting ; ver. 16. Matt. xi 1: Gre er&eoew ... Siardcowv, when he made an end of commanding. Luke vii. 45 ; Gal. vi. 9; Matt. i. 18 (pass.) Heb. xiii. 2: Qabdv tives gevioavtes ayyédovs, some unawares entertained (were secret in entertaining) angels.* Luke iv. 23: dca hxotoapev yevspeva ev 7 Kamepvaotp, whatever things we heard of as done in Capernawm. Mark xiv. 58; Acts ii. 11, vii. 12; 2 Thess. iii, 11, &c.
Heb. xiii. 23: ywooxere tay AdeAhdv Tipddecor prehe\ey, know that our brother Timothy has been liberated.
Acts viii. 23; Heb, x. 25.
Some of these verbs may also be followed by an inf. or by a finite verb with 8m. Thus compare 2 Thess. iii. 11, with John xii. 18 and 34.
When the predicative Participle is used, the real Object of the verb is
in the noun. In the infinitive construction, the Infinitive contains the Object, and 87: reduces the thing heard to the form of a proposition.
nae”
* A very common classic idiom.
§ 394. | PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 363
So 3 John 4: &kovw ra Gud réxva ev &Andela meprratotyra is I hear of my children, that they walk in truth.
mepirareiy would have been, “I hear of the conduct of my children, that they walk,” &c.
8rt mweprmatovow would have meant, The.tidings brought to me are these, that, &e.
Again: 1 John iv. 2: duodroye? "Incoty Xpordv ev capki édnavbora, con- fesses Jesus Christ come in the flesh (not who came, which would have required toy @A...). ,éAnAvdéva would have signified, that Jesus Christ has come. (Comp. 2 John 7.)
So with neuter verbs: drws pavdor Tots avPpdérois vnorevorres, that they may appear unto men fasting, i.e., the fasting was real. yvnoredev would have implied that the fasting was only apparent. On the contrary, éraiteiy aicxivoua, Luke xvi. 3, means J am ashamed to beg; éraitav would have meant, I am ashamed of begging. *
3. A Participle without the Article, and in grammatical concord with the Subject of the verb, may stand as adjunct to the verbal Predicate.
These adjuncts may be of various kinds, as—
a. Modal, setting forth the manner in which the given action was performed.
Matt. v. 2: édidacxev adrods Myov, he taught them, saying.
Matt. xix. 22: dmjdde AvTotpevos, he went away sorrowful.
Matt. xi. 25, de. : droxpibels cirev, he said, having addressed himself to reply, “ he answered and said.”
Matt. xxviii. 19; Acts iii. 8, xiii. 45; 1 Tim. i. 13. For the aor. Part.
' marking the commencement of the action, see Acts i. 24; Rom. iv. 20.
b. Temporal, denoting (i) a contemporaneous, (ii) preceding, or (iii) consequent fact.
(i) Pres. Acts v. 4: ody pévov col gueve; while it remained did it not remain thine ?
Matt. vi. 7; Acts xxi. 28; 1 Tim. i. 3, when I was on my way ;t
* See Rev. T. S. Green’s ‘‘ Greek Testament Grammar,” p. 183.
¢ There is here a strong argument for an apostolic journey after Paul’s Roman imprisonment, as no part of the history in the Acts corresponds with this mission of Timothy.
364 | PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. [§ 394.
Heb. xi. 21; Rom, xv. 25 (ministering ; he had already entered on his’ errand of ministry) ; 1 Pet. i. 8, 9 (while ye see not ... yet believe ... while (also) ye receive).
(ii) Aor. Acts ix. 39: dvaords dé Iérpos cuvpdOev adrois, and Peter hawing arisen went with them, %.e., “arose and went with them,” as E.V. |
This use of the Aor. Part. is one of the most common idioms in the New Testament, and may be continually represented in translation by two verbs—the action of the one (the Participle) preceding that of the other. Or we may render by some such preposition as after, upon, with the verbal noun ; or by a temporal clause with when. Acts iii 3: Os Wav... ipara, who saw... and asked; or, on seeing ... asked ; or, when he saw ... asked.
So ver. 4, 7, 12, iv. 7, 8, 13 (while beholding (pres.) and having ascer- tained), 15, 18, 19, 21, 23, 36, 37, &c. In fact, there is scarcely any usage more common in the New Testament.
(iii) Fut. Acts vill. 27: ds ednhider mporkuvarev cis "lepovoadipy, who had come to Jerusalem to worship.
This idiom (the Fut. Part. to express a purpose) is rare in the New Testament, (See Acts xxiv. 11.)
c. A Participle often expresses some relation of cause, condition, &c., to the principal verb. This relation the general sense of the passage will show.
Causal, Acts iv. 21: dmédvoav adrods, pydtv eiploxovres, x.7.X., they released them, as they found nothing, &e.
Concessive. Rom. i. 32: ofrwes rd Sixaiopa rod Geod émiyvovres ... avra mowivow, KT.Ar.. who, though made aware of the righteous decree of God ... do these things, &c.
Conditional. Rom, ii. 27: kali xpiet 9 ex hicews dxpoBvotia rov vopov Tedotea, x.7.., and (shall not) that which naturally is uncir- cumeision, if it fulfil the law, judge thee, &c.
Matt. vi. 27 (by anxious care); Rom. viii. 23; 2 Cor. v. 2 (because we desire).
d. Intensiwe,a Hebraism. (Compare § 280, 6.) Like the cognate dative noun, a Participle of the same verb may be employed.
|
’
§ 394.) PREDICATIVE PARTICIPLES. 365
Heb. vi. 14: etdoyav etdoyfjoe ce, kal wAyPivev TANOvVd ce, blessing I will bless thee, and multiplying I will multiply thee. (LUXX. ; Gen. xxii. 17.)
So Matt. xiii. 14; Acts vii. 34.
A predicative Participle may be qualified by ds, as, as if, declaring the alleged ground of an assertion. ,
Luke xvi. 1: deBA7On ... ds Stackopmifev, «.7.d., he was accused, as though wasting, &c.
Luke xxiii. 14: mpoonveykaté pot tov GvOpwrov TovToy @s amrorTpi- govta tov Aadv, ye brought before me this man on the charge of perverting the people.
1 Cor. vii. 25.
In like manner, the particles kalrep, alto, although, may be em- ployed.
Heb. v. 8: ralwep dy vids, although he was a son.
So Heb. iv. 3, with gen. abs. ; vii. 5, éeAnAv@déTas, in apposition with obj.; 2 Pet. i. 12.
395. Participles as epithets are used like adjectives.
Acts xxi. 26: th éxopévy fpépg, on the next day.
1 Tim. i 10: ef re érepov ry tyrawotoy Si8acKkadla dvrixevra, if anything else is opposed to the healthful teaching (of the faith). For other instances of this participle, see vi. 3; 2 Tim. i. 13, iv. 3; Titus i 9, ii 1.
396. With the Article, the Participle is equivalent to the relative with the finite verb.
It may thus stand in apposition with a noun in any relation to the sentence, or may be used alone, the substantive being understood. Matt. i. 16: "Incods & deydpevos Xpiords, Jesus who is called Christ. | Mark vi. 2: 9 copia 4 S00cica avrd, the wisdom which is given wnto him.
366 ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLES. Pg 396.
Luke xxi. 37 : 1d dpos 7d Kadodpevov ’EXadv, to the mount that is cabled “of Olives.”
1 Cor. ii. 7: Aarodper Geod copiay ... Tiv amroKxekpuppévny, we speak the wisdom of God ... that hath been hidden.
1 Thess, iii, 15: rév Kat tov Kiptoy dmoxrevdvrov ... Kal npas &eBiogdvrov kal Ged ph dperxdvrwv, (of the Jews) who both slew the Lord... and drove us out, and do not please God. By a comparison of examples, the distinction between the use of the Participle with and without the Article will be clearly seen, 6 &:ddéonwv
is he who teaches; 6 85dfas, he who taught; whereas d3:ddexwv alone would mean while he was teaching, and d:ddtas, when he had taught.
The Participle and Article often form a substantive phrase. See §§ 200, 204: & omelpwv, he who sows, a sower.
‘In some cases the substantivized participle appears to have lost all temporal reference.
Eph. iv. 28: 6 «dérrov pnkéri kr\erréra, let him that stealeth, steal no more. Here 6 kdéWas, he who stole (once), would be too weak in meaning, while 6 xAémrns would be too strong.*
So Heb. xi. 28. With an Object we find the same construction.
Gal. i. 23: 6 dudewv huas word, our former persecutor.
1 Thess. i. 10: "Incodv roy fuouevoy huads, Jesus our deliverer.
Winer quotes also Matt. xxvii. 40; John xii. 20; Acts iii. 2; Gal. ii. 2; Romans v. 17; 1 Thess. v. 24; 1 Pet. i. 17. But in some of these pas- sages there may well be a special reference to the time then present, So John xiii. 11: He knew rdv apadidovra airdy, the man then betraying him, i.e., who was then at work for that purpose.
The Present may occasionally be explained according to § 361 (d). Matt. xxvi. 28: rodré éort rd alud pov... 7d wept moddav exxvvdpevoy, this is my blood which is being shed (i.e., to be shed) for many. So SiSdpevov, being given, Luke xxii. 19 ; Bikes: 1 Cor, xi. 24.
In other cases, the ordinary meaning of the Present is to be taken. Acts ii. 47: “the Lord was adding daily to the church,” Trois cwlopévors, those who were being saved, t.e., in the course or
* Stier, Ellicott, Alford.
§ 396. | ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLES. 3b7
way of salvation. 2 Cor. ii. 15: “we are of Christ a sweet savour
unto God, in those who are being saved, and in the perishing” (rots cwtopévors kal ev Tots darohAvpévors), 2 Cor. iii. 13: “so that the children of Israel could not look to the end of that which was vanishing away” (rod Karapyoupévov), viz., the glory on the counte- nance of Moses.
3977. In some cases, a participle seems to stand alone, the verb to which it is an adjunct being at a distance from it, or the con- struction of the sentence being broken.*
Rom. v. 11: kavyépevo. must be connected with cwOyodpcda, ver. 9, we shall be saved—and not only that, but saved with joyful consciousness of the blessing.
1 Pet. ii, 18-iii. 7: troraredpevor, tmotarcdpevar, dyaorovotcat, pA} poBodpevar, cvvorkodvres, are not for imperatives, as has been supposed, but are adjuncts to tysqeare, ii. 17 : render due honour to all ... ye servants by subjection ... ye wives by subjection, well-doing, Searlessness, ye husbands by dwelling with them, &e.
2 Pet. i. 20: ywdorovres continues the thought of mpocéxovres, dependent on Kadés wouere, ver. 19, ye do well in taking heed, knowing this first. So ch. ii. 3; read with pvycbfvar, ver. 2.
Instances of broken structure (anacolouthon) may be found in Acts xxiv. 5: having found this man, &c., who also endeavoured to profane the temple, whom also we laid hold of, instead of ‘* we laid hold of him.” 2 Cor. v. 6, 8: being confident—yea, we are confident and well pleased ; « the sentence, but for the parenthesis of ver. 7, being evidently intended as ‘‘we, being confident, are well pleased.” 2 Cor. vii. 5: where 6A:Béuevar is really in apposition with the jets implied in 7 cdpt judy. Heb. viii. 10, where xa) interrupts the structure of the sentence: Eph.
iv. 1-3; Col. iii. 16, &c.
_ * See Winer’s collection and explanation of instances, § 45, 6.
368 | ADVERBS. 5 [s 398.
Cuarrer VIIL—ADVERBS.
398. Adverbs qualify verbs and adjectives as in other languages. | The rules for the formation of derivative Adverbs, with lists of the
Adverbs most in use, are given, §§ 126-134. The use of Adverbs with the Article is shown, § 198.
399. Adverbial phrases are very frequent in the New Testa- ment, and are of various kinds.
a. A substantive, with or without a preposition, may be adver- bially used. (Compare § 126.) The modal dative is adverbial (§ 280, a). So sometimes the accusative, as thy dpx4v, John viii. 25, essentially (Alford). Many phrases with xard are adverbial (see § 300, 6). Special adverbial combinations are: dd pépovs, par- . tially, Rom. xi. 25; 2 Cor. i.-14, ii, 5. && pépous, individually, 1 Cor. xii. 27; partially, 1 Cor. xiii. 9,10, 12. ard pépovs, par- ticularly, Heb. ix. 5. &md prds (yvduns), “with one consent,” unanimously, Luke xiv. 18. és rd wavredés, “in any wise,” Luke xii. 11; “to the uttermost,” Heb. vii. 25; utterly. © édnOela, “in truth,” truly, Matt. xxii. 16, &e. é 8uKxaworivy, righteously, Acts xvil. 31. & é«revelq, instantly, “in earnestness,” Acts xxvi. 7.” ew ddnOelas, “of a truth,” truly, Luke xxii. 59.
For the force of these and similar phrases, see under the respective prepositions.
James iv. 5: [pos p@dvov émvmobe? 7d rvenua d Kat@xiocev (Lachmann) év \ tpi. This difficult passage should probably be rendered, Jealously does the Spirit which he placed in us desire (us for his own, Alford). This
adverbial force of the substantive with mpés is common in classical Greek, though elsewhere withvut parallel in the New Testament.
b. For the adjective used adverbially, see § 319.
§ 399.] ADVERBS. — 869
c. For adverbial notions conveyed by means of participles, see § 394, 3,
d. An adverbial phrase is sometimes formed by a combination of two verbs. So in the Old Testament often, ‘“‘He added and spake,” or, “‘ He added to speak,” for ‘“ He spake again,” an idiom copied by the LXX. from the Hebrew.
Luke xx. 11, 12: mpooéero méupar, he added to send; where Mark xii. 4, reads wadw dméoreide, he sent again. Acts xii. 3: mporéero ovddaPeiv, he proceeded to apprehend, or, “further appre- hended.” But Luke xix. 11, rpooGes eirev is the participial con- struction, he added and spake.
Some expositors have unnecessarily interpreted other verbal com- binations as adverbial; e.g., Luke vi. 48: fsxave nal éBdduve, **he digged deep,” E.V., but rather, he dug and deepened, the second verb being an advance upon the first. So Rom. x. 20: Jsaiah is very bold, and saith, not *‘ very boldly saith ;” Col. ii. 5: rejoicong (over you) and seeing, not ‘‘ seeing with joy” (comp. Ellicott’s note) ; James iv. 2: ye murder and envy, not ‘‘envy murderously,” or ‘‘murder enviously ” (see Alford). So in many other passages.
400. For a list of the Adverbs used as prepositions governing cases, see § 133. These may enter into combination with other adverbs, as Matt. xi. 12: @ws dpr, wntitl now. So John ii. 10; v. 17, &. Matt. xvii. 17: ts wore; how long? lit, “until when?’ So Mark ix. 19; Luke ix. 41; John x. 24: how long dost thow keep our minds in suspense? (Alford). Matt. xviii. 21, 22: ws éwrdkis, «.7.r., until seven times, &e. See also Matt. xxiv. 21 (art.), xxvii. 8 (art.) Mark xiv. 54: tas tow, Luke xxlil. 5: ts aSe Acts xxi, 5: tos &o, do. So Rom. i 13: dxpe tod Seipo, unitl now, lit, “until the (time) hitherto,” viii. 22; 1 Cor. iii. 14; Phil. i. 5.
The use of the Article with the latter Adverb, however, renders it simply equivalent to a Substantive.
401. Repeated reference has already been made to the distinc- tion between the negative Adverbs od and ph. Generally speaking,
370 : ADVERBS. [S 401.
ov denies as matter of fact, »7 as matter of thought, supposition, &c. — The former, therefore, is the usual negative with the Indicative mood, the latter the wsuwal negative with the other parts of the verb. Deviations from this rule are to be explained by the primary sense of the two adverbs. Thus, John iii. 18: 6 moretev cis abrév 08 xpiverar, he that believeth on him is not condemned (the statement of a fact); 6 d€ ph moredorv, but he that believeth not (whoever he may be) has already been condemned ; éri ph meme orevxer, x.t.d., because he hath not believed (according to the suppo- sition made).
The same distinction applies to the compounds of od and pf, as ode, Bide, obKért, unnéri, &c,
Two, or even three, negatives in the same clause do not con- tradict one another,* but serve to strengthen the negation.
Luke iv. 2: ov« payer oi8év, he ate not anything.
Luke xxiii. 53: of otk jv ot8es ott Keiuevos, where no one at all had yet ever lain.
For special! forms of strengthened negation, see §§ 363, 377. For the use of negatives in interrogations, see § 369.
When one of two contrasted statements is intended to qualify the other, it is sometimes forcibly expressed as an actual denial.
Thus, in Hosea vi. 6, the Hebrew reads, “I will have mercy and mot sacrifice.” The LXX. translates ¢deos Oko 4} buciar, “I will have mercy rather than sacrifice,” so conveying the general meaning. Matt. ix. 13, in quoting the passage, returns to the Hebrew expression, kal od @vciayv. Compare Jeremiah vii. 22.
In this idiom, the negatived thought, though not absolutely contra- dicted, is excluded from view, that its antithesis may make its full impression. Compare Matt. x. 20; Mark ix. 37; Luke x. 20 (omit paaddov); John vii. 16,+ xii. 44; Acts v. 4; 1 Thess, iv. 8, &c.
* The usage is thus directly opposed to the English and Latin, where **two negatives make an aflirmative.”’
+ Winer holds, as it would appear without sufficient reason, that this passage and Matt. ix, 13 above intend absolute contradiction,
§ 491.) ADVERBS. ar.
Only the context in such cases will show whether the negative is abso- lute or comparative. In some instances, where an exposition similar to the above has been adopted, the meaning of particular words has been mistaken. Thus, in John vi. 27, épyd(eoOe wh thy Bpaow thy arodduyerny, «.7.A., ‘labour not for the meat that perisheth,” &c., the verb épy. does not mean ‘‘labour”’ generally, but busy yourselves, referring to the pre- sent excitement of the people. 1 Tim. v. 23: unkér: b5pordére is not ‘‘drink no longer water,” but be no longer a water-drinker, the verb not being precisely equal to #5wp rive, but pointing to the regular habit.*
* Ellicott.
372 3 CONJUNCTIONS. 3 [§ 402.
Cuarter VIII.—CONJUNCTIONS.
402. For a classified list of the Conjunctions, see Erymonocy, § 136.
Conjunctions are, with respect to their place in the sentence, either prepositive, i.e., placed at the beginning of the clause, as kal, dAAd, 871, or postpositive, i.e., placed after some other word or words, as dé, ydp.
Words connected by Conjunctions are in the same gram- matical regimen.
A clause connected with another by a Conjunction is either co- ordinate or subordinate. The rules for the chief kinds of subor-
dinate clauses have been given, §§ 379-384. The following rules, therefore, imply Co-ordination.
ConJUNCTIONS OF ANNEXATION, kal, re.
403. The proper copulative Conjunction, employed as in other languages, is kat, and.
Of the special uses of the Conjunction, the following may be enumerated.
a. Sometimes it appears to convey a kind of rhetorical emphasis.
Matt. iii. 14: Kal od épyn mpds pe ; and comest thow unto me ?
Matt. vi. 26: Kal 6 warnp tpar, x7... and (yet) your heavenly Father feedeth them !
John i. 10: Kal 6 kdécpos airdv oik &%yvw, and (yet) the world knew him not.
See Bruder’s Concordance, p. 453, for an interesting collection of instances. The logical connection of the clauses being strongly appa- rent in their signification, it is sufficient to place the simple copulative between them, the reader’s mind supplying the additional links,
§ 403. | CONJUNCTIONS OF ANNEXATION. 373
b. In the enumeration of particulars, both...and may be ex- pressed by kal... kal, by the postpositive ré with kal, or (rarely) by
TE... TE. Acts ii. 29: Kat érededrnoe Kal éradn, he both died and was buried.
Matt. xxii. 10: ovvjyayor ... rovnpots Te Kal dyabovs, they collected ... both bad and good.
Acts i. 1: &» fp€aro “Incods moveiv te Kal diddoxew, Which Jesus began both to do and to teach.
Acts xvii. 4: rav te ceBopevav “EMAjvav wAjGos méAv yuvatkav TE Tav mparav ovk ddrryat, both a great multitude of the devout Greeks, and not a few of the chief women.
John iv. 11: ode dvrAnua exes Kal rd ppéap éari Babv, thou both hast nothing to draw with, and the well is deep. So 3 John 10.
The difference* between kai and re is that xal unites things strictly co-
ordinate; re annexes, often with implied relation or distinction. Hence it
may sometimes be read as implying ‘‘and this as well as the other,” with ascensive force, although generally it adds a less important particular.
c. The points of transition in a narrative are frequently marked by kai, rendered into English, for rhetorical variety, by then, now, &c.
Luke x. 29: and who is my neighbour? Luke xviii. 26: and who can be saved? John ix. 36 (Tischendorf): and who is he, Lord, that I should believe ? Kat dramatically connects the ques- tion with what has just been said.
Matt. viii. 8. (See Mark iii. 13-26, viii. 10-18, and many other passages. )
d. This conjunction has also an explanatory or “ epexegetic” use, repeating (in thought, or by the aid of a pronoun) something that has been said, in order to introduce some additional particular.
Luke vii. 41 (pronoun and verb in the epexegetic clause), xxii. 41; John i. 16 (neither verb nor pronoun); 1 Cor. i. 2, il. 2, vi. 8 (read Touro). ‘i
Eph. i. 8: rj yap xdpiri eore cecwopévor dia THs rictews Kal TOOTO ovx ef iuav, Ccod rd ddpor, for by grace ye are saved through faith,
* Winer. ‘Kal conjungit, re adjungit.”—Hermann.
874 CONJUNCTIONS OF ANNEXATION. [§ 403.
and this not of yourselves, it (i.e., your being saved, is) the gift of God. “You must not suppose, because your salvation was con- ditioned by your faith, that therefore you saved yourselves.” *
e. Without direct connective force, cat often takes the meaning of also, even. Matt. v. 39: orpéyov air Kal riy GAnyr, turn to him. also the other cheek. Mark i. 27: kal rois mvevpact trois dxabapros éemirdcoe, he lays his command even upon the unclean spirits. It is evident that the emphasis in such passages arises from the tacit
connection and comparison with other objects of thought. The con- junction, therefore, is virtually still copulative.
This use of kat is frequent in comparisons.
Matt. vi. 10: yevnOnro 1rd OAnud cov ds ev ovpave Kal emi yas, thy will be done as in heaven so also upon earth.
John vi. 57: KaOds dwéoresdké pe 6 (Sv marnp, «t.d., as the living Father sent me, &c. There are two following clauses with kat, either of which might supply the second member of comparison : “so I live... and,” or (as E.V.) “and I live... so
Gal. i. 9: 4s mpoeipyxapey Kal dpri madw Aéeyo, as we have said before, so now also I say again.
Hence the use of «al to introduce the apodosis after hypothetical and temporal clauses. Luke ii. 21: then also his name was called Jesus ; 2 Cor. ii. 2: for if I grieve you, then who is he that gladdens me? often with idov, then behold! as Matt. xxviii. 9; Acts i. 10, &c. In the rising climax, od pévov is generally found in the former clause, GAG kat in the latter. Acts xxi. 13: éyd yap ob pévov SeOjvac GAA Kal drodavew ... éroipws éxo, for I am ready not only to be bound, but also to die. Rom. xiii.,5: od pdévow dia ry dpyiy GAG Kal did rv cuveidgnou, not only on account of the wrath, but also on account of conscience. For the combination kal ydp, see § 407, d.
* Some still refer rodro to rlorews (quite allowable on the score of gender, by synesis) ; but this seems against the Apostle’s argument. (See Ellicott, Eadie, Alford.)
Gr
§ 404. | CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. 37
ConJuNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS, Add, 86.
404, i. ’Add4, but (emphatic as contrasted with 8¢), is used to mark opposition, interruption, transition.
a. Opposition, simply. John xvi. 20: tpeis d€ AvmnoecOe, GAN 7 umn bpav eis xapdy yevnoerut, ye shall grieve, but your grief shall be turned wmto joy.
Frequently after negatives—
Matt. v. 17: ov« #AOov Karadrioa, GAA wAnpdcat, I came not to destroy, but to fulfil.
Rom, iii. 31: pa) yévorro’ GANG vopov iordper, asswredly not ; but we establish law.
6. Interruption. When a train of thought is broken, by some limitation, modification, correction.
John xii, 27: Idrep, cdadv pe ek ris Spas ravrys* GAAG dia Tov7o, x.tr, Lather, save me from this hour! but for this cause came I unto this hour. ?
Often in such connections the conjunction carries with it the force of Nay, especially after questions (Matt. xi. 8, 9; Luke vii. 25).
¢. Transition: the point of contrast being that the succeeding phrase is a new subject, or the same ina different aspect ; like our Well, then; Moreover ; Luke vi. 27, xi. 42; Gal. ii. 14, &e.
Special uses of this conjunction are (1) to throw emphasis on the following clause.
John Xvi. 2: drocuvayayour ..sicovow tpas * GAN epyerac Spa, k.7.d., they shall cast you out of the synagogues—yea, the hour cometh, &c.
So with a negative—
Luke xxiii, 15: oddev eipov ev rd dvdpamo ... EAN oddé *Hpddns, I found no blame in the man... no, nor yet Herod.
(2) In a conditional sentence, dAdd may stand in the apodosis with the meaning, yet, nevertheless. . dd
376 CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS, [§ 404.
1 Cor. ix. 2: ef Daras ove cipl dwdarodos, ANA ye Spiv eipi, Uf L am not an apostle to others, yet at least I am so to you. So Rom. vi. 5, &e.
(3) After the interrogative, dd)’ # means other than, except.
1 Cor, iii. 5: rls ofv gots Taddos, tls 8€ "AmoAAds, BAN 4 SidKovor, x.t.d., Who then is Paul, and who Apollos, but ministers, &c.
In 2 Cor. i. 13 we find the combination, &Aa... dAr’ H, other things, — than.
_ ii. Aé (postpositive) is also most properly adversative, though less _ emphatic than dada. It is to be carefully distinguished, on the other hand, from the copulatives cai, re, with the latter of which it is; however, often interchanged in MSS.
‘Thus, the frequent phrase, éyd 8 Ayo iviv, marks either a contrast with what has been said before, or an addition to it; the antithesis lying in the thought, “the foregoing is not all, bué I add,” &e.
lt is generally difficult to exhibit the exact adversative force of this conjunction, and in translation it is often taken as a mere adjunctive. Thus, in the English version it is very frequently rendered and, or then (Matt. xix. 23), now (xxi. 18), so (xx. 8), or left entirely untranslated (xxviii. 1). The “dé resumptive” is especially, perhaps unavoidably, so treated.
A close attention to this particle in the innumerable instances of its occurrence will repay the student, who will often by its means mark an otherwise concealed antithesis. The following illustrations are from
Winer :—
Matt. xxi. 3: but he will straightway send them, t.e., not cavil or hesitate, but—.
Acts xxiv. 17: but I pass on to another part of my history.
1 Cor. xiv. 1: yet desire spiritual gifts, notwithstanding the supremacy of love.
2 Cor. ii. 12: but when I came to Troas ; 5: resumptive, from ver. 4.
1 Cor. xi. 2: but I praise you, even while I exhort, as ver. 1.
Rom. iv. 3: but Abraham believed God, so far was he from being justified by works (James ii. 23),
—_ =
§ 404. ] CONJUNCTIONS OF ANTITHESIS. 377
Kal... 8¢, together imply yea... moreover, assuming what has been said, and passing on to something more.*
Matt. x. 18, xvi. 18 (and not only so, but I say unto thee); John vi. 51, viii. 16, 17, xv. 27; Acts iii. 24, xxii. 29; 2 Pet.i.5; 1 John i. 3. .
The full form of antithesis with pév and 8€ is frequent in the New Testament.t Compare § 136, 6, 4. .
Matt. ix. 37: 6 pav Oepicpds mods, of 8% epydrae dAtyou, the harvest is plenteous, but the labourers are few.
Matt. xvi. 3, xx. 23, xxii. 8, xxiii. 27, 28, xxvi. 41, &c.
Sometimes pév is followed by the emphatic adversative Add: Mark ix. 12; Acts iv. 16; Rom. xiv. 20; also wdqv, Luke xxli. 22; nal, Acts xxvi. 4, de. .
In several passages pév is found without any antithetic particle. This is to be explained by an interrupted construction of the sentence, or by virtual antithesis. According to Winer, these cases may be classed in a threefold way :—
1. The suppressed parallel member of the antithesis is implied in the clause with p&. Rom. x. 1; Col. ii. 23. |
2. It is plainly indicated under another turn of expression: Rom. xi. 13.
3. The construction is entirely broken, and the parallel clause is to be supplied by the general sense of the sequel. Actsi1; Rom. i. 8, iti. 2, vii. 12; 1 Cor. xi. 18, de.
Tue DIssJUNCTIVES.
405. The disjunctives are #4, or (after a comparative, than) ; 4)... 4, ether... or; etre... etre, whether ... whether. Once Hrov... %, whether ... or (there being no other alternative), Rom. vi. 16.
Matt. v. 17: ph voutonre Ste AAOov Kataddca rdv vépov H Tovs mpopnras, think not that I came to destroy the law or the prophets.
* See Alford, Matt. x. 18. T Far less frequent, however, than in classic Greek.
378 THE DISJUNCTIVES. 1§ 405,
Matt. xii. 33: 4 moujoare 1b dévdpov Kaddv ... } mouoate rd bévdpov gampov, xt.r., either make the tree good ...or make the tree cor- rupt, &e.
Luke xx. 2: & mola éefovoia raira roves, 4 ris écrw 6 Sobs cot Tip e£ouciay tadtny ; in what authority doest thou these things, or who ix he that gave thee this authority? Matt. xxi. 23, has nat. Hither conjunction evidently gives equally good sense.
1 Cor, xi. 27: és dv ea6in tov aprov 4 ivy rd mornpioy trod Kupiov, whoever shall eat the bread or drink the cup of the Lord (whichever he does, not by any means implying that he is not to do both). The previous verse has kai, which is also a var. read. here.
1 Cor. x. 31: etre ody éoblere etre mivere etre ru motetre, Whether then ye are eating or drinking, or doing anything (at all).
The combination 4 kat, or even, occurs Luke xviii. 11; Rom. it 15.5 2 Cor. i. 13. : .
The “interrogative” 4, so called, is no more than the disjunctive with the former clause understood.*
Rom. iii. 29: 4 "Iovdaiav 6 Geds pdvov, odyt Kat ebvav; or ts he the B » OVX ) :
God of Jews only, not of Gentiles also? Such, the Apostle sug- gests, is the alternative of denying the statement made, ver. 28. See Rom. vi. 3, vii. 1, &. In 1 Cor. xiv. 36, the former 4% is not correlative with the latter, but refers to the previous train of thought : Or, was it that the word of God, &c., as must be supposed if you deny my authority in these matters. Dean Stanley renders, What! went the word ? &e.
INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS.
406. The chief particles of inference are otv, therefore, post- positive, and dpa, accordingly, postpositive, or, with emphasis, prepositive.
vb is properly the particle of formal inference, kindred to the parti- ciple of eis, dv, ty (gue cum ita sint) &pa, cognate with &pw, to fit, marks a correspondence in point of fact (ergo).
* Sec Viger’s ‘*Greck Idioms,” and Hartung, Partikellehre, sub voc. 4.
ok =
3 j | f «
§ 406. ] INFERENTIAL CONJUNCTIONS. Sve
Matt. iii, 8: somoare otv Kaprov déov tis petavolas, yteld, there- fore, fruit worthy of your repentance.
Gal. il. 21: ef yap 81a vopov Sixacoodvn, &pa Xpioros Swpedv arébaver, for f righteousness is by law, then Christ died in vain.
Both these particles, however, are often used with slighter meaning, as in our use of the words Zhen, Well then, in the con- tinuance of narrative or speech. “Apaye (Matt. vil. 20, xvii. 26 ; Acts xi. 18; xvii. 27) is emphatic. The combination, dpa ody, is found repeatedly in the Epistles of St. Paul, as Rom. v. 18: So, therefore, the otv marking the logical inference, and the dpa intimating the harmony between premises and conclusion.
For dpa interrogative, see 137, b.
Other inferential particles occasionally found are pevotvye, yes, indeed, but, Luke xi. 28; Rom. ix. 20, x. 18; rovyapodv, wherefore then, 1 Thess. iv. 8; Heb. xii. 1; rotvev (surely now), therefore, Luke xx. 25; 1 Cor ix. 26; Heb. xiit. 13.
CausaAL CONJUNCTIONS, ESPECIALLY dep.
407. a. The causal conjunctions are. demonstrative and relative. Of these the latter occur in subordinate clauses, the rules of which have already been given.
The relative causal particles are dri, because ; 5671, because (not in the Evy. or Rev.) Similarly used is éref (properly temporal, when), since, with its emphatic compounds éreidh, since now; éwelarep (once, Rom. ili. 30), since indeed; and éme:dhrep (only Luke i. 1), forasmuch as. (See § 137, a.) .
For the relative phrases, with prepositions, used as conjunctions— e.g-, «p , av? av—see under the Prepositions, §§ 305, 291.
b. The demonstrative causal conjunction, ydép, always postposi- tive, is a contraction of yt &pa, “ verily then ;” hence, in fact, and, when the fact is given as a reason or explanation, for.
Matt. i. 21; ii, 2, 5, 6, 13, 20; iii. 2, 3, 9, 15, &e.
Generally, the explanation introduced by ydp is also.a direct reason. But this need not be always the case. See Matt. i. 18:
st
7
380 CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. [§ 407.
“ Mary, as the fact was, being betrothed.” Mark v. 42: “She arose and walked, for she was twelve years old; xvi. 4: “They saw that'the stone was rolled away, for it was very great” (an explana-
tion, not of the fact that it was rolled away, but of the necessity
for this beg done). Compare Ps. xxv. 11: “For thy name’s sake, O Lord, pardon mine iniquity, for it is great (the reason, not why pardon is to be bestowed, but why it is sought).
The student must beware of translating ydp by such words as but, although, yet peradventure, &.* Romans v. 7 reads, for scarcely on behalf of a righteous man will one die; for on behalf of the good man one even dares to die. ‘‘The second for,” says Alford, ‘‘is exceptive, and answers to ‘I do not press this without exception,’ understood.” The good man and the righteous are not contrasted as different classes of persons, but the ‘‘good” (as the article also shows) are classed under the ‘‘ righteous.”
c. In questions and answers especially, ydp is often used in refer- ence to the words or thought of the other party.
Matt. xxvii. 23: ri yap xaxoy émoince; Why, what evil hath he done ?
John vii. 41; Acts viii. 31, xix. 35 (Be calm! for what man is there ? &c.)
John ix. 30: év rovr@ yap Oavpaordy éorw! Why, herein is a won- derful thing! In 1 Thess. ii. 20, the Apostle thus answers his own question: “ Yes, ye are our glory and our joy.”
d. In the combination, xal ydép, the true connective is generally «alt, which resumes in thought the topic of the previous clause ; while ydp appends the explanation or the reason (etenim).
Matt. viii. 9: Kal yap éyd dvOpwmds elpr, x.7.d., and (this I say) for I am a man under authority, &e.
So Matt. xxvi. 73; Mark x. 45; Luke vi. 32, 34; Jonn iv. 23 (and (that,) because the Father, &c.); Acts xix. 40 ‘and (this advice I press,) seeing that, &c.); 1 Cor. v. 7, xii. 13, 14; 2 Cor. v. 4, xiii. 4; 1 Thess, iv. 10; 2 Thess. iii. 10; Heb. v. 12, x. 34, &c. In these cases, nal ydp must generally be rendered simply for (or for, indeed), except when it is desired by paraphrase to bring out its full meaning.
* See Winer, § 53, 10, 3.
———
§ 407. | - CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. ; 381
.
But sometimes yép is the connective, and xai belongs to the second clause, with the sense of also, even (ydp, of course, being placed after it as a postpositive conjunction.) (See Ellicott’s note on 2 Thess, ii. 10).
Rom. xi. 1: kat yap éyd Iopandirns eit, for I also am an Israelite.
Rom. xv. 3: kal yap 6 Xpicris ody éauvra ifpecev, for even Christ pleased not himself.
So perhaps Heb. xii. 29: kal yap 6 Geds judy wip Karavarickor, for even our God is a consuming fire.
ASYNDETON.
408. The omission of conjunctions, or asyndeton,* often heightens the effect of a paragraph.
a. The copulative may be omitted, as Gal. v. 22: 6 8€ xapmrés rod mvevpatés eat ayamn, xapd, elpnvn, paxpobvpia, ypnordrns, dyabwovrn, nloris, mpadrns, eyxpdreca, But the fruit of the Spirit is love, joy, peace, long-suffering, kindness, goodness, faith, meekness, self-control.
b. Kat epexegetic is sometimes dropped. Col. i. 14: &v 6 eyonev THY amodUTpwow, Thy adeow trav dyaptiav, in whom we have the redemption, the remission of our sins.
c. The omission of the antithetic may be marked in passages like 1 Cor. xv. 43, 44 — |
oreiperat ev pOopa, éyeiperat ev apOapoia.
omelperat €v atipia, eyeipetar ev OdEn.
omeipetat év doOeveia, eyeipera ev Suvdpet.
omelperat THua vuyikdy, eyeiperar cGpa mvevpaTikdv.
d. The causal particle is occasionally dropped. Rev. xxii. 10: py oppaylons tovs Adyous ths mpodpnreias rod BiBAlov rovrov' 6 Kacpos eyyvs eat, Seal not the words of the prophecy of this book ; the time is near. (The rec. text supplies 81.)
* *Aotvderoy, from 4, not, and cvvdéw, to bind toyether.
382 PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. [§ 409, »
CHapTeER [X.—ON SOME PECULIARITIES IN THE STRUCTURE OF SENTENCES.
409. a. The Arrangement of words in a sentence indicates the order of thought. Hence naturally, the Subject with the words eonnected takes the leading place, then the Predicate with its adjuncts. Words connected in sense are mostly kept together. ‘The Object usually follows the governing verb; a Genitive or Dative, the word on which it depends ; and an Adjective, the sub- stantive with which it agrees.
The opposite constructions are emphatic, as (1) when the Predicate stands first. See the Beatitudes, Matt. v. 3-11; also Matt. vii. 13-15 ; John i. 1, iv. 19, 24, vi. 60; Rom. vill. 18, unworihy are the sufferings ! 2 Tim. ii. 11; (2) the Object before the verb. Luke xvi. 11, the true riches who will entrust to you ? John ix. 31; Rom. xiv. 1, &e. ; (3) an oblique case before the governing noun. Rom. xi. 13, of Gentiles an apostle ; Rom. xii. 19 (Heb. x. 30); 1 Cor. iii. 9; Heb. vi. 16; 1°Pet. iii. 21, &c. ; (4) an Adjective before its noun. Matt. vii. 13, through the strait gate (the emphasis being on the narrowness) ; 1 Tim. vi. 12, 14, where good («adés) is repeatedly and strikingly emphatic; James iii, 5.
The usual arrangement of Adverbs, Prepositions, and the Particles generally, has already beer safficiently illustrated.
b. Since, in an inflected language like the Greek, it is unneces- sary to indicate the grammatical dependence of words by their order, the arrangement of a sentence may be indefinitely varied for purposes of emphasis ; and there is, perhaps, not a paragraph in the New Testament in which the collocation of words does not indicate some subtle meaning or shade of thought, scarcely to be reproduced in the most accurate translation, '
Generally speaking, the emphatic positions are at the beginning and the end of a clause, especially the former.
ce. Constructions that apparently violate the simplicity of speech may generally also suggest some special emphasis.
§ 409.] PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. 383
1 Cor. xiii. 1: Lf with the tongues of men I speak ... and of the angels,
Heb. vii. 4: to whom also Abraham gave tithe of the spoils ... the patriarch, %.e., though he bore that sacred character.
1 Pet. ii. 7: for you, then, is the preciousness ... who believe, 2.¢., on the condition that you are believers.
See also Heb. ii. 9.
The displacement of a word or phrase, as in the above instances, , for the sake of greater effect, is sometimes termed Hyperbaton, from ' $repBalvw.
410. Liliptical constructions are not infrequent. Many have already been noticed in their place ; as the ellipsis of the Copula, § 166; of the Subject, § 169; of Substantives, §§ 256, 316. Two important elliptical forms of expression are the following :—-
(1) Apostopesis, or expressive pause: some look or gesture, or the mind of the hearer, being supposed to supply the rest.
Luke xiil. 9: xdv pév mounon kaprdr ... ei S€ pye, wTA., and Uf t bear fruit ... but if not, &e.
Acts xxiii, 9: ef S€ mvetua eAddnoev attra if dyyedos ..., but if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel... (The following words, leé us not fight against God, are regarded by the best editors as an interpolation. )
See also Luke xix. 42, xxii. 42; John vi. 62.
(2) Zeugma: a construction in which a verb is joined to two or more different objects, though only applicable in strictness to one.
1 Cor. iii. 2: ydda tpas erérica, od Boda, I gave you milk to drink, not meat.
See also Luke i. 64; Acts iv. 28; 1 Tim. iv. 3 (where the antithetic verb must be understood).
b. In accordance with the primitive simplicity of language, the links between different clauses are sometimes omitted, being left to the reader to supply in thought.
384 PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. [§ 410.
Thus, Rom. vi. 17: Thanks be to God that ye were the servants of sin, but ye obeyed, &c., t.e, “that although ye were once the servants of sin, ye have now obeyed.”
So 1 Tim. i. 13, 14: I obtained mercy, because I did tz tgno- rantly in unbeltef, but the grace of our Lord was exceeding abun- dant, 2.e., “I obtained mercy, because (while I acted thus) the grace of the Lord abounded.”
Compare also Matt. xi. 25- John iii. 19.
411. a. Some forms of expression are apparently redundant. In these cases, a special emphasis may generally be marked.
Instead, therefore, of assuming pleonasm, the careful student will note the emphatic meaning. Frequent cases are the following :— (1) Simple repetition of a phrase. Rom. viii. 15: ‘‘ ye received not the spirit of bondage, but ye received the spirit of adoption;” Col. i, 28: ‘*‘warning every man, and teaching every man in all wisdom, that we may present every man perfect in Christ Jesus;”. Heb. ii. 16: ‘‘he taketh not hold of angels, but he taketh hold of the seed of Abraham.” (2) Repetition in a contrasted form. John i. 20: ‘‘he confessed, and denied not ;” Acts xviii. 9: ‘‘ Speak, and be not silent ;” Rom. ix. 1 (1 Tim. ii. 7): ‘‘I speak the truth in Christ, I We not.’ (3) The men- tion of accompanying circumstances, as Matt. v. 2: ‘‘he opened his mouth, and said” (comp. Acts viii. 35); John xxi. 13: ‘‘ Jesus cometh, and taketh the bread, and giveth to them;” where ‘‘every separate act of the wonderful occurrence is designedly specified, and, as it were, placed before the eye.”* The verbs, come, arise, take, stretch forth (the hand), are frequently found in such connection.
b. An idiom to be especially noticed is that in which an Accu- sative object and an Object-sentence are both appended to the verb.
In this case also the double expression conveys an emphasis; the attention being first called to the Object, and then to that which is said about it. For examples of this idiom, see § 382, d. Other instances are John xi. 31; Acts iv. 13, ix. 20, xvi. 3; 1 Cor. xvi. 15; Gal. vi. 1.
412. Anacolouthon (dvaxddovOov) is literally a breach in the con- tinuity of a sentence, and is a term applied to those numerous
* Winer.
Se a,
§ 412. | PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. 385
instances in which the construction is changed in the course of the same period.
Many so-called anacoloutha are, however, to be explained by laws of construction already laid down. The deviations from strict grammatical construction, excepting in the book of Revelation, are comparativély few, and are generally to be paralleled from classic authors.
The most frequent cases of anacolouthon may be classed as follows :—
a. The transition from the indirect to the direct form of speech—
Luke v. 14: he charged him to tell no man (pndevi eimeiv), but go and show thyself, &c. (awehOav Sei€ov, k.7.2.)
See also Mark vi. 9, xi. 832; Actsi. 4, xvii. 3.
b. The transition from a participial construction to a finite verb—
Eph. i. 20: eyetpas abrov ... kal exdbioer, having ratsed him ... and he set him. . |
See also John v. 44; 1 Cor. vii. 37; 2 Cor. v. 6, 8; Col. i. 6, 26; 2 John 2.
c. The use of nominative participles in reference to substantives of any case, standing at a distance in the sentence— : Phil. i. 29, 30: ipiv éxapiodn 1d trép Xpiorod ... maayxeww, Tov avTov ayava txovres, to you it was granted to suffer for Christ, having the same conflict. Compare § 397.
d. A change of structure in the course of the sentence—
Luke xi. 11: riva é& tyav tov marépa airnoes 6 vids dprov, pi AiBov emidaocet adrov; lit., from which of you, the father, shall his son ask bread ... will he give him a stone ?
Compare Mark ix. 20; John vi. 22-24; Acts xix. 34. e. The non-completion of a compound sentence; the second
member of a comparison, for instance, being omitted, or only suggested by the general sense of the passage —
386 PECULIARITIES OF CONSTRUCTION. [§ 412.
1 Tim. i. 3: xaOas mapexddeod oe mpocpeiva ev "Edéow, as I exhorted thee to abide in Ephesus (where the E.V. supplies so do at the end of ver. 4, without anything corresponding in the original.)
Rom. v. 12: As by one man sin entered into the world. The antithesis, Winer thinks, is completed in sense, though not in form, in ver. 15. Others suppose a long parenthesis from ver. 13-17, inclusive ; the parallel being resumed and completed in ver. 18.
See also 2 Pet. ii. 4.
To this head may be referred the frequent occurrence of uéy without the corresponding 5é (See § 404.) °
413. An attention to sound and rhythm in the structure of sentences is sometimes observable.
a. Paronomasia, or alliteration, was a common ornament of _speech with Oriental writers. Hence its employment in the New Testament.
Luke xxi. 11: Awol cai Aounol Ecovrar. ;
Acts xvii. 25: {wiv cal rvojy.
Heb. v. 8: thabey ad’ dv trafe,
Rom. i. 29: pecrovs p8dvov, pdvov.
These are instances of alliteration proper, there being no con- nection between the words in meaning. Where such a connection exists, the effect of the sentence is rather in the sense than in the sound,
Matt. xvi. 18: od ef Tlérpos, nai evi ravry 1) térpg, x.7.X.
Acts vill. 30: dpd ye ywookes d dvaywackeis ;
Rom. xii. 3: py twepppovety wap d Set poverty, GANA ppovetv eis 7d cappove'v,
i Tim. i. 8: Kadds 6 vopos, éav ris ard voplpws ypirat.
In the Epistle to Philemon there are probably allusions to the name of Onesimus, édvjoimos, profitable. (See ver. 11, and dvaluny, ver. 20.)
b. As the characteristic of Hebrew poetry is to run in parallel clauses, it might naturally be expected that in passages of strong
.
¥ 413.] RHYTHM AND PARALLELISM. 387
and sustained feeling, the same peculiarity would be found in the New Testament.* There are some decided instances, as 1 Tim. iii. 16: | " €havepoOn év oapki ... dixarmOn ev mvevdpart opOn ayyérors ... exnpvxOn ev €Ovecty. eriatevOn ev Koop ... avednpOn ev OdEy.
This passage was probably part of a rhythmical creed of the early Church, or of a primitive Christian hymn. For true hymns, see also Luke i, 46-55, 68-79, ii. 29-32; Eph. v..14; Jude 24, 25; Rev. v. 12-14, &e.
Rom. ix. 2: Avan poe eori peyady,
kal dduddeurros ddvvn 7 Kapdia uov. Here we have the tone of strong emotion.
For similar rhythmic constructions, see John xiv. 27; Rom. xi. 33; 1 Cor. xv. 54-57; Col. i. 10-12, and many other passages. The parallel clauses often contain strong contrasts, as John ili. 20, 21; Rom. ii. 6-10, where a long series occurs.
Sometimes the construction is more elaborate ; a second series of clauses corresponding with the first, but in reverse order. This is called “reverted parallelism,” or chiasmus,t or epanodos (érédvo8os). See a simple illustration, § 312, 1. Simpler still is Matt. xii. 22: “the blind and dumb, both spake and saw.” Compare Matt. vii. 6.
So Phil. iii. 10: ‘‘ro KNow Him, and the power of his resurrection, and the fellowship of his sufferings, being made conformable unto his death, if by any means I might attain to the resurrection (elavdcraciwv) of the dead.”
Other more elaborate harmonies of the kind might-easily be traced. The whole subject connects itself with the study of the influence of the Old Testament upon the New—an important field of enquiry, as yet only very partially explored.
* See Jebb’s ‘‘Sacred Literature,” and especially the versions of the
Epistle to the Romans by the Rev. J. H. Hinton, a.m., and by the Rev. Dr, Forbes, + From the letter chi, X.
388 POETIC QUOTATIONS—RHYTHM. [§ 418.
»@.(1) Three quotations of Greek poetry have been found in the New Testament, all by the Apostle Paul.
Acts xvii. 28: rod yap kai yévos éopev* (the former half of a hexa- meter), by Aratus, a native of Tarsus, B.c. 270; found also with . a little variation (é« cod ydp) in Cleanthes, a poet of Troas, B.c. 300.
1 Cor. xv. 33: Géeipovow F6n xpnoP Suidia xaxai, from Menander, an Athenian comic poet, about B.c. 320. (The measure is iambic trimeter.) Mat
Titus i. 12: Kpires del edorat, Kakd Onpia, yaorépes apyai (a com- plete hexameter), by Epimenides, the Cretan bard (see ver. 5), about B.c. 600.
(2) There are also apparently unconscious verses, such as will sometimes occur in prose style. Compare the anapestic line— ‘*T'o preach the acceptable year of the Lord.”
And the English hexameter— ‘¢‘ Husbands, love your wives, and be not bitter against them.”
Also the iambic couplet —
‘‘Her ways are ways of pleasantness, And all her paths are peace.”
The following have been traced :—
Hexameters—
Heb. xii. 13: kat rpoyias dpOas moujcare trois rool ipar. James i. 17: raca ddors dyabn kai wav SHpnya rédevov.
Tambic measure—
Acts xxiii. 5: dpyovra rod Aaod cov ovk Epeis Kakds.
This last is a quotation from the LXX. (Exod. xxii. 28). It is possible that the others may be citations also from some unknown poetic source.
2 THESSALONIANS 1. 1, 2. 389
ANALYTICAL EXERCISE ON THE SECOND EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS.
The following Exercise illustrates the application of many of the foregoing rules to an extended portion of the New Testament. The figures refer to the Sections, which the student is recommended to consult, 7
Verbal analysis is not given, as being unnecessary at the present stage. No word, however, should be left without its stem, declen- sion, conjugation, &., being accurately known. The verbs of the Epistle have already been taken as material for an Exercise (Ex. 15, p. 137).
The Epistle is given as in the Received Text, important cor- rections being subjoined in the Notes. No interpretation of diffi- cult passages is attempted. The first duty of the New Testament student is to ascertain the plain grammatical meaning of the text: the way to its explanation will then be open.
ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
CHAPTER I.
TIATAOS® xat StArovavds cal Tiyddeos, tH exkAnola Ocooa-
t
4 > cad bes, a \ Fama a Oe +S f Aovikewv ev Mew Tatpl nuwv kat Kupio Inoot Xpiot@* * xapis
Ver. 1. Paul, and Silvanus, and Timotheus, nominatives; tne compound subject of the sentence of salutation, some such predicate as ‘send greeting,” being understood, involved in xdpis, ver. 2. (For the proper names, see 159, c, d.) to the church, dat. of transmission, 278; secondary obj. of the implied verb. of Thessalonians, extension of secondary obj.; gen. of material (or origin, 248); article omitted, 233, because only some in Thessalonica belonged to the church. in God our Father,
390 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE, vuiv Kat eipyvn anxd Ocod Tarpds juav Kal Kupiov “Inoot Xptiorod.
5 Evxapioreiy dpelAomev TO Oe@ Tavrote wep) tuadv, adeAdot,
- Kadas Gbidv eoriv, Ot. bmepavéaver 4 Tiotis tuav, Kat TAEovaces
1) yarn évdos Exdorov TdvTwv tuav eis GAAjAous* * Sore Has
ad = a > a a ss cal avrovs év tyiv Kavxacat ev tats exxAnolats Tod Ocod, ixép Tijs UToporns tuav Kal Tictews Ev Tact Tois diwypois tuay Kal Tats
further extension of éxxAnolg; for év, see 295, 43; marpl, dat. by apposition, 177; quay, unemphatic possessive, 333. and the Lord Jesus Christ, Kupig under the same regimen with ©e@, without the article, intimating that the union is one and the same with both. See 232, and compare 217, a, b (3), e, note. ,
Ver. 2. Grace unto you, and peace (the Eastern and Western modes of salutation), subj. of omitted verb, em; comp. 166. from God our Father, extension of subj.; for amd, see 292, 2 (John, in a similar connection, uses mapd, 2 Ep. ver. 3; é« is more usual). and the Lord csesus Christ, prep. not repeated, 314, to show that the source is one.
Ver. 3. We are bound, 69. plur., as referring to the three in ver. 1 * (some, less probably, understand the Apostle as speaking of himself, see 239) ; to thank God, «ix., inf. in its ordinary use, 385; tense as 386; for dat. cg, see 278, d. always, adv. qualifying «bx. concerning you, for mepi, see 302, a. brethren, voc., as is meet, &idy, neuter, as referring to the substantivized clause. because your faith greatly increases (S71 causal, 407), explanation of the clause immediately preceding. For ixép in composition, see 147, a; the verb is nowhere else found in the New Testament. and the love of every one of you all to one an- other abounds, évos éxdorov, possess. gen., 254 (comp. 269); mavt. ty, partitive gen., 261; present tenses as 361, a. For eis (dependent upon aydmn), see 298, 3. ;
Ver. 4. So that we ourselves boast in you, Gore, 391; ju. adr. (emphatic), subj. of inf., 285, 387; év, 295, 4; Lachmann and Tischendorf read eykavyac0u. among the churches of God, for év, see 295, 2; for the art. with ©, 217, a. for your endurance and faith, irép, 303, a, 3. For the one article with the two nouns, see 232, a; the endurance and faith combine to form one character. in all your persecutions, and the afflictions, the article repeated, 232,b. which ye endure, | ais, dat. by attraction (for dy, as the verb governs a gen. in the New Testa- ment, 2 Cor. xi. 1; 2 Tim. iv. 3), 346, b; avéx, only middle in the New ‘Festament, act.,.‘*to hold up;” so mid., ‘‘to hold one’s self up against,”
955s 1.
2 THESSALONIANS I. 5-8. 391
Oriipeow als avéxeode, * évderyya rtijs duxalas Kploews Tod Ocod, eis TO KatakimOjvar tuas ths BactAelas Tod Ocod, © tmép 7s Kal mdaoxeTe* eltep Oikatoy Tapa Oe@ avrarododvar tots OAlBovaow duas OrAApuw, 1 Kal tuiv rots OABouevors dveow pe Hudv, ev TH 5 y n >? Ae 9 > an oS /
amoxadtwet Tod Kuplov “Incod am’ odpavod per ayyéAwv dvvdpews avtobd, 8 év mupt pdoyds, diddvTos Exdiknow Tots pr €iddcr Ocdv, kal Tots pr) tmaxotovor Te evayyeAlm tod Kupiov judy “Inood
Ver. 5. (Which is) a token, nom. (pred. to an implied relative clause, 6 éoriv); the token being the endurance and faith of the Thessalonians. of the righteous judgment of God, genitives of origin or source, 248; article again employed. in order that ye may be counted worthy, for inf., see 390, ¢; tense, 386; duis, 285. The clause expresses the intent of God’s righteous judgment; and hence its result, in proving the fitness of the faithful for God’s kingdom. of the kingdom of God, Bac. gen. after compound of &ios, 272.
Ver. 6. For the sake of which ye also suffer, for itp, see 303, 2. The xat combines into one the thought of the suffering and the being counted worthy. if truly it is righteous (as it is, implied by -rep), copula omitted ; di. neut., because referring to inf. ‘with God, for mapa (dat.), see 306, 8, 2. to repay to those who afflict you, affliction, in the verb, aré marks the debt, ay7f the return; for the aorist, see 386. (This verb is used both in a good and a bad sense in the New Testament: to ‘‘repay” or to ‘‘retaliate,” Rom. xii. 19.) For the art. and participle, see 395; dat. secondary object, and acc. primary object after the verb, 278.
Ver. 7. And to you, the afflicted, 9.8. is passive (not middle). rest with us, merd, as 301, a, 1; jaw, referring to the three, ch.i1. at (ev, 295, 7) the revelation of the Lord Jesus from heaven, the time when the recompense shall take place, referred to dvram., ver. 6; dé, 292, 13 ovpavod, singular, 240, a, note, and without article, 218. with the angels of his power, compare 258. The angels are the ministers of his power. The art. is unnecessary before adyy., as the following gen. defines it, 208.
Ver. 8. In a fire of flame, & of investiture, dependent upon K. Iye., 295, 3 (Lachm. and others read éy gaAoy! rupds, in a flame of fire); rec. reading, pAoyds; gen. of quality or attribute, 257. allotting vengeance, d:50vtos refers to Incov. (The verbin this connection is unusual.) to those who know not God, dat., 278; art, and part., 395; muh, the subjective negative, see 393. and to those who obey not, for the repeated article, see 232, 5b. the gospel, dat., 278,d. of our Lord Jesus, see 270, note. Christ. (Modern editors generally omit Xp:sTod.)
€@
392 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
Xoworod: * ofrives diknv tleovow, ddrcOpov aidviov amd mpoodzov tod Kupiov, cat amd tijs ddéns tis icxvos adrod, 1 drav eAOn évdogacOjvar év tots ayiows aitod, kal Oavpacbvar év Tact Tots miotevovow, Ste emioredOn TO paptipioy huav ed? spas, ev TH c , ° é ll 3 é , / OE g an
neepa exeivyn. 1 eis 6 kal mpocevydueda advrote wept tpyar, iva tuas akidon ths KAjoews 6 Ocds judy, kal wAnpdon Tacav
Ver. 9. Who, the compound relative, denoting character and suggesting the reason, 349. shall pay (the) penalty, eternal destruction, acc. in apposition with dinny, 177. (away) from the presence of the Lord, art. omitted before mpoodémrov, 219. The meaning of aé is doubtful. It may either refer to the source of the punishment, 292, 3, ‘inflicted by the presence of the Lord,” or to the fact of separation, 292, 1, this being itself the doom. Probably the latter meaning is to be adopted. and from the glory of his might, the preposition repeated, to indicate a distinct conception ; icxtos is the gen. of origin, 248. The glory is that of God's manifested might, and exclusion from this beatific vision shall be destruction,
Ver. 10. When he shall have come, éray with subj., 379; fut. perf. foree of subj. aor., 333, 8 (ray as édv). ‘to be glorified, inf. of design, 390, 3, note; for tense, 386. in (or among, 295, 2) his saints, and to be admired in (or among) all who believe (read moretcacww, aor. part., ‘already believers,” compare 364, e); probably éy here is to be taken, not as among simply, but as showing the sphere (295, 4) in which the glory will be displayed, and from which the admiration will spring. because our testimony to you was believed, parenthetical expansion of wigtetcagw, and the one aor. helps to explain the other: then, belief will have become a fact of the past. ‘jay is gen. of origin. For éml, dependent on paptipioy, see 305, 7, 4. in that day, clause dependent on évdog. Kal Cavu., thrown somewhat out of order, compare 409, c. For éy, see 295, 73 éxeivy, the emphatic demonstrative, 340, note.
Ver. 11. Whereto we also pray, «is denoting direction, 298, 4; 8, rel. pron., acc. neut., antecedent in the entire previous sentence, 344; kal, with reference to the general sentiment of the preceding, ‘‘we not only indulgé the hope, but also express it in prayer.” always concerning you, 313, 2. that (384, note) our God may count you worthy of the calling, gen., as 272, and for art., see 210. The meaning of éfidop is doubtful: make worthy would appear best to suit the context, but this sense of the verb in the New Testament is unexampled. and fulfil every good pleasure (see 224, a; 214, c) of goodness, i.e., every voluntary purpose that can spring from (gen. orig.) goodness; not God’s goodness, for which ayalwotyy is never used, but goodness as an element of Christian
2 THESSALONIANS I. 12; n1. I, 2. 393
eddoxiay adyabwodvns Kal épyov mlorews ev buvduers ” drws n nm n > n na n
évdogacOj 7d dvoua Tod Kupiov jyav “Incod Xpiotod év tyiv, kal
~ n n na ? a
tyeis ev adTa, kara THY xdpww Tod Ocod judy Kai Kupiov ‘Inood
Xpucrov.
‘ CHAPTER II.
"EPOTOMEN 82 tas, ddeAgol, bxep ris mapovelas tod Kuplov jpav "Inood Xpiorod, kal huayv emovvaywyis én adrov, * eis 7d py taxéos cadevOijvar tuas amd Tod vods, pare OpocioOat, pare Sa mvedparos pte ba Adyou pre Ov emioTOATs ws bu Hudv, ws
character, so corresponding with the next clause. and work (also quali- fied by wacay, see 318) of faith (248) in power (295, 6), qualifying mwAnpéon, ‘* powerfully fulfil.”
Ver. 12. In order that the name of our Lord Jesus (Christ), Srws, as distinguished from iva, seems to denote the how as contrasted with the where; but the line cannot be very clearly drawn. Xpiorod is omitted by most edd. may be glorified (384, a, 1; tense, 374, note) in you (see on ver. 10), and you (understand évdotaeéAre) in him (or in it, ie., the name, but less probably. See Alford, and 295, 4, note), according to, for ard, see 300, 8,5. the grace of our God and Lord Jesus Christ (or of our God and the Lord Jesus Christ), see 232, a, note on Titus ii. 13, where, however, the phrases are different. Kudpios is so often properly anarthrous (217, 6) that the former of the above renderings is at least doubtful. (See Ellicott here).
Ver. 1. But (5é transitional, 4¢4; the writer’s mind passing from his own prayers to the duty of his readers) we entreat you, brethren, in reference to, 303, a, 3 (not by, as if in adjuration. See Alf.) the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ, and our (gen. obj., 268) gathering together unto him, for érf, see 305, y, 3 (Mark v. 21), not up to, although the reference is to the final gathering.
Ver. 2. That ye be not (lit., im order that ye should not be) soon shaken, for eis, see 298, 4. The purpose of the entreaty was to prevent their being shaken. For 146, substantivizing the inf., see 390; for mf, 385; for duas, 285, and note. from your mind (or conviction), az, as 292, 1; the article as an unemphatic possessive, 215. nor yet be troubled, for undé disjunctive (not whre, as rec.), see 405; OpocioOa, pres, inf., denoting an enduring state, the aor., cadevd., referring to a single effect, 386. neither by spirit nor by word nor by letter, as by us,
3894 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
; e a - . , o . rt evéorykev 7) Hepa Tod Xpictod. 3 My tis duds eLamarnon N , ’ 3 cane Das \ e's , a
Kata pndeva TpdTov* Ori edy pr EAON 7 ATooTacla TpGrov, Kat anoxadvp07 6 avOpwmos tijs Guaprias, 6 vids ris dmwdcias i r Tihs Gpaprias, Th ;
, ea / , a
465 dvtixeiuevos kal tmepaipdpevos emt mavta eyopuevov Ocdv 7 o¢Bacpa, dote airov eis Tov vady Tod Ocod ws Ocdv xabicat, s < OY 4 bees | , ee , oe oe amodetkvuvTa E€avTov OTL éoTl Oecos.. ° ov prynpovedere Ort ETL OV
the repeated ure here breaks up the negation into three parts, and connects, them. For did, see 299, a, 2. (Spirit no doubt refers to a pretended pro- phecy ; word, to a pretended saying on inspired authority ; letter, therefore, according to the parallel, should mean a pretended epistle. That the refer- ence is not to the First Epistle, the és seems further to indicate). as that (2 Cor. v. 19 shows that the @s does not in itself imply deceit, but only that the thing was so represented—‘‘to the effect that”). the day of the Christ (or Lord ; Kupiov is the accepted reading, instead of Xpioroi) is already come (or, is imminent, immediately), not simply is at hand, for the verb always refers to the present; the part. éveordés expressly signifying the present in distinction from the future (Rom. viii. 38; 1 Cor.» iii. 22.)
Ver. 3. Let no one deceive you, éam., subj. in imper. sense, 375; aor., 373, 0. im («aTd, 300, B, 5) any way, the two negatives strengthen the denial, 401. because, unless the apostasy, definite,213. shall first have come (383, 8, note), and the man of sin (the sin, 214, b) shall have been revealed,—the Apostle does not conclude the sen- tence, see 412, e, but passes on to describe the characteristics of the “man of sin.” the son of perdition (genitives of quality).
Ver. 4. He that withstands, and exalts himself (middle, 355, 1). Obs., the single article shows that the two participles refer to the same subject. But ayrixeiwevos cannot take éwi following ; an object must, there- lore, be understood, Christ. On the tense, see 395. above (305, 7,2) every one called God, observe rdyra, masc. or an object of worship, @cdv and «éBacua, accus., in apposition with wdyra after copulative verb. so that he sits, for é07«, see 391; xablom, intrans, aor., “he took his seat,” and so now is seated in—literally, into—i.e., ‘‘entered into and sits in,” constructio pregnans, 298, 8. exhibiting himself that he is God, amodex., acc. by aitév preced., present, as expressing his habit. For the object and object-sentence, see 411, 6. éorf is emphatic,
Ver 5. Remember ye not, interrog., 369, 6. that, introducing object-sentence, 380, when yet with you, 4», part. in apposition with subj. of taeyov; for mpés, see 307, y, 2 I used to tell you these things, for imperf., see 362, b; duiv, 278, b.
2 THESSALONIANS 11. 6-9. 895
mpos tuas Tatra eheyov tyiv; ®xal viv TO Kar€xov oldare, eis TO >} o b oe.! > o ¢ n ”~ \ he of droxadupOjvar avrov ev To Eavtod KarpO. 77d yap pvoTiptov Hon evepyetrar tis dvoulas, pdvov 6 Katéxwv dpti Ews ex pécov yévntar* ®xal tore amoxadvpOyjcerar 6 dvouos, dv 6 Kuptos dvaldoes TO Tvetpatt Tod oTduatos aitod, Kal Karapyijoet Th emupavela tis mapovolas aitod: *° ob éotw 4 mapovoia b) ey £ n la - / \ > kar évépyeay Tod Larava ev don dvvdpe kal onpetois Kat
Ver. 6. And now ye know what hinders, viv temporal (as when with you I gave you the information, so now ye know), or logical, without reference to time (Ellicott); 7d xaréxov, part., substantivized. in order that he should be revealed in his own time, for é¢is, see 390, ¢. The hindrance is ‘‘in order to” the revelation being made at the right time, as a barrier might be said to be for the proper admission of a multitude, For év, see 295, 7; for the position of éavrod, reflex. pron., 229.
Ver. 7. For, 407, explanatory of the hindrance. the mystery of the > lawlessness (or iniquity) is already at work, dvoulas, definite, gen. either of apposition, 259, ‘‘the mystery which is the iniquity ;” or of quality, 257, ‘*the mystery characterized by (the) iniquity ;” #3, adv. of time, évepy., middle present, 361, a. only, uévov, adv. he who hinders, change from neut. tomasc. at present, until he shall have been taken out of the way (midst). This clause may either be read, by a slight inversion of words, as dependent upon the former—‘‘is at work only until he who at present hinders be taken out of the way,” the objection to which is the unnatural position of éws—or by supposing an ellipsis of a predicate, ‘‘only he who hinders (is working, évepye?ra:) as yet, until,” &c. In this,case, the thought which dp introduces is in the latter, not the former clause of the verse. Compare the examples in 410, b. (For, although the mystery is even now working, there is as yet a ‘‘hinderer.”) For é« pésov, see 219.
Ver. 8. And then, é.e., when the restraining power or person is taken out of the way, rére emphatic. shall the lawless one be revealed, 210. Whom the Lord (Jesus added, as in best MSS.) will consume by the breath (Spirit), 280, d. of his mouth, 248. and will destroy by the manifestation of his coming, 258.
Ver. 9. Whose coming is, 0%, correspondent with v, ver. 8, relative to évouos. according to the working of Satan, katd as 300, 5; évepy. anarthrous, ‘‘such working, in general, as Satan would perform,” For the gen., Zar., see 20, a. in (of investiture or accompaniment, 295, 3) all power and signs and wonders, zédcn in sense belongs to all three nouns, 318, and denotes ‘‘every kind of,” 224, a. of falsehood, prob,
396 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
/ 10 see / b) ‘ a 5 , a > Tépact Pevdous, kal €y Taon amarn Tis adikias év Tots a&oA- ‘\ a
Avpevois, av’ Gv thy ayannv Ths aAnOelas ovK edéEavto els Td awOjvat aitovs: | Kat dua TodTO meme adrois 6 Ocds evépyeray mAavys, cis TO TaTEDoaL adTrods TO Wevder* ©” iva KpLiOGor TavTES c ‘ /, ~ 9 4 . > > / b] ” 9 "3 OL pi) TioTevoavTes TH GANOEia, GAA eEvdoKyNoaVTEs Ev TH GOdiKig.
c na a a a n 18 “Hycis O& deiAopey edxapioteiv TO Oecd Tavtore Tepl tyar, GdeApol yamnpévor. t7d Kupiov, ori etdero tyas 6 Oeds ar apxis «is owrnplay év aytacue Ivetparos cal miorer dAndelas,
gen. of origin, 248 (these things being severally born of falsehood), or per- haps gen. of quality, as E. V.
Ver. 10. And in all (every kind of, as ver. 9) deceit, parallel to the former prepositional clause with éy, the two together explanatory of kart. évepy. Zar. Of iniquity (the article should be omitted), gen. of quality. among (or for) the perishing (omit év, with all the best modern edd.), dat. incommodi, 279. For the force of the participle, see 200 (note), and 396. because, for av@ ay, see 291, note. they received not, aorist, viewing their lifetime as-past. the love of the truth, gen. obj., 268. in order that they might be saved, const. as vers. 2, 6.
Ver. 11. And on this account, 299, 0b, te, because they received not, &. God will send (or, is sending; réuret, not wéupet, is the ap- proved reading), explanatory of the amoAAupévais. to them (dat. of trans- mission) a working of delusion, parallel to évépyeay above, gen. of characteristic quality, 257. so that they should believe (the intent, and so the result, of the delusion, 390, c) the falsehood, dative, 278, d; article of ‘‘renewed mention,” 212.
‘Ver. 12. That they might all be judged, a second intentional clause, 384, growing out of the preced. who believed not the truth, 395, 6; for negative, see 393. but took pleasure, the conduct viewed as past from the point of view of their condemnation. in the iniquity, art. as 212.
Ver. 13. But we, emphatic pron., 169. are bound to give thanks to God always concerning you, see on ch. i. 3. brethren be- loved by the Lord (i.e., by Christ, see 217, b), because God (for art., see 217, a) chose you (var. read., eiAaro, see 97, 6, note), causal sen- tence; compare the 6m in ch. i. 3. from the beginning, 219. unto salvation, dependent upon ¢ia.; for eis, see 298, 4. in sanctification of the Spirit, ¢v denoting the sphere (295, 4) in which the salvation is realized. Tvevy. is gen. of the author, 248; for omitted article, see 217, f. and belief of truth (or, the truth), wore: without the art., like ay:arug, under the common regimen of év, 314; see also 208, Truth is abstract, 214,
2 THESSALONIANS 11. 14-17. ess 3
14 cig 3 exddecev Huas 1a TOD evayyeAlov Hudv, eis TEepiTolnow 36Ens tod Kuplov judy “Incod Xpicrod.. dpa odv, adeAdol, / \ ~ XN , a 3 / 4 * OTNKETE, Kal KpaTeiTe TAS Tapaddcets Us €d1daxOnTE, eEiTEe O1a Adyov ere b0 emioroAjs judv. adrds 6& 6 Kupios iypov > a \ b a ‘ ‘ \ oA Gare / Lae. Inoots Xpioros, kal 6 Ocds kal warynp judv, 6 ayamjoas juas kat dovs mapdkAnow aiwviay kal éAnida ayadyv ev xapure, 17 qapaxahéoa tuGv tas Kapdias, kal ornplfar tyas év mavtl / \ » > “ Ady Kal Epyw ayado.
and is used in the utmost generality ; not so much the specific truth of the Gospel, but the Gospel considered as truth ; the disposition given being that of harmony with truth in itself, whatever it might be.
Ver. 14. Unto which (state of salvation), the neuter relative referring to the whole object of thought; compare 344. he called you, aor., as before, of specific time. by means of, 299,a,2. our gospel, i.e., the Gospel as preached by us, see 270, note. for the attainment of the glory, «is, connected with and explanatory of eis owr.; 5o0f., gen. obj., 268, (The glory of Christ is regarded as in a sense the heritage of Chris- tians; compare John xvii. 24.) of our Lord Jesus Christ, possess. gen., 254. ;
Ver. 15. Accordingly therefore, for the inferential conjunction, see 406. brethren, stand fast (derivative of éornxa, see 106, 4), and hold fast the instructions, acc. obj. of xpar., compare 264. which ye were taught, &s, secondary object, with pass. édddx., see 284, note, and 356. whether by word, 299, a, 2. or by our (248) epistle. For efre, see 405.
Ver 16. But may our Lord himself, 6€¢, as usual, adversative, 404; ards, very emphatic, 335. Jesus Christ, and (may) our God and Father (or, God and our Father, see Ellicott on Gal. i. 4). For our God, see ch.i.tr. who loved us, referring to the last antecedent, God the Father (aor., as referring to a single and complete act). and gave eternal consolation and good hope, abstract, anarthrous; better rendered without indef. art. in grace, connected with dovs, 295, 6 and 4.
Ver. 17. Comfort, for opt., see 378: sing., indicative of the close union between the Father and the Son; so the following. your hearts, plur., see 237. and establish you, iuas omitted in chief MSS. in every good work and word (such being the order of the best authorities), év denotes again the element; that in which the confirmation is given.
~—6898—CO—~* ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
CHAPTER III.
TO Xourdv, zpocedxerbe, GdedAgol, wept Hudv, va 6 Adyos na s - \ lad tod Kuplov rpéxn Kal do0€a¢nrar, KaOas Kat pos tyas, * wal ta prc—apev and tev atéTwv Kal Tovnpdv avOpdTzwv: od yap é € r9" 8 \ dé 2 ¢€ Kv A Hf eon mavrav 7 miotis. °° muoTds b€ éotiv 6 Kupwos, ds ornplfer tas kal dvddker axd tod Tovnpod. * werolOapev d& ev Kupio ef’ tyas, OTL & TapayyeAAowev tyiv, kal movetre Kal Toujoere.
Ver. 1. For the rest (as to what remains to be said), neut. adj., acc. of time (comp. 286, 6, 2; see also 266, and Ellicott on Gal. vi. 17). pray, brethren, for us, for wept, see on i. 11; also forfva. that the word of the Lord may have free course (run) and be glorified, passive, not (as some) middle. even as also (é is) with you, kal adds in thought the Thessalonian Church to the other places where the word achieved success. For mpds, see 307, y, 2
Ver. 2. And that we may be delivered, aor. subj., showing that a specific deliverance is desired, 374, note; the pres. subj., ver. 1, suggesting continuous success, 374, note. from the perverse and wicked men, the article denoting a class, as the hypocrites, Matt. vi. 2, probably specifying _ the Jewish party in Corinth, whence this Ep. was written. for the faith, the Christian faith, see 213 (not faith in general, which in this connection would hardly have been definite. does not belong to all, lit., “< (is) not of all,” i.e., is not their possession, see 267, note.
Ver. 3. But (although the faith is denied by so many) faithful is the Lord, a paronomasia with the preceding clause, 413, a, 2.. who will ‘establish you, ref. to ornpigu, ii. 17. and guard (you) from evil, or less appropriately (yet see Ellicott), the Hvil One. Comp. the quotations in 316, p.292. The neuter sense is sustained by the close connection through ornplt. with épyy in ii. 17. For amd, see 292, 1.
Ver. 4. But we‘trust, the adversative 5¢ bringing the future just ex- pressed into antithesis with the present (so Ellicott). in the Lord, 295, 4 (not simply ‘‘in the Lord, who will bring this about by his goodness,” but being in Him, as the element of our life and hope, we trust) ; for wéro.6a, see 99, c, note, also 367. in reference to you, for émi, see 305, y, 4. that what we command (you) now, as the verb. is pres. ; duiv (dat. by 278, 5) is doubtful. ye both are doing, and will do, for ral... cal, see 403. The whole clause from 87: depends on zeroi@, as an object- sentence, 380,
2 THESSALONIANS 111. 5-8. 399 |
5§ 8& Kupios karevdtvar tyudv tas Kapdlas eis THY dydanv Tod cod, kal eis bropoviy Tod Xpiorod.
6 Tlapayyé\Aopev St tpiv, adeAdol, ev dvdwat. tod Kuplov fyov “Incod Xpiorod, oréAdeoOar tyas amd mavrds adeAod ardktws Tepimarodrros, Kal pa) KaTa THY Tapddoow iv TapédrAaBe map nov. Tadbrot yap oldare TGs det puetoOar jas: Sre ovK 5) f Nl D suse ye Be , HrakThocapev ev vuiv, © ovde Swpedy Aptov épayouev Tapa Twos,
Ver. 5. But, again slightly adversative, ‘though this is the case, yet as
a further blessing.” may the Lord, i.e., Jesus Christ himself, 217, b. (As Christ is separately mentioned at the close of the verse, some refer K. here to the Holy Spirit, quoting 2 Cor. iii. 18; but the argument is very doubtful.) direct your hearts, opt., as in ii. 17; duay slightly emphatic from position. into the love of God, for é¢is, see 298, 1; @eed objective, 269. and into the patience of Christ, prep. repeated, as of a sepa- rate object of thought, 314. Before ém., the art. rqv should undoubtedly be inserted. Xp. is probably gen. of possession, 254, ‘‘such patience as Christ exhibited ;” or it may be gen. of author, ‘‘the patience that Christ imparts.” The objective sense given in E.V., ‘‘ patient waiting for,” is not supported by the meaning of drouor?. » Ver. 6 Now, 5¢, transitional (404, ii.) to the preceptive part. we command you, brethren, for wapay., see ver. 4. in the name of (our or the) Lord Jesus Christ (jay, doubtful), ev dvdu., dependent upon map., 295, 5. that ye withdraw yourselves, object. inf., with acc. subject, 285; oréAA., only mid. in the New Testament; active, to put together ; mid., to draw one’s self together, 355, 1 ; hence to shrink from, with ace., as in 2 Cor. viii. 20, or with dard, as here. from every brother walking disorderly, and not, subjective neg. according to, 3co, 5. the instruction (see,ii 15) which he (or they) received, iv, obj. of mapeAaB., 343. The reading here is doubtful; most modern critics preferring they received (wapéAaBov) in reference to the implicit plural in mayvrds, by synesis, 175. from us, for rapd, see 306, a.
Ver. 7. For yourselves know, emphatic pron. subj.; ydép suggests an implied thought: ‘‘I need not enter into details, for.” how ye ought to imitate us (for the impersonal verbs, see ror), ‘*a brachylogy” (Ellicott), implying wepirareiv, from preced., ‘‘how ye ought to walk—in fact, to imitate us.” because we were not disorderly, ér: gives the reason for pimetoa, “we propose our conduct for imitation, because.” among you, 295, 2,
Ver. 8. Nor, slightly ascensive, ‘‘ nay, and we did not,” 404. did we eat bread, 306, a, 350 (to eat bread is a quasi-proverbial phrase for ‘*‘ to
400 ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
GAN ey Kdm@ Kal pdxO, vita Kal huepav epyaouevor, pos TO un émBapjoal Twa tuav- * ody bre odx Exopev efovoiav, adA va éavtods Tuo SGmev div eis TO pyetoOat Huds. 1 Kal yap Sre quev mpos tyas, todro mapnyyéAAopev tyiv, Gru ef tis od Beret epyacerOat, pydée éoOrérw. | dxovouey ydp twas aepi- matovvtas év div ardxtws, pyndev épyaouevovs, AAG Teplepya- Couevovs. © rots d5€ Tovovrors TapayyéAAomev Kal Tapaxadotpev 1a Tod Kupiov jyav Inoot Xpiorod, iva pera hovxlas epyaCouevor
make a living”). for nought, dwpedy, an old acc. as adv., 126, a; com- pare its use in Matt. x. 8, ‘‘ without an equivalent ;” so in other passages. from any one, 3°06, a but in (accompaniment, 295, 3) toil and travail (we did so) labouring night and day, 2386, 6, 2. Both these clauses depend on épdyouev, implied. in order not to be burden- some, for zpés with inf., see 390, c. to any of you, for acc., compare 281, a; dua, partitive gen., 262.
- Ver. 9. Not that, a frequent elliptical formula, correcting a possible misapprehension, ‘‘do not suppose me to say that” (see Ellicott on Phil. iii. 12). we have not a right (to maintenance), but (we do so) in order that we may present ourselves, Sauer, aor. of one definite determination ; for éavrot’s, see 335, 2, 6. an example, secondary predi- cate, in apposition with éavr. to you, to the end that, é«is as in ii. 11, &e. (ye) should imitate us.
Ver. 10. For even, see 407, note. When we were among you, for mpés, compare ii. 5. we used to enjoin this upon you, impf., 362, b; for mapayyéAAw and its regimen, see ver. 4,6. that, introducing objective sentence explanatory of tovro, but thrown into a quotation form, 382, a; hence éo@.imper. ‘‘if any one wills not to work,” for ¢, see 383, a; for 0éAa, 363, 7. “*neither let him eat,’ neg., 371.
Ver. 11. For, introducing the reason of the command. we hear that some are walking, predicative participle, 394. among you, & as ver. 7. disorderly, doing no work, but being busybodies, par- ticiples in apposition with wepim.-; for the paronomasia, see 413, a, 2. The verb mepiepy. does not again occur in the New Testament, although the subst. meplepyos is found, 1 Tim. v. 13.
Ver. 12. But to such as these, pron. definite, 220. we command and exhort, the dat. obj. belongs grammatically to mapayy., as in ver 4, &e. ; mapaxad, takes the acc. by (or in, the rec. d:d is less fully supported than év; see Ellicott) the Lord Jesus Christ that, working with quietness, for werd, see 301, 4,2. they eat, subj. by iva; tense, 374. Obs. wapayy. with the inf., ver. 6; with object and obj. clause, 611, ver. 10
2 THESSALONIANS 111. 13-17. 401
Tov éavTdv aprov eadiwow. 1 dyets 58, ddeAol, pi) exkaKyonTeE r B 14 ed O€ by traxover TS Ady Hudv oud TH kadoro.ovrtes. el O€ Tis OVX UTaKOvEL TY Ady Tudy dia THs emLOTOANS, ToOTOY onpelodabe* Kal pr Tuvavapulyvvde aire, iva évtpamn : cal py ws exOpov qyeiobe, GAAG vovbereire Os
b) 4 26 os Sg / o + eae A / C2 A hs aa adeAdov. * autos 6€ O Kuptos THs elpnvyns don vyly THY eipyvny dua Tavtos ev mavti spdm@. 6 Kvpios peta Tavtwv tudor. 17°O ¢4 \ rap (ANY \ , Ca a > g donacpos TH éui xeupt TlavdAov, 6 éort onuciov ev macy
here with the intentional particle. The command is given in order that the result may follow. their own bread, emphatically, not that of others.
Ver. 13. But ye, emphatic, by way of contrast to those just mentioned. brethren, be not weary, subj., with imper. force, 375. The reading varies between éxx. and éy«. ; the latter (from év) being to grow weary or cowardly in any enterprise ; the former, to go out of it through weariness or cowardice. But éxx. is altogether doubtful. in well-doing, pres. part., adjunct to pred., 394, 3, 0, ‘‘ whilst well-doing” being implied; or causal, as c.
Ver. 14. But if any one obeys not, 333, 4. our word, 278, d. through, conveyed by, 299, a, 2. the epistlo, i.ec., this epistle. note this man, for onu., middle, see 355, 2, ‘‘mark for yourselves.” and keep no company with him, dat. of association, 277, a. The pres. imper. in both cases enjoins the conduct as habitual. that he be ashamed, the purpose, again, not simply the result,
Ver. 15. And, not adversative, but simply conjunctive; another parti- cular of the conduct to be observed. esteem (him) not as an enemy, ws, a particle of apposition connecting éy@p. with todrop, nalereoe from preced. but admonish (him) as a brother.
Ver. 16. But (the antithesis being between the persons addressed by the Apostle and those just specified, “‘as for you,” “to return to you”) may the Lord of (the) peace, gen. of quality. himself, emphatic pron. give (the) peace to you, 5¢n, opt. in the usual sense and the ordinary const. of the verb. The article before eip. both times is emphatic, recognising peace as the peculiar and well-understood Christian blessing. always, xpdévov understood with wayrds, an adverbial adjunct to én. in every way, Lachmann reads téry, place. The Lord be, «% asi. 2. with, 301, 4,1. you all.
Ver. 17. The salutation, nominative, in apposition with ver. 18, asa kind of title: ‘‘ This is the salutation.” of me, Paul, with my own hand, for const., see 336, p. 307; xerpl, dat. of instr., 280, d. which, neuter rel, pron., 346, a. is the sign, pred. om. art., see 206. in every epistle, 224, a. so I write, the other member of the comparison being
402. _ ANALYTICAL EXERCISE.
i émiaToAy* ottw ypade. a xdpis tod Kupiou jyav Bir Xpicrod peta Tavtwv byav. dyrp.
IIpds Ocooadorixeis Sevtépa eypadyn amd ? AOnvav. hs
omitted, as obvious to the orig. readers; compare examples under 412, ¢. Probably the phrase alludes to some peculiarity in the handwriting. Com-. pare Gal. vi. 11.
Ver. 18. Tho grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be, «mm, as i. 2. with (301, a, 1) you all. (Amen is omitted by Tischendorf; but see Ellicott. )
The subscription to the Epistle, The second (epistle) to the Thessalonians was written from Athens (see also subscription to First Epistle), is undoubtedly spurious, and is also incorrect. It arose probably from a careless and mis- taken interpretation of 1 Thess. iii. 1.
Me i
~
"2
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS,
PROBABLY no two words in any language are precisely synonymous, although many are interchangeable. It has already been shown (p. 256) that words in different languages seldom, if ever, perfectly correspond. Hence arise some of the chief difficulties of transla- tion. It has often been unthinkingly suggested that, in the New Testament for instance, the same Greek word should always be rendered by the same English one. This rule would constantly lead to glaring incorrectness : although, undoubtedly, capricious or unnecessary variations should be avoided. The word suffer, for instance, covers so great an extent of meaning, that we are hardly surprised to find it employed in the Authorized Version for ten distinct Greek words, beside various combinations of the same roots. To provoke, again, occurs twelve times in the English Version for eight different Greek words. To provide is found eight times, representing six distinct originals. The verb ordain occurs eighteen times: once for moo, which Greek word has in different places thirty-six English equivalents ; once for yivonar, the various equivalents of which are almost innumerable ; twice for. épi{w, which is translated in four different ways; once for mpoopife, Which has three English equivalents ; twice for riOnu, a verb translated in fifteen ways ; twice for rdcow, which is rendered by five different words; thrice for S:ardcow, a verb with five renderings ; thrice for xa@iornuw, which we find translated in six
404 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
ways; once for xaracxevdf{o, a verb with four English equivalents ; once for xpive, which is rendered in fifteen ways; and once for xetporovem, &@ word occurring twice, and in each place differently rendered. In addition to these, we have to ordain before, by mpoypape and mpoeroindlo. .
Such instances suggest the largeness of the field that is open to the inquirer into the so-called Synonyms, whether of the Greek or the English New Testament. To cover that field, in however perfunctory a manner, would be plainly impossible in the compass of a few pages. All that can be attempted is to point out the main distinctions between some important words in general use, of kindred meaning, and often translated alike in the Authorized Version. For further detail, the English reader is referred to Tittmann’s ‘‘ Remarks on the Synonyms of the New Testament,” translated in Clark’s Biblical Cabinet, 1833-37; to Archbishop Trench’s “ Synonyms of the New Testament ;” and to the ‘Syntax and Synonyms of the New Testament,” by the Rev. W. Webster, M.A.
‘Ayabds, ayabwotvn ayamrdw, dydarn &yios, ayvds
dyvénua ‘ & yopd (wo ‘ ans .
&SuKos, Buca, aidios . ;
uivéw, alvos . cuir eww, alr nwo aidy, aidvios . arelpw
+ - eo e . e e . ° e
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS,
WORDS ILLUSTRATED.
21 | daluwv, daudriov 19 | Saxpiw. : 23 | Senos. 4
- 43 | Seads, Berle
a2 | Seomdrns . 58 djmos . . ‘ . re BidSqua
oe. © ©. 8” 4&4 + 16-6 ae ae Uae vg ee, Ye Shr
; | 9, 38 | Sidwovos, Siaxovta, Biaxovdes
‘ ‘ - 58 | Siadréyouce 18 | didvom,
aAnons, AAROeia, dbanduds ; . 24 | datayh
&AAos .
- 76 | &ddonw, SiSdoxados |
52 | deodaiuwr, SeeBatpovia
fe te we ie ee are & @
dpaprdve, Suaprte, dudprnua. - 39 | Slkaos, Sixaorten, dixalwua .
dupiBAnot pov .
- 70 | Sikrvoy
dvdOnua, avabeua,, dvateisci Cee - 51 | Sdéyua .
avaravew, avavedw,
avnp . . . XvOpwros avoula . ; ‘ avoxn . ‘ dvriAutpoy . r &MOAUT pwaIS . darrouct ‘ Opeth. vs
Spxaios ° . avaran aplnut, bears
Bépos . A ° BéATLov
Sloss
BAéirw, rgupe Béokw . ‘ BotvrAouat, BovAn . Bpégos . , ° Boyds . . .
yeevva. . ‘ , ylvoua. ; , ywooKe ° . youos . ° °
° ‘ . 26 | doxdw, ddta .
. - 62 | SovAos. ‘ 62 | Sivan, ddvauts 39 | Saya . .
: . - 43 | ‘EBpatos “ ; - 43 | €vos, 0vn
7 | eldov, eiSos, etdwrov
F + ss) Eat eiey : ° ‘ - 25 | ell . . ° eR elroy, émwos . . ° - 42 éAcos . “EAAn?, ‘EAAnarhs évduma . 68 étouola ae €vTOAn . . : * 34 | érawéw, Zmauvos ; ‘ ; émigTamat i Fite § éemiotdtys =. ‘ Pr EpXomat €p@ - «. . % ; 37 epwrdw er Ons A ° ‘ ibe erepos ;
. » 1 | ebayyéruor, SbeevyerTiee 5
. ‘ ‘ 4. evAaBis, evAdBea, evAaBéouat
° - 68 | evAoynTéds .
405
ty uP
N 3°
406
evoeBhs, evoéBeia . . etxoua . °
ae rie aaa
hKrw . . e e ArT ‘ .
‘Odvaros, Gavardw, Ovnrds Bedopas % . OAw . ° ° GeoaeBns, GcoréBeve ; Gedras, @eidtns . : Bepdrwy, Beparredw . : Oewpéw . . ° ° Oryydvw ; . ° Ovntés . ‘ . OpncKos, Opnoxela . ‘ Ouuds . : . . Oipa . » ° bucta, bataw: ‘ iepets . ; ° iepds, iepdv . ; iAdokoua, iAaouds iudrioy. : ‘lovbaios, "Iapanalrns isxiw, irxds.
xabapds ; > : kaos, kavérns . ‘ kaipés . : ‘ ‘ kaxés, Kaxla. : : KaAds . " ‘ : kapdla . ° . ‘ KararyyéAhw F ° ° KaTnxém ° . kevds . ‘ : knpboow, Khpvyua. kAalw . ° . : KAérrns . . . Kdquvos. . . . Kdopos . ‘ ‘ kpdros, K xpeloowy . ° KTlows . ° ° ‘ KUpios . F . : Aadéw . . . - Aaumds A é °
$s . . . . Aatpevw ° ° .
~s -
OF ig OE oD ae-o St oo a” 6 Pe 26g arte
. oo -
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
Aéyw, Adyos . .
Aertoupyds, AecToupyéw, " pecreupyla,
‘ Aevroupyicds . é ‘ «#96 Anorhs " ‘. 5 : Papa: | Al@os . s . ° . +25 Adyos . ; : at ae Avtpov, Auvtpdw, Abrpwots . - 43 Abxyos, Avxvia ° . - 65 padnrhs, eres . : . 84 pakdpios : = ° ~ "28
Baxpobuula , . . A paytis, payrevouat. , . oe pdraLos : ; ; . » 9 peyadtyw ; A ‘ o Oy MéAcL, meAeTdw =, s : a BeAAw . 4 ; ; > Te. | Hepiuvdw, mépiuva . : 3 ee MeETaMEAOML . . A ° - 40 MeTavoéw, pmeTdvora ’ e - 40 Hopph . . > ‘ ; - 56 vads , . . ° o PES veKpds, saugit : . ° o Ugg véos, vedrns . ; . ° oat vimios , ° . : . - 62 vintw . : . ° ° Peres 4 vous, vénua . ° ° é VRS byKos . 4 e A ‘ . 68 ddupuds ; > . ‘ - 20 olda ; : . , + ie oikos, oixia, oikérns ° a oikoupeyn . . . . 58 oixtipuds ; : - 41 dASKAnpoS, Dorends A . ee bpdw, “pana, bYoucu, dys ° >. opyh . < ‘ : . 32 Sows . ; ‘ ‘ » ag dpelAw, BpelAnua . : 5 . . =e bxAos . ° . . : eer t mais, maldiov, maidevw . a” | G2,.58 makads . : ; > 2§ mapdBacis, mapakoh, mapdrTwua,
mapavoula ‘ . 2 oe mapaBoAh, papas , ; - 46 mapaddoois . . ° - 49 mapecis. . ‘ : : + 42 mwaTtpid . . > ° . » 6 mapopyiomes . ° . . + 3?
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
NO. | mWevNs « : ‘ , ° «1 48 TENOS, TEAEW, TEAELOS, TEAELOW Tepimoreopat, mepimroinats ‘ - 43 | Tépas . P ° ° é TET pa, ‘mer pos ° . a Toate Tifa) ‘ ‘ . * TANMMEAEIA. . ° . et39 mAnpow, eichpoie é ° . - 13 | Buvos . ‘ . ‘ , TAvYO . , ° ° . - 17 | trdpxw 4 ° ° myev ua. 4 r ° . - 55 | éwnpérns . . ToLew ‘ - 2 | bropovn ° ° : : mowwatye, oluyn, molpstoy ; 16, 72 movnpdos, wovnpia . ° + 22 1) galvouas : . i mpdoow 4 e 2 pavros . . . . mpooet'xopa, mpooeuxt « ° e 38 géyyos. ‘ i ; mpookuvew : . . . » 3 onut . me oadopa + BF piréw, piravOpcona, pinradergla mpopnrns, mp oénrebopas. . - 15 | @éBos, poBéopa . , bh ahd + ‘ ; ‘ : a popriov ‘ ‘ é . mvAn, TUAwY. . * ° : ppeves . f ; . Tuviavoua . . ° . ANNA, gpovee, povriter . ; : € 4 Puan . . . onstage ; ; a \ ° 2 as, ouorhp. Me ° pew, pia . ° ° . Ud
oaynvn af yeti, Mayme oe WIR ts fee eee xdpayua odpt, capeikds e ° a) Be Pee ti ‘ , ‘ ‘ Saray, Saravas ° . . 53 voi Be Hane : ‘ *
t a . e s e > en ~ oeBdCouat ; y - as xenords, xpnorérns ; ; orydomat, clwmdw . : ° » xplo, xprords ° . ° ene. : , : } . 56 | xpdvos . . : ° . omoven . ° . . ° r It omupis ° . ° .* ° 69 paruds ° ° ° °- oTepavos, TTEUpA . ° ° ey bnrapde ‘ ° ° ° TXTMG . . é ‘ 5 - 56 | Wuxn, yuxinds é é TEKVOY « ° 2 ° ° e 62 gdh ° ° e ° 8
e ea 6s 3e) 6-8 . . aN Oo
— o e es @« o e i onl XN
+408. . NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
kL
First, some groups of Verbs in ordinary use may be selected, with their related Substantives.
1. To Be, Exist, Become.
Eivi is the ordinary verb of existence; brdpxw implies essential or original condition (Phil. ii. 6), and so is directly contrasted with yivopa, to become (James i. 22). See further, Acts xvii. 24; Heb. xi. 6.
2. To Do, to Make.
Tloré€w seems to denote more sustained effort than rpdaow, whence the frequent use of the former for well-doing, the latter for ill-doing. For other senses of mpdoow, see Eph. vi. 21; Luke iii. 13 (this last compared with mocew in Luke xii. 33, xix. 18).
3. To Will, to Desire.
BovAoua: denotes the will rather on its intellectual side, ‘‘ to choose ;” 6éAw, the simple fact of volition. So the latter is used of arbitrary (Luke iv. 6) or absolute (Rom. ix. 18) authority, the former of determinations where the wisdom and justice are apparent (Luke x. 22, xxii. 42). Thus Bovay is counsel; O¢Anua, will; BorrAnua, plan (only in Acts xxvil. 43; Rom. ix. 19). BovAoua: is also used in recommendations, backed by reason (x Tim. ii. 8, v. 14). For a striking instance of distinction between the two verbs, compare Mark xv. 9, 12, with verse 15. So Philemon 13, 14. MéAA@ indicates futurity, as the result of predetermination, or of some act or event, ‘‘is to be,” ‘‘is going to,” Matt. iii. 7, xi. 14; Luke vii. 2 ; Heb. i. 14.
4. To Know.
Oida is properly a perfect, ‘‘I have seen,” and implies the knowledge which comes from without, objective knowledge; yivéonw, ‘‘I learn,” in any way, expresses the knowledge as existing in the mind, subjective know- ledge. Hence, when knowledge involves experience, y:véonw is always used (Eph. iii. 19; Phil. iii, 10; 1 Johnii, iil., iv.); érioraum (an old dialectic form of the middle of éplaornu), ‘to set (the mind) upon,” may either mean simply to be aware of, as in the Acts, or to understand (Mark xiv. 68). The distinction between oféa and émicraua: may be noted in Jude ro; that between yivéonw and érioraua in Acts xix. 15.
5. To See. BAiérw denotes the act of seeing, and is referred to the organ; éo04~
NEW TESTAMENT. SYNONYMS, 409
(8ouat, elSov) is referred to the thing seen, whether in itself (objectively) or in regard to its impression on the mind (subjectively). The former verb, therefore, may be used without an expressed object (as Matt. xiii. 13). Both verbs are applied to mental vision, the former implying greater vivid- ness (Heb. ii. 8, 9). With uf, they have the sense beware ; generally, however, Baérw is used, occasionally with aré. In accordance with the distinction above mentioned, Spaua is a vision ; BAéuma, the exercise of the faculty of sight ; 7a BAemduera, the things seen (2 Cor. iv. 18), i.e, on which the faculty of immediate discernment is exercised ; 7d dpardy, the visible (Col. i. 16), #.e., in itself considered. Tittman distinguishes dpdw and its derivatives from ¢dov, in that the former is objective, and the latter sub- jective, dpoum being a middle term. Compare Spaua, eldos, ds. It is doubtful, however, if this distinction can be maintained in the use of the verbs. @edopas (referred to the subject) and Gewpéw (referred to the object) are to look at purposely, or attentively to gaze upon Chets VL, 3 73 John xii. 45; Acts vii. 56).
6. To Appear.
Aokréw ‘*expresses the subjective mental estimate or opinion about a matter which men form, their 5é{ concerning it, which may be right (Acts xv. 28; 1 Cor. iv. 9, vii. 40), but which may be wrong, involving, as it always does, the possibility of error (Matt. vi. 7; Mark vi. 49; John xvi. 2; Acts xxvii. 13);” galvouat ‘‘expresses how a matter phenomenally shows and presents itself, with no necessary assumption of any beholder at all.”—Trench. This ‘*phenomenon’”’ may represent a reality (Matt. ii. 7; Phil. ii. 15, ‘‘appear,” not ‘‘shine”’) or a mere show (Matt. xxiii. 27, 28).
7. To Touch.
“Amropat (middle of &rrw, to kindle) is the usual word ; 6:yydyvw denotes a lighter touch (compare the two in Col. ii. 21, where, as Archbishop Trench observes, the order of our translation should be reversed; and see Heb. xi. 28); PnAagddw is to feel (*‘ to feel after,” Acts xvii. Ns to handle, Pres. part., palpable, material (Heb. xii. 18).
8. To Speak, Say.
Aadéw is simply to speak, to employ the organ of utterance; Aéyo is referred to the sentiment of what is spoken (compare BAérw and dpdw above).; onl, péw, €p@, eirov, to the words; fia is a word. in itself considered ; Adyos, a spoken word, with reference generally to that which is in the speaker’s mind ; €7ros is only found (Heb. vii. 9) in the phrase és &ros eimciy, so to speak.
—
to =
410 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 9. To Ask.
Airéw is to ask for something, to beg, pray; épwrdw, to question, to ask ~ in general, specifically : ‘‘In that day ye shall ask meno questions ... what- soever ye shall pray the Father in my name.” Observe, épwrdw is elsewhere used of Christ’s prayers to the Father (John xvii. 9, 15, 20), never of ours.
Compare the two in John xvi. 23; andin 1 John v. 16, Wuv@dvoua, to ask for information, to inquire.
10. To Come.
“Epxopa: denotes the act, “‘I am coming;” fx, the result, ‘“‘I am come.” John vill. 42: ‘‘I came from God, and I am here.” See also Heb. x. 9.
ll. To Care.
bpovéw, ppovri¢w, implies solicitude (Phil. iv. 10; Titus iii. 8); feAetTadm@ (and impers. wéAez), solicitude expressed in forethought, or the employment of means to the desired result ; wepiuvde, anxious or distracting care. So the substantive wépiuva. See especially 1 Peter v. 7; cmovdq (‘‘haste”) is earnestness, diligence, generally.
12. Ought.
Aci (impers.) denotes the duty or necessity as existing in the thing itself, often used for the ought arising from prophecy (Luke xxiv. 26, 46); é¢efAw refers to the obligation as actually imposed (John xiii. 14); xp (only once in the New Testament, James iii. 10) is connected with xpdoua, and origi- nally differs from de? as the rule of utility differs from that of abstract right (5<? would express Butler’s philosophy of morals ; xp, Paley’s).
13. To Accomplish, Fulfil, Perfect.
TéAos expresses the end of a course or series : so TeA€w, to reach the end ; Ttereidw, to complete; mAnpdw denotes the accomplishment of a plan or purpose, to fulfil ; reAéw gives the finishing stroke (John xix. 30); rAnpdéw adds the completing element: the former brings the topstone, the latter, the keystone. Hence they are often interchangeable. Compare Acts xx. 24, where the prominent thought is the completeness of the Apostle’s life-work, _ with 2 Tim, iv. 7, where to this is superadded the thought of its approaching close. The fulfilment of prophecy is expressed by rAnpdw, except John xix. 28, which has reAcidw. TlAfpwyua is generally active, that which brings com- pleteness, fulness, to anything (Matt. ix. 16; 1,Cor. x. 26); but may be used passively, that which is filled (Eph. i. 23), or passin, JSulness (Col. ii. g).
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 411
14. To Teach, Instruct.
Addon is to teach generally; karnxéw, strictly to teach by word of mouth (Lukei.4; Rom. ii. 18). Hence catechesis, catechize, of careful, repeated oral instruction ; waénretw is (actively) to make, or (intransitively) to be a disciple, in the former sense distinguished from 8/Sécxw in Matt. xxviii. 19; watdevw involves the notion of discipline, and is often to be rendered chasten,
15. To Preach.
Knptoow is to proclaim, as a herald; nnpvyyua, the proclamation made ; evayyé\stov and edayyeAi(w add the further notion of glad tidings; katayyedAw refers simply to the delivery of the message. Found with evayyeal(w, Acts xv. 35, 36; with kxnptoow, Phil. i 15, 16. Aadréa, sometinies rendered preach, means simply to talk (see 8), and d:adréyouar (Acts xx. 7, 9) implies conference ; rpogpntetw, to forth-tell, and mpopirns, are used for preachers under the New Testament (Eph. iv. 11; 1 Cor. xiv. 1), as for the prophets of the Old, both being set to declare the Divine will; pdytis, a soothsayer, is of heathen use, and not found in the New Testament, wayrevouc: occurring only Acts xvi. 16. See Trench.
16. To Feed (a flock).
Tlotruatyw is in general to exercise the care of a ro:phy, to tend the flock (Acts xx. 28), hence to rule, govern (Matt. ii. 6; Rev. ii. 27); Bédokw | refers to the special function of providing food, to pasture (Luke xv. 15). Both are included in our Lord’s charge to St. Peter (John xxi. 15-17).
17. To Wash, Bathe.
TIA byw is to wash things, as garments, &c.; Aodw, to wash the whole body, **to bathe ;” virrw, to wash a part of the body. See John xiii. 10; and remarks by Archbishop Trench,
18, To Anoint.
Xptw denotes official anointing, as of a king or priest, hence Xpiorés: a&rXelp@w, anointing for festal purposes (Luke vii. 46), for health (James v. 14), or for embalmment (Mark xvi. 1).
19. Love, to Love.
*Ayamrdw denotes the love of esteem or of kindness, love to character (‘‘diligo”); aydmn, its cognate substantive, ‘‘is a word born within the bosom of revealed religion. It occurs in the LXX., but there is no example of its use in any heathen writer whatever ; the utmost they attained to here
412 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
was giAavOpenia and giAadeAgta, and the last, indeed, never in any sense but as the love between brethren in blood.”—7'rench. Wherever we have ‘‘ charity” in the E.V., the original is &ydzn, but it is more generally and better translated ‘‘love ;” o:Aéw expresses the love of-the feelings, instinctive, warnr affection (“Samo”). The force of the two verbs is very beautifully illustrated in John xxi. 15-17, on which see Trench and others.
20. To Weep.
KAaiw is the verb generally employed ; Saxpva, ‘‘to shed tears,” is found but once, John xi. 35: ‘‘Jesus wept.” In Matt. ii, 18, O@pjvos (reading doubtful), «Aavéuds, d5upuds, form a climax, ‘‘lamentation, weeping, and mourning.”
IT.
Some important words, chiefly Adjectives and Substantives, expressive of moral quality, may now be considered.
21. Good.
’"Ayabos is good; Sixa:os, right. In the former, the notion of beneficence prevails, in the latter that of justice. So with aya@wotrvn, dixaoctyn. Still, the two are not opposed. In Rom. vii. 12, both are predicated of the Divine law. In Rom. v. 7, the &yaéds is one of the dixao (as proved by the article and by ydép). In Matt. vi. 1, seqg., Siecuoodvn* refers to almsgiving, prayers, and religious fasting ; xaAés contains the notion of giving pleasure, **beautiful,” ‘ fair,” ‘‘ honourable.” It may be interchanged with aya@ds (compare, ¢g., 1 Tim. i. 19, with Heb, xiii, 18}, or combined with it, as Luke viii. 15. (So in classic Greek, xadoxgyaéés predicates the highest excellence in morals and manners.) Xpnordés, good, gentle (Matt. xi. 30; 1 Cor, xv. 33), and xpnotérns, goodness, gentleness, benignity, are connected with xpdoua, xe7. The New Testament comparative of dyads is usually kpelcowv, kpelrtwy really akin to xpdros, force, and betokening the time when strength and goodness were too closely identified. (Compare dperf, ‘‘ virtue,” really courage, found only in the New Testament, Phil. iv. 8; 1 Pet. ii. 9, where see 47; 2 Pet. i. 3, 5.) BéArsov, as an adverb, is found 2 Tim. i. 18.
* Undoubtedly the true reading.
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 413,
22. Evil, Bad.
Kakés is bad, generically, including every form of evil, physical and moral. So «ala, budness, specially in its forms of meanness, cowardice, malice, &dicos, Gdiucla (opposed to Sixaws, dicavodtvn), wrong; mwovnpds expresses especially the more active form of evil, malignané (so 6 wovnpéds, not 6 kakxds, for the Evil one, Satan); wovypia, malignity; padadros is worthless, ‘*good for nothing,” like the old Eng., ‘‘naughty,” from ** naught.”
23. Holy.
“Ooctos is holy, intrinsically ; referred once to the Divine purposes (Acts xiii. 34, from Isa. lv. 3), generally to interior purity ; predicated both of God and of men (‘‘pious”); Gyros, ayvds, are both derived from a root denoting separation, the former, when applied to men, expressing consecra- tion to God (see 1 Pet. ii. 5, 9), the latter, purity, chastity; iepds, very infrequently (except in its neuter substantival form, fepéy, on which see 35), is ‘‘dedicated to God,” and is only used in the New Testament of things ; xa@apds, literally clean, free from impure admixture,
24. True.
"AAnOns is ** true,” morally, and is applied to persons or to declarations ; &AnOivds is ‘‘genuine,’’ ‘‘real.”” The former epithet, for instance, applied ~ to God, denotes His attribute of faithfulness (John iii. 33); the latter expresses the reality of His Godhead, as distinguished from false deities (John xvii. 3). The use of &A76:vds in the Revelation is an exception to this rule (see xix. 9, 11). The substantive @A7@efa includes the idea of both adjectives, though generally correspondent with the former.
; 25. Old.
TlaAaids is ‘‘old,” as having existed long; a&pxaios, ‘‘old,” as having existed formerly ; apxaios wabyrhs (Acts xxi. 16), one of the original disciples. Compare 2 Pet. ii. 5; Rev. xii. 9, xx. 2. TMadaids sometimes connotes the idea of decrepitude, decay (opposed to kawds, see 26), Matt. ix. 16; 1 Cor. v. 7, 8; and for the verb, Heb. viii. 13.
26. New.
Néos is new in reference to time, having recently come into existence (young); «a:vés, new (fresh) in reference to quality, different in kind. (See Trench on the words.) So véa d:a0%nn (Heb. xii. 24) is ‘‘a covenant recently given ;” kavh a0hen (Heb. ix. 15), ‘*a covenant new in character -” avavedw (Eph. iv. 23), to renew in youth; avaxa:ydw (Col. iii. 10), to renew. in character and spirit. So veédtys, youth; karyéd77s, newness, freshness.
414 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS,
27. Perfect
Téreros, ‘‘full-grown,” applied to character, means that which has attained the moral réAos—manhood in Christ ; ‘‘ however, it may be true that having reached this, other and higher ends will open.out before him, to have Christ formed in him more and more.”—T'rench. The attainment of their highest end is expressed by the perfect rereActwua: (Phil. iii, 12). ‘OAdSKAnpos is complete in parts, no Christian grace lacking; éAoréAns denotes maturity in each separate element of character (1 Thess. v. 23).
28. Blessed.
Two different adjectives are translated blessed: paxdptos, happy, as in the Beatitudes, and notably 1 Tim. i. 11, vi. 15; and evAoyyrés, verbal adjective of the verb to bless (Mark xiv. 61; Rom. i. 25).
29. Void, Vain, Futile.
Kevés, literally empty, refers to the contents; wdra:os, purposeless, to the result. See the two in 1 Cor. xv. 14, 17: ‘‘ your faith is eevf#—there is no substance in it—and parala, leads to no happy issue.” The latter adjective is also employed (from the LXX.) for fwlse, as in the “lying vanities” of heathendom (Acts xiv. 15).
80. Poor.
Mévys (only in 2 Cor. ix. 9) may refer to the poverty of scanty livelihood ; atw Xx és implies that of utter destitution. See Matt. v. 3, xi. 5.
31. Patience.
‘taropovth ('rouévw) denotes not only the passive, but the active virtue of endurance, and may often be rendered persistence, continuance (Luke viii. 15; Heb. xii. 1; James v. 11); paxpo@vpia (uaxpodvuéw) seems always to involve the notion of tolerance, ‘‘long-suffering, bearing with,” as God with sinners ; &vox (only in Rom. ii. 4, iii. 25) is forbearance, the result and expression of the Divine paxpoupia,
32. Anger.
@vpués is the impulse and passion ; épy%, the habit and settled purpose of wrath. Both (asin Romans ii. 8) are applied to the anger of God against sinners; the latter, however, being the usual word. Both are ranked among the sins of men (as Eph. iv. 31). Still, there may possibly be a righteous human anger (Eph. iv. 26; compare Mark iii. 5), while the exasperation and bitterness of anger, rapopysouds are utterly forbidden, (See Trench on these words. )
er
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 415
33. Fear.
@éBos, poBéoua:, are words in themselves indifferent, the fear being sinful, or reverent and holy, according to the particular reference; but detAds, SetAla, are always bad and base, ‘‘ cowardly, cowardice ;” ebAd- Bera, evAaBéouat, denote apprehension generally (see Acts xxiii. 10), but chiefly pious fear (Heb. xii. 28, and perhaps v. 7).
IIT.
As a third division, some words may be enumerated of frequent theological or ecclesiastical use.
34. Deity.
@e:dTns (Rom. i. 20), Deity, in an abstract sense (Gottlichheit) ; @edrns (Col. ii. 9), Deity, personally (Gottheit). See Tittmann.,
35. Temple.
‘lepdv, the whole sacred enclosure (Matt. xxvi. 55; John ii. 14); vads, the shrine itself, the Holy place, and Holy of Holies (Matt. xxvii, 51; Acts vii. 48; 1 Cor. ili. 16).
36. To Worship.
Tipockvyéw is the generic word (primarily expressive of the act, ‘‘to fawn,” from xiv) of homage paid to God, to Christ, and (in the Revelation) to the ‘‘dragon” and the ‘‘ beast ;” céBomar (ceBdCouar), of the religious feeling, ‘‘to cherish, or to pay devotion ;’ Aatpevw, of Divine worship, Phil. iii. 3 (idolatrous in Acts vii. 42); Ae:tovpyéw, of solemn, stated observance. So Aertoupyla, as Luke i. 23; Aerrovpyi:neds, Heb. i. 14; Aectoupydés, Heb. viii. 2. But these last words may also apply to the ministry of kindness between fellow-Christians ; as S:axovéw, but in a more exalted sense. See 60.
37. Altar, Sacrifice.
Ovctaorhptov is the general word, properly an adjective—that on which sacrifices are offered; Bwuds, the altar-structure (orig., ‘fa raised place”), is only found once, of a heathen altar, Acts xvii. 23; @vofa is a sacrifice offered by a priest; fepeds, either expiatory, in which sense Christ alone is priest, or eucharistic, in which all Christians are priests alike (1 Pet. ii. 5); wpoopopa is any offering to God, priestly or otherwise. In Eph. v. 2, some refer rpoopopayv to Christ’s consecrated life, @voidy to his atoning death,
ie
416 * NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
38. Prayer, to Pray.
Ei’x% is a prayer (James v. 15) or a vow (Acts xviii. 18); e¥x owas, to pray, or to wish strongly (Rom. ix. 3); mpooevxopuat, tpocevxh, are restricted to prayer to God, the latter denoting sometimes a place of prayer, a building below the rank of a synagogue, ‘‘proseucha” (Acts xvi. 13); dénors is in general the expression of need, any urgent request, ‘‘ suppli- cation.” For airéw, épwrdw, see 9; atrnua is any particular request; in plur., the individual petitions in the rpocevxf. See Phil. iv. 6.
39. Sin, to Sin.
‘‘ Sin,” says Archbishop Trench, ‘‘may be contemplated as the missing of a mark or aim; it is then Guaptia or audptnma (auaprdvw): the over- passing or transgressing of a line; it is then tapdBacis (wapaBalvw): the disobedience to a voice; in which case it is mapaxoh (rapakudw): the falling where one should have stood upright; this will be rapdrrewpa: ignorance of what one ought to have ‘known; this will be dyvénua (Heb. ix. 7): diminishing of that which should have been rendered in full measure ; which is #7Tywa: non-observance of a law; which is avoula or mapavoula: a discord; and then it is tAnuméAeca: and in other ways almost out of number.” Note also épefAnua, in the Lord’s prayer (Matt. vi. 12), debt to divine justice. Luke has apapria (xi. 4).
40. Repentance, to Repent.
Merdvota, peravoéw, express a change of mind, and hence of the whole life; wetapwéAouas, a change of feeling, ‘‘to regret.” Godly sorrow is said to work perdvowy duerapuéarnror, dt pepetitannos that leads to no remorse” (2 Cor. vii. 10). Esau found no place of repentance, peravoias (Heb. xii. 17), i.e., of changing his father’s mind with respect to the _blessing. See Dr. Campbell's Dissertation, in his *‘ Gospels.”
41. Grace, Mercy.
Xdpis is free favour, in general, specially of the Divine favour as extended to the sinful; €Aeos is mercy, to the miserable (1 Tim. i. 2). The difference between Acos and vixtipuds is that, in the latter, pity is the prominent idea ; in the former, kindness. For the verbs, see Rom. ix. 15.
42. Forgiveness.
“Ageois, &pinus, denote the ‘‘remission” of sins, forgiveness, to its full extent, as promised in the Gospel; wdpeocs, found only Rom. iii. 25, literally, passing-by, ‘‘ pretermission” refers rather to the simple with- holding of punishment deserved, a parallel being found Acts xvii. qo (drepiddv).
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. ae
43. Redemption.
‘*avopd¢w, buy, as in a market-place, for a certain price (riuh); Avtpda, effect deliverance by the payment of ransom and exertion of power; Auvtpoy is the price paid for releasing any one from captivity, punishment, or death (Avw, loose); the buying back by paying the price of what had been sold, or the redeeming what had been devoted by substituting some- thing in its place. So avytiAurpoy, with the further idea ‘‘in room of,” denoting exchange, the price paid for procuring the liberation of another by ransom or forfeit; Adtpwo.s, &4roAdTpwors, the process of deliverance ; iAaouds, éf:Aaouds, are the same as Ad’tpov, with the leading idea of propitiation.” — W bster. See the use of ‘Adokoua: in the publican’s prayer, Luke xviii. 13 ; fAaorhpsov, properly an aljective, “‘ propitiatory,” of the mercy-seat in LXX, and Heb. ix. 5; of Christ’s sacrifice, Rom. iii, 25; mepimoréouar, mepimoinors, denote acquirements for one’s self, © purchase, generally, Acts xx. 28; 1 Pet. ii. 9; Eph. i. 14.
44. Piety, Religion.
EioeBhs, cio€éBeru, denote worship or piety rightly directed, in human relations as well as divine; @eoveBhs, Geog Bera, worship directed towards God; edrAaBhs, evAdBera, denote the devoutness springing from godly feur; @pijickos, Opnoketia (James i. 26, 27; Acts xxvi. 5; Col. ii. 18, only), refer to external worship, religious service; de:ardatuwv (Acts xvii, 22), and de:crdaimovia (Acts xxv. 19), may have a favourable or unfavourable meaning, ‘‘religious” or ‘‘superstitious,” literally, ‘‘ devoted to the fear of deities.”
45. Miracle, Sign, Wonder.
Advamrs (generally in plur.), applied to Christ’s miracles, is a forth-putting of Divine power; tépas is a prodigy, a wonderful act; onuezov, a sign, authenticating Christ’s mission, and symbolizing heavenly truths (Acts ll. 22).
46. Parable. MapaBoan, a detailed comparison, ‘‘ parable,” as usually understood ; mapotmia (literally, a wayside discourse), ‘‘a proverb,” John xvi. 25, 29 ; ‘*a comparison,” 2 Pet. ii. 22; John x. 6.
47. Praise, to Praise.
Aivéw, alvos (aivecis), are used only of praise offered to God; éra:véu, éra:vos, of praise, approbation generally; défa, where rendered praise (John ix. 24, xii. 43; 1 Pet. iv. 11), denotes the recognition of character, ‘the glory.” In 1 Pet. ii. 9, the word is dperds, virtues; meyadtve, to magnify, is a yet more exalted word, Luke i. 46.
418 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
48. Psalm, Hymn.
Yaduds is probably used restrictively of the Psalms of the older Seriptures; duvos (not often used, probably from its associations with heathenism) is an ode of praise to God: ‘‘A psalm might be a de profundis; a hymn must always be more or less of a magnificat.”—Trench. oihisa song that might be either psalm or hymn, or a yet more general oe of Christian feeling (Eph. v. 19; Col. iii. 16).
-
49. Ordinance.
This word is adopted as the rendering of Séyua, a thing decreed (Eph. ii. 15; Col. ii. 14. See also Col. ii. 20); Sitxatwua, that which it is right to observe (Heb. ix. 1, 10); S:atay7, appointment (Rom. xiii, 2); mapddoors (1 Cor. xi. 2), instruction or injunction given, elsewhere trans- lated tradition (as 2 Thess. ii, 15); and xrfors (creation, creature), 1 Pet. ii, 13. As distinguished from Sixarduara, the évroAai are moral precepts, Luke i. 6.
50. Hebrew, Israclite, Jew, Greek, Hellenist.
‘EBpatos denotes the Hebrew-speaking Jewish community; ‘EAAnviorhs being a Greek-speaking Jew. The latter word is rendered ‘‘ Grecian” in the A.V., in distinction from “EAAny, ‘*Greek,” or Gentile (Acts vi. 1, ix. 29; in Acts xi. 20, the reading should probably be“EAAnvas). “lovdaitos, Jew, originally referred to the tribe of Judah alone, had come in the New Testament times to designate the whole people; while “IcpanAirns is always a term of honour, ‘‘one of the chosen race.”
51. Anathema.
’"AvdOnua, a thing devoted in honour of God (Luke xxi. 5); dvddeua (originally the same word), a thing devoted to destruction, ‘‘accursed.” So the verb ava0epari¢w. See Acts xxiii. 14. The other occurrences of gvd0eua are Rom. ix. 3; 1 Cor. xii. 3, xvi. 22; Gal. i. 8, 9.
52. Hell, Hades,
“A.dns, *‘the unseen world,” the place of the departed, generally (compare Luke xvi. 23; Acts ii. 27); by metonymy for death and destruction (Matt. xi. 23); once only rendered ‘‘ grave,” 1 Cor. xv. 55; ‘‘the gates of hades” are the powers of destruction (Matt. xvi. 18); yéevva (from ** Valley of Hinnom”) is ‘‘the abode of the lost” (Matt. v. 22, 29, 32% x. 28, xviii. 9, xxiii. 15, 33; Mark ix. 43, 45; Luke xii. 5; James iii. 6, only), See Dr. Campbell’s Dissertation, in his “ Gospels.”
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. 419
53. Devil, Demon. The almost uniform translation of Saluwy, Saiudviov, by ‘‘devil” is unfortunate. The word (most usual in the New Testament in the second or diminutive form) classically denotes a subordinate divinity, supernatural being. There were kaxodaiuoves and a&yafodaluoves. In Scripture the word always has its evil sense, and demon would be a good rendering; 6 5:dBodros (Heb., from Satay, Sutavas) is the one arch-spirit of evil, ‘‘ the devil.” In its sense of calumniator, the word is found (plur.) 1 Tim. iii. 11 ; 2 Tim. iii. 3; Titus ii. 3.
EVs
In the last place, a number of miscellaneous words, chiefly Substantives, in ordinary use, will present some interesting points of distinction. The list, it is plain, might be greatly extended ; but enough is given to excite the student’s inquiries.
54. Life, Death.
Zw is life in its principle, life intrinsic; Blos, life in its manifestations, life extrinsic. Hence the former is used especially for life spiritual and immortal; the latter may denote the duration or manner of life, livelihood. Vux% is the principle of animal life, ‘‘the soul.” See the next article. Odvaros is death, opposed to Swi: vexpds, dead, Ovnrés, mortal. The verbs Oavaréw (Rom. viii. 13), vexpdw (Col. iii. 5), are both translated mortify ; the former, perhaps, referring rather to the state, ‘‘death to sin,” the latter to the deed, ‘‘slay them.”
55. Soul, Mind, Spirit.
Wux7, soul or life, is common to man with the irrational animals (Rev. Vili. 9), hence self (Matt. xvi. 25, 26), person (Rev. xviii. 13), often the soul as the seat of passion or desire, the point of contact between man’s bodily and spiritual nature; puxieds, ‘‘natural” (1 Cor. ii. 14, xv. 44, 463; James iii. 15; Jude 19, only); cua and pux7% are jointly elements of what is often called odpt, the lower, fleshly nature. So capminds, as 1 Cor. iii. 1, 3, 4. But c@ua is sometimes used for person, Rom. xii. 1, ‘* your bodies,” i.e, the instruments or organs of your entire nature. Tvetpa, spirit, man’s highest nature, the point of contact between the human and the Divine; mvevpatinds, spiritual, as 1 Cor. ii. 13, 153 ppéves (only in 1 Cor. xiv. 20), the understanding; vovs, the mind, percipient and intelligent, the reasam; kapdia, the heart, is used not only for the seat of
420 _ NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
the emotions, but for that of the intellectual faculties, af kapdla, nal ra vofwara (Phil. iv. 7), ‘*thought at its source and in its manifestations ;” 5:dvosa, the understanding, as exercised, for good or evil, Eph. ii, 3; Matt. xxii. 37.
56. Form, Fashion, Likeness.
Eidos is appearance, that may or may not have a basis in reality; eYSwAoy, a mere appearance, ‘‘an idol;” popo%, the form as indicative of the interior nature; oxipua, the form, externally regarded, ‘‘the figure, fashion (see Phil. ii. 6, 7, 8); eix@v denotes the exact representation, ‘*image ;” oxla, the shadowy resemblance (Heb. x. 1); xapaxrtip, the impress, as enstamped (Heb. i. 3). Compare xdpayya, “‘ stamp, engraving.”
57. Power.
Avyvamuts, used also of miracles (see 45), inherent power, might; éfoucla, power delegated, authority ; icxds, strength, as an endowment (so icxde, to be strong, prevail, more emphatic than Sdvaya); xpdros, strength as exerted, ‘‘ force.”
58. World.
Kéapos, the scheme of material things, the world, often in opposition to the kingdom of heaven; aiéy has reference primarily to duration (probahly derived not from del dv, but from &nu, to breathe; hence life, duration’) adj., aiédvos, belonging to the aidy: aids is from del, and means simply everlasting, only found Rom. i. 20; Jude 6); ai@ves (Heb. i. 2), ‘the ages,” or, as E.V., ‘‘the worlds,” in respect to their successive ages ; oixouvpéyn, the earth as inhabited, the world of men. For xéouos and vixovyevn interchangeable, compare Matt. iv. 8, with Luke iv. 5.
59. Master.
Képzios expresses lordship in general ; 3eoré7ns, ownership (correlative with dotvA0s); 5:5d¢0Kado0s (correlative with nants) is teacher. In James iii. 1, the meaning seems to be censors; émordrns (only in Luke), literally, superintendent, is the Greek rendering of the Hebrew fa88i, found in its original form in Matt., Mark, John.
60. Servant.
AodaAos, slave, is the lowest word in the scale of servitude (SovAda, to enslave; SovrAedw, to serve, as a slave); tanpérns, *“‘ under-rower,” expresses in general subservience to another’s will (so émnpetéw); Sidkovos, Siaxovia, Siakovéw, imply service, ministry, in every form; Oepdmwy is attendant (only in Heb. iii. 5); @epamrevw (Geparela) have special reference to healing ; oixérns, a household servant, Acts x. 7 (so mais, see 62).
NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS. | A421
61. Family, Tribe, House.
@va% is a tribe, as of Israel; warpid, a family, in the wider sense, descendants of a common ancestor (only in Luke ii. 4; Acts iii. 25; Eph. iii, 15; in E.V. different each time); ofkos, oixla, both mean household, the former referring to the inmates, the latter to the building and that which it contains (Sana always in the New Testament of the building, with émt, ‘*house-top.”’)
62. Child, Infant.
Téxvov, child by natural descent (from tiktw); wats, a boy or girl, a child in legal relation, also a servant (uke xv. 26; Matt. xii. 18; Acts iv. 27, 30); maldstov, a young child; Bpédos, a babe; vimios (from vn, negative, and eiwoy), a child in power and character.
63. Man. “Av@pwmos, a man, member of the human family (homo) ; av74p, a man in sex and age (vir). 64. Time.
Xpédvos, time as duration ; ka:pdés, a definite time, with reference te some act or crisis, ‘‘ opportunity.”
65. Lamp, Light.
as, light, generally; pworHp, luminary (Phil. ii. 15); A¥xvos, a lamp (John v. 35), (Avxvia, a lampstand) ; Aaurds, a torch (Matt. xxv. 1; Acts xx. 8); péyvos, light in its splendour, “ radiance.”
66. Clothes.
‘Iudriov, raiment, generally, also an outer garment, opposed to x:7éy, an inner vest (Matt. v. 40); @o@#s, apparel, generally applied to what is ornate or splendid; €vdvua, anything put on (Matt. iii. 4, vi. 28.
67. Crown.
=répavos, ‘‘a garland,” a conqueror’s or a festal crown (eréupa, a sacrificial garland, Acts xiv. 13); diddnua, ‘‘a fillet,” a royal crown, Rev. xil. 3, Xiil. 1, xix. 12, only.
68. Burden.
Bapos denotes the pressure of a weight, which may be relieved or trans- ferred, Gal. vi. 2; poprioy is specific, the ‘‘load,” which each must bear for himself,” ver. 5 ; yéwos, the lading of a ship (Acts xxi. 3); dy«os, the weight that encumbers, Heb. xii, 1,
i ‘ 422 NEW TESTAMENT SYNONYMS.
69. Basket.
Kégivos, a travelling basket (Matt. xiv. 20); orvpis, a large hamper used for storage (Matt. xv. 37; Acts ix. 25). In all the accounts of the two miracles, the baskets used in each are distinguished.
70. Net.
Alkrvor, a net, in general; aug¢lBAnorpoy, a fishing-net flung from the hand (Matt. iv. 18; Marki. 16); cayqjvny (Matt. xili. 47), a large draw- net, ‘‘seine.”
71. Gate, Door.
@vpa, a door (janua); tvAy, a gate (porta); rvAdy, a great gate, an outer gate, a porch.
72. Fold, Flock.
Abad is fold; woluvn (dim, rolprtov) is flock. The promise in John x. 16, is, that there shall be ‘‘ one flock and one shepherd.”
73. People.
Four words are so translated : Aads, people, collectively, with a general reference to the Jews as the people of God; @@vos, nation (plur., 2v7, Gentiles); dios, people, as a municipality ; ¢xAos, “irregularcrowd, mob.”
74, Thicf. ; KaAénrys, ‘‘thief,” one who steals by fraud (fur); Anor7s, ‘* robber,” one who steals by violence (latro). The crucified malefactor and Barabbas probably belonged to the hordes of banditti which then ravaged the land.
75. Stone.
Mérpa, a rock (Mérpos, the same word, only with masc. termination to make it a proper name), “‘saxum;” A/@os, a stone, detached or hewn, ** lapis.”
76. Other.
“AAAos denotes numerical, €repos generic distinction, ‘‘different.” See Gal. i. 6, 7, ‘to another (€repuy) Gospel which is not another (&AAo).” There may be various kinds of sv-called Gospels, but there is really no other than that which the Apostle preached,
In the following Vocabulary, the Declension of Substantives is marked by the subjoined Genitive termination ; their Gender, by the Article,
Of Adjectives, the Feminine and Neuter forms are given; in those of two terminations, the Neuter.
To Verbs, the Future endings, and, where necessary, other forms, have been generally appended.
The Hyphen has been freely used, to indicate the formation, not only of synthetic, but parathetic compounds. (See §§ 146-148.) For further etymological details, a larger Lexicon must be — consulted.
The Scripture References are intended to illustrate the ordinary as well as the special uses of words, and are introduced as fully as space would permit. Nothing, however, can supersede the use of the Greek Testament Concordance.
The Vocabulary is purposely restricted to the Received Tect. For words that occur only in MSS. or in critical editions, the student is referred to Grimm’s Clavis or to Bruder’s Concordance.
VOCABULARY.
A, a, %Ada, alpha, a, the first letter. Numerally, «’=1; g=1000. For a in composition, see 147, 0, ¢. Fig. 7d.A, or 7d &Aga, the first prin- ciple of all things; of the Father, Rev. i. 8, xxi. 6; the Son, i. 11, Exit 33.
*Aapdév, 6 (Heb.), Aaron.
*ABadddv, 6 (Heb., ‘‘ destruction”), Abaddon, Rev. ix. 11.
&-Baphs, és (cf. Bdpos), without weight ; hence, not burdensome, unexacting, 2 Cor. xi. 9.
*ABBa (Heb. in Chald. form) Father! only as an invocation, Mark xiv. 36 ; Rom. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6.
“ABed, 6 (Heb.), Abel.
*ABid, 6 (Heb.), Abijah, the king, Matt. i. 7; the priest, Luke i. 5.
*ABidOap, 6 (Heb.), Abiathar. —
"ABiAnrh, hs, h, Abilene, a district in the E. of Anti-Libanus, named from Abila, its chief city, Luke iii. 1.
ABuovd, 6 (Heb.), Abiud.
*ABpadu, 6 (Heb.), Abraham.
&-Bucovs, ov, H (originally adj. bottom- less), abyss ; generally, as Rom. x. 7; specifically, Luke viii. 31; Rev. Exl 3 RR 3
“AyaBos, ov, 5, Agabus.
ayado-epyéw, @ (or ayaboupyéw), to do good, 1 Tim. vi. 18.
ayablo-roiew, @, (1) to do good, hene- ficently ; ace. of pers., Luke vi. 33, (2) to act well, generally.
éyabo-reila, as, 7, well-doing, in sense (2) of preceding, 1 Pet. iv. 19.
ayabo-mods, od, 5 (orig. adj.), well-doer,
ayabds, h, dv (kpelocwyv, xpdtictos), good, intrinsically or beneticially ; used of both persons and things, 7d d-yadv, goodness ; Ta &yabd, goods, wealth, blessings.
ayabwovvn, ns, 7, goodness; as virtue or beneficence.
dyaArAlaots, ews, , exultation, gladness.
ayaANidw, @, dow, to leap for joy; hence, exult, rejoice; generally de- ponent. Followed by ta (subj.), emt (dat.), or év (dat.)
&-youos, adj. 6, 7, unmarried, abso- lutely, or in widowhood, 1 Cor. vii. &yavaxt éw, &, how, tobeindignunt, angry, or vexed. With wepi (gen.) or 671.
dryavdernots, ews, H, indignation.
ayardw, &, how, to love. See Synonyms.
aydrn, ns, f, love. See Synonyms. Object with eis, év, or genitive, on which see 254, 5. aydma (Jude 12), love-feasis.
ayarnrés, 7, ov, beloved; of Christ, ‘*the Beloved Son,” and of Chris- tians in their relation to God or to one another.
“Ayap, n (Heb.), Hagar.
ayyapedw, ow (from the Persian), to impress into the public service ; hence, to compel.
ayyetov, elov, 7d, vessel, utensil.
ayyeAla, as, 7, messaye.
tyyeAos, ov, 6, messenger; spec. of God’s messengers to men, angel. So of fallenspirits. ‘‘ Angel of a church” or elder, or a symbolic representation of the spirit, the genius of each church
2 VOCABULARY.
&ye, adv. (see &yw), come now, go to, James iv. 13, V. I.
ayeAn, ns, 7, a flock or herd.
&-yevea-rAdyntos, ou, adj., of unrecorded genealogy, Heb. vil. 3
a-yevjs, és (cf. yévos), low born, ignoble, 1 Cor. i. 28.
ayidfw, ow (see &ytos), to set apart from common use. Hence to hallow, or regard with religious reverence ; to consecrate to religious service, whe- ther persons or things; ¢o cleanse for such consecration ; so to purify, sanctify. ‘ot ayiwSduerat, those who are being sanctified ; ot jyacpéeva, those who are sanctified.
ayiaruds, ov, 6, consecration, sanctifica- tion. 5
&y.os, a, ov, set apart from common use, spec. to the service of God; hence hallowed, worthy of veneration, holy, consecrated, whether persons, places, or things. of &yio, ‘‘the Saints ;” 7d &ytov, the Temple; 7a &ya, the Sanc- tuary ; Gya ayia, the Holy of Holies.
ayidrns, THTOs, H, holiness.
Gywotrn, ns, h, holiness. The ‘Spirit
of holiness” (Rom. i. 4) is Christ’s Divine nature.
aynddn, 75, h, the (curve of the) arm, Luke i. 28.
&yKioTpov, ov, 76, fishhook.
&yxupa, as, 4, anchor.
&-yvaoos, ov, adj. (not fulled or dressed), new, of cloth, Matt. ix. 16; Mark ii.21.
Syvela, as, 7, purity, ie., chastity, s Tim, iv. 12, v. 2.
ayvitw, cw, to cleanse, purify; lit. as John xi. 55; tig. as James iv. 8.
ayuiouds, od, 6, ceremonial purification, Acts xxi. 26.
&.yvoew, &, haw (cf. yryveonw), (1) not to know, to be ignorant (ayvoey, igno- rant ; ayvoobuevus, unknown person-
ally, Gal. 1. 22; ignored, disesteemed,
2 Gor. vi. 9); (2) not to understand, Mark ix. 32; perhaps Acts xiii. 27 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 38.
ayvénua, aros, 74, a sin of ignorance, error, Heb. ix. 7.
voi, as, 7, ignorance, spec. (in N. 'T.) of religious subjects.
pal a _ 4 ay $ rs a 7%
' [diye—dyeo
yb, h, dv, pure, of God, as 1 John ili, 3; of men, as 2 Cor. vil. 11; spec. of female chastity, 2 Cor. ix, 2, &e.
ayverns, THTOS, h, purity, 2 Cor. vi. 6.
Gyvwala, as, H, ignorance, spec. wilful ignorance, 1 Cor. xv. 34; 1 Pet. ii. 15.
&yvworos, ov, unknown, Acts xvii. 23.
dyopd, as, 7 (ayelpw), a place of public resort ; hence market place or open street ; spec. market, Mark vii. 4; the forum, or place of public as- semblies, trials, &c., Acts xvi. 19, Xvii. 17.
&yopatw, ow, to purchase, buy, with gen. of price, or é, once év, Rev. v. 9; fig. to redeem, ransom; act. of Christ ; pass. of Christians.
&yopaios, ov, adj., belonging to the forum ; hence (jmépa) court days Acts xix. (8 ; (4v0pwra) idlers, loun- gers, Xvil. 5.
&ypa, as, % (hunting), jishing, Luke v.43; met. draught, ver. 9.
&-vadunares, ov, adj., unlearned, 1.e., in Rabbinical lore, Acts iv. 13.
ayp-avrdéw, &, to remain in the fields, Luke ii. 8.
aypevw, ow (to take in hunting), fig., to ensnare, Mark xii. 13.
aypi-éAaios, ov, 6, wild olive, oleaster, Rom, xi. 17, 24.
dypios, fa, tov, wild, of honey, Mark i. 6; of waves, Ji ude 13.
’Ayplarmas, a, 6, Agrippa, i.e., Herod Agrippa UL. See “Hpé5ns.
&ypds, ov, 6, field, spec. the country ; plur., couniry districts, hamlets.
ayputvéw, @ (Umvos), **to ‘be sleepless ;” hence, met. , to watch, to be vigilant. With inép (gen.), Heb. xiii. 17, to watch over ; with eis, Kph. vi. 18, to give attention to.
aypumvia, as, h, watching, i.e., assiduous care, 2 Cor. vi. 5, xi. 27.
tyw, tw, Hyayov, trans., to lead, bring ; with zpés (ace.), Ews, eis, of destina- tion; with émi (acc.), of purpose, as Acts viii. 32; also in the sense of before, as, e.g., for trial. Hence t spend, as of time; to keep, as a pa
t aA dyoy—aérds |
ticular day. Fig., tolead the inchna- tion, induce. Intrans. (or trans. with reflexive pron. understoud), to go, depart ; imper., &ye, come! subj., &ywuer, let us go! the former being used as an adverb.
aywyn, fs, # (&yw), ‘leading, guid- ance ;” hence, manner of life, 2 Tim. ili. 10.
ayév, @vos, contest, spec. with the notion of pain or danger; fig. , of the Christian life, as Heb. xii. 1.
wywria, as, h, contest; emphatically, agony, Luke xxii. 44.
aywviFoua, to strive, as in the public games; to contend with an adver- sary; fig., of Christian effort and endurance.
"Addu, 6 (Heb.), Adam.
&-5dravos, ov, free of charge, gratuitous, 1 Cor. ix. 18.
*AdSi, 6, Addi, Luke iii. 28 (not men- tioned in O. T.)
adeAGH, Hs,.7, & sister, (1) lit., (2) fig. of Christian friendship.
adeApds, of, 5, a brother, (1) lit., some- times implied (see 256), (2) of more general relations, a bw loa Matt. v. 47; «@ fellow-Christian,
Matt. xxiii. 8; a fellow-man, Matt.
V. 22-24; also expressing the rela- tion between Christ and believers, Matt. xxv. 40. The ‘‘brethren of Christ” (Matt. xiii. 55; John vij. 3; Acts 1. 14; Gal. 1. 19) are thought by some to have been His cousins or other near relatives.
adeApdrys, tyros, 7, the brotherhood, z.e., the Christian community.
&-S5yAos, av, not manifest, uncertain, to the sight, or ear, or mind.
&-5nAdTns, THTOS, h, Uncertainty.
&-5nrws, adv., uncertainly, aimlessly. 1 Cor. ix. 26.
adnuovéw, @, to be sad or dejected.
&ns, ov, 6 (& priv. and fid- in ideiv), the invisible world, Hades; fig. of deep degr adation. See Synonyms. mbAat ddov, the powers of the unseen world. See mtAn.
&-5:d-Ko.tos, ov (James iil. 17), either act., not distinguishing, impartial,
VOCABULARY.
sf or pass., noid intingistehcbte or dubit- able, unambiguous, honest.
&-5ih-Aeimtos, ov, without intermission, unceasing ; adv. » WS, unceasingly.
&-5:a-pOopia, as, %, wncorruptness, purity.
G5ixéw, @, how (&5ixos), intrans., to act unjustly, commit a crime ; trans., to wrong, injure ; hence to hurt, with- out any notion of wrong, Luke x. 19, and Rev. often; pass., to be wronged.
adinnua, aras, 76, & crime.
G5icla, as, h, wrong, injustice, iniquit Y, absolutely, unrighte rusness, OF in the relations of life ; in man’s relation to God, wickedness generally, opposed to dinaoctvn, In Luke xvi. 9, ‘‘the mammon of unrighteousness ” (a5.xias) denotes riches, which in their nature are deceitful, transitory. See Synonyms.
&-5ixos, ov, unjust, (1) absolutely, (2) wicked generally, opposed to dikaos, as Matt. Vv. 45, or. evoeBis, as 2 Pet. il. 9; adv. +» “ws, unjustly, Un- deservedly, 1 Pet. ii. 19.
&-5dényuos, ov (tested, but not ap- proved), (1) reprobate, (2) worthless generally.
&-5ordus, ov, without fraud, genuine, 1 Pet. ii. 2.
*Adpauutrynvds, h, bv, of Adramyttium, an Adolian seaport, Acts xxvii. 2. *Adpias, a, 6, the Adriatic, embracing
the Lonian sea, Acts xxvii. 27. adpdrns, THTOS, n, largeness, abundance, 2 Cor. viii. 20.
&-Suvatéw, &, to be impossible, with dat., or mapa (dat.)
&-Sivaros, ov, adj., (1) of persons, act.,
powerless ; (2) of things, pass., an- possible, Go, gow (contr. from dedw), to sing,
with cognate acc., giv, a song ; with dat., to sing (praise) to, celebrate.
dei, adv., always ; of continuous time, unceasingly ; of successive inter- vals, from time to time, on every occasion.
aerds, od, 6, an eagle, gen. bird of prey, as Matt. xxiv. 28,
4 VOCABULARY.
&-Suuos, ov, unleavened, only in plur., sc. Adyava, cakes, or &pra, loaves ; met., the paschal feast ; tig., incor- rupt, sincere, 1 Cor. v. 7, 8.
*ASép, 6 (Heb.), Azor, Matt. i. 13, 14; not mentioned in O. T.
“ASwtos, ov, 7, Azotus or Ashdod, Acts Vili. 40. - ; ap, aépos, 7, the air, atmosphere ; hence the region above the earth, Eph. ii. 2 (see €foveta) ; tig., the void, as 1 Cor.
_. 1x. 26, xiv. 9.
&-Bavacia, as, % (see Odvatos), immor- tality, 1 Cor. xv. 53; 1 Tim. vi. 16.
&-Oguiros, ov (O¢us, law), unlawful, criminal.
&-Geos, ov, without God, either nega- tively disregarding or positively denying Him, Eph. ii. 12.
&-Becuos, ov, adj. (Geopuds, lawless.
&-Cetéw, &, How (Ge- as in TlOnut), to sect at nought, i.¢., persons, to despise, slight ; or things, to nullify, contemn.
&-Gérnots, ews, H, nullification, abro- gation, Heb. vii. 18, 1x. 26.
"Adjva, av, ai, Athens.
*AOnvaios, a, ov, Athenian.
GbAgw, @, (AbAov, prize), to contend, in the public games, 2 Tim. ii. 5
BOAnors, ews, H, contest, as in the public games; fig., struggle with afflictions, Heb. x. 32.
&-Ovuew, &, to lose heart, despond, Col. iii. 21.
Gaus, ov (or a0gos), undeserving of punishment, innocent, Matt. xxvu. 4; with dd, of the crime, ver. 24.
atye.os, n, ov (alt, goat), of or belonging te a goat, Hob. xi. 37.
aiyadds, od, 6,° the shore, beach; in Gospels, of Gennesaret ; in Acts, of the Mediterranean.
Alyirtws, a, ov, Hgyptian.
Atyur7os, ov, 7, Egypt.
_Gtd.0s, ov, adj. (det), eternal, everlasting, Rom. i. 20; Jude 6. haa
aldés, ods, %, modesty, 1 Tim. li. 9; reverence, Heb. xii. 28.
Aldivy, omos, 6, an LHithiopian, Acts viil. 27.
aiua, aos, Td, blood, (1) lit., especially
statute),
. [&-fupos—aloOnors
of blood shed, i.e., of animals, vic- tims in sacrifice; so of man, of Curist, connected with which latter meaning the word is often used ; (2) met., of the death of Christ; (3) bloodshed, murder ; hence blood- guiltiness, the crime or responsibility of another’s destruction ; (4) natural life, which was believed to reside in the blood, especially with odpé, 1 Cor. xv. 20; so human nature generally ; hence (5) natural rela- tionship ; (6) in Acts ii. 20, &e., the reference is to the colour of blood.
aivar-ex-xucia, as, 7, shedding of blooa, Heb. ix. 22.
ainoppoew, &, to have a flux or issue of blood, Matt. ix. 20,
Aivéas, a, 6, Ainéas, Acts ix. 33, 34.
aiveots, éws, 7, praise, Heb. xiii. 15.
aivéw, &, ow and how, to praise, only of God. See Synonyms.
alviyua, atos, Td, u dark intimation, an enigma, 1 Cor. xiii. 12.
alvos, ov, 6, praise, only of God.
Aivév, » (Heb.), dinon, John iii. 23.
alpecis, ews, ) (aipeduct), choice, its act or result ; hence a religious sect or party, party spirit, dissension.
aiperifw, aw, to choose, with preference and love, Matt. xii. 18.
aipetixds, od, 6, one who acts from party spirit, a factious person, ‘* heretic,’’ Titus lll. 10.
aipéw (irreg., see 108, 1), to take, only in mid. in N. T., to choose, prefer.
aipw (see 92), (1) to take up, lift, carry, used of carrying the cross, lit., Matt. XXvil. 32; fig., Matt. xvi. 24; so of raising the eyes, the voice, the mind; hence to keep in suspense ; (2) to take away, authoritatively or forcibly, as to abrogate a law, to remove by death; imp., alpe, dpov, Away with! i.e., to execution ; (3) to take away sin, de- scriptive of the redeeming work of Christ, John i. 29; 1 John iii. 5.
aicOdvouat, y00duny, dep., to perceive, comprehend, Luke ix. 45.
aic@nois, ews, 7, perception, accurate judgment, Phil. 1. 9.
é
ae
ys
ate Onrhpiov—a-Karé- |
alcOnrhpior, ov, n., organ of perception, faculty of judgment, Heb. v. 14. aisxpo-Kepdhs, es, eager for disgraceful gain, sordid ; adv., -ws, sordidly. aicxpo-Aoyla, as, 7, foul language, scur- rility, Col. ili. 8. aicxpds, 4, dv (orig. deformed, opposed to adds), base, disgraceful, morally (gen.), or as contrary to usage. aicxpérns, ThTos, 4, prob. obscenity, Eph. v. 4 only. aicxivn, ns, 7, shame, in personal feel- ing or in the estimation of others, disgrace, shameful conduct. aicxivonat, oduat, mid., to feel ashamed ; pass., to be put to shame, confounded. airéw, &, how, to ask, require, demand ; with two aces., or acc. of thing, and amd or mapdé (gen.) of person; spec., to pray, to desire, Acts vil. 46; mid., to ask for one’s self, beg. airnua, aros, 76, desire, olject of desire. aitia, as, h, cause, (1) as the reason or ground of anything; (2) in Matt. xix. 10, the state of the case; (3) forensically, an accusation, a crime. aitlaua, atos, 76, accusation, charge, Acts xxv. 7. Some read airiwua.
airios, fa, wv, causative of, used as
‘
subst. masc., the cause, author; neut., @ cause, reason, espec. of punishment; a crime, like airfa,
aipvidios, ov, adj., unexpected, sudden.
aixp-arwola, as, 7, captivity; met., a captivity, i.e., a multitude of cap- tives, Eph. iv. 8.
aixu-arwrevo, ow, to make prisoners of, to take captive, captivate, 2 Tim. iii, 6, where some read the following.
alxp-adrwtifw, ow, to lead captive.
aixu-ddwtos, ov, 6, 7, a captive, Luke iv. 18 (from Isa. lxi. 1).
aidv, -avos, 6 (del), continuous duration, (1) time limited, an age, as the ages before the Messiah (1 Cor. x. 11), the ages afterwards (Eph. ii. 7), or gen. in plural, the ages; (2) the world, considered under the aspect of time, as Luke i. 70, espec. with ovros, this world, in contrast with the world to come (6 péAdrwy, 6 épxdéuevos), the world generally, Heb.
VOCABULARY. 5
i. 2, Xi. 33 (3) time unlimited, the age of eternity, past, as Acts xv. 18, future, 2 Pet. ii. 18, especially in the following phrases: eis Tov aidva, Jor ever, with negative adv. never ; eis ToUs ai@vas, a stronger expression, for evermore; e¢is rovs aidvas trav aiévev, stronger still, for ever and ever. Phrase slightly varied, Eph. iii. 21; Rev. xiv. 11.
aiévios (-la* or -wos), -tov, perpetual, lasting, (1) of limited duration, with xpdva, the times of old; (2) of un- limited duration, spec. future, eter- nal, everlasting. aidédvioyv (Philem. 15), adverbially, in perpetuity, for ever.
&-Kabapota, as, 7 (Kabalpw), uncleanness, » impurity, (1) lit., Matt. xxiii. 27; (2) generally fig., pollution, incontinence.
&-Kaldptys, TyTOS, 7H, impurity, Rev. XVii. 4.
&-Kdbaptos, ov, adj., unclean, impure, (1) of ceremonial, legal or religious defilement ; (2) of evil spirits, with mvevua, Gospels, Acts, Rev. ; (3) of human beings, impure, lewd, Eph. |
&-Kaipéouat, oduat, dep., to lack oppor- tunity, Phil. iv. to.
a-kalpws, adv., unseasonably, 2 Tim. iv. 2. See efxa:pws.
&-kakos, ov, adj., free from evil, harm- less, Heb. vii. 26; unsuspecting, Rom. xvi. 18.
uixavda, ns, 7, thorn, briar.
axdvOivos, ov, made of thorns, Mark xv. 17; John xix. 5.
&-xapros, ov, unfrutful, barren, lit., Jude 12, generally fig.
a-KaTd-yywotos, ov, nos demned, irreprehensible.
&-Kata-KdAurros, ov, unveiled.
6.-KaTa-Kperos, or, uncondemned.
&-xard-AvTOs, ov, indissoluble.
G-kard-mravotos, ov, not to be re- strained, with gen.
&-kata-oTacla, as, n, instalility; hence sedition, tumult, disorder.
&-kaTd-oratos, ov, inconstant, unstable.
to be con-
* Fem, form only in 2 Thess. ii. 16; Heb. 12,
Rey VOCABULARY.
&-Kard-cxeTos, ov, unruly, untameable,
Jas. iii. 8
*Axed-daud (Heb. in Chald. form, field:
of blood), Aceldama, Acts i. 19. Some read ’AreAdapcx. .
G-Képaios, ov (Kepdvvvu:), unmixed ; hence, fig., simple, innocent, guile- less, Matt. x. 16; Rom. xvi. 19; Phil. ii, 15. '
&-KAivhs, és, unbending ; hence unwa- vering, stedfast, Heb. x. 23.
akuate, ow, to reach the point of per fec- tion ; so, of fruit, to ripen, Rev. xiv. 18.
akunv, acc. as adv., up to this point, hitherto, Matt. xv. 16,
akoh, 7s, 7 (axotw), hearing, (1) the sense or faculty ; (z) espec. the organ, the ear ; (3) the act of hearing ; (4) the thing heard, as a report, speech, doc- trine. axo7,, dat., qualifying &xotew, **to hear with hearing,” 7.e., atten- tively.
&xorovbéw, @, how, (1) fo accompany,
_ follow, or attend, with dat., or perd (gen.), or driow (gen.), espec. of the disciples of Christ; so, met., to obey and imitate ; (2) to succeed, in order of time, or retribution.
dxovw, mw or gouat, pi., axhkoa, to hear, (1) intrans., 7.e, to possess the faculty ; (2) trans. (acc. or gen.), to hear, listen to, heed, understand. oi axovevres, hearers or disciples. In pass., to become notorious.
&-xpacla, as, n, intemperance, inconti- nence, 1 Cor. Vii. 5.
&-xpaths, és (kpdros), powerless, i.e., over one’s self, 2 Tim. ili. 3.
&-npatos, ov (kepdvvumt), unmixed or un- diluted ; hence intoxicating, Rev. xiv. Io.
&xpifea, as, 7, precision, strictness, Acts xxil. 3.
&xpiBhs, és, accurate, strict ; -ws, adv., diligently, accurately, perfectly.
dxpiBdw, &, dow, to enquire closely (or ascertain exactly), Matt. ii. 7, 16.
axpls, fos, 7, a locust.
&xpoarhpioy, tov, n. (axpodouat, to hear), the place of hearing judicially.
&xpoarhs, ov, 6, one who listens to, a hearer, Rom, ii. 13; Jas. i. 22.
[axard— ddevpow
&kpoBvoria, as, 4, the foreskin, uncir- cumeision ; &kpoBvotlay exovtes, un- circumcised ; collective for pagans or uncircumcised Gentiles.
&kpo-ywviaios, a, ov, belonging to the Joundation ; with Aléos understood, “* foundation stone,” ref. to Christ, Eph. ii. 20; 1 Pet. ii. 6.
&kpo-Pinoy, tov, 7d, first fruits, z.e., the best of the produce, applied (plur.) to spoils taken in battle, Heb. vii. 4.
&xpos, a, ov, outermost, pointed ; neut., 70 &Kpov, the end, extremity, as of a finger, rod, &c.
’Aktaas, ov, 6, (Latin) Aquila.
&-kupdw, @, to deprive of power, set aside, as a law.
&-Kkwrdtws, adv., freely, without hin- drance, Acts xxviii. 31.
&xwv, ovoa, ov (4, Exwy), unwilling, 1 Cor. ix. 17.
dAdBaorpov, ov, Té, alabaster, a vessel for perfume, Matt. xxvi. 7; Mark xiv. 3; Luke vii. 37.
drafovela, as, 4, boasting, show, osten- tation.
ddraléy, dvos, 6, a swaggering, boastful person.
dArard(w, dow, to raise a cry, or loud sound, as in mourning, as Matt. v. 38; of cymbals, 1 Cor. xiii. 1.
&-AdAnros, ov, not to be uttered in words, © Rom, viii. 36,
&-Aados, ov, dumb, making dumb.
Aas, aros, 7, salt; fig., wisdom, pru- dence. :
drAclpw, yw, to anoint, festally, or in homage; also medicinally, or in embalming the dead.
dAextopo-pwria, as, 4, the cock-crowing, between midnight and dawn.
&Aéxrwp, opos, 6, a cock. The name signifies sleepless.
*AActavdpeds, ews, 6, an Alexandrian, i.e.,a man of Alexandria.
*ArActavdpwds, h, dv, Alexandrian, used of a ship, Acts xxvii. 6, xxviii, 11.
’Arétavdpos, ov, 6, Alexander. Four of this name are mentioned, Mark xv. 21; Acts iv. 6; Acts xix. 33; 1 Tim. i. 20.
uAeupoy, ov, 74, fine meal or flour,
GAH Gera. —dpaxos |
GAnbem, as, 7, truth: generally, as Mark v. 33; espec., (1) freedom Jrom error, exactness, as (2) THE TrutTu, or Word of God; Jesus is called the Truth, John xiv. 6; (3) truthfulness, veracity, sincerity, ante- grity, opposed to adixla, Rom. ii. 8 ; 1 Cor. sill. 6.
&AnOhs, és (&, Aaf- in AavOdyw), uncon- cealed, true, valid, sure, sincere, up- right, just. See Synonyms for com- parison with the following. -ws, adv., truly ; in truth, really ; in very deed, certainly.
dAnbivds, n, dv, real, genuine, contrasted with “fictitious,” ‘* pretended ;” also with ‘‘ typical,”’ as John vi. 32; Heb. viil. 2, ix. 24.
GANPw, how, to grind, i.e., with a hand- mill.
GAréus, éws, 6, a fisherman.
adtetiw, evow, to fish.
aArl(w, low, to salt, sprinkle with salt.
aAloynua, atos, 76, pollution, as from eating what has been sacrificed to idols, Acts xv. 20.
GAAd (prop. n. plur. of &AdAos), but, an adversative particle. See 404.
&AAdoow, déw, to alter or exchange.
arAaxdbey, adv., from elsewhere,
GAA-nyopéw, @, to speak allegorically, or to alicgorize; pass. part., Gal. iv. 24.
AAAnAotia (Hebrew), HALLELUsAn, Praise ye Jehovah, Rev. xix. 1, 6 aAAHAwWY, reciprocal pron., gen. plur.,
one another, each ether.
&AAo-vevns, és, of another nation, a JSoreigner, Luke xvii. 18.
&AAoucu (dep.), GAoduat, HAduny, to leap up, leap; to bubble up, as water, John iv. 14.
&AAos, , 0, other, different, another ; of &AAo, the others, the rest. See Synonyms. -ws, adv., otherwise, 1 Tim. v. 25.
&AAoTpio-erickomos, ov, 6, one who looks at or busies himself in the things of another, a busybody, 1 Pet. iv. 15.
&AAdTpios, la, tov, belonging to another, foreign, strange, alien; not of one’s own family, hostile.
VOCABULARY. 7
GAAS-urAos, ov, adj., foreign, of unother tribe or race, Acts x. 28.
dAodw, &, how, to beat or thresh, as corn, 1 Cor. ix. 10; 1 Tim. v. 18.
&-Aoyos, ov, (1) without speech or reason, irrational ; (2) unreasonable, absurd.
GAron, Hs, 7, the aloe, John xix. 39.
GAs, adds, 6, salt. See Gaas.
aAukés, ,- dv (GAs), salt, brackish, James ili. 12.
&-Avmos, ov, free from sorrow, Phil. li, 28,
GAvors, ews, , a chain or manacle.
&-AvoiteAns, és, without gain, unprofit- able, hurtful.
*AAdaios, ov, 6, Alpheus. Two of the name are mentioned, Mark ii. 14; Mark xv. 4 (the latter being called KAwrds, John xix. 25; another form of the orig. Hebrew name),
GAwv, wos, 6, 4, a& thkreshing-floor ; met., the corn of the threshing-floor. tadent, exos, 7, a fox ; met., an artful
and mischievous person.
&Awats, ews, , a taking or catching.
dua, adv., at the same time, with or together with (dat.); dua mpwi, with the duwn.
&-padis, és, unlearned, rude, 2 Pet. lili. 16,
&-wapdytivos, ov, adj. (uapatvouc), un- Sading, 1 Pet. v. 4.
a-udpaytos, ov, adj., unfading, 1 Pet. i. 4.
dpaptdyw, thaw, to miss a mark, to err, to sin (with cognate acc.) ; to wander Jrom truth or virtue, to sin against or offend any one (with éis).
iudptnua, atos, 76, & sin, error, offence.
Gpaptia, as, n, (1) sin, vice, wickedness ; (2) @ particular sin, as unbelief, frau or falsehood ; (3) the imputation or guilt of sin, possibly sin effering.
&-pdptupos, ov, wiihout witness, 2 Cor. v. 21 (O.'L.)
apapTwards, oer ( 1) sinful, espec. habitu- ally and notoriously ; lable to the punishment of sin; (2) often used substantively, @ sinner, an tmpious person. The Jews used the word for idolaters, i.e., Gentiles,
&-waxos, ov, not quarrelsome.
-
‘
8 VOCABULARY.
dudw, 6, how, to reap, to gather, as by harvestmen, James v. 4.
Gpébveros, ov, m., an amethyst (sup- posed to be an antidote against drunkenness. Hence the name, from &, wedvw).
dmerew, B, Haw, not to care for, to dis- regard, neglect ; gen. or inf.
&-ueurtos, ov, without blame, faultless, Advy., -ws, unblameably, faultlessly.
G-uépiuvos, ov, free from solicitude or anxiety, secure, easy.
_ G-perd-Oeros, ov, unchangeable.
&-pera-Kivntos, ov, adj., immoveable, Jjirm, 1 Cor, xv. 58.
G&-pweta-uéAntos, ov, adj., not to be re- gretted or repented of; hence un- changeable, Rom. xi. 29; 2 Cor. Vli. 10.
&-ueta-véntos, ov, adj., unrepentant, irreclaimable, Rom. ii. 5.
&-pnerpos, ov, beyond measure, immode- rate, 2 Cor. X. 13, 15.
éunv, AMEN, a Hebrew adjective, true, faithful, used (1) as an adverb, at the beginning of a sentence, verily, truly, indeed; (2) at the end of ascriptions of praise, &c., optatively as yévorro, so be it; substantively, 2 Cor. i. 20; (3) as a name of Christ, the Amen, the faithful witness, Rev.
. iil, 14.
&-unhtwp, opos, 6, 7 (unrnp), without mother, i.¢., in the genealogies, Heb. vii. 3.
&-utavros, ov (uiaivw), undefiled, sincere,
pure.
*"AuwadaB, 6 (Heb.), Aminadab, Matt. i.4; Luke iii. 33.
%upmos, ov, 7, sand, as of the shore; a sandy soil.
duvds, o0, 6, a lamb; fig., of Christ, John i. 29, &e.
éporBh, Hs, ) (auelBw), requital, 1 Tim. Vv. 4 ;
&pumredos, ov, 7, a vine, (1) lit.; (2) fig., as John xv. 1; Rev. xiv. 18.
dumed-oupyds, 00, 6, , @ vine-dresser, Luke xiii. 7.
dumerdy, avos, 6, a vineyard.
"Aurxlas, tov, 6, Amplias, Rom. xvi. 8.
dytvw, @, only in mid., N.T., to defend, assist, Acts Vil. 24.
\
[apdo—évayacrds
&udl-BAnostpov, ov, 76, a fishing net.
Gudi-evvuns, éow, to “put on, as a gar- ment; to clothe, adorn.
"Aupimoris, ews, 4, Amphipolis, a city in the 8. of Macedonia.
&u-odor, ov, n., a place where two ways meet, a street.
dupdrepot, at, a, both, only of two.
G-udunros, ov, without blame or fault, Phil. ii. 15; 2 Pet. iii. 14.
Uuwuor, ov, 74, a spice plant, Rev. xiii. 13.
aie hes, ov, without spot; fig., blame-
88.
*Audy, 6 (Heb.), Amon, Matt. i. 10.
"Aus, 6 (Heb.), Amos, Luke iii. 25.
tiv, a particle, expressing possibility, uncertainty, or conditionality.
avd, prep., lit., upon ; in composition, up, again. See 297 and 147, a. |
dva-Babuds, od, 6 (Baivw), steps, stairs, means of ascent.
dva-Balvw, Bicoua, (1) to ascend, espec. to Jerusalem, on board ship (John Xxi. 3), to heaven; (2) to spring up, as plants, &c.; used of a rumour, Acts xxi. 31; of thoughts coming into mind, Luke xxiv. 38.
Gva-BdrAAw, mid., to postpone, defer, Acts xxiv. 22.
dva-BiBdtw, to draw up, as a net to shore.
dva-BAérw, (1) to look upwards, (2) to recover sight, (3) to look attentively.
avd-Brelis, ews, 7, recovery of sight, Luke iv. 18.
ava-Bodw, &, to exclaim, ery aloud.
dva-BoAh, jis, n, putting off or delay, Acts xxv. 17.
dy-ayyéAAw, to tell, to declare openly, to show forth, confess, foretell.
ava-yevvaw, @, to beget again.
dva-yivéoxw, to know well, to read, espec. aloud, to know by reading ; used chiefly in the last sense.
avayndtw, dow, to force, to compel by force or persuasion.
avarykatos, ala, atov, necessary, fit, ser- viceable ; also close or near, as friends, Acts x. 24.
dvaryKacras, adv., necessarily or by con- straint, 1 Pet. v. 2.
meas tet
ivdyen, ns, 7, (1) necessity, constraint ; (2) distress, 2 Cor. Vi. 4, Xil. 10.
ava-yvepi(w, to make known, aor. pass., Acts vil. 13.
dvd-yvwos, ews, 4, reading, whether private or public.
dv-ayw, to bring, lead, or take up ; to offer up, as sacrifices; pass., to put to sea, to set sail.
éva-Seixvuyt, to show, as by uplifting, to show plainly, appoint.
ava-5eéis, ews, Nn, a showing or public appearance, Luke i. 80.
dva-déxoua, dep., to receive with a welcome, as guests, Acts xxviil. 7; promises, Heb. xi. 17.
dva-didau, to give up, deliver, as by messengers, Acts xxili. 33 3.
dva-(dw, &, to live again, revive.
dii-Cyreoa;. @, to look or search for with diligence.
ava-Covvupt, to gird or bind up, as a loose dress is girded about the loins; tig., 1 Pet. i. 13.
dva-Cwrupéw, @ (mip), to re-kindle or rouse up; fig., 2 Tim. i. 6.
dva-Girrw, to thrive or flourish again, Philip. iv. Io.
ava-Oeua, atos, Td, @ person or thing accursed, an execration or curse. Later form for avdé@nua, which see.
avaleuari~w, tow, to bind by a curse, to declare on pain of being an ana- thema.
dva-Sewpéw, &, to look at or behold atten- tively, to consider.
dvd-Onua, atos, 7d, anything consecrated and laid by, a votive offering, Luke xxi. 5... See Grd bea, and Synonyms.
dv-aideia, as, %, tmportunity (shame- lessuess), Luke xi. 3.
avaipéois, ews, 7, a taking away, i.e., by a violent death.
ay-alpew, @ (see 103, 1), to take away, to abolish, to take off; to kill; mid., to take up, as Pharaoh’s daughter took up Moses, Acts vii. 21.
dv-aitiws, ov, gutitless, i.e., without cause (aitia) of condemnation, Matt. ei.5, 7
ava-Kadi(w, to sit up (properly trans. with éavrdy understood).
VOCABULARY. 9
ava-Kawif@, to renew, restore to a former condition, Heb. vi. 6
dva-kavéw, &, to renew, wmend, to change the life, 2 Cor. iv. 16; Col. lil. Io.
ava-Kkalvwots, ews, H, a renewal or change of heart and life, Rom. xii. 2; Tit. iii. 5.
dva-narintw, to unveil, make manifest.
dva-kdurtw, to bend or turn back, return.
dyd-Keuat, dep., (1) to be laid out, asa dead body, Mark v. 40, rec. ; (2) to recline, as at a meal, reclining on the bosom of Jesus, i.e., next to Jesus at table ; 6 Svaitelseros, one who reclines at table, a guest.
dva-reparaudeo, &, to gather together into one, to sum up, under one head ; pass., Rom. xiii. 9; mid., Eph. i. 10.
ava-kAlyw, to lay down, as an infant, © Luke ii. 7; to place at table; mid., to recline, as at a feast, like avd- Kelual
ava-xértw, to hinder (lit., beat back), Gal. v. 7.
ava-Kpd tw, to cry out, to shout aloud.
dva-kpivw, to investivate, enquire; to judge of favourably, 1 Cor. iv. 3, 43 unfavourably, 1 Cor. xiv. 24. Ap- plied to proceedings in a court, Luke xxiii. 14.
ava-Kpiols, ews, n, judicial examination, Acts xxv. 26,
ava-kimrw, to raise oneself from a stoop- ing posture ; fig., to be elated.
dva-AauBdavw, to take up; pass., of Christ’s being taken up to heaven.
avd-AnWus, ews, n, a being taken up, i.e., into heaven, Luke ix. 51.
dy-arlicxw, A@ow, to consume, destroy, abolish.
dya-Aoyla, as, 7, proportion, analogy, Rom. xii. 6.
ava-AoylCoua, to think upon, consider attentively.
dv- -a0S, OV, without saliness, insipid.
dvd-Avots, ews, H, & loosening, as of a ship from her moorings; hence de- parture, 2 Tim. iv. 6.
dva-riw, to depart from, as from life, Phil. i. 23; to return, Luke xii. 36,
a0 7 VOCABULARY.
pates ov, without blame, fault.
88.
- dva-peve, to await, 1 Thess. i. ro.
dva-wipyncko, to remind, admonish ; two aces., or ace. and inf. ; pass., to remember, to call to mind ; gen. or acc,
avd-pynois, ews, H, remembrance, a me- morial.
éva-vedw, @, to renew; mid., to renew oneself, to be renewed, Eph. iV.)23.
twa-vipw, to recover soberness, 2 Tim. li, 26.
Avavias, a, 6 (from Heb.), Ananias. Three of the name are mentioned, Acts v. 1-5, 1x. 10, xxiii. 2.
év-avrip-hros, ov, indisputable, not to be contradicted, Acts xix. 36. Adv., -ws, without hesitation, Acts x. 29.
dy-dtios, ov, unworthy, inadequate, 1 Cor. vi. 2. Adv., -ws, unworthily, unbecomingly, 1 Cor. xi. 27.
dvd-mavors, ews, 7H, rest, refreshment ; met., place of rest.
dva-rava, to give rest or refreshment ; mid., to take rest, to abide in rest.
dva-réi0w, ow, to persuade, in a bad sense, seduce, mislead, Acts xviii. 13.
dva-réurw, to remit, send back.
avd-mnpos, ov, maimed, having lost a member.
éva-rlatw, to fall down; N.T.., to recline, as at table atumeals.
ava-rAnpsw, @, to fill up; to fulfil, as a prophecy ; to perform, as a precept ; to occupy or fill a place; to supply a deficiency.
dy-amo-AdynT0s, ov, adj., imexcusable, Rom. i. 20, ii. 1.
ava-nriccw, to unroll, as a volume,
év-drtw, to kindle, set on fire.
év-aplOunros, ov, innumerable,
éva-ceiw, to move, instigate, stir up.
éva-cxevd iw, to pervert, unsettle, destroy.
dva-ondw, to draw up or back.
dyd-cTaois, ews, }, a rising up, as op- posed to falling, Luke ii. 34 ; rising, as from death or the grave, resur-
rection, the future state; met., the.
Author of the resurrection. éva-oraréw, &, to unsetile, put in com- motion.
[avapdornros—éavex-
os aN @, to crucify afresh, Heb.
vi. 6.
dva-crevd(w, to groan or sigh deeply, Mark viii. 12. ’
dva-orpépw, to turn up or over, John li. 15; torestore ; intrans., to return mid. (as Lat. versari), to be or to live in a place or state, to move among, to pass one’s time or be con- versant with persons; gen., to con- duct one’s self.
dva-cTpopn, js, 7, behaviour, manner of life.
dva-Tdo TOMA, Luke i. 1.
dva-TéAAw, to spring up or rise, as the sun or a star; spoken of the Messiah, Heb. vii. 14; trans., to cause to rise, Matt. v. 45.
dva-riOnut, mid., to place before, declare, make known.
avatorn, js, 7, the dawn, the east, where the sun rises; sing. and plur., see 240, a.
dva-rpémw, to subvert, overthrow.
dva-rpépw, to nurse, bring up, educate.
dva-paivw, mid., to appear, be mani- Jested ; pass., to be shown (ace. of thing), Acts XXl. 3.
dva-pépw, olow, to bear or lead, to offer, as sacrifice ; to bear, as sin.
dva-owvéw, &, to ery out aloud, Luke i. 42.
dvd-xvois, ews, 7, @ pouring out ; hence excess, I Pet. iv. 4.
dva-xwpéw, &, to depart, withdraw.
dva- Wiis, ews, , refreshment, lil. 20.
iri Wixw, to invigorate, to revive, 2 Tim.
16.
ot ov, 6, Andrew.
avBpamobiorhs, od, 6, @ man-stealer, 1 Tim. i. 10.
&vdpl(w, tow, mid., to act like a man, to be brave, 1 Cor, XVi.. 13.
*Avdpdvixos, ov, 6, Andronicus, Rom. Xvi. 7.
dv5pé-povos, ov, 6, a manslauer, mur- derer, 1 Tim. i. 9.
dv-éykAntos, ov, not open to accusation, unblameable,
dv-ex-dihryntos, ov, not to be spoken, in- expressible, 2 Cor, ix. 15.
to compose in order,
Acts
— dvex—évop95a|
dy-ex-AdAntos, unutterable, 1 Pet. i. 8.
ay-éx-Aevmros, ov, inexhaustible.
avextés, h, dv, tolerable, supportable ; only in comp., as Matt. x. 15.
dv-eXchuwv, ov, without compassion, cruel, Rom, i. 31.
dveuivw, to agitate or drive with wind ; pass., James i. 6.
&iveuos, ov, 6, the wind; met., plur., the cardinal points ; fig., applied to empty doctrines, Eph. iv. 14.
dy-évdextos, ov, adj., impossible, Luke xvii. 1. See Matt. xviii. 7.
dy-et-epetyntos, ov, adj., inscrutable, Rom. xi. 33.
dveti-kaxos, ov, patient of injury, 2 ‘Tim.
ii. 24.
_ dv-ek-:xvlactos, ov, that cannot be ex-
plored, incomprehensible, Eph. iii. 8. dy-err-aloxuvTos, ov, causing no shame, irreproachable, 2 Tim. ii. 15. tiv-ert-Anmros, ov, adj., never caught doing wrong, blameless. dy-épxouc, to come or go upwards. &veois, ews, 7, relaxation, remission, as from bonds, &c., from’contribution, from burden or trouble.
_ dy-eTd(w, to examine by torture, Acts
XXL. 24, 29.
&vev, adv. as prep., with gen., without.
dv-ev0etos, ov, inconvenient, unsuitable.
dy-eupioxw, to find by searching for.
av-éxw, mid., (1) to bear with, to have putience with; (2) to endure ; (3) to admit, to receive, as teachers or doc- trines. With gen.
dveyids, ov, 6, a nephew.
&vnfov, ov, 76, anise, dill, Matt. xxiii. 23.
avncet, impers., tt is fit or proper ; part., Td avijkov, T& avixovra, the becoming.
dy-fuepos, ov, adj., not gentle, fierce, 2 Tim. iii. 3.
avhp, av5pds, 6, (1) @ man, in sex and age (Lat., vir) ; hence (2) a husband ; (3) @ person of importance in any relation ; (4) @ person generally ; plur. voc., d&vdpes, Sirs! often in ap- position with adjectives and nouns.
av0-toTrnut, to oppose, withstand, resist.
dy8-ouvdroyeoua, ovua, to confess, give thanks, Luke ii. 38.
tvéos, ous, Td, a flower.
VOCABULARY.
11
dvOparia, Gs, n, @ mass or heap of live coals.
&vOpat, axos, 6, a live or burning coal. —
dvipwr-dpeckos, ov, desirous of pleasing men.
dvOpémvos, lyn, wov, human, belonging to man.
dvOpwro-xtévos, ov, 6, 7, & homicide, a murderer.
&vOpwros, ov, m., a man, one of the human race. Like dyhp, joined in ap- position with substantives, as Matt. xi, 19, XXVill. 13. See Synonyms.
ay0-urateiw, to be proconsul, Acts Xviii., 12.
av0-bratos, ov, 6, & proconsul.
ay-inus, to unloose, let go, cease from ; to leave, neglect.
dv-irews, wy, without mercy, James ii. 13. Others read avéAcos,
&-vimros, ov, adj., unwashed,
av-lornut, to ravse up one lying or dead ; intrans., to rise from a recumbent posture, fo rise into existence; aor. part., often combined with other verbs, as ‘‘rising (avacTds) he went.”
“Avva, ns, h, Anna, Luke ii. 36.
Avvas, a, 6, Annas (in Josephus, Ana- nus), Luke iii. 2.
avéntos, ov, foolish, thoughtless, Rom. i. 143 Gal. iii. 2, &e.
tvo.a, as, n, folly, madness, Luke vi. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 9.
dvolyw, gw, to open ; intrans. in 2 pert., avéwya, to be open.
éy-o.xodouéw, @, to build up again, Acts xv. 16.
tivoitis, ews, Nn, an opening, as the act of opening, Eph. vi. 19.
a-voula, as, n, transgression of law, iniwuity.
&-vouos, ov, (1) lawless, not. subject to the law, 1 Cor. ix. 21; met. of Gen- tiles ; (2) impious ; as subst., a male- factor. 6 &vouos, that wicked or lawless one, 2 Thess. ii. 8. Adv., -ws, without law, i.e., the declared law, Rom. ii. 12.
dy-op0dw, &, to make upright or straight again, to rebuild, make strong, con-
jirm.
12 VOCABULARY.
dydat0s, ov, unholy, 1 Tim. i. 9; 2 Tim. iii. 2. avoxn, iis, %, forbearance, patience, Rom. ii. 4, iii. 25. dyr-ayovi Cowan, to resist, strive against, ' Heb. xii. 4. éyt-dAdaypa, atos, T6, an equivulent, price. dyt-ava-mrAnpsw, &, to make good by sup- plying deficiency. avr-aro-didwu, to recompense, requite. avt-amd-doua, atos, 76, a& recompence, requital. -avt-amd-doc1s, ews, H, @ reward, recom- pence. éyt-ato-Kplvoua, to reply against, con- tradict. ayr-etrov (def. used as 2 aor. of dvriAéyo, see dnl), to contradict, to gainsay. avt-éxw, mid., to hold fast, to adhere to (gen. ) avrl, prep., gen., instead of, for. See 291 and 147, a. avtt-BdAdAw, to debate, to converse, Luke XXiv. 17. avTt-dia-7iOnut, mid. to set oneself against, oppose. dyti-dixos, ov, 6, 7 (orig. adj.), an oppo- nent at law, an adversary ayri-Beots, ews, 4, debate, opposition, 1 Tim. vi. 20, *ytt-Kab-lornut, to resist, Heb. xii. 4. dyti-karéw, to call or invite in turn, Luke xiv. 12. dyti-kejuat, to oppose, resist (dat.) ; 6 avriuelwevos, the adversary. aytixpd, adv., over against, Acts Xx. 15. dyrt-haupdve, mid., to take hold oy, help, share in (gen.) avtt-Aéyw, to speak against, contradict (dat.) ; to oppose, deny (with uh). dyti-Antis, ews, help ; hence, concrete, a helper, 1 Cor. xii. 28. éytt-Aoyla, as, , contradiction, conten- tion, reproach. dvti-oidopéw, to revile or reproach again, 1 Pet, ii. 23. Gyri-Avtpoy, ov, 76, & ransom-price, 1 Tim. ii, 16. ayTt-weTpéw, @, to measure in return. ayri-ucOla, as, 4, retribution, Rom. i. 27 ; reward or recompence, 2 Cor, vi. 13.
[dvdcros—dverrepos
*Avtidxeia, as, 7, Antioch. Two places — of the name are mentioned, Acts_ xi. 26, xiii, 14.
"Avtioxeds, éws, 6, a citizen of Antioch, Acts vi. 5.
avri-rap-épxouat, to pass by on the other side or without staying to notice, Luke x. 31, 32.
*Avrimas, a, 6, Antipas, Rev. ii. 13.
*Avrimarpis, isos, 4, Antipatris, Acts xxiii. 31.
dyti-mépay, adv., on the opposite side or ~ shore, Luke viii. 26.
ayri-mlarre, to fall against, resist, Acts Vii. 52.
ay Ti- oTpaTevouat, dep., to mathe war against, Rom. vii. 23.
ayti-Tdcow, mid., to set oneself against, resist (dat. )
ayri-rumos, ov, corresponding in form, €.g., as wax to the seal. Eng., antitype, Heb. ix. 243; 1 Pet. i eS
"Ayti-xploros, ov, m., opposer of Christ, Antichrist. Only i in Epp. of John.
avthéw, &, to draw from a vessel, John
ii. 8. dvrAnua, atos, 76, a bucket, John 8 fey Pa
avt-op0aruew, , to look in the face ; so to meet the wind, Acts xxvil. 15.
&y-vdpos, ov, without water, dry, parched, — Matt. xi. 43.
dy-vmd-«ptros, ov, adj., without hypocrisy, unfeigned, Rom. xii. 9.
dy-vmd-raxtos, ov, not subject to rule ; of persons, 1 Tim. i. 9; of things, Heb. ii. 8.
tvw, adv. (avd), up, above, upwards ; 7a dyw, heaven or heavenly things, John viii. 33; Col. iii. 1, 2.
dvéyeov, ov, rd, an upper chamber, Mark xiv. 15; Luke xxii. 12.
tvwhev, adv. (4vw), of place, from above ; of time, Jrom the first ; sometimes, again, John iii.. 4, 7; or, perhaps here also, from above.
dvwtepixds, 7, ov, upper, higher, Acts as ag
dvétepos, a, ov (compar. of kve), higher, to a higher place, Luke xiv. 10; above, before, Heb. x. 8.
dvadedts—amrepirpnros |
dv-wperns, és, unprofitable, serving no purpose.
déivn, ns, 7, an axe, Matt. iii. 9.
&tios, fa, wv, adj., worthy, deserving of
good or evil, suitable (gen.) Adv.,
-ws, worthily, suitably (gen.)
atidw, @, to deem worthy (acc. and gen., or inf.), to desire, think good.
a-dpatos, adj., invisible, unseen, Rom. i. 20; Col. i. 15, 16.
dm-ayyéAAw, to report, relate, make known, declare.
dx-dyxw, mid., to hang or strangle one- self, Matt. xxvii. 5.°
dm-dyw, to lad, carry, or take away ; pass., to be led away to execution, to lead or tend, as a way.
d-matSevtos, ov, adj., uninstructed, inept, 2 ‘Tim, ii. 23.
dr-alpw, pass., to be taken away (with amd).
a-cutéw, to ask back, require, reclaim
(with dé).
am-aryéew, to be unfeeling, Eph. iv. 19.
dm-akAdoow, mid., to remove oneself JSrom, to depart ; pass., to be set free (with dz).
dir-adroTpidw, to estrange, alienate (gen.)
amadds, q, dv, tender, as a shoot of a tree.
dr-avtaw, @, to meet, to encounter (dat.)
am-dvTnots, «ws, n, & meeting, an en- countering; «is dmdvrnow (gen. or dat.), to meet any one.
drat, atly., of time, once, Phil. iv. 16; once for all,
d-rapda-Bdros, adj., not passing from one to another, not transient, unchange- able, Heb. vii. 24.
d-napa-oKevacTos, ov, adj., unprepared, unready, 2 Cor. ix. 4.
amr-apvéopat, ovpat, to deny, disown.
am-dort, adv., of time, henceforth, here- after, even now.
ar-apticpds, ov, 4, xiv. 28.
ar-apxh, 7s, 7, the first fruits, conse- crated to God, the jirst.
&-ras, aca, av, all, all together, the whole.
drataw, @, how, to deceive, lead into error.
completion, Luke
VOCABULARY. 13
amdrn, ns, 7, that which deludes or deceives, fraud.
a-mdtwp, opos, 6, (marhp), without Jather, 1.¢., in the genealogies, Heb, Vii. 3.
ar-avyarua, atos, 76, reflected splendour, effulgence, Heb. i. 3.
&m-cidov, 2 aor. of a&popdw, which see.
a-meibera, as, n, wilful unbelief, obstinacy, disobedience.
a-mebéw, &, to refuse belief, be disobedient.
&-reOhs, és, unbelieving, disobedient.
ameiréw @, how, to threaten, forbid by threatening, rebuke.
aredn, fis, h, threatening, harshness, severity.
&m-eyr (€iut, subst. verb), to be absent, 1 Cor. v. 3, &e.
dreijut (eiul, to go), to go away, to depart, Acts xvii. 10,
dr-eirov, mid., to renounce, disown, 2 Cor. iv. 2.
a-melparros, ov, adj., incapable of being tempted, James 1. 13.
&-meipos, ov, adj., snexrperienced, un- skilful, Heb. v. 13 (geu.)
am-ex-5éxouct, to wait for, expect ear- nestly or patiently.
dr-ex-Stoua, to strip, divest, renounce.
améxduois, ews, 7, a putting or stripping off; renouncing, Col. li. 11.
&m-edavvw, to driveaway, Acts xviii. 16.
am-ereyuds, ov, 6 (eA&yxw), refutation, disgrace, disrepute, scorn, Acts xix.27.
am-edevdepos, ov, 6, H, made entirely free, 1 Cor, vii. 22.
*AmeAAtjs, od, 6, Apelles, Rom. xvi. 10.
&m-eAxifw, ow, to despair, Luke vi. 35; pndtv amedriCovres, rendered, E.V., ‘*hoping for nothing again ;” more probably, ‘‘not despairing,” i.e., without anxiety about the result.
ar-évaytt, adv., gen., over against, in the presence of, in opposition to.
&-répavros, ov (mépas), interminable, 1 Tim. i. 4.
&-mepiomactés, adv. (weptomdw), without distraction, 1 Cor. vil. 37.
a&mrepituntos, ov, uncircumcised, Acts vii. 51; ‘‘hearts” so covered as not to obey, and ‘* ears” so covered as not to hear.
a a oe, ig > ae ‘
an-épxoua, to go or come from one place to another, to go away, depart ; to go apart; to go back, to return; to go forth as a rumour, Matt. iv. 24.
dr-éxe, to have the whole of, as reward; impers., &réxe1, it is enough; mid., to abstain from.
amiotéw, 2, t» disbelieve, to be unfaith- Ful, 2 Tim. il. 13.
amistla, as, 7, unbelief, distrust, a state of unbelief, 1 Tim. i. 4; renunciation of faith, apostasy, Heb. iii. 12, 19.
&-mioros, ov, not believing, incredulous ; hence an unbeliever or infidel, faith- less, perfidious ; also pass., incredible.
G-wAdos, ovs, 7, odv, simple, sound ; of the eye, clear-sighted. Adv., -as, sincerely, bountiful, y.
anddrns, THTOS, H, simplicity, sincerity,
purity. amd, prep. gen., from. See 292; and
for the force of the prep. in com- position, 147, a.
a&ro-Baivw (for Balyw, see 94, I., 6, d; - fut., -Bhcoua), to go or come out of, as. from a ship; to result, befall.
G1ro-BadkAw, to throw away, renounce.
amo-BAérw, to look away, i.e., from all
besides; hence to regard with atten- tion, Heb. xi. 26; with eis.
éaré-BAnt os, ov, verbal adj., to be thrown away, refused, 1 'Tim. iv. 4.
Gro-BoAnh, 7s, 7, a casting away, re-
jection, loss. dro-ylvomat, to die, 1 Pet. ii. 24.
| dmo-ypaph, js, 4, a record, register, enrolinent, Luke ii. 2; Acts v. 37.
dro-ypdw, to enrol, inscribe ina register.
amro-Seixvuut, to show by proof, demon- strate ; to set forth, designate.
dard-Sertis, ews, n, demonstration, proof, 1 Cor. ti. 4.
amro-dexatdw, @, (1) to pay the tenth or tite ; (2) to levy tithes on, ace.
amd-dextos, ov, verbal adj., acceptable.
amro-5éxouc, to receive with pleasure, to welcome.
Grro-dnuew, @, ‘‘to be absent from one’s own people,” go abroad, Matt. xxi. 33; Luke xx. 9.
dxd-5nuos, ov, **gone abroad,” a so- journer, Mark xv. 34.
ee ae i
14 : VOCABULARY,
[Ser-épxopar— ard cprpa
Garo-3l8wu1, to give from one’s self, as _
due, or as reward or testimony; to ~
yield, as fruit, Rev. xx. 2; to give back, restore, retaliate ; mid., to sell, .
dao-d:-opifw, to separate off, i.e, into parties, Jude 19.
dro-doxidw, to reject, as disapproved or wortbless.
dro-50xh, tis, n, acceptance, approbation.
Grd-ders, ews, H, a putting away, 1 Pet. ii. 215.2 Pet. i, 14.
airo- Chien, NS, 7], @ repository, granary, storehouse.
dmo-Onoavpl(w, to treasure up, Tay by in store, 1 Tim. vi. 19.
é1r0-0Al Bw, to press closely, Luke a 45.
Gro-Oviokw (ard intensive), fo die, spoken of the loss of human, animal, or vegetable life ; inchoative, to be dying, 2.¢., in danger of death, 1 Cor. xv. 31; met., to be utterly alienated from, as Rom. vi. 2.
&ro-Kab-lornu, &woxatacrhow (also -Kab- otdw and -dyw, see Mark ix. 12; Acts i. 6), to restore, e.g., to health, or as a state or kingdom.
dro-kaddmTw, to uncover, bring to light, reveal ; pass., of Christ’s appearance from heaven.
Garo-KdAuiis, ews, 7, revelation, mani- Sestation, enlightenment (Apocalypse).
amo-Kapa-Soxla, as, n (Kdpa, head), earnest expectation, as if looking for with the head bent forwards, Rom. viii. 19 ; Phil. i. 20,
ro-kat-adAdoow, to reconcile, change From one state of feeling to another, Eph. ii. 16; Col]. i. 20, 22.
Gmro-KaTd-otacis, ews, n, restitution, resto- ration, introduction of a new and better era, Acts iii. 21.
dard-Keyuc., to be laid away, to be reserved, to await any one, dat.
aro-Keparl(w (kepadrh), to behead.
amo-KAclw, to shut slose, as a door, Luke xiii. 25.
daro-xéatw, to smite or cut off; mid., Gal. v. 12, even cut off, not circum: cised only.
amd-xpiua, atos, 76, a judicial sentence, 2 Cor. i. 9.
dro-Kplvopat—amo-orpéo |
dro-kolvouat (for aor., see LOO), to answer, to take occasion to speak, to continue the discourse.
dimrd-Kptais, ews, N, an answer, reply.
daro-kptarw, to hide, conceal, not to dis- close.
amd-xpupos, ov, concealed, laid up in store.
amo-crelvo, eva, to put to death, kill ; tig., to abolish, Eph. ii. 16.
éro-Kuew, & to bring forth ; fig., James i, 15, 18.
dmo-nvaAlviw, tow, to roll away, Matt. Xxviil. 2; Mark xvi. 3; Luke xxiv. 2.
aro- eye Bedard, to receive, as from any one ; to receive back, as requital ; to receive in full, | obtain ; mid., to take aside with one’ s self, Mark vii. 33.
amd-Aavots, ews, 7 (Aato, to enjoy), en- Jjoyment, 1 Tim. vi. 17;
| @aro-Aelrw, to leave, to leave behind, to desert ; pass., to be reserved.
aro- -relxe, to lick, as a dog, Luke Xvi. 21.
ar-dAAvuu (see 116, 2), to destroy, to bring to nought things or persons, to put to death ; to lose, Luke xv. 8; mid, pass (and 2nd perf.), to perish, die ; to be lost.
*AmoAAvwy, ovtos, 6 (prop. part of amorrtw), Apollyon, the destroying one, Rev. ix. 11,
’AroAAwvia, as, }, Apollonia, a city of Macedonia, Acts xvii. 1.
“AmoAAgs, ®, 6, Apollos.
&ro- “Aoyeduat, otua (Adyos), to defend one’s self by specch, to plead.
éaro-Aoyla, as, 4, a verbal defence, ce apology.”
arro-Aovw, mid., to wash away, as sins, Acts xxii. 16; 1 Cor. vi. 11.
Gro-AUTpwols, ews, H, redemption, deli- verance, through paying a ransom, as Eph. i. 7; or generally, without ransom, Luke xxi. 8; Heb. xi. 35.
é10-Avw, to release, let go, to send away ; spec., to divorce, to dismiss from life ; mid. and pass., to depart.
Gmro-udoow, tw, to wipe off, as dust from
the feet.
Gmo-veuw, to assign to, to give, 1 Peter iii. 7.
@ ‘ . < ey "VOCABULARY. . 15
eb. xi. 25."
Gro-vinrw, mid., to wash (one’s self), Matt. xxvii. 24.
amro-mintw, to fall from, Acts ix. 24.
amro-rAavdw, @, to seduce; pass., to wander from.
dro-mAéw, evow, to sail away.
diro-rAvvw, to wash or rinse, as nets, Luke v. 2. |
dro-rviyw, to suffocate, choke.
d-mopéw, @ (mdpos, resource), only mid. in N.T., to be in doubt, to be per-
_ plexed.
dropla, as, n, perplexity, disquiet, Luke Xxl. 25.
drop-plrrw (pirtw, to cast), to throw or cast down or off, Acts xxvii. 43; éavrovs understood.
dm-oppavifw (dppavos), pass., ‘to be made orphans of ;” to be bereaved, separated from, 1 Thess. ii, 17.
dro-cxevdtouat, to divest one’s adlf of, Acts xxi. 15.
dro-cKlacug. aros, 76 (cKlatw), a shade ; met., @ slight trace, James i. 17.
dtro-o7dw, @, dow, to draw out, un-, sheathe; to. withdraw, to draw away
dmo-otasta, as, 7, defection, departure, .apostasy, Acts xxi. 21; 2 Thess. i. 3.
dmo-cTac.ov, ov, Td, desertion, repudia- tion, divorce ; met., bill of divorce.
dao-crteydQw (aréyn), to unroof, Mark. ii. 4; probably to remove the awning of the courtyard.
dmo-aTéAAw, to send away, to send, as. a messenger, commission, &c. , spoken of prophets, teachers, and other mes-. sengers ; to thrust forth, as a sickle into corn, Mark iv. 29.
dao-oTepéw, &, how, to defraud, abs. ; deprive of by fraud, acc. and gen.
daro-aT0An, 7s, f., apostleship, Acts i. 25.
amé-aToAos, ov, 6, (1) @ messenger ; (2) an apostle, i.e., a messenger of Christ to the world ; used of others beside Paul and the Twelve, Acts Xlv. 4, 143 1 Thess. ii. 6; 2 Cor. vill. 23. Christ himself is so ‘called, Heb. iii. 1. E
dao-aTouat iC (ordpa), to provoke to speak, Luke xi. 53.
dmro-oT peda, to turn away ; trans. (with and), restore, replace ; mid., to desert, reject, acc.
hh
“16
dro-aruyéw, @, to detest, to abhor, Rom. xii. 9.
aro-cvvdywyos, ov, excluded from the synagogue, i.e., from the rights and privileges of the Jewish people, John ix. 22, xii. 42, Xvi. 2.
dro-tdccw, tw, mid., ‘‘to set one’s self apart from;” to take leave of, re- nounce, send away, dat.
diro-TeAéw, @, é€ow, to perfect, James i. 15.
dao-rl@nu, mid., to lay off or aside, to renounce, Acts vii. 58; Rom. xiii. 12.
ano-tivacow, to shake off, Luke ix. 5; Acts xxviii. 5.
dro-tlyw (or -tlw), ticw, to repay, Philemon 19.
Gro-ToAudw, &, to dare boldly, Rom.x. 20.
drro-Toula, as, 7 (Téuvw, to cut), severity, Rom. xi, 22.
amo-téuws, adv., severely, sharply.
amo-tpémw, mid., to turn away from, shun, acc., 2 Tim, iii. 5. |
az-ovota, as (&meiut), absence, Phil. ii. 12.
amo-pépw, to bear away from one place to another, Mark xv. 1.
amro-peiyw, tu escape.
amo-pbeyyoua, to speak out, declare.
&mo-popti(ouat (pdpros, a burden), to unlade, Acts xxi. 3.
amd-xpnois, ews, (rd intens.), use, consumption, Col. ii. 22.
dro-xwpéw, &, to go away, depart.
aro-xwpifw, to separate, rend away
rom.
dro-Wixw, ‘to breathe out,” to faint, as from fear, Luke xxi. 26.
“Ammios, ov, 6, Appius. “Ammou pédpow, the Appian Way, a road from Rome to Brundusium, constructed by Appius Claudius Czesar.
&-mpés-tros, adj. (mpos, clus), not to be approached.
&-mpés-koros, ov (kértw, to stumble), (1) not giving offence or causing to sin; (2) not caused to sin, without offence.
é-mpotwro-AhmtTws, adv., not taken by appearance, impartially, 1 Pet.i. 17.
t-wraoros, ov (rralw, to fall), without stumbling or falling, Jude 24.
arr, yw, to kindle, as light or fire ;
mid., to touch. See Synonyms.
VOCABULARY.
[dmro-o-rvyéo— A plorrapxos
*Amgia, as, n, Apphia, Philemon 2; perhaps Philemon’s wife.
drwitw, &, ardéow, mid., to repulse, to reject,
amore, as, ) (arddAAvpt), consumption, waste, of things; destruction, of persons; death by violence; per- dition.
apd, as, 7, curse, imprecation, Rom. iii, 14.
&pa, conj., illative, therefore, thence, since. See 406. dpa, adv. inter- rogative, where the answer is nega- tive.
*ApaBia, as, 7, Arabia, Gal. i. 17, iv. 25.
“Apau, 6 (Heb.), Aram, Matt. i. 3; Luke iii. 33.
“Apa, aBos, 6, Arabian, Acts ii. 11.
apyéw, &, to linger, to delay.
apyés, ov (a, épyov), ‘‘doing nothing,” idle, inactive, unprofitable.
apyvpeos, ods, &, ody, made of silver.
apytpiov, ov, 74, silver, a piece of silver, a shekel, money in general,
&pyupo-Kémos, ov, 6, one who works in silver, a silversmith,
&pyupos, ov, 6, silver; met., anything made of silver.
“Apewos méyos, ov, 6, Areopagus, or Mars’ hill,an open space on a hill in Athens, where the supreme court was held. Comp. ‘‘Campus Martius ;” ‘“‘Champ de Mars.”
*Apeorayirns, ov, 6, a judge of the Areo- pagite court.
Gpéokea, as, H, a pleasing, a desire of pleasing, Col. i. 10,
dpéoxw, apéow, to be pleasing to, to seek to please or gratify, to accommodate one’s self to, dat.
apeorés, h, dv, acceptable, pleasing to.
*Apéras, a, 6, Aretas, a king of Arabia Petrza, 2 Cor. xi. 32.
Gperh, fis, 4, virtue, divine efficiency, excellency, perfection, courage, man- liness.
tpny, apvds, a lamb, Luke x. 3.
apOuew, @, to reckon by number.
Gp0uds, od, 6, a number, whether defi- nite or indefinite.
"Apmabala, as, 7, Arimathea.
*Aplotapxos, ov, 6, Aristarchus,
d&pro-rdw—apxt-cuviywyos |
apordw, &, how (&piorov), (1) to take an early meal ; (2) to dine, Luke xi. 37; John xxi. 12, 15.
apiorepds, d, dv, the left, i.e, hand, fem. sing. (xelp); neut. plur. (uép7).
*AptatdBovaos, ov, 6, Aristobiilus.
&pirroy, ov, 74, a morning or early meal, a slight refreshment. Cf. Setmvov.
dperds, h, dv, sufficient.
dpxéw, &, to be sufficient for ; mid. or pass., to be satisfied with.
%pxros (in some edd. &pxos), ov, 4, 7, a bear, Rev. xiii. 2.
%pua, aros, 7d, a chariot, as of war; any vehicle.
*Apuayeddév (Heb., the Mountain of Megiddo, see Judges v. 19; 2 Kings xxili. 29), Armageddon, Rev. xvi. 16.
Gpudtw, ow, ‘to fit together ;” mid., to espouse, to betroth, 2 Cor. xi. 2.
c&puds, od, 6, a joint, i.e., of limbs in a body, Heb. iv. 12.
&prvéouat, oduat, to contradict, disclaim, disown, deny, renounce.
apviov, ov, 76 (dimin. of aphy), a litle lamb, John xxi. 15.
dporpidw, @, dow, to plough, abs.
&porpov, ov, 74, a plough, Luke ix. 62.
iprayh, tis, % (apmdtw), (1) the act of plundering ; (2) the thing plundered, spoil.
aprayuds, od, 6, ‘a plundering,” spoil, an object of eager desire, Phil. ii. 6.
iprd(w, dow (2 aor. pass., nemdyny), to snatch, seize violently, take by force ; to carry off suddenly.
&prat, ayos, adj., rapacious, ravening, extortionate.
&ppaBov, avos, 6 (from Heb.), a pledge, an earnest, ratifying a contract.
&ppados, ov, not seamed or sewn.
appnv, ev (or &ponv, ev), of the male Sex,
uppnros, ov, adj., unspoken, unspeakable, 2 Cor. xil. 4.
&ppworos, ov, adj. (Sadvvupt), infirm, sick.
Gpoevo-Koltns, ov, m. (&ponv kolrn), a sodomite.
*"Aprepas, a, 6, Artemas, Titus iii. 12.
“Apres, wos or tos, 7, Artemis (by the Latins called Diana), the heathen deity of hunting ; also, the goddess
VOCABULARY. 17
of the Moon. She was worshipped
- at Ephesus as ‘‘the personification of the fructifying and all-nourishing powers of nature.”
&préuwy, ovos, m. (aprdw, to suspend), prob. the foresail), Acts xxvii. 40.
pri, adv. of time, now, already, lately, well nigh ; with other particles, as éws &ptt, till now ; am &pr:, from now or henceforward. |
apri-yévyntos, ov, new- or recently born, 1 Pet. ii. 2.
&ptios, ov, adj., perfect, complete, want- ing in nothing, 2 Tim. iii, 17.
uptos, ov, 6, bread, loaf or cake -of bread, food, necessaries of life; fig., spiritual nutriment.
apriw (pw, to fit), to season, to flavour, as with salt; fig., Col. iv. 6.
*Appatdd, 6 (Heb.), Arphaxad.
dpx-dyyedos, ov, 6, an arch- or chief- angel, 1 Thess. iv. 16; Jude 9.
&pxaios, a, ov, old, ancient.
’"ApxeAaos, ov, 6, Archelaus, Matt. ii. 22.
apxn, ns, £., beginning, as of time or space; the outermost point, Acts
x. 11. So often absolutely, “‘ the beginning.” Applied to the com- mencement of anything. Used of
Christ, Col. i, 18; Rev. iii, 14, XXi. 6, xxii. 13. Met., pre-eminence, Jude 6. &pxat, pl., rulers ; ae’ apxiis, Srom the beginning, .°., from eternity, Jrom the first, as to.any particular thing ; év dpx7, in the beginning, i.e., of all things, or of the Gospel dis- pensation ; é apxijs, frem the begin- ning or from the first ; nar’ apxds, at the beginning, rhv apxny, originally, apx-nyds, od, 5 (apxn, wyw), the beginner, i.e., author or leader, captain. apx-teparixds, h, dv, belonging to the office of the high priest, pontifical. &px-tepevs, ws, 6, (1) the high priest, so of Christ; (2) a chief priest, 1.¢., the head priest in his class. See 1 Chron. xxiv. 4-18. apxi-moruhy, évos, 6, the chief shepherd, a title of Christ, 1 Pet. v. 4. “Apximmos, ov, 6, Archippus. a&pxi-cuverywyos, ov, 6, presiding officer of a synagogue,
18 VOCABULARY.
apxi-téxtwy, avos, 6, a head builder, an
architect, 1 Cor. iii. ro. apxi-reAdyns, ov, 6, a chief farmer or collector of taxes, a chief publican. &pxt-tplixAwos, ov, 6, a president of a Seast. upxw, to reign, to rule (gen.) ; mid., to begin, often with infin.; also to --venture, attempt, as Mark x. 28. apiauevos ard, beginning with. &pxwv, ovros, 6, prop. particip., ruler, chief person, prince, magistrate. &pwua, aros, 76, spicery, an aromatic. *Aod (Heb.), Asa, Matt. i. 7.
@-odAevtos, ov, unshaken, immovable.
&-aBeoros, ov, adj. (oBévvuut), not to be quenched, inextinguishable.
acéBeaa, as, 7, wumptety, wngodliness, wickedness. See Synonyms.
aocBéw, &, how, to act or live impiously, wickedly.
&-ceBhs, és (céBouc), impious, ungodly, wicked.
a-céAyela, as, 7, excess, insolence, licen-
-. tiousness, debauchery.
&-onuos, net remarkable, obscure, ignoble,
_ Acts xxi. 39.
*Achp, 6, Asher, Luke ii. 36; Rev. vii. 6
aabeveia, as, h, weakness, bodily infir-
mity, sickness ; fig., mental depression, _ distress.
dcbevéw, &, to be weak, sick, faint ; fig., to be fainthearted, 2 Cor. xi. 21.
dobévnua, atos, 76, infirmity; fig., mental or moral weakness.
&-cbevhs, és (c0€vos, strength), ‘* without strength,” weak, infirm, sickly ; fig., JSainthearted, afflicted.
Agia, as, 7, Asia, i.e., that district in the W. of Asia Minor afterwards called Proconsular Asia, with Ephe- sus its capital, Acts xix. 10, 22; Rev. i. 4, 11, &e.
Actavis, ov, 6, belonging to Asia, Acts XX. 4.
’Aoidpxns, ov, 6, an Asiarch; one of ten appointed to preside over the worship and celebrations in honour of the gods, Acts xix. 31.
dovria, as, % (otros, corn), abstinence, a Jast, Acts xxvii. 21.
- [dpxe-réerav—-d-civeros
&-o.Tos, ov, fasting, Acts xxvii. 33.
doKkéw, &, haw, to exercise one’s self, exert diligence in, Acts xxiv. 16.
aoxds, od, 6, a bottle of skin, Matt. ix. 17; Mark ii. 22; Luke v. 37.
dopuéevws, adv. (from part. of #doua), with joy, gladly, Acts xxi. 17.
&-coos, ov, not wise, Eph. v. 15.
aomafoun, dep., to embrace, salute ; to greet with a welcome when pre- sent, with affection where not pre- sent ; to take leave of, to receive with pleasure, as the promises of the Gospel.
domacuds, ov, 6, salutation, greeting.
&-omidos, ov, ov (omidos), without spot, unblemished.
dons, Sos, }, an asp, a venomous ser- pent, Rom. iii. 13.
&-arov5os, ov (omovdh), ‘‘not to be bound by truce,” implacable.
Goodpioy, tov, 76, a small coin equal to
the sixteenth part of a denarius, anas. See 154, a.
docov, adv. (compar. of &yx:), nearer, very nigh, close by, Acts xxvii. 13.
“Agoos, ov, 7, Assos, Acts Xx. 13.
d-oratéw, &, how, to be unsettled, to have no fixed abode.
doreios, ov (toru, city), fair, beautiful.
dothp, épos, 6, a star. In Jude 13, a meteor, or perhaps comet.
&-orhpixtos, adj. (arnpifw), unsettled,
_ unstable, 2 Pet. ii. 14, iii. 16.
&-oTopyos, ov (cropyh), without natural affection, Rom. i. 31; 2 Tim. iii. 3.
&-oT0xéw, @ (atdxos), to miss in aim; swerve from, 1 Tim. i, 6, vi. 213 2 Tim. ii. 18.
dortparh, is, n, lightning, vivid bright- ness, lustre,
dorpartw, to flash, as lightning, Luke Xvil. 24; to be lustrous, xxiv. 4.
&otpov, ov, 7d, a constellation, star.
*Aovykpitos, ov, 6, Asyncritus, Rom. XVi. 14.
&-cvppwvos, ov, dissonant, discordant, Acts xxviii. 25.
&-ovveros, ov, without understanding, Soolish, impious.
&-cbvberos, ov, covenant-breaking, treach- erous, Rom, i, 31.
do pérea—aixpnpds]
dopdrea, as, 7, security, Acts v. 23;
NS Thess. v. 3; certainty, Luke i. 4.
ad-cparns, és (opddrw, fallo), firm, Heb. vi. 19; confirmatory (with dat.), Phil. iii. 1; certain, truthful, Acts xxv. 26. 7d dapadrés, the certainty. Adv., -@s, safely, certainly.
dopant coo, gw, to make fast, to secure.
aoxnuovew, &, to act improperly or un- seemly, 1 Cor. xiii, 5; with émi (ace. )», vii. 36.
aoxnuootyn, ns, n, lewdness, Rom. i. 27; the shame of nakedness, Rev. xvi. 15.
&-oXTwy, ov (oxime), uncomely, inde- corous, 1 Cor. xii. 23.
&-cwtla, as, 7 (cd(w), an abandoned course, profliigacy.
&-cotws, adv., profligately, dissolutely, Luke xv. 13.
araxtéw, @, to behave disorderly, 2 Thess, iii, 7.
&-raxtos, ov (rdccw), irregular, disor-
- derly, 1 Thess. v.14. Adv., -ws, dis- orderly, irregularly, 2 Thess. iii. 6, Il.
&-rexvos, ov, 6, (rTékvov), childless, Luke xx. 28, 30
&revifw, aw, to look intently upon. &rep, adv., as prep. with gen., without, in the absence of, Luke xxii. 6, 35. atiudtw, ow, to dishonour, contemn, whether persons or things, by word or by deed.
ariula, as, 7, dishonour, ignominy, dis- grace, ignoble use.
&-Tiwos, ov (rym), contemned, despised.
&tiudw, @ (or -éw, Lachmann), to dis- honour, treat with indignity, Mark xii. 4.
atpis, tdus, %, a vapour, James iv. 14 ; of dense smoke, Acts il. 19, from Joel ii. 30.
&-ropoy, ov, 76 (Téuyw), an atom of time, 1 Cor, xv. 52.
&-romwos, ov (témos), misplaced, unbe- coming, mischievous.
"ATTdAea, as, h, Attalia, Acts xiv. 25.
avya(w, to shine upon, to enlighten (dat.), 2 Cor. iv. 4.
aiyh, js, 7, . splendour, daybreak, Acts oo ag TF
AbyovorTos, ov, 6 (Lat.), Augustus, Luke i, 1. Compare 2«Bacrds,
VOCABULARY.
19
avdddns, es iid. Sona), self-pleasing, arrogant, Titus i. 7; 2 Pet. ii. 10.
aidalperos, ov (adtds, aipéouas), of one’s own accord, * 2 Cor. viii. 3, 17.
avdevtéw, @, to exercise authority over (gen. ) 1 Tim, ii. 12.
adrA€ew, &, how, to play on a pipe or flute.
avah, fis, 7 (&w, to blow), (1) an open space, court, fold ; (2) a halt, court, as of justice.
avaAnths, od, 6, a player on a pipe or Jute, Matt. ix. 23; Rev. xviii. 22.
aiAlCouae (to lodge in the open air), to lodge, take up a temporary abode.
ards, od, 6 (tw), a flute, pipe, 1 Cor. xiv. 7.
avtdvw, also atéw, abéjow, trans., to make to grow; pass., to arrive at maturity ; intrans., to grow, increase,
avinows, ews, 7, growth, increase.
avpiov, adv. (aivipa, morning breeze, &w), to-morrow ; 7 (jmépa, sc.) abpior, the morrow.
abatnpds, d, dv, (dry) harsh, austere, Luke xix. 21, 22.
abtdpkea, as, 2, ‘sufficiency, 2 Cor. ix. 8; contentment, 1'Tim, vi. 6.
abt-dprns, €s (donee), content, satisfied (sufficient to self), Phil, iv. 11.
avto-xatd-Kpitos, ov, self-condemned, ‘Titus iii. 11.
abtéudros, ov, spontaneous, of its own accord, Mark iv. 28; Acts xii. fo.
avr-drrns, ov, 6, an eye-witness, Luke i.2.
abtds, , 4, pron., he, she, it. Properly demonstrative, self, very; joined with each of the persons, J myself, thou thyself; with the article, the same; with a dat., indicating like- ness, Acts xiv. 1; 1 Cor. xi. 5. émt 70 auté, Kata Td avtd, together, for the same purpose or at the same time or place. See 335.
abrov, 7s, od, pron. reflex. (contr. for . cévrod), of himself, herself, &c.
avtov, adv., of place, here, there.
aitd-pwpos, ov (pap, a thief) ) in the very act, John viii. 4; emt, with neut. dat.
abtd-xeip, adj., acting with ones own hands, Acts xxvil. 19.
abxunpés, d, dv, dark, dismal, 2 Pet, i i,19.
20 VOCABULARY.
&-aipéw, &, to take away, as sin, Rom. xi. 27, &c.; to cut off, as the ear, Matt. xxvi. 51.
&-pavhs, és (paivw), not appearing, hidden, Heb. iv. 13.
&-paviCw, to put out of sight, to disfigure ; pass., to vanish, perish.
&-pavicuds, ov, 6, a disappearing ; spec., the abrogation of a covenant, Heb. Vill, 13.
&-pavros, ov, disappearing, not seen, Luke xxiv. 31.
ap-edpay, avos, 6, *‘ draught,” latrine,
Matt. xv. 17; Mark vii. 19. G-pedta, as, ) (peldouct), severity, Col.
i. 24. ;
aperdrns, tyros, simplicity, sincerity, Acts ii. 46.
&p-eois, ews, £. (dplnut), deliverance, Luke iv. 18; remission, pardon of sins, Matt. xxvi. 28, &c.
adh, iis, 4) (Grre, to fit), that which con- nects a joint, a ligature.
&-pbapola, as, 7, tncorruption, immor- tality, 1 Cor. xv.; Rom, ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 10; perpetuity, Eph. vi. 24. |
&-plapros, ov (pbelpw), incorruptible, im- mortal, as God, Rom. i. 23; 1 Tim. i. 17; the bodies of the saints, 1 Cor. xv. 52; unperishing, 1 Cor. ix. 25, &c.
ap-inut (see 112), to send away, as (1) to let go, emit, dismiss, in senses varying according to the obj. ; spec., to disregard, pass by, send away, divorce ; hence (2) to forgive, very often ; (3) to permit, concede, abs., or with inf., or ace. (dat., Matt. v. 40), or iva, subj., or subj. alone; (4) to
leave, depart from, abandon, leave behind, as at death.
adixvéouat, ota: (2 aor., dixdunr), to reach; to go abroad, as a report, Rom. xvi. 19.
&-pir-dyados, ov, not loving goodness or good men, 2 Tim. iil. 3.
a-gir-dpyupos, ov, not loving money, not covetous, 1 Tim. iii. 3; Heb. xiii. 5.
upuitis, ews, 4, ‘arrival;” hence depar- ture, Acts Xx. 29.
ad-iornut, aroorhow, trans. in pres.,
imperf., 1 aor., fut., to lead away,
ddp-arpéa—dx pr
to seduce ; intrans. in perf., plup., 2 aor., to go away, depart, avoid, withdraw from (often with dé) ; mid., to fail, abstain from, absent one’s self.
tpvw, adv., suddenly, Acts xvi. 26.
a-pdBws, adv., without fear.
ap-oucidw, &, to make like, in pass., Heb. vii. 3.
ap-opdw, @, to look away from others at one (eis); to consider attentively, Heb. xii. 2.
&p-opi(w, tut. 1, to separate from (ek or amé); trans., fo separate for a purpose (eis or inf.) ; to excommu- nicate, Luke vi. 22.
ap-opuh, 7s, 7, an occasion, opportunity, Rom. vii. 8; 2 Cor. xi, 12.
appifw, to foam at the mouth, Mark ix. 18, 20,
appds, od, 6, foam, froth, Luke ix. 39.
&-ppoctvn, ns, 7, folly, boasting, levity.
&-ppwy, ovos, 6, 7 (pphv), unwise, incon- siderate, foolish, destitute of religion.
ap-urvéw, @ (amd intensive), to sleep soundly.
&-pavos, ov, mute, without expression ; of idols, 1 Cor. xii. 2; of animals, 2 Pet. ii. 16; of the lamb, Acts viii. 32.
“Axat, 6 (Heb.), Achaz, Matt. i. 9.
*Axala, as, 7, Achaia, the Roman pro- vince of Greece, including Corinth and its isthmus.
*Axaixds, o, 6, Achaicus, 1 Cor. XVi. 17, 25.
&-xdpioros, ov, unthankful, Luke vi. 35; 2 Tim. iii. 2.
"Axelu, 6 (Heb.), Achim, Matt. i. 14.
&-xeipo-moinros, ov, not made by hands.
&xAvs, vos, h, a thick mist, darkness, Acts xiii. 11.
&-xpeios, ov, slothful, doing no good, unprofitable, Matt. xxv. 30, Luke XVii. I0,
&-xperdw, &, to become useless or corrupt.
&-xpnoros, ov, useless, unprofitable, Philemon 11.
&xpt and &xpis, adv. as prep., with gen., to, unto, as far as, whether of place, time, or degree. &xpis ob or &xpis alone, with the force of a con- junction, until, See uéxpu
&xtpov—Bap-véBas |
&xupor, ov, 76, chaff, straw, Matt. ili. 12; Luke i iil, 17:
&-evdns, és, free from falsehood, truth- Sul, Titus i e 3,
&liwvOos, ov, 7, wormwood, Rev. viii. 11.
&-uxos, ov, without life, imanimate, 1 Cor. xiv. 7.
B.
B, B, Bia, beta, b, the second letter. Numerally, B’=2; B,=2000.
BdoA, 6, 4 (Heb.. Master), Baal, chief deity of the Phcenicians ; the Sun, Rom. xi. 4 (fem.), from 1 Kings xix. 18,
BaBvadv, avos, % (Heb., confusion, Gen. x. 7), Babylon, lit., Matt. i, 11, &c.; Acts vii. 433 and prob. 1 Pet. v. 13; mystically for Rome, as the ses of the Church, Rev. xiv.
Babuos, od, 6 (Balyw, to step), a step or degree in dignity, 1 Tim. iii, 13.
BdOos, ous, 76, depth or height, lit. or fig.; met., of great extremity, as 2 Cor. viii. 2.
Babive, we, to dig deep, Luke vi. 48.
Babis, eta, v, deep, John iv. 11; of twilight, Luke xxiv. 1; ‘‘the early dawn.”
Baitov, ov, 76, brunch, spec. of the palm, John xii. 13.
Bodadu, 6 (Heb.), Balaam. A name emblematic of seducing teachers, 2 Pet. ii. 15; Rev. ii. 14.
Badd, 6 (Heb. : Balak, Rev. ii. 14.
BaAdyrtiov, ov, 76, a money bag or purse.
BdAAw, BarG, BEBAnKa, €Badroy, to throw, cast, put (with more or less force, as modified by the context). Pass. reflex., as Matt. xxi. 21, cast thyself; or (perf). with’ intrans. force, as Matt. viii. 6 (“has been cast”), lieth. The verb is intrans. “9. Acts xxvil. 14, rushed. In Mark xiv. 65, the true reading is prob. éAaBoy, Generally trans. with acc. and dat., or éml (acc., sometimes gen.), els, dé, éx, and other prepp. or advv. Of liquids, to pour, Matt. xxvi. 12.
Barrifw, ow (in form a frequentative of Bérrw, see 144, 5), (1) mid. or
YOCABULARY. 21
pass., reflex., to bathe one's self, Mark vii. 4; (2) of the Christian ordinance, to baptize. ‘The material is expressed by dat., «is or &; the purpose or result by «is. Pass. or mid., to be baptized, to receive baptism; (3) fig., of overwhelm- ing woe, Luke xii. 50; Matt. xx. 22, 23.
Bdrrioua, atos, To, the rite or ceremony of baptism ; fig., for overwhelming afflictions, Matt. xx. 22, 23.
Barricuds, ov, 6, the act of cleansing, as vessels, Mark vii. 4, 8; of Jewish lustrations, Heb. ix..10. For Heb. vi. 2, see 260, 5, 2 (5).
Barriaths, od, 6, one who baptizes ; the surname of John, Christ’s fore-
runner.
Bdrrw, Baw, to dip, dye or tinge, Mark xiv. 20; Rev. xix. 13.
Bap-, an Aramean prefix to many sur- names, meaning Son of.
Bap-aBBas, a, 6, Barabbas. Some ancient MSS. and other authorities give his name as Jesus.
Bapdx, 6, Barak, Heb. xi. 32.
Bap-axias, ov, 7, Barachias, Matt. XXlil. 35. Some think it a surname of Jehoiada, 2 Chron. xxiv. 20.
BdpBapos, ov, 6, properly adj., @ foreigner, 1 Cor. xiv. 11. So called by the Greeks in derision of their language, as if bar, bar! Acts XXVIL 2,4; 5, Rom. i. 14.
Bapéw, & (cf. Bapos), i in N.T. only pass. Bapéouat, oduct, to be weighed down, to be oppressed, as by sleep, Luke ix. 32 ; excess or anxious care, Luke Xxi. 34; calamity or affliction, 2 Cor. i. 8, v. 43 expense, 1 Tim. v. 16.
Bupéws, adv., heavily or with difficulty, Matt. xiii. 15; Acts xxviii. 27, from Isa. Vi. 10.
Bap-Gorouaios, ov, 6, Bartholomew, sur- name (prob.) of ‘Nathanael.
Bap-inaois, od, 6, Bar-jesus, Acts xiii. 6,
Bap-iwvas, a, 4, ’ Bar-jonas, surname of Peter, Matt. Xvi. 17.
Bap-vdBas, a, 6, Barnabas, exhortation ” TapaKAnats.
* Son of or *‘comfort.” See
22 VOCABULARY.
Bdpos, ous, 74, weight, burden, as of toil, Matt. xx. 12; of ceremonial require- “ment, Acts xv. 28; of authority, 1 Thess. ii. 6; of abundance or ful- ness, 2 Cor. iv. 17.
Bap-caBas, a, 6, Barsabas. Two are mentioned, Acts i. 23, xv. 22.
Bap-riuaos, ov, 6, Bartimeus.
Bapbs, cia, v (cf. Bdpos), (1) heavy, Matt. XXiil. 4; (2) important, Matt. xxiii.23; (3) grievous or oppressive, 1 John v. 3 ; (4) fierce, severe, Acts Xx. 29.
Bapv-tiwos, ov, of great price, Matt. XXVl. 7.
Bacavi(w (cf. Bdoavos), to examine, as by torture; hence to afflict with pain, vex, harass; pass., to be tossed, as by waves in a storm.
Bacavicusds, od, 6, torture, sharp pain.
Bacavoths, ov, 6, one who tortures, a jailer, Matt. xviii. 34.
Bdoavos, ov, 7 (lit., a touchstone), tor- ture, the torment or sharp pain of disease, Matt. iv. 24; of punish- ment, Luke xvi. 23, 28.
Baotrcla, as, 7, a kingdom, province of a kingdom, Matt. iv. 8; royal power or dignity, reign. 7 Baoreia rod Geot, Tov xpioTov, THY odpavdy (the last form only in Matt.), the divine, spiritual kingdom, or reign of Mes- siah, in the world, in the individual,
‘or in the future state. viol tijs Baotrclas, sons of the kingdom, Jews, its original possessors, Matt. viii. 12 ; true believers, Matt. xiii. 38. In Rev. i. 6, v. 10, for BaoiAcis kal, the best editors read BastAclay, a king- dom consisting of priests.
Bactreuos, ov, royal, regal, 1 Pet. ii. 9, from Exod. xix. 6. Td Bactdrea, as subst., a regal mansion, arian Luke vii. 25.
BaoiAcds, éws, 6, a leader, ruler, hina, sometimes subordinate to higher authority, as the Herods. Applied
. to God, always with distinguishing epithets, Matt. v. 35; 1 Tim. i. 17, vi. 15; Rev. xv. 3, xvii. 14; to the Messiah, John i. 50, &c. ; to Chris- tians, Rev. i. 6, v. 10 (rec., but see
on BaclAcia).
[Bépos—PdAvypa
Baciretw, edow (.€F), to have authority, to reign, or to possess or exercise dominion ; to be BactAeds generally, With éri (gen.), of the kingdom ; émt (acc.), of the persons governed.
‘ Baoirikds, h, dv, adj., belonging to a
king, royal; as a courtier, John iv. 46, 49; a territory, Acts xil. 20; apparel, Acts xii. 21. Fig., James ii. 8, of law, all-commanding.
Bacirucoa, ns, 7, a queen, Matt. xii. 42 ; Acts viii. 27.
Bdous, ews, 7} (Balyw), that which supports the steps ; hence the foot, Acts ill. 7.
Backaivw, ava, to bewiich, bring under malign intluence, ‘* fascinate,” mis- lead, Gal. iii. 1.
BaordCo, dow, to lift, lift up; often with the sense of bearing away. Thus, (1) to carry, asa burden, Luke xiv. 27; John xix. 17; sandals, Matt. ii 11; (2) to take on one’s self, as disease or weaknesses, Rom. xv. 1; condemnation, Gal. v. 10; reproach, Gal. vi. 17; (3) to bear, as tidings, Acts ix. 15; (4) to bear with or endure, Rev. ii. 2; (5) to take away, Matt. viii. 17; John xii. 6.
Bdros, ov, 6, 7, a thorn-bush or bramble,
uke xx. 37; Acts vil. 30, 35. ‘‘The Bush,” Mark xii. 26; Luke xx. 37, denotes the section of the O.T..so called (Ex. iii.)
Bdros, ov, 6 (Heb.), a bath, or Jewish measure for liquids containing 73 gallons, Luke xvi. 6,
Bdtpaxos, ov, 6, a frog, Rev. xvi. 13.
Barro- -Aoyéw, 6 (prob, from Bar-, an unmeaning sound ; cf. BdpBapos), to bubble, talk to no purpose, Matt. vi. 7.
BidAvypa, atos, td (cf. BdeAvoow), something unclean and abominable, Luke xvi, 15; spec. (as often in O.T.) idolatry, as accompanied fe. im- purity, Rev. xvii. 4, 5, XXl. 27. ‘Abomination of desolation, ” Matt. xxiv. 15, from Dan. ix. 27, refers to the pollution of the temple by some idolatrous symbol (by Antiochus Epiphanes, afterwards by the Ro- mans); whether image, altar, or military standard, is uncertain,
BSchuKrds—Brd.oros |
Bdeructés, fh, dv, disgusting, abominable, Titus 1, 16,
Bierisow, kw, to defile, only mid. ; to loathe, Rom. ii. 22; and pass. perf. part., defiled, Rev. xxi. 8.
BéBaos, a, ov, steadfast, constant, firm.
BeBadw, &, to confirm, to establish, whe- ther of persons or things.
BeBalwors, ews, 7, confirmation, Phil. i. 7; Heb. vi. 16.
BéBndos, ov (Ba- in Baivw, ‘‘that on which any one may step”), common, unsanctified, profane, of things or persons.
BeBnAdw, @, to make common, to pro- Jane, as the Sabbath, Matt. xi. 5; or the temple, Acts xxiv. 6.
BeeA-CeBovaA, 6(Heb.), Beelzebul, ‘‘Lord of dung,”. a contemptuous play upon Beelzebub, ‘* Lord of flies,” the Ekronite deity (2 Kings i. 2), ap- plied to Satan, as the ruler of the demons.
BeAiad, 6 (Heb., perverseness, malice), or BeAiap, **Lord of forests” or ‘“‘thickets,”’ a name for Satan, 2 Cor.
vi, 15.
Bédos, sh 75 (BdAAw), @ missile, such as a javelin or dart, Eph. vi. 16.
BeAtiwv, ov, ovos (a compar. of ayaos), better. Adverbially, 2 Tim. 1. 18.
Bey-rautv, 6 (Heb., Ben=son), Ben- jamin.
Bepvixn, ns, 7, Bernice.
Bépo.a, as, Berea.
Bepo.atos, a, ov, Berman.
By6-, a Hebrew prefix to many local
- names, meaning House or Abode of.
Bn0-aBapd, as, 7, Bethabara, ‘‘ house of the ford,” John i. 28. Some read Bethany.
Byd-avia, as, 4, Bethany, ‘‘house of dates.” There were two places of the name: (1) John xi., &.; (2) on the Jordan (?), John i. 28 See BnOaBapd.
Bnd-ecda, as, 7, Bethesda, ‘‘ house of compassion,” John v. 2.
Bné-Aceu, , Bethlehem, bread.”
Byn6-caidd, 7, Bethsaida, ‘**house of
‘Shouse of
hunting” or ‘‘ fishing.” There were |
VOCABULARY. 23
two places of the name: one in Galilee, John xii. 21; the other on the east of the Jordan, Luke ix. ro,
By9-payh, 7, Bethphage, “house of figs.”
Bijua, atos, 7d (Ba- in Balvw), a step; a space, with woddés, for the foot, Acts vil. 5; a raised space or bench, asa tribunal, Matt. xxvii. 19; or throne, Acts xil. 21.
Bipuaros, ov, 6, 7, a beryl, a gem of greenish hue, Rev. xxi. 20.
Bia, as, 7, force, violence.
Bid{w, to use violence; mid., to enter Jorcibly, with eis, Luke xvi. 16; pass., to suffer violence, to be as- saulted, Matt. xi. 12.
Biawos, a, ov, violent, vehement, Acts 44,2:
Biacths, ob, 6, one who employs force, Matt. xi. 12; of those who were eagerly entering Messiah’s kingdom.
BiBAaptéiov, ov, a little book, Rev. x.
BiBAloy, ov, 76 (dim. of following), (1) a roll, book, volume, as Luke iv. 17; Rev. v. 1; (z) a scroll, @ billet, as
‘Matt. xix. 7.
BiBdos, ov, 6, a written book, roll, or volume. The word means the inner bark or rind, of which ancient books were made.
BiBpéoxw (Bpo-), perf. BéBpwxa, to eat, John vi. 13.
Bibuvia, as, 7, Bithynia.
Bios, ov, 6, (1) life, Luke viii. 14; (2) means of life, Luke viii. 43; (3) goods or property, Luke xv. 12; 1 John iii. 17. See Synonyms.
Bidw, @, to pass one’s life, 1 Pet. iv. 2.
Biwots, ews, 7, manner or habit of life, Acts xxvi, 4.
Biwtixds, h, dv, of or belonging to ‘life, Luke xxi. 34; 1 Cor. vi. 3, 4.
BaaBepés, adj., hurtful, 1 Tim, vi. 9
BAdwrw (BAaB-), BAdbw, to hurt or injure, Mark xvi. 18; Luke iv. 35.
BaAactdyw (or BAactdw, Mark iv. 27), BAacrhow, (1) intrans., to sprout, to spring up, aS a plant or corn; (2) trans., to put forth, as buds, Matt. xiii. 26; Heb. ix. 4.
BAdortos, ov, 6, Blastus, Acts xii, 20,
24 VOCABULARY.
_ BrAacpnuéw, &, to speak calumniously, as Acts xill. 45; fo calumniate, speak evil of with acc. or eis; often of men or things. Spec. of God, Acts xix. 37; the Holy Spirit, Luke xii. 10; the Divine name or doc-
' trine, 1 Tim. vi. 1.
Bracpnula, as, 7, evil-speaking, reviling, blasphemy.
BAdoonpos, ov, slanderous, reproachful. Subst., a reviler, i.e., one who speaks evil of God or man.
BaAgupa, rip 74, seeing, the Ding seen, 2 Pet. ii.
Brére, Yo, hs see, to have the power of seeing, to look at attentively ; with eis,to regard partially, Matt. xxii. 16; with ta or ph, to take care (once without, Mark xiii. 9); with dé, to beware of; once with kard (acc.), geographically, to look towards, Acts XXV1L. 12,
Banrtéos, €a, ov, a verbal adj. (BdAAw), that ought to be put.
Boavepyés (Heb.), Boanerges, ‘Sons of thunder,” Mark iii. 17.
Bodw, @ (Boh), to shout for jay, Gal. iv. 27; to cry for grief, Acts viii. 7; to publish openly, to cry aloud; with mpés (acc), to appeal to, Luke XVili. 7 38.
Bon, 7s, n, a loud cry, James v. 4.
Gea, as, 7, help, succour, Acts xxvii. 17; Heb. iv. 16.
Bonbéw, &, to go to the help of, to suc- cour (dat.
Bonds, ov, 6, 7 (properly adj.), a helper, Heb. xiii. 6.
BéOuvos, ov, 6, a cavity, ditch or well.
Bodh, ‘is, n, @ throwing ; Al@ov Bodh, a stone’s throw, Luke xxii. 41.
Borl(w, aw, to heave the lead, to fathom, Acts XXVil. 28, twice.
‘Boris, tSos, 7, a weapon thrown, as a dart or javelin, Heb. xii. 20,
Bod¢, 6 (Heb.), Booz or Boaz.
AépBopos, ov, 4, dirt, mire, Sith, 2 Pet. li. 22.
Boppas, a, 6 (Boreas, the north wind), the North, Luke xiii. 29; Rev. XXi. 13.
BécKxw, how, to tend, to tend in feeding,
[PAacpnpéw—Bpax (wv
to take diligent care of, Matt. viii. 33 ; John xxi. 15, 17; mid., to feed, graze, Mark v. 11.
: , (Heb., Beor), Bosor, 2 Pet.
Bisley, ns, 7 (BboKw), herbage, pasturage,
Heb. vi. 7.
Bérpos, vos, 6, a cluster of grapes, Rev. xiv. 18,
Bovaeuths, od, 6, a counsellor, a senator, Mark xv. 43; Luke xxiii. 50.
Bovrctiw, ow, to advise, N.T. mid. only; (1) to consult, to deliberate, with é¢i, Luke xiv. 31; (2) to resolve on or purpose, with inf., Acts v. 33; iva, John xii, 10; acc., 2 Cor. i. 17.
Bovah, jis, 1, a ‘design, decree, purpose, plan, Luke vii. 30; Acts xxvii. 42.
BovaAnua, atos, 7é (BovAoua), the thing willed or purposed, Acts xxvii. 43 ; Rom. ix. 19.
BovAoua, 2nd pers. sing. BovtAe for Botan, aug. in tenses with é or %, to will, as (1) to be willing, to incline to, Mark xv. 15; (2) fo intend, Matt. i. 193 (3) to aim at, 1 Tim. vi. 9. Generally with inf., sometimes un- derstood, as James i. 18; with subj., John xviii. 39. See Synonyms.
Bouvds, od, 6, a hill, rising ground, Luke iii. §; xxiii. 30.
Bots, Bods (of-), 6, 7, an animal of the ox kind, male or female.
BpaBeiov, ov, 74, the prize, in a conflict, 1 Cor. ix. 24; the future reward, Phil. iii. 14.
BpaBedw (lit., to act as arbiter in the games), to prevail or govern, Col. — li. 1
Bpadives, vi (Bpadis), to delay, to be slow, 1 Tim, iii, 15; 2 Pet. iii, 9 (gen).
Bpadu-rAodw, @, to sail slowly, Acts
XXvii. 7
Bpadis, cia, v, slow, with eis, James . 198 : fig., of dull comprehension ; of sphere.
ge THtos, 7, tardiness, 2 Pet.
Pits ovos, 6, thearm; met. , strength, Luke i. 51; John xii. 38; Acts xiii, 17.
Bpaxis—ydpos]
Bpaxts, eta, ¥, short, little; of time, Luke xxii. 58; Acts v. 34; place, Acts xxvii. 28 ; quantity, John vi. 7; Heb. xiii. 22. ’Bpax’ wt, Heb. ii. 7, 9, for a short time, or in a small degree.
Bpépos, ovs, 7d, a child unborn, Luke 1. 41, 443; @ babe, Luke ii. 12, 16; one in early youth, 2 Tim. iii. 15.
Bpéxw, gw, to moisten, Luke vii. 38; to rain, to send rain, Matt. v. 45; impers., James v. 17; trans., Luke Xvll. 20,
Bpovth, jis, h, thunder, John xii. 29, &e.
Bpoxn, jis, 4 (Bpéxw), rain, Matt. vii. 25, 27.
Bpéxos, ov, 6, & noose or snare, 1 Cor. Vii. 35.
Bpuyyss, ov, 6, a grinding or gnashing.
Bpixw, tw, to grind or gnash, as the teeth, for rage or pain, Acts vil. 54.
Bod, ow, to send forth, as a fountain, James iii, 11,
Bpdua, aros, neut. (see BiBpdcxw), food, solid food of any kind, Matt. xiv. 15; 1 Cor. iii. 2.
Bpéomos, ov, eatable, Luke xxiv. 41.
Bp@ois, ews, 7, (1) the act of eating, 2 Cor. ix. 10; (2) corrosion, Matt. = 19, 20; (3) food, Heb. xii. 16;
fie. John vi. 27, &e.
BvbiGw, ow, to drown; mid., to sink, Luke v. 7; fig., 1 Tim. vi. 9. Buv0ds, ov, 6, the deep, the sea, 2 Cor.
xi 25;
Bupoeds, éws (€F), a skin-dresser,a tanner, Acts ix. 43, X. 6, 32.
Bioowos, n, ov, made of byssus, Rev. Xvili, 16, xix. 8 twice, 14.
Buiccos, ov, 7, byssus, a species of flax, and of linen manufactured from it, highly prized for its softness, white- ness, and delicacy.
Bapos, od, 6, an altar, Acts xvii. 23.
T.
YT, y, yéupa, gamma, g hard, the third letter of the Greek alphabet. In numeral value, 7 =33 7,= 3000.
TaBRaba, 7 (Heb., Chald. form), Gab- batha ; an elevated place or tribunal, John xix. 13. See Asdéorpwrov,
VOCABULARY. 25
TaBpiha, 6 (Heb., man of God), the archangel Gabriel, Luke i. 19, 26. yayypuva, ns, 7, a gangrene, mortifica-
tion, 2 Tim. ii. 17.
Td5, 6 (Heb.), Gad, Rev. vii. 5.
Tadapnvés, h, ov, belonging to Gadara. See Tepyeonvés.
yafa, ns, 7 (Persian), treasure, as of a government, Acts viii. 27.
Td{a, ns, » (Heb.) Gaza, a strong city of the ancient Philistines in the W. of Palestine, Acts viii. 26. (The adj. épnuos, desert, refers to édds. )
yaCo-pvAdioy, ov, 76, a place for the guardianship of treasure, treasury ; a part of the temple so called, Mark xil. 41, 43; Luke xxi. 1; John Vili, 20.
Taios, ov, 6 (Lat.), Gaius, or Caius. There are four of the name in N.T., Acts xix. 29, xx. 4; 1 Cor. i. 14; 3 John, 1
ydAa, axtos, 76, milk, 1 Cor. ix. 7. Fig., for the elements of Christian knowledge, 1 Cor. iii. 2; of the Word of God, 1 Pet. ii. 2.
Taddryns, ov, 6, a Galatian, Gal. iii. 1.
Tadartia, as, 7, Galatia, or Gallogrecia, a province of Asia Minor.
Tadarixds, 4, dv, belonging to Galatia, Acts xvi. 6.
yarhyn, ns, 7, serenity, calm, Matt. Vill. 26; Mark i iv. 39; Luke viii. 24.
TadtAata, as, » (from Heb.), Galilee, the N. division of Palestine.
TadiAaios, ala, atov, of or belonging to Galilee.
TadAlwy, wvos, 6, Callio, a proconsul of Achaia, Acts Xviii.
TaparrmaA, 6 (Heb.), Gamaliel, Acts Ve 345° Skit 4;
yoew, &, how, st aor. eydunoa and éynua, abs. or trans. (with acc.), to
_ marry ; active properly of the man ; pass. and mid., of the woman, with dat., as Mark x. 12, rec. ; but in N.T. the act. also is used of the woman.
yaul(w, or yautonw, to give in marriage (a daugirter).
ya08, ov, 4, marriage, spec. @ mar- riage feast, sing. or plur. See 240.
+ z
26 VOCABULARY.
yap (ye &pa), ‘truly then,” a causal particle or conjunction, for, intro- ducing a reason for the thing pre- viously said. Used in questions to intensify the inquiry; often with other particles. For the special uses of ydp, see 407.
yarrhp, Tpds (syne. ), 7, (1) the womb, Matt. i. 18; (2) the stomach, Tit.
be «BS. fro Epimenides, ‘‘ idle bellies,” gluttons.
ye, a particle indicating emphasis, at least, indeed. Sometimes used alone, as Rom, viii. 32; 1 Cor. iv. 8; some- times in connection with other par- ticles, as GAAd, ipa, el. ei 5& whys, stronger than «i 8¢ uh, if otherwise indeed ; xalye, and at least, and even ; nalcovye, though indeed ; pevovrye, yea, indeed ; wntvye, ‘‘to say nothing of,” 1 Cor. vi. 3.
Teddy, 6 (Heb. ), Gideon, Heb. xi. 32.
Te-évva, ns, 7 (Heb., Valley of Hinnom), met., place of " punishment in the future world, Matt. x. 28, &c. Sometimes with rod mupds, as Matt. v. 22. Compare 2 Kings xxiii. 10.
Te0-onuav7, or -vet, 7 (Heb., oil-press), Gethsemane, a small field at the foot of the Mount of Olives, over the brook Cedron.
yeltwy, ovos, 6, h, a neighbour, as Luke xiv. 12, xv. 6; John ix. 8.
yerdw, &, dow, to laugh, to be merry, rejoice, Luke vi. 21, 25.
yéAws, wtos, 6, laughter, mirth, James
iv. 9. ;
yeulQw, ow, to fill, with acc. and gen. (also éaé or éx) ; pass. abs., to be full, Mark iv. 37; Luke xiv. 23,
yéuw, only in pres. and impf., fo be Sull of, with gen. (x, Matt. xxiii. 25; ace., Rev. XVii. 3).
rvyeved, as, 7, generation, as (1) offspring, race, descent ; (2) the people of any given time; (3) an age of the world’s duration.
yevea-Aoyéw, &, to reckon a genealogy or pedigree, pass. with éx, Heb. Vii. 6.
yevea-Aoyla, as, fem., a feneclogy, 1 plur., 1 Tim, i. 4; Tit. iii. 9; prob.
[yép—yfj
of Gnostic speculations on the origin of being.
yeveota, av, Td, the Sestivities of a birth- day, a birthday, Matt. xiv. 6.
yeveEots, ews, 7, extraction, genealogy, Matt.i.1. Jamesi. 23: oe apdcwrov THS yeveoéws abTov, the countenance of his birth, or, as EV,, “his natural face.” James iii. 6: roy tpoxdv tijs yevécews, the orb of the creation, the whole of nature.
yeveth, fis, 7, birth, John ix. 1.
yevnua, atos, Td. See yévynua.
yevvdw, @, how, to beget, give birth to, produce, effect ; pass., to be begotten, born (often in John, of spiritual renewal),
yévynua., aros, Té (inmany MSS. yévnua), (1) progeny ; (2) produce generally. Fig. , fruit, result, as 2 Cor. ix. 10.
Tevynoapér (Heb., in Chald. form), Gennesareth (Chinnereth, or Chinne- roth, in O.T.), a region of Galilee, with Village or town of the same name. Used of the adjacent lake, as Luke v. 1.
yévynots, ews, 7. See yéveats.
yevyntés, h, dv, verb. adj., born, brought orth, Matt. xi. 11; Luke vii. 28.
yévos, ous, 76, (1) offspring; (2) lineage ; (3) nation ; (4) kind or species.
Fepyeonvés, h, dv, or Teparnvds, Gerge- sene, belonging to Gergesa or Gerasa. The copies vary between these forms and Tadapnvds, Matt. viii. 28; Mark v. 1; Luke viii. 26, 37.
yepovola, as, 7 (‘yépwv), an assembly of elders, senate.
vyépwv, ovros, 6, an old man, John iii. 4.
yetw, to make to taste, only mid. in N.T..; to taste, as abs., to take food, Acts x. 10; or with obj. +» gen., or acc. See 249, a(2). Fig., to expe- rience, as Matt. xvi. 28; once with drt, 1 Pet. ii. 3.
“yewpryew, &, to cultivate or till the earth.
yedpyuv, ov, Td, @ tilled field. Fig., 1 Cor. iii. 9.
yewpyéds, ov, 6, one who tills the ground, a husbandman. So a vine-dresser.
vi, Vis, 4, contr. for yéa or yaia, land or earth, as (1) the material soil,
Yiipas—yoyyuopds |
1 Cor. xv. 47; (2) the producing soil ; (3) the ground ; (4) land, as opposed to sea; (5) earth, as opposed to heaven, the habitable world; (6) region or territory.
yijpas, (aos), ws, dat. -¢ or -e, 7d, old age, Luke i. 36.
ynpdokw, or ynpdw, dow, to become old, John xxi. 18; to be infirm, Heb. viii. 13.
ylvoun, for ylyvoua. See 94, 8, a. yevnooua, eyevounvy and éyevhOny, yéyova (with pres. force) and yeyévn- pou, to become, as (1) to begin to be, used of persons, to be born, John viii. 58; of the works of creation, to be made, John i. 3, 10; and of other works, to be wrought or per- Jormed. So, to pass out of one state into another, to grow into, to be changed into, John ii. 9; often
with e’s, Luke xiii. 19. (2) Of ordi-
nary or extraordinary occurrences, . to happen, to take place, to be done ; of the day, the night, Mark vi. 2; of thunder, earthquake, calm, &c. ; of feasts or public solemnities, to be held or celebrated’; frequently in the phrase kal éyévero, and it came to pass (with kai, or following verb, or inf.) ; also ph yévorro, let it never happen! or God forbid! (3) With adj. or predicative subst., to become, where quality, character, or con- dition is specified; often in prohi- _ bitions, uw) ylvov, wh ylverGe, become not, as Matt. vi. 16. (4) With the cases of substantives and the prepo- sitions, the verb forms many phrases, to be interpreted according to the meaning of the case or prep. See Syntax. For the distinction be- tween ylvoua: and other copulative verbs, see Synonyms. viveokw, or yryvécKw (see 9A, 8, b), yvd- gouat, 2nd aor. &yvwy (imper. yv@b), perf. &yvwxa, (1) to become aware of, to perceive, with ace. ; (2) to know, to perceive, understand, with acc. or 671, or acc. and inf., or ri interrog. ; ' with adv. of language, Acts. xxi. 37; to be conscious of, by experience, as
VOCABULARY. . 27
2 Cor. v. 21; (3) fo know carnally (Heb.), Matt. i..25; Luke i. 34; (4) specially of the fellowship be- tween Christians and the Divine Being, 1 Cor. viii. 3; Matt. vii. 23 (negatively); John xvii. 3; Heb. viii. 11’; Phil. iii. 10, &. See Synonyms. ;
yAevKos, ous, 176, sweet wine, Acts ii, 13.
yAukds, eta, v, sweet, James iii. 11, 123 of water, opposed to ‘‘ bitter” and “‘salt,” Rev. x. 9.
yAGoou, ns, H, (1) the tongue; (2) a language ; (3) a nation or people dis- tinguished by their language.
vyAwood-komov, av, neut., a little box or case for money, John xii, 6, xiii. 29 (orig. from holding the ‘“‘ tongue- pieces”’ of flutes, &c. )
yvapeds, éws, 6, a fuller, Mark ix. 3.
yviows, a, ov (sync. from ‘yerforos), legitimate, genuine, true, 1 Tim. i. 2; Phil. iv. 3; 1d yvhowov, sincerity, 2 Cor. viii. 8. Adv., -ws, sincerely, naturally, Phil. ii. 20.
yvdos, ov, 6, a dense cloud, darkness, Heb. xii. 18. ‘
yveun, ns, f (yvo- in ylowonw), opinion, judgment, intention, 1 Cor. i. 10, vii. 25; Acts xx. 3.
yvapi(w, fow or 1@, (1) to make known, to declare (with acc. and dat., or dre or Tt interrog.); (2) intrans., to know, Phil, i. 22,
yaoi, ews, 7, (1) subj., knowledge, - with gen. of obj. (gen. subj., Rom, xi. 33); (2) obj., science, doctrine, wisdom, as Luke xi. 52.
. yvéorns, ov, 6, one who knows, Acts
. XXvi. 3.
yrwotds, h, dv, verb. adj., known, Acts li. 14, iv. 10; knowable, Rom. i. 19. Emphaticin Actsiv. 16. of yvworol, one’s acquaintance, Luke ii. 44; 76 ywotryv, knowledge, Rom. i. 19.
yoyyi w, tow, to murmur, i.e., in a low voice (John vii. 32) or discontentedly; to grumble, 1 Cor. x. 10, with acc., or epi, gen., mpds, acc., KaTd, gen.
yoyyvauds, ov, 6, muttering, John vii. 123 murmuring, Acts vi, 1; Phil. ii, 14,
28 VOCABULARY.
yoyyvorhs, ov, 6, @ murmurer, com- plainer, Jude 16.
yéns, ntos, 6 (yodw, to moan), an en- chanter, an impostor, 2 Tim. iii. 13.
Todyoda (Heb., in Chald. form), Gol- gotha, ‘‘the place of a skull” (prob. fromits shape); Calvary. See xpavior.
Téuoppa, as, 7, and wy, td, Gomorrha.
yuos, ov, 6 (yéuw), (1) @ burden, ¢.g9., of a ship, Acts xxi. 3; (2) wares or merchandise, Rev. xviii. 11, 12.
yoveds, éws, 5 (-yev- in yiyvoum), a parent. Used only in the plural, parents.
yoru, aros, 76, the knee; often in plur. after T:@éva: or xdurrev, to put or bend the knees, to kneel, in devotion.
yovu-reréw, @ (alrtw), to fall down on one’s knees, to kneel.
ypdupa, aros, 7d (ypddw), (1) a letier of the alphabet, @ Xxill. 38; in what large letters, perhaps noting em- phasis, Gal: vi. 11; (2) @ writing, such as a bill or an epistle, Rom. ii.2z9 ; 7d lepa ypdupata, 2 Tim. iii. 15, the holy writings, or the Scriptures ; (3)
lur., literature, learning generally, ohn vii. 15.
ypaypareds, ews, 6, (1) @ clerk, secre- tary, a scribe, Acts xix. 35; (2) one of that class among the Jews who copied and interpreted the O.'T. Scriptures (see vouséds) ; (3) met., a man of learning generally, 1 Cor. i. 20; Matt. xiii. 52, &c.
yparrés, h, dv, verb. adj., written, in- scribed, Rom. ii. 15.
ypaph, jis, 7, (1) @ writing ; (2) spec., } yeaph or al ypapal, the Scriptures, writings of the O.T.; (3) a parti- cular passage.
ypdow, Yo, yéypapa, to grave, write, inscribe. éypapn, yéypamrra:, or ‘ye- ypaupevov éorl, a formula of quota- tion, Jt is written. Often with dat. of pers., as Mark x. 5.
rypadins, es (ypaus, Fid-), old womanish, foolish, 1 Tim. iv. 7.
ypnyopéw, @ (from éypfhryope, perf. of évelpw), to keep awake, watch, be vigi- lant ; met., to be alive, 1 Thess. v. 10.
yuuvdgw, to exercise, 1 Tim. iv. 7; pass., to be exercised or trained.
[yoyyvorts —Sixve
yunvocta, as, %, exercise, training (ascetic), 1 Tim. iv. 8.
yuuyntedw, or -itevw, to be naked or poorly clad, 1 Cor. iv. 11.
yuuvds, h, dv, (1) naked, ill-clad, having only an inner garment, John xxi. 7; (2) bare, i.e., open or manifest, Heb. iv. 13.3 (3) mere, 1 Cor. xv. 37.
yupyvétns, thTos, H, (1) nakedness; (2) scanty clothing.
yuvarxdptov, ov, 7é (dim. ), a silly woman, 2 Tim. iii. 6
yuvaikeios, a, ov, womanish, 1 Pet. iii. 7.
yovh, ‘yuvads, voc. yiva, 4, (1) @ woman ; (2) a wife. The voc. is the form of ordinary address, often used in reverence and honour. Compare John ii. 4 and xix. 26.
Téy, 6, a proper name, Gog. In Ezek. XXXvill. 5, king of Magog, i.e, of Scandinavia ; hence, in Kev. xx. 8, of a people far remote from Pales- tine, probably in the N. ‘
yovia, as, 7, a corner, Matt. vi. 5, xxi. 42 (LX X.); met., a secret place, Acts xxvi. 26,
A.
A, 5, 5éATa, delta, d, the fourth letter of the Greek alphabet. As a nume- ral, 3 =4; 5,=4000,
AaBid, also Aavid, Aaveid, 5 (Heb.), David, king of Israel. ‘O bids A., the Son of David, an appellation of the Messiah ; é&v A., in David, i.e., in the Psalms, Heb. iv. 7.
SamovlCouc: (see Saluwy), 1st aor. part., daovicbels, to be possessed by a demon.
Saiudnor, lov, ré (orig. adj.), a demon or evil spirit. Samdnoy txew, to have a demon or to be a demoniac.
Saimovmdns, es, resembling a demon, demonian, James iii. 15.
daluwy, ovos, 6, H, in classic Greek, any spirit superior to man; hence often of the inferior deities ; in N.T. always, an evil spirit, ademon. Saydnov is generally used. See Synonyms.
Sdxvw, to bite, molest, irritate, Gal. V. 15
Sdxpv—Betids |
ddkpu, vos, or Sdxpvoy, vou, Td, a tear.
daxpiw, ow, to weep, John Xi. 35.
SaxrvAios, ov, & (SdxTvAos), a ring for the finger, Luke xv. 22.
SdetvAos, ov, 6, a finger. év daxTiAw @cod, met., by the power of God, Luke xi. 20. Comp. Matt. xii. 28.
Aadpuavoved, 7, Dalmanutha, a town or village near Magdala, Mark viii. 10.
Aaduatia, as, }, Dalmatia, a part of Illyricum near Macedonia, 2 Tim. iv. 10,
daudlw, cw, to subdue, tame, Mark v. 4; James ill. 7, 8.
Sduaris, ews, , a heifer, Heb. ix. 13.
Adapts, 150s, 7, Damdris, Acts xvii. 34.
Aapacknyds, h, dv, belonging to Damascus, 2 Cor. xi. 32.
Aapackds, od, 4, Damascus, Acts ix. 2.
davei(w, to lend, Luke vi. 34, 35; mid., to borrow, Matt. V. 42.
ddveiov, ov, 7d, a debt, Matt. xviii. 27.
daveorhs, ov, 4, a lender, a creditor, Luke vii. 41.
Aaviha, 6 (Heb, ), Daniel, Matt. xxiv. 15.
damrarvdw, @, heron; to spend ; trans., to bear expense, Acts xxi. 24. (with ézi) ; 2 Cor. xii. 15 (with drép) ; to con- sume in luxury, to waste, Luke xv. 143 James iv. 3.
dardvn, ns, 7, expense, cost, Luke xiv. 28.
dé, an adversative and distinctive par- ticle, but, now, moreover, &c. See 40A, ii., and bev.
Sénois, ews, 4, supplication, prayer. See Synonyms.
dei, impers., at needs, one must, it ought, it is right or proper, Matt. xvi. 21; Acts iv.12; Mark xiii.14. See 101.
Seiya, atos (Selxvupt), an example, a specimen, Jude 7.
Sevyparitw, aw, to make an example or spectacle of (as disgrace), Col. ii. 15, and Matt. i. 19 (edd.
Seixvuue and Senmviw (see 114), (1) to present to sight, to show, to teach (acc. and dat.); (2) to prove (acc. and éx), to show by words (8r1), Matt. Xvi. 21; inf., Acts x. 28.
SeiAla, as, H, timidity, 2 Tim. i. 7.
Serrdw, @ to shrink for fear, to be afraid, John xiv. 27.
VOCABULARY. 29
Sesrds, 4, dv, timid, cowardly. See Synonyms.
deiva, 6, n, 76, Seivos, pron., a certain person, such a one, Matt. xxvi. 18.
Sewas, adv. (Sevds, vehement), greatly, vehemently, Matt. viii. 6; Luke Xi. 53.
derrvéw, , to take the Setrvov, to banquet, Luke xvii. 8, xxii. 20; met., of familiar intercourse, Rev. iii. 20.
detrvoy, ov, Td, the chief or evening meal, supper. Kupiaxdy detmvoy, the Lord's Supper, 1 Cor. xi. 20.
deroidaiporla, as, 7, religion, in a good or bad sense, Acts xxv. 19.
SeoSaiuwyv, ovos, adj., religiously or devoutly disposed, Acts xvii. 22, See 323, c. (From delSw, to fear.)
déka, ol, ai, rd, ten, Matt. xx. 24, &e. Once, for a brief period, Rev. ii. 10.
dexa-dvo, more frequently dédexa, twelve, Acts xix. 7.
dexa-révTe, JSifteen, for mevrexaldexa.
Aexd-rodis, ews, i, Decapolis, a district E. of Jordan comprising ten towns. It is uncertain what they all were, but they included Gadara, Hippo, Pella, and Seythopolis.
Sexa-réaoapes, a, wy, fourteen.
Sexdrn, ns, 71, & = part, the tithe, Heb. vii. 2, 4, 8,
BéKaros, n, ov, ordinal, tenth, 7d déxarov, Rev. xi. 13, the tenth part.
dexatdw, &, to receive tithe of, acc., Heb. vii. 6; pass., to pay tithe, Heb. vii. 9.
dexrds, H, dv (verbal adj. from 5éxopat), accepted, acceptable, Phil. iv. 18; Acts x. 35 (dat.); propitious, favour- able, Luke iv. 19; 2 Cor. vi. 2, from Isa. xlix. 8.
5eAed(w (SéAeap, a bait), to take or entice, as with a bait, Jamesi. 14; 2 Pet. li. 14, 18.
dévdpov, ov, 76, @ tree.
5efid-AaBos, ov, 6, ‘holding in the right hand ;” plur., spearmen, Acts XXili. 23.
Sekids, d, dv, the right, opp. to &piorepés, the left. n Sekid, the right hand ; ra ‘betid, the right- -hand side ; Bekias diSdva, to give the right hand, i.e., to
30
receive to friendship or fellowship. For é« and év with this word, see 293, a
déouat, sas aor., edehOnv (3rd pers. impf., ed€eTo, Luke viii. 38), to have need of (gen. ), as mid. of déw (see Se?) ; to make request of (gen.); to beseech, pray, abs., or with ¢, iva, or draws, of purpose.
déov, ovtos, 76 (particip. of Se7, as subst. ), the becoming or needful ; with éert = 6e% Plur., 1 Tim. v. 13.
AepBaios, ov, 6, belonging to Derbe, Acts xx. 4.
AépBn, ns, 7, Derbe, a city of Lycaonia, Acts xiv. 6, xvi. 1.
S€pua, aros, 76 (S€pw), an animal’s skin, Heb. xi. 37.
Sepudrivos, n, ov, made of skin, leathern, Matt. iii. 4; Marki. 6.
dépw, ist aor., @eipa, 2nd fut. pass., daphoouca, to scourge, to beat, so as to flay off the skin. dépa dépwr, see aip.
Secuciw, ow, to bind, as a prisoner, Acts xxii. 4; as a bundle, Matt. XXiil. 4.
decucw, &, to bind, Luke viii. 29.
déoun, ns, H, @ bundle, Matt. xiii. 30.
déomtos, iov, 6, one bound, a prisoner.
decuds, ov, 6 (Séw), a ligament impeding the tongue or some other member. decuot or (Ta) decud, plur., bonds or imprisonment.
Secuo-piaAat, axos, 6, a jailer, Acts XVl, 23.
decuwrhp.ov, lov, +6, a preson.
deouarns, ov, 6, a prisoner.
deomdrns, ov, 6, a foreign lord or prince, a master, 1 Tim. vi. 1; applied to God, Luke ii. 29; Acts iv. 24, 29; Jude 4; Rev. vi. 10; to Christ, 2 Pet. ii. 1. See Synonyms.
dedpo, adv., (1) of place, here, hither ; used as an imperative, come hither, Matt. xix. 21, &c.; (2) of time, Rom. i. 13.
Setre, adv., as if plur. of Sedpo (or contr. from dep’ tre), come, come hither, Matt. iv. 19, &c.
Bevrepaios, aia, aiov, on the second day, Acts xxvii. 13.
VOCABULARY.
[Séopar—Snpr-ovpyos
Ceunend- -mpwtos, adj., the second “first, Luke vi. 1 See 148.
detrepos, a, ov, ordinal, second in number, as Matt. xxii. 26; in order, Matt. xxii. 39. 7d dedrepoy or dev- tepov, adverbially, the second time, again, as 2 Cor. xiii. 2 So é« deurépov, Mark xiv. 72; év rq devrépy, Acts vii. 13.
Séxouat, ist aor., édefdunv, dep., to take,, receive, accept, as from another, Luke ii, 28, xvi. 6, 73 as letters, Acts Xxil. 5; to receive, t.e., kindly, as persons, Mark vi. 11; to bear vith, 2 Cor. xi. 16; to approve, welcome, as a. doctrine, the kingdom of heaven, &c., Mark x. 15; 2 Cor. xi. 4.
5éw, to want. See def and Séouar
déw, ist aor., édhoa; perf., dédexa; pass., dé5eua:; rst aor. pass. inf., deOjjva, to bind together, as bundles, Acts x. 11; to swathe, as dead bodies for burial, John xi. 44; to bind, as persons in bondage, Matt. xxii. 13 ; Mark vi. 17; to hinder from going forth freely, 2 Tim. ii 9; met., fo compel in any way, spec. to inter- dict, Matt. xviii. 18. dedeudvos 7G mvevpatt, Acts xx. 22, bound in spirit, under an irresistible impulse.
df, a particle indicating certainty or reality, and so augmenting the vivacity of a clause or sentence ; truly, indeed, by all means, therefore. Used with other particles, djmore, dyrov, which see.
d7jAos, n, ov, manifest, evident ; neut. sc., éott, it is plain, with dn, as 1 Cor. xv. 27.
dnAdw, &, to manifest, to reveal, to bring to light ; to imply or signify, 1 Cor. i. 11; Heb. ix. 8, xii. 27.
Anas, &, 4, Demas, Col. iv. 14; Philem. 24; 2 Tim. iv. ro.
dnu-nyopéw, @, to deliver a public oration or harangue ; with mpés, Acts xii. 21.
Anuhrpios, ov, 6, Demetrius. Two of the name are mentioned, Acts xix, 24; 3 John 12.
Snut-oupyéds, od, 6 (‘fa public worker”), one who makes or is the author of anything, Heb. xi, 10.
Sijpos—Braxdoror|
dios, ov, 6, @ peonle; a multitude publicly convened. See Synonyms.
Snudowos, a, ov, public, common, Acts v. 18. Dat. fem., as adv., dnuoacia, publicly, Acts xvi. 37.
Syvdpiov, tov, 7d, properly a Latin word (see 154, a), denarius.
d4-more, adv., at any time soever, John
ve 4.
dn-mov, adv., indeed, truly, verily, Heb. ii, 16,
did, prep. (cognate with dv0, two; dis
. twice), through ; (1) with gen., through, during, by means of ; (2) with acc., through, on account of, for the sake of. See 299. da- in composition has the force of through, thorough ; also of separation, division, between.
dia-Baivw, to pass through, trans., or intrans. with mpés (person), eis (place).
d1a-BdddAw, to accuse, Luke xvi. 1.
dia-BeBaidw, &, in mid., to affirm, assert strongly, 1 Tim. i. 7; Titus iii, 8.
dia-BA€rw, to see through, to see clearly (inf., of purpose), Matt. vii. 5; Luke vi. 42.
didBodos, ov, 5 (SiaBdAAw, orig. adj.), an accuser, a slanderer, an adversary, 1 Tim. iii. 11; 2 Tim. iii, 3. 6 dia- Bodos, the accuser, the devil. Hqui- valent to the Hebrew Satan.
di-ayyéAAw, to tell, publish abroad, divulge, Luke ix. 60; Acts xxi. 26; Rom. ix. 17.
did-ye, or 5a ye, yet, on account of, Luke xi. 8. .
dia-yivouat, to pass, elapse; in N.T. only, 2nd aor. part., gen. abs., having elapsed, Mark xvi. 1; Acts XXV. 13, XXVii. 9.
dia-yiwdonw, to examine and know thoroughly, i.e, judicially, Acts XXxiil. 15, xxiv. 22.
dia-yvwpi{w, to publish abroad, Luke ih, 29; ‘
did-yvwors, ews, 4, judicial hearing, accurate knowledge, Acts xxv. 21.
dia-yoyyi(w, to murmur greatly, as through a crowd, Luke xv. 2, xix. 7.
3ca-ypn'yopéw, &, to be fully or thoroughly awake, Luke ix. 32.
VOCABULARY. 3]
5i-d¢yw, to lead or pass, as time, life, 1 Tim. ii. 2 (Blov); Tit. ili, 3 (Binoy omitted).
5ia-déxouc, to succeed to, Acts vii. 45.
5id-3nua, aros, 7d (Séw), a diadem, tiara, orcrown, Rev. xii. 3, Xiil. 1, Xix. 12. See Synonyms.
Sia-5i5wus, (1) to distribute; (2) to give, bestow.
5id-5ox0s, ov, 6, 7, a successor.
dia-Cévvut, to gird, to gird up, John Kil, 4;-/5; RAL 7-
Sia-Onen, ns, 7 (SiarlOnu:), (1) a will or testament, a disposition, as of pro- perty, a dispensation ; (2) a compact or covenant, Gal. iil, 15; perhaps Heb. ix. 16, 17. The two covenants mentioned, Gal. iv. 24. The O.T. as containing the first, and the N.T. as containing the second, are called each d:adqen.
5:-alpeois, ews, fem., difference, diversity, as the result of distribution, 1 Cor. XU. -4,' §,:6.:...
5:-aipéw, @, to divide, distribute, Luke xv. 12; 1 Cor. xii. 11.
Sia-nabapl(w, f. a, to cleanse thoroughly, Matt. ini. 12; Luke iii. 17.
dia-kar-eAéyxouat, to confute entirely, Acts xvii. 28.
Siaxovéw, @, to serve or wait upon, espe= cially at table; to supply wants, 1 Pet. iv. 10; to administer or dis- tribute alms, &c. (dat. pers., ace. thing; occasionally:abs.) Of prophets and apostles who ministered the Divine will, 1 Pet. i. 12; 2 Cor. iii. 3.
diakovia, as, 7, management, as of a _ household, Luke x. 40; ministering relief, or the relief ministered, Acts xii. 25; 2 Cor. vili. 43; ménistry or service in the church of Christ, fre- quently.
didkovos, ov, 6, 4, a servant, specially at table, Matt. xxiii. 11; @ servant of God, as magistrates, Rom. xiii. 4; one who serves in the Church, deacon or deaconess, Phil. i. 1; 1 Tim. iii. 8, 12; Rom. xvi. 1. See Syn- onyms.
Siaxdorot, at, a, card. numb., two hun- dred.
ia
_— ie
“+
$3 : VOCABULARY.
‘Bi-axotw, to hear thoroughly, Acts Xxiii. 35.
51a-Kpivw, to discern, to distinguish, Acts
Xvi. 9; 1 Cor. xi. 29. Mid. (aor.,
pass.), (1) to doubt, to hesitate, Matt.
xxi. 21; James i. 6; (2) to separate
one’s self from, Jude 22; (3) to dis-
pute with, Acts xi. 2; Jude 9.
did-Kpiots, ews, 4, the act of distinction, discrimination, Rom. xiv. 1; 1 Cor. xii: 10; Heb. v. 14. ©
dia-kwrtw, to forbid, to hinder, Matt. iii, 14.
dia-Aadréw, &, to discuss, Luke vi. 11; to spread abroad by speaking of, Luke i. 65.
dia-A¢ye, in mid., to discourse, to reason, to dispute, Matt. ix, 34.; Acts xx. 7; Jude 9, &e.
dia-Aclarw, to cease, to intermit, Luke vii. 45.
Sid-Aextos, ov, 7, speech, dialect, lan- guage, Acts il. 6, xxi. 40, &e.
Si-adAdcow, to change, as the dispo- sition; pass., to be reconciled to, Matt. v. 24.
dia-Aoyifouct, to reason, to discourse,
_ to ponder, to reflect, to deliberate, to debate, Mark ii. 6-8, viii. 16, ix. 33, &e.
~ Bia-Aoyiopuds, od, 6, reflection, thought, Luke ii. 35; reasoning, opinion, Rom. i. 21, xiv. 1; dispute, debate, Phil. ii. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 8, &e.
S1a-Adw, to disperse, to break up, Acts v. 36.
Sia-pwaptipoua, dep. mid., éo testify ear- nestly, Acts ii. 40; to enforce, Acts Vili. 25, &e.
S.a-udxoua, dep. mid., to contend or dispute warmly, Acts xxiii. 9.
dia-pweveo, to remain, with adj. or adv. ; to persevere, with év.
S1a-mepl(w, (1) to divide or separate into parts, Matt. xxvii. 35, &c. ; to dis- tribute, Luke xxii. 17; (2) to be at discord with, Luke xi. 17; with ézi, ace, or dat., xii. 52.
Sia-wepiopds, ov, 6, dissension, Luke
.
Xi. 51. dia-véuw, to divulge, to spread abroad, Acts iv. 17.
ets
dia-vebw, to make signs, by noddin Gen Sukkot aici oe
dia-vénua, atos, 76, a thought, imagina- tion, device, Luke xi. 17.
did-voiw, as, H, the mind, i.e., the intel- lect, or thinking faculty, Mark xii. 30; the understanding, 1 John v. 20; the mind, i.e.,-the feelings, disposition, affections, Col. i.2 1; plur. the thoughts, as wilful, depraved, Eph. ii. 3.
bi-avoiyw, to open fully, i.e., the ears, Mark vii. 34, 35; the eyes, Luke xxiv. 31; the heart, making it wil- ling to receive, Acts xvi. 14; the Scriptures, explaining them, Acts XVii. 3.
5ia-vunrepedw, to pass the night through, Luke vi. 12.
d:-avdw, to perform to the end, complete, Acts xxi, 7.
dia-ravrds, adv., always, continually, Mark v. 5, &c.
dia-rapa-rpiBh, 7s, n, contention, fierce dispute to no purpose, 1 Tim. vi. §.
Sia-repdw, @, dow, to pass, to pass through, to pass over, Matt. ix. 1; Mark vi. 53, &c.
dia-wAéw, edow, to sail through or over, Acts xxvii. 5.
d:a-rrovew, @, mid., aor. pass., fo grieve one’s self, to be indignant, Acts iv. 2, xvi. 18.
dia-ropevoum, to go or pass through, Luke xiii. 22; Acts xvi. 4, &c.
dia-ropéw, &, to be in great doubt or per- plexity, Luke ix. 7; Acts x. 17, &e.
- bia-mrparyparevoua, to gain by business or
trading, Luke xix. 15.
Sia-mpiw, in pass., to be enraged, to be greatly moved with anger, Acts v. 33, Vil. 54.
di-aprd{w, to plunder, to spoil by rob- bery, &c., Matt. xii. 29; Mark iii. 27.
Siap-phyrvyue and diapphoow, tw, to tear, as garments, in griet or indignation, Acts xiv. 14; Matt. xxvi. 65; to break asunder, as a net, Luke v. 6; as bonds, Luke viii. 29. -
Bia-capéw, &, to make fully manifest, to teil all, Matt. xviii. 31 (xiii. 36, MSS.)
d:a-celw, to treat with violence, so as to
extort anything, Luke iii. 14.
Sia-cnopmltwo—BiSacxadla] »
dia-cropriCw, to strew or scatter, Matt. xxv. 24, &c. ; to disperse in conquest, Luke i. 51; to waste or squander, Luke xv. 13, xvi. 1.
dia-crdw, ist aor. pass., dieomdcOnv, to pull or pluck asunder or in pieces, Mark v. 4; Acts xxiii. 10.
dia-crefpw, 2nd aor. pass., dieomdpny, to scatter abroad, as seed; so of Chris- tians dispersed by persecution, Acts Vili. 1, 4, X1. 19.
dia-cropd, as, 4, dispersion, state of being dispersed. Used of the Jews as scattered among the Gentiles, John vii. 35; Jamesi. 1; 1 Pet. i. 1.
Sia-cTEAAW, in mid., to give in charge, to command expressly ; with negative words, to forbid, to prohibit, Matt. xvi. 20; Acts xv. 24. Pass. part., 7) diacreAAduevov, Heb. xii. 20, the command.
did-ornua, atos, Td, neut., an interval of time, Acts v. 7.
dia-cT0AH, jis, , distinction, difference, Rom. iii, 22, x. 12; 1 Cor. xiv. 7.
dia-oTpépw, to seduce, turn away, Luke xxl. 2; Acts xiii. 8; to pervert, to wrest, Acts xiii. 10. Perf. part., pass., Skeotpaupévos, perverse, vicious, Matt. xvii. 17. :
Siacd(w, ow, to save, to convey safe through, 1 Pet. ili, 20 ; pass., to reach a place in safety, Acts xxvii. 44; to heal, Matt. xiv. 36.
dia-rayh, jis, %, a disposing of, ordi- nance, appointment, Rom. xili, 2,
did-Tayua, aros, 74, a@ mandate, a de- cree, Heb. xi. 23.
dia-tapdsow, to trouble greatly, to agitate, Luke i. 29.
dia-rdoow, to dispose, to give orders to (dat.), arrange, constitute ; mid., to appoint, to ordain, as 1 Cor. vii. 17 (also with dat. pers., acc. thing) ; to promulgate, Gal. iii, 19.
dia-reAéw, &, to continue, to remain through a certain time, Acts xxvii, 33.
dia-Tnoew, to guard or keep with care, as in the heart, Luke ii. 51; with eavtdy, &e., to guard one’s self from, to abstain (é« or ard), Acts xv. 29.
Sia-ri or bia ti; wherefore?
VOCABULARY.
’
Sia-rlOnut, only mid. in N.T., to dis- pose, as (1) to commit to, Luke xxii. 29; (2) to make an arrangement with, as in a covenant, Heb. viil. 10; (3) to execute a will, perhaps, Heb. ix. 16, See d:ahKn.
dia-TpiBw, to spend, as time, Acts Xiv. 3, 28; abs., to sojourn, John Xl. 54.
Sia-rpoph, fis, 4, food, nourishment, 1 Tim, vi. 8.
di-avyd(w, to shine through, to dawn, 2 Pet. i. 19.
d1a-payhs, és, shining through, transpa- rent, Rev. xxi. 21. In some MSS., davyhs in same signif.
dia-pépw, (1) to carry through, Mark. xi. 16; (2) to bear abroad, Acts — xiii. 49, xxvii. 27; (3) to differ from
(gen.), 1 Cor. xv. 41; hence (4) to be better than, to surpass, Matt.
vi. 26, &c. ; (5) impers., Siapéeper, it
makes a difference to (dat.), matters to, Gal. ii. 6, &e.
dua-petyw, to escape by flight, Acts XXVIl. 42.
Sia-pyul(w, to report, publish abroad, divulge, Matt. ix, 31, XXVllL 15; Mark i. 45.
dia-pOelpw, to injure thoroughly, as rust does, Luke xii. 33; to destroy, Rev. xi. 18; ta decay, to perish, 2 Cor. iv. 16. Opp. to avaxawdw, to renew.
Sia-popd, Gs, %, decay, corruption, i.e, of the grave, Acts ll. 27, 31, xiii, 34-37 (LXX.)
3id-opas, ov, (1) diverse, of different kinds, Rom. xii. 6; Heb. ix. 10; (2) seiperior to, Heb, i. 4, vill. 6.
d:a-puadoow, to guard carefully, protect, defend, Luke iv. 10 (LXX.)
dia-xepi¢w, mid. N.T., to lay hands on, put to death, Acts v. 30, XXV1. 21.
Sia-xwpi(w, pass. N.T., ‘‘to be sepa- rated,’ to leave, to depart from (amd), Luke ix. 33. ;
Sidaxricds, , dv, apt at teaching, 1 Tim. iii, 2; 2 Tim, i. 24.
didaxtds, h, dv, taught, instructed (gen., by), John vi. 45; 1 Cor. ii. 13.
SidackaAla, as, 7, teaching, i.e., (1) the manner or art of teaching, Rom,
33 :
34 VOCABULARY.
xii. 7, &e. ; or (2) the doctrine taught, precept, instruction, Matt. xv. 9, &c. b.ddoKados, ov, 6, a teacher, master ; often, ‘‘ teacher of the law,” Luke li. 49; @ censor, James iii. 1; spe- cially of Christ the Teacher. | Riddonw, S:daiw, to teach, to be a teacher ; abs., to teach, with acc. of pers., generally also acc. of thing; also with inf. or 671.
didaxh, fs, 7, doctrine, teaching, i.e., (1) the act, (z) the mode, or (3) the thing taught. With obj. gen., per- haps, in Heb. vi. 2. See 260, b (6), note.
3i-3paxuoy, ov, Td (prop. adj., sc. véuiopua, coin), a double drachma, or silver half-shekel (in LXX., the shekel), Matt. xvii. 24.
AlSupos, n, ov, double, or twin ; a sur- name of Z'homas the apostle, John xi. 16, &c.
dtSwut, to give (acc. and dat.) Hence, in various connections, to yield, de- liver, supply, commit, &e. When used in a general sense, the dat. of
_ pers. may be omitted, as Matt. xiii. 8. The thing given may be expressed by é« or ard, with gen. in a parti- tive sense instead of acc. So Matt. xxv. 8; Luke xx. 10. The purpose of a gift may be expressed by inf., as Matt. xiv. 16; John iv. 7; Luke i. 73. See 107, 278.
bi-eyelpw, to wake up thoroughly, Mark iv. 38; to excite, as the sea by the wind, John vi. 18; fig., to arouse, 2 Pet. i. 13. :
&:-€é-o50s, ov, 7, lit., ‘*a crossway of exit ;” so, a meeting-place of roads, @ public spot in a city, Matt. xxii. 9.
—-bi-epunvevrhs, ov, 6, an interpreter.
&t-epunvevw, to interpret, explain, Luke xxiv. 27; Acts ix. 36.
di-epxoum, to pass through, acc. or dd (gen.), destination expressed by eis
_ or €ws ; to pass over or travel, abs., Acts viii. 4; to spread, as a report, Luke vy. 15.
5i-epwrdw, &, to find by inquiry, Acts
x. 17 b:-erts, és (Sls), of two years, Mutt. ii. 16,
[SiSdoKxahos—Sixy
di-eria, as, 7, the space of two years, Acts xxiv. 27, xxviii. 30.
di-nyéouat, otuat, to lead through, te recount perfectly, to declare the whole of a matier, Luke ix. 10.
dthynows, ews, h, narrative or history, Luke i. 1.
d:-nvexis, és, continuous, perpetual. eis 7d dinverés, adverbial, for ever, Heb. i: Ay Te
5:-OdAacoos, ov (dis), washed by the sea on two sides, Acts xxvii. 41.
di-ixvéouat, oduat, to pass through, asa sword piercing, Heb. iv. 12.
di-iornut, to put apart, to interpose ; in time, Luke xxii. 59; by space, Acts XXVli. 28.
di-coxuptCouct, to affirm strongly, Acts Xi, 15.
dixaso-Kpioia, as, H, just judgment, Rom. is,
Slkatos, ate, ov, just, right, Mark vi. 20; upright, righteous, Luke i. 6; impar- tial, as a judge, 2 Tim. iv. 8; right with God. Applied to things, to per- sons, to God, John xvii. 25. Adv., -ws, justly,deservedly. See Synonyms.
dixaooivn, ns, 7, righteousness, justice,
Acts xvii. 31; rectitude, righteous- ness, Matt. vi. 33; goodness -gene- rally, Matt. vi. 1; justification, Rom. V. 17, 21, as dixaleois.
dixatdw, @, ‘‘to make just,” generally in N.T. in the deciarative serise (1 Tim. iii, 16; Rom. iii. 4, LXX.); spe- cially, to hold guiltless, to justify, Matt. xii. 37 ; 1 Cor. iv. 4; to pro- nounce or treat as righteous, Rom. lil, 20, 26, 30, &c.
Sixalwua, atos, 6, a righteous decree or statute, Rom. i. 32, especially a decree of acquittal ; opp. to kard«pima, condemnation, Rom.v. 16; a righteous act, Rom. v. 18; Rev. xix. 8.
Sixalwois, ews, H, acquittal, justification, Rom. iv. 25, v. 18.
Sixaorhs, ov, 6, a judge, Luke xii. 14; Acts vii. 27.
dikn, ns, 7, a judicial sentence, Acts
_XXv. 15; punishment, 2 Thess. i. 9; vengeance, the name of a heathen deity, Acts xxviii. 4.
S(krvov—BotAn |
diktvov, ov, 7d, a fishing net.
3:-Adyos, ov (dis), double-tongued, deceit- Sul, 1 Tim. ui. 8.
10, conj. (3a and &), therefore, on which account, wherefore.
di-odevw, to journey or pass through, Luke viii. 1; Acts xvii. 1.
d:6-mep, conj., for this very reason, 1 Cor. Vill. 13.
Awo-rerhs, és, fallen from Zeus or Ju- piter, Acts xix. 35.
5i-dpOwois, ews, H, an amendment, re- Jormation, Heb. ix. 10,
d:-opiaocw, gw, to dig through, Matt. Vi. 19, XXIV. 43.
Aida-kovpot, wv, oi (children of Zeus), Castor and Pollux, Acts xxviii. 11.
di-d71, conj. ( = dia TovTo, Srt), where- fore, on this account, because, for.
Ao-rpedhs, ods, 6, Diotrephes, 3 John 9.
dimAdos, otis, 7, odv, double, twofold, 1 Tim. v. 17; comp., d:rAdrepos with gen., Matt. xxiii. 15.
dimAdw, &, to double, Rev. xviii. 6.
dis, adv., twice.
Ais, obsolete nom, for Zeds, gen. Aids, acc, Ala, Zeus or Jupiter.
diiordfw, ow (dis), to waver, to doubt, Matt. xiv. 31.
di-crouos, ov (dis), two-edged, Heb. iv. 12,
dio-xlAtor, at, a, num., two thousand.
d:-vAl@@, to strain off, filter through a sieve, Matt. xxiil. 24.
dixdw, ow, to set at variance, divide, Matt. x. 35.
dixo-cragia, as, 7, a faction, division, separation, 1 Cor. ill. 3
dix0-Toméw, &, to cut in two or asunder.
dupdw, w, how, to thirst for, to desire earnestly, acc.
dibos, ous, 74, thirst, 2 Cor. xi. 27.
di-Wuxos, ov (Sis), double-minded, James i. 8, iv. 8
diwyuds, od, 6, persecution.
didkTys, ov, 6, a persecutor.
didnw, Ew, (1) to pursue, persecute, harass ; (2) to press earnestly for- ward, Phil. ili, 12; (3) to follow, simply, Luke xvii. 23; (4) fig., to prosecute with ardent desire.
ddbypa, aros, Td (Soxéw), a decree, edict, »
VOCABULARY. 35
ordinance ; as of a prince, Luke ii. 1; of the Mosaic law, Eph. ii. 15; of the Apostles, Acts xvi. 4. ‘‘ Dogma,”
Novhaviten aw, to make a decree, to im- pose an ordinance ; pass., to submit to ordinances, Col. ii. 20.
doxéw, &, 5dfw, (1) to think, ace. and inf. (or inf. of the same subj. as Luke viii, 18); (2) to seem, appear, be evident ; (3) Soxet, impers., i seems; ut seems good to or pleases, dat.
Soxiudiw, ow, to try, put to the proof, to learn by experience, 2 Cor. viii. 22 ; to discern, to distinguish, Luke xii. 56; to judge fit, 1 Cor. xvi. 3
Soxiwh, is, , proof, knowledge acquired by proof, experience.
Suxiuuiov, ov, 7, a test, a means of trying, a criterion.
dd«yuos, ov (Séxouct), approved, genuine, acceptable, Rom. xvi. 10, xiv. 18.
Soxds, ov, , a beam of timber, Matt. Vil. 3, 4, 5+
ddAtos, fa, wov, deceitful, 2 Cor. xi. 13.
Soridw, @, to deceive. Impf., 3rd pers. plur., €S0Atcay, an Alexandrian form from LXX., Rom, iii. 13.
SddAvs, ov, 6, fruud, “deceit, craft, 2 Cor. xii, 16,
Sordw, &, to falsify, adulterate, 2 Cor. iv. 2.
Sduc, aros, 76 (Sidwut), a gift.
ddéa, as, 7 (Soxéw, ** favourable estima- tion”), (1) honour, glory, yielded to God ; manifestation of character, as of God, Rom. iii. 7; applause, given to men; splendour, lustre, dazzling light. ai 86%, dignities, on earth or in heaven, 2 Pet. ii, 10; Jude 8; Suture glory, Rom. ii. 7, 10.
dvéd(w, ow, to ascribe glory to, to honour, glorify.
Aopxds, ados, 7, Dorcas, Acts ix. 36, 39.
dots, ews, 7, a giving, Phil. iv. 15; @ gift, James i, 17. ‘
ddrns, ov, 6, a giver, 2 Cor. ix. 7
dovA-aywyéew, @, to bring into subjection, 1 Cor. ix. 27.
Sovacla, as, 7, slavery, bondage.
SovAetw, ow, (1) to be a slave, absolutely ; (2) to be subject to, to obey, dat.
dovAn, ns, 7, a handmaid, a female slave.
36. VOCABULARY.
dovAos, ov, 6, (1) a slave, i.e., one of servile condition ; (2) a@ servant of any one, correlative to xipiws. See Synonyms. ;
SovAdw, &, dow, to reduce to bondage (acc. and dat.); pass., to be held subject to.
Sox, fis, 7 (8éxoucu), ‘‘a receiving of guests,” a banquet, Luke xiv. 13. dpdxwy, ovros, 6, a dragon or huge ser-
pent ; symb. for Satan, Rev. xii.
Spdocoua,.dep., to grasp, take, catch ; acc., 1 Cor. iii. 19.
Bpaxuh, fis, 7, a drachma, an Attic silver coin equal to the Roman denarius, or worth between sevenpence and eightpence of our money, Luke xv. 8.
Spéuw, obs. (see tpéxw), to run.
Spémavoy, ov, td, a sickle or pruning- hook, Mark iv. 29; Rev. xiv. 14.
Spduos, ov, 6, ‘‘a racecourse ;” fig., course, career.
Apouaiaaa, ns, 7, Drusilla, Acts xxiv.24,
divayuma, dep. (see 109, 8, 1), to be able, abs., or with inf. (sometimes omitted) or ace. ; to have a capacity for ; to be strong, as 1 Cor. ill. 2 ; to have power to do, whether through ability, dis- position, permission, or opportunity.
Sivas, ews, , (1) power, might, abso- lutely or as an attribute ; (2) power over, expressed by eis'‘or émi (acc.), ability to do; (3) exercise of power, miracle ; (4) forces, as of an army, spoken of the heavenly hosts, as
' Matt. xxiv. 29; (5) force, as of a word, i.¢., significance, 1 Cor. xiv.11. See Synonyms.
dwvaudw, &, to strengthen, confirm, Col. Zi ST
duvdeTns, ov, 6, (1) a potentate, Luke 1. 52 5 (2) one in authority, Acts viii. 27.
Suvaréw, @, to be powerful, to show one’s self powerful, 2 Cor. xiii. 3.
duvards, h, dv, having power, mighty (6 duwaréds, THE ALMIGHTY, Luke i. 49), distinguished, for rank, Acts xxv. 5; for skill, for excellence, Luke xxiv. 19. dvvardy, possible.
dévw or Siw, 2nd aor., éduv, to sink ; to set, as the sun, Mark i. 32; Luke
iv. 40.
[8othos—ddv
S00, num., indecl., except dat., duel, two.
dus-, an inseparable prefix, implying adverse, difficult, or grievous.
duc-Bdoraxtos, ov, oppressive, difficulé to be borne, Matt. xxiii. 4.
5uc-evtepla, as, 7, a dysentery, a flux.
dvo-epujvevtos, ov, hard to be explained.
Sug-KoAos, ov (lit., ‘‘ difficult about — food”), difficult, hard to accomplish. Adv., -ws, with difficulty, hardly.
dvouh, 7s, H (generally plur., dvcpuai), the setting of the sun ; the west.
dua-vénros, ov, hard or difficult to be understood, 2 Pet. iii. 16,
dvo-dnula, as, H, evil report, infamy.
dédexa, indecl., num., twelve. of dddexa, the twelve, or the Apostles,
dwdéxaros, n, ov, num., ord., twelfth.
Swiexd-puadoy, ov, 76, the twelve tribes, Israel.
Saua, aros, 76, a house, a house-top. See Synonyms.
dwped, as, H, a free gift.
dwpéay, accus. of preced., as an adv., Freely, 2 Cor. xi. 7; without cause, groundlessly, John xv. 25; Gal. ii. 21.
Swpéoua, ovua, to give freely, Mark XV. 45; pass., 2 Pet. i. 3, 4.
dépnua, aros, 76, a free gift, Rom, v. 16; James i. 17.
dapov, ov, 7d, a gift, Eph. ii. 8; an offering or sacrifice, Matt. viii. 4; a gift to the temple treasury, Luke Xx. 3.
se.
E, ¢, € Widov, epsilon, &, the fifth letter. As a numeral, é=5; €,= 5000.
éa, interj., expressing surprise or com- plaint, oh / alas / Mark i, 24; Luke lv. 34.
édy, conj. (for ei &y), ¢f, usually con- strued with subjunctive verb. See 383. Sometimes as a particle of time, John xii. 32, when; after the relative, with some other words, soever, Matt. v. 19, viii. 19; 1 Cor. xvi. 6. édv dt Kal, andifalso ; édy uh, except, unless, Matt. v. 20; but that, Mark iv. 22; édv mép, if indeed, Heb. vi. 3; édv re, if so be, whether,
éavrot—éSpatopa|
éavTov, pron., reflex., 3rd pers., of one’s self ; used also in 1st (plur.) and 2nd persons. See 335. Genitive often for possess. pron. Aéyew or eimely év éavt@, to say within one’s self, i.e., to think ; yiveodou or epxerOau ev EavT@, to come to one’s self, 1.€., to recover one’s recollection ; pds éavrdy, to one’s home, John xx. 10, or privately, as Luke xviii. 11; éy éavrots, among yourselves, t.é.,one with another; Kaé’ éavtéy, apart; wap éautdy, at home.
édw, &, édow; impl., efwy; 1st aor., elaca, (1) to permit, inf., or acc. and inf. ; (2) to leave alone ; (3) to let go, Acts xxvii. 40.
éBdounxovra, indecl., num., seventy. oi €Bdouhnovra, the seventy disciples, Luke x. 1, 17.
efdounkoyramis, num. adv., seventy times ; rhet. for any large number.
€Bdouos, n, ov, ord. num., seventh.
’"EBép, 6, Hber or Heber, Luke iii. 35.
‘EBpaikds, h,o’v, Hebrew.
‘EB8paios, aia, aiov, also subst., 6, 7, @ Hebrew ; a Jew of Palestine, in dis- tinction from of ‘EAAnvorat, or Jews born out of Palestine, and using the Greek language.
éBpats, tSos, 7, the Hebrew or Aramean language, vernacular in the time of Christ and the Apostles. See 150.
éBpaiorl, adv., in the Hebrew language. See preceding.
evyyi¢@,, fut. att., eyy@; pf., Hyyixa, to approach, to draw near, to be near, abs., or with dat. or eis, or émi (acc, )
ey-ypapw, to inscribe, infix, 2 Cor. iii. 2.
eyyvos, ov, 6, 7, @ surety, sponsor, Heb. vii. 22.
eyyis, adv., near; used of both place
and time, with gen. or dat. eyyutepov, comp. of preceding, nearer ; used of time, Rom. xiii, 11.
eyeipw, eyepe, pass. perf., eyhryepyat, to arouse, to awaken ; to raise up, aS a Saviour; to erect, as a building ; mid., to rise up, as from sleep, or from a recumbent posture, as at table. Applied to raising the dead; used also of rising up against, as an adversary, or in judgment,
VOCABULARY. : 37
| &yepots, ews, 7, a waking up; of the
resurrection, Matt. xxvii. 53.
éy-Kd0-eros, ov, adj. (@yxablnut), a spy, an insidious foe.
eyKalvia, lwv, td, a dedication, John x. 22; of the feast commemorating the dedicating or purifying of the temple, after its pollution by Anti- ochus Epiphanes, 25 Chisleu, answer- ing to mid-December.
éy-Kauvif@, to renovate, as a way, Heb. X. 20; consecrate, aS a covenant, Heb. ix. 18.
éy-Kardéw, w, €ow, impf., evexddovy, to summon to a court for trial, to indict, pers. dat., or kard (gen.); crime, in. gen.
éy-Kkara-Aelrw, ww, (1) to desert, -to abandon ; (2) to leave remaining, Rom. ix. 29.
éy-xat-oKéw, @, to dwell among (ev).
éy-xevtpi(w, to insert, as a bud or graft; fig., Rom. xi. 17, &e.
éy-KAnuu, atos, Td, a charge or accusa- tion.
éy-kouBdoua, oduat, to clothe, as with © an outer garment tied closely with knots, 1 Pet. v. 5.
éy-Kkorh, Tis, ), an impediment.
ey-nérTw, Yw, 1st aor., érexowpa, to inter- rupt, to hinder (acc., or inf. with rod).
éy-Kpdreia, as, 7, self-control, tempe- rance, continence.
éy-Kparevoua, dep., to restrain one’s self, in sensual pleasures ; to be temperate.
éy-Kparhs, és, having power over, self- controlled, temperate, abstinent.
éy-xpivw, to adjudge or reckon, to a particular rank (acc. and dat.), 2 Cor. X. 12.
éy-Kpirtw, to hide in, to mix with, as leaven with meal.
&y-kuos, ov, pregnant, Luke ii. 5.
éy-xplw, to rub in, anoint, Rev. iil. 18.
éy@, pron., pers., /; plur., ters, we. See 53.
eSapi(w, fut. (Attic), -.6, to lay level with the ground, to raze, Luke xix. 44.
edapos, ous, 74, the ground, Acts xxii. 7.
€d5paios, aia, atov, sted fast, firm, fixed.
Edpaiwua, aros, 76, a basis, stay, sup- port, 1 Tim. iil. 15.
38 VOCABULARY,
"ECerias, ov, 6, Hezekiah, Matt. i. 9.
€0eAo-bpnokela, as, , will-worship, Col.
_ li. 23 (see @pnoxeta),
€0éAw. See GeAw.
€0i¢w, to accustom ; pass., perf. part., neut., 7d eidicuevoy, the accustomed practice, the custom.
eévdpxns, ov, 6, a prefect, lieutenant- governor, ethnarch, 2 Cor. xi. 32.
e€vixds, h, dv, national, of Gentile race, heathen. Adv., -as, heathenly, after the manner of heathens.
e0vos, ous, 76, the people of any country, a nation. tad evn, the nations, heathen world, the Gentiles.
€00s, ous, 76, @ usage, custom, manner.
€0w, pf., eiw0a, to be accustomed. rd eiw0ds avrg, his custom, Luke iv. 16; Acts xvii. 2.
ei, a conditional conjunction (see 383), if, since, though. After verbs indi- cating emotion, «i is equivalent to ért, Mark xv. 44. As an interro- gative particle, ef occurs in both in- direct and direct questions, Mark xv. 45; Acts i. 6. In oaths and solemn assertions, it may be rendered by that...not. ¢i wh and «i phn, unless, except. ei 5& uh, but if not, otherwise, John xiv. 2. ei rep, if so be. ei rws, if possibly. ire... etre, whether ... or.
elSos, ovs, 4, (1) outward appearance, 2 Cor. v. 7; (2) form, aspect, John Vv. 373; (3) species, kind, 1 Thess. We 22.
lw, obs. See dpdw, of8a.
eidwAcioy, ov, td, an idols temple, 1 Cor. Vili. 10,
eidwAd-CUTOS, ov, sacrificed to idols ; used of meats, as Acts xv. 29.
eldwAo-Aarpeia, as, 7, idolatry.
eldwAo-Adtpys, ov, 6, an idolater.
elSwdrov, ov, 76, an idol, a false god worshipped in an image.
eixf or eikp, adv., (1) without purpose ; Rom. xiii. 4; (2) m vain, 1 Cor. xv. 2.
e%koot, indec,, num., twenty.
elxw, to give way, to yield, Gal. ii. 5.
elxw, obs., whence 2nd perf. foina, to resemble ; with dat., James i, 6, 23.
[’Etexlas —elpnvuxds
eixér, dvos, 7, an image, copy, repre- sentation, likeness.
ciAikplveia, as, 7), clearness, sincerity. °
eiArKpivis, és, sincere, pure, without spot or blemish (perhaps from e¢fA;i,, sun- light, and kpivw, to judge, ‘* capable of being judged in the light”).
eiAlocw, to roll together, as a scroll, Rev. vi. 14.
| eiui (see 110), a verb of existence,
(1) used as a predicate, to be, to exist, to happen, to come to pass; with an infin. following, éorl, it is convenient, proper, &c., as Heb. ix. 5; (2) as the copula of subject and predicate, simply to be, or in the sense of to be like, to represent, John vi. 35; Matt. xxvi. 26; 1 Cor. x. 4. With parti- ciples, it is used to form the ‘‘re- solved tenses,” as Luke i. 22, iv. 16; Matt. xvi. 19, &c. With gen., as predicate, it marks quality, posses- sion, participation, &c. ; with dat.,. property, possession, destination, &c. For its force with a prep. and its case, see Syntax of Prepositions. The verb, when copula, is often omitted. Participle, ay, being ; 7d bv, that which is; oi bvres, ta bvTa, persons or things, that are. This also is often omitted.
elut, to go, in some copies for e¢iui, in John vii. 34, 36.
elvexa, -ev, for Evexu, -er,
elrep, elrws. See in ei.
elxov (see 108, 7), from obs. &rw, or elrw, to say; interrogatively, to enquire, Acts viii. 30; or in reply, to answer, Mark xv. 34. In narra- tion, to tell, Matt. viii. 4; in pre- dictions, to foretell, Mark xiv. 16; in authoritative lirections, to bid or command, Luke vii. 7.
cipnvedw, to have peace or to be at peace.
elphyn, ns, }, peace, the opposite of dissension or war; peace of mind, arising from reconciliation with God ; health, prosperity, every good, tem- poral and spiritual. Often employed in salutations, as in Heb.
elpnvixés, f, dv, (1) peaceable, James
elpyvo-mrovo—éex-Srdko |
iii. 17; (2) peaceful, wholesome, Heb. xii, 11, eipnvo-moew, &, to make peace, reconcile, Col. 1. 20. eipnvo-troids, ov, 6, a peacemaker, one disposed to peace, Matt. v. 9. eis, prep. governing acc., into, to (the interior), See 124, 298. In com- position, it implies motion into or towards. eis, ula, €v, a card. num., one; used . distributively. Matt. xx. 21; by way of suphasis, Mark ii. 7; and indefinitely, Matt. vili. 19. Com , Mark xii. 42. As an ordinal, the _Sirst, Matt. XXViil. rs; Rev. ix, :3%. cig-cdyw, 2nd aor., eiafrywyor, to bring in, introduce. cig-axovw, to listen to, to hear, so as to obey (gen.); spoken of God’s hear- ing prayer, Matt. vi. 7, &c. eia-5éxoucu, to receive into favour (acc.), 2 Cor. vi. 17; from LXX. efc-eyut, impf., elojew; inf., eiorévat (ei), to go in, to enter (with éis). eig-€pxouat, 2nd aor., eiajAGov, to come in, to enter (chiefly with «is). «ivép- xouce and éépxouat, to come and go in and out, spoken of daily life and intercourse. Fig., of entrance upon a state. eig-kadéw, @, Only mid. in N.T., to call or invite in, Acts X. 23. elc-o50s, ov, f, an entrance, a first coming, an admission. cio-rnddw, &@, to leap in, to spring in, Acts xiv. 14, XVi. 29. eio-ropevouat, dep., to go in, to enter ; spoken of persons, Mark i. 21; of things, Matt. xv. 17; to arise, as thoughts in the mind, Mark iv, 19, elomopevoua and aemopebounn, to go in and out in daily duties, Acts ix. 28. cio-rpéxw, 2nd aor., eicédpapoy, to run in, or into, Acts xii. 14. eio- pepo (see 108, 6), to lead into (with eis), e.g., temptation, Luke xi. 4; to bring to the ears of, Acts xvii. 20. era, adv., then, afterwards. etre, conj. See ei. éx, or, before a vowel, é, a prep. gov. gen., from, out of (the interior).
VOCABULARY. 39°
See 293. In composition, é& im- plies removal, continuance, completion, or is of intensive force.
Exaoros, each, every one (with gen.) fs ExaoTos, every one soever.
éxdatore, ady., each time, every time, always.
éxarév, card. num., a hundred.
Exarovraérns, es, a hundred years old.
éxatovtamAaciov, ov, a hundred fold.
éxatovrdpxns, ov, 6, captain over a hun- dred men, a centurion, an officer in Roman armies.
éx-BdAAw (see BdAAw for forms), to cast out, send out, as labcurers into a field ; to send. away, dismiss, reject ; ae to extract or take out.
Zx-Bacts, ews, n, @ way out, event, end.
éx-BoaAh, 7s, 7, a casting out, as lading from a ship, Acts xxvil. 18,
éx-yaultw, to give in marriage, 1 Cor. vil. 38, &c.
éx-yautonw, the same, Luke xx. 34, 35.
éx-yovos, ov, sprung from ; neut. plur., descendants, 1 Tim. v. 4.
ex-Savavdw, @, to spend entirely ; pass. reflex., to expend one’s energies for (éwép), 2 Cor. xii. 15.
ex-5éxoua, to look out for, to expect (ews), to wait for (acc. )
ExdnAos, ov, quite plain, conspicuous, manifest, 2 Tim. iil. 9.
éx-dnuéw, &, to be away from, absent
Jrom, 2 Cor. v. 6-9.
éx-d5i8wut, N.T. mid., to let owt to farm, Matt. xxi. 33.
éx-d1-nyéouat, oduct, dep. mid. , to rehearse particularly, tell fully, Acts xiii. 41.
éx-dinéw, &, to do justi-e to, avenge (ace. ) ; to defend (acc. and a6), Luke xviii. 5 ; to punish, 2 Cor. x. 6; to demand requital for (acc.), from (ek or a6), Rev. vi. 10.
éx-Slenots, ews, 7, an avenging, vindi- cation, punishment, Luke xviii. 7; Rom. xii. 19.
%-dicos, ov, 6, }, an avenger, one who adjudges a culprit (dat.) to punish- ment tor (zept) a crime, Rom, xiii. 4 ; 1 Thess. iv. 6.
éx-didnw, to persecute, to expel by perse- cuting, Luke xi. 49; 1 Thess, li, 15.
40 - - VOCABULARY.
éx-déros, ov, delivered up, Acts ii. 23.
. €k-d0X7, fis, 7, a waiting for, expectation, Heb. x. 27.
éx-d0w, to uncicthe, to strip off (two acces. )
éxei, adv., there, thither.
éxetdev, adv., from that place, thence.
éxeivos, n, 0, pron., demons., that, that one there ; used antithetically, Mark Xvi. 20, and by way of emphasis, Matt. xxii. 23. See 338, 340.
éxeioe, adv., thither, in const. preg., Acts xxii. 5.
ex-(n7éw, @, to seek out with diligence ; to seek for, e.g., God, or to turn to him, Rom. iii. 11 5 to require, judi- cially, Heb. xi. 6; Luke xi. 50, 51.
ex-CauBéo, , N.T. pass., to be amazed, greatly astonished, Mark ix. 15.
Ex-OapuBos, ov, surprised, greatly amazed, Acts ili, 11.
&x-eros, ov, cast out, exposed to perish, Acts vii. 19.
éx-xabatpw, 1st aor., etexd0apa, to purge out, to cleanse, 1 Cor. v. 7; 2 Tim. ii. 4.
éx-kalw (F), to burn vehemently, as with lust, Rom. i. 27.
éx-kakéw, @ (see eyxaxew), to faint, to despond through fear.
ex-Kevtéw, &, to pierce through, to trans- fix, John xix. 37; Rev. 1. 7.
éx-xAdw, to break off, as branches from a stem.
éx-xAclw, ow, to shut out, Rom. iii. 27; Gal. iv. 27.
éxxaAnota, as, ) (éxkaréw), an assembly, a congregation ; legally called, Acts xix. 39; or tumultuously gathered, Acts xix. 32, 40. In a Christian sense, the Church as a whole, or a church in one place, 1 Cor. xii. 28;
Acts xi. 26. So often plural, as Acts xv. 41.
éx-KAlvw, to decline, turn away from (a6).
ex-KohupBdw, @, to swim out or away, Acts xxvii. 42.
ex-couitw, to carry out to burial, Luke
' vii. 12,
éx-nértw, (1) to cut down or off, as a tree or a branch, Luke iii. 9; or as a limb, Matt. v. 30; (2) fig., to
[ éx-86ros —éx-mA pars
hinder, as prayer from being effec- tual, 1 Pet. iii. 7.
éx-Kpguauar (mid. of éxxpeudvyvpr), to hang upon, or to be earnestly atten- tive to, Luke xix. 48.
éx-AdAéw, @, to speak out, to disclose oe and ér:), Acts xxiii. 22. ex-Adumw, to shine out or brightly, Matt. xiii. 43.
éx-Aavédvw, in mid., to forget entirely, Heb. xii. 5.
éx-Aéyw, mid. in N.T., 1st aor., éte- Aetdunv, to choose out for one’s self, to elect.
éx-Aclrw, 2nd aor., eféAumov, to fail, to cease, to die, Luke 1. 6, 9 ; Heb. i. 12.
éxAextés, h, dv, (1) chosen, elect; (2) choice, approved.
exAayh, js, 7, a choice, selection, Acts ix. 15; the chosen ones, Rom. xi. 7.
éx-Avw, in pass. or mid., to become weary in body, or despondent i in mind,
éx-udoow, tw, to wipe, to wipe dry, John Kis te
éx-uueTnpl(w, to deride, intensively ; to scoff at (acc. )
€x-véw (eUow), to withdraw, John v. 13.
éx-viow, to awake, as from a drunken sleep, 1 Cor. xv. 34.
Exotows, ov (éxdv), voluntary, spon- taneous. Adv., -ws,' willingly, of one’s own accord.
éx-madm, adv., of old, of long standing, 2 Pet. ii, 3.
éx-reipdtw, ow, to put to the test, to make trial of, to tempt, Matt. iv. 7;
1 Cor. x. 9. éx-réumw, to send out or forth, Acts Xiil. 4.
éx-merdvvum, ist aor., éteréraca, to stretch forth, as the hands in suppli- cation, Rom. x. 21 (LXX.)
éx-mintw, (1) to fall from (éx) ; spoken of stars, Mark xiii. 25; of flowers, James i. 11; of a ship falling or driven from its course, Acts XXVil. 17; (2) fig., of moral lapse, as Gal. v. 4 (gen.) ; (3) to fail, abs., 1 Cor. xiii. 8,
éx-mrAéw, evow, to sail out, to sail from (and, eis);
éx-mwAnpdw, to Fulfil entirely, Acts xiil. 32,
éx-wAhpwots, ews, 7, entire fulfilment,
&-rfioowa—éhappds |
€x-rAjoow, 2nd aor. pass., ékemAdynr, to strike with ustonishment.
tx-mvéw, evow, to breathe out, as the Spirit ; to expire, to die.
éx-Tropevoua, dep., to go out (amd, éx, mapd, and eis, él, mpds); to proceed From, as from the heart; or as a river from its source, &c.
€x-ropvetw, to be given up to lewdness, Jude 7.
éx-rtbw, to reject as distasteful, Gal. iv. 14; to loathe.
€x-pi(dw, @, to root out or root up, Matt. Xlil. 29, xv. 13; Luke xvii. 6; Jude 12,
&k-aTacts, ews, 7, ‘ecstasy,” (1) trance, Acts x. 10; (2) overwhelming asto- nishment, Mark v. 42.
éx-oTpépw, perf. pass., eééorpaypai, to turn out of a place, to corrupt, to pervert, Tit. iii. 11.
éx-tapdcow, tw, to agitate greatly, Acts
_ XVi. 20.
éx-rTelyw, vO, 1st aor., ééérewa, to stretch out, as the hand; to throw out, as anchors from a vessel, Luke v. 13; Acts xxvii. 30.
ék-TeAEw, @, éow, to complete, Luke Xiv. 29, 30.
€x-réveia, as, 7, intentness, Acts xxvi. 7.
éx-revhs, és, intense, vehement, fervent. Adv., -@s, intensely, earnestly. éx- TEveoTEpOY, COMP. as adv., more ear- nestly, Luke xxii. 44.
éx-TlOnut (see 107), (1) to put out or expose, as was the infant Moses, Acts Vil. 213; (2) to teach fully or accu- rately, to ecpound, Acts xviii. 26.
ex-tTvdoow, tw, to shake off, as dust from the feet, Matt. x. 14.
€xTos, y, ov, an ord. num., sixth.
éxtés, adv., generally as prep., with gen., without, besides, except. éxrds ei ph, nevertheless except, 1 Cor. xiv. 5, &e.
éx-tperw, to turn from, to forsake, 1 Tim. v. 15. ;
éx-Tpépw, (1) to nourish, sustain, Eph. v. 29; (2) to educate or train up, Eph. vi. 4.
&x-Tpwua, atos, 7d, an abortive birth, an abortion, 1 Cor. xv. 8
&k-pépw, to carry out, as to burial, Acts
VOCABULARY. 41
v. 6; or as sick persons ; to produce, . spoken of the earth, Heb. vi. 8.
ex-pevyw, to flee out from, escape (abs., or with éx); to avoid (acc.)
ex-poBéw, &, to terrify greatly, 2 Cor. x.9.
&x-poBos, ov, frightened, Mark ix. 6;. Heb. xii. 21.
€x-puw, 2nd aor. pass., éfepiny, to put JSorth, as a tree its leaves, Matt. XXiv. 32.
éx-xéw, also éxxtvw; fut., éxxew; ist aor. , €€éxea (see 96, c), to pour out, as wine spilled, Luke v. 37; as money thrown down, John ii. 15; as blood shed in sacrifice, Matt. xxvi. 28; to kill, by pouring out the blood. Fig., to shed abroad, or give largely, Rom. v. 5; to rush into, Jude 11.
e€x-xwpéw, @, to depart from, to go out, Luke xxi. 21,
ex-Yixw, to expire, to die, Acts v. 5, 10, Xil. 23.
exay, odoa, dv, willing ; used adverbially, Rom. viii. 20; 1 Cor. ix. 17.
éAala, as, 7, an olive tree ; its fruit, the olive. 7d bpos trav éAmay, the Mount of Olives.
éAaov, ov, Td, olive oil.
€Aaay, vos, 6, an olive grove, Olivet, Acts i. 12.
"EAauitns, ov, 6, an Hlamite, or inha- bitant of Hlam, a region of Persia, Acts ii. 9.
éAdcowy, or -TTwy, ov, compar. of érdaxds for puxpds, less; in quality, John li. 10; in age, Rom. ix. 12; in dig- nity, Heb. vil. 7. @Aarroy, adv., less, 1 Tim. v. 9.
edarrovew, &, to have too litile, to lack, 2 Cor. vill. 15 (LXX.)
éAartéw, @, to make lower or inferior, Heb. ii. 7, 9; pass., to decrease, John iii. 30.
eAatyw, éAdow, éAfAaxa, to drive, Luke Vili. 29 ; to impel, as the winds, the clouds, James lil. 4 ; or oars, a ship; hence to row, John vi. 18.
erappla, as, 7, levity, inconstancy, 2 Cor.
i. 17. écaagpds, d, dv, light, as a burden easily borne, Matt. xi. 30; 2 Cor. iv. 17,
49 VOCABULARY.
@Adxioros, n, ov, adj. (superl. of éraxds for wixpds), least, in number, magni- tude, importance.
éraxiotérepas, a, ov, a double compa- rison, less than the least, Eph. iii. 8.
éadw. See eAaive.
*EAedfap, 6, Hleazar, Matt. i. 15.
tAeyits, ews, 7, conviction, reproof.
€Aeyxos, ov, 6, evident demonstration, proof, Heb. xi. 1; 2 Tim. iii. 16,
éAcyxw, kw, to convict, reprove, rebuke, John viii. 9; Luke ili. 19; to render manifest, to demonstrate, John ili. 20; Eph. v. 11, 13.
érccivés, h, dv, pitiable, miserable, 1 Cor. XV. 19.
éAcéw, @, to have compassion on, suc- cour (acc.), to show mercy ; pass., to obtain mercy.
éAenuocivn, ns, 7, pity, compassion ; in N.T., alms, sometimes plur.
eAchuwv, ov, full of pity, merciful, com-
ionate.
éAeos, ous, 76 (and ov, 6, see 82, a), pity, act of compassion, a merciful dispo- sition, Matt. ix. 13; mercy.
€Acvbepla, as, 7, liberty, as freedom from the Mosaic yoke, 1 Cor. x. 29; Gal. ii. 4, &c. ; from worldly lusts, &c., James ii, 12; from all evil, Rom. viii. 21.
erevbepos, a, ov, free, as opposed to the condition of a slave; delivered from obligation (often with éx, amd); at liberty to (inf.) Once with dat. of
_ reference, Rom. vi. 20,
éAevdepdw, &, to set free (generally with acc. and aré). With modal dative, Gal. v. 1.
ZAevots, ews, 7 (Epxouat), a coming, an advent, Acts vil. 52.
érAepdvtwvos, n, ov, made of ivory, Rev. xviii. 12. .
*EAvaxelu, 6 (Heb.), Lliakim, Matt. i. 13; Luke iii. 30.
"EAreCep, 6 (Heb.), Hliezer, Luke iii. 29.
*EAiovd, 6 (Heb.), Hliud, Matt. i. 14.
*"EAwodBer, % (Heb., Llisheba), Elizabeth, Luke i.
*EXwocaios, ov, 6, Hlisha, Luke iv. 27.
éAlcow, fiw, as eiAloow, to roll up, asa garment, Heb, i. 12.
[dx ve-ros—énavros
€Anos, ous, 76, a wound, an ulcer, a sore.
éAkdw, @, to make a sore; pass., to be Sull of sores, Luke xvi. 20.
Akio, ow, to drag, as a net; to bring to justice, to draw over, to persuade, John xii. 32. The old form of the word was €Axw, impf., efAxoy, James li. 6; Acts xxi. 30,
‘EAAds, d5os, 7, Hellas, Greece=Axaia, Acts xx. 2.
“EAAn”, nvos, 6, a Greek, as distinguished (1) from BdpBapos, barbarian, Rom. i, 14, and (2) from “Iovdaios, Jew, John vii. 35; Acts xi. 20 (best edd.), &c. Used for Greek proselytes to Judaism, John xii. 20; Acts xvii. 4.
‘EAAnuixés, h, dv, Grecian, Luke xxiii. 38 ; Rev, ix. 11.
*EAAnvis, (50s, a Greek or Gentile woman, Mark vii. 20; Acts xvii. 12.
‘EAAnuioths, od (EAAnVIiGw, to Hellenize, or adopt Greek manners and lan- guage), a Hellenist ; one by parent- age and religion, but born in a Gentile country and speaking Greek, Acts vi. 1, ix. 29.
éAAnuiotl, adv., in the Greek language, John xix. 20; Acts xxi. 37.
€A-A0véw (ev), to charge to, to put to one’s account, Rom. v. 13; Philem. 18,
*EAuwdau, 6, Himodam, Luke iii. 28.
eArt(w, att. fut., éAme, Ist aor., fAmiwa, to expect (acc. or inf., or 81); to hope for (acc.) ; to trust in (éml dat. ; év, once dat. only); to direct hope towards (eis, éml, acc.)
éAmis, los, 4, expectation, hope, secure confidence. Used emphatically of the Christian hope. Met., (1) the author, (2) the object of hope.
*EAduas, a, 6 (from Arabic), Hlymas, i.é., a magus or sorcerer, Acts xiii. 8.
"EAwl, My God! Mark xv. 34. The word is Hebrew (Ps. xxii. 2), pro- — nounced in that language Hii, and so: written, Matt. xxvii. 46 (AAJ).
euavtov, jis, ov, of myself, a reflexive pron., found only in the gen., dat., and accus. cases. It is frequently joined to active verbs, denoting spontaneous action.
éu-Batvo—ly-avrios]
€u-Balvw, 2nd aor., évéBnv, part., euBds, to go up, upon, or into, as embarking.
éu-BarAw, to cast into, Luke xii. 5.
€u-Bdarw, to dip into, Matt. xxvi. 23; John xiii. 26.
éu-Baretw, to enter, to intrude, to pry into, Col. ii. 18.
€u-BiBicw, to cause to enter, to put on board, Acts xxvii. 6.
éu-BAérw, to direct the eyes to anything, to look fixedly, to consider, to know by inspection (acc., dat., or eis).
€u-Bpyudoua, Gua, dep. (Bplun, an ex- pression of anger), to be angrily or vehemently moved, Mark xiv. 5 (dat.) ; John xi. 33, 33; lo strongly interdict, Matt. ix. 30; Mark i. 43.
éuéw, &, 18st aor. inf., éuécas, to vomit, to spue out, Rev. ii. 16.
éu-pwatvouat, to be mad against (dat.), Acts xxvi. 11.
*Eupavound, 6, Lmmanuel, a Hebrew word signifying ‘‘God with us;” a name of Christ, Matt. i. 23.
*Eupaovs, 4, Hmmaus, a village a short distance from Jerusalem, Luke XxXiv. 13.
éu-uéeva, to remain or persevere in (dat. or év).
*"Euudp, 6, Emmor, or Hamor, Acts vii. 16.
éuds, h, dv, mine, denoting possession, power over, authorship, right, &c. See 336.
eu-maryuds, ov, 6, a being mocked or derided, Heb. ii. 36.
eu-mraivw, ~w, to mock, deride, scoff at (abs. or dat.) ; to deceive, delude, pass., Matt. i. 16.
éu-walktns, ov, 6, a scoffer, deceiver, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Jude 18.
eu-repimatéw, @, haw, to walk about in, to dwell among (év), 2 Cor. vi. 16 (LX X. )
eu-miurrnut, eurrjow, éverAnoa, part. pres., €umlaAay (Acts xiv. 17), to fill up, to satisfy, as with food, &c.
gen.) éu-rintw, to fall into or among (eis) ; fig., to incur, as condemnation or punishment, 1 Tim. iii. 6; Heb. x. 31. €u-wAckw, 2nd aor. pass., évemAdkyy, to
VOCABULARY. 43
entangle, implicate, 2 Tim. ii, 4; 2 Pet. ii. 20 (dat. of thing).
éu-wAnew. See éuriumranut
€u-TAoKh, 7s, 7, a twisting or braiding, as of hair, 1 Pet. iii. 3
éu-mvew, to breathe out (gen.), Acts ix. 1.
éu-nopevouat, dep., ‘‘to go about;” hence to trade, to traffic, abs., James iv. 13; to make gain of (acc.), 2 Pet. ii
rik |
éu-mopla, as, h, trade, merchandise, Matt. Exthii¢
€u-mépiov, ov, Té, ‘*emporium ;” a place Jor trading, John ii. 16,
u-mopos, ov, 6, a traveller, merchant, oo Matt. xiii. 45; Rev. xviii. 3,
c.
éu-mpniw, ow, to set on fire, to burn, Matt. xxii. 7.
eu-mpoobey, adv., before (umpocbey nat dmiober, in front and behind, Rev. iv. 6); as prep. (gen.), before, in presence of, Matt. x. 325; before, in dignity, John i. 15, 27.
éu-rTiw, ow, to spit upon (dat. or éis).
€u-pavijs, és, manifest (dat.), Acts x. 40; Rom. x. 20.
éu-pavitw, low, to make manifest (acc. and dat.) ; to show plainly (67, or prepp. mpés, mepl, &c.)
&u-poBos, ov, terrified, afraid, Luke XXIV. 5, 37.
éu-puodw, @, to breathe upon, acc., John XX. 22,
u-putos, ov, engrafted, James i. 21.
év, prep. gov. dat., m,° generally as being or resting in; within, among. See 295. év- in composition has the force of in, upon, into. It is changed before y, x, and x, into éy-; before B, m, p, and uw, into éu-; and before A, into éA-. The vr is, however, re- stored before the augment in verbs.
év-ayKaAifoum, to take up into one’s arms, Mark ix. 36, x. 16.
év-dduos, ov (GAs), being or living in the sea, marine, James iii. 7.
év-ayTt, adv., as prep. with gen., in the presence of, before.
év-avTios, a, ov, over against, contrary, said of the wind, Acts xxvii. 4; ad- verse, hustile, Acts xxvi. 9. Neut.,
44 VOCABULARY.
évaytioy, adv. as prep. with gen., in the presence of, Luke xxiv. 16; Acts Vii. 10, )
év-dpxoua, to begin, Gal. iii. 3; Phil. i. 6.
év-Sehs, és, in want, destitute, needy, Acts iv. 34.
ey-deryua, aros, 76, an indication, proof, or manifest token, 2 'Thess. i. 5.
év-Selxvuur, N.T. mid., to show, to mant- Jest, Rom. ix. 17, &c.; implying action, 2 Tim. iv. 14.
évdertis, ews, 4, a declaration, made evident by deed, Rom. iii. 25 ; 2 Cor. Vill. 24; a certain sign, Phil. i. 28.
evdexa, oi, ai, rd, eleven. of evdexa, the leven, i.e., apostles.
évdéxaros, n, ov, eleventh.
év-5éxoum, dep., to admit, used imper- sonally. ovx évdéxera, it is not ad- missible or possible, Luke xiii. 33.
év-5nuew, @, to remain ai home ; to stay or dwell in any place, 2 Cor. v. 6.
év-did0oKw, mid., to clothe one’s self with, ace. See évdive.
év-diuxos, ov, agreeable to justice, right, righteous, Rom. iii. 8; Heb. ii. 3.
év-Sdunors, ews, 7, a structure, a building, Rev. xxi. 18,
év-Soid(w, ow, to glorify, to honour, 2 Thess. i. 10, 12.
év-dofos, ov, adorned with honour, glo- rious; of persons, had in honour, 1 Cor. iv. 10; of external appear- ance, splendid, Luke vii. 25.
| €u-duma, aos, 76, a garment, raiment.
év-Suvvaudw, @, to strengthen, to furnish with power ; pass., to acquire strength.
év-Sivw and évitw, to clothe or to invest with (two aces.) ; mid., to put on, to clothe one’s self with (acc.); often fig., to invest with ; to enter stealthily into, 2 Tim. iii. 6.
&y-ducis, ews, }, a putting on or wearing of clothes, 1 Pet. ili. 3.
év-é5pa, as, 7, an ambush, a snare, Acts Xxili, 16, XXV. 3.
év-eBpetw, to watch, to entrap, to lie in ambush for (ace.), Luke xi. 54; Acts Xxiil. 21.
év-ciAéw, @, 1st aor., eveiAnaa, to roll up, to wrap in (acc. aud dat.), Mark xv. 46,
[ev-épxopor—evveds
év-et, to be in, to have a place in, Luke Xl. 41. 7a évdyra, such things as are in [the platter], ver. 39, or such as ye have, i.e., according to your ability. For &eorv: impers., see Jn.
évexa or Evexey, sometimes eivexey, prep. — adv., gen., because of, by reason of, on account of, Luke vi. 22; Matt. v. 10; 2 Cor. vii. 12. ob Evexey, because ; tlvos évexev ; to what end ?
év-épyeia, as, H, energy, efficacy, effectual operation.
év-epyéw, &, to exert one’s power, to work in one, as Gal. ii. 8; trans., to accom- plish, as 1 Cor. xii. 11; mid., to be effective, to be in action. Part, évepyouuévn, James v. 16, earnest.
év-€pynua, atos, 76, working, effect; plur. with gen., 1 Cor. xii. 6, ro.
év-epyhs, és, effectual, energetic, 1 Cor. xvi. 9; Heb. iv. 12; Philem, 6.
év-eatés, perf. participle of éviornu.
év-ev-Aovyew, &, to bless, to distinguish by blessings, Acts iii. 25; Gal. ili. 8.
év-éxw, (1) to hold in, entangle, only in pass. (dat.), Gal. v. 1; (2) to be angry with (dat.), Mark vi. 19; Luke xi. 53.
&Oade, adv., (1) hither, to this place ; (2) here, in this place.
év-Ovuucoum, odua, dep. pass., to revolve in mind, to think upon, Matt. i. 20.
év-Ovunois, ews, 7, thought, rejlection, contrivance.
é, elliptical for @veor:, impers., there is in, Col. iii. 11; James 1. 17.
éviautés, od, 6, a year, John xi. 49, 51; any definite time, Luke iv. 19.
év-lornus, to be present, to be at hand ; perf. part., éveornnds, sync., éveoras, impending, or present. T& everT@ra, present things, opposed to 7a wéAAovTa, things to come, Rom. viii. 38 ; 1 Cor. iii. 22. See also Gal. i. 4; Heb. ix. 9.
“ape 5 to be invigorated, Acts ix. 19; trans., to strengthen, Luke xxii. 43.
évvatos, n, ov (or évaros), ninth.
evvéa, oi, ai, Td, nine, Luke xvii. 17.
évvevnwovta-evvea, ninety-nine, Luke XV. 4, 7.
évveds, ov (or éveds), dumb, speechless, as With amazement, Acts ix, 7.
év-vebo—ét-alpo|
év-vebw, to ask or signify by beckoning towards any one (dat.), Luke i. 62.
éy-voia, as, 4 (vods), ‘‘what is in the mind,”’ intention, purpose.
éy-vouwos, ov, under law, 1 Cor. ix. 21; according to law, Acts xix. 39.
év-vuxos, ov (vvé), in the night, neut. as adv., Mark i. 35.
év-o1xéw, &, to dwell in, to inhabit (év).
évérns, tnTos, 7 (els), unity, concord, Eph. iv. 3, 13.
év-oxdéw, &, to disturb, to occasion tumult, Heb. xii. 15.
|» &y-oxos, ov, bound by or in (gen.); guilty
of (gen. of the crime, or of that which is violated) ; exposed to (dat. of court, gen. of punishment, ¢is of the place of punishment).
éy-raAua, aros, T6, @ commandment, an institute, Matt. xv. 9; Col. ii. 22.
év-rapid(w, to prepare for burial, as by washing, swathing, adorning, anoint- ing the corpse, Matt. xxvi. 12.
év-tapiacuds, od, 6, the preparation of a corpse for burial, John xii. 7.
év-TéAdw, in N.T. only mid. and pass.; fut. mid., évreAodua; perf., évré- taduat, to charge, to command, to commit (dat. of pers., or mpés with ace. )
évrevdev, adv., hence; from this place or cause, repeated John xix. 18; on this side and that.
éy-revgis, ews, 7, prayer for another, or intercession, 1 ‘Tim. ii. 1; sometimes supplication for one’s self, 1 Tim. iv. 5.
éy-tiues, ov, held in renown ; so precious, highly esteemed, Luke xiv. 8; 1 Pet. il. 4, 6.
evToAn, 7s, 7, a divine precept or prohi- bition ; of God’s commands, 1 Cor. vu. 19; Christ's precepts or teachings, 1 Gor. xiv. 37; 1 Tim. vi. 143 tradi- tions of the Rabbis, Tit. i. 14. al évtoAal, the commandments, t.e., the ten.
év-rémios, ov, 6 (prop. adj.), an inha- bitant, Acts xxi. 12.
évrés, adv. as prep., with gen., within. Td évrds, the interior, Matt. xxiii. 26.
éy teérw, Yow, fut. mid., évtparhooua ; 2nd aor. pass., éverpdrny, to put to
VOCABULARY.
45
shame, 1 Cor. iv. 14; mid., to rever. ence, to be in awe of, Matt. xxi. 37. év-rpépw, to nourish in (dat.); pass., fig., 1 Tim. iv. 6; nurtured in. év-rpomos, ov, terrified, trembling through fear, Acts vii. 32; Heb. xii, 21. év-Tpoth, is, 7, a putting to shame, 1 Cor. Vi. 5, XV. 34. év-rpuddw, &, to live luxuriously, to ban- quet, to revel (with év), 2 Pet. ii. 13. év-ruyxdvw, to come to, to address ; with imép (gen.), to intercede for ; with kard (gen.), to accuse or complain of. év-rvAlocw, —w, to swathe, to wrap up, to roll or fold together (acc. and dat.) év-tumdw, @, to engrave, sculpture, 2 Cor. iil. 7. év-uBpl(w, ow, to treat contemptuously or in despite, Heb. x. 29. év-umvidouat, dep. pass., to dream (cog- nate ace.), Acts ii. 17; to conceive wild or impure thoughts, Jude 8. év-Urviov, ov, T6, a dream, Acts ii. 17. évémiov (neut. of évdmos, from év wnt, in view), as prep., with gen., before, in sight or presence of, Luke i. 17; Rev. iii. 9. évémov tov Ocod, in the sight of God, Rom. xiv. 22; used in obtestation, 1 Tim. v. 21. xdpis évériov Tod @cod (Acts vii. 4), favour with God. *Evés, 6, Enos, Luke iii. 38. éy-wrlCouca, dep. mid. (év wrlos, in the ears), to listen to, Acts ii. 14. *Evox, 6, Enoch, Luke iii. 37 ; Jude 14. eg, prep. See éx. éé, of, ai, rd, card. num., sia. é-ayyéAadw, to declare abroad, celebrate, 1 Pet. ii. 9. ; ét-ayopd(w, to buy or redeem from (ét), Gal. iii. 13. Tov kapdy (Eph. v. 16), buying back, %.e., redeeming the opportunity from being lost. ét-dyw, 2nd aor., efyayov, to lead out, to send forth, Mark viii. 23; Acts Vii. 40 (with dw, ék, éis). earpéw, & (see 103, 1), to take or pluck — out, Matt. v. 29; mid., to select or separate, Acts xxill. 27. éf-alpw (see 92), to take out or away $ to expel or excommunicate, 1 Cor. Vv. 13.
46 VOCABULARY.
ét-aitéw, &, N.T., mid., to require, to ask for, Luke xxii. 31. ét-aigyns, adv., suddenly, unexpectedly, Mark xiii. 36; Luke ii. 13. éf-axodovdéw, @, to follow, to persist in following, to conform to (with dat.) . andor, at, a, six hundred. éf-adeipw, to wipe out, obliterate, Rev., iii, 5; Acts lil. 19; to wipe away, Rey. vii. 17 (dad or ex). €é-ddAouu, toleap forth or up, Actsiii.8. éf-ayd-oracis, ews, % (the e€ intensive and emphatic), @ resurrection, Phil. iii. 11 (followed by éx, Lchm., Tisch.) éf-ava-7 éAAw, to spring up, to shoot forth, as plants or corn, Mark iv. 5. éf-ay-lornu, (1) trans., fo raise up, as offspring, Luke xx. 28; (2) 2nd aor. intrans., to rise up, to stand forth, Acts xv. 5 ét-amatdw, &, to deceive utterly, to seduce ~ from truth, Rom. vii. 113; 1 Cor. iii. 18. etdmwa, adv. (= étalpyns), unexpect- edly, Mark ix. 8. éf-a-mopéouat, ota, dep., to be utterly without resource, to be tn utmost per- plexity, 2 Cor. i. 8, iv. 8. e-amo-cTéAAw, to send forth, Acts vii. 12; to send away peremptorily, Luke xx. 10, 11. ét-apri¢w, (1) to complete, Acts xxi. 5; (2) to furnish thoroughly for (xpos, ace.), 2 Tim. iil. 17. e-aorpdrtw, to glisten, as lightning ; of raiment, Luke ix. 29. ét-aurijs, adv. (Spas), from that very time, instantly, Mark vi. 25; Acts x. 33. ét-eyelpw, to raise up, as from death, -1 Cor. vi. 14 ; to cause to exist, spoken of Pharaoh, Rom. ix. 17. Zé-exir (eiui, see 111), to go out, Acts xiii. 42, XVii. 15. %-eyut (ett). See errs. ét-eréyxw, to convict, to rebuke sternly, to punish, Jude 15. ét-éaxw, to draw out from the right way, Jamesi. 14. ét-¢paua, aros, 74, that which is vomited, 2 Pet. ii. 22. etepeuvdw, &, to search diligently, 1 Pet.
i. 10, eé-dpxouat (see 103, 3), to go or to come
[e&-crréo —t-opxuoriis
out of. (with gen. or éx, amd, a, mapa); to go away, to depart, to issue or to spring from; to descend from, Heb. vii. 5; to escape from; to go Sorth, as false prophets, &c. Used of a rumour, to be divulged or spread abroad ; to emanate, as thoughts from the heart, healing power from the Saviour ; to go out, i.e., vanish, as expiring hope, Acts xvi. 19.
tect, part, neut., éfdév (impers. from fey), it is lawful, Matt. xiv. 4; i is becoming, Acts xvi. 21; it is pos- sible, Matt. xx. 15. The part. is used in the same sense, with or with- out subst. verb, Matt. xii. 4; 2 Cor. xii. 4 (dat. and inf.)
ét-erd(w, to enquire, to ask, John xxi. 12; to examine strictly, Matt. ii. 8.
et-nyéouat, odua, dep. mid., (1) fo narrate fully and accurately, Luke XXIV. 35; (2) to expound, asa teacher, John i, 18.
étqnovta, oi, al, rd, sixty,
éfjs, adv. (€xw), in order, successively. h és (nuépa), the day following.
ét-nxéw, @, only in pass. N.T., to be sounded forth, propagated widely, 1 Thess. i. 8.
ekis, ews, 7 (exw), habit, use, Heb. v. 14.
ét-lornm, -ioTdw and -10rdyw (see 107), ‘*to remove from the (natural) state,” (1) trans., to astonish, Luke xxiv. 22; Acts viii, 9; (2) 2nd aor., perf. and mid., intrans., to be astonished, con+ Sounded, to be beside one’s self, 2 Cor.
VW. 33. ef-t0' x0, to be perfectly able, Eph. iii. 18. -o50s, ov, 7, ‘* exodus,” a going out,
Heb. xi. 22; departure, as from life,
Luke ix. 31; 2 Pet. i 15. e-oAobpedw, to destroy utterly, Acts
iii, 23. et-ouoroyéw, &, to confess fully, to make
acknowledgment of, as of sins, &c. ;
in mid., to acknowledge benefits con-
JSerred, to praise (with dat.) Once,
to promise, Luke xxii. 6, éf-opki(w, to adjure, put to oath, Matt.
XXVi. 63. éf-opxior7s, 00, 6, one who puts to oath
or adjures, ‘‘ exorcist,” Acts xix. 13.
ee-optocw—en-av-dyo]
éi-optccw, tw, to dig out, Gal. iv. 15; hence, to force Up, Mark i ii. 4.
éf-ovdevéw, or eLouvdevéw, @ (ov5els), to set at nought, to treat with contempt. Perf. pass. part., efoudevhuevos, con- temned, disesteemed, 1 Cor. i. 28, vi. 4.
éf-ovdevda, o. as preceding, Mark ix. 12.
e-ougla, as, 7) (ears), (1) power, ability, John xix. 11; (2) liberty, licence, privilege, right, Rom. ix. 21; (3) com- mission, authority, Matt. xxi. 23. (4) ai ovoia, the powers, i.e., rulers, magistrates, Luke xii. 11; " angels, good and bad, Eph. i. 21, vi. 12. In 1 Cor. xi. 10, éfouclay, emblem of power, or subjection to the power of a husband, i.e., the vetl.
et-ovoid(w, to have right over, to exercise authority over (gen.); pass., to be under the power of (é1é).
et-oxh, 7s, 7, eminence, distinction. In the phrase kar’ éetoxnv, by way of distinction, Acts xxv. 23.
et-umvicw, cw, to wake from sleep, John xi. 11,
é-urvos, ov, roused out of sleep, Acts
Xvi. 27.
éiw, ady., abs., or as prep. with gen., without, outside. oi &w, those with- out; as out of the Church, or out of the number of Apostles, &e. Used often after verbs of motion compounded with éx.
efw0er, adv. of place, Srom without. Td eiwdev, the outside. of wher, those Jrom without, i.¢., not Christians, 1 Tim. iii. 7, As prep. gen., Mark VIL,.16.5 Rev. x12.
éi-wiéw, @, wow, to drive out, expel, Acts vil. 45; to propel, as a vessel, Acts XxvVil. 39.
egwrepos, a, ov (comp. of ew), outer, in the phrase ‘‘ outer darkness,” Matt. Vili, 12.
Eoxa, See elkw.
éopratw, to keep or celebrate a feast, 1 Cor. v. 8
Soprn, fis, 4, a solemn feast or festival. Used of Jewish feasts, John vii. 2; especially of the Passover, with its accompanying feast of unleavened bread, Luke ti. 41, xxii. 1.
VOCABULARY.. AT
em-ayyeria, as, 7, (1) @ message, com- mission, Acts xxiil, 21; (z) @ pro- mise, as 2 Cor. i. 20, generally plur.; the promises, specially, é.g., to Abra ae or those of the Gospel, 2 Tim. i, 13 (3) met., the thing promised, hia il. 333 Heb. xi. 13, 33, 39, &&
ér- -ayyerAho, mid. in N.T., except pass,, Gal. iii. 19, (1) to promise, with dat., or acc. and dat., or inf., once cog- nate acc., 1d ohn i, 25'¢ (2) to make. profession or avowal of (ace.), 1 Tim. ll, 10, Vi. 21.
en-dyyeAua, aros, 76, @ promise, 2 Pet. i, 4, iii. 13.
én-dyw, to ee upon, 2 Pet. ii. 1, 5; so to charge (él, pers.) with and muke answerable for (acc.), Acts v. 28.
ér-arywviCoua, to contend or sirive ear- nestly for (dat.), Jude 3
ém-alpol(w, pass., to pee together, to crowd, Luke xi. 29.
"En-aiveros, ov, 6, Hpenétus, Rom. xvi. 5. ém-aivéw, @, €ow, Ist aor., emijveca, to commentl, to praise, Luke xvi. 8;
1 Cor. xi. 2.
€m-aivos, ov, 6,commendation, Rom. ti.29 ; praise, Eph. 46,13, 143 Phil. i. rr.
én- -alpw (see 92), to raise up, as hoist- ing a sail, Acts xxvii. 40; to lift up, as the eyes, the hands in prayer, the head in courage, the heel against, ot in opposition; pass., to be lifted Up, to become elated, 2 Cor. xi. 20. Of the ascension of Christ, Acts i. 9
éx-curxivoua, to be ashamed, abs. ; to be ashamed of (ace. or émi, dat.)
én-aitéw, @, to beg, to ask alms, Luke Xvi. 3.
é-axorovdéw, @, to follow (dat.) ; fig,, to imitate, 1 Tim. v. 24.3 1 Pet. ii, 21; to pursue, of conduct, 1 Tim. v. 10; part., attendant, Mark xvi. 20.
ér-axovw, to hearken to fuvourably (gen. pers.), 2 Cor. vi. 2 (LXX.)
ém-aKpodouat, Gpat, to hear, listen to (gen. pers.), Acts xvi. 25.
endy, conj. (emel dy), if, after that, when, Matt. u. 8.
ér-draykes, adv., of necessity, necessarily (with art.), Acts xv. 28.
éx-ay-dyw, trans., fo put (a vessel) owt
kk
48
to sea, Luke v. 4; intrans., fo return, Matt. xxi. 18.
énx-ava-uiuvnokw, to remind, put in re- membrance (acc.), Rom. xv. 15.
éw-ava-ravouat, to rest upon (emt, acc.), Luke x. 6; to rely, to trust in (dat.), Rom. ii. 17.
ér-av-epxouat, to come back, return, Luke x. 35.
éx-ay-lornut, N.T., mid., to rise up against (éi, acc. \, Matt. x. 21.
éx-av-dptwois, ews, h, correction, reforma- tion, 2 Tim. iii, 16,
ér-dyw, adv. abs., or as prep. gen., above, upon ; more than, in price or uuunber ; super ior to, in authority.
‘ém-apKéw, @, éaw, **to sutfice for,” to re- lieve, support ‘(dat. ), 1 Tim. v. 10, 16,
ér-apxla, us, H, G province, division of the Roman empire, Acts xxili. 34.
éx-avais, ews, 7, a dwelling, a habitation, Acts i i, 20 (LXX.)
éx-aipwov, adv., on the morrow. (imépa) emaipiov, on the next day. »
éx-avto-papy. See dvrd-pwpos.
*Erappas, & 6, Hpaphras of Colosse, Col. i. 7, iv. 12; Philem. 23 (contr. from Hpaphroditus, but different from St. Paul’s companion of that name. )
éx-appi(w, to foam up or out (acc.), Jude 13.
*Erappédditos, ov, 6, Hpaphroditus, a
_ Macedonian, Phil. ii. 2 s, iv. 18.
_ én-eyelpw, to raise up, to excite ayainst (émi, ace., or katd, gen.), Acts xii. 50, xiv. 2.
émei, conj., (1) of time, when, Luke vii. 1 (rec.) only ; (2) of reason, since, because, seeing that
éxe:-5h, Conj., since truly, inasmuch as, ‘Matt. xxi. 46; Phil. ii. 26, &. In ‘Luke vii. 1, as a particle of time, edd. for dre 5é.
€mei-5f-mep, COnj., since verily, foras- much as, Luke i. 1.
en-cidov. See epopdw.
éw-eyr (elu, 111), to come after, to follow ; in part., émdy, otoa, dy, fol-
bowing.
erel-mep, conj., since indeed, Rom. ili. 30.
én-e:c-avwynh, is, 1, o bringing in, intro- duchiun, Leb. vil. 9.
7
\
/
VOCABULARY. [ér-ava-pipwhoKxo—ém-Bddro
ér-era, adv., thereupon, thereafter ; marking succession of time, as Gal. i, 18; also of order, 1 Cor. xv. 46; 1 Thess, iv. 17.
ér-éxewa(uépn), adv., with gen., beyond, as to place, Acts vii. 43.
ér-ex-Telvw, in mid., to stretch forwards to, (dat.) Phil. iii. 14.
ax-ev-Birys, ov, an upper garment, John Xx. 7.
éx-ev-5tw, in mid., to put on, as ar upper garment, 2 Cor. v. 2, 4.
ém-epxouat, to come upon, arrive at (émi, acc.) ; to make an assault, Luke xi, 22; to happen; part., approach- ing, Eph. ii. 7; Luke xxi. 26.
ém-epwtdw, @, (1) to interrogate, to ques- tion (two accs., or acc. and zepi, gen., or with ei, rls, &c.); to question judicially, John xviii. 21 ; to enquire after God, Rom. x. 20; (2) to request of (ace. and inf.), Matt. xvi. 1.
én-epdtnua, atos, Té (1 Pet. iii, 21), probably enguiry after God ; “the seeking after God in a good and pure conscience ”’ (Alford).
ér-éxw, (1) to apply (the mind) to, dat., Acts ili. 5 ; (2) to hold out, to ecchibit, Phil. ii. 16; (3) “‘to detain (one’s self)”, to tarry, Acts xix. 22.
ér-nped(w, to injure, to treat despite- Sully, Matt. v. 44; to traduce, to accuse falsely (acc. of charge), 1 Pet. iii. 16,
éxi, a preposition Rove gen., dat., or acc. General signification, upon. For its various applications, see 305. ém-, in composition, signifies motion — upon, towards, or ayainst ; rest on, over, or at; addition, succession, re- petition, renewal; and it is often intensive.
émt-Balyw, to go upon or embark, te mount, to come to or into (émi acc., eis, or simple dat. )
| mt-BdAAw, (1) trans., to cast on or over,
Mark xi. 7; ‘0 put on, as a patch on a garment, Luke v. 36; (2) 5 aa to rush violently on, Mark lv. 373 Jix the mind stedfastly on divthing! | Mark xiv. 72; (3) part., émiBaraAwy, — Salling to, Luke xiv. 12. |
ém-Bapéo —émi-éyo |
ém-Rapéw, &, to burden; fig., to be chargeuble to, 2 Cor. il. 5. ém.-Bibatw, to put or to set upon, as on a beast to ride, Luke x. 34. émi-BAénw, to look upon with favour (with éi), Luke i. 48; James ii. 3. éml-BAnua, atos, rb, a patch on a gar- ment, Matt. ix. 16. émt-Bodw, &, to cry aloud, Acts xxv. 24. émi-Bovah, is, 7, a design against, a plot, an ambush, Acts ix. 24, xx. 19 (plur.) émi-yauBpeiw, to marry by right of affinity (ace.), Matt. xxii. 24. €mi-yewos, ov, earthly, belonging to the earth. Ta entyeua, earthly things.
ém-ylyoua, to arise or spring up, as a»
wind, Acts xxviii. 13.
émi-yiveoKw, (1) to know clearly, under- stand, discern, Matt. vii. 16, 20; (2) to acknowledge, 1 Cor. xvi. 18; (3) to recognise ; (4) to learn (ér1),. become acquainted with (acc. )
érl-yywots, ews, 7, knowledge, acknow- ledgment, Rom. iii. 20; 1 Tim. i. 4.
emi-ypaph, fis, 7, an inscription, a swper- scription, Luke xx. 24, xxiii. 38.
em-ypapw, to inscribe, engrave, write upon, Mark xv. 26; Rev. xxi. 12.
émi-Selxvut (See 114), (1) to show, ex- hibit; (2) to demonstrate, prove by argument.
emt-5éxouat, to receive kindly, 3 John ro.
émi-nuéw, @, to sojourn, as foreigners in a country, Acts ii. 10, Xvil. 21.
émt-dia-Tacocoua, to superadd, Gal. iii. 15.
emt-didwu, to deliver, to give up (ace. and dat.), Matt. vii. 9; Acts xv. 30.
émt-5:-op0dw, to set or bring into order (additionally), Titus 1. 5.
émt- Sie, to set, as the sun, Eph. iv. 26.
ém-elKera,, as, 1, clemency, gentleness, Acts xxiv. 4; 2 Cor. x. 1.
emi-eukhs, €S, gentle, mild, kind, Phil. iv. 5; « Tim. iii. 3
ém-(nTtéw, @, to seek earnestly or con- tinuously (ace. of pers. or thing; also mepl, gen. or inf.) ; to beg earnestly, to desire.
ém-Gavatios, ov, appointed to death, -condemned, 1 Cor. iv. 9.
éni-Geois, ews, 7, a& laying on, as of
- hands, Acts viii, 18,
VOCABULARY. 49
émi-duuew, @, to desire, to long for, to covet, Rom. vii. 7; to lust after, Matt. v. 28 (Luke xxii. 15; see 280, 0.)
emt-Ouunths, ov, 6, an eager desirer of, 1 Cor. x.
émi-Ouula, as, h, desire, eagerness for ; often in a bad sense, inordinate desire, lust, cupidity.
émt- xeadlce, to seat wpon or sit upon, Matt. xxi. 7. (Trans. or intrans., according to the reading.)
émi-Kkaréw, @, €ow, to call upon, to call by name, to invoke in prayer, Acts vil. 59 (abs.); Rom. x. 12, 14 (acc. or eis); mid., to appeal to (acc.), Acts xxv. 11; pass., to be called or surnamed, Luke xxii. 3; Acts xv. 17.
émi-KdAuupa, atos, 76, a covering, a cloak, a pretext, 1 Pet. ii. 16.
emt-KaduTTa, to cover, of sins; to hide, to give over to oblivion, Rom. Ie. 7 (LXX.)
ém-katdparos, ov, accursed, doomed to punishment or destruction, J olin vil. 49; Gal. iii, 13 (LXX.
éml-xeimar, to lie upon (dat)., John xi. 38, Xxi. 9 ; so to press upon, as the mul- titude upon Christ, Luke v. 1; asa tempest on a ship, Acts xxvii. 20; fig., to be laid on, as necessity, 1 Cor. ix. 16; to be laid or imposed upon, as by a ‘law, Heb. ix. 10; to be urgent with entreaties, Luke xxiii. 23.
*"Emixovpeios, ov, 6, an Hpicurean, a fol- lower of Epicurus, Acts xvii. 12.
émi-Kovpia, as, 7 (kotpos, help), assistance, help, aid, Acts xxvi. 22.
ém-kpivw, to decide, to give judgment (ace. and inf.), Luke xxiii. 24.
ém-AauBdve, N.T., mid., to take hold of (gen.), as in kindness, Acts 1x. 27; Heb. ii. 16; to seize, as a prisoner, Acts xxi. 30, 335 met.. fo lay hold of, so as to possess, I Tun. Vi. 12, 19
em-havOdvoua, dep., to “yget (inf, \ Mark viii, 14 ; to neglect, Heb. vi. 10° (gen. or ace.) ; Phil. iii. 14, part., perf. pass. émAcAnopevor, for, gotten, Luke xii. 6.
émt-A€yw, in pass., to be named or called, John v. 2; mid., to choose, Acts XV. 40.
50 - VOCABULARY.
ém-Acitw, not to suffice, to fail, Heb. <1. 82;
emt-Antpovh, 7s, 7, forgetfulness, James i, 25. °.See 257.
éml-Aouros, ov, remaining, 1 Pet. iv. 2.
€mi-Avols, ews, 7, solution, interpreta- tion, 2 Pet. i. 20; either, ‘* No pro- phecy of Scripture is self-interpret- ing,” or ‘‘of exclusive interpreta-
’ i.e, to the immediate outward event alone. See on fdu0s.
emt-Avw, to solve, explain, interpret, Mark iv. 34; to determine on, as a debated question, Acts Xix. 39.
em:-aptupew, @, to testify earnestly, 1 Pet. Vv. 12.
émi-uéAeia, as, n, care for, study, atten- tion, Acts XXvil. a
émi-uéAouar and éoua, odpat, to take Lid of (gen.), Luke x. 34; 1 Tim.
- 5.
ia adv., carefully, diligently, Luke xv. 8
émi-uéveo, (1) to remain, abide, continue ; (2) met., to be constant, or persevering in (dat.)
émt-vevw, to nod, to assent by nodding, i.e., to consent, Acts xviii. 20.
éml-voim, as, 7, thought, device, purpose of mind, Acts viii. 22.
em:-opkéw, @, to swear falsely, Matt. V. 33
el- opkos, ov, perjured, 1 Tim. i. 10,
im-ovotos, ov, adj., enough Jor support, daily, Matt. vi. 11; Luke xi. 3.
em-ninre, to throw oneself upon, to fall on, to recline on (éml, acc.), bio upon, Mark iii. 10 (dat); fig., come upon (dat., or éml, ace. or dat.), as an emotion, &e. .» Luke 1. 12; Acts viii. 16,
«e-mMhoow, to rebuke, to chide, 1 Tim. Voi 1.
Jni-robéw, &, to desire earnestly, to long Jor or after (inf. or ace.); as 2 Cor. v. 2, to lust, abs. ; 3 James iv. 5.
art-xd8qe1s: ews, , vehement desire, strong affection, 2 Cor. vii. 7, 11.
emi-1d0nTOS, oY, greatly desired, lunged Jor, Phil. iv. I.
ém-mwobla, as, 4, like émmdénois, str ron TT]
desire, Kop. XV. 23.
[ éaru-Aelara——émri-o-rohh
émi-topevouat, dep., mid., to come to (wpés), Luke viii. 4.
émip-pamtw, to sew to, or upon, Mark li. 21 (emi, dat.)
émip-plrtw, to cast, or fling upon, Luke xix. 35; of care cast upon God, t Pet. v. 7 (él, acc.)
éxt-cnuos, ov, remarkable, distinguished, in either a bad or good sense, Matt. Xxvll. 16; Rom. xvi. 7.
ém-oiriouds, ov, 6, victuals, food, pro- vision, Luke ix. 12.
ém-oxéerrouat, dep., to look upon, to visit, Acts vil. 23; Matt. xxv. 36, 43; of God, Acts xv. 14; to look out, for selection, Acts vi. a
émi-sKknvdw, @, ‘*to tix one’s tabernacle upon,” to dwell, or remain on (ént, ace.), 2 Cor. xil. 9.
émi-cxidQw, to overshadow (acc. or dat.), Matt. xvii. 5; Acts v. 15. See Luke i. 35.
émi-oxoTéew, @, to act as émicKomos, to take diligent care, to superiniend, 1 Pet. v. 2; mh, lest, Heb. xii. 15.
émt-cxorn, 7S, 2, (1) office, charge, Acts i. 20; LXX.; (2) the office, or work, of one who oversees a church, 1 Tim. iii, 1; (3) visitation for kind and gracious purposes, Luke xix. 44; t Pet. ii, 12.
éxl-cxomos, ov, 6, (1) one who inspects, or takes care of, 1 Pet. il, 25; @ superintendent in a church, *‘bishop,” Acts xx. 28; Phil, i, 1; 1 Tim, ili. 2; Titusi. 7.
ém-omdw, @, to become uncircumcised, I Cor, vii. 18.
éri-crapuat, dep., to know well, to under- stand (ace.), to know, with dri, as, &e. See Synonyms.
émi-ordrns, ov, 6, master (only in Luke, in voe., émordra), addressed to Jesus = Rabbi. See Synonyms.
ém-atéAAw, to send by letier to, to give directions by letier, to write, Acts Xxi, 25, xv. 20; Heb. xiii. 22.
émi-orhuwy, ov, skilful, knowing, James iii, 13.
ém-ornpi(w, to establish, confirm, Acts XIV. 22.
émi-oT0AN, is; 7, an epistle, a letter.
éri-oropilo—ér-darrys |
émi-oroulw, to put to silence, Titusi. rr.
émi-oTpépw, (1) trans., to cause to turn (acc. and émi), as to God, or to the worship of God, Acts ix. 35; (2) intrans., to return, to turn back, as to evil, 2 Pet. ii. 21; to return upon, as a refused salutation, Matt. x. 13 (éml, eis, mpds).
€ri-oTpooh, Hs, 7, a turning, conversion, Acts Xv. 3.
émi-ouvy-dyw, to gather together, into one place, a5 Matt. xxiii. 37.
emi-cuv-aywyh, 7s, 7; a gathering to- gether, 2 ‘Thess. ii. 1; Heb. x. 25.
émi-cuv-Tpéxw, to run together, to a place, Mark ix. 25.
emi-cv-oracis, ews, N, (1) a seditious concourse, Acts xxiv. 12; (2) pres- sure of business, 2 Cor. xi. 28.
émt-opaans, és, ‘‘ likely to fall,” dan- gerous, Acts XXvii. 9.
ér-taxvw, to urge vehemently, to strongly demand, Luke xxiil. 5.
émi-cwperw, to heap up, to obtain a multitude of, 2 Tim. iv. 3.
émi-Tayh, 7S, 1, & command, an injune- tion, 2 Cor. viil. 8; Titus ii. 15.
ém-tdcow, Ew, to command (abs.), en- join upon (dat. of pers., thing in acc. or inf.), Mark ix. 25.
ém-TeAew, w, ow, to finish, to bring to an end, to perform, as a service, Heb. ix. 6; mid., to come to an end,
to leave off, Gal. iil. 3; pass, of.
sufferings, to be endured, 1 Pet. v. 9.
émithdevos, a, ov, fit, needful, James ii. 16.
émi-TiOnut, to put, place, or lay upon (with acc. and dat., or él, acc. or gen.), as the hands (to heal), as stripes, &c.; of gifts, to load with, Acts xxviii. 10; mid., to rush upon in hostility, to oppose, Acts xviii. 10.
éxri-ridw, &, (1) to rebuke (dat.); (2) to charge strictly, or enjoin (iva), Matt. xii. 16, to admonish, to exhort.
ém-riula, as, H, censure, penalty, 2 Cor. a. 6,
ém-tpérw, to allow, permit, Matt. Vili. 21; Heb. vi. 3.
ém-tpowh, js, 7, full power, Acts
XXV1. 12.
VOCABULARY. dl
él-rporos, ov, 6, one who is charged with, (1) a steward, Matt. xx. 8; (2) a tutor, Gal. iv. 2.
em-tuyxdve, to attain, acquire (gen. or ace.), Rom. xi. 7; Heb. xi. 33.
émi-patvw, 1 aor. inf., émiava, 2 aor.’ pass., émepayny; (1) to appear, as stars in the night, Acts xxvii. 20; (2) to shine upon (dat.), Luke i. 79; (3) met., to be known, or manifest, Titus ii, 11.
émi-pdveim, as, tj, an appearance, a manifestation, 2 Tim, i. 10; 2 Thess. i. 8.
émt-pavis, és, glorious, illustrious, Acts li. 20.
émt-pavw, or -patcKw, fut. cw, to shine upon, give light to (dat.), Eph. v. 14.
éri-pépw (see 103, 6), to bring to (ext, ace. ), Acts xix. 12; to superadd (to, by dat.), Phil. i. 16; to bring upon, inflict, as punishment, Rom. iii. 5; to bring against, as an accusation, Acts xxv. 18.
émt-pwvéw, &, to cry out, or aloud, to ery against, Luke xxiii. 21.
ém-packw, to shine upon, to dawn, . Matt. xxvii. 1; Luke xxiii. 54.
ém-xeipéw, @, to take in hand, under- take, Luke i. 1; Acts xix. 13.
émt-xéw, to pour upon, as medicaments on wounds, Luke x. 34.
émi-xopnyéw, &, to superadd, 2 Pet. 1. 5; to supply abundantly, 2 Cor. ix. 10; Gal. ii. §; pass., Col. ii. 19; — 2 Pet. i. 11; to be furnished or supplied,
émi-xopnyla, as, , @ supply, minis- tration, Phil. i. 19; Eph. iv. 16.
ém-xpiw, to rub, or smear upon (én, acc.), John ix. 6, 11.
ér-orxodouew, @, to build upon, fig., to edify, to increase, as in knowledge, excellence, &c., 1 Cor. ill, 10; Eph, ii, 20, .
ér-oKéAdw, to force forward, to run (a ship) aground, Acts xxvii. 41.
érr-ovoudw, to name, or call by a name of honour, pass. only, Rom. ii. 17.
ér-omrrevw, to be witness of, 1 Pet. ii. 32,
ér-dmrns, ov, 6, an eye-witness, a be holder, 2 Pet. i. 16,
52 VOCABULARY.
éxos, ous, Td, @ word; ws eros cimeiy, as ZI may say, Heb. vii. 9. €moupavios, lov, heavenly, celestial, of God, Matt. xvii. 35; of intelligent beings, Phil. ii, 10; of the starry bodies, I Cor. xv. 40. So of king- dom, country, &c. Neut. plur., 7a .éxoupdvia, celestial things, or places, John iii. 12; Eph. i. 3, 20, it 6, iii. 10; Heb. viii. 5; ix. 23. €mtd, oi, ai, Ta, card. num., seven, ‘the perfect number.” So often symbol. in Revelation. of émrd, the seven deacuiis, Acts xxi. 8. émrdkis, num, adv., seven times, Matt. --xXviii. 21; Luke xvii. 4. érrakioxlAwol, a, a, card. num., seven thousand, Rum. xi. 4. éxrw. See elroy and 108, 7. “Epaotos, ov, 6, Hrastus, Acts xix. 22. épyaQopat, coum, dep., perf. elpyacuat, pass., (1) abs., to work, to labour, (2) to accomplish, bring to pass, per- Jorm ; (3) to practise, as virtues ; (4) to acquire by labour, John vi. 27. epyacia, as, n, (1) effort, diligent labour, Luke xii. 53; (2) working, doing, i.¢., the practice or performance of, Eph. iv. 19; (3) work, gain by work, Acts xvi. 16, 19; (4) trade, craft, Acts xix. 25. épyarns, ov, 6, one who works, as a labourer, Matt. ix. 37; applied to workers in the church, 2 Tim. ii. 15; a doer, of iniquity, Luke xiii. 27. épyov, ov, 76 (Fepy-; so Germ., werk), a work, a deed, an enterprise, Acts v. 33; @ miracle, John vii. 3, 21; act, contrasted with Adyos, speech, Luke xxiv. 19; any action, good or bad, Acts ix. 36; John iii. 19; a thing wrought by God, Acts xv. 18; by men, Acts vii. 41; by the devil, 1 John iii. 8. epebifw (Epis), to provoke, to excite, to exasperate, 2 Cor. ix. 2; Col. iii. 21. épeidw, ow, to stick in, to stick Jast, Acts XXvii. 41. épevyoua, touat, to throw out of the mouth, to utter freely, Matt. xiii. 35. épevydw, @, how, to search diligently, John v. 39; Rom. viii. 27; Rev. ii. 23.
[éros— epxopar
épéw, obsolete. See nul, eirov, and 03, 7. epnula, as, 7, an uninhabited tract, a desert.
. Epnuos, ov, deserted, desolate, waste,
barren, Gal. iv. 27; used in the fem., as a subst., for a desert, Luke i. 80; Epnuos tis “lovdaias, Matt. iii. 1; the wilderness of Judea, the tract west of the Dead Sea; Zpnuos, the desert in which the Israelites wandered.
épnudw, @, only in pass., to be made desolate, Matt. xii. 25; to be reduced to nought, Rev. xvii. 16, Xviii, 17, 19.
éphuwots, ews, 7, desolation, a laying waste, Luke xxi. 20; Mark xiii. 14.
épifw (%pus), to contend, dispute, Matt. Xii. 19.
épideia, as, 7 (€pr00s, a worker for wages, perhaps connected with épiov), ‘‘the spirit of a mercenary,” sel/-seeking, or party-spirit, Rom. i. 8; il. i. 16, ii. 3; James iii. 14, 16; plur. in 2 Cor. xii. 20; Gal. v. 20.
gptov, ov, 76, wool, Heb. ix. 19; Rev. i, 14.
Zpis, wdos, 4, contention, strife, quarrel, love of contention.
epipiov, ov, 7d, and Epidos, ov, 6, a kid, a little kid.
‘Epuas, a, 6, Hermas (sometimes written ‘Eputs), Rom. xvi. 14.
épunueia, as, ), interpretation, explana- tion, 1 Cor. xii. 10.
épunvedw, to interpret, explain, translate from one language to another, John i. 39, 433 Heb. vii. 2. ‘Epuijs, ov, 6, the Greek deity Hermes (in Latin, Mercury), Acts xiv. 12. ‘Epuoyéevns, ous, 6, Hermogenes, 2 Tim. TS
éprerdv, od, 746, & creeping creature, a reptile, Acts x. 12; Rom. i. 23.
épudpds, d, dv, red. épvdpd Oddacoa, the Red Sea, Acts vii. 36; Heb. xi. 29.
%pxoua (see 103, 2), to come, to go, of persons or of things; 4 épxépevos, the coming one, i.e., the Messiah, Matt. xi. 3. In Rev. i 4, 8, He who is, who was, and whe is to come; to come, after, before, to, against,
epwrda—ed-ayyedifo]
&c., as determined by the prepo- sition which follows ; to come forth, as from the grave, 1 Cor. xv. 35; Ww come back, as the prodigal, Luke XV. 30.
épwrdw, &, to interrogate, Matt. xxi. 24, to ask, to request, to beseech.
ec0hs, Hros, ) (evvyms, 1 aor., EcOnv), a robe, raiment, Luke xxiii. 11; Acts xii. 21. See Synonyms.
ZcOnais, ews, 7, raiment, Luke xxiv. 4.
écblw, 2nd aor., éparyov (see 108, 3), to eat, to partake of food, used abs. or with ace. of food, or éx, a word like some being understood ; with perd, gen., to eat with; with dat. (as Rom. xiv. 6), to eat to the honour of ; met., to devour, to consume, as rust does, James v. 3; or fire, Heb.
per faa
EoAl, 6, Hsli, Luke iii. 25.
¥c-omtpov, ov, Td, @ (polished metal) mirror, James i, 23; 8¢ ésdwtpou, 1 Cor. Xiii. 12, into, lit., a@ mirror, as the image appears on the opposite side.
éomépa, as, 7 (prop. adj. with dpa), Luke xxiv. 29; the evening, Acts iv. 3, XXVill. 23.
"Ecpép, 6, Hsrom, Matt. i. 3; Luke lil. 33.
Zoxuros, H, ov, (1) the last, remotest, in situation, dignity, or time, 7d érxa- Tov, T& &oxara, as subst., the ex- tremity, last state; (2) used predi- catively as an adverb, Mark xii. 6, 22; absolutely, 1 Cor. xv. 83 (3) the end of what is spoken of, e¢.g., the feast, John vii. 37; the world, John vi. 39, 40; (4) spec. of the Christian dispensation as the last, or latter (days), Heb. i. 23; (5) the last (day), te, the day of judgment, (6) the phrase 6 mp@ros kat 6 écxaros, Rev. i. 11, 17, Ul. 8, the first and the last, describes the eternity of God ; adv. -ws, extremely, i.e., in extremity,
. éerxdrws exe, is at the last extremity, Mark v. 23.
Fow, adv. of place, within, abs., as Matt. xxvi. 58; with gen., Mark xy. 16; with an article preced.,
VOCABULARY. 53
the inner; oi ow, those within the Christian pale, opp. to of w.
écwbev, adv. of place, from within; 7d ézwdev, the interior, t.e., the mind or heart, 2 Cor. iv. 16.
éoarepos, a, ov (comp. of gcw), inner, interior, Acts xvi, 24. ;
Eraipos, ov, 6, & companion, an asso- ciate, a friend; éraipe, voc., aS in English, my good friend, Matt. XX. 13, XXll. 12, XXVi. 50.
érepd-yAwaoos, ov, 6, one of another tongue, or language, 1 Cor. xiv. 21.
Erepo-dibacKkaréw, &, to teach otherwise, to teach a different doctrine, from that of the apostle, 1 Tim. i. 3, vi. 3.
Erepo-Cuyéw, &, to be yoked unjitly, or heterogeneously, 2 Cor. vi. 14,
€repos, distrib. pron., another; inde- finitely, any other; definitely, the other, diverse, different from; adv. -ws, otherwise, differently.
ér1, adv., any more, any longer, yet, still, even, Luke i. 15; also, Heb. xi. 36; implying accession or addi- tion, besides.
érouud(w, dow, to prepare, make ready, to ordain, to appoint.
seonnae as, 7, preparation, promnti- tude.
€roimos, 7 Or os, ov, prompt, prepared, ot things or persons; év éroiu@ exe, to be in readiness, 2 Cor. x. 6; adv. -ws, in readiness, with éxa, Acts xxi. 13; 2 Cor. xii. 14,
ros, ous, 76, a year, Luke iv. 25; dr’ éros, yearly, Luke ii. 41,
ed, adv. (old neuter, from és), well ; ed moeiv (acc.), Mark xiv. 7, to do good to; ed mpdocev, to fare well, i.@., to prosper, Acts xv. 29; used
~in commendation, well! well done ! Matt. xxv. 21. In composition, ¢d retains its proper meaning.
Eva, as, 4, Hve, 2 Cor. xi. 3; 1 Tim. ii, 13. : ev-ayyeAi(w, ow, 1 a0Fr., etnyyéeAioa, perf. pass., ednyyéAiouat, (1) act., fo be a messenger of good, to bring glad tidings to (acc. or dat.), Rev. x. 7, xiv. 6; (2) mid., ¢) announce, to publish (ace. of message), to announce °
MS
54 VOCABULARY.
the gospel (abs.), to preach to, evan- gelize (acc. pers.); pass., to be an- nounced, to have glad tidings an- nounced to one. See Matt. xi. 5; Heb. iv. 2.
ev-ayyéAwov, ov, 76, the good tidings, the gospel. In the epistles, (1) the announcing of the tidings, (z) the gospel scheme, (3) the work of evan- gelization. .
ev-ayyeAtoThs, ov, 6, a messenger of good tidings, of the gospel, an evangelist, Acts xxi. 8; Eph. iv. 11; 2 Tim. iv. 5.
psec be, @, to be. well-pleasing to (dat.), Heb. xi. 5, 6; pass., to be
’ pleased with, Heb. xiii. 16.
ev-dpeotos, ov, acceptable, well-pleasing, Rom. xii. 1; adv. -ws, acceptably, Heb. xii. 23.
EvSovaos, ov, 6, Hubiélus, 2 Tim. iv. 21.
evyevhs, és, well-born, noble, ingenu- ous, generous, Luke xix. 12; Acts Xvil. 11.
evdla, as, 7 (from Zeds, gen. Ards), fair
_ weather, a serene sky, Matt. xvi. 2.
ev-doxéw, w, ow, I8t aor., evddnnoa and nvddéxnnoa, to think well of, to be pleased with, Matt. xvii. 5; 2 Pet. i. 17; to resolve benevolently, Luke xii. 32.
eb-doxla, as, 4, pleasure, good - will,
_ fawour, Phil. ii. 13; 2 Thess. i. 11; Matt. xi. 26.
ed-epyecia, as, 7, a good work done, a benefit bestowed, Acts iv. 9, 1 Tim.
vi. 2.
ev-epyeréw, to do good, to confer kind- ness, Acts x. 38.
ed-epyérns, ov, 6, one who does good to, a benefactor, a patron, Luke xxii. 25.
e-Oeros, ov, well placed, fit, useful, Luke xiv. 35.
evOéws, adv., immediately, soon, speedily, Matt. xiii. 5; forthwith, Acts xii. 10.
ed0v-Spouew, &, to run in a straight course, Acts Xvi, 11, XXl. 1.
ev-Oupéw, @, to be in good spirits, to be cheerful, Acts xxvii. 22, 25; James
V. 13. et-Ovuos, os, cheerful, having good
[et-ayyéAvov—ed-Royla
courage, Acts xxvii. 36; adv. -ws, with alacrity, cheerfully. ev0ivew, vx, to make straight, John i. 23; to guide, to direct, as a ship, James iii. 4. evOus, cia, v, straight; met., right, true; adv., of time, straight, 1.e., immediately, forthwith, as ev0éws, Matt. xiii. 20. - ev0iTns, THTOS, *, rightness, rectitude, equity, Heb. i. 8 (LXX.) ev-Kaipéw, @, to have leisure, or oppor- tunity, Mark vi. 31; Acts xvil. 21; 1 Cor. xvi. 12. ev-Kaipla, as, 7m, convenient time, or opportunity, Luke xxii. 6. ed-ratpos, ov, well-timed, timely, oppor- tune, Mark vi. 21; adv., -ws, oppor- tunely, Mark xiv. 11; opposed to aralpws, 2 Tim. iv. 2. ed-koTos, ov, easy, neut. compar. only; evkor@repov, easier, Matt. ix. 5. ed-AdBew, as, H, reverence, fear of God, piety, Heb. v. 7, xii. 28. See Synonyms. ev-AcBéoua, odjua, dep., pass., to fear; with uh, to take precaution, Heb. xi. 7. ev-AaBis, és, cautious, God-fearing, de- vout, Luke ij. 25; Acts ii. 5. ev-Aoyéw, &, how, to bless, speak well to, to praise, i.e., God; to invoke bless- ings on, t.e., men; to bless, or to ask blessing on, t.e., food, Luke ix. 16, So of the Lord’s supper, Matt. Xxvl. 26; 1 Cor. x. 16. Used of what God does, to bless, to distin- guish with favour. Hence pass. part., edAoynuevos, blessed, favoured of God, Matt. xxv. 34. See Syno-
nyms.
ed-Aoyntés, dv (verbal adj. from pre- ced.), worthy of reverence, of bless- ing, Mark xiv. 61; Rom. ix. 5; 1 Pet. i. 3.
ev-Aoyla, as, H, ‘‘eulogy,” commenda- tion, in a good sense, and in a bad sense adulation, Rom. xvi. 18; bless- ing, praise, to God, Rev. vii. 12; benediction, i.e., wishing or conferring good upon, Heb. xii. 17; 2 Cor. ix. 5; bounty, the blessing which the gospel secures, 1 Pet. iii. 9.
eb-perd-Soros—edxopar]
eb-uerd-Soros, ov, ready to impart, 1 Tim. vi. 18.
Eivlen, ns, n, Hunice, 2 Tim. i. 5.
ev-voéw, @, to be well affected to, to be reconciled to, Matt. v. 25.
ed-voia, as, hn, good-will, benevolence, 1 Cor. vii. 3; Eph. vi. 7.
evvovxl(w, ow, ISt aor. pass., «dvov- xiciny, to make a eunuch of (pass.), to live as a eunuch, Matt. xix. 12.
edvovxns, ov, 7, a eunuch, a minister at court, Acts villi. 27.
Evodia, as, Huodia, Phil. iv. 2.
ev-056w, @, pass. only, to be led in a good way, to be made prosperous, Rom. i. 10; 1 Cor. xvi. 2; 3 John 2.
ev-rreiOns, és, bland, easily entreated, compliant, James iii. 17.
ev-mepl-aratos, ov, easily besetting, or well circumstanced, of a temptation or sin, which has every advantage in favour of its prevailing, Heb. xii. 1.
ev-troila, as, n, doing good, beneficence, Heb. xiii. 16.
ev-ropéw, &, mid. in N.T., to be well to do, to be prosperous, Acts Xi. 29.
ev-tropla, as, 7, substance, wealth, pros- perity, Acts x1x. 25.
ed-mpémeia, as, 4, beauty, gracefulness, James i, 11.
eb-mpda-dextos, ov, well received, accept- able, Rom. xv. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 5.
et-xpoo-eBpos, ov, assiduous, constantly attending on, 1 Cor. vil. 35.
ed-mpdcwréw, &, to make a fair appear- ance, to try to please, Gal. vi. 12.
eSplonee, eiphow, perf., edpnxa; 2nd aor., edpov; Ist aor. pass., evpébnv; (1) to find, to discover, to light upon; (2) to ascertain, to Jind by computa- tion, or by examination, as a judge; (3) to obtain, to get ; (4) to find how, to be able ; (5) to contrive or find out how, by thought and inventing ; Luke xix. 48.
edpo-KAvdwv, wvos, 6 (from edpos, the east wind, and KrAviwy, wave), euroclydon, a stormy wind, a hurricane, Acts XXVii. 14. Another reading is edpa- KiAwy, Lat. euraquilo, a north-east gale.
VOCABULARY.
55
edpt-xwpos, ov, broad, spacious, Matt. |
vil. 13.
ev-céBera, as, 7, piety, godliness, devo- tion, Acts iil, 12; 2 Tim. iii. 5. See Synonyms.
ed-ceBéw, &, to exercise piety, to wor- ship, to reverence, Acts xvii. 23} 1 Tim, v. 4.
ev-oeBhs, és, religious, devout, Acts xX. 23 2 Pet. ii, 9; adv. -ws, de- voutly, religiously, 2 Tim, iii, 1235 Titus li. 12,
e¥-onuos, ov, significant, distinct, easy to be understood, 1 Cor. xiv. 9.
e}-oTAaYXVOS, OY, * full of pity, tender- hearted, Eph. iv. 32; 1 Pet. iii. 8.
ev- oxnpovees, adv., iscureln y, becom- ingly, gracefully, Rom. xiii. 13.
ev- 7XnWoo bn, nS, nh decorum, becom- ingness, 1 Cor. li. 23.
ed-oxhuwv, ov, reputable, decorous, of high standing, Mark xv. 43.
ed-Tévws, adv., strenuously, earnestly, Luke xxili. 10; Acts xviii. 28.
ev-TpareAla, as, 7, jesting, frivolous and indecent talk, Eph. v. 4.
Etruxos, ov, 6, Hutychus, Acts xx. 9.
ev-pnuta, as, %, conmendation, good report, 2 Cor. vi. 8.
eb-pnuos, ov, praiseworthy, laudable, of good report, Phil. iv. 8.
ed-popéw, @, to bear plentifully, to bring JSorth largely, Luke xii. 16.
ev-ppalyw, v@, 1st aor. pass., ebppdvOny and nippdvony, act., to make glad; pass., to be joyful, to rejoice, Luke xii. 19; Acts ii, 26; Rev. xviii. 20.
Evppdrns, ov, 6, the Euphrates, Rev. 1X. 14, Xvi. 12.
edppootyn, ns, i JOY, gladness, Actsii. 28.
ev-xapiotéw, &, to thank, give thanks, acknowledge with gratitude.
e-xapiorla, as, 7, gratitude, thanks- giving, 2 Cor. ix. 11, 12.
ev-xdpotos, ov, thankful, grateful, Col. lil, 15.
e0xh, is, n, (1) prayer, James v. 153 (2) a vow, Acts xvili. 18, xxi. 23.
ebxoua, imperf., nixdunv and edxouny, to pray, 2 Cor. xiii. 9 ( for with iwép or mepi, gen.); to earnestly desire and long for, Acts xxvil. 29.
t
¢%
rer
56
_ &-xpynotos, ov, useful, very useful, 2 ‘Tim, iv. 11.
ev-Wuxéw, @, to be in good spirits, to be animated, Phil. il. 19.
ed-wdla, as, H, fragrance, good odour, 2 Cor, ii. 15.
‘evdyypos, ov, used in neut. plur., evdvuua (uépn), the left, i.e., the hand, Acts xxi. 3; the foot, Rev.
X. 2. -
€p-dAAouat, to leap upon, ent, acc.,
Acts xix. 16,
ep-awaé, ady., once, at once, Rom.
Yi 10,
*Egecivos, ov, Ephesian, t.e., church, Rev. ii. 1.
*E@éowos, ov, Hphesian, belonging to Ephesus, Acts xix. 28, xxi. 29.
"Epeoos, ov, h, Lphesus.
€p-eupeThs, od, 6, an inventor, one who Jinds out, Rom. i. 30.
€p-nucpia, as, 7, @ course, a division (of priests) for interchange of service, Lukei. 5, 8. See 1 Chron. xxv. 8; Nehemiah xiii. 30, &e.
€p-huepos, ov, daily, sufficient for the day, James ii. 15.
ép-ixveoum, dep., 2nd aor., eplxouny, to come to, to arrive at, &xp or és, 2 Cor. x. 13, 14.
ép-iornut, 2nd aor., éxéorny; perf. part., épeorés; always intrans. or mid. in N.T., (1) to stand by, or near, to come in, or near; (2) to come upon, with hostile intent ; (3) to be earnest, 2 Tim. iv. 2; (4) to befall one, as evil; (5) to be at hand, to be present, i.e., suddenly, unex- pectedly.
ép-opdw, @, 2nd aor., émecidov, to look upon, Luke i. 25; Acts iv. 29.
Edpaiu, 6, Hphraim, John xi. 54.
éppaid, a Syriac or Aramean verb, imperative, be opened, Mark vii. 34.
exOpa, as, 7, enmity, Gal. v. 20; Eph.
HO 15,. 37. éxOpds, a, dv, (1) hated, odious to, Rom. xi. 28, used as subst., an enemy ; 6 éx@pés, Luke x. 19, the enemy, 1.@., Satan. exibva, ns, H, a viper, lit., Acts xxviii. 3; fig., Matt. iii. 7, &c.
~ VOCABULARY.
[€d-xpyoros—Zaxaplas
exw, ew, impf., elxyov; 2nd aor., érxov; perf., €rxnka; (1) to have, or possess, in general, with meaning modified by the object, as wealth, any possession, mental character- istic, or quality; (2) with adverbs elliptically, ‘‘to have (one’s self) in any manner,” as KaK@s Exeuw, to be all; éoxdtws Exe, to be at the last extremity ; (3) to hold, to esteem, to have in one’s power, to retain, 1 'Tim. iii. 9; (4) mid., exoum, to be near, or next to, Mark i. 38; used of time, Acts xxi. 26, the day coming, or the next day; 7a éxdueva owrn- pias, things joined to, or pertaining to salvation.
€ws, adv., (1) of time, Zill, until, used as conj., also as prep. with gen. éws ov, or €ws Ssrov, until when, Luke xiii. 8; (2) of place, up to, or as far as, Matt. xxvi. 58; (3) spoken of a limit or term to any- thing, up to the point of, Matt. xxvi. 38; Luke xxii. 51; Rom. iii. 123; (4) with particles, ws &pri, until now; ews éexrduis, until seven times ; €ws %vw, up to the brim, &e.
Ze
Z, §, Zijra, zeta, the sixth letter, orig. of a mixed or compound sound, as if 5s, now generally pronounced z or ts. As a numeral, (’=7; ¢,= 7000.
ZaBovawy, 6 (Heb.), Zebulon, Matt. iv. 13, 15; Rev. vii. 8.
Zaxxaios, ov, 6, Zaccheus, Luke xix.
Zapa, 6 (Heb.), Zara or Zerah, Matt.
aes
Zaxaptas, ov, 6, (1) Zacharias, the father of John the Baptist; (2) Zechariah, the son of Jehviada (2 Chron. xxiv. 20), or of Barachiah (Matt. xxiii 35), slain in the temple, Luke xi. 51. (The prophet of the same name, not mentioned in the N.T., though repeatedly quoted, was also the son of a Barachiah. )
Low —#]
(dw, &, Gis, Cf, inf., Siv; fat., Chow or -omat; 18t aor., £noa; to live, as (1) to be ‘alive ; part., 6 day, the Living One, a description of God, as Matt. Xvi. 16; (2) to receive or regain life, John iv. 50; (3) to spend life in any way, Gal. ii, 145 2 Tim. iil, 123 (4) to live, in the highest sense, to pos- sess spiritual and eternal life ; (s) met., as of water, living or fresh, opposed to stagnant, as John iv. 10.
ZeBedaios, ov, 6, Zebedee.
Ceards, h, dv (éw), boiling, hot, fig., Rev. ui. 15, 16.
(eiryos, ovs, 7d, (1) a yoke (Cebyvums, to join), Luke xiv. 19; (2) @ pair, Luke ii. 24.
Ceuxrnpla, as, 7, a band, a fastening, a chain, Acts xxvii. 40.
Zevs, Ards, acc., Ala, Zeus (Lat., Jupiter), the chiet of the heathen deities, Acts xiv. 13
(éw, part., (éwy, ‘to Soil, ” fig., to be JServent, or earnest, Rom. wii: a1.
GijAos, ov, 6, (1) ) fervour, zeal, in a good sense, J ohn il. 173 (2) hearthurning, jealousy, in a bad sense; Acts Xi. 455 anger, Acts Vv. 17. ‘
(nrdw, @, dow, (1) to have zeal for or against, to desire earnestly (acc.), 1 Cor. xii. 31; 2 Cor. xi. 23 (2) fo be envious or jealous, Acts vil. 9; James iv. 2.
(ndawrhs, od, (1) @ zealot, one very zealous for (obj., gen.), Acts xxi. 20; (2) as a surname, Zelotes, Luke vi. 15; Acts i. 13. See Kavavirns.
Cnula, as, 7, damage, loss, Acts XXvii. 10, 213 Phil. ii. 7, 8.
(nuidw, @, pass., to be endamaged, to suffer loss (acc. of thing lost), Matt. xvi. 26; Phil. iii. 8.
Znvas, &, Zenas, Titus lil. 13.
(ntéw, @, how, (1) to seek, absolutely, as Matt. vii. 7; (2) to endeavour after, to seek for (acc.), Matt. vi. 33; John v. 30; (3) to desire, to wish for, Matt. xii. 46, 47; Col. i. 1.
Chrnua, aros, 76, a question, dispute, controversy (gen., or mepl, gen.)
Chenes ews, question, debate, alterca-
tion, John ili, 25; Acts xxv. 20.
VOCABULARY, 47
(i€dnoy, ov, 76 (E.V., “‘tares’”’), darned, a kind of bastard wheat; xiii, 25-40.
ZopoBaBer, ¥ (Heb.), Zerubbabel, Matt. i, 12; Luke iii. 27.
(Sos, ov, 6, darkness, thick . gloom, 2 Pet. ii. 4, 17; Jude 6, 13,
(uyds, od, 6, a yoke, (1) met, .» Of ser-' vitude, 1 Tim. vi. 1; (2) fig., of any imposition by authority, Matt, xi. 29; Acts xv. 10; (3) the beam of a pair of scales, Rev. vi. 5.
(sun, ns, 7, leaven, Matt. xvi. 6; fig., corruptness, 1 Cor. v. 6, 7, 8.
(undw, @, to ferment, Matt. xiii. 335 Gal. v. 9.
Cwypéw, @ ((wds, aypéw), ‘‘to take alive,” to catch, take captive, Luke v. 103; 2 Tim, il. 26,
(wh, fis (cf. (dw), (1) Life, literal, spiritual, eternal; (2) living, imply- ing duration, Luke i. 75; 1 Cor. lili, 22; Rom. vi. 43 (3) a title of Christ, as the source of life, John v. 26. See Synonyins.
(évn, ns, n, @ girdle, Acts xxi. 113 @ purse, for which the girdle usually served, Mark vi. 8.
(évvuut, or -wviw, see 114, to gird, John xxi. 18.
(wo-yovéw, &, how, to preserve alive, Luke xvii. 33; Acts vii. 19.
(eov, ov, 76, a living creature, an animal, Heb. xiii. 11; Rev. iv. 6, 7.
(wo-mrovéw, &, now, to make alive, to cause to live, 1 Cor. xv. 45; te inspire life, i.e., to invigorate, John vi. 63; pass., to be quickened, made alive, 1 Pet. iii, 18; 12 Cor. xv. 22, 36:
H.
H, 7, "Hta, Eta, é, the seventh letter. As a numeral, 7' = 8; = 8000.
H, a particle, disjunctive, or ; interro- - gative, whether (see 405) ; or com- parative, than (see 320). With other particles, aAr’ 4%, except; } — kal, or else; Hep, than at al John Xil, 43; Hiro... 4, whether... or (ex-
Matt...
58 © | VOCABULARY.
eluding any other alternative), Rom. vi. 16; } why, Heb. vi. 14, most certainly.
tyyeuoveto, to be governor, as proconsul, Luke ii. 2; procurator, Luke iii. 1.
iryepovia, as, 4: rule, as of an emperor,
Luke iii. 3.
Ryeudyv, dvos, governor, as the head of a. district, Matt. ii. 6; especially the procurator of Judea, as Pilate, Felix, Festus.
Nyéopat, odua, dep. mid., (1) fo be leader, 6 iyyotmevos, the leader, or
_ chief (gen.); (2) to deem, regard, reckon (two accs., or acc. with as).
ndéws, adv. (ndvs, sweet), gladly, with good will ; superlative, jd:07a.
#dn, adv. of time, now, already, as Matt. iii. 10; of the immediately future, Rom. 1. 10.
Hdovh, fis, 7, pleasure, i.e., sensual ; lust, strong desire.
75vocpov, ov, Td (nd0s doun), mint.
#9os, ous, rd, as 00s, manner, custom ; plu., #@n, morals, 1 Cor. xv. 33-
jjxw, éw (perf., fka, “only Mark viii. 3), to be come, to be present, see 361, d,
note.
‘HAL, 6 (Heb.), Heli, Luke iii. 23.
HA, a Hebrew word, my God, ct XXvii. 46.
*"HA‘a:, 9m, 5, _ Elias, i 1.e., Elijah.
HAucta, as, 7, (1) stature, size, Luke xix. 3; (2) age, full age, vigour, Jobn ix. 21. So; prob., Matt. vi. 27.
fAixos, n, ov, how great, how much, how little.
fiiuos, ov, 6, the sun, the light of the sun.
fidos, ov, 6, a nail, John xx. 25.
" iepa, as, 7, a day, 2.€., the time from
sunrise to sunset.
TMETEpOS, G, ov, OUT, Our OWN.
npilavhs, és, half dead, Luke x. 30.
fous, ea, v, gen., juloovs, half ; in neut. only, 7d Sov, 7a hulon.
Tus@pwov, ov, 76, a half-hour, Rev. viii. 1.
ivixa, adv., when, whenever, 2 Cor. ili. 15, 16,
Hmep, see H.
[Hyepoveto —O
#mos, a, ov, placid, gentle, 1 Thess. 1 732 Tim. fi. 24)
“Hp, 6 (Heb.), Hr, Luke iii. 28.
ipeuos, ov, quiet, tranquil, 1 i. 2.
‘Hpoins, ov, 6, Herod. Four of the name are mentioned: (1) Herod the Great, Matt. il. ; (2) Herod Antipas, or H. the tetrarch, Matt. xiv. ; Luke xxiil.; (3) H. Agrippa, Acts xii. ; (4) H. Agrippa the younger, called only Agrippa, Acts xxv.
‘Hpwiiavol, ay, oi, Herodians, partisans of Herod Antipas, Matt. xxii. 16.
Tim.
‘Hpwiids, ados, 7, Herodias, Matt. Xiv. 3, 6. ’ ‘Hpwdiwy, wvos, 6, Herodion, Rom.
XVi. 11,
‘Hoatas, ov, 6, Hsaias, i.e., Isaiah.
"Hoad, 6 (Heb.), Hsaw.
houxd@, aw, (1) to rest from work, Luke xxiii. 56; (2) to cease from altercation, to be silent, Luke xiv. 4; (3) to live quietly, 1 Thess, iv. 11.
nouxla, as, 7, (1) quiet, silence, Acts xxii. 2; (2) tranquillity, quiet, mo- desty, 2 Thess, iil. 12.
hovxws, ta, wv, quiet, gentle, x Tim. il. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 4.
ro, see H.
qrTdoua, pass., (1) to be inferior (abs.), 2 Cor. xii. 13; (2) to be overcome by (dat.); 2 Pet. ii. 19, 20.
frtnua, aros, 76, inferiority, diminu- tion, Rom. xi. 12; oss, 1 Oor. vi. 7.
firtwy or fjoowy, irreg., compar. of kakés, inferior, neut. as adv., 2 Cor. xii. 15; 7d frrov, as subst., the worse, 1 Cor. xi. 17.
axéw, @, to sound, as the sea, Luke XXi. 253 as brass, 1 Cor. xiii. 1.
IXos, ov, 6, sound, Heb. xii. 19; Acts ii, 2, fame, or report, Luke iv. 37.
©, 6, and J, Ofra, theta, th, the eighth letter. ~N umerically, 6 =9; = 9000,
OaSSaios—leo-ortyyjs |
Oaddaios, ov, 6, Thaddeus, a surname of the apostle Jude (also called Lebbeus), Mark iii. 18).
OdAacoa, ns, 7, (1) the sea; (2) sea, as the Mediterranean, the Red Sea; (3) Hebraistically, for the lake Gen- nesaret, Matt. viii. 24.
OdAmw, to cherish, nourish, 1 Thess. yes
Oduap, 7, Tamar, Matt. i. 3.
CauBew, @, to be astonished, amazed, Acts ix. 6. So pass., Mark i. 27; with émi (dat.), Mark x. 24.
6@duBos, ous, 7d, astonishment.
bavdou.os, ov, deadly, mortal.
Gavatn-pdpos, ov, death-bringing, James iil, 8.
@dvaros, ov, 6, death, lit. or fig., im- minent danger of death, 2 Cor. i. 10 ; the cause of death, Rom. vii. 13; spiritual death, the second death, the pestilence, Rev. xviii. 8.
Gavardw, &, wow, to put to death, pass., to be in danger of death, Rom. Vill. 36; fig., to mortify, subdue, as evil passions, Rom. viii. 13; pass., to be dead to (dat.), Rom, vii. 4.
Odr7w, Ww, 2nd aor., éraov, to bury.
@dpa, 6, Terah, Luke iii. 34.
Cappew, @, how, to be of good cheer, to have confidence in, «is or év. In imperative, forms from @apcéw are used, @dpcet, Oapocire, take couraye.
Odpaos, ous, Td, courage, Acts Xxviii. 15.
Gadua, aros, Td, wonder, amazement, Rev. xvii. 6.
Oavpdlw, ow, or coua, to wonder, abs., with did, ace. ; émi, dat.; mepi, gen., or dt, ef; to wonder at, admire,
ace.; pass., to be admired, or honoured.
Oavudoros, fa, ov, wonderful, Matt. RXd FG.
Gavuacros, n, dv, wonderful, marvellous, Mark xii. 11, &e.
Ged, as, H, a goddess, Acts xix. 27.
Hedoua, Guat, dep., 1st aor., Cearduny, and with pass. sig., €0ed@yy, to behold, to contemplate earnestly, iv see, to visit.
Beatpicw, to make a spectacle of, so to expvse to contempt, Heb. x. 33.
‘
VOCABULARY. 59
Ogarpov, ov, 7d, (1) a place for public shows, a theatre, Acts xix. 29; (2) spectacle, 1 Cor. iv. 9
Getos, ela, eiov, divine, 2 Pet. i. 3, 4; Td Getov, the Deity, Acts xvii. 29..
Qeiov, ov, 7d, sulphur (from the pre- ceding, ‘‘a magic fume”), Luke XVil. 29.
Oeiorns, THTOS, 7, godhead, deity, Rom. i. 20,
Oewdns, es, sulphureous, Rev. ix. 17.
GéAnua, atos, 746, will, desire, an object of pleasure, the faculty of willing, a decree or decision, lust, sensual in- stinct.
Anais, ews, , will, pleasure, Heb. ii. 4.
OcAw, impf., #@eAov; 1st aor., é6éAnoa; to wish, delight in, prefer, to will, in the sense of assent, requirement, or determination. See Synonyms.
Oeuedtos, ov, fundamental. Hence masc. (A:@os), a foundation, or td deueAroy (Luke), in the same sense. Fig. for the elements of sound doc- trine.
Geucdidwy @, dow, to lay a foundation, to found ; fig., pass., to be firm and stable.
Ge0-didanros, ov, taught of God, 1 Thess. iv. 9.
rbeae ov, 6, the divine, or the theologian, of the apostle John in the title to Rev.
Geo-uaxéw, @, to fight against God, Acts xxiii. 9.
Geo-udxos, ov, 6, a fighter against God, Acts v. 39.
Qcd-mrvevotos, ov (mvéw), God-breathed, inspired by God, 2 Tim, iii. 16.
©cds, od, 6, voc., once @e¢, Matt. xxvii, 46; (1) Gop; 6 @eds, the revealed God, John i. 1; Acts Xvil. 24, &¢.; (2) a god, generically, Acts vil. 43, xii. 22; 2 Cor. iv. 43 Phil. ili. 19; John x. 34 (quoted from LXX.).
Oco-a€Bea, as, 7, piety, towards God, kL Oy iy FO. 5,
Gco-ceBns, és, God-worshipping, devout, John ix. 31.
Gco-arvyhs, és, God-hating, or God- hated, Rom. 1. 30.
60 VOCABULARY.
OcdtHs, THTOS, ‘he deity, godtea the divine nature, Col. 1.
@cd-piros, ov, 6, Theophilus, Luke i. 3; Acts i. 1.
Qepamela, as, , (1) service and (abs. for concrete) servants; (2) healing, as the service which brings health and cure.
fepametw, evow, (1) to serve, minister to; (z) to heal; acc. of pers., and aaré or acc. of disease.
Gepdrwy, ovtos, 6, a servant, Heb. ili. 5.
Bepice, tow, to reap, or gather, as corn; tig., to realize the results of labour. Aeprouds, ov, 6, harvest, the gathering-
time, lit. or fig.
Bepiorrhs, ov, 6, a reaper.
Ocpuatvw, av, only mid in N.T., to warm oneself.
Gépun, ns, 7, XXViil. 3.
G€pos, ous, To, summer, harvest-time.
@cooadrovixeds, éws, 6, a Thessalonian.
@croadorixn, ns, 6, T'hessalonica.
Ocvdas, a, 6, Theudas, Acts v. 36.
Oewpew, @, ‘to behold ; abs., to see, to
_ be a spectator of, to know by seeing, to experience.
Gewpla, as, Hj, a sight, a spectacle, Luke xxiii, 48.
OhKn, ns, 7] (ThOnui), a receptacle, as a scabbard, John xviii. 11.
OnAdw, (1) to givesuck, Matt. xxiv. 19; (2) to suck, at the breast, Matt. Xxi. 16,
OjjAus, ea, v, female (fem., Rom. i. 26; neut., Matt. xix. 4).
Onpa, as, nh, hunting, hence a snare, Rom. xi. 9.
6npetw, ow, to hunt, to catch, Luke xi. 54. .
Onpio-maxéw, @, to fight with wild beasts, 1 Cor. xv. 32.
Onptov, ov, 74, a wid beast, XK, 32,
Onoavpi(w, ow, to lay up, as ni age ;
heat, burning, Acts
Acts
ace. (for any one, dat.), to re- serve. Oncaupds, od, 6, treasure, wealth, stores
of mind and heart, Matt. vi. 19; Luke vi. 45, &c.
[dedrns— Ovyé-rnp
Oryydve, 2nd aor., @€ryov, to touch, handle, abs., as Col. ii. 213; or gen., as Heb. xii. 20; to hurt (gen.), Heb. xi. 28,
GAlBw, yw, to press, to throng, Mark i. 9; fig., to afflict, press with trouble, 2 Cor. i. 6; pass. perf part., TeAmpévos, contracted, nar- row, Matt. vil, 14.
GAtfis, ews, , pressure, affliction, Matt. xiii. 21,
Oviokw, 2nd aor., Eavoy, to die; pert., Tébynka, to be dead.
évntés, h, dv, mortal, dying, Rom. Vili. 11, &e.
OopuvBéw, @, to disturb, Acts xvii. 5;
pass., fo make @ noise, as of lamentation over the dead, Matt. iX. 23.
OdpuBos, ov, 6, noise, uproar, Mark xiv. 2.
Gpaiw, ow, to break, bruise, Luke iv. 18.
Opéupa, atos, Td (tpépw), the young of cattle, sheep, &c., John iv. 22.
Opnvéw, &, (1) to wail, lament, to raise a funeral cry, John xvi. 20; (2) to bewarl, acc., Luke xxiii. 27.
Opjvos, ov, 6, a wailing, Matt. ii. 18.
Opnonela, as, 4, external worship, re- ligious homage, Col. ii, 18; James 1, 26, 27.
6piickos, ov (prop. adj.), a devotee, religious person, James i. 26,
OpiauBetw, ow, to triumph, to lead in triumph, to cause to triumph, Col. li, 15; 2 Cor. ii. 14.
Oplt, rpixds, dat. plur., @piti, 4, a hair, the human hair, or ‘that of animals.
bpodw, @, to disturb, terrify by clamour, — Matt. xxiv. 6; 2 Thess. fi. 2.
OpdéuBos, ov, 6, a clot, large drop, as of blood. Luke Xxil. 44.
@pdvos, ov, 6, a seat, as of judgment, Matt. xix. 28; a@ throne, or seat of power, Rey. iii, 21; met., of do- minion, Rev. xiii. 2; concrete, of the ruler, or occupant ‘of the throne, Col. i. 16.
Oudreipa, wy, rd, Thyatira.
Ouydrnp, tTpés, 7, @ daughter, a Jemale descendant, Luke xiii. 16; met., of the inhabitants of a place, col- lectively, Matt. xxi 5.
Ovydrprov— Tela BAr]
Ovydrpiov, ov, td (dim. of Ovydrnp), a little daughter, Mark v. 23.
@veAAa, ns, 7, a tempest, whirlwind, Heb. xi. 18.
Odivos, n, ov, made of the thyine-tree, a strongly aromatic and hard-wooded tree of Africa, Rev. xviii. 12.
Ouulaua, atos, Td, incense, Luke i. 10; Rev. v. 8.
Ovupuathpiov, ov, Td, the censer, or vessel in which the materials of incense were burned, the altar on which the incense was placed to burn, Heb. ix. 4.
Oupidw, @, to burn incense, Luke i. 9.
Ovpomaxéw, &, to be in great rage with (dat.), Acts xil. 20,
Gupuds, ov, 6, passion, or violent commo- tion of mind, great anger.
Ouudw, @, to provoke to great anger ; pass., Matt. i. 16.
@vpa, as, 7, a door, means of access, Luke xi. 7; Matt. xxvii. 60; met., John x. 7, 9.
@upeds, ov, 6, a (door-shaped) shield, Eph. vi. 16.
Oupis, t80s, 7, aneopening, used for a window or wicket, Acts xx. 9; 2 Cor. Xi. 33.
Oupwpds, od, 6, 4, a door-keeper, porter, John x. 3.
Ovela, as, 7, (1) the act of sacrificing ; (2) the victim sacrificed ; (3) religious service, generally, Phil. iv. 18.
@uciagThpiov, ov, 76, an altar, for sacri- fices, for burnt offerings, Matt. v. 23, 24; Heb. xiii. 10.
Oiw, ow, (1) to slay in sacrifice, Acts xiv. 13; (2) to kill animals, for feasting, Matt. xxii. 4; (3) ¢o slay, generally, John x. 1o.
©wuas, a (from Heb. = Sdidvpos), Thomas.
Odpat, aos, masc., a breast-plate, Eph. vi. 14; 1 Thess. v. 8.
I,
I, 1, "Ira, Jéta, the ninth letter. As a numeral, {= 10; 410,000, *Ideipos, ov, 6, Jairus.
to be greatly angry with,
VOCABULARY. bl
"Iax#B, 5 (Heb.), Jacob, (1) the patri- arch; (2) the father-in-law of Mary, Matt. i. 15.
*IdkwBos, ov, 6, Greek form of preced., James, (1) the son of Zebedee; (2) the son of Alpheus; (3) the Lord’s — brother.. Some identify (2) and (3).
laua, atos, 76 healing, cure, plur., 1 Cor. xii. 9, 28, 30.
"lauBpjs, ov, 6, Jambres, with “lavvijs, 2 Tim. iii. 8.
*lavvd, 6 (Heb.), Janna, Luke iii. 24.
*"lavvijs, ov, 6. See "lauBpijs.
idouat, Guat, idvoua, dep., mid. aor., but passive in aor., perf. and fut., to heal, to restore to health, of body or mind ; with dd, of malady.
"lapéd, 6 (Heb.), Jared, Luke iii, 37.
taois, ews, H, a cure, healing, Acts iv. 22, 30.
taoms, Sos, h, jasper, a precious stone, Rev. iv. 3, xxi. 11, 18.
"Idowy, ovos, 6, Jason, Acts xvii. 5; Rom. xvi. 21; perhaps two persons.
iarpds, od, 6, a physician,
%e, or i5€ (eidov), imper. as interj., behold! often followed by nomi- native.
idéa, as, 4%, XXVlll. 3.
tios, ta, ov, (1) one’s own, denoting ownership, Matt. xxii. 5; John x. 12; also what is peculiar to, Acts i. 19. Hence, ra Zdia, one’s own possessions— home — nation or people — business or duty; of 101, one’s own family, friends, com- panions ; (2) that which specially pertains to, and is proper for, as 1 Cor. iii. 8; Gal. vi. 9; (3) adver- bially, nar’ tar, privately; idig, individually.
iSidt ys, ov, 6, a private person, one of the vulgar, an unlettered one.
iSod (comp. te), lo! behold! calling attention to what may be seen, heard, or apprehended in any way.
*Idouuala, as, n, Jdumea, the O.T. Edom, Mark iii. 8.
idpdés, @tos, 6, sweat, Luke xxii. 44.
*le(aBha, (Heb. ), Jezebel, symbolically used, Rev. ii. 20,
form, aspect, Matt. .
—662 - VOCABULARY.
‘lepd-roAis, ews, 1%, Phrygia, Col. iv. 13.
fepareia, as, 7, the office of a priest, priesthood, Luke i. 9; Heb. vii. 5.
tepdrevua, atos, 7d, the assembly or society of priests, a title applied to Christians, 1 Pet. ii. 5, 9.
ieparévw, ow, to officiate as a priest, to perform the priest's office, Luke 1. 8
Hierapolis, in
1, 8.
*lepeutas, lov, 6, Jeremiah. (In Matt. Xxvii. 9, the name should probably be Zechariah.)
iepevs, éws, a priest, sometimes the High Priest, of Christ, Heb. v. 6 (Ps. cx. 4); of Christians generally,
v. i. 6, Vv. 10.
*tepix%, m (Heb.), Jericho.
iepdv, ob (prop. neut. of iepds), a place consecrated to God, a fane or temple, used of a heathen temple, as Acts xix. 27; of the temple at Jerusalem, as Matt. xxiv. 1; and of parts of the temple, as Matt. xii. 5. See Synonyms.
_tepo-mpemhs, ovs, adj., becoming, or sutt-
able to a sacred character, Titus
ai. 3;
tepds, d, dv, consecrated, holy, of the Scriptures, 2 Tim. ill, 15; 7a iepa, sacred services, 1 Cor. ix. 13.
‘IepordAupa, wy, ta. See ‘lepovtarhu.
‘levoroAupitns, ov, 6, one of Jerusalem, John vii. 25.
fepo-cvAéw, &, to commit sacrilege, to rob God of the honour due to Him, Rom, ii. 22.
iepd-ovdos, ov, robbing temples, sacri- legious, Acts xix. 37.
icpoupyéw, @ (iepdv, epyov), to minister in holy things, Rom. xv. 16.
‘IepovaadAnu, 7 (Heb.), (for form, see 156), Jerusalem, (1) the city; (2) the inhabitants; (3) the Jewish state, or religious dispensation ; (4) fig., of the Christian dispensation.
icpwotvn, ns, h, the priestly office, Heb. Vii, 11.
*Iexoal, 6 (Heb.), Jesse.
"tepode, 5 (Heb.), Jephthah.
*"lexovias, ov, 6, eechonias, or Jelwia- chin.
J [“Iepd-trokus—TopSdvns
*Inoovs, ov (see 25), (1) JESuS, the Saviour; (2) Joshua, Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 3; (3) a fellow-labourer of Paul, so named, Col. iv. 11; (4) Barabbas is so named in some early MSS., Matt. xxvii. 16.
ixavds, 4, dv, (1) sufficient, competent to; inf., mpéds (acc.) or wa; (2) many, much, of number or time.
ixavdtns, nros, 7, sufficiency, ability, 2 Cor. iii. 5.
ixavdw, &, to make sufficient, or com- petent to (two aces., or ace. and éis).
ixernpia, as, 7, supplication, Heb. v. 7.
ixuds, d50s, 4, moisture, Luke viii. 6.
"Ixdviov, ov, 76, Iconium.
iAapés, &, dv, joyous, cheerful, ‘‘hila- rious,” 2 Cor. ix. 7.
iAapérns, thTos, 7, cheerfulness, alac- rity, Rom. xii. 8.
iAdoxoua, doouat, st aor., tAdoOny, (1) to be propitious to, dat., Luke XVilil. 13; (2) to make propitiation, or atonement for, acc., Heb. ii, 17.
iAacuds, ov, 6, a propitiation, atoning sacrifice, 1 John ii. 2.
ikacrhpios, la, ov, atoning, neut, (émi- Geua, covering), the mercy-seat, Heb. ix. 5 (Odua, sacrifice); propitiation, Rom. iii. 25.
fAews, wv (Attic form), propitious, Javourahble, merciful, dat.; tAeés cor! (God be) merciful to thee! Matt. xvi. 22, God forbid !
*1AAvpixdy, od, 7d, IJilyricum, Rom. XV. IQ.
iuds, dytos, 6, a thong, Acts xxii. 25; Luke iii. 16.
iuari(w, perf., pass., part., iuaripévos, to clothe.
iudrioy, lov, 7é (dim of tua = ciua, from Evvum), (1) clothing; (2) the outer garment, disting. from xirév.
iuariofids, ot, 5, clothes, raiment.
iuefpoum, to have a strong affection for, to love earnestly, 1 Thess. ii. 8.
tva, conj., (1) that, to the end that; iva uh, that not, lest ; (2) after words of time, when that. (See 384.)
ivarl; or iva vi; conj., to what end?
"Idan, ns, 7, Joppa.
*lopidvns, ov, 6, the Jordan,
tos —Iopdy ]
tos, ov, 6, (1) poison, Rom. iii. 13; (2) rust, J ames V. 3.
Tovdala, as, 4 (really nay. fem., sc.
vn), Judea.
Aovbuitie, to conform to Jewish prac- tice, to ‘* Judaize,” in life or ritual, ~ Gal. ii, 14.
"Tovdaixds, fh, by, Fesoial or Judaical, Tit. i. 143 -@s, adv., Jewishly, in Jewish style, Gal. ii. 14.
Iovdaios, ala, ov, belonging to Judah, Jewish. Often with subst. under- stood, as avhp, a Jew, &e.
toudatopos, ov, 4, oe the Jewish system, Gal. i. 13, 14.
"Iovdas, a, 6, Judah, (1) Son of Jacob; (2,°3) other ancestors of Christ, Luke iii. 26, 30; (4) Jude, the Apostle; (5) Judas Iscariot; (6) Judas Barsabas, Acts xv. 22; (7) a Jew living in Damascus, Acts ix. 11; (8) a leader of sedition, Acts v. 37; (9) a brother of our Lord, Matt. xill. 55; perhaps identical with (4). See "IdxewBos.
"Iovala, as, 7, Julia, Rom. xvi. 15.
*lovAios, ov, 46, Julius, Acts xxvii. 35%
lovvias, a, 6, Junias, Rom. xvi. 7.
*IovoTos, ov, 6, Justus. Three of the name are mentioned, Acts i. 23, xvii. 7; Col. iv. 11.
immeds, éws, 6, a horse-soldier, Acts XXlii, 23.
immixdy (prop. Rev.‘ ix. 16.
trios, ov, 6, a horse.
ipss, tpidos, 7, the rainbow, Rev. iv. 3.
"Ioadue, 6 (Heb.), Zsaac.
io-dyyedos, ov, like or equal to angels, Luke xx. 36.
‘Ioaxdp and “Ioarxdp (Heb.), char.
Tonut, plur. toner, tore, tract, to know, Acts xxvi. 4; Heb. xii. 17.
"loxapiotns, ov, 6, Iscariot, i.e., & man of Karioth. (See Joshua xv. 25.)
taos, n, ov (or ioos, like, equal (dat.), alike, consistent, as truthful wit- nesses, Mark xiv. 56, 59; ta, ad- verbially, on an equality, Phil. ii, 6; tows, adv., perhaps, Luke xx. 13.
neut. adj.), cavalry,
Tssa-
VOCABULARY. 63:
igétns, TnTos, H, (1) equality, in pro- portion, 2 Cor. viii. 13; (2) equity, Col. iv. 1.
igd-tipos, ov, prized equally, of like value, 2 Pet. ef
igd-Wuxos, ov, like-minded, Phil. ii. 20.
*lopanha, 6 (Heb:) Israel, met., for the whole nation of the Israelites. See Synonyms.
*Iopanairns, ov, 6, an Israelite,
tornus (see 107), trans. in pres., im- perf., fut., 1st aor.; so pass. ; to set up, to place, to fix, as a time, to confirm, to put in the balance, to weigh ; intrans. in perf., plup., and 2nd aor., to stand. still or firm, to endure, tc be confirmed or established, to come to a stand or stop, to cease.
ioropéw, & (forwp, from fonut), to know, ascertain by examination, Gal. i. 18.
icxupds, d, dv, strong, mighty, powerful, vehement, as wind, honourable, in station or office, well established.
icxts, vos, 7, strength, might, power, ability.
icxdw, vow, to be strong, sound, whole, to avail, to gain influence, Acts xix. 20 (eis); to be able (inf.); to have ability for (acc.).
"IraAla, as, Italy.
Iradinds, H, év, [talian,
"Irovpala, as, 7, Tturea.
ixO0di0v, ov, 74 (dim. of ixOis), a little Jis h.
ixOus, tos, 6, a fish.
ixvas, ous, 7d, a footstep, fig., Rom. iv. 12; 2 Cor. xii. 18; 1 Pet. ii. 21.
*Iwdbau, o (Heb.), Jotham.
"Iadyva, ns, ), Joanna.
‘Iwavvas, a, 6, Joannas, Luke iii. 27.
*Iwdvyns, ov, 6, John, (1 1) the Baptist ; (2) the Apostle ; (3) a member of the Sanhedrim, Acts iv. 6; (4) John Mark, Acts xii. 12.
*1HB, 6 (Heb. ), Lob, the patriarch.
"IwfA, 6 (Heb.), Joel, the prophet.
"Iwudy, 6 (Heb.), Jonan, Luke iii. 30.
"lavas, a, 6, Jonas, or Jonah, (1) the prophet, Matt. xii. 39-41; the father of Peter, John i. 42.
twpdu, 6 (Heb.), Joram, or Jehoram, son of j eboshaphat. -
tl
64 VOCABULARY.
"Iwpelu, 6 (Heb.), Jorim, Luke iii. 29.
Iwoapdr, 6 (Heb.), Jehoshaphat.
"Iwas, 7, Joses. Four are mentioned, (1) Luke iii. 29; (2) Mark vi. 3; (3) Matt. xiii. 55; (4) Acts iv. 36. Some think (2) and (3) identical.
"Iwond, 6 (Heb.), Joseph, (1) the patri- arch, (2, 3, 4) three among the ancestors of Jesus, Luke ili. 24, 26, 30; (5) Mary’s husband; (6) Joseph of Arimathea; (7) Joseph, called also Barsabas, Acts i. 23.
"Iwolas, ov, 6, Josiah.
iota, +6, iota, yod, the smallest letter of the Hebrew alphabet, the smallest thing, Matt. v. 13.
K,
“K, x, xdwra, kappa, k, the tenth letter. As a numeral, « = 20; ,« = 20,000, xayed (xépol, naué), contr. for rad éyd (wal euol, nal éué), and J, I also, even I. «aOd, adv., contr. fr. xa &, according as, Matt. xxvii. 10. xad-alpeois, ews, 7, demolition, destrue- tion (opp. to oixodoun, which see). xab-aipew, KabEAa, Kabeidov, (1) to take down, or away, Acts xilil. 29; (2) demolish, destroy, lit. (Luke xii. 18), or fig., 2 Cor. x. 5. xab-alpw, ap@, to cleanse, to clear by pruning, John xv. 2; to purify, i.e, from sin by expiation, Heb. x. 2. xa0-darep, adv., even as, truly as. Kad-drtw, dw, to fasten upon, as a serpent, Acts xxviii. 3 (gen.). kafapiCw, att. fut., caPapid (as xabalpw), to cleanse, ¢.g., a leper, by healing his disease, Matt. viii. 2, 3; from moral pollution, Heb. ix. 22, 23; to declare clean, i.e., from ceremonial pollution, Acts x. 15. kalapicuds, od, 6, cleansing, by wash- ing, John ii. 6; by enjoined rites, Luke ii. 22; by healing disease, Mark i. 44; by expiation, 2 Pet, i, 9.
PTupety—nad-omd (to
kabapds, d, dy, clean, pure, (1) phy- sically, as water, gold, or the body; (2) ceremonially, as Titus i. 15; (3) ethically, as the heart, the con- science, or the worship, Matt. v. 8; 1 Tim, iii. 9; James 1. 27.
kabapérns, nros, 7, purity, 1.6, cere- monial, Heb. ix. 13. ~
Kad-e5pa, as, 7, (1) a seat, lit.; (2) met., @ chair, of authority, as Matt. xxiii. 2.
KabéCoum, to sit down, Luke ii. 46; John iv. 6; év or émi, dat..
ka0-eis, adv. (see 800, B, 4), one by one.
kad-efjjs, adv. (see 126, d), in orderly manner, in succession, sometimes with art. preced.
kad-ebdw, to sleep, to be asleep; fig., to be slothful, 1 Thess. v. 6.
Kabnyntns, ov, 6, a leader, teacher.
kad-hkw, used only impers., it is fit, it becomes (acc., inf.); 7d KabjKov, the becoming, duty.
Kd0-nua, xd0n for xd@noau, imper., KdGouv (see 367), to sit down, to sit, to be settled, to abide, with é¢is, éy, él (gen., dat., acc.), mapd, &c., or adverbs.
«xa0-nucpay, adv., day by day.
xa-nuepwds, h, dv, daily, Acts vi. 1.
xatifw, low, (1) trans., to cause to sit down ; (z) to seat one’s self, preps., &c., as edOnuct; (3) to be sitting (mid. in Matt. xix. 28; Luke xxii. 30).
Kamut, 1st aor., Kabjxa (comp. 112), to let down, Luke v. 19; Acts ix. 25.
xabdornu (and kabiordw, or -ayw), to appoint, Luke xii. 14; to set over, or make chief of and over, Matt. Kxiv. 45; to constitute or make, Rom. v. 19; to conduct, Acts xvii. 15.
«ad-d, ddv. (for xaé’ 8), as, according as, 2 Cor. viii. 12; 1 Pet. iv. 13.
«xaborixds, h, dv, general, universal, **Catholic,” found in the inscrip- tions of seven Epistles (wrongly in the case of 2 and 3 John).
Ka-dAov, adv., entirely; KaddAov ph, Acts iv. 18, not at all.
Ka-orAi(w, in pass., to be fully armed, Luke xi, 21,
ka0-opdw—Kado-818doKados] VOCABULARY. 65
xa-opdw, @, in pass., to be seen clearly, Rom, i. 20.
kab-d71, adv., as, according as, Acts ii. 45; because that, for, Luke XIX. 9.
kab-ds, adv., according as, John vi. 58; even as, 1 Cor. i. 6; when, Acts vil. 17.
kal, conj., cop., and, also, even. For the various uses of this conjunction, see 403.
Kalagas, a, 6, Caiaphas.
kal-ye, conj., and indeed, certainly, truly.
Kaiv, 6 (Heb.), Cain.
Kaivdy, 6 (Heb.), Cainan. Two are mentioned, Luke iii. 36, 37.
kawwds, 4, dv, new, (1) materially, as a garment, Luke v. 36; (2) in reve- lation, &c., as Acts xvii. 19; Mark xvi. 17. See Synonyms.
KavoTNS, NTOS, NH, newness, renovation, (moral and spiritual), Rom. vi. 4,
- Wii, 6, kai-mep, conj., although.
kaipds, ov, 6, time, season, opportunity, Gal. vi. 10; @ particular season, Gal. iv. 10; an allotted time, John v. 4; Acts xvii. 26; @ year (in prophetic style), Rev. xii. 14. See Synonyms.
Kaioap, apos, 6, Cesar, tg to Roman Emperors after Julius, Luke ii, 1, xx. 22; Acts xi. 28; Phil lV. 22.
Kaoapeia, as, 7, Caesarea. Two cities of Palestine, one in Galilee (Caesarea Philippi), Matt. xvi. 13; the other on the coast of the Mediterranean, Acts vii, 40, &c.
kat-rot, conj., nevertheless, though in- deed.
kaiw (af), pf., pass., nékavyat, to burn, to kindle ; pass., to be on fire; fig., to be moved with ardour, Luke XXIV. 32.
Kaxe? (kat and éxe?), and there.
Kaxelbev (kat and éexeidev), and thence, and from that.
xanervos, n, o (kat and éxetivos), and he, she, it.
Kaxia, as, 7, badness, (1) of character,
wickedness, Acts viii. 22; (2) of disposition, malice, ill-will, 1 Cor. v. 8; (3) of condition, ayfliction, calamity, Matt. vi. 34.
kaxo-nbela, as, 7, malevolence, Rom, i. 29.
kaxo-Aovyéw, &, to revile, to speak evil of (ace. ).
kako-mdeia, as, 7, a suffering of evil or affliction, James v. 10,
kako-rabéw, @, to suffer evil, to endure affliction, 2 Tim, ii, 3, 9; James Vv. 13. ‘
kako-Trow, @, abs., to do injury, as Mark iii. 4; to commit crimes, as 1 Pet. iii. 17, ;
kaxo-moids, dv, as subst., an evildoer, malefactor, John xviii. 30; 1 Pet. li. 12.
kands, h, dv, evil, wicked, malignant ; 7 Kady, wickedness, Matt. xxvii. 23; also, calamity, affliction, See Syno- nyms. Adv., -a@s, wickedly ; naxas éxewv, to be iil, or in trouble,
kak-ovpyos, ov, as subst., an evil- worker, malefactor, Luke xxiii. 32.
kax-ouxéo, @, only in pass., part., treated ill, harassed, Heb. xi. 37, Xili, 3.
kakdw, @, ow, to ill-treat, Acts vii. 6, 19; to exasperate, Acts xiv. 2.
Kdkwots, ews, 7, evil condition, affliction, all-treatment, Acts vil. 34.
KaAdun, ns, 7. stubble, 1 Cor. iii. 12.
KdAquos, ov, 6, a stalk, as (1) a reed, growing, Matt. xi. 7; (2) a reed, as a mock sceptre, Matt. xxvii. 29; (3) a pen, 3 John 13; (4) a measuring- rod, Rev. xxi. 15.
KaAéw, @, €ow, KéKAnka, to call, hence (1) to summon, Luke xix. 13; (2) to name, Matt. i, 21, x. 25; (3) to invite, John ii. 2; (4) to appoint, or select, for an office, Heb. v. 4; (5) pass., to be called, or accounted, i.e., to be, Matt. v. 9, 19; James il. 23.
KaAAL-€Aaios, ov, n, a good olive tree.
kaAAiwy (compar. of KaAds), better ; adv., kaAAiov, Acts xxv. 10,
Kado-d:ddoKaros, ov, 6, 4, a teacher of what is good, Titus ii. 3.
66 VOCABULARY.
KoAol Aiméves, Fair havens. A place of good harbourage in the island of Crete, Acts xxvii. 8.
KaA0-Toiew, &, to act well, or honour- ably, 2 Thess. iii. 13.
nadds, h, dv, fair, hence (1) physically beautiful, of good quality; (2) morally good, honourable, noble ; (3) excellent, advantageous; adv., -@s, well, fairly.
xddupua, atos, 7d, a covering, veil, 2 Cor. iil. 13.
KaAUTTW, ve, to cover, Luke viii. 16; 1 Pet. iv. 8; to hide, as for protec- tion, Luke xxiii. 30.
mdunaos, ov, 6, n, a camel.
Kduivos, ov, 7, a furnace, Rev. i. 15.
Kap-wiw (kard and piw), to shut, close, e.g., the eyes, Matt. xiii, 15; Acts XXviil. 27.
Kduvew, KauO, pi., néxunka, to be weary, Saint, to be sick, Heb. xii. 3; James
tM Se
Kauol, Kame (see Kaya).
kdurtw, yw, to bend, as the knee, Rom, xiv. 113 Phil. ii. 10.
kiv (kal ev), and if, even if, but, at least, although, Matt. xxvi, 35; John viii. 14.
Kava, 7 (Heb.), Cana.
Kavavirns, ov, 6, a Cananite (from the Hebrew, meaning the same as Ze- lotes), Matt. x. 4; Mark iii. 18. Some read Kavayaios.
Kavddkn, ns, 7, Candace, Acts viii. 27. °
xavav, duos, 6, (1) a rule of conduct ; (z) @ limit or sphere of duty, 2 Cor. x. 33; *‘canon.”
Kamep-raovp, or Kapap-vaovu, 7 (Heb.), Capernaum.
kamnrevw, to make gain by adulterating, as wines, &. Used of God’s word, 2 Cor, ii. 17.
kamrvés, ov, 6, &@ smoke, @ vapour, a cloud, Rev. Xv. 8
Kamrmadoxia, as, n, Cappadocia.
xapdia, as, h, the heart, met., as the seat of the affections, but chiefly of the understanding. See Synonyms, Fig., for the middle of a thing, as Mati. xii. 40.
_ [Kadoit—xar-ayyeheis
xapd.o-yveorns, ov, 6, one who knows the heart.
kaprds, ov, 6, fruit, produce, Luke xii, 17; met., for children, Acts il. 30; deeds, “conduct, the fruit of the hands, Matt. iii. 8; effect, result, emolument, Rom. vi. 21. Praise is called the fruit of the lips, Hee xiii. 15.
Kadpmos, ov, 6, Carpus, 2 Tim. iv. F
kaptro-popéw, @, haw, to bring forth, as the earth its fruits, Mark iv. 28; mid., to bear fruit to oneself, to in- crease, Col. i. 6.
kapro-pédpos, ov, bringing forth fruit, Fruitful.
kapTepew, @, how, to endure, persevere, to persist with courage, Heb. xi. 27.
Kdpous, ous, 7d, @ mote, a splinter, or light film in the eye, Matt. vil. 3.
kata, prep., gov. the gen. and accus. cases, down, hence gen., down from, against, &c. Acc., according to, against, &c. (see 124, 147, a). In composition, kara may import de- scent, subjection, opposition, distribu- tion, and with certain verbs (as of destruction, diminution, and the like) is intensive = ‘‘ utterly.”
kata-Baivw, Bioouat, BéBnra, 2nd aor., karé8nv, to go or come down, spoken of persons and of things, Acts viii. 26; of gifts from heaven, of the clouds, "storms, lightnings ; ‘also of anything that falls; Luke xxii. 44.
kara-BdAAw, Ist aor., pass., KaTreBAHOnY, to cast down (acc.) ; mid., to lay, as asa foundation, Heb. vi, I.
Kata-Bapéw, @, to weigh down, to op- press, 2 Cor. xi. 16,
Kard- Baris, ews, n, descent, declivity, Luke xix. 37.
kata-BiBa~w, to bring down, cast down, Matt. xi. 23.
kara-BoAn, as, 7, a founding, laying the foundation of, Matt. xiii. 35. So Heb. xi. 11, ‘*for the foundation of a posterity.”
Kata-BpaSeiw, to deprive of due reward, to circumvent, Col. ii. 18.
Kat-ayyeAebs, ews, 6, a proclaimer, a herald, Acts xvii, 18,
Kat-ayyAho —Kar-addicco] VOCABULARY. 67
kat-ayyehAw, to declare openly, to preach; pass., to be celebrated, or publicly pr oclaimed and spoken of, Rom. 1. 8.
kara-yeddw, @, to laugh at, deride, Mark V. 40.
Kata-yvookw, to condemn, blame, gen. of pers.
Kat-c’yvupt, to break in. pieces, to break down, Matt. xii. 20.
kar-dyw, to conduct down, Acts ix. 303 to bring down to land, as a ship, Luke v. 17. Hence, pass., to come to land, Acts xxi. 3, XXvii. 3.
kar- avout Copas: dep., to contend against, subdue (ace. ), Heb. xi. 4%
karadéw, @, to bind, as wounds, Luke X. 34.
Kard-OnAos, oy, vin, FC
xaTa-diKndlw, to condemn, to pronounce sentence against, Matt. xii. 7; Luke
quite evident, Heb.
vi. 37. kata-dioKw, to follow closely, to pursue intently, Mark i. 36. KaTa-dovAdw, @, dow, to reduce to slavery, 2 Cor. xi. 20; Gal. ii. 4. kara-duvacreiw, to exercise power over, to oppress, Acts x. 38; James ii. 6. Kat-aoxtvw, to dishonour, 1 Cor. xi. 4; to put to shame, 1 Cor. i. 27; to shame, as with disappointed ex- pectation, 1 Pet. ii. 6; pass., to be ashamed, Luke xiii. 17.
kaTa-Kalw (aF), avow, to burn up, to consume entirely, Matt. 111. 12; Heb. xn i'r:
KaTa-Kadv@rw, in mid., to wear a veil, .
1 Cor, xi, 6, 7.
Kara-Kavxdouat, Guat, to glory, to re- joice against, to glory over (gen.), Rom. xi. 18; James il. 13.
Kard-Keipan, to. recline, as the sick, Mark i. 30; as at table, Mark xiv. 3.
kata-KAdw, @, to break tw pieces, Mark vi. 41; Luke ix. 16.
Kara-KAciw, to shut up, confine, Luke ili. 20; Acts xxvi. 10, kara-KAnpo-d0Téw, @, to give by lot, to distribute an inheritance by lot, Acts xiii, 19.
karaxAlyw, vd, to cause to lie down, or recline ; mid., to recline, as at table, Luke ix. 14.
KaTa-KrAUCw, ow, to inundate, deluge, pass., 2 Pet. iii. 6.
Kata-KAvouds, ov, 6, a deluge, flood, 2 Pet ii. 5.
kar-aKodov0éw, @, to follow closely (abs. or dat.), Luke xxiii. 55; Acts XVl. 17.
kara-Kénte, vw, to wound, Mark v. 5
kata Kpnuvitw, ow, to cast down head- lony, Luke iv. 29.
kard-Kpyia, aros, 76, Rom. viii. 1.
katra-Kpivw, ve, to give judgment against, to adjudge worthy of punishment (gen. and dat.), to condemn, Matt. xx. 18; Rom. ii. 1, viii. 3.
Kard-Kpiows, ews, 7, the act of condemna-’ tion.
kara-kuptevw, to exercise authority over, Matt. xx. 25; to get the mastery of, Acts xix. 16 (gen.).
kara-Aaréw, @, to speak against (gen.), James iv. 11; 1 Pet. iii. 16.
kata-AaAla, as, fem., evil speaking, obloquy, reproach.
KaTaAadus, ov, 6, 7, detractor.
kaTa-AauBave, Anvouat, to seize or lay hold of, John viii. 3, 4; to grasp, as the prize in public games, Phil. ili. 12; mid., to comprehend, i.e., to hold, with the mind; to perceive, to apprehend, ort, or ace. and inf., Eph. iii. 18.
Kara-Aéyo, In pass., among, 1 Tim. v. 9.
KaTd-Aeuua, atos, Td, a remnant, a residue.
kara-Aclrw, bw, to leave utterly, as (1) to depart from, to forsake ; (2) to re- serve, or leave remaining, Rom. xi. 4.
kara-Abd¢w, ow, to stone, to destroy by stoning, Luke XX. 6.
KaT-aAAayh, is, 7, reconciliation, Rom. Vv. 11, XL 15.
kat-adkAdoow, tw, to reconcile, acc. and dat., 2 Cor. v. 18, 19; pass., to be, or to become reconciled, 1 Cor, Vil. 11; 2 Cor. v. 20,
condemnation,
a calumniator,
to be reckoned
68 VOCABULARY. [kard-Aovros—xara-ckevdto
ward-dovros, ov, plur., the rest, the residue, Acts xv. 17.
kard-Avua, aros, 76, a lodging-place, a caravanserai, Luke ii. 73 @ guest- chamber, Luke xxii. 11.
kata-Avw, vow, to loosen down, (1) lit. of. a building, to destroy, Mark xiv. 58; (2) fig., of law or com- mand, te render void, Matt. v. 17; (3) met. ., of beasts of burden, to
unbind. Hence to halt, to lodge, Luke ix. 12.
kata-pavOdyw, 2nd aor., Karéualoy, to consider, to note accurately, Matt. ‘vi, 28.
Kata-uaptupéw, @, to bear testimony (ace.) against any one (gen.), Matt. XXVi. 62,
kata-uévw, to remain, abide, Acts i. 13.
kara-udvas, adv., separately, by one- self, privately.
kat-uvd-Oeua, atos, 7d, curse, Rev. XXii. 3.
xat-ava-Oeuari{w, to curse, devote to destruction, Matt. xxvi. 74.
kat-ayv-arioxw, to consume, to devour, as fire, Heb. xii. 29.
kata-vapkdw, &, how, to be idle, or idly burdensome to (gen.), 2 Cor. xi. 8.
kara-vetw, to nod, to make signs to, dat., Luke v. 7.
kata-voéw, @, (1) to observe carefully, remark, consider ; (2) to have respect to, to regard (ace. ).
Kxar-avtdw, @, to come to, to arrive at, to attain, with «is, Acts xvi. 1; Phil. iii. 11.
katd-vutis, ews, 4, stupor, deep sleep, Rom. xi. 8
xata-viocw, tw, 2nd aor. pass., KaTe- viyny, pass., to be pricked through, to be greatly moved, Acts li. 37.
kat-atidw, @, wow, pass., to be counted worthy, or fit for (gen.), Luke xx. 35; 2 Thess. i. 5.
kara-raréw, @, to trample on, to tread under foot (acc. )s Luke viii. 5.
kard-mavors, ews, 7, rest, place of rest, Heb. iv. I, 3, 10, 11; Acts vii. 49.
Kata wavw, (1) trans., to hold back, or restrain, acc, (also Tov Bh, and inf. ), Acts xiv. 18; to give rest, or to cause
to rest, Heb. iv. 8; (2) intrans., to rest, or cease from, amd, Heb. iv. 4.
Kara-mréracua (werdvvuui), aros, Td, a veil, or curtain, Luke xxiii. 45.
kata-rive, 2nd aor., KaTémoy; 1st aor. pass., karerd@nv; to drink up, OF swallow completely, Matt. xxiii. 24 3 ; fig., to overwhelm, Heb. xi. 29; to destroy, 1 Cor. xv. 54.
kata-nimtw, 2nd aor., Katémrecov, to Jall down prostrate, or dead, Acts XXVi. 14, XXViii. 6.
kata-mwAéw (€F), evoouat, ist aor, Karé- evoa, to sail to, Luke viii, 26.
kara-rovew, &, in pass., to be worn down, as by affliction, 2 Pet. ii. 7; to be oppressed, Acts vii. 24.
kara-wovti(w, to sink down, to be drowned, Matt. Xiv. 30, xviii. 6.
kaTdpa, as, 7, cursing, J ames iil, 105 curse, of the law, Gal. iii. 10.
katapdouat, Gua, to imprecate, to devote to destruction, to wish evil to, Mark xi, 21; Matt. v. 44; pass., perf., part., accursed, Matt, xxv. 41.
kar-apyéw, @, $00, to render useless, to make vain, or to no purpose, Luke xiii, 7; Rom. iii. 3; to bring to an end, to cease from, 1 Cor. vi. 13, Xv. 243; to cease to be connected with, to apostatize, Gal. v. 4.
kat-api0uew, &, to number among, Acts L 17
kar- sate tow, to refit, to repair, Matt. iv. 21; to perfect, to complete,. 1 Thess. iii. 10; 1 Pet. v. 10; to be thoroughly united, 1 Cor. i. 103 to reclaim, from error or sin, Gal. vi. 1.
Kat-dptiois, ews, %, restoration, a being made perfect, 2 Cor. xiii. 9.
kat-aptiouds, od, 5, confirmation, Eph. iv. 12.
kara-oelw, ow, to wave the hand, to beckon, Acts xii. 17.
kata-cKkdmtw, Ww, to demolish, by digging under, to overthrow, to raze, Acts xv. 16,
kara-cKrevdtw, dow, to prepare fully, to build, to adjust, Matt. xi. 10; Luke i. 17; Heb. iii. 3, 4.
Kara-cKnvso—nar-ep-Lornpe] VOCABULARY, 69
kata-oKnvdw, @, dow, to dwell, as birds on trees, &c., Matt. xiii. 32; to remain, Acts ii, 26,
KaTa-cKhywois, ews, 7, @ dwelling- place, a haunt, as of birds, Matt. Viii. 20,
kara-oKidiw, ow, to overshadow, Heb. ix. 5.
kara-ckoTéw, @, to inspect narrowly, to plot against, Gal. ii. 4.
KaTa-ckords, @ scout, a spy.
kata-coplCouat, couat, to deal deceitfully with, to employ craft against, Acts Vii. 19.
KaTa-oTéAAw, AG, Ist aor., KaTéoTe:Aa, to appease, restrain, Acts Xix. 35, 36.
katd-ornua, atos, 76, behaviour, con- duct, Tit. ii. 3.
KaTa-cTOAn, Hs, 7, raiment, outer cloth- ing, 1 Tim. ii. 9. . kata-oTpépw, yw, to overthrow, Matt.
xxi. 12; Mark xi. 15.
Kata-oTpnvidw, w, dow, to grow wanton agamst (gen.), 1 Tim. v. 11.
KaTa-oTpoph,: 7s, %, an overthrow, ‘‘catastrophe,” 2 ‘Tim. ii. 14; 2 Pet. ii, 6.
KaTa-cTpavyuml, orpdow, to strew down, or about, 1 Cor. x. §
kata-cipw, to drag, to trail along, Luke xii. 58.
kata-codtw, tw, to slay, to slaughter, Luke xix. 27.
kara-oppayl(w, ow, to close, to seal up, as a book, Rev. v. 1. -
KaTd-oXEGIs, ews, 7, & possession, Acts Vil. 5, 45-
Kata-TlOnut, Ohow, Ist aor., KaTéOnka, to deposit, as a body in a tomb, Mark xv. 46 (mid.); to exhibit, or to show to, ace. (xdpw) and dat., Acts xxiv. 27, xxv. 9, ‘‘to lay up kindness for one’s self.”
KaTa-Toun, 7s, 7, paronomasia with mepitoun, mutilation, Phil. iii. 2.
kara-toketw, to transfix, Heb. xii. 20.
kara-Tpéxw, 2nd aor., Karédpauov, to run down (éml, acc.), Acts xxi. 32.
KaTa-oayw, see Kater Olu,
kata-pépw, katolow, 1st aor., KaThveyKa, pass., Kxatnvexons, to throw down,
as an adverse vote, Acts xxvi. 10; pass., to be borne, or thrown down, to fall, Acts xx. 9.
kata-petyw, 2nd aor., karépuyor, to flee Jor refuge, with eis, Acts xiv. 6; ‘with inf., Heb. vi. 18.
kata-p0elpw, pass., perf., narépOapua ; 2nd aor., KarepOdpny, (1) to corrupt utterly, 2 Tim, iii. 8; (2) to destroy, 2 Pet. ii. 12.
kata-piréw, &, to kiss affectionately, or repeatedly (acc.), Matt. xxvi. 49; Luke vii. 45; Acts xx. 37.
kata-ppovéew, &, to think lightly. of, Matt. xviii. 10; to neglect, or to care nothing for, Matt. vi. 24 (gen.).
KaTa-ppovnThs, ov, 6, a despiser, a scorner, Acts xili. 41.
kata-xéw (€F), evow, Ist aor., KaTéxea ; to pour down upon, Matt. xxvi. 7.
karaxOdvios, ov, subterranean, Phil. li. 10, KaTa-xpdomat, Guat, to use overmuch, to abuse, 1 Cor. vii. 31, ix. 18 (dat.). kata-~ixw, to cool, to refresh, Luke XVI. 24. kat-eldwaos, ov, full of idols, Acts Xvii. 16.
kat-évaytt, adv., or as prep. with gen., over against, before, in presence, or in sight of.
kat-evomiov, adv., in the very presence of (gen.).
kat-ekovord(@, to exercise authority against, or over {gen.), Matt. xx. 25.
Kar-epyd(oua, drouat, with mid. and pass., aor. (augm., «i-), to work out, to do fully, to produce, Rom. iv. 153 to make an end of, Eph. vi. 13; to work, to practise.
KaT-€pxoua, 2nd aor., descend, come down to.
kateciw, fut. Karédoua:; 2nd aor., karéparyov, to eat up, to devour entirely, lit. or fig., Matt. xiii. 4; John ii. 173 Gal. v. 15.
kat-evdivw, va, to direct well, to guide successfully, 1 Thess. iii, 11.
kat-ep-lornur, 2nd aor., Kateréorny, to make an assault upon, Acts XViii, 12.
KkaT7nAdoy, to
70 VOCABULARY.
kar-éxw, katacxiow, to seize on, to hold fast, to retain, possess, to prevent, from doing a thing (70d, wh, with inf,),-to repress, Rom, i. 183; 7d
. wdtexov, the hindrance, 2 Thess. i. 6, 73; Karetxov eis toy aiyiaddy, they held for the shore, Acts xxvii. 40.
Katnyopéw, @, now, to accuse, to speak against, abs., or with person in gen. ; charge in gen. alone or after mept or kata; pass., to be accused ;
_ With dd or apd, of the accuser.
Kat-nyopla, as, 7, @n accusation, a charge, pers. in gen. alone, or after
Katd, charge also in gen.
-Kat-fyopos, ov, 6, an accuser, John Vill. 10,
Kathe, as, 7, James iv. 9.
KaTnxéw, &, how, perf., pass., Kath- xnua (hxos), to instruct orally, to
teach, ‘‘ catechize ;” pass., to be in- Sormed of, Luke i. 4.
kat’ idiay, separately, privately, by one- self (see idios).
xat-idw, @ (ids), to consume by rust, James v. 3.
kat-tcxvw, to prevail against, to get the upper hand of (gen.), Matt. xvi. 18;
_ Luke xxiii. 23.
kat-orew, @, (1) intrans., to dwell, with év, eis (const. preeg.), émi, gen. .or adverbs of place; (2) trans., to dwell in, to inhabit, acc.; fig., of qualities or attributes, as abiding (spoken of Christ, dwelling in his saints, Eph. iii. 17).
kat-olknois, ews, , a dwelling, habita-
tion, Mark v. 3
KaT-ouKnthpiov, ov, 76, a dwelling-place, Eph. ii. 22; Rev, xviii. z.
xat-oula, as, 7, a dwelling, a habita- tion, Acts xvii. 26,
kar-orrpi(w, mid., to behold, as in a mirror, 2 Cor. iii. 18.
xat-dp0wpna, aros, 76, an honourable act well performed, Acts xxiv. 3.
Kdrw, adv., downwards, down, Matt. iv. 6; the lower part, Mark xiv. 66; with relation to time, under, Matt. ii. 16; comparat., Kxatwrépw, yet lower. sii
dejection, sorrow,
[kar éx@—kevo. Sogia
kaT@tepos, a, ov (xdtw), lower, Eph. iv. 9 (on which see 259),
Kavua, ards, 76 (kaiw), heat, scorching heat, burning, Rev. vii. 16, xvi. 9. kavuati(w, ow, to scorch, burn, torture by fire, Matt. xiii. 6; Mark iv. 6, Kavows, ews, 7, @ burning, burning up, Heb. vi. 8. Kavodw, @, to set on fire, pass., to be
burned, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 12.
kavowv, wos, 6, (1) scorching heat ; (2) perh. an arid wind, from the E., James i. 11 (see Hos. xii. 1, &e.).
kautnpia(w, to brand, or sear, as with a hot iron ; fig., pass., 1 Tim. iv. 2.
Kavxdouot, Guar, 2nd pers., Kavxaoa: ; fut., joopa, to glory, to boast, to exult, both in a good sense and in a bad, 1 Cor. i. 29; Eph. ii. 9; followed with prep., év, mepl, gen., bmép, gen., él, dat.
kavxnua, atos, T6, (1) glorying, boast- ing; (2) the object, or ground of boasting, Rom. iv. 2.
kaixnois, ews, 7, the act of boasting, glorying.
Kapapvaoip (see Kamepyaotu), Caper- naum.
Keyxpeal, wy, ai, Cenchree, the port of Corinth, Acts xviii. 18; Rom. XVi. 1.
Kédpos, ov, 4, a cedar, John xviii. 1; probably a mistaken reading for following.
Kedpév, 6 (Heb., dark, or turbid), Cedron, a turbid brook between the Mount of Olives and Jerusalem.
Keiuat, oat, Tar; impf., éxeluny, oo, To; to lie, to recline, to be laid, Luke xxill. 53; 1 John v. 19; met., to be given, as laws, 1 Tim. i. 9.
keipla, as, 7, a band, or a roller, of linen, John xi. 44.
keipw, Kep@, to shear, as sheep, to cut of, as the hair; mid., to shave, Acts viii, 32, xviii. 18; 1 Cor. xi. 6,
KéAcvopa, atos, 76, a shout, a crying out, 1 Thess, iv. 16.
KeAetw, ow, to command, to direct.
Kevo-dotia, as, '%, vain-glory, inordinate desire for praise, Phil. i. 3.
xevs-Sofos—(vSuves]
xevé-5okos, ov, vain-glorious, covetous of commendation.
xevds, h, dv, empty, hence destitute, Mark xii. 3; fruitless, Acts iv. 25; fallacious, Eph. v. 6; foolish, James li. 20; adv., -@s, in vain, to no purpose.
Kevo dwvia, as, 7, vain, empty dis- puting, useless babbling, 1 Tim, vi. 20; 2 Tim, ii, 16,
kevdw, @, dow, to empty oneself, or divest oneself of rightful dignity, Phil. ui. 7; fo render useless, 1 Cor. i. 17; to falsify, as ground of boasting.
Kevtpov, ov, 76, & goad, a spike, a sting, as of a scorpion, 1 Cor. xv. 55, 56;
' Acts ix. 5.
Kevtupiwyv, wros, 6, Latin (see 154, c), a centurion, the commander of a hundred foot soldiers.
kepaia, as, n, a horn, a point, a flourish at the extremity of a letter; met., the minutest part, Matt. v. 18; Luke xvi. 17.
Kepamevs, ews, 6, a potter.
_ Kepauurds, h, bv, made of potter's clay,
earthen, Rev. ii. 27.
kepduuov, tov, td, an earthen vessel, a
pitcher, Mark xiv. 13.
Képapos, ov, 6, w tile, of potter’s clay Luke v. 19.
kepdyvuut (see 113, 114), to mix, to prepare a draught, to fill one’s cup, Rey. xiv. 10, Xvili. 6
wépas, aros, 76, a horn, as Rev. v. 6, &c.; fig., for strength, Luke 1. 69; @ projecting point, Rey. ix. 13.
kepatiov, lov, 76, a pod, a kind of sweet broad bean, Luke xv. 16.
Kepdaivw, ava, ist aor., éképdnoa, to gain by trading, to obtain, to par-
- take of, to win over, to gain, tc Christ, to virtue, to religion, Mark vill, 36; 1 Cor. ix. 19-22.
Képdos, ous, 76, gain, profit, Phil. i. 21, 1b 7 py Die ete
képua, atos, Té (Kelpw), a small piece of money, John il. 15.
KepuatioThs, ov, 6, a money-changer.
kepddraiov, aiov, 76, (1) @ sum of money, Acts xx. 28; (2) a sum, summary recapitulation,
VOCABULARY. 71
Keparadw, &, dow, to smite on the head, Mark xii. 4.
Keparn, js, 7, the head, of human beings or animals, for the whole person, Acts xvili. 6; the summit, or copestone, of a building, Luke XxX. 17; met., implying authority, head, lord, 1 Cor. xi. 3; Eph. i. 22.
keparls, l50s, H, the top of anything, the top or knob of the roll on which Hebrew manuscripts were rolled ; hence, the roll itself, Heb. x. 7 ,
kivoos, ov, 6, Latin (154, d), a tax, a
' poll-tax, Matt. xvii. 25.
Kijwos, ov, 6, a garden, Luke xiii. 19 ; John xviii. 1, 26.
kntoupds, ov, 6, a@ gardener, John ENS.
knplov, ov, 4, a@ honey-comb, Luke XXiv. 42.
Kipuyya, aros, 76, a@ proclaiming, preaching, as Jonah’s, Matt. xii. 41; that of Christ and his apostles, 2 Tim. iv. 17; the gospel preached (gen. obj.), Rom. xvi. 25; 1 Cor. i, 21.
Khput, veos, 6, a herald, a preacher, as the prophets, Christ, and his apostles.
Knpvocw, gw, (1) to proclaim, to pub- lish, Mark vii. 36; (2) specially, to preach, the Gospel, abs., or acc. and dat. ~
KjjTos, ous, 76, a large fish, a whale, a sea monster, Matt. xii. 40.
Knoas, a, 6 (from Aramaic), Oephas, or Peter, a rock, or stone.
kiBwrds, od, 7, a& hollow vessel, an ark, both of Noah, or of the ark of the covenant.
Kibdpa, as, 7, a harp, a lyre, * guitar.”
Kidapl(w, to play upon a harp, or lyre.
KiOapydés, od, 6, a harper, lyrist, singer to the harp.
Kiruna, as, 7, Cilicia.
Kiduwpoy, ov, 76, cinnamon, Rey. XViil. 13.
kivduvetw, ow, to be in danger, Luke viii, 23.
klySuvos, ov, 6, danger, peril, 2 Cor. xi, 26,
72 VOCABULARY.
Kwéw, &, how, to move, to stir, to shake, as the head, in mockery, Matt. XXVil. 39; to remove, to excite; pass., to be excited, to be put into commotion.
klynois, ews, 4%, John v. 3.
Kis, 6 (Heb.), Kish, father of Saul, Acts xiii. 21. -
KAddos, ov, 6, a branch; met., Rom. xi. 16- 19, ‘posterity.
KAatw (af), avow, (1) abs., to wail, to lament; (2) trans. (acc.), to weep
motion, commotion,
Jor.
kAdous, ews, 7, a breaking, Acts ii. 42.
KAdopa, atos, T6, a piece broken off, a Sragment, Matt. xiv. 20.
KAavin, ns, 7, Clauda, or Claude, a small island otf Crete, Acts xxvii. 16,
KAaviia, as, 7, Claudia, 2 Tim. iv. 21.
KAavdios, ov, 6, Claudius, the Em- peror, Acts xi. 28; a military tribune (Lysias), Acts xxiii. 26.
kAavbuds, ov, 5 (KAalw), weeping, lamen- tation, Matt. li, 18.
Krdwo, dow, only with uprov, to break bread, in the ordinary meal, Matt. xiv. 19; or in the Lord’s supper, xxvi. 26; fig., of the body of Christ, 1 Cor. xi, 24
Als, Kei36s, 4 n, @ esi ‘the emblem of power, Matt. xvi. 19; Rev. ii. 7; met., the means of access to (gen.), Luke xi. 52.
kAclw, ow, to shut, shut up, close.
KA€uua, atos, 76 (KAewtw) theft.
KAcéras, a, 6, Cleopas, Luke xxiv. 18.
kAéos, ous, 7d, good report, 1 Pet. ii. 20,
Krérrns, ov, 6, a thief, Matt. vi. 19, &c.; met., of false teachers, John x. 8.
KAértw, Ww, to steal, abs., Matt. xix. 18; or trans. (acc.), Matt. XXVii. 64.
KAjua, atos, tb (KAdw), a branch, a shoot, a tendril, of a vine, &e., J te KV. 2, 4, 5
KAjuns, evtos, 56, Clement, Phil. iv. 3.
KAnpovouew, w, tow, to obtain by in- heritance, to inherit, Gal. iv. 30; to obtain, generally,
[ k.véo—koSpavrns
KAnpovoula, as, 7, an inheritance.
KAnpovduos, (1) an heir, one who obtains an inheritance; (2) heir or Lord, applied to Christ, Heb. i. 2; (3) one who obtains in any way, Heb. x7. ;
KAjipos, ov, 6, (1) a lot, Matt. xxvii. 35; hence (2) a portion, Acts Vili. 21; (3) an office, Acts i. 17, 253 (4) plur., persons assigned to one’s care, 1 Pet. v. 3.
KAnpdw, @, in mid., to obtain by lot, Eph. i. 11.
KAjjots, ews, 7, a calling, i.e., God’s call to godliness and spiritual bless- ings, Rom. xi. 29; Eph. iv. 4.
KAnrés, dv, verbal adj. (KaAéw), called, invited, Matt. xx. 16, xxii. 14; of Christians, the called, Rom. i. 6, 7, viii. 28; of the apostolic vocation, Rom. i. 1; 1 Cor. i. 1.
KAlBdvos, ov, 6, an oven, a furnace, Matt. vi. 30.
KAlua, atos, 76, a climate, a tract of country, a region.
kAivn, ns, 7, a portable bed, a couch Sor reclining at meals, Matt. ix. 2, 6; Luke xvii. 34.
KAwidiov, ov, 7d (dim.), a little bed, or couch, Luke v. 19, 24.
kAivw, v@, perf., Kékdixa, trans., (1) to bow, in reverence, Luke xxiv. 5; in death, John xix. 30; (2) fo lay down, as the head, to rest, Matt. Vili. 20; (3) fo turn to flight, Heb. xi. 343 ’intrans. ., to decline, as the day, Luke ix. 12.
KAola, as, n, a table party, a company, Luke ix. 14.
kAowh, hs, 7, theft, Matt. xv. 19.
xnibterr: wvos, 5, the raging, of the sea ; a wave, a surge, Luke Vili. 24; James i. 6.
KAvdwviCoua, to be tossed, as waves, by the wind, Eph. iv. 14.
KAwras, a, 6, Clopas, John xix. 25.
Kvndw, to tickle ; pass., to be tickled, to ttch, 2 Tim. iv. 3.
Kvidos, ov, 7, Onidus, Acts xxvii. 7.
Kodpayrns, ov, “ Lat. (see 154, a), a ore the smallest coin in
KotAla—kdrros]
Kola, as, , (1) the belly, Matt. xv. 17; (2) the stomach, Matt. xii. 40; (3) the womb, Matt. xix. 12; (4) fig., the inner man, as the heart, &e., John vii. 38.
kowdw, &, in mid., to fall asleep, Luke xxii. 45; pass., fo be asleep, to be asleep in death, John xi, 12.
Kolunots, ews, 4, sleep, repose, John Ds en
ketvds, h, dv, common, i.e., shared by all, Acts iv. 32; wumnclean, cere- monially, Acts x. 15; unconse- crated, Heb. x. 29.
Kowvdw, @, dow, to make common, or unclean, Matt. xv. 11; to profane, to desecrate, Acts xxi. 28.
Kowwvéw, @, how, to have common share in, to partake in, Rom. xv. 27; to share with, Gal. vi. 6.
Kowwvia, as, , participation, com- munion, fellowship, gen. obj. ;_ col- lection, as of s, 2 Cor. viii. 4; Heb, xiii. 16.
kowwvirds, h, dv, ready to communicate, liberal, 1 Tim. vi. 18.
kowwvds, h, dv, as subst., a partner, a sharer with, gen. obj.
xottn, ns, 7, a bed, Luke xi. 7; met., marriage bed, Heb. xiii. 43; sexual intercourse (as illicit), Rom. xiii. 13; koltnv €xew, to conceive, Rom. ix. to.
koitdy, a@vos, 6, a bed-chamber, Acts xii. 20, ,
Kéxkwos, 7, ov, dyed from the kéxkos, crimson.
koKKos, ov, 6, a@ kernel, a grain, or seed,
KoAd(w, ow, mid., to chastise, to punish, Acts iv. 21; pass., 2 Pet. ii. 9.
koAakeia, as, 7, flattery, adulation, 1 Thess. ii. 5.
KéAagis, ews, 7, punishment, Matt. xxv. 46.
KoAacoal, @v, ai (see KoAogcal). KoAagpi(w, ow, to strike with the fist, to buffet, to maltreat, Mark xiv. 65. KoAAdw, @, tow, mid. and pass., to cleave to, to be joined with, to
adhere.
KoAAotpioy, Or KoAAUpiov, lov, Td, eye- salve, *‘collyrium,” Rev. iii, 18,
VOCABULARY. 73
KoAAvBiorhs, ov, 6 (ddAvBos, small coin), & money-changer, John ii.
15.
KoroBdw, dow, to cut off, to shorten, as days of trouble, Mark xiii. 20,
Kodocaaels, ews, plur., Kodoocaeis, Colossians, only in the subscription to the Epistle.
Kodoooal, ay, ai, or KoAdooa, Colossce.
KéAmos, ov, 6, the bosom, the chest, (1) of the body, John xiii. 23; in the bosom of Abraham, i.e., next to him at the heavenly banquet, Luke Xvi. 22, 23; (2) of the dress, used as a bag or pocket, Luke vi. 38; (3) a bay, a gulf, an inlet of the sea, Acts xxvii. 39.
koAunBdw, &, how, XXVll. 43.
KoAvUBHOpa, as, 7, & pool, a swimming- place, a bath. KoA@via, as, 7, Or KoAwvla, a colony, Philippi is so called, Acts xvi. 12. Koudw, @, to nourish the hair, to wear the hair long, 1 Cor. xi. 14, 15.
kéun, ns, 7, hair of the head.
koul(w, ow, mid. fut., Koulcoua or Komovuat, to bear, to bring, Luke vii. 37; mid., to bring to oneself, © i.e., to acquire, to obtain, as a recom- pense, Heb. x. 36; to receive again, to recover, Heb. xi. 19.
kouwpdtepoy (comp. of duos), better, of convalescence, adverbially, John iv. 52.
kovidw, to white-wash, Matt. xxiii. 27 ; pass., Acts xxili. 3
Kovt-optés, od, & (dpyvupi), dust, Matt. x. 143 Acts xiii. 51, &c.
komd(w, ow, to be quieted, to rest, as the wind lulling, Mark iv. 39.
kotrerds, ov, 6 (kértw), vehement lamen- tation, Acts viii. 2.
Kowh, js, 7., smiting, slaughter, Heb. Vii. 1.
komidw, @, dow, to toil, Luke v. 5; to be fatigued, or spent, with labour, Matt. xi. 28; to labour, in the gospel, Rom. xvi. 6, 12; 1 Cor. XV. 10,
k/ros, ov, 6, labour, toil, trouble, un- easiness,
to swim, Acts
74 VOCABULARY.
korpla, as, 4, filth, a dunghill, Luke
J exive 35.
Kémpioy, ov, 7d, dung, manure, in some MSS.; Luke xiii. 8.
Kérrw, mid. fut., cdvouat, to cut down, as branches, trees, &c.; mid., to
- beat, or cut oneself in grief, to bewatl, Matt. xi. 17.
képak, axos, 6, a raven, Luke xii. 24.
xopdo.ov, tov, 76 (dim. from xépn), a girl, a damsel, Mark vi. 22, 28.
4ss8iy (indecl.) and kopBavas, a, 6 (from Heb.), (1) @ gift, something offered to God, Mark vii, 11; (2)
_ the sacred treasury, Matt. xxvii. 6.
Kopé, 6 (Heb.), Korah, Jude 11.
kopevyum, €ow, pass. perf., Kexdpecuar, to satiate; pass., to be full, 1 Cor. iv. 8.
Kopiv@.0s, tov, Corinthian, a Corinthian,
* Acts xviii. 8.
KépivGos, ov, 4, Corinth.
Kopyfawos, tov, 6, Cornelius.
xépos, ov, 6 (from Heb.), a cor, the largest dry measure, equal to ten Baro, or nearly fifteen English bushels, Luke xvi. 7.
koopéw, &, how, to set in order, to gar- nish, Matt. xxiii, 29; 1 Tim. ii. 9; to trim, as lamps, Matt. xxv. 7; met., to adorn, with honour, Tit. li. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 5.
koomukds, h, dv, (1) terrestrial, opp. to émoupdvios, Heb. ix. 1; (2) worldly, i.e., vicious, Titus ii. 12.
Kéouos, ov, orderly, decorous, 1 Tim. il. 9, lid 2.
Koopo-kpatwp, opos, 6, prince of the world, appl. to evil spirits, Eph. vi. 12; or (?) to worldly rulers, as supporters of heathenism,
xdéapuos, ov, 6, (1) ornament, decoration, 1 Pet. iii. 3; hence (2) the material universe, Luke xi. 50, as well ordered and beautiful; (3) the world, John xi. 9; the world, in opposition to the heavenly and the good, John viii. 23; (4) the inhabitants of the world, 1 Cor. iv. 9; (5) the present life, as distinguished from life eternal; (6) a vast collection, of anything, James iii. 6; 2 Pet. ii. 5.
| kompia--—xpelocov
Koudpros, ov, 6 (Latin, see 159), Quartus, Rom. xvi. 23.
kouut (a Hebrew imperative, in Greek form), Arise.
KovoTwodia, as, 7, (Latin, see 154, c}, eustodia, a guard, Matt. xxvii. 65. xougifw, to lighten, as a ship, Acts
XXVIl. 38.
képivos, ov, 6, a basket, a travelling basket, Matt. xiv. 20,
kpd8Baros, ov, 6, a couch, a light bed, Mark ii. 12.
kpdtw, &w, to cry out, hoarsely, or urgently, or in anguish.
KpaimdAn, ns, surfeiting, Luke xxi. 34.
Kpaviov, ov 7é (lit., skull), Greek for Toayo0a, which see, Matt. xxvii. 33. Lat., Calvaria, whence ocr Calvary.
Kpdomedoy, ov, 76, the fringe, border, eé.g., of a garment, Matt. xxiii. 5.
kparads, d, dv, strong, mighty, 1 Pet. v. 6,
Kpatatdw, @, in pass. only, to be strong, to grow strong, Luke i. 80; Eph. ill, 16,
kparéw, &, how, to lay strong hold on, to detain, acc. or gen., or ace. and gen. (see 264); to attain to, Heb. iv. 14; Matt. ix. 25; to have power over, Matt. xiv. 3; to be master of, Rev. ii. 1; Acts ii, 24; to cleave to, Acts iii, 11; Mark vii. 3; to retain, of sins, John xx. 23.
kpdtictos, n, ov (properly superl. of Kpatis, see xpdros), most excellent, most noble, a title of honour, Acts XXiil. 26, xxiv. 3
Kpdtos, ous, 76, strength, power, do- minion, 1 Pet. iv. 11; Heb. ii. 143. Kara Kpdros, Acts xix. 20, greatly, mightily.
kpavyd(w, ow, to cry out, to clamour, Matt. xii. 19.
Kpavyn, ns, 7, @ cry, clamour, Heb. Vv. 7
Kpéas (aros, aos, contr., xpéws), 7d, pl., kpéata, xpéa, flesh, flesh-meat, Rom. xiv. 21; 1 Cor. Viil. 13. |
Kpelagwv, ov, TTHV, ovos, adj. (properly compar. of kxpatds, see Kpdros), stronger, more powerful, better, Heb. Vii. 7, Xil, 24.
kpepavvupr—Kvddés |
Kpeudvvumt or Kpeudw, &, fut., dow, to hang, trans., Acts v. 30; mid., to be suspended, to depend, Matt. xxii. 40; Acts xxviil. 4.
xpnuvos, ov, 6 (Kpeudvvupt), a precipice, from its overhanging, Mark v. 13.
Kpas, n7ds, 6, a Cretan, Acts il, 11; Titus i, 12.
Kphoxns, evtos, 6 (Latin), Crescens, 2 Tim. iv. 10.
Kpfrn, ns, n, Crete, now Candia.
Kpi0n, js, fem., barley, Rev. vi. 6.
Kpidivos, n, ov, made of barley; &prot Kpibivot, barley-loaves, John vi. 9, 13.
kpiua, aros, Td, a judgment, a sentence, condemnation, a contention at law, 1 Cor. viv 7.
kplvov, ov, 7d, a lily, Matt. vi. 28.
Kplyw, v@, Kéxptka, IS aor., pass, expténv, (1) to judge, to deem, to determine, Acts xili, 46, xv. 19; Rom. xiv. 5; (2) to form or express an opinion of, usually unfavourable, Rom. ii. 1, 33 (3) ¢o try, to sit in judgment on, John xviii. 31; pass., to be on trial, to be judged ; mid., to appeal to trial, i.e, to have a law-suit, 1 Cor. vi. 6.
xplois, ews, 7, (1) opinion, formed and
- expressed ; (2) judgment, the act or
‘ result of ; (3) condemnation; (4) a tribunal, Matt. V. 21, 223 (5) justice, Matt. xxiii. 23; (6) the divine law, Matt, xii. 18, 20.
Kpiomos, ov, 6, Crispus, Acts xviil. 8; 1 Cor. i. 14,
Kpithpiov, ov, 76, (1) a tribunal, a ‘ag of justice, 1 Cor. vi. 2; James il, 6; (2) @ cause, or suit, 1 Cor. vi. 4.
kpitis, ov, 76, a judge, a chief, or ruler, Acts xXiil. 20.
kpitixds, fh, dv, apt at judging, quick to discern, gen. obj., Heb. iv. 12.
Kpovlw, ow, to knock, €.g., at a door for entrance, Tike xiii 25.
KpUTT], NS, 7, an undergr ound cell, a vault, Luke xi, 33, ‘ crypt.”
kpuTtos, h, dv, verbal adj. (kpimtw), hidden, secret, unknown, Matt. x. 26;
- Rom. u. 16,
VOCABULARY.
‘
75
KpUmrTw, yw, 2nd aor. pass., éxptBny, to hide, conceal, to lay up, to reserve, Col. iii. 3.
kpvaTarAl(w, to be clear, like crystal, Rey. xxi. 11.
KpvaTaddos, ov, 6, crystal, Rev. iv. 6.
kpupy, adv., in secret, secretly, Eph. v. Tz
Kraduat, Gua, fut., hooucu, exTnoduny, dep., to acquire, procure (price, gen., or ék), (see 278), Luke xxi, 19; Acts viii. 20; 1 Thess. iv. 4.
KTIua, aros, 76, anything acquired, a possession, Mark x. a2.
KrTjhvos, ovs, 76, a beast of burden (as representing property), Luke x, 34; Acts xxili, 24.
KT}Twp, opos, 6, & possessor, an owner, Acts iv. 34.
Ktiw, ow, perf., pass., ekricuat, to create, form, compose, physically or spiritually, Eph. ii. 10, &e.
Kriots, ews, 7, creation, (1) the act, Rom. i. 20; (2) the things created, Rom. i. 253 (3) creation, generally, man, human creatures, Rom. viii. 19-22; (4) met., institution, 1 Pet. ii, 13.
ktioua, atos, 76, a thing created, a creature, 1 Tim. iv. 4.
KtioTHs, ov, 6, one who makes, or Sounds, The Creator, 1 Pet. iv. 19. _
wis ye as, 7, gambling, fraud, Eph.
14.
ilblerahna. ews, ), governing, direction, 1 Cor. xii. 28.
KuBepyitns, ov, 6, a steersman, a pilot, Acts xxvii. 11; Rev. xviii. 17.
kukdddey, adv. (kixdvs), from around, round ‘about, gen., Rev. iv. 3, 8.
KoKDOS, ov, 6, a circle. Only in dat., KUKA®, as adv., abs., or with gen., round about, around.
kuk\dw, @, to encircle, surround, besiege, John x. 24; Luke xxi, 20.
KUALT UA, aTOS, 76, a place for wallow- ing, 2 Pet, ii. 22.
xvaAlw (for «vAivdw), to wallow, or roll, Mark ix. 20.
kvarJds, 4, dv, crippled, lame, especially in the hands, Matt. xv. 39, 31,
76 VOCABULARY.
xdua, atros, neut., a wave, a billow, Matt. viii. 24; Acts xxvii. 41.
KipBadroy, ov, 7d {xdpuBos, hollow), a cymbal, ;
xduivov, ov, rd (from Heb.), cumin.
xuvdpiov, ov, 76 (dim. of xdwy), a little dog, a cur, Matt. xv. 26.
Kurpuos, ov, 6, a Cyprian, or Cypriot.
_ Kurpos, ov, 7, Cyprus.
kintw, Ww, to bend, to stoop down, Mark i. 7; John viii. 6, 8.
-_Kupnvaios, ov, 6, a Cyrenian.
Kuphyn, ns, 7, & prop. name, Cyrene, a city of Africa.
Kuphvios, ov, 6, a prop. name, Cyrenius or Quirinus.
Kupia, as, 7, Cyria (a proper name),
2 John 1, 5.
Kupiards, 4, fa of, or pertaining to the Lord, Christ, as the supper, 1 Cor. xi. 20; the day, Rev. i. 10.
kupievw, evow, to have authority, abs., to rule over, Luke xxii. 25; 1 Tim. vi. 15.
Kupuos, fov, 6, (1) a lord, possessor of, and having power over, a title of honour, Sir,.1 Pet. iii. 6; (2) The Lorp (Heb., JEHovAH); (3) Zhe Lord (employed in the Epp. con- stantly of Christ (see 217, 6).
xupiérns, ntos, 7, lordship, dominion ;
ur. concr., lords, princes, Eph. 1. 213 2 Pet. ii. 10.
xupdw, @, to confirm, ratify, Gal. iii, 15; 2 Cor. i. 8.
kiwv, xuvds, 6, 4, a dog, Luke xvi. 21; fig., of shameless persons, Phil. iii. 2,
K@advov, ov, Té, in plur. only; Ta K@Aa, Heb. iii. 17, the carcases.
Kwrvw, ow, to restrain, hinder, with- hold, Mark ix. 38.
Kkoun, ns, 7, @ village, unwalled, or lying open, Matt. ix. 35.
Kwud-rodis, ews, 7, a large, city-like village, without walls, Mark i.
8.
it ov, 6, a feasting, a revelling, among the heathen, in honour of Bacchus, Rom. xiii. 13. “
kévw), wros, 6, u gnat, Matt. xxill. 24.
Kaés, @, 4, Cos, Acts xxl. I.
[xd pa—apBdve -
Kwodu, 6 (Heb.), Cosam, Luke iii. 28, kwods, 4, dv, dumb, Matt. ix. 32, 33; deaf, Matt. xi. 5.
A,
A, A, AduBda, Lambda, 1, the eleventh letter. As a numeral, d’ = 30; A = 30,000,
Aayxdvw, 2nd aor., Zaaxoyv, (1) trans., to obtain by lot, to obtain, generally, acc. or gen.; (2) to cast lots, to draw lots, mepi, gen.
Adapos, ov, 6, Lazarus, (1) of Bethany, (2) in the parable, Luke xvi.
Ad#pa, or AdOpa (AavOdvw), secretly.
Aairay, amos, 7, a whirlwind, a violent . storm.
Aakéw and Anxéw, to burst with a loud report, Acts i. 18.
AaxtiCw (Aag, adv., with the heel), to kick, Acts ix. 5, xxvi. 14.
Aadréw, &, now, (1) to speak, absolutely ; (2) to speak, to talk, generally, with acc. of thing spoken, also with modal dat. and dat. of person addressed. Hence, according to the nature of the case, met., to declare, by other methods than vivd voce, Rom. vii. 1, &c.; to preach, to publish, to announce, See Synonyms.
Aadid, as, 7H, (1) speech, talk, John vill. 43; hence (2) report, John iv. 42; (3) manner of speech, dialect, Matt. xxvi. 73.
Aaud, or Aaupa (Heb.), why, Matt. xxvil. 46; Mark xv. 34 (Ps. Xxii. 1),
AapBdvw, Afpouat (Ahuvoun in MSS.), etAnha, €AaBov, (1) to take, as in the hand, Matt. xiv. 19; hence, (2) to receive, obtain, of things material or spiritual, to accept, ‘‘take up,” Matt. x. 38; (3) to take by force, seize, Matt. xxi. 35; (4) to take away, violently or fraudulently, Matt. v. 40; (5) to choose, Acts xv. 14; (6) to receive, or accept, as a friend, and as a teacher; (7) in certain
Aépex—Réwv]
paraphrastic expressions, to ‘‘ take a beginning, i.e., to begin, so, ‘*to take” remembrance, forgetfulness, experience, &c.; with mpdéowmor, ‘*to accept the person,” i.e., ‘‘to be partial.” *‘From,” after this verb, is expressed by é«, dé, mapd (id, 2 Cor. xi. 24).
Aduex, 6 (Heb.), Lamech, Luke iii. 36.
Aaumds, ddos, 7, a lamp, a torch.
Aaumpds, d, dv, resplendent, shining, gorgeous; adv., -@s, gorgeously, sumptuously, Luke xvi. 19.
Aaumpérns, TyhTos, H, splendour, bright- NESS.
Adurw, Ww, to give light to, to shine, Matt. v.15, xvii. 2.
Aavédvw, 2nd aor., €Aafov, (1) to be concealed, abs., Mark vii. 24; (2) to be concealed from, unknown to
(acc.), Acts xxvi. 26; (3) for par- |
ticip., constr. (see 394, 2).
Aa-teurds, 4, dv, hewn out of a rock, Luke xxiii. 53.
Aaodixeia, as, 7, Laodicea:
Aaodixéus, ews, 6, a Laodicean.
Aads, od, 6, (1) a people, spec. of the people of God; (2) the common
eople. See Synonyms. puyé, vyyos, 6, the throat, *‘larynx.”
Aacaia, as, or Aagéa, 7, Lasewa, Acts xxval. 8.
Aa-rouéw, @, to hew stones, to cut stone, Matt. xxvii. 60.
Aatpeld, as, 7, worship, service ren- dered to God, John xvi. 2; Rom. ix. 4.
Aarpedw, ow, (1) to worship, to serve ; (2) to officiate as a priest. See Synonyms.
Adxavoyv, ov, Té, an herb, a garden plant, Matt. xiii. 32. AeBBaios, ov, 6, Lebbeus.
datos.
Aeyedv, vos, 6 (Lat., see 154, c), a legion, Mark v. 9, &c.; in N.T. times containing 6826 men.
Aéyw, only pres. and impf. in N.T. (see Synonyms), (1) to speak, used also of writings, as John xix. 37;
. (2) to say, to discourse ; (3) to relate,
See @aé-
VOCABULARY. 77
to tell, Luke ix. 31, xviii. 13 (4) to call, pass., to be called, or named ; (5) pass., to be chosen, or appointed. Dat. of persons addressed.
Aciuua, aros, 7d (Acizw), a remnant, Rom, xi. 5
Agios, ela, eiov, smooth, plain, level, Luke iii. 5; from LXX,
Aelrw, Ww, to leave, mid., to be wanting, Luke xviii. 22; pass., to be left, to be destitute of, James i. 5.
Aeitoupyéw, @, (1) to serve publicly in sacred things, Heb. x. 11; G) to
m.
minister to, pecuniarily, xv. 27. See Synonyms.
Aectoupyla, as, n, (1) a public ministra- tion, or service, Luke i. 23; Phil. ii. 17; (2) @ friendly service, as rendering aid or alms to, Phil. li. 17; 2 Cor. ix. 12.
Aeroupyikds, h, dv, rendering service to, Heb. i. 14.
Acctoupyds, od, 6, a minister, or servant to, gen. obj., Rom. xv. 16; Phil. li. 25.
Aévriov, ov, 7é (Lat., see 154, e), a napkin, or towel, John xiii. 4.
Aenis, (50s, 7, a scale, or crust, Acts ix. 18.
Aémpa, as, 7, the leprosy.
Aempds, od, 6, a leper.
Aerréy, od, prop. verb. adj. (voutcua), from Aérw (to strip off, pare down), a mite, one-eighth of an as, the smallest Jewish coin.
Aevt or Aevis, 6, Levi. Four are men- tioned: (1) son of Jacob, ancestor of the priestly tribe; (2, 3) ancestors of Jesus, Luke iil. 24, 29; (4) the po also called Matthew.
Aevitns, ov, 6, a Levite. .
Aevirixos, 4, dv, Levitical, pertaining to the Levites.
Aevxalvw, ava, 1st aor., éAcvKava, to make white, Mark ix. 3; Kev. vil. 14.
Aeuxds, h, dv, (1) bright, as Matt. Xviil. 2; (2) white, as Matt. v. 36; John iv. 35.
Aéwy, ovros, 6, a lion, fig., for a tyrant, 2 Tim. iv. 17; used for Christ, Rev. v. 5.
73 ~ VOCABULARY.
Anén; ns. 4, forgetfulness, 2 Pet. i. 9. Anvés, od, 6, 7, @ wine-press, Matt. _ . &Xi. 33; fig. in Rev. xiv. 20. Ajjpos, ov, 6, idle talk, Luke xxiv. 11. Anorns, od; 6, a robber, Mark xi. 17; John x, 1, 8. Ajwis, ews, 7m (AauBdvw), a receiving, Phil. iv. 15.
Alay, adv., very much, with adj., very, -
_ Matt. iv. 8,
AiBavos, ov, 6, frankincense, Matt. ii. 11; Rev. xviii. 13.
AiBavwrds, od, 6, a censer for burning Frankincense, Rev. viii. 3, 5-
AiBeprivos, ov, 6 (Lat.), a freed-man, Acts vi. 9. Probably Jews who
had been slaves at Rome, after- wards freed.
A:Bin, ns, 7, Libya, Acts il. 10.
ArbdQw, ow, to stone, to execute by stoning.
AlOvos, n, ov, made of stone, John li. 6; 2 Cor. iii. 3; Rev. ix. 20.
A:80-Boréw, @, how, to throw stones at, so as to wound or kill, Matt. xxiii. 37; Mark xii. 4.
Af6os, ov, 6, a stone, i.e., (1) loose and lying about, Matt. iv. 3, 6; (2) built into a wall, &c., Mark xiii. 2 ; (4) a precious stone, Rev. iv. 3; (5) a statue, or idol of stone, Acts XVil. 29.
A166-cTpwrov, ov, Td (prop, adj., strewed with stones), the pavement, part of a Roman court of justice.
Aikudw, w, now, to scatter, as corn in winnowing, fo reduce to particles, that may be scattered, Luke xx.
8
18.
Amy, «vos, 6, harbour, haven, Acts XXVii. 12,
Aluyn, ns, 7, @ lake, e.g., Gennesareth, Luke v. 1.
Atuds, ov, 6, (1) hunger, 2 Cor. xi, 27; (2) a fumine, Matt. xxiv. 7.
Alvov, ov, 76, jlax, linen made of flax, Rev. xv. 6; a@ lamp-wick, Matt, xii, 20.
Aivos, or Aivos, ov, 6, Linus, 2 Tim. iv. 24.
Aurapés, 4, dv, sumptuous, precious, |
delicate, Rev. xviil. 14.
[\40n —désyos Altpa, as, 7, a pound weight, John
xil. 3.
Atl, AiBds, 6, the S.W. wind, Acts xxvii. 12. (To look ‘‘down the S.W.,” is to look toward the north- east. )
Aoyla, as, 7, a collection, i.e., of money, 1 Cor. xvi. 1, 2.
Aoyi{oua, gouu, dep. with mid. and pass. aor., (1) to reckon; (2) to place to the account of, to charge with, . ace. and dat., or with eis (see 298, 6); (3) to reason, argue, to infer, conclude, compute, from rea- soning; (4) to think, suppose.
Aoyirds, 7, dv, rational, i.e, belonging to the sphere of the reason, Rom. xii. 1; 1 Pet. ii. 2. :
Adéywv, ov, 76, something spoken, in N.T., of divine communications, e.g., the Old Testament, Acts vii. 338; Rom. iii. 2; and the doctrines of Christ, Heb. v. 12; 1 Pet. iv. 11,
Aéyios, ov, eloquent, Acts xviii. 24.
Aoy:ouds, od, 6, (1) reasoning, thought, 2 Cor. x. §; (2) counsel, the result of thought, Rom. ii. 15.
Aoyo-uaxéw, @, to strive about words, 2 Tim. ii. 14.
Aoyouaxla, as, %, contention about words, *‘logomachy,” 1 Tim. vi. 4. Adyos, ov, 6, (1) a speaking, a saying, . a word, i.e., the uttering of the word, Matt. villi. 8; (2) the thing spoken, Matt. vii. 24, 26; whether doctrine, : Tim. iv. 6; prophecy, 2 Pet. i. 19; question, Matt. xxi. 24; a common saying, or proverb, John iv. 37.3 @ precept, a command, John vill. 55; the truth, Mark viii. 33; conversation, Luke xxiv. 17; teach- ing, 1 Cor. ii. 43 a narrative, Acts i. 13; @ public rumour, Matt. XXVill. 15; an argument, Acts ii. 40; a charge, or accusation, Acts xix. 38; (3) reason, Acts xviii. 14; (4) account, reckoning, Heb, iv. 13; Acts xx. 24; Matt. xviii. 23; Acts x. 29. Aédyos is used by John as a name of Christ, the worp of God, z.e., the expression or manifestation of his thoughts to man, Johni, 1, &.
As yXq—palyredo |
Adyxn, ns, }, @ lance, a spear, John xix. 34.
\atdopéw, &, to revile, to rail at, to re- proach, John ix. 28; Acts xxiii. 4. Aodopia, as, 4, reproach, reviling,
1 Tim. v. 14; 1 Pet. ili. -9.
AotSopos, ov, 6, one who rails at, a reviler, 1 Cor. Vv. 11, Vi. 10,
Aoimds, ov, 6, a plague, pestilence, Paul so called, Acts xxiv. 5.
-Aourds, 4, dv, remaining, the rest, Matt. xxv. 11; adv., 7d Aourdy, as Jor the rest, 1 Cor. i. 16; Tov Aorrod, From henceforth, Gal. vi. 17.
Aovkas, @, 6 (from Aovkayds, see 159, d), Luke.
Aotxus, lov, 6 (Latin), Lucius.
Aoutpdy, ov, 7d, a bath, a washing, Eph, v. 26; Tit. it. 5.
Aotw, ow, to bathe, to wash, Acts ix. 37; xvi. 33, to cleanse, to purify, Rev. 1. 5.
Avééa, ns, 7, Lydda, Acts ix. 32, 53.
Avdia, as, 7, Lydia, Acts xvi. 14, 40.
_ Avraovia, as, n, Lycaonia, Acts xiv. 6.
Aveaovori, adv., in the. speech of Lycaonia.
Avxia, as, 7, Lycia, Acts xxvii. 5.
Adxos, ov, 6, a wolf; fig., Acts xx. 29.
Avyatvouan, to ravage, Acts viii. 3.
Auréw, @, to grieve; pass., to be grieved, saddened, to be aggrieved, or offnded, Matt. xiv. 9; Rom. xiv. 15.
Aturn, ns, 7, grief, sorrow, aversion, 2 Cor. ix. 7; cause of grief, 1 Pet. ii. 19.
dunce. ov, 6, Lysanias, Luke iii, 1.
Avoias, ov, 6, Lysias.
Adois, ews, 7, @ loosening, divorce, 1 Cor. vil. 27.
Avot-TeAEw, & (lit., to pay taxes), im- pers., -€?, i is profitable, or prefer- able (dat. and #), Luke xvii. 2.
Adorpa, as, 4, or wy, ta, Lystra.
Avrpoy, ov, 76, a ransom price, Matt. xx. 28; Mark x. 45.
auvtpsw, dow, in N.T, only, mid. and pass., to ranson, to deliver, by pay- ing a ransom, Tit. i, 14; 1 Pet. i. 18 (acc., pers.; dat., price, and Grd or €x).
VOCABULARY. 79
Adbrpwats, ews, 4, deliverance, redenp- tion, Luke i. 68, ii, 38; Heb. ix. 12;
Autpwrhs, ov, 6, a redeemer, a deliverer, Acts vii. 35.
Avxvia, as, 7, a@ lamp-stand, Matt. v. 15; fig., of a church, Rev.
il of a christian teacher,
Avxvos, ov, 6, a lamp, or light, Matt. Vv. 35, vi. 22. Used of John the Baptist, John v. 35; of Christ, Rev. XXl. 23.
Ado, ow, to loosen, as (1) lit., to unbind, Mark i. 7; Rev. v. 2; (2) to set at liberty ; (3) to pronounce not binding, e.g., a law, Matt. xviii. 18; (4) to disobey, or nullify, the Divine word, John vii. 23, x. 353 (5) #0 destroy, e.g., the temple, John ii. 19; (6) to dismiss, i.e, an assembly, Acts xili. 43.
Awits, tos, 7, Lois, 2 Tim. i. §.
Ad, 6 (Heb.), Lot, Luke xvii. 28.
M.
M, », Mi, Mu, m, the twelfth letter,
As a numeral, u’=40; p=40,000. Mod@, 6 (Heb.), Maath, Luke iii, 26,
Maydead, 47 (Heb., Chald.), in MSS., Mayaiddy, Magdala, Matt. xv. 39. - Maydarnvh, fis, 7, Magdalene, i.e, & woman of Magdala.
hayeia, as, 7, magic, plur.. magic arts, Acts viii. 11.
payebw, ow, to practise magical arts, Acts vill. 9.
Mdyos, ov, 6, (1) magus, Persian
_ astrologer, Matt. ii. 1; (2) a con- juror, Acts viii. 9.
Mayéy, 6 (Heb.), Magog (see T#y).
Maiidy, or Madicu, 6 (Heb.), Madian, or Midian, Acts vii. 29.
pabynretw, ow, (1) trans., to make a disciple of (acc.), ta instruct, Matt. XXVUi. 19; Acts xiv. 21; (2) in- © trans., to be a disciple, Matt. XXVil. 57.
mm
86 VOCABULARY.
pabyris, ob}, 5 (uavOdyw), a disciple,
Matt. x. 24, xxii, 16, ix. 14; of
palnral, specially, the twelve, Matt. Ax, 19.
parties as, 7, a@ female disciple, Acts 36.
Masovadna, 6 (Heb.), Methuselah, Luke iii. 37. Maivdy, 6 (Heb.), Mainan, Luke
lil. 31.
ualvoua, dep., to be mad, to rave, John x. 20; Acts xxvi. 24, 25.
paxapive, fut., 1, to pronounce happy, congratulate, Luke i. 48; James Me XB pardpios, ia, Lov, happy, blessed, Luke i. 45, Vi. 20; makapidrepos, compar., more happy, 1 Cor. vil. 40.
pakapiouds, od, 6, congratulation, a pronouncing happy, Rom. iv. 6, 9.
Makedovia, as, 7, Macedonia.
Maxedéy, dvos, 6, a Macedonian.
pdkeAAov, ov, 76, a slaughter-house, shambles, 1 Cor. x. 25.
paxpay, adv. (ace. of paxpds, sc. 63éy), afar, eis preced., Acts il. 39; amd foll., Acts xvii. 27.
paxpdéer, adv., from afar, Mark Vili. 3; with aré, as Matt. xxvi. 58.
parpo-Ouuew, &, how, to suffer long, to have patience, to be forbearing, 1 Cor. xiii. 4; to delay, Luke XVilL 73 to wait patiently, Heb. vi. 15; eis or émi, dat.
pakpo-Ovuia, as, 7, forbearance, long- suffering. patience.
pakpo-Oiuws, adv., patiently, indul-
_ gently.
pakpds, d, dv, long, of place; distant, of time, prolix, Matt. xxiii. 13. paKpo- -Xpbv105,_ ov, long-lived, Eph. vi. 3.
uaAakia, as, 7, "<é softness,” weakness, infirmity.
parduds, 4, dv, soft, of garments ;
~ Matt. xi, 8; disgracefully effemi- nate, 1 Cor. vi 10.
MaAcAefaA, 45 (Heb.), Maleleel, or Mahalaleel, Luke iii. 37.
pdrwwra, adv. (superl. of wdda, very), most of all, especially.
padAov, adv. (comp. of pdAa), more, rather ; moAA@ paddrov, much more,
| [pars —paprupte |
Matt. vi. 30; méom madrrov, how much more, Matt. vii. 113 paAdAov h, more than, Matt. xviii. 13. Ma@AAoy is often of intensive force, e.g., Matt. xxvii. 24; Rom. viii. 34.
MdaAxos, ov, 6, Malchus, John xviii. 10.
wduun, ns, n, & grandmother, 2 Tim. a
bouwvas, pauuwvas, a, 6, mammon, gain, wealth (from Chald.).
Mavajy, 6 (Heb.), Munaen), xiii. 1.
Mayvaco7js, gen. and acc., 7, 6, Ma- nasseh, —
pavOdvw, pabhooum, 2nd aor., euaboy ; perf., peudénra, to learn, to under- stand, to know, to be informed, to comprehend. Used abs., or with acc. (dé, mapa (gen.), with the teacher, év with example, 1 Cor. iv. 6.)
pavia, as, 7, madness, insanity, Acts XXvi, 24.
pdvve, 7d (Heb.) manna (Heb., What is this ?), the food of the Israelites in the desert.
HavTevouat, dep., to utter responses, prophecy, Acts xvi. 16.
papalye, avd, fut. pass., wapayOhoonat,
to wither, to fade away, James i. 11. papay ad (two Syro-Chaldaie words),
the Lord will come! 1 Cor. xvi. 22.
Hapyapirns, ov, 6, a pearl, Matt. xiii. 45, 46,
Mapéd, ns, 7, Martha.
Mapla, as, or Mapidu (indecl., Heb., Miriam), 4, Mary. Six of the name are mentioned: (1) the mother of Jesus; (z) the Magdalen; (3) the sister of Martha and Lazarus; (4) the wife of Cleopas; (5) the mother of John Mark; (6) a Christian woman in Rome, Rom. xvi. 6,
Mdpxos, ov, 6, Mark.
Hdpuapos, ov, 6, 4, XVili, 12.
paptupéw, &, haw, to be a witness, abs., to testify (wepl, gen.), to give tes- timony (to, dat., of pers. or thing), to commend (1 Thess. ii 11, should prob. be paprupdueva); pass., to be — attested, i.e., honourably,
Acts
marble, Rev.
paprupta—pé0n]
paptupla, as, 7, testimony borne, i.e.,
judicially, Mark xiv. 56, 59, or enerally, honourable attestation,
Folin v. 34. With obj. gen., as Rev. xix. 10,
waptupioy, ov, 76, testimony, Matt. viii. 4 (to, dat., ‘against, émi, aec.).
Baptipouat, dep., to call to witness, Acts xx. 26; Gal. v. 3; to exhort solemnly, Eph. iv. 17° (1 Thess. li. 11).
pdprus, vpos, dat. plur., pdpruoi, 4, a witness, i.e, judicially, Matt. Xviill. 16; one who testifies from what he has seen and known, 1 Thess. ii, 10; Luke xxiv. 48. A ‘ mar- tyr,” witnessing by his death, Acts XXii. 20,
paccdouat, Guat, to bite, to gnaw, Rev. Xvi. 10,
paotiyéw, @, daw, to scourge, Matt. x. 17; to affiict, Heb. xii. 6.
pastiCw, to scourge, Acts xxii. 25.
udore, vyos, 7, a whip, a scourge, Acts xxii. 24; sharp pain, disease, afflic- tion, Mark v. 29, 34; Luke vii. 21.
pactés, ov, 6, the breast, the paps, Luke xi. 27; Rev. i. 13. parao-Aoyla, as, 7, vain talk, empty,
. fruitless conversation, 1 Tim. i. 6
paraio-Adyos, ov, 6, @ vain, empty talker, Tit. i, 10. |
paras, (ala), mov, vain, fruitless, empty, 1 Cor. xv. 17; James i. 26; To patra, vanities, spec. of heathen deities, Acts xiv. 15 (and O.T.).
paradryns, THTos, Hn, (1) vanity, 2 Pet. ii. 18; (2) perverseness, Eph. iv. 17; (3) frailty, Rom. viii. 20.
paradw, &, to render vain, or foolish, io deprave.
udrny, adv., in vain, fruitlessly, Matt. XV. 9.
Maréaios, ov, or Maféatos, 6, Matthew, the apostle and evangelist; also Aevi. :
Marédy, 6 (Heb.), or Mabédv, Matthan, Matt. i 15.
Marédr, 6 (Heb.), or Mad0d0, Matthat, Luke ii. 24, 29.
Maréias, a (6), or Mad@las, Matthias, Acts i, 23, 26.
‘VOCABULARY. 81
Martaéd, 6 (Heb.), Mattatha, Luke lil, 31.
Marraéias, ov, ili. 25, 2
pdxaipa, as and ns, , a sword, met. for strife, Matt. x. 34; fig., of spiri- tual weapons, Eph. vi. 17.
pexn, nS, n, contention, strife, dispute, 2 Tim. ii. 23; James iv. 1.
pdxoua, to fight, Acts vii. 26; to con- tend, to dispute, 2 Tim. ii. 24.
peyar-avxéw, & to boast great things, to be arrogant, James ill. 5.
Heyareios, cia, eiov, grand, magnifi- cent, wondrous, Luke i. 49; Acts ii, 11.
peyaredrns, THTOs, h, greatness, ma- jesty, magnificence, Luke ix. 43; Acts xix. 27; 2 Pet. i. 16.
Meyado-mpemns, és, gen., ovs, fitting for a great man, magnificent, excellent, 2 Pet. i. 17.
peyadtvw, ve, (1) to enlarge, Matt. xxiii. 5; (2) to magnify, extol, cele- brate with praise, Luke i. 58; Acts.
6, Mattathias, Luke
Vv. 13.
peydAws, adv., greatly, Phil. iv. 10,
peyaAwovrn, nS, h, magnificence, ma- Jesty, Heb. i. 3 5 Jude 25.
peyas, peydAn, peya (see 39), comp. peiQav, Sup., Méey.oTos, great, in size, full-grown, intense, Matt. ii. 10, xxvii. 8; wonderful, 2 Cor. xi. 15; noble, of high rank, Rev. xi. 18, xiii, 16; applied to age, 6 yelCav, the elder, Rom. ix. 12. Meéyas in- dicates the size of things, their measure, number, cost, an “estima tion; meyddAn hucpa, a high day, John xix. 31.
péyebos, ous, 76, greatness, vastness, immensity, Eph. i. 19.
peyoraves, dvwv, oi, princes, great men (sing., pepordy, only in LXX.; Sirach iv. 7), lords, Mark vi. 21; ; Rev. vi. 15, Xvili. 23.
pe0-epunveiw, to translate, to interpret,
pass. only, Mark v. 4]; John Be weOn, ns, 7, drunkenness, drunken
frolic, or riot, Luke xxi. 35 aaa pF a te Be Gal. Ve ak.
82 VOCABULARY.
Hed-lornut, petaoThow, Ist aor. pass., weteotdbny, (1) to remove, as a mountain, 1 Cor. xiii. 2; (2) fo seduce, or draw over, Acts xix. 26; (3) to remove from office, e.g., a king, Acts xiii, 22; or a steward, Luke XVi. 4.
Meb-odela, as, 7, fraudulent artifice, a trick, a stratagem, Eph. iv. 14, vi. 11,
hed épios, bordering on; Ta pmeOdpia, | borders, confines, Mark vii. Zhe
pebvoKw, to make drunk ; pass., to be drunk, Luke xii. 45; 1 Thess. v. 7.
Kediaos, ov, 6 (prop. adj.), a drunkard, 1 Cor. v. 11, vl. 10.
uebdw, to be drunken, Matt. xxiv. 49; Acts ii. 15; met., Rev. xvii. 6.
helCwy, comp. of wéyas, which see. It has itself a comparat., pe:(do7epos, 3 John 4 (see 4'7).
uéhay, avos, 76 (uéAas), ink, 2 Cor. lil. 3.
uédas, ava, ay, black.
MeAcas, a, 6, Melea, Luke iii. 31.
“éAe, impers. (see 101), dé concerns, dat. of pers. and obj. gen.
mercTde, 6, how, to think upon, to revolve in mind, to premeditate, Mark xiii. 11; Acts i iv. 25.
ped, iTos, 76, honey, Matt. iii. 4.
ueAloows, a, ov, made of honey, Luke XXiv. 42.
MeAirn, ‘75, ts Melita, now Malta, Acts xxviii, 1.
- péAdAw, how, to be about to do, to be on
_ the point of doing, with infin., cor- responding nearly to our auxiliaries, will, shall, must, &c., particip. form indicating simple futurity, as 7a
MédorTa, things to come, Rom. vill. 38; to delay Acts xxii, 16, See Synon
péAos, ovs, T sa Sag a member of the body, a limb, Matt. v. 29, 30; Rom. xii. 4; fig., 1 Cor. vi. 15, &e.
MeAxi, 6 (Heb.), MMelchi. Two are mentioned, Luke iii. 24, 28.
MeAxioedéx, 6 (Heb., king of righteous- ness), Melchizedek, Heb, v. 6, &e.
meuBpava, ns, 7, parchment, 2 Tim. iv. 13.
[p<0-iorrnpi-—pépos
péupouat, Youa, dep., to complain, to censure, Rom. ix. 19; abs. or dat., Heb. viii. 8 (Lachm., acc.).
Memipi-pworpos, ov, adj., discontented, com- plain ng, Jude 16,
uév, antithetic particle, truly, indeed (see 136).
pev-ovv, conj., moreover, therefore, but.
Kev-otv-ye, conj., yea rather, yea truly, nay but, Luke xi. 28; Rom. ix. 20,
Mév-Tot, conj., yet truly, certainly, | snevertheless, however, John iv. 27.
pévee, Mere, €uewa, (1) intrans., to remain, to abide. So (a) of place, to dwell, Matt. x. 11; to lodge, Luke xix. 5; (6) of state, as Acts v. 43 to continue firm, and constant in, John xv. 4; to endure, to last, to be permanent, 1 Cor. iii, 143; (2) trans., to wait for, to expect, Acts
Mepl(w, ow, (1) to divide, separate, mid., to share (uerd, gen.), Luke xii. 13; pass., to be divided, to be at variance, Matt. Xli, 25, 26; 1 Cor. i. 13; (2) to distinguish, pass., to differ, 1 Cor. vii. 34; (3) to dis- tribute, Mark vi. 41; acc. and dat.
Mépiyuva, Ns, 7, care, anxiety, as divid- ing, distracting the mind, Mait. xill. (225 Luke viii. 14.
pepiuvdw, &, to be anxious, distracted, abs. with dat. or wep{, gen. or acc. (cis, Matt. vi. 34), to be anxious about, or cqreful for, acc., 1 Cor. vil. 32-34.
pepls, los, 7, a part, or division, of a country, Acts xvi. 12; a share, por tion, Luke x. 42; Acts Vili, 21; Col. i. 12,
bepiouds, od, 5, a dividing, the act of dividing, Heb. iv. 12 ; distribution, gifts distributed, Heb. ii. 4.
peptorns, ov, 6, a divider, an arbiter, Luke xii. 14.
u€pos, ous, Td, a part, hence (1) a part, as assigned, share, Rev. xxii. 195 Jellowship, John xiii. 8; a business, or calling, Acts xix. 27; (2) @ part, as the result of division, John xix. 23. In adverbial phrases, /4épos tt, partly, in some part; ava pépos,
peonpBpla—pera-orpéhoo |
alternately, one after another ; s and Héoovs, partly; ek mépovs, indivi- dually, of persons, partially, imper- | fectly, of things; kara Hépos, par- ticularly, in detail, Heb. ix. 5. ueo-nuBpia, as, 7, midday, noon, the south, Acts viii. 26, xxii. 6.
peotreiw, ow, to mediate, to be a mediator, to compose a difference,
_ to intervene, to interpose, Heb. vi. 17.
wecirys, ov, 6, a mediator, a legate, an interpreter of the will of another, Gal. iii. 19; Heb. xii. 24.3 one who interposes between parties and recon- ciles them, 1 Tim. li. 5.
peco-vixtiov, lov, 6, midnight, Luke EL 5)
Meoo-motaula, as, 7, @ proper name, Mesopotamia, the region between the Euphrates and the Tigris.
besos, n, ov, middle, of time or place,
in the midst of (gen.), John 1, 26; neut., 7d wecov, the middle part ; adverbial phrases, with prepositions (art. generally om.), éx Hécou, Srom among, away. So éy péow, ava pécov, &e. (See preps.)
ueod-rorxov, ov, 74, a middle wall, a separation, Eph. li, 14.
Hec-oupdynua, aros, 76, mid-heaven, Rev. viii. 13, xiv. 6, xix. 17.
peodw, &, to be in the middle, or midst, John vil. 14.
Meocias, ov (from Heb., anointed), Messiah, the same as Gr. Xpiords, J ohn i i. 42, lv. 25
ueords, th, dv, full, filled with, gen.
ucoréw, &, to fill; pass., to be full of; gen., Acts i. 13.
pera. (akin to pécos), prep., gov. the gen, andaccus. Gen., with, among ; ace., after (see 801). With acc., peta indicates motion, succession. In composition, perd denotes partici- pation, change, or succession, being near to ; often like the Latin prefix trans, a8 in the words transfer, translate.
peta-Balyw, to go, or pass over, to pass away, to remove, Luke x. 7; Matt. xi:
‘VOCABULARY,
83
peta-BddAAw, in mid., to change onée mind, Acts xxviii. 6
pet-dyw, to move, or turn about, as horses, ships, James iii. 3, 4.
peTa-didupt, to impart, to communicate, Eph. iv. 28; 6 peradlSous, a dis- tributor of alms, é.g., of the church, Rom. xii. 8.
peTd-Geots, ews, 7, (1) @ removal, a translation, Heb. xi. 5; (2) a change, or substitution, Heb. vii. 12.
pet-aipw, to remove, intrans., to depart, Matt. xiii. 53.
pera-Kadéw, &, in mid., to call, or send Jor, to invite to oneself, Acts vii. 14.
MeTa-Kivéw, @, to move away, pass., to be removed, Col. i. 23.
pera-Aaupdven, to take a share of, Acts i. 46; partake, gen., 2 Tim. ii. 6; to obtain (acc. ), Acts xxiv. 25.
perd- Anis, ews, H, participation (pass.), .1 Tim. iv. 3.
peT-adAdoow, to change, to put one thing Jor another, Rom. i. 25, 26 (éy, eis).
MeTa-MéAoMant, peAtoopas, 1st aor., Mere- pedAnony, dep., pass., to change one’s mind, Matt. xxi. 29, 32; to repent, to feel sorrow for, Matt. xxvii. 3+ 2 Cor. vii. 8. See Synonyms. peTa-poppdw, -@, to change the form, mid., to alter one’s form, or aspect, Matt. xvii. 2; 3 fig., to be changed in mind, metamorphose,” Rom. xii. 2.
peTa.- voéw, &, how, to change one’s views and purpose, to repent, i.e., to change one’s habit of feeling and con- duct, Matt. ili. 2; Acts vili. 22, &e. See Synonyms.
perd-voiw, as, , change of mind, re- pentance, Heb. xii. 17; Matt. iii, 8.
peta-td (oty or tty), adv., of time, meanwhile, John iv. 31; afterwards, perh., Acts xiii, 42. As prep., with gen. of place, between, Matt. XXlil. 35.
peta-réumw, to send for, pass., Acts X. 29; in mid., to send for to oneself, to invite, Acts x. 5, xi. 13.
pera-otpépw (with 2nd fut. and 2nd aor. pass.), to turn, to change, James iv. 9; Acts ii. 20; to pervert, to corrupt, Gal. 1. 7.
K
84
+
ueta-oxnuati(w, tow, to transform, hil. iii, 213 mid., to assume the appearance of anyone, 2 Cor. Xi. 13, 14; fig.; to transfer, 1.e., to speak by way of accommodation, 1 Cor. iv. 6. peta-TiOnut, to transpose, Acts vii. 16 ; to transfer, to translate, Heb. vii. 12, xi. 5; mid., to transfer oneself, i.e., . to go over, or to fall away, Gal. i. 6; to pervert, Jude 4. pet-eretta, adv., afterwards, Heb. xl. 17. pet-exw, petacxhow, 2nd aor., mére- axov, to be partaker of, to share in, _to enjoy, 1 Cor, ix. 10, X. 17. metewpiCw, in mid., to be in suspense, ‘to be of doubtful mind, Luke xii. 29. pet-oucola, as, nh, change of abode, migration (of the Babylonian exile), Matt. i. 11, xii. 17. met-oni(w, to change one’s habitation, to migrate, Acts vii. 4, 43. ueToxh, 7S, 7, @ partaking, a consort- ing with, communion, 2 Cor. vi. 14. métoxos, ov, 6, H, & partner, a com- panion, an associate, Heb. 1. 9; Luke v. 7; @ partaker, Heb. iii. 1, 14. petpéw, @, to measure, Matt. vii. 2; met., to estimate, to judge of, 2 Cor. X; 12. petpn7hs, od, 6, ‘*a measurer,” metre- tes, a measure (72 sextarii) contain- ing nearly eight and a half English gallons, John ii. 6. petpio-mrabéw, @, to treat with gentleness, to be indulgent to, Heb. v. 2. uetpiws, adv., moderately, a litile, _. Aacts xx. 12. uétpoy, ov, T6, a measure, of capacity, Mark iv. 24; and of length, Rev. xxi, 153 measure assigned, Matt. XXill. 32; adv. phrase, é« wérpov, by measure, sparingly, John ili. 34. uét-wmov, ov, Td (Wp), the forehead, Rev. vii. 3, 7. wexpl, or mexpis, aclv., as prep. with en., unto, time, Matt. xii. 30; ark xiii, 30; place, Rom. xv. 19 ; degree, 2 Tim. ii. 9; Heb. xii. 4. _ As conj., until, Eph, iv. 13. See Synonyms,
’
"VOCABULARY,
i ;
- [pera-oxnperito—pirnp
.
Mh, & negat. particle, nof. For dis- tinction between uh, od, see 401; elliptically, lest, see 884; interro-. gatively, see 369. For the com- bination ob wh, see 377. . -
Bh-ve, in the phrase «i d¢ whye, but if not, emphatic. .
endauds, adv., by no means, Acts X. 14, xi. 8.
bndé, compare ovdé, and see 401; (x) neither ... nor; (2) not even. *
Endecis, pndeula, pndey (cis), compare ovdels, 20t one, NO One, NO person, Or. thing, nothing, Matt. viii. 4; Mark v. 26; Gal, vi. 3.
undé-rore, adv., never, 2 Tim. iii. 7,
undé-rw, adv., not yet, Heb. xi. 7.
Mjjos, ov, 6, a Mede, Acts ii. 9.
Knkett, adv. (€rt), no more, no longer, lest further.
LijKos, ous, 76, length, Rev. xxi. 16.
Enkive, to make long; mid., to grow up, as plants, Mark iv. 27.
MnAwTn, jis, 7, a fleece, a sheep’s skin, Heb. xi: 37.
Khv, a part. of strong affirmation, N.T., only in the combination, 7 Env, assuredly, certainly.
ehy, unvds, 6 (1) a month, Acts vii. 20, &e.; (2) the new moon, as a festival, Gal. iv. 10.
Byer, indicate, to declare, 1 Cor. x. 28, y ov, an interrogative formula, ex- pecting the answer “yes,” Rom,
x. 18.
Mh-mwore, adv., no longer, Heb, ix. 17. As conj., lest ever, lest perhaps, whether indeed, if so be, Luke iii, 15; John vii. 26.
Mh-mw, adv., not as yet, not yet, Rom, ix. 11; Heb. ix. 8,
Kiwws, conj., lest in any way, per- adventure, that in no way, Acts XXxvil. 29; whether perhaps, 1 Thess, iii. 5.
unpds ov, 46, the thigh, Rev. xix. 10,
Hire, conj., neither... nor, continuing a negation, not even, Mark iii. 20. harnp, tpds, 7, a mother, met, a
mother city, Gal. iv, 26.
pare—psyis]
ujtt, adv., interrogatively used, és
it? expecting a negative answer, ware. 5 not to say then? 1 Cor.
vi. 3.
vhrs, pron. interrog., has, or is any- one? J ohn i iv. 33 (better uh Tis). MhTtpa, as, , the womb.
LNTP-ah@as, ov, 6, a matricide, 1 Tim. e.
pla, fein. of ¢is, one.
pudivw, ava, perf. pass., meulaoua, to stain, to pollute, Jude 8; pass., to - be defiled, John xviii, 28,
piacua, atos, Td, pollution, defilement, 2 Pet. ii. 20; **miasma.”
piacuds, ov, . pollution, defilement, 2 Pet. ii. 10,
plyya, atos, 74, John xix. 39.
lyvut, pito, uta, perf. pass., weury- pat, to mix, to seat Matt. xxvii.
. 34; Rev. vii. 7.
puxpds, a, dv, little, small, i.e., in size, Matt. xiii, 32; quantity, 1 Cor. v. 6; number, Luke xii. 32; time, John vii. 33; dignity, Matt. x. 42.
MiAntos, ov, 7, Miletus.
pidyov, tov, 7d (Latin, mille passuum, 1000 paces), a mile (about 80 yards less than our mile).
Miéouat, oduar, dep. mid., to imitate, to follow the example of, 2 Thess. iil, 7.
pints, ov, 8 an tmitator, a follower, 1 Cor. iv. 16,
puuvnokw (uva-), mid. (perf. wéurnua, and fut. in pass. from pyynocojcoua), to call to mind, to remember, Matt. XXvl. 75; pass., to be remembered, to be had in mind, Acts x. 31; Rev. Xvi. 19.
picéw, @ how, to hate, to detest, to abhor. Used in antith. with aya- mdw, to love less, not to love, to slight, Matt. vi. 24; John xii. 25.
piab-amo-Socla, as, n, recompense, as (1) reward, Heb. x. 35, xi. 263 (2) punishment, Heb. ii. 2.
pig6-a7ro- déTns, ov, 6, a rewarder, Heb. x1. 6,
ulgOios, ov, hired, as subst., a hired servant, a hireling, Luke xv. 17, 19.
a mixture,
VOCABULARY. a P 85 |
siaOds, ot, 6, hire, wages, recompense, requital, Matt. xx. 8 Used for reward, Matt. v. 12, 46; for punish- ment, 2 Pet. ii. 13.
uia0dw, &, dow, to hire out, to hire, to engage to labour for wages, Matt. Xx. 1,°7;
plrO@wpya, aros, 76, hire, rent; met., anything rented, as a house, Acts XXVIii. 30.
puiabwrds, ov, 6, a hired servant, one who serves for wages, Mark i. 20; John x. 12, 13.
Mirvajvn, ns, 4, Mitylene, the capital of Lesbos, Acts xx. 1
Miyana, 6 (Heb., who (is) like God ?), Michael, an archangel, Jude 9; Rey. xii. 7. ;
| pa, as, h, a mina, silver money = 100
Spdxua, or about 3/. 158.; of ac- count, Luke xix. 13, 16,
pvdouat (see mivioKw).
Mvdcwy, wvos, 6, Mnason, Acts xxi, 16,
uvela, as, 7, remembrance, recollection, Phil. i. 3; 1 Thess. iii, 6; pveloy moeicba, to mention, to bear in mind, Rom. i. 9.
pviua, aros, T6, a memorial, a monu- ment, a tomb, Mark v.5; Luke XXill. 53.
pynueiov, ov, 74, @ tomb, a grave, Matt. viii. 28; John xi. 31.
prvhun, ns, 7, remembrance, mention ; pvhunv twoeicba, to make mention, 2 Pet. i. 15.
uvnuovedw, to remember (Sr), recollect, call to mind (gen. or acc.), Matt. xvi. 9; Acts xx. 31; to be mind- Sul of, Heb. xi. 15; to make men- tion of (gen., or epi, gen.), Heb. xi. 22.
pyvnudcuvoy, ov, Td, a memorial, honour- able remembrance, fame, Matt. xxvi. 13; Mark xiv. 9.
pynoretw, to ask in marriage; mid., to woo; pass., to be betrothed, Matt, i. 18.
woyl-AdAos, ov, one who can scarcely speak, a stammerer, Mark vii. 32.
uéyts, adv. (like udaAus), with difficulty scarcely, hardly, Luke ix. 39.
86 ‘VOCABULARY.
uddios, ov, 6, a dry measure (16 sex- tarii), containing about a peck; a modius, Matt, v. 15; Mark iv. 21; Luke xi. 33.
Horxaris, {50s, 7, an adulteress, Rom. vii. 3; fig. for departure from God, Matt. xvi. 4; James iv. 4.
poxdoun, Gua, to commit adultery, to be guilty of adultery, Matt. ¥. 92.
porxeia, as, H, adultery, Matt. xv. 19.
poxetw, ow, to commit adultery, abs., to have adulterous intercourse with, to debauch, acc.; fig., of forsaking God, Rev. ii. 22.
potxés, ov, 6, an adulterer, Luke Xvill. 11; 1 Cor. vi. 9; Heb. xiii. 4.
porus, adv. (like uéy:s), with difficulty, scarcely, hardly, Acts xiv. 18; Rom. v. 7; 1 Pet. iv. 18.
MoAéx, 6 (Heb.) Moloch, Acts vii. 43 ; LXX.
portye, vv, to pollute, to ris 1 Cor. viii. 7; Rev. iii. 4, xiv.
porvouds, od, 6, pollution, "ee fleneins 2 Cor. vii. 1. Hough, 5 h, complaint, cause or ground of complaint, Col. iii. 13. povi, fis, 7, a place of abode, a dwell- ing-place, John xiv. 2, 23.
Hovo-yevhs, és, gen., ots, only begotten, Luke vii. 12; Heb. xi. 17, Often of CurIsT, as Johni. 14, iii. 16.
pévos, n, ov, only, alone, single, Luke xxiv. 12, 18; solitary, without com- pany, or heip, Mark vi. 473 for- saken, desolate, John viii. 29; adv., pdvoy, only.
pov-dpbaryos, having but one eye, Matt. xviii. 9.
povdw, @, to leave alone; pass., to be left alone, or desolate, 1 Tim. v. 5.
popoh, jis, n, outward appearance, form, shape, Mark xvi. 12; Phil. li. 6, 7. See Synonyms,
popseo, @, dow, to form, to fashion, Gal. iv. 19.
péppwors, ews, 7, formation, external appearance, 2 Tim. ili, 5; form, rule, system, Rom. ii, 20.
pooxo-roew, &, to form the image of a calf, Acts vil. 41,
‘[p68t0s—papos
péoxos, ov, 6, 7, a@ calf, a young rogn Luke xv. 23; Heb. ix. 12, 19.
povoxds, h, dv, skilled in music, a musician, Rev. xviii, 22._
udx60s, ov, 6, wearisome labour, toil, with pain and sorrow, 2 Cor. xi. 27; 1 Thess. ii. 9; 2 Thess. iii. 8.
pueAds, ov, 6, the marrow, Heb. iv. 12.
pvéw, @, to instruct, to initiate into, Phil. iv. 12.
bd0os, ov, 6, a word, hence a, tale, fable, or figment, 1 Tim. iv. 7, “ myth.”
fukdoum, Guat, to low, to bellow, as a bull, fo roar, as a lion, Rev. x. 3.
puxtnpl(w, to contract the nostrils in contempt, to mock, sneer, or deride, Gal. vi. 7.
pvakds, ‘A, dy, Mark ix. 42.
puro, ov, 4, Xviil. 6.
bvAdy, dvos, 6, a mill-house, the place where corn was ground, Matt. Xxiv. 41.
pupids, ados, h, a myriad, ten thousand, a vast multitude (gen.), indefinite, Luke xii. 1; Acts xxi. 20.
pupi(w, ow, to anoint, for burial, Mark xiv. 8
pertaining to a mill,
a millstone, Matt.
Bipot, at, a ten thousand, Matt. Xvilil. 243; pmupiot, fot, “la, innume- rable.
pupoy, ov, 76, a perfumed ointment, Matt. XXVi. 7,
Mvota, as, 7, Mysia, Acts xvi. 7. puorhp.oy, tov, 74, a mystery, anything hidden, a secret, Matt. xiii. 11;
Rom. xi. 25. Often in N.T. of the truths of the Gospel as mysteries revealed, 1 Tim. iii. 16.
puwrd iw, to wink, to be dim-sighted, 2 Pet. i. 9.
pdrwy, wos, 6, the mark of a stripe ; met., pain, anguish, 1 Pet. ii. 24.
Pwudoum, Gua, dep., aor., mid. and pass., to blame, to find fault with, 2 Cor. viii. 20.
papos, ov, 6, a spot, a blemish ; met., disgrace, 2 Pet. ii, 13.
popatva—vepérn |
pwpalyw, ava, to infatuate, to make Joolish, 1 Cor. i. 20; pass., to be- come foolish, Rom. i. 22; to become insipid, tasteless, like spoiled salt, Matt. v. 13.
— pwpia, as, 7, folly, absurdity, con- tenyptibleness, 1 Cor. £18, @2y 29: Kwpo-Aoyla, as, 7, foolish talking,
babble, Eph. v. 4.
pwpds, d, dv, stupid, foolish, Matt. Vii. 26, Xxiill. 17, 19; as subst., a wicked, graceless, abandoned person, Matt. v. 22; 7d pwpdy, foolishe ness. But see ‘153, ii.
Mwojs, or Mwio7s, éws, dat., «7, or 9; ace. hy (once a, Luke xvi. 29), 46, Moses, met., the books of Moses, the Pentateuch, Luke xvi. 29; 2 Cor. li. 15, &c,
N.
N, v, vv, nu, n, the thirteenth letter, As a numeral, / = 5c; v= 50,000.
Naacowy, 6 (Heb. ), WVaasson, Matt. i, 43 Luke iii. 31.
Nayyal, 6 (Heb.), Nagge, Luke iii. 25.
Na(apéé, or re eaeht n, Nazareth.
NaCapyvds, ov, 6, a Nazarene, as Mark i. 24.
Na{wpaios, ov, 6, a Nazarene, an ap- pellation of Christ. Christians are called of Nafwpaio., Acts xxiv. 5.
Na@dy, 6 (Heb.), Nathan, Luke iii, 31.
Nafavana, 6, Me athanael, probably the same as Bartholomew.
val, adv., affirming, yes, Matt. ix. 28; even 80, Matt. xi. 26; Luke x. 21; Rev. xxii. 20; yea, strongly affirm. ing, Luke vii. 26.
Naiv, #, Nain, Luke vii. 11.
vads, ov, 6 (valee); a temple, a shrine, or small model of a temple, the abode of deity, pretended, Acts xix. 24; the temple, Matt. xxiii. 16; used of Jesus Christ, John ii. 19, 20; of Christians generally, 1 Cor. iii. "16; 2 Cor. vi. 16. See Syno- nyms.
Naotp, 6 (Heb.),, Nahum, Luke iii. 25 (not the prophet).
VOCABULARY, —~87
vdpdos, ov, 7, nard, spikenard, a costly ointment, Mark xiv. 3; John xii. 3.
Napkiooos, ov, 46, Narcissus, Rom. XVi. 11.
vav-ayéw, @ (&yvuut), to make ship- wreck, to be shipwrecked, xi. 25; fig., 1 Tim. i. 19.
vab-KAnpos, ov, 6, a ship-master, or owner, Acts xxvii. 11.
vais, véws, acc. vaiv, 7, a ship, Acts XXVii. 41.
pai — 6, @ sailor, Acts xxvii.
27;
Sashes % (Heb.), Nahor, Luke iii. 34.
veavlas, ov, 6, & young man, a youth, Acts xx. 9; one in the prime of life, Acts Vii. 58.
veavickos, ov, 6, a young man, Matt. xix. 20; plur. ., Of soldiers, Mark xiv. 51; of the middle stage in the divine life, 1 John ii. 13, 14.
Nedmonus, ews, 7, Neapolis.
wee 6 (Heb.), ccadeian Luke iv. 27.
vexpds, d, by, dead, (1) lit., as Matt. Xl. §; of vexpol, the dead generally ; (2) fig., dead, spiritually, Eph. ii, 1; inactive, inoperative, Rom. vii. 8; unaffected by, or utterly indifferent to (dat. ), Rom. vi, 11.
vexpdw, &, to put to death—so, to ‘* mortify””—to deprive of power, to render weak, and impotent, Rom. iv. 19; Col. ili. 5; Heb. xi. 12.
véxpwots, ews, 7, death, a being put to death, 2 Cor. iv. 10; deadness, im- potency, Rom. iv. 19.
véos, a, ov, (1) new, fresh, Matt. 1X. 173 -new, in disposition and cha- racter ; (2) young, of persons, Titus li. 4. *Compar. » VE@TEpos, younger, Luke Xv. 12, 13. See Synonyms.
veooods, od, 6, the young of birds, a youngling, a chicken, Luke ii. 24.
vedtns, ntos, 4, youth, youthfulness, Luke xviil. 21; 1 Tim. iv. 12,
ved-puTos, ov, newly -planted ; fig., recent convert, ‘* neophyte,” I ‘iim. iii. 6.
veiw, ow, to nod—so, to beckon—to sig- nify, J ohn xiii. 24; Acts xxiv. 10,
vepéAdn, ns, h, a cloud,
2 Cor. °
‘ :
88 VOCABULARY.
Nepbarciu, 6 (Heb.), Naphthali, Matt. iv. 14; Rev. vii. 6.
vépos, ous, 76, a cloud ; met., a mul- titude, a great company, Heb. xii. 1.
veppds, od, 6, the kidney, plur., the reins, put (as Heb.) for the secret thoughts, desires, and affections, Rev. ii. 23,
vew-Kdpos, ov, 6, ) (vads and Kopéw), to sweep, “«temple- -sweeper,” a temple- keeper, a designation of the people
_ of Ephesus, Acts xix. 35.
vewrepixos, h, dv, youthful, junenile, 2, Tim, ii. 22.
vedTepos, a, ov (comp. of véos, which see), younger, inferior in rank, more humble, Luke xxii. 26.
vh, adv., of affirmative swearing, by, with ace., 1 Cor. xv. 31.
vhOw, to spin, Matt. vi. 28.
vai. Coo, to be like a child, xiv. rags
virrios, ia, tov, infantile; as subst., an infant, a babe, a child, Matt. xxi. 16; 1 Cor. xiii, 11; used of an age below manhood, Gal. iv. 1; fig., of unlearned, unenlightened per- sons, Matt. xi. 25; Rom. ii. 20.
Nyupevs, ews, 6, Nereus, Rom, xvi. 15.
Nypi, 6 (Heb.), eri, Luke iii. 27.
ynolov, ov, 76 (dim. of vijgos), a small island, an islet, Acts xxvii. 16.
vITOS, OV, 1 (véw, to swim), an island.
vnor ela, as, 7, fasting, a fast, Matt. Xvii. 21; Acts xiv. 23; the day of atonement, the chief Jewish fast-day, Acts XXVii 9.
vnotetw, ow, to abstain from food, to fast, Matt. vi. 16-18,
vijoris, ws, plur., vhores, 6, 4, fasting, Matt. xv. 32.
vnpdAws, or -Aéos, ov, sober-minded, temperate; 1 Tim, ii. 2; Tit.
1 Cor.
il, 2.
vipw, yw, to be sober, temperate, fig., 1 Thess. v. 6, 8.
Niyep, 6 (Lat.), Niger, Acts xiil. 1.
Nuxdvwp, opos, 6, Nicanor, Acts vi. 5.
vikdw, @, how, ‘to prevail, abs., Rev. iii, 21; to conquer (acc.), Luke xi, 22; John xvi. 33.
ann, 75, 4, victory, 1 John v. 4.
[NepOarely—vepropa Nixé-dnuos, ov, 6, Nicodemus, John iii. 1.
Nixodairns, ov, 6, a follower of Nico- laus (probably a Greek equivalent for Balaam), Rev. vi. 15.
Nixé-Aaos, ov, 6, Nicolaus, Acts vi. 5 (not to be confounded. with pre- ced.).
Nixd-modts, e@s, 9, Nicopolis, iii. 12. existed ; donia.
vikos, ous, 76, victory; eis vixos, from
, to a victorious consummation, utterly, Matt. xii. 20; 1 Cor. xv.
Titus Several cities of the name this was prob. in Mace-
54 55, a. 2 Nivevil, 7 (Heb.), Nineveh, Luke xi. 32. Nuwevirns, ov, 6, a@ Ninevite, Matt.
xii. 41. vintnp, jpos, 6, a basin, or ewer, for
washing hands or feet, John xiii. 5. virtw, ww, to wash (acc.), mid., to
wash one’s self, acc. of part. as
Mark vii. 3. See Synonyms. voéw, %, haw, to understand, to per-
ceive, abs., or with acc., or 6r1. vénua, atos, 76, (1) a design, counsel,
purpose, 2 Cor. ii, 11, x. 5; Phil.
lv. 73 (2) the mind, i.e., the under-
RE or intellect, 2 Cor. xi. 3. vdbos, , ov, bastard, spurious, Heb.
xi 8 vouh, is, % (véuw, to apportion, as
pasture to cattle), (1) pasturage,
John x. 9; (2) met., a feeding,
spreading, as of a gangrene, 2 Tim.
iil. 17. voul(w, aw (vduos), (1) to be wont, to
do by custom, Acts xvi. 13; (2) to
think, to reckon, to expect, as the
result of thinking, Matt. v. 17,
XX. 10, voutkds, h, dv, pertaining to law, legal,
Titus iii, 9; as subst., a@ person
skilled in law, Titus iii. 13; @
teacher of the Mosaic law, Matt.
Xxii. 35, &c. vouluws, adv., lawfully, agreeably to
rule, 1 Tim. i. 8; 2 Tim, id 5. véuioua, aros, 76, mone y, coin, whose
value is settled by law, Matt.
Xxli. 19.
vopo-Si8dcKkahos —varos |
vouo-diddoKados, ov, 6, a@ teacher or interpreter of the law.
vouo-Oecia, as, 7, legislation, the laws given, t.e., the Mosaic law, Rom. 1X. 4.
vouo-beréw, w, to sanction, to establish Jor a law, Heb. viii. 6; pass., to have a law established, Heb. vii. Il.
vouo-bérns, ov, 5 (riOnm), a law-giver, legislator, James iv. 12.
vouos, ov, 6 (véuw, to apportion), a law, an edict, a decree, a statute, Luke li. 22; @ standard of acting, or judging, Rom. ili. 27; a@ written law, Rom. il. 14; the Mosaic eco- nomy, Matt. v. 18; Rom. x. 4; the Christian dispensation, or doctrines, Gal. vi. 2; Rom. xiii. 8; met., for the books containing the Mosaic
' law, i.e, the five books of Moses, Matt. xii. 5; and for the Old Testament generally, John x. 34.
vos (vous, which see).
veréw, @, to be sick; fig., to have a diseased appetite, or craving for, mepi (acc.), 1 Tim. vi. 4.
vécnua, aros, 76, a disease, a sickness, John vy. 4.
vécos, ov, 6, @ sickness, a disease, a distemper, Matt. iv. 23, 24.
voroid, as, n, a brood of young birds, Luke xiii, 34.
voocioy, ov, Td, a young bird, Matt. XXiil, 37.
voogds (see veooasds).
voopifw, in mid., to secrete for one’s self, to purloin, Acts v. 2, 3; Titus ii, 10,
vétos, ov, 6, the south wind, Luke xil. §5; the southern quarter, Luke xi. 31.
vou-Oecia, as, 7, & warning, admonition, counsel,
vou-GeTew, &, to warn, to admonish, to counsel, Acts xx. 31,
vou-unvia, as, h, the new moon, or month, as a-festival, Col. ii. 16.
vouy-exas, adv., understandingly, wisely, judiciously, Matt. xii, 34.
VOCABULARY. 89
vovs, or vods, vow, vot, voy, 6, the mind, i.e., the understanding, or in- . tellect, Luke xxiv. 45; Rom, xii. 23 Phil. iv. 7. Hence, any affection of the mind—as modes of thought— inclinations, or dispositions, Rom, xiv. 5; 1 Cor. i. 10; presence of mind, 2 Thess. ii. 2 ; more widely, the rational soul, with its powers and affections, Rom. vii. 2 5.
Nuuas, a, é, Nymphas, Col. iv. 15.
viuon, ns, , a bride, Rev. xviii. 23; a daughter-in- -law, Matt. x. 35.
vuupios, ov, 6, & bridegroom, John iii. 29.
vuupdv, avos, 6, a bridal chamber ; viol rod vuupaevos, Matt. ix. 15, sons of the bridal chamber, brides- men.
voy and vuvt, adv., (1) of time, now, .¢@., the actually present; now, in relation to time just past ; just now, even now, now, in relation to future time ; just at hand, even now, imme- diately ; 6, 7, Td, viv, the present, with sub. or (neut.) without; (2) of logical connexion, now, 34. ey ** see- ing that things are so,” 2 Cor. vil. 9; now then, t.e., implying the rise of one thing from another, 1 Cor. xiv. 6. (3) In commands and appeals, voy is emphatic, Matt. XXvil. 42; James iv. 13, at this instant.
vbt, vunrds, 7, the night, night-time, lit.; often fig., a time of darkness and ignorance, Rom. xiii, 12; 1 Thess. v. 5.
vicow, tw, to stab, to pierce, John X1x. 34.
vuatd(w, tw, to nod, as asleep, to be drowsy, Matt. gat 5; fig., to de- lay, 2 Pet. ii.
vux9-nuepov, ov, ah a day and a night, twenty-four hours, 2 Cor. Xl 25.
Noe, 6 (Heb.), Noah.
vanbpds, d, dv, slow, dull, stupid, Heb, V. II, Vi. 12.
yearos, ov, 6, the back of men or animals, Rom. xi. 10.
90 VOCABULARY,
z.
=, & &, wi, x, or gs, the fourteenth letter. As numeral, # = 60; {= 60,000,
tevia, as, %, hospitality, entertainment, a lodging, Acts xxviii. 3; Philem. 22.
tevidw, ow, (1) to receive as a guest (ace.); pass., to be entertained, to lodge as a guest with, Acts x. 6, xxi. 16; (2) to appear strange to, Acts xvii. 20; pass., to think strangely of, to be surprised at (dat.), 1 Pet. iv. 12.
tevo-boxéw, &@, to entertain guests, to
practise hospitality, 1 Tim. v. 10,
tévos, n, ov, strange, foreign, Acts”
xvii, 18; 1 Pet. iv. 12; with gen., Eph. ii. 12; as subst, a stranger, a guest, a host, Rom. Xvl, 23.
téorns, ov, 6 (the Latin sextarius), a measure, about a pint and a half English ; met., a cup, or pitcher, of any size, Mark vii. 4, 8.
Enpalyw, av@, 1st aor., é&hpava, pert. pass., e&fjpaypo, to dry, to make dry, to wither, James i. 11; pass., fo be or become dry, withered, Matt. xiii. 6; to be dried up, Rev. xvi. 12 ; to be ripened, as corn, Rev, xiv. 15; to pine away, Mark ix. 18.
tnpds, a, dv, dry, withered, as a tree, Luke xxiii. 31; as a diseased and useless limb, Matt. xii. 10; Luke vi. 6, 8.
tvAwos, lyn, wov, wooden, 2 Tim. li. 20.
tvAov, ov, 76, wood, e.g., timber in building, 1 Cor. iii. 12 ; or for burn- ing; anything made of wood, e.g., the stocks, Acts xvi. 24; a staff, Matt. xxvi. 47, 553 @ cross, or gibbet, Acts xiii. 29; Gal. iii, 13; a living tree, Rev. i. 7.
tupdw, @, hew, perf. pass., étdpnua, to shear, or shawe, ¢.g., the locks and the beard, Acts xxi. 24; 1 Cor. xi. 5, 6.
[= —606vy oO.
O, 0, duixpdy, omicron, short o, the fifteenth letter. As a numeral,
_ @&=70; = 70,000,
6, 4, 76, the definite article, the, originally demonstrative. For its uses, see Part III., Chap. IT.
éySonKkovra, num. indecl., eighty.
byd00s, , ov, ord., eighth. For 2 Pet, ii. 5, see 331.
bykos, ov, 6, a weight, an impediment, Heb. xii. 1.
dd¢, 5e, Td5e, demon. pron., this, that (here), (see 3839), such and such, certain, James iv. 13.
ddetdw, to pass along a way, to journey, Luke x. 33.
65-nyéw, @, how, to lead along a way, to conduct, to instruct, Matt. xv. 143 John xvi. 13.
65-nyos, ov, 6, a leader, Acts i. 16; fig., of instructors, Matt. xv. 14.
650-1-mopéw, &, to travel, to pursue a way, Acts x. 9.
650-t-ropia, as, 7, @ journey, a journey- ing, John iv. 6
686s, ov, H, (1) @ way, a road, a high- way, Matt. il. 12; (2) a going, a progress, Mark vi. 8; (3) a journey, a day’s, or a Sabbath day’s, Luke ii. 44; Acts i. 12; (4) fig., manner of action, method of proceeding, Acts xiii. 10; Matt. xxi. 32; espec. (5) the Christian way, Acts ix. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 2; (6) used of Christ himself, John xiv. 6.
dd0vs, Sdvros, 6, a tooth, Matt. v. 38.
dduvdw, @, in mid. and pass., to be in an agony, to be tormented, to be greatly grieved or distressed, Luke li. 48; Acts xx. 38.
dduvn, ns, H, pain, distress, of body or mind, Rom. ix. 2; 1 Tim, vi. to.
d5upuds, ov, 6, lamentation, wailing, Mat. ii. 18.
’O¢ias, ov, Uzziah, Matt. i. 8.
d¢(w, intrans., to emit an odour, John xi. 39.
50ev, adv., whence, of place or source.
60éyn, ns, 7, @ linen cloth, hence, a sheet, Acts X. 11.
50S viov—dAryd-spuxos |
60dviov, ov, +d (dim. of 60évn), a linen swathe, a bandage, Luke xxiv. 12.
olda (F.5-), I know (see 108, 4).
oikeiands (see oixiakds).
oiketos, a, ov, domestic, pertaining to a JSamily, Eph. ii. 19; associated with, gen., Gal. vi. 10,
olxérns, ov, 6, one living in the house with, a domestic, a servant.
oixéw, @, how, to inhabit, to dwell in, Rom. viii. 9; 1 Tim. vi. 16,
olknua, aros, Td, a dwelling, used of a prison, Acts xil. 7.
oiknThpioyv, ov, 76, a domicile, of the spiritual body as the habitation of the soul, 2 Cor. v. 2.
oikla, as, 7, (1) a house; (2) met, a household, a family, goods, i.¢., a house and what is in it.
oixiakds, ov, 6, one of a family, whether child, relative, or servant, Matt. x. 46.
oiko-deomoTéw, &, to govern a house- hold, 1 Tim. v. 14.
oixo-deomdTns, ov, 6, a householder, a head of a family, Matt. x. 25.
oixo-5ouew, &, to erect a building, Luke xiv. 30; to rebuild, to found, to establish ; fig., of increase in know- ledge and piety, 1 Cor. x. 23; to encourage, to embolden, 1 Cor. viii. 10.
oixo-douh, jis, 7 (Séuw), a building, structure, of the spiritual body, 2 Cor. v. 1; of the church, Eph. li, 21; met., edification, spiritual advancement, Rom. xv. 2.
oiko-Souia, as, 7, edification, 1 Tim. 1. 4, rec. (prob. oikovouiav),
oikovoula, as, management of family affairs, stewardship, an ‘*economy,” or dispensation.
- oixo-véuos, ov (véuw), @ house manager, a steward, an administrator of funds Jor another ; often of the Christian stewardship.
elxos, ov, 6, a house, a buililing, for any purpose (gen.); met., a family resident in one house, a family per- petuated by succession, the house of
» God, i.e., the temple; the family of God, i.e., the church,
VOCABULARY. 91.
oixovmeyn, ns, pres., part., pass., fem. (-yA) of oinéw, the inhabited land, or world, of (1) the Roman empire ; (2) prob. the Syrian province, Luke li. 1; (3) the world at large; (4) met., the inhabitants of the world ; (5) a state, or economy, Heb. ii. 5.
oik-oupds, ov, 6, % (odpos, keeper), a house-manager, Titus ii. 5.
oixreipw, now, to pity, to have com- passion, Rom, ix. 15; LXX.
oixtipuds, od, 6, kindness in relieving sorrow, Col. ili. 12; favour, benignity, compassion, Rom. xii. 1.
viktipuwy, ovos, 6, 7, pitiful, compas- sionate, merciful.
olucs (see o%ouar).
oivo-wdTns, ov, 6, a wine-bibber, one who drinks to excess, Matt. xi, 19.
olvos, ov, 6, wine, Mark ii, 22, &e. ; met., the vine, Rev. vi. 63 fig., of that which excites or inflames, Rev. Xiv. 10, XVii. 2.
oivo-pavyia, as, ) (pAdw, to be hot), the state of being heated with wine, drunkenness.
ofouat and olua, to think, to suppose,
ace. and inf., or 71.
oios, a, ov, rel. pron. correl. to Towwd- tos, of what kind, or sort.
olw (see pépw).
éxvéw, &, how, to be slothful, to delay, to be loth, Acts ix. 38.
éxvnpés, da, dv, slothful, indolent, tedious, Rom. xii. 11; Phil. iii. 1.
dxTa-huepos, ov, 6, 7, of or belonging to the eighth day, Phil. iii. 5.
oxT@, num. indecl., eight.
dAcbpos, ov, 6, destruction, perdition. misery, 1 Cor. V. 5.
dAvyé-miotos, ov, 6, 7, Of little faith, Matt. vi. 30.
dAtyos, n, ov, (1) little, small, brief, (2) in plur., few, sometimes with gen.; (3) neut. as adv., dAlyor, of time, soon; of space, uw litile way ; (3) with prepositions preced. in various phrases, as év dAlyg, in @ short time, or with liile trouble, Acts xxvi. 28.
daAryd-Wuxos, adv., small-souled, faint- hearted, 1 Thess. v. 14.
92
Mary -sipdes @, to make litile of, to despise (gen. M Heb. xii. 5; LXX. Gdobpevths, ov, 6, a destroyer, t Cor. x. 10,
Gdobpedw, to destroy, cause to perish, Heb. xi. 28.
bAo-Kairwpua, atos, Td (kalw), a burnt offering, the whole being consumed, “* holocaust,” Mark Xil. 33.
6ro-«Anpia, as, 7, perfect soundness, Acts iii, 16,
6A6-KAnpos, ov, whole in every part, sound, perfect, 1 Thess. v. 23; James i. 4.
6AoAv@w, as from the cry, oA-oA! to howl, to yell, to lament aloud, James
Nes eB dAos, n, ov, all, the whole (see 225; adv., -ws, wholly, altogether ; with neg. preced., not at all.
<7 orp és, perfect, complete, 1 Thess.
13.
Oayumas, a, 6, Olympas, Rom. xvi. 15.
dAvvbos, ov, 6, an unseasonable fig, one which, not ripening in due time, hangs till nearly winter, Rev. vi, 13.
buBpos, ov, 6, a heavy rain, Luke xil. 54:
bpuiréw, @, now, to be in company with, to associate with (dat.), to talk with (mpos, acc.).
buiAla, as, 4, intercourse, converse, dis- course, 1 Cor. xv. 33, *‘ homily.”
dupa, aros, 76, an eye.
duyum and duriw, dudow (see 116, 3), to swear, to take an oath, Mark xiv. 71; to promise with an oath, Mark vi. 23.
bu0-Ouuaddv, adv., with one mind,
_ unanimously, altogether, Rom, xv. 6; Acts vii. 57.
dpordw, ow, to be like, Mark xiv. 70.
duow-rabhs, ovs, 6, 7, being affected like another (dat.), having like pas- sions, or feelings, Acts xiv. 15; James v. 17.
byotos, ola, otov, like, similur to, re- sembling (dat.), af equal rank, Matt.
xxii. 39. Once with gen., John viii, 55. Adv., -ws, in like manner, likewise,
VOCABULARY.
[3dcy-opeo—*Ovnerhopos
éuoudrns, nros, 7, likeness, similitude, Heb. iv. 15.
duoidw, @, (1) to render like, Matt, vi. 8; pass., to be like, or to re- semble, Matt. xiii. 24; (2) to liken, to compare, Matt. vil. 24; Mark iv. 30; with ace. and dat.
6uolwua, atos, 76, likeness, similitude, Phil, i, 7; "Rev. ix. 7; Rom. v. 14. See Synonyms.
duolwars, ews, , likeness, resemblance, James iii. 9
duo-Aoyéw, @, how, I8t aor., dpmodd- Anca, to speak the same thing, - hence, (1) to confess, in the sense of conceding or admitting, generally with 871; (2) to profess, or acknow- ledge openly, acc., once with é», Matt. x. 32; (3) as efouodAoyéw, to praise, to give thanks (dat.), Heb. Xill. 15.
dporoyla, as, %, a profession, either ia act of professing (Heb. iii. 1),
r (generally) the truth professed, Heb. iv. 14.
duodroyounévws, adv., by consent of all, confessedly, without controversy, . 1 Tim, ii. 16.
6ud-rexvos, ov, of the same art, or craft, Acts xviii. 3.
duov, adv,, together, at the same place or time.
bud-ppwv, ovos (piv), of the same mind, concurrent, 1 Pet, ‘ii ?
budw (see duvumt).
Sums, adv., yet, nevertheless, 1 Cor. xiv. 7; Gal. iii, 15; with pévro, notwithstanding, John xii. 42.
bvap, 76, indecl,, a dream ; kar’ bvap, in a dream, Matt. i. 20, ii, 12, 13, XXVii. 19.
dvdpiov, tov, 7d (dim. of dvos), a young ass, an ass’s colt, John xii. 14.
beidice, ow, to reproach, revile, up- braid, Matt. xi. 20; Mark xvi, 14.
dverdicouds, od, 56, reproach, reviling, contumely, 1 Tim. iii. 7; Heb. 3
eae? ous, 76, reproach, Luke i. 25.
"Ov hotmos, ov ( profitable), Onesimus.
’"Ovnoi-popos, ov, 6, Onesiphorus.
dvixds—6p0ds] _
ovucds, n, 6v, pertaining to an ass; pros Evricos, a millstone turned by an ass, Matt. xviii, 6, é.¢., the large upper millstone.
évivnut, mid. aor., opt., dvaluny, may I have advantage or pleasure from ! Philem. 20.
dvoua, aros, 7d, a name, i.e, that by which anyone is known, @ charac- ter; as described by the name, Matt. X. 41, 42; Rev. iii. 1; fame, re- putation, ‘often implying dignity, authority, Eph. i. 21; Phil. ii. 9.
dvoud iw, ow, to give a name to, Luke vi. 13, 143; to mention, Eph. v. 3; to call upon, or profess the name of, 2 Tim. li. 19.
évos, ov, 6, 7, an ass.
ivTws, ‘adv. (dv, neut. part of eiul), really, in very deed.
dios, ous, 76, vinegar, in N.T., @ poor wine, mixed with ‘water, a common drink of Roman soldiers.
btds, cia, ¥, (1) sharp, as a weapon, Rev. i. 16; (2) swift, eager, Rom. iii. 15.
érh, jis, cP an opening, James ili. 11.
bmodev, adv., behind, back of.
émlow, adv., behind, of place, .Luke vii. 38; of time, Matt. ili. 11; abs., or with gen.
érAiG, ow, N.T., mid., to arm one- self with, acc., fig., 1 Pet. iv. 1.
Grdrov, ov, 76,-an mstrument. Hence ni (1) arms, armour, John xviii.
; (2) instruments, Rom. vi. 13.
betas, ola, oiov, relat. pron., of what kind, or manner, 3 Cor. ii. 13; correl. to to.vtos, Acts Xxvi. 29.
érére, part. of time, when, Luke Vi. 3.
érov, adv. of place, where, whither ; where, referring to state, Col. iii, 11; whereas, 1 Cor. iii. 3.
érrdyw, in pass., to appear (see dpdw).
bavasie: as, 7, @ vision, a supernatural appearance, Luke 1. 22, xxiv. 23; 2 Cor. xii, 1.
@ cavern,
after, at the
émtés, h, 6v, roasted, broiled, Luke |
XIV: 43s,"
‘VOCABULARY. 93
drrowa (see Space).
én-dpa, as, 7 (perh., Omds, juice), the.
autumn, autumnal Fruits, Rev. XViiil. 14
Srws, rel. gat how, Luke xxiv. 20. As conj., in such manner that, to
the end that, so that; with av, Acts iii, 19 (see 384, 2). After verbs of beseeching, and the like, with demonstrative force, that, Matt. ix. 38; Mark iii. 6.
pain, atos, 76, (1) @ spectacle, Acts Vii, 31; (2) a vision, Acts ix, 10, 12.
Spdors, ews, %, appearance, aspect, Acts i ii. 17; Rev. iv. 3.
édparéds, 7, dv, visible, seen, plur., neut., Col. i. 16.
dpdw, @, tpoua, eédpaxo, eldov (see 103, 4), to see, generally; (2) to look upon, or contemplate; (3) to know, experimentally, to attain to, . 7904 5 (4) to take heed, Heb.
. 53; Matt. viii. 4; with wf or
equine to beware, Matt. xvi. 6; (5) pass., to be seen, to appear to, present one's self to (dat.).
épyh, Tis, 7, irascibleness, anger, indig- nation. Often of the wrath of God, and its manifestation. See Syno- nyuts.
épyigfw, ow, to irritate; pass., to be angry ; abs., to be enraged with, dat., or éml, dat.
apyinos, n, ov, prone to anger, Titus
a
deve as, 7, the length from finger’s end to finger’s end with both arms stretched outwards, a fathom, Acts XXVli. 28.
épeyw, to stretch out; mid., to reach after, to desire, or long eagerly for, gen., 1 Tim. vi. 10; Heb. xi. 16.
opewes, fh, dv, mountainous, hilly. x
dpetis, ews, 4, strong desire, lust, con- cupiscence.
ép00-modéw, &, to walk in a straight course, to walk uprightly, fig., Gal. ii. 14.
op0és, %, dv, upright, Acts xiv. 10; straight, Heb. xii. 13; adv., ds, rightly, Mark vii. 35.
94 ‘VOCABULARY.
6pf0-rouew, @ (réuva), to cut straight, or rightly, to manage or administer rightly, 2 Tim. ii, 15.
dpOpiw, to rise early, to do anything in early morning, Luke xxi. 38.
dpepiwwds, h, dv, belonging to early morning, Rev. xxii. 16.
bpOpios, ia, tov, adj., early in the morning, Luke xxiv. 22.
SpOpos, ov, masc., morning twilight, early dawn, daybreak, Luke xxiv. 1.
dpi{w, ow, comp. ‘‘horizon,” to ap- point, to decree, Acts xvil. 26; to mark out determinately, Rom. i. 4; pass., perf, part., apiopévos, de- creed, Acts ii, 23; neut., decree, Luke xxii. 22.
Spiov, tov, +76, plur., the borders of a place, hence, districts, territory.
dprifw, to adjure by, to charge solemnly by, with double ace.
Spkos, ov, 6, an oath, Matt. xiv. 7, 9, &e. ; a promise with an oath, Matt. V. 33.
dpx-wuocla, as, 7, an oath, Heb. vii. 20, 21, 28.
dppaw, @, ow, N.T., intrans., to rush, Matt. viii. 32; Acts vii, 57 (eis, or él, acc.).
épuh, is, 7, a rush, a violent assault, Acts xiv. 5; James iii. 4.
puna, aros, 76, a rushing on, violence, Rev. xviil. 21.
dpveov, ov, 76, a bird of prey, a fowl, Rev. xviii. 2 xix. 17, 21,
dps, wOos, 6, 7, a fowl, Matt. xxiii. 37; Luke xiii. 34.
épo-Gecia, as, 7, a setting bounds, or limits, Acts xvii. 26.
dpos, ous, 76, plur., mountain, highland.
épicow, Ew, to dig, to dig out, Matt. xxi. 33; Mark xii. 1.
dpoavds, H, dv, bereaved, ‘* orphan,” subst., James i. 27; John ing 18.
dpxéouat, oduar, nrouat, dep., mid., to leap, to dance.
bpn, dpéwv, a
és, i, 6, relative pronoun, who, which (see 58). As sore goer in the phrase, ds wey... ds ¢, one...
thie one, 2 Cox. it, 16,
[8p00-ropéw —ov
dodxis, rel. adv., how many times, as often as, 1 Cor. xi, 25, 26.
Sotos (la), wv, holy, both of human. beings and of God, 7a do1a, the holy promises, Acts xili. 343; adv., -ws, holily, 1 Thess. ii. 10,
doidrns, ntos, 7, holiness, godliness, Luke i, 753 Eph. v. 24.
doh, jis, 4, an odour, lit., as John xii. 3; fig., as Eph. v. 2. In 2 Cor. ii. 14, the allusion is to the odours > which arose in triumphal proces- sions.
bcos, n, ov, relat. pron., how much, how great, (1) of time, how long, as long as, Rom, vii. 1. Rapes. the meaning is intensified, Heb. X. 37:- mt puxpdy bcor Scov, yet a little, a very, very litile; (2) of quantity, of number, how much, plur., how many, John vi. 11; Mark iii. 3; Acts ix. 13; as many as, Matt. xiv, 36; (3) of measure, degree, Heb. vii. 20.
bo-mep, th-wep, o-mrep, whosoever, what- soever.
doréov, contr., dcTody, ov, 7d, a bone, John xix. 36.
bo-Tts, H}-T1s, 871, compound relat., who- which-whatsoever (see 58, c).
daTpdkiwvos, 7, ov, made of earth, Sragile, 2 Cor. iv. 7.
bappnots, ews, the sense of smelling, the organ of smelling, 1 Cor. xii, 17.
dopis, vos, 7, the loins, Matt. ili. 4; Acts ii. 30. For ‘‘the loins” to be ‘*girded,” was to have the robes gathered up so as to be ready for nes Luke xii. 35; fig., 1 Pet.
seas ‘ire, ty), rel. adv., when, when- soever, so long as.
Sre, rel. adv., when.
é71, conj., (1) that, after verbs of declaring, &c., introducing the ob- ject-sentence, sometimes as a mere quotation mark, Matt. ii, 23; (2) because (see 136, 6).
drov (gen, of Saris), €ws Srov, until, whilst.
ov, adv. (gen. of &s), where, whither, ov ety, whithersoever.
ob— -8pedos |
ov (ovk before a vowel, ovx if ‘the vowel is aspirated), no, not (see 134, 401).
ovd, interj. ., ah! aha! derisive, Mark XV. 29.
oval, interj., wo/ alas! uttered in grief or indignation, 1 Cor. ix. 16; Matt. xi. 21; 7 ovat, as subst., Rev. ix. 12, a woe, a calamity. Sauas, adv., by no means, not in anywise.
ov-5é, conj., disj. neg., neither, nor, not, not even (see 401).
ovd- els, ovdeula, ovdéey, neg. adj! not one, no one, none, nothing, of no moment, of no value, vain.
ovdé-more, adv., not ever, never, 1 Cor. xiii. 8, Matt. vii. 23.
ovdé-rw, adv., not ever yet, not yet, never, Luke xxiii. 53.
ovx-ért, adv., no further, no more, no longer.
ovx-ovv ; adv., not so then? interrog. ; or abicovy; ironical, John xviil. 37, art thou not then a "hing ?
ov wh, an emphatic negative (see 377).
ov, conj., therefore, then, Matt. xii. 12. Employed espec. (1) in arguing, 1 Cor. iv. 16; (2) in ex- hortation, Matt. xxii. 9, 17, 21; (3) in interrogation, Matt. xiii. 27; Gal. ili. 19, 21; (4) to resume an interrupted subject, Mark iii. 31 ; and (5) to indicate mere transition from one point to another, most frequently in John, as Vili. 13.
od-mrw, adv., not yet, Matt. xv. 17.
obpd, as, 7, the tail of an animal.
ovpdvios, ov, heavenly, celestial, in, or pertaining to heaven, Luke i335 Acts xxvl. 19.
ovpavddev, adv., from heaven.
ovpayds, ov, 6, heaven, (1) of the visible heavens (both sing. and plur.), through their whole extent, the atmosphere, the sky, the starry heavens; (z) the spiritual heavens, the abode of God and holy beings, Matt. vi. 10; 2 Cor. xii. 2; ‘‘the third heaven,” above the atmo- spheric and the sidereal; met., for
VOCABULARY. ; 95
the inhabitants of heaven, Rev. Xvill. 20; especially for God, Luke Xv. 13.
OtpBavds, ov, 6, Urban, Rom. xvi. 9.
Odpias, ov, 6, Uriah, Matt. i. 6.
ots, wrds, 76, (1) the ear, Matt. x. 27; (2) met., the faculty of apprehen- sion, Matt. xi. 15.
ovola, as, (@v), substance, wealth, Luke xv. 12, 13.
ov-re, conj., not even, Mark v. 3; nor, with a negative preced.
otros, airy, tovTo, demonstr. pron., this (near), appl. to persons and things, sometimes emphatic, Matt. v. 19; sometimes contemptuous, this fellow, Matt. xiii. 55 (see 338 —842 ; also éxeivos and de).
ovrws (and before a consonant in some edd., o¥rw), adv., thus, in this wis so, (1) in reference to anteceden- or following statement; (2) corre lative with @s or Kafés, 80 ... as, (3) qualifying adjectives, adverbs, or verbs, so, Heb. xii. 21; Matt. ix. 33; o¥rws ... oBrws, 1 Cor. Vii, 7, in this manner and that,
ovxi, adv., (1) an intensive form ot ov, John xiil. 10, by no means, no, - nay ; (2) interrog., as Matt. v. 46, expecting an undoubtedly affirma- tive answer.
opetdérns, ov, a debtor, Matt. xviii. 24; one who owes morally, i.e., to the law, ¢.g., obedience, Gal. v. 3; @ delinquent, Matt. vi. 12.
dpecAnh, jis, 7, a debt, a duty, Matt. Xviil. 32; Rom. xiii. 7.
opelAnua, aros, Té, a debt, what is justly due, Rom. iv. 4; fig., an offence, a fault, a failure in duty, Matt. vi. 12.
dpeiAw (1) to owe (acc. and dat.), Matt. xviii. 28; 7d ddeAduevoy, the due; (2) to be under obligation, Matt. xxiii. 16. So, to sin against, Luke xi. 4.
bperdov (see 878), interj., O that! I wish! would that! 1 Cor. iv. 8; Gal. v. 12.
beros, ovs, 7d (BP€AAw, tO increase), propit, utilny, 1 Cor. xv. 32.
nn
96 VOCABULARY.
dpSaruo-dovrela, as, H, eye-service, Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22.
Sp Barsds, ov, 6, an eye. Used of dis- positions and tendencies expressed by the eyes, as Matt. vi. 23 (comp. Mark vii. 22; Matt. xx. 15); fig., the eye of the mind, i.e., the under- standing, Acts xxvi. 18.
igis, ews, 6, a serpent, Matt. vii. 10; an emblem of wisdom, Matt. x. 16; of cunning, Matt. xxiii. 33; used symbol. for Satan, 2 Cor. xi. 3.
dppis, vds, 4, the eyebrow; used for the brow of a mountain or hill, Luke tv. 29.
éxA¢éw, @, to disturb, to vex, only in pass., Luke vi. 18.
6xAo- -TOLEW, @, to gather a crowd, Acts KViL 5.
‘8xAos, ov, 6, a crowd, the common people, the multitude, plur., crowds.
bx*pwua, aros, Td, & forir ne a strong place of defence, 2 Cor. x.
ddpioy, ov, 7é (a relish with Tieaal a little fish, John vi. 9.
oyé, adv., late im the evening, Mark xi. 19; at the end of, after, gen., Matt. xxviii. 1.
tos, ov, latter, of the rain, James
Vv. 7- tnos, UG, tOV, late, Mark xi. 11; as subst., 7 Sia, evening, %.¢., the former of the two evenings reckoned among the Jews, Matt. Vill. 16; the latter evening is mentioned, Matt. xiv. 233 comp. ver. 15. Bus, ews, 7, the aspect, the countenance, _ John xi. 44; external appearance, John vii. 24. événoy, ov, 76 (‘‘relish, sauce”), like évdpiov), (1) plur., the rations of soldiers, their wages, Luke iii. 14 ; x Cor. ix. 7. Hence, (2) recom- 6 generally, Rom, vi. 23; r. xi. 8,
TI.
Nl. x, x7, pi, p, the sixteenth letter. As a numeral, 7 =80; jr=80,000,
¢ [dp8adpo-Sovreia—aratw
mayidevw, ow, to ensnare, to lie in wait Sor, fig., Matt. XXii. 15.
mayis, ios, 7, a snare, a trap, Luke Xxl. 35; a device of Satan, 1 Tim, ill. 7; cause of evil, or destruction, . Rom. xi. 9.
mwdOnua, atos, 76, (1) suffering, affliction, (z) affection of mind, passion, Rom, vii. 5; Gal. v. 24
mabntds, h, ov, Dostana to suffer, Acts XXvVi. 23.
mwa0os, ous, 76, suffering, emotion, in N.T. of an evil kind, concupiscence, Rom. i. 26; 1 Thess. iv. 5; Col. iii. 5.
mad-aywyds, od, 6, a boys leader, or guardian, a slave who had the charge of the boys of a family during their nonage, 1 Cor. iv. 15; Gal. iii. 24.
maddpov, tov, 7d (dim. of mais), a boy, a lad, J ohn Vi. ix.
moudela, as, 7, training, of children and youth, Eph. vi. 4. So (1) instruc- tion, 2 Tim. iii. 16; chastisement, correction, Heb. xii. 5.
madeuThs, od, 6, (1) an instructor, a preceptor, Rom. ii. 20; (2) @ cor- rector, a chastiser, Heb. xii. 9.
madetw, ow, to train a child. Hence, (1) to instruct, to admonish ; (2) to correct, to chasien.
maididbev, adv., from childliood, Mark ix. 21.
madtov, tov, 7d (dim. of mais), a Litile child, an infant, Matt. ii. 8; a child more advanced, Matt. xiv. 21; fig., 1 Cor. xiv. 20. .
madicKn, ns, 7 (dim. of ) mais), a young girl, a female slave, a bond-maid.
mal(w, ~ouat, to play, as a child, to dance, as in idolatrous worship, 1 Cor. x. *
mais, madds, 6, 7, (1) a child, a boy or givl; (2) a servant, a slave, an attendant on a king; 6 waits rod @cov, the servant of God, used of any servant, Luke i. 69; of the Mes- siah, Matt. xii. 18.
tralw, ow, to strike, to smite, with the fist, Matt. xxvi. 68; with a sword, Mark xiv. 473 as a scorpion with its sting, Rev. ix. 5.
médar.—rrapa-Boh* |
mérAa, adv., of old, formerly, long ago, Heb, AR &
marmads, &, dv, (1) old, former, ancient; mohads tvdpwros, the old, or former man, 4¢, man in his old, un- renewed nature, Rom. vi. 6; (2) worn out, as a garment, Matt. ix. 16; corrupt, vitiated.
mardadrns, nTos, 7, age, oldness, Rom. vii. 6,
mavadw, & dow, to make old; pass., to grow ould, to become obsolete, Heb. Vill. 13.
mwaAn, nS, n, &@ wrestling, a struggle, Eph. vi. 12.
modry-yevetia, as, 7, a new birth, re- novation, regeneration, Matt. xix. 28; Titus ill. 5.
daw, adv., again, back, used of place or of time; a particle of continua- tion, again, once more, further ; and of antithesis, as 2 Cor. x. 7, on the other hand.
moap-wAndel, adv., all at once, the whole crowd together, Luke xxiii. 18.
wdu-Todus, mwoaumdéAAn, mwdumodu, great, vast, Mark viii. 1.
Maupvala, as, 7, Pamphylia.
wav-Boxetoy, ov, Td, khan, a@ caravan- serai, or Kastern inn.
may-5oxevs, éws, 5 (S€xouat), the keeper of a khan, or caravanserai, a host, Luke x. 35
mav-hyvpis, wos, 4 (a&yelpw), a general assembly, a public convocation, Heb, xii. 23.
rav-oxl, adv., with one’s whole house- hold, or family, Acts xvi. 34.
wavoTtAla, as, n, complete armour, ‘**panoply,” Luke xi. 22; Eph. vi. 11-13,
tav-oupyla, as, H, shrewdness, skill ; hence, cunning, craftiness, Luke XxX. 23; 1 Cor. lil, 19; Eph. iv. 14.
may-odpyos, ov (& you, Fepy- -), doing everything, cunning, crafty, 2 Cor. xi. 16,
navraxdbev, adv., from all sides, Mark 1.48.
wovTaxov, adv., in every place, every- where.
very
VOCABULARY. 97
WAYTEATS, és, gen., ods, complete; eis To mayrenés, perfectly, to the utmost, Luke xiii. 11; Heb. vii. 25.
mdyTn, adv., in every way, XXiv. 3.
mdvrovey, adv., Jrom every place, Luke xix. 43; Heb. ix. 4.
Tlavro-xpdrwp, opos, 5, the Almighty.
mayTdéte, adv., always, at all times, ever, Matt. xxvi. 11,
mayvtws, ady., wholly, entirely, 1 Cor. Vv. 103 in every way, by all means, Rom. il. 93 assuredly, certainly, Acts XVill, 21.
mapa, prep., gov. the gen., the dat., and accus., beside. With a gen. (of person), it indicates source, or origin; with a dat., it denotes presence with; with an accus., it indicates motion towards, or along- side, and is employed in com- parisons, beyond. For details, see 30 IN COMPOSITION, tapd re- tuins its general meaning, besides, sometimes denoting nearness, some- times mation by or past, so as to miss or tail; occasionally also steal- thiness (by ‘the way), as in mape- odyo.
mapa-Balve, 2nd aor. , mapéBny, to go aside from, to desert, Acts i. 25; to transgress, Matt. xv. 2, 3.
mapa-BdAdw, ‘*to place side by side,” (1) to compare, Mark iv. 303 (2) to betake oneself any whither, Acts XX! 15.
tapd=Bacis, ews, Rom. i. 23.
mapaBdrns, ov, 6, a trangressor, Rom, li. 25; James ii, 11.
wapaBid Comat, to constrain by persua- sion, Luke xxiv. 29; Acts xvi. 15.
mapa- Borebopat, to expose one’s self to peril, to be regardless of life, in best MSS. of Phil. ii. 30.
mapa-Bodh, jis, 4, ‘*a placin ng side by side,” (1) a comparison, Heb. ix. 93 - (2) a parable, otten of those uttered by our Lord; (3) @ proverd, an adage, Luke iv. 233 (4) perhaps in Heb. xi. 19: a crisis of danger (see mapaBorcvouas y.
Acts
f, a transgression,
98 VOCABULARY.
map-ayyeAla, as, 7, @ command, a charge from authority, Acts v. 28; 1 Thess. iv. 2.
map-ayyeArw, to notify, to command, to charge, Luke ix. 21; 2 Thess. iii. 4; dat. of pers., ace. of thing, or ér, iva or inf., 1 Tim. vi. 13.
mapa-ylvouat, (1) to be, or come near, John iii. 23; (2) to come upon, or against (rpés, emt), Luke xxi. 52; (3) to come forth, to appear, Luke xii. 51; Heb. ix. 11.
wap-dyw, in mid., to pass along, by, or away, 1 John ii. 8; to disappeur, 1 John ii. 17; 1 Cor. vii. 31.
wapa-Sevryparico, to make a public ex- ample of, to expose to ignominy, Matt. i, 19; Heb. vi. 6.
Tlapddeios, ov, 6 (a Recon word, ‘‘garden,” ‘‘park”), Paradise, Luke Xxili, 43; 2 Cor. xii. 4; Rev. ii. 7.
mapa-déxouat, dep., mid., to receive, admit, approve, Mark iv. 20; Acts xvi. 21; Heb. xii. 6.
mapa-dia-TpBh, 7s, 7, useless occupation, or agitation about trifles, 1 Tim. vi.
5. mapa-didwui, acc. and dat., (1) to de-
liver over, as to prison, judgment, or punishment, Matt. iv. 12; spec. of the betrayal by Judas; (2) to hand over, entrust, as the talents, &e.; (3) to surrender, abandon one’s self, Eph. iv. 19; (4) to commend to kindness, Acts xiv. 26; (s) to recount, tell, Luke i, 2; to instruct, Acts xvi. 4; (6) to give, or prescribe, as laws, &c., Acts vi. 14; (7) prob. to permit, in Mark iv. 29, when the Sruit permits, or allows.
mapd-dotos, ov, strange, wonderful, Luke v. 26 (‘* paradox”)
mapd-dogis, ews, 7, an instruction, or tradition, Matt. xv. 2; 1 Cor. xi. 2; 2 Thess. ii. 15, iii. 6.
mapa-(nrdw, @, to excite to emulation, Rom. xi, 11, 14; to jealousy, Rom. x19; to anger, 1 Cor. x. 22.
wapa-bardooiws, by the seaside, Matt. iv. 13.
Trapa-Oewpéw, &, to overlook, neglect, Acts vi, 1
’
mapa- kick: ns, 4, @ deposit, anythin y committed to one’s charge, 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 12, 14,
sreepaceta, @, to exhort, ‘admonish, Acts XXV1l. 9, 22.
Tap-arTéouar, oyu, dep., mid., (1) to deprecate, to beg off; (z) to decline, to endeavour to avoid, Acts xxv. 11; Heb. xii. 19; (3) to refuse, to reject ; (4) to. excuse oneself, Luke xiv. 18, Ig.
mapa-Kavi(w, intrans., to sit by the side of, Luke x. 39.
Tapa-KaAéw, @, €ow, (1) to send for, in- vite, Acts xxviil. 20; (2) to beseech, entreat, Mark i. 40; (3) to exhort, admonish, Acts xv. 32; 1 Tim. vi. 2; (4) to comfort, 2 Cor. i. 4; pass., to be glad, to rejoice, Luke XVi. 25.
mapa-Kadim@Tw, to veil, to hide, Luke 1X. 45.
mapa-Kata-OnKn, nS, n, a trust, a de- posit, 1 Tim. vi. 20; 2 Tim. i. 14.
mapa-Keluat, to be at hand, Rom. vii. 318.
mapa-KAnots, ews, , a calling for, ‘a summons to one’s side.” Hence, (1) exhortation, Heb. xii. 5; (2) en- treaty, 2 Cor. viii. 43 (3) encourage- ment, Phil. ii. 13 (4) consolation, Rom. xv. 4; met., of the Consoler, Luke ii. 25; (5) generally, of the get of imparting all these, Acts lV. 3
mapd-KAnTtos, ov, 6, (1) an advocate,
intercessor, 1 John ii. 1; (2) @ consoler, comforter, helper, John xiv. 16; ‘* paraclete.”
map-akon, hs, 7, disobedience, Rom.
v. 19; 2 Cor. x. 6
map-axordovbew, @, how, (1) to follow closely, to accompany (dat.), Mark Xvi. 17; (2) to follow so as to trace out, to examine, Lukei. 3; to adhere to, 1 Tim. iv. 6; ¢o imitate, 2 Tim. ili. 10.
map-akovw, to hear negligently, to dis- regard, Matt. xviii. 17.
mapa-kintw, Ww, to stoop down to (eis); fig,, to search into, James 1, 25.
[ wap-ayyedta, —Tapa- Kore
a
mrapa-hapBdvea—amdpSarxs |
mapa-AauBavw, Anpoua, (1) to take to
oneself, to take with one, to asswme, obtain ; (2) to take upon oneself, to engage m; fig., to receive intel- lectually, to learn, Mark vii. 4; to assent to, to acknowledge, to seize, to take, to carry captive.
mapa-Aéyw, N.'T., in mid., to lay one’s course near, in sailing, Acts xxvii. 8.
map-dAtos, ov, adjacent to the sea, on the coast, Luke vi. 17.
Trap-arAayh, is, 7, change, vicissitude, James i, 17.
mapa-AoyiCouat, dep., to impose upon, to delude, ace. , Col, ii. 4.
Tapa- arr ikés, h, 6v, palsied, ‘‘para- lytic,” in the whole or a part of the body.
Trapa-Avo, 4 relax, to enfeeble, only perf., part., pass., mapadcAuuévos, enfeebled, ‘ “paralyzed. %
Ta,pa.- weve, bev, to remain (by, dat. or
mpds, acc.), to abide ; fig., to remain constant in, James i. 25. mrapa-uv0gouat, odua, dep. mid., to
speak kindly to, to cheer, to en- courage.
tapa-uv0la, as, n, encouragement, com- fort, 1 Cor. xiv. 3.
mapa-mve.ov, tov, 7d, comfort, Phil. ii. 1.
Tapa-vouew, @, abs., to act contrary to law, Acts xxiil. 3.
mapa-voula, as, 7, violation of law, transgression, 2 Pet. i. 16.
Tapa-mikpaive, ava, ist aor, mapemi- kpava, to provoke (God) to anger; so, to rebel, Heb. iii. 16.
Trapa-mikpacuds, od, 6, provocation (of God); so, rebellion, Heb. iii. 8, 15.
mapa-rintw, 2nd aor., mapérecov, to Fall away From, Heb. vi. 6.
Trapa-wAéw, @ (F), evoouat, to sail past, acc., Acts xx. 16.
mapanhho.ov, adv., near to (gen.), Phil. 1h:27.
mapaTAnolws, adv., likewise, in like manner. —
mapa-mropevouat, dep. mid., to pass along by.
rapa-rTwpa, atos, Té (wirtw), a falling away, or aside, a transgression. See Synonyms.
to pass by,
VOCABULARY. ‘99
mapap-péw, (F), pevooua, 2nd aor. pass., mapeppinv, pass., to be borne away Srom, to lose, Heb, ii. 1.
mapa-onuos, ov, marked on the side (with, dat.), Acts xxviii. 11,
mopa-cxevd(w, ow, perf., mid., mape- cxevacua, to prepare, to make ready, Acts x. 1¢; mid., to prepare one-
- self, 1 Cor. xiv. 8 ; to be in readiness, 2 Cor. ix. 2.
wapa-oKeun, Hs, N, a preparation, i.e. the time immediately before a Sab- bath or other festival, the eve, Matt. XXVil. 62.
mapa-telyw, to extend, to prolong, Acts XX. 7.
Tapa-Tnpéw, @, haw, (1) to observe nar- rowly, Mark iii. 2; (2) to observe scrupulously and superstitiously, Gal. iv. 10.
Tapa-Thpnos, ews, 7, a close watching, observation, Luke xvii. 20.
mapa-Tlonus (see 107), (1) to place near, or by the side of, as food, Luke xi. 6; (2) fo set, or lay before, as instruction, spec. to propound, to deliver, as a parable, Matt. xiti. 24 ; mid., to give in charge to, to entrust, Luke xii, 48; to commend, to re- commend (ace. and dat., or éis), Acts xiv. 23.
mapa-ruyxave, to fall in with, chance to meet, Acts xvil. 17.
map-autixa, adv., tstantly, imme- diately, with arti, the momentary, 2 Cor. iv. 17.
Tmapa- pepo St 103, 6), to remove (ace. and &é), Mark xiv. 36; Luke Xxii. 42; pass., to be driven about, agitated.
mapa-ppovéw, @, to be beside oneself, 2 Cor xi. 23.
mapa-ppovia, as, n, being beside oneself, madness, folly, 2 Pet. ii. 16.
Tapa-xeydiw, dow, to winter, to spend the winter, Acts xxvii. 12.
mapa-xeuacia, as, 7, & wintering, a spending the winter.
mapa-xpyua, adv., in the very thing, instantly, immediately.
mdpdadis, ews, 7, a leopard, a panther,
' Rev. xiii. 2.
100
mdp-eyut, to be near by, to be present, to have come; part., mapav, present ; 7) wapdv, the present time; 7é mapdyra, present things, e.g., pos- SESSIONS, Heb. xiii. 5.
wap-eig-wyw, tw, to introduce, to bring in clandestinely, 2 Pet. ii. 1.
mwap-els-axros, ov, brought in clandes- tinely, surreptitious, Gal. ii. 4.
» wop-e.o-dtw, or -ivw, tow, to come in by stealth, to enter secretly, Jude 4.
wap-e.c-epxouat (see 1038, 2), (1) to enter clandestinely, Gal. li. 43 (2) to come in addition, to be superadded, Rom. v. 20,
map-co-pepw, to bring in besides, super- induce, 2 Pet. i. 5.
mwao-extds, adv., on the outside, besides ; To, mapenés, things in addition. With a _ gen. following, excep, Matt. v. 32.
map-eu-Born, js, 7 (BdAAw), (I) a camp, Heb. xii. 31, 133 (2) soldiers’ quarters, Acts xxi. 34, 373 (3) the encampments of Israel in the wilder- ness, Heb. xiil. 11; (4) an army in array, Heb. xi. 34.
map-ev-oxréw, @, to cause disturbance to, to disquiet (dat.), Acts xv. 19.
rap-eml-Bnuos, ov, residing in a strange country; as subst., a _ stranger, Soreigner, Heb. xi. 13.
map-epxoua (see 108, 2), (1) to pass by, with acc. of pers. or place; (2) to pass, elapse, as time ; (3) to pass away, or perish, become nugatory ;
_ (4) to pass from anyone ; (5) to pass carelessly, i.e., to disregard, neglect, transgress.
wdp-eo1s, ews, h (inp), passing over, preter-mission, Rom. iii. 25. See Synonyms.
map-€xw, ew, 2nd aor., rdpecxor (dat. and ace.), (1) to exhibit, to present, afford, Luke vi. 29; Acts xxii. 23 (2) to be the cause, or occasion of, Matt. xxvi. 10; (3) in mid., to pre- sent, manifest, Titus i ii. 7 to bestow, Col. iv. 1.
map-nyopla, as, ty, solace, Col, iv. 11.
waplevia, as, %, virginity, Luke ii, 36.
VOCABULARY.
[wé.p-expi—arapogive
map0évos, ov, 7, a virgin, a maid; so, one who is chaste, pure, uncon- taminated. In Rev. xiv. 4, applied to the male sex. Tid¢p6os, ov, 6, a Parthian, Acts ii. 9. mwap-inut, to pass by, or over, to relax ; pass., perf., part., wapemévos, weary, Heb. xii. 12. mwap-loTnut, or map-.ctdyw (see 107), - trans. in act., pres., imp., fut., and 1st aor., (1) to place near, or at hand, to have in readiness, provide, Acts xxiii. 24; (2) to present, to offer, specially, to dedicate, conse- crate, devote, Luke ii. 22; (3) to cause to appear, to demonstrate, Acts xxiv. 13. Intrans., perf., plup., 2nd aor., and mid., to recom- mend, to attend, to wait, as for orders, Luke xix. 243; to have come (of time in Mark iv. 29), to stand by, #.¢, for aid or support, Rom. Xvi. 2. Tlapuevas, & 6, Parmenas, Acts vi.
ake odes, ov, 7, & passing by, or through, 1 Cor. xvi. '7.
wap-o1Kew, &, to dwell in (é or eis, const. preg.) as a stranger, Luke Xxiv. 18; Heb. xi. 9.
Tap-o1nla, as, 7, & sojourning, a tem- porary dwelling, Acts xiii. 17; 1 Pet. i. 17.
mdp-oikos, ov, sojourning, temporarily resident, Eph. ii. 19; generally as subst.
map-ola, as, 9 (oluwos, @ way), (1) a common or trite saying, a proverb, 2 Pet. li. 255 (2) an obscure saying, an enigma, John xvi. 25; (3) a parable, a comparative discourse, John x. 6,
mdp-owos, ov, given to wine, intem- perate, 1 Tim. ili. 3.
map-olxoual, to pass away, of time, Acts xiv. 16.
map-ouoid(w, to resemble, Matt. xxiii. 27.
map-duowos, ov, 8, 13.
similar, Matt. vii.
| tap-ofvvw, to stir up, to irritate, in
pass., Acts xvil. 16; 1 Cor. xiii. 5.
Tap-ofvopds—rrer0-apxéw |
wap-ofvonds, od, 6, (1) incitement, Heb. x. 243 (2) sharp contention, Acts XV. 39, ‘* paroxysm.”
map-opyiCw, &, to provoke greatly, ex- asperate, Rom. x. 19; Eph. vi. 4.
wap-opyiauds, ov, 6, exasperation, wrath, Eph. iv. 26.
mwap-oTpivw, to stir up, to instigate, Acts xiii. 50.
map-ouvgia, as, (eit), (1) presence, 1 Cor. xvi. 17; (2) @ coming, an arrival, advent, often of the second coming of Christ.
map-owis, iSos, 7, a dish for food or sauce, Matt. xxiii. 25, 26.
map-pnola, as, 7, freedom, openness, especially in speaking, boldness, confidence; év mappnola (or perd, gen.), boldly, openly.
nap-pnoid¢oug, dep., mid., 1st aor., erappnotacduny, to speak freely, boldly, plainly, to be confident.
was, mwaoa, wav (see 87), all, the whole, every kind of. (See 224, and for negative in phrases, 328, iii.) Adverbial phrases are d:aravtds, always; ev waytl, év wacw, in everything ; and mdyra (acc., neut., plur.), altogether.
mdoxa, T6 (Heb., in Chald. form), the paschal lamb, the passover feast ; appl. to Christ, 1 Cor. v. 7.
maoxw (wad-, see 94, i. 7), to be affected with anything, good or bad ; so, to enjoy good, Gal. iii. 4; more generally, to endure suffering, Matt. xvii. 15; to suffer (acc. of that suffered, amd or ind, gen., of persons inflicting).
Tldtapa, dpwy, td, Patara, Acts xxi. 1.
matdcow, tw, to smite, to strike, to smite to death, to afflict, Acts xii. 33)
matéw, &, how, to tread, to trample on,
VOCABULARY,
Luke x. 19; to press by treading, as grapes, Rev. xiv. 20; to reduce to entire subjection, Rev. xi. 2.
spoken of God as the Father of
men, Matt. v. 16, 45; orof the Lord Jesus Christ, Matt. vii. 21; as the | First Person in the Trinity, Matt. |
101
Xxvill. 19; as the Source of mani- fold blessings, 2 Cor. i. 3, &e. Secondarily, (1) a remote progenitor, the founder of a race, an elder ; (2) @ senior, a father in age, 1 John ii, 13, 143 (3) the author, or cause, or source of anything, John viii. 44; Heb. xii. 9; (4) @ spiritual father, or means of converting anyone to Christ; (5) one to whom resemblance is borne.
Tldtuos, ov, 7, Patmos, Rev. i. 9.
matp-argas, ov, 6, a parricide, 1 Tim, i 9.
mwatpid, as, Hh, a family (in O.T., mediate between the tribe and the household), Luke ii. 4; Acts iii. 25 ; Eph. iii. 15 (on which see 224).
matpt-apxns, ov, 6, head, or founder of a family, ** patriarch.”
mwarpiés, h, ov, paternal, ancestral, Gal. i. 14.
matpis, fos, 7, one’s native place, Jather-land, Matt. xiii. 54; Heb. xi, 14.
MarpdBas, a, 6, Patrdbas, Rom. xvi. 14,
mwatpo-mrapa-Soros, ov, handed down, ob- tained by tradition fron. ancestors, 1 Pet. i. 18. .
natpgos, a, ov, paternal, hereditary, Acts xxli. 3, XXiv. 14.
Tlavaos, ov, 6, Paul, (1) Sergius Paulus, Acts xiii. 7; (2) the Apostle of the Gentiles. (See 159, c.)
tTavw, ow, to cause to cease, to restrain, 1 Pet. iii. 10; generally mid., to cease, desist, refrain, Luke v. 4, viii. 24.
Tldgos, ov, 7, Paphos, Acts xiii. 6,
maxive (maxvs), to fatten, to make gross, pass.; fig., to become gross, or stupid, Matt. xii. 15.
médn, ns, 7, & shackle, a fetter for the Jeet, Mark v. 4.
metivds, H, dv, level, open, Luke vi. 17.
meCetw (mess) to travel on foot, or on land, Acts xx. 13.
| ef, adv., on foot, or by land, Mark rarhp, tpés, 6 (see 80, ii), a father, |
vi. 33.
med-apxéw, @, (1) to obey a ruler, or one in authority, Acts v. 29, 323 (2) to obey, or conform to advice, Acts XXVli. 21.
102 . VOCABULARY.
meOds, fh, ov, persuasive, 1 Cor. ii. 4. i
melOw, meiow, to persuade; so, to en- deavour to convince, Acts xvill. 4;
' to influence by persuasion, Matt. XXVil. 20; to incite, to instigate, Acts xiv. 29; to appease, to render tran- quil, 1 John 1. 19; to conciliate, to
_ aspire to the favour of, Gal. i. 10; pass., to be confident of, to yield to persuasion, to assent, to listen to, to obey, to follow, Acts v. 36, 37; 2nd perf., mémoba, to be confident of, to trust, to rely on, to place hope in, Matt. xxvii. 43; Rom. ii. 19.
Tevdw, @, dow, inf., mewav, (1) to be hungry ; hence, (2) to be needy ; (3) to desire earnestly, to long for, acc., ‘*to pine.”
meipa, as, H, trial, experiment ; with AauBavw, to make trial of, attempt, Heb. xi. 29, 36.
reipdtw, aw, (1) to attempt, inf.; (2) to
' make trial of, to prove; (3) to tempt
' to sin; 6 meipawy, the tempter, i.e., the devil; (4) to put to proof, as
' God by unbelief, &c., Acts xv. 10.
meipacuos, ob, 6, a trying, proving, 1 Pet. iv. 12; a@ tempting to sin, Matt. vi. 13; calamity, sore afflic- tion, i.¢., trying us, Acts xx. 19; man’s trying God by distrust or disobedience, Heb. ii. 8.
meypdw, ®, only in mid., fo attempt, essay, Acts ix. 26, xxvi. 21.
weiomovn, 7s, N, & persuasion, a con- viction, Gal. v. 8
méhdryos, ovs, 76, the sea, the deep, Matt. xviii. 6.
mereki(w (wéAekus, an axe), to behead, Rey, xx. 4.
méurros, , dv, num. ord., the fifth.
méumw, Ww, (1) to send, of persons, to despatch on a message, spoken of teachers, as John Baptist, John i. 333 of Jesus, John iv. 34; of the Spirit, John xiv. 26; of aposiles, John xiii, 20; (2) to send, of things; to transmit, Rev. xi. 10; to send among, or upon, 2 Thess. ii. 11; to thrust in, ¢.g., the sickle, Rev. xiv. 15, 18.
winning,
[ weds —arepr-dyoo
mévns, ntos, 6, , poor, needy, 2 Cor. ix. 9. '
mevOepd, Gs, 7, a mother-in-law, i.€., a wife’s mother. .
mevoepds, od, 6, a father-in-law, i.€., a wife’s father.
mevoéw, &, how, (1) to mourn, intrans. ; (2) to grieve, trans., 2 Cor. xii. 21.
mévOos, ovs, Té, mourning, sorrow, James iv. 9.
mevixpds, d, dv, poor, needy.
mevTakis, adv., num., five times.
mevrakio-xlAtot, at, a, num., five thou- sand.
mevraxdotol, at, a, num., five hundred.
mwévre, num., indecl., jive.
meyTe-Kal-dé€xatos, num., ord., fifteenth,
revrTykovTa, num., indecl., fifty.
Tlevrynkooth, 7s, 7 (lit., fiftieth), Pen- tecost, the feast beginning the fiftieth day after the second day of the Passover, i.e., from the six- teenth day of the month Nisan.
memoldnois, ews, fh, trust, confidence, with eis or év.
mep, an enclit. partic., cognate with mept, only found joined to: pronouns or particles for intensity of mean- ing, as édywep, etrep, if indeed ; emelrep, since indeed, &c.; Kalmep, and really ; domep, whosoever.
mépay, adv., over, on the other side, beyond, with art. prefixed or genit. following.
wépas, atos, 76, a limit, the extremity, in space, as Matt. xii. 42; or time, Heb. vi. 16.
Tépycuos, ov, 7, Pergamus, or Per-
- gamum, Rev. ii. 12.
Tlépyn, ns, 7, & prop. name, Perga, Acts xiii. 13.
mepl, a prep., governing the gen. and accus. With gen., about, i.e, concerning or respecting a thing; gov. the accus., about, around, in reference to (see 802). In com- position, wep! denotes rownd about, on account of, above, beyond.
mepi-dyw, trans., to lead, or take about, 1 Cor. ix. 5; intrans., to go about (acc., or mepl, acu.), Acts xill, 115 Matt. iv. 23.
mept-arpéo— repr revioo |
mept-aipéw, & (see 108, 2), to take from around, or entirely away, lit., 2 Cor. iii. 16; Acts xxvii. 40; Heb. x. 11; fig., of the expiation of sin.
nept-acrpamrtw, to lighten around, to Jlash around (acc., or rept, ace.).
mepi-BdAAw, Bare, BéBAnka, to cast around (acc. and dat.), Luke xix. 433; to clothe, Matt. xxv. 36; for const., see 284; mid., to clothe one’s self, to be clothed, Matt. vi. 29.
mept-BAérw, N.T., in mid., to look around, abs.; to look round upon, acc. ;
mept-BéAaov, ov, 76, (1) clothing, ves- ture, Heb. i. 123; (2) @ veil, 1 Cor. KE PS.
mept-5éw, to bind round about, pass., plup., John xi. 44.
mepi-5peuw (see mepiTpéexw).
mepi-epyatouat, to overdo, to be a busy- body, 2 Thess. iii, 11.
wept-epyos, ov, act., overdoing, inter- meddling, 1 Tim. v. 13; pass., over- wrought, curious, Acts xix. 19.
mept-€pxoua (see 103, 2), to go about, Acts xix. 13; Heb. xi. 37; fo tack, as a ship, Acts xxviii. 13.
mepi-é€xw, to encompass ; 80, to contain, as a writing, Acts xxlll. 25; in- trans., to be contained, 1 Pet. ii. 6; to seize, as astonishment, Luke v. 9.
mept-(ovvum (see 114), to gird oneself around, pass., perf., part., gift, Luke xii. 35.
meol-Beois, ews, 7, a putting around, i.e, ornaments, 1 Pet. iii. 3 mept-lornut, (see 107), in intrans.
* tenses of act., to stand around ; mid., to stand aloof from (acc.), 2 Tim. ii. 16; Titus iii. 9.
mepi-Kabapua, atos, 76, refuse, offscour- ing, 1 Cor, iv. 13.
mepi-kaduTTw, to cover round about, to cover, as the face.
mepl-Keywa, to lie about, surround, dat.,
or tepi, acc. ; to be encompassed, or surrounded with, acc.
mept-Keparala, as, n, a helmet, 1 Thess. v. 8. ;
mepi-Kpaths, és, being entire master of, Acts xxvii. 16,
VOCABULARY.
103
mept-kpiTTw, to hide entirely, Luke i. 24.
mepi-KuKAdw, @, to encircle, surround.
mepi-Adumw, to shine around.
mepi-Aclrw, to leave; pass., to survive, 1 Thess. iv. 15, 17.
mepl-Aumos, ov, greatly sorrowful.
mept-weve, to await (ace.), Acts i. 4.
meplé, adv., round about; with art., circumjacent, Acts v. 16.
mept-oixew, &, to dwell around, to be neighbouring to (acc.).
mepi-oixos, ov, neighbouring, Luke i. 58.
mept-ova.os, ov, superabundant, peculiar, Titus ii. 14 (LXX.).
mept-oxh, 7s, ) (see mepréxw), a section, or passage, of Scripture, Acts Vili. 32.
mwepi-matéw, &, how, to walk, to walk about, to roam, as animals for prey; fig., as Heb., to pass one’s life, to conduct oneself (adv, or nom. pred.), to live according to (év, dat.; kard, ace. ).
mept-weipw, to pierce through, transfix, fig., x Tim. vi. 10.
wepi-wintw, to fall into the midst of (dat.), as robbers, Luke x. 30; and temptations, James i. 2.
mepi-rocw, @, N.T., in mid., to get for oneself, 1 Tim. ili. 13; to reserve, to purchase.
mept-rolnots, ews, H, (1) an acquisition, 1 Thess. v. 9; (2) @ preservation, Heb. x. 393; (3) @ possession pur- chased, Eph. i. 14; 1 Pet. ii. 9.
mepip-pnyvuut, to tear off, as garments, Acts xvi. 22.
mept-omdw, @, ‘to drag around; | hence, fig., pass., to be distracted in mind, Luke x. 40.
mepiocela, as, 7, abundance, super- Jluity ; «is weprooelay, as adv.
mepiooevuua, atos, 76, more than enough, overflowing abundance, affluence, abundantly, 2 Cor. vill. 13, 14.
mepiacedw, (1) to be more than enough, to be left over, to abound richly ; 7 mepicoevov, Matt. xiv. 20, the residue Z (2) to redound to, «is, 2 Cor. vill, 25 pass., to be in abundance, to_ be augmented, Matt. xiii, 12; 2 Cor. iv. 15.
104
nepioods, h, dv, abundant, remaining over and above; 7d mepicody, excel- lence, pre-eminence, Rom. iii. 1; adv., -@s, exceedingly, vehemently.
mepiocotépws, adv., more abundantly, more earnestly, more vehemently.
mepioTepd, as, 7, @ dove, a pigeon.
mepi-téuvw, to cut around, to circum- cise ; mid., to undergo circumcision, to cause oneself to be circumcised.
- mept-rlOnu, to place, or put about, or around (dat. and acc.); fig., to bestow, to attribute, 1 Cor. xii. 23.
WEpi-TOUN, 7S, N, circumcision, i.e., the act, the custom, or state; with art., the circumcision, i.e., the Jews; fig., for spiritual purity, Rom. ii. 28, 29 ; Col. ii. 11.
mepi-tpérw, to turn about, to convert to (eis) a state, Acts xxvi. 24.
mepi-tpéxw, 2nd aor., mepiédpauor, to run around (acc.), Mark vi. 55.
mepi-pepw, to bear, ce carry around, to carry about in oneself; pass., to be agitated, Eph. iv. 14.
mept-ppovéw, &, to look down upon, to contemn, to despise.
mepl-xwpos, ov, circumjacent ; as subst. (n), the country round about, the inhabitants of such a country, Matt. lil. 5. |
mepi-Wnua, aros, 76, scrapings, scum.
meprepevoum, dep., intrans., to vaunt, 1 Cor. xiii. 4.
Mepots, (50s, 7, Persis, Rom, xvi. 12.
mépvot, adv., during the year just passed, a year ago.
mweTdouat, Guat, or mérouct, to fly, as a bird.
metewdv, ov, 76, a bird, a fowl; only in plur., the birds.
mérouct (See meTdoua).
mézpa, as, 7, & rock, with art., the rocky substratum of the soil, other- wise, any large block of stone ; met. for caverns, Rev. vi. 15; fig, Rom. ix. 33. See also Matt. xvi. 18.
Tiérpos, ov, 6, Peter, Greek for the Heb. (Chald.) képha, rock. Same with wérpa, but with the termina- tion of a masc, name.
VOCABULARY.
[weproods—aideys
metpodns, €s, rocky, Matt. xiii. 5; Mark iv. 5.
whyavoy, ov, Té, rue, Luke xi. 42.
yn, 7s, 7, a fountain, source, well ; fig. of ‘‘the water of life,” a jlow, of blood, Mark v. 29.
whyvou, mhtw, to fix, as a tent, Heb. viii. 2.
mnddrrov, tov, 7d, the rudder of a ship, Acts xxvii. 40.
mnAikos, n, ov, how great, Heb. vii. 43 how large, Gal. vi. 7 (see yp¢upa).
mnads, od, 6, clay, mire, mortar, John ix. 6; Rom, ix. 21.
whpa, as, h, a bag, wallet, for carrying provisions.
mixus, ews, 6, a cubit, the length from the elbow to the tip of the middle finger.
maw, ow, to lay hold of, Acts iii. 7; to take, as to catch fish, or in hunting, to arrest, John vii. 30.
mé(w, to press down, as in a measure, Luke vi. 38.
mibavo-Aoyla, as, 7, persuasive or plau- sible speech, Col. ii. 4.
mikpalyw, ava, to render hitter, lit., Rev. x. 9, 10; to embitter, fig., Col. iii. 19.
mixpla, as, %, bitterness, fig., Acts viii. 23; Eph. iv. 31.
mupés, a, dv, bitter, acrid, malignant, James iii, 11, 143; adv., -@s, Dit- terly, spoken of weeping, Matt. XXVl. 75.
MfAaros, ov, 6 (or mAartos, Lat., pilatus, ‘*armed with javelin”), Pilate.
wlumArnpt (wAe-), See TAHOw.
awlumpnut (rpa-), pass., inf., miumpacba, to be inflamed, to swell, Acts XXviii. 6,
mvakidiov, tov, 7d (dim. of mlvat), a tablet for writing, Luke i. 63.
mlvat, axos, 6, a plate, platter, dish.
miyw, fut., mlouct, -eoa, -era; perf., nénwka; 2nd aor., mov; to drink, abs., or with acc. of thing drunk (sometimes é« or dad), to imbibe, as the earth imbibes rain; fig., to receive into the soul, to partake of.
midtns, THTos, h, fatness, richness, as of the olive, Rom, xi, 17.
stony,
mumpacKka—rrny7 |
mmpdoKw (mpa-), perf., mémpaxa; 1st aor. pass., émpd0yv; perf. pass., mémpauat; to sell, Matt. xiii. 46; pass., with dé, to be sold under, to be a slave to.
wintw (wer-, see 94, i. 8, d), (1) bo fall (whence, by aaé or ék; whither, by émi or eis, acc.); hence, (2) to Jall prostrate, as of persons, to die, to perish; of structures, to fall in ruins; of institutions, to fail; (3) to fail to, as a lot; (4) to fall into,
or under, as condemnation.
Ticidia, as, 7, Pisidia, Acts xiv. 24.
mortevw (see 74), to believe, be per- suaded of a thing (ace. or ri), to give credit to, dat.; to have con- Jidence in, dat., es, év, emt (dat.) or éri (acc.). Often of Christian faith, in God, in Christ; pass., to be en- trusted with (ace.).
mortikds, h, dv, genuine, pure, of oint- ment, Mark xiv. 3; John xii. 3.
mists, ews, 7, (1) faith, generally, as Heb, xi. 1; 2 Thess. ii. 13; ‘‘ faith in” is expressed by obj. gen., by eis, év, Side (ace.); (2) fidelity, good JSaith, Rom. iii. 3; 2 Tim.’ii. 22; (3) a pledge, a promise given, 2 Tim. iv. 7; (4) met., for the whole of the Christian character, and (generally with art.) for the Christian re- ligion.
mords, h, dv, (1) trustworthy, faithful, in any relation or to any promise, of things or (generally) persons ; (2) believing, abs., as of moot, the fol- lowers of Christ, or with dat.
motéw, @, only N.T., in pass., to be assured of, 2 Tim, lil, 14.
mwAavdw, &, how, to lead astray, to cause to wander; fig., to deceive; pass., to be misled, to err, to mistake.
mwAdyn, ns, 7, wandering, fig., deceit, delusion, error.
mwAavaTns, ov, 6, wandering; daarhp TwAavarns, a wandering star, Jude 13 (‘* planet”).
wAdyos, ov, causing to wander, deceit- Sul; as subst., an impostor.
mwhdt, axds, H, @ tablet, to write on, 2 Cor. iii. 3; Heb. ix. 4.
VOCABULARY.
105
mwAdoua, atos, T6, a thing formed or Jashioned, as a vessel.
TAdcow, dow, to form, fashion, mould, as a potter his clay.
mAactés, 4, dv, formed, moulded; fig., deceitful, 2 Pet. ii. 3.
mwAareia, as, H (fem. of Aarts, broad, sc. 656s), a wide street, a broad way.
mddros, ous, 76, breadth.
mAativw, va, to make broad, to en- large ; pass., fig., to be enlarged, in mind or heart.
mAatus, eia, 0, broad, Matt. vii. 13.
wA€éyua, aros, 76 (mwAékw), anything interwoven, a braiding, as of hair, 1 Tim, ii. 9.
mwAcioTos, n, ov, Superl. of modds, the greatest, the most, very great; 1d TwAeiorov, adv., mostly, at most.
wAclwy, ecov, compar. of moAd’s, more, greater, in number—magnitude— comparison ; of wAeloves, of mAclous, the more, the most, the many, majority, 2 Cor. ii. 6; mAeiov or mwA€ov, as adv., more, John xxi. 15 3 éml wActov, further, longer.
TAéKw, tw, to weave together, to plait, Mark xv. 17.
mAéov (see in mAclwy).
mAcovd(w, ow, intrans., to have more than enough, to superabound ; trans., to increase, to cause to abound.
TAcov-exTéew, &@ (exw), to have more than another, to desire to have more, so, to defraud ; pass., to be deluded, 2 Cor. il. 11.
mAcov-éxTns, ov, 6, @ covetous or avaricious person, one devoted to carnal lusts, a libertine, Eph. v. 5.
mAcov-etia, as, 4, covetousness, avarice, inordinate lust, Eph. iv. 19.
mAeupd, as, 7, the side of the human body, John xix. 34.
TAEw (See TANOW).
mwAéw (F), impf., ewAeov ; fut., rActoo- pat; to sail, with acc. of direction, Acts xxvii. 2.
mTAnYhH, is, % (wAhoow), a stroke, a stripe, a wound, Acts xvi. 33; Rev. xiii, 14; an affliction, Rev. ix, 20.
106
mwAHOos, ovs, 76, (1) @ multitude, crowd, throng; (2) population, Acts xiv. 4; (3) @ quantity, Acts xxviii. 3.
mAndivw, v@, (1) intrans., to imcrease ; (z) trans., to multiply, augment ; pass., to be increased.
wAnOw (or miumAnut), TAHow; St aor. pass., émAna@nv; (1) to jill (with, gen.); fig., of emvutions, as Luke iv. 28; or of the Holy Spirit, Acts li. 4; (2) pass., to be fulfilled, as time,’ Luke i. 23.
mAHKTHS, ov, 6, a striker, a conten- tious person, 1 Tim. i. 3; Titus oa
mAnuptpa, as, n, a flood, an inundation,
- Luke vi. 48.
mAfv, adv. (akin to mAéov), besides, moreover, except; as prep. with gen., besides, excepting.
mArpns, es, (1) full, abs., Mark iv. 28 ; (2) full of (gen.), abounding in.
mAnpo-popéw, w (pépw), (1) to bring to completion, hence, to perform per- JSectly, 2 Tim. iv. 5; or to bring to a close, perh. Luke i. 1; (2) to jill with conviction, hence, pass., to be Sully persuaded, Rom. iv. 21.
mAnpo-popia, as, 7, fulness, entire pos- session, full conviction or assurance.
TAnpsw, & dow, to fill (material, by gen.), to jill up, to pervade, to com- plete, either time or number; to bestow abundantly, to furnish libe- rally, Phil. iv. 18; Eph. iii. 19; to accomplish, to perform fully, as prophecies, &c. ; pass., to be full of, 2 Cor. vii. 4; Eph. v. 18; to be made full, complete, or perfect, John ili, 29; Col. iv. 12.
rAipwua, atos, 76, fulness, plenitude, i.e, that which fills, “1 Cor. x. 26, 28; so, the full number, Rom. xi. 25; the completion, i.e., that which makes full, Matt. ix. 16; the fulness of time, Gal. iv. 4, is the completion of an era; the fulness of Christ, Eph. i. 23, that which is filled by Christ; the fulness of the Godhead, all Divine attributes.
mAngiov, adv., near, near by; with the art., 6 rAnoloy, a neighbour.
VOCABULARY.
['=\4400s—avée
mrAncuovy}, js, 7, the full satisfying, Col. ii. 23.
mAjcow, tw, 2nd aor. pass., éxAryny, to smite, Rev. viii. 12.
mAodpiov, fov, 76 (dim. of wAoiov), a small boat, as the fishing boats on the lake of Galilee.
mAotoy, ov, 76, a ship, a vessel, a bark, large or small.
TAdos, ods, gen., ov, or ods, navigation, voyage, Acts Xxl. 7; XXvil. 9.
mAovows, fa, wov, rich, abounding in (ev); adv., -ws, richly, abundantly, Col. ii. 16.
mAouTéw, &, How, to become rich, to be rich, to abound in.
mAouti(w, to make rich, to enrich, to cause to abound in.
mAovTos, ov, 6 (see 32, a), riches, wealth, abundance ; spiritually, en- richment, Rom. xi. 12.
nAtvo, v@, to wash, as garments, Rev. Vil. 14 (Xxii. 14).
mvevua, atos, 6, (1) properly, the wind, or the air in motion, John i. 8; hence, (2) the human spirit, dist. from cdma and Wx, 1 Thess v. 23; (3) a temper or disposition of the soul, Luke ix. 55; Rom. vill. 15; (4) any intelligent, incorporeal being, as (a) the human spirit, separated from the body, the undying soul ; (b) angels, good and bad; (c) Gop, the immaterial One, John iv. 24; (d) tHE Hoty Grost (see 217, /). Used of the influence of which the Holy Ghost is the author, in respect of Jesus, Luke iv. 1; Acts x. 38, in respect of prophets and apostles ; and in respect of saints generally, Eph. i. 17.
mvevpatixds, 4, dv, spiritual, (1) relating to the mind, not corporeal; (2) to the disposition or gifts imparted by the Holy Spirit, 1 Cor. ii. 13, 15; Ta mvevuatixd, spiritual gifts, 1 Cor, . xii. 1; adv., -ws, spiritually, i.e., (1) mystically, Rev. xi. 8; (2) by the aid of the Holy Spirit, 1 Cor. ii. 14.
mvéw (F), evow, to blow, as the wind, to breathe.’
trviyo—médy.a |
nvlyw, to choke, to seize by the throat.
muixros, 4, dv, strangled.
avo, As, n, (1) breath, Acts xvii. 25; (2) @ breeze, or blast, Acts ii. 2.
modjpns, es, reaching to the feet; as subst., a long robe, Rev. i. 13.
tober, adv. , interrog., whence, of place —as, from what quarter? Matt. Xv. 33 — from what cause; how? Matt. xiii. 27. Indicating surprise, admiration, &c., Luke i. 43; also strong negation, Mark xii. 37.
mola, as, -7, grass, herbage, James iv. 14 (or fem. of wotos, what /).
moew, @, how, (1) to. make, i.¢., to form, to bring about, to cause; spoken of religious festivals, &e. , to observe, to celebrate; of trees and plants, to germinate, to produce ; to cause to be, or to become, Matt. xxi. 13; to declare to be, John Vill. 53; to assume, Matt. xii. 33; (z) to do, generally, to do, i.e, habitually, to perform, to execute, to exercise, to practise, i.e., to pursue a course of action, to be active, to work, to spend, to pass, 1.e., time, or life, Acts xv. 33.
molnua, aros, 76, a thing made, work- manship.
molnois, ews, n, doing, James i. 25.
montis, ov, 6, (1) a maker, doer (Rom. li. 13); (2) a poet, Acts xvii. 28.
mwoulros, 7, ov, various, of different colours, diverse.
ropaivw, av@, (x) to feed a flock, Luke Xvii. 7; hence, (z) to tend, to nourish, cherish, Jude 12; of pas- tors, Acts xx. 28 3 (3) to rule, Matt. li. 6; Rev. ii. 27.
mony, vos, 6, (1) a shepherd; (2) tig., a pastor. Used of Curist and of his ministers.
noluvn, ns, %, (3) a flock of sheep ; (2) a band of Christ’s disciples.
moluvov, lov, rd (dim. of roiuyn), (1) a little flock; (3) Christ’s flock, i.e., disciples.
motos, mola, mocoy, a correl. pron. cor- responding with ofos and oios, what? of what kind, sort, species ? what one? which ?
VOCABULARY.
107
moreuew, &, how, to make war, to con- tend (werd, gen.), to quarrel.
wéAeuOs, ov, 6, (1) war, a@.war; {2) 4a battle ; (3) strife.
méAts, ews, H, a city, a walled ‘etn. ni the inhabitants of a city ; with
, the city Jerusalem, the heavenly
oh of “which J erusalem was a symbol,
modit-dpxns, ov, 6, the ruler of a city, a city magistrate, ‘‘politarch,” Acts
xvii. 6, 8. sate Bc h, (1) citizenship, Acts Xxil. (2). a state, or common-
wealth, ‘Ep 133.
moAlreva, -atos, 76, a community, as of a city, a commonwealth, Phil. iii, 20.
moAirevw, in mid., to be a citizen; hence, to live, ie., to order ones life, Acts xxiii. 1; Phil. i. 27.
moAirns, ov, 6, a citizen, an inhabitant of a city, Acts xxi. 39; with gen., avrov, a fellow-citizen.
moAAdkus, adv., many times, often.
mwoAAa-TAagiwy, ov, gen., ovos, Mani- Fold, many times more.
modu-Aoyia, as, 7, much speaking, loquacity, Matt. vi. 7. ToAv-mepas, adv., im many parts, in
manifold ways, Heb. i. 1. moAu-molkiAos, ov, very varied, mani- fold, Eph. iii. 10.
TOAVS, TOAAH, TOAD (see 3Y, 2), ma, numerous ; moAv, much, greatly, as adv.; moAAol, many, often with par- titive genitive, or €«; of woAAol, the many (see 22'7); mwoAAa, in like manner, much, very much, often, many times; moar, by much, joined with comparatives; éri mod’, for a great while, Acts xxviii. 6; &
TOAAG, altogether, Acts xxvi. 29.
WOAV-TTAaYXVOS, ov, very compassionate, of great mercy, James v. 11.
modv-TEANs, €s, very costly, Mark xiv. 3; very precious, 1 Pet. lil. 4.
modv-tipos, ov, 6, H, of great benions very costly, John Xil, 3.
modvu-tpdtws, adv., in various ways, Heb. i. 1.
| woua, aros, Td, drink.
108
movnpla, as, 7, evil disposition, wicked- ness; plur., malignant passions, iniquities.
movnpds, d, dv (mévos), evil, bad, of things or persons; wicked, depraved, spec. malignant, opp. to ayabds (see Synonyms); 6 movnpds, the Wicked One, i.e., Satan ; 7d mopnpdy, evil.
mévos, ov, 6, (1) labour; (2) in Rev., sorrow, anguish.
Novrixds, 4, dv, belonging to Pontus, Acts xviii. 2.
Mdyr.os, lov, 6, Pontius, the preenomen of Pilate.
Iidvros, ov, 6, Pontus, Acts ii. 9; t Pet. i. 1.
Tidmatos, ov, 6, Publius, Acts xxviii. 7.
mopela, as, 7, &@ way, a journey, Luke xiii, 22; way or course of life, James ut,
mopevouat, coua, dep., with pass. aor., éropevGnv, to go, to go away, to depart, to journey, to travel, often (as Heb.) to take a course in life.
mopbéw, iow, to lay waste, harass, per- secute, Acts ix. 21; Gal. i. 13, 23.
wopiou.ds, ov, 6, gain, 1 Tim. vi. 5, 6.
Tlopxios, ov, 6, Porcius, the prenomen of Festus.
mopvela, as, 7, fornication, lewdness ; fig. in Rev., idolatry.
mopvetbw, ow, to commit fornication ; fig. in Rev., to worship idols.
mépyn, ns, 7, @ harlot, a prostitute ; fig. in Rev., an idolatrous com- munity.
mépvos, ov, 6, one who prostitutes him- self, an impure person.
adppw, ady., far, far off; comp. mop-.
pwtépw or -TEpov.
moppwbev, adv., further, from afar, far off, Luke xvii, 12.
moppipa, as, 7, & purple or crimson garment, indicating wealth or rank, Luke xvi. 19; Mark xv. 17, 20.
moppviocos, ovs, a, ovv, purple or crim- son, John xix. 2, 5..
roppupé-mwais, ews, n, a seller of purple or crimson cloth, Acts xvi. 14.
moods, adv., interrog., how many times ? how often?
dots, ews, 7, drink.
VOCABULARY.
[rovnpta—mpdxrap
nécos, , ov, how much, how great; aéog, as ady. with comparatives, by how much ; plur., how many.
morauds, od, 6, a river, torrent, flood.
moTauo-pdpntos, ov, carried away by & Jlood.
motamos, 7, dv, of what kind? of what - manner ? how great!
mote, adv., interrog., when? at what time? till when? how long? more, enclitic, at some time, at one time or other (see 129).
nérepov, prop. neut. of rérepos, whether, correlating with #, or.
mworhpiov, tov, 76, a drinking-cup, the contents of the cup; fig., the portion which God allots, whether of good or ill, commonly of the latter.
mori{w, ow, to cause to drink (two aces.); to give drink to (acc.); fig., to minister to, generally, 1 Cor. lil, 2; to water, or irrigate, as plants, &c., 1 Cor, iii. 6-8,
TlorloAa, wv, oi, Puteoli, Acts xxviii. 13.
métos, ov, 6 (see mivw), a drinking bout, drunkenness, 1 Pet, iv. 3.
mov, adv., interrog., where? whither ? Matt. i. 4; John vii, 35.
mov, enclitic, an indef. particle of place or degree, somewhere, some- where about, Heb. ii. 6; Rom, iv. 19 (see 129).
Tlovéns, Sevros, 6, Pudens, 2 Tim. iv. 23,
movs, mdd0s, 6, the foot; met., for the person journeying, Luke i. 79; bmd tovs médas, under the feet, i.e., en- tirely subdued, as Rom. xvi. 20,
mpayua, atos, 76, a thing done, a fact, - a thing, a business, a suit, as at law,
mpayparela, as, N, a business, an affair, 2 Tim. il. 4.
mpayparetouat, couat, dep., to transact business, to trade, Luke xix. 13.
apatépioy, tov, 76 (from Lat., pretor), a court-house, ajgudgment-hall, Matt. xxvii. 27; the quarters of the pre- torian army in Rome, Phil. i. 13.
mpaktwp, opos, 6, an officer employed to execute judicial sentences, Luke xii, 58.
mpagis—*mpo-8(Sopu| (1) action, mode of
mpagts, EWS, 1, action, plur., deeds, ‘‘acts;” (2) Junction, Rom. xii. 4.
mpGos, a, ov, and mpaiis, cia, U (see 39), meek, mild, kind, benevolent, Matt. V. 5, Xli. 29.
mpadrns, or -altns, THTOS, 7, meckness, clemency, 1 Cor. iv. 21 ; benevolence, 2 Cor. x. 1.
mpoatia, as, Hh, a company formed into square, Mark vi. 40. For constr., see 242.
mpdoow, or -TTw (Acts xvii. 7), tw, pf., nmémpaxa, wémpayuat, (1) to do, per- form, accomplish, with acc.; (2) to be in any condition, i.e., to fare, Acts xv. 29; Eph. vi. 21; (3) to exact, to require, ¢.g., money lent, or tribute, Luke iil. 13; xix. 23.
mpais, -Urns (see mpaos, -dr7s).
mpémet, impers. (see 101), it becomes, it ts fitting to, dat.
mpeoBela, as, 7, an embassy, ambas- sadors.
mpecBetw, ow (lit., to be aged, elder men being chosen for the. office), to act as ambassador, 2 Cor. v. 20.
mpeoBurépiov, tov, +d, an assembly of
elders, the Sanhedrim, Luke xxii. 66; officers of the church assembled, 1 Tim. iv. 14.
mpeaBvrepos, tépa, tepov (compar. of mpéoBus, old), elder, (1) in age, Acts ii. 17; 1 Tim. v. 1; plur., often, ancestors, as Heb. xi. 2; (2) in dignity and office, whether of the Jewish community (Matt. xvi. 21) ; or the Christian (Acts xx. 17), ‘¢ Presbyter.”’
mpeoBuTns, ov, 6, an old man, Luke i, 18.
mpeoBuris, wos, 4, an aged woman, Titus iL. 3.
mpnvns, €s, prone, falling headlong, Acts i, 18.
mpi(w, or mplw, ist aor. pass., éxpiabny, to saw, to saw asunder, Heb. xi. 37.
nply, adv., of time, before, as conj. in N.T., with or without #, sooner than ; generally with acc. and inf., also with subj. aor. (as fut. perf.), Luke i. 26; opt, in Acts xxv. 16,
VOCABULARY.
109
Mpicka, ns, 7, and dim, Mpwtara, as, a prop. name, Prisca, or Priscilla. -
mpd, prep., gov. the gen., before, i.e., of place, time, or superiority (see 294). In composition, it retains the same meaning.
mpo-cyw, to go before, to lead the way, to precede, in place, Matt. ii. 9; in time, Mark vi. 45; part., mpodywv, preceding, previous, 1 Tim, i. 18; Heb. vii. 18.
mpo-aipéw, @, N.T., in mid., to propose to oneself, resolve, 2 Cor. ix. 7.
mpo-aitidouat, Guat, to allege, or prove beforehand, Rom, iii. 9.
mpo-axotw, to hear before, Col. i. 5.
Tpo-apaptave, to sin before, 2 Cor. xii. 21, xiii, 2.
mpo-avAioy, ov, 76, the court before a building, the vestibule, Mark xiv. 68.
mpo-Baivw, to go forward, Matt. iv. 21; pf. part., apoBeBnkads, advanced in life, Luke i. 7.
mpo-BdrAw, to put forth, as trees their leaves, Luke xxi. 30; to thrust for- ward, Acts xix. 33.
mpoBarikés, h, dv, pertaining to sheep, John vy. 2.
mpdéBarov, ov, 76 (mpoBaivw), a sheep; fig., a follower of Christ.
mpo-BiBdqw, ow, to put forward, Acts xix. 33; to instigate, Matt. xiv. 8.
mpo-BAénw, N.T., in mid., to provide, Heb. xi. 40. :
mpo-ylvouat, to be, or be done before, Rom. iil. 25. ;
mpo-yweorw, to know beforehand, Acts xxvil. 5; of the Divine foreknow- ledge, Rom. viii. 29; 1 Pet. i. 20.
apd-yvwots, ews, n, foreknowledge, Acts il, 23; 1 Pet. i. 2.
mpé-yovos, ov, 6, @ progenitor, plur., ancestors, 1 Tim. v. 4; 2 Tim. i. 3.
mpo-ypdow, yw, to write before, in time, Eph. iii. 3; to write up, exhibit before any one, Gal. iii. 1; to pre- ordain, Jude 4.
mpd-5ndos, ov, manifest to all, con- spicuous.
mpo-didwu, (1) to give before, Rom. xi. 35; (2) to betray. See following word.
110
mpo-5drn5, ov, 6, @ betrayer, Luke | vi, 316; Acts vii, 52; 2 Tim. iii. 4.
mpd-dpomos, ov, 6, # (see TpoTpEexXw), a precursor, for erunner, Heb. vi. 20.
mpo-etdoy, 2nd aor. of apoopdw,
mpo-ecrov, 2nd aor. of mpépnu, perf., apoelpnka.
™po- -Ariva, to hope before, Eph. i. 12.
mpo-ev-dpxouat, to begin before, 2 Cor.
Vill. 6, 10.
™po- en-aryyéXro, in mid., to promise before, Rom. i. 2.
mpo-epxouat (see 108, 2), (1) to go forward, advance ; (2) to go before, precede, in time or place (gen. or acc.).
mpo-eroiud(w, ow, to appoint before- hand, to predestine, Rom. ix. 23.
a™p0-€u-a' aryyediCouat, to foretell glad tidings, Gal. iii. 8.
apo-€xw, in mid., to hold before one- self, to be superior, Rom. iii. 9
| (see 358). _ mpo-nyéouct, oduct, to take the lead, to lead onward by example, Rom. Xil. 10,
mpo-Oeois, ews, 7 (T:OHus), (1) a setting before ; of &pro Tis mpobécews, the
loaves of the presentation, or the |
show bread, compare Heb. ix. 2; (2) a predetermination, purpose, Acts xi. 23: mpo-Oeomios, fa, wy, set beforehand, appointed before, Gal. iv. 2. mpo-duuia, as, n, alacrity, willingness.
mpé-Ouuos, ov, predisposed, ready, willing, Matt. xxvi. 413 1d mpé- Oupoy, alacrity, Rom. i. 15; adv.,
-ws, readily, with alacrity, 1 Pet. Vera,
mpo-tornut, act., 2nd aor. and perf., and mid., (1) to preside over, to govern, gen. ; (2) to care for, prac- tise, gen., Titus ii. 8.
mpo-kadew, @, in mid., stimulate, Gal. v. 26.
mpo-KaT-ayyéAAw, to announce before- hand, to promise.
mpo-xat-apti(w, to make ready before- hand.
to provoke,
VOCABULARY.
mpd-reyua, to lie, or be placed before, to
be proposed, as duty, example, re- , &c., Heb. vi. 18; to be at
hand, to be present, 2 Cor. viii. 12.
mpo-Knpvoow, tw, to announce, or preach beforehand, Acts iii. 20.
mpo-Kom}, 7s, n, urging forward, fur- therance, advance, Phil. i. 12, 25.
mpo-KéaTw, to make progress in (dat. or ev); to advance to (éml, acc.); of time, Rom. xiii. 12; to be advanced, or far spent.
mpé-Kpiua, aros, 76, a forejudging, pre- judice, 1 Tim, v. 21.
mpo-Kkupdw, @, to establish, before, Gal. iii. 17.
mpo-AauBavw, to take before, anticipate ; pass., to be overtaken, or caught, Gal. vi. 1.
mpo-Aéyw, to tell beforehand, forewarn.
mpo-uaptvpoua, to testify beforehand, to predict, 1 Pet. i. 11.
mpo-medeTaw, &, to care for beforehand, to premeditate, Luke xxi. 14.
mpo-uepiuvdw, @, to be anxious, or solicitous beforehand, Mark xiii. 11.
mpo-voew, @, to perceive beforehand, to provide for, gen,; in mid., to pro- vide for oneself, to practise, acc.
mpd-vo1, aS, 7), providence, Acts xxiv. 3; care. Sor (gen.), Rom, xiii. 14.
mpo-opdw, @, 2nd aor., mpocidoy, to see beforehand, Acts xxi. 29; Gal. ili. 8; mid., to have before one’s eyes, Acts ii. 25 (LXX.).
mpo-opi(w, to predetermine, to pre- ordain, Acts iv. 28; Rom. viii. 29; 1 Cor. ii. 7; Eph. i. ete
npo-rdoxw, to suffer beforehand, 1 Thess. ii. 2
or ratify
mpo-réumw, to send forward, to accom- pany, to bring one on his way.
mpo-rerhs, és (rimrw), precipitate, heud- long, rash.
mpo-mopevouat, gouat, in mid., fo pre- ae to pass on before (gen.), Luke
76.
i ‘os 307), prep., gov. gen., dat., and accus. cases, general signif,, towards. IN COMPOSITION, it de- notes motion, direction, reference, nearness, addition,
[spo-Sérys—mpds
mpo-cdBBarov—mpoo-Kuvéw] VOCABULARY.
mpo-adSBaroy, ov, 76, the day before the Sabbath, Mark xv. 42.
mpoo-ayopetw, to address by name, to designate, Heb. v. 10.
mpoo-awyw, (1) trans., to bring to, to bring near ; (2) intrans., to come to, or towards, to approach.
mpoo-aywyh, 7s, n, approach, access, Rom. v. 2; Eph. ii. 18, iii. 12 (eis, mpés, acc.).
mpoc-aitéw, @, to beg, to ask earnestly.
mpoo-airns, ov, 6, a beggar, a mendicant.
mpoc-ava-Baivw, to go up to (a more honourable place), Luke xiv. 10.
mpoo-avarlcxw, to consume over and above, to spend further.
mpoo-ava-rAnpdw, @, to fill wp by adding to, to supply abundantly (ace.).
mpoo-ava-Tidnut, to lay up over and above ; in mid., (1) to communicate, or impart in addition (acc. and dat.), Gal. ii. 15; (2) to confer with (dat.), Gal. i. 16.
mpoo-ameAdw, &, to utter additional threats, Acts iv. 21.
mpoc-daravdw, @, how, to expend besides, Luke x. 35.
mpoo-déouat, to want more, to stand in need of (gen.), Acts xvii. 25.
mpoa-déxouat, dep. mid., (1) to receive to one’s company; (2) to admit, allow, tolerate (with ov, to reject, Heb. Xl. 353; (3) to await, to expect {acc.).
mpoc-doKdw, @, to look for, expect, an- ticipate, whether with hope or fear.
mpuc-dexia, as, 7, a looking for, ex- pectation, anticipation.
mpoo-edw, @, to permit, or suffer further, Acts xxvii. 7.
mpoo-eyyl(w, to approach, to come near to (dat.), Mark ii. 4.
mpoo-edpevw, to wait upon, to minister to, dat., 1 Cor. ix. 13.
mpoc-epydfoua, dep. mid., to gain by labour in addition, Luke xix. 16.
mpoo-epxoua (see 103, 2), (1) gene- rally, to come, or to go to, abs., or dat. of place or person, ¢o visit, to have intercourse with ; (2) specially, to approach, to draw near to, Gop or CHRIST, Heb. vii. 25; (3) to assent to, concur in, 1 Tim, vi. 3.
111
mpoo-evxh, 7s, 7, (1) prayer to God; (2) a@ place where prayer is offered, an oratory, *‘proseucha,” Acts xvi. 53. 16.
mpoo-evxouat, dep. mid., to pray to God, to offer prayer, to pray for (acc. of thing, imép or mepl, of person, iva (omws), of object, occa- sionally inf.).
mpoc-éxw, to apply, with vody ex- pressed or understood, to apply the mind, to aitend to, dat., with ad, to beware of, also inf. with wh.
mpoo-nrow, @, to affix with nails, Col ii. 14.
mpoo-hrutos, ov, 6, H (Epxouct), a ‘*pro- selyte,”’ a convert to Judaism.
mpda-Kaipos, ov, temporary, transient.
mpoc-kakéw, @, N.T., mid., to call to oneself, to call for, to summon ; fig., to call to an office, to call to the Christian faith.
mpoo-Kkaptepéw, @, to persevere in, to continue stedfast in, dat.
™poo-KapTépynats, ews, 7H, perseverance, Eph. vi. 18.
mpoc-KkepddAaiov, ov, a cushion for the head, a pillow, Mark iv. 38.
mpoo-KAnpdw, @, to adjoin by lot, or choice ; pass., to consort with, dat., Acts xvii. 4.
mpdc-KAtois, ews, 7 (KAizw), a leaning towards, partiality, 1 Tim. v. 21.
mpoc-KoAAdw, @, how, to join oneself to (dat.), as a companion, Acts v. 36; to cleave to (mpdés, acc.), as a hug band, Matt. xix. 5
mpéa-Kkouua, Tos, Td, a stumbling-block, an occasion of falling, a cause of sinning, Rom. xiv. 13.
Tpoc-Kown, 7s, , offence, an occasion of offence, or stumbling, 2 Cor. vi. 3. mpao-Kéntw, to strike the foot against, so, to. stumble, to take offence,
1 Pet. i. 8,
mpoo-KvAiw, to roll to, or upon (ent, , ace.), Matt. xxvil. 60; Mark xv. 46.
mpoo-kvvéw, to bow down, or to pros. trate oneself to, to worship, God or inferior beings, to adore (dat. o: ace.). See Synonyms,
00
112
mpoo-kuyntis, ov, 6, a worshipper, John iv. 23. . mpoo-Aadéw, &, to speak to, to converse with, Acts xiii. 43. mpoo-AauBdve, N.T., mid., to take to oneself, i.e., food, companions, to recewe to fellowship, Rom. xiv. 3) mpda-Aniis, €ws, 7, an assuming, a taking to oneself, a reception, Rom. xi. 15. mpoo-wevw, to continue with or in, to adhere to (dat.), to stay in (ev) a place. poc-opuitw (Spuos), to come to anchor, to draw to shore. mpoo-opelAw, to owe besides, or in ad- dition, Philem. 19. mpoc-oxifw (dx0éw), to be grieved, or offended with (dat.), Heb. iii. 10, 17 (LXX.). mpéa-mewvos, ov (reiva), very hungry). mpoo-rhyvuu, to affix, to fasten, applied to Christ’s being fastened to the cross, Acts il. 23. : mpoo-rimrw, (1) to fall down before (dat. or mpés, ace.); (2) to rush against (dat.), Matt. vii. 25. mpoo-roiew, @, in mid., to fashion one’s self to; hence, to pretend (inf.), Luke xxiv. 28. mpoc-mopetoua, to come to, approach (dat. ). mpos-pnyvupt, to dash against, as waves, Luke vi. 48. mpoo-tdcow, tw, abs. or acc., and inf., to enjoin (acc.) upon (dat.); pass., perf., part., constituted. mpo-ordris, lios, 4, a patroness, Rom. Xvi. 2. mpoo-rlOnu:, to place near, or by the side of, to add to (dat. or émi, dat. or acc.); mid., with inf., to go on to do a thing, i.e, to do aguin, Acts xii. 3; Luke xix. 11. So 1st aor., pass., part., Luke xix. 11 (see 399, d). mpoo-rpéxw, 2nd aor., mpocédpapyov, to run to, Mark x, 17. mpos-pdyiov, ov, 76, anything eaten with bread, as fish, meat, &c., John xxi. 5.
VOCABULARY.
[™poo-xuvarhs—mpo-pépe
mpé-oparos, ov (from opdtw, to slaugh- ter, *‘just slain’’), recent, new, Heb. x. 20. The allusion is sacrificial. Adv., -ws, recently, Acts xviii 2.
mpoo-pépw, to bring to, dat.; to offer, to present, as money, Acts viii. 18 ;. specially, to offer sacrifice ; mid., to bear oneself towards, to deal with, Heb. xii. 7.
mpoo-pians, és, friendly, amiable, Phil. iv. 8.
mpoo-popa, as, , an offering, a sacri- Jice, an oblation.
mpoo-pwvew, @, to call to (dat.), to cry aloud, to call to oneself (acc.).
mpds-xvols, ews, (xéw), an affusion, a sprinkling, Heb. xi. 28.
mpoo-atw, to touch lightly, Luke Xi. 46.
| wpoowmro-Anmréw, &, to accept the person
of any one, to show partiality, James ii. 9. ;
mpoowro-AnmTns, ov, 6, a respecter of persons, a partial one, Acts X. 34.
mpoowmo-Anvia, as, 7, respect of per- sons, partiality.
mpdcwmrov, ov, Td (Sv), (1) the face, the countenance ; in antithesis with Kapdia, mere appearance; (2) the sur- Jace, as of the earth, Luke xxi. 35; of the heaven, Matt. xvi. 3
mpo-rdcow, tw, to appoint before, Acts Xvii. 26.
mpo-relyw, to stretch out, as one bound for castigation, Acts xxil. 25.
mpdétepos, €pa, epovy (comparative of mpd), former, Eph. iv. 22; 17d mpé- Tepov, as arlv., before, formerly.
mpo-ridnu, N.T., mid., (1) 40 set forth, Rom. iii. 25; to purpose, to design beforehand, Rom, i. 12.
mpo-tpérw, in mid., to exhort, Acts XVlil. 27.
mpo-Tpéxw, 2nd aor., epoédpapoy, to run — before.
mpo-imdpxw, to be formerly, with particip., Luke xxiii, 12; Acts Vili. 9.
mpb-pacis, ews, 4, a pretext, an excuse ; dat., adverbially, in appearance, pretence.
x00-pé¢pw, to bring forth, Luke vi. 45. ,
rpd-yp.t—aruKvds |
apd-pnut, perf., mpoeipnea; 2nd aor., mpoctrov; to say before, t.¢, at an earlier time, Gal. i. 9; in an earlier part of the discourse, 2 Cor. vil. 3 ; or prophetically, Mark xiii. 23.
mpo-onreta, as, 7, (1) the gift of pro- phecy ; (2) the exercise of the gift. So plur., prophecies.
npo-pnrevw, aw, to be a prophet, to prophesy, to foretell, to forth-tell, or speak of Divine things; of false prophets, Matt. vii. 22; to divine, used in mockery, Matt. xxvi. 68.
mpo-pyrns, ov, 6, (1) a prophet, a teacher inspired and sent by God: plur., the prophetic books of the O.T.; (2) a poet, a minstrel, Titus i, 12.
mpo-ontikds, h, dv, prophetic, uttered by prophets.
mpo-pijris, Sos, n, a prophetess, Luke
_ ii, 36; used of a pretended pro- phetess, Rev. ii. 20,
mpo-pidvw, to anticipate, to be before- hand, with particip., Matt. xvii. 25.
mpo-xeiplCouat, to appoint, to choose, to destine, Acts xxii. 14, XXvi. 16.
mpo-xelpo-rovew, @, to fore-appoint, to choose beforehand, Acts x. 41.
Tipéxopos, ov, 6, Prochérus, Acts vi. 5.
mptuva, as, n, the hindmost part of a ship, the stern, Acts xxvii. 41.
mpwt, adv., the very early morning, the dawn.
mpwtwos, n, ov, early, of the early rain, James v. 7.
mpwivds, adj., belonging to the morning, of the morning star, Rey. ii. 28.
mpwios, ta, ov, of the morning, fem. (&pa), Matt. XXvVil. 1.
mpdpa, as, 7, the forward part of a ship, the prow, Acts xxvii. 41.
mpareiw, to have pre-eminence, to be chief, Col. i. 18. .
mpwro-Ka0-edpia, as, 7, a chief or upper- most seat.
mpwro-KAota, as, 7, the chief place at a banquet.
mparos, n, ov (superlative of mpd), first, in place, time, or order; mparov, as adverb, jirst, Mark iv. 28; 7d mpatoy, at the first, John x. 40.
VOCABULARY,
113
mpwro-ordrns, ov, 6, a leader, a ring: leader, Acts xxiv. 5.
mpwro-TéKia, tw, td, the rights of the Jirst-born, the birthright, Heb. xii. 16.
mpwtd-rokos, ov, first-born, chief; 6 mpw- téToKos, specially a title of CHRIST. Plur., the first-born, Heb. xii. 23, of saints who died before Christ’s coming.
mraiw, ow, intrans., to stumble, to fall, to err, Rom. xi. 11; James iil. 2.
arépva, as, 7, the heel, "John xiii, 18.
UTEpUYLOY, OV, TO (dim. mwréput), the extremity, as a battlement, or para- pet, Matt. iv. 5.
mrépuk, vyos, 7, a wing, a pinion.
mrnvos, h, dv (wéTroum), winged, Td mrnvd, birds, fowls.
mroéw, &, iN pass., 1 Pet. ili. 6.
mrdénois, ews, , consternation, 1 Pet. li. 6,
TiroAcuats, tos, 7, Ptolemais, Acts xxi. 7. 4
mTvov, ov, 76, a fan, a winnowing- shovel, Matt. iii.’ 12.
mTipw, in pass., to be in consternation, Phil, i. 28.
mtTvopua, ats, 76, spittle, saliva, John ix. 6,
mttccw, tw, to fold, to roll up, as a scroll, Luke iv. 20.
TTvw, ow, to spit, John ix. 6.
mTGua, atos, Té (rimtw), a body fallen in death, a carcase, Matt. xxiv. 28.
TT@OLs, ews, N, a fall, lit. or fig., Matt. Vil. 27; Luke ll. 34.
mraxela, as, 7, poverty, want. :
ee aw, to be in poverty, 2 Cor. Vili. 9.
aT wx0s, 4, dv, reduced to beggary, poor, destitute, spiritually poor, in a good sense, Matt. v. 3; in a bad sense, Rev. iii. 17. See Synonyms.
mvyuh, fis, 4 (bt), the fist
Tlv@wv, wvos, 6, Python, a divining demon ; called after a name of the heathen deity Apollo, Acts xvi. 16,
mukvds, h, dv, frequent, 1 Tim. v. 233 neut. plur., wuxvd, as adverb, often, Luke v. 333 SO mvkvotepoy, more Srequently, Acts xxiv. 26,
to be alarmed,
114.
muxtevw (mvt), to bow, strike, 1 Cor. ‘ix, 26,
mbAn, ns, 7, @ door or gate ; avAa Gov, the gates of Hades, i.e., the powers of the unseen world, Matt. xvi, 18.
_ wvddy, Gvos, 6, the entrance to a house, Acts x 17; @ gateway,, porch, Matt. xxvi. 71.
mwuvOdvouat, 2nd aor., érvddunyv, (1) to ask, to enquire (interrog. particle, with indic. or opt., or acc.; from
by apd); (2) to ascertain by enquiry, Acts xxiii. 34.
nip, mupds, 76, fire generally: of the heat of the sun, Rev. xvi. 8; of light- ning, Luke ix. 54; Gop is so called, Heb. xii. 29; fig. for strife, Luke xii. 49; trials, 1 Cor. iii. 13. So the infernal fire, or future punish- ment, Matt. xviii. 8. In Heb. x. 27, mupos (jAos stands for ardour, vehe- mence.
mupd, as, 7, a@ heap of fuel burning, Acts xxviii. 2, 3.
mipyos, ov, 6, a tower, a lofty building, a fortress (comp. burgh).
mipecow, to be sick of a fever, Matt. Vill. 14.
muperds, ov, 6, a fever.
mipwos, n, ov, fiery, glittering, Rev. IX. 17.
mupdw, &, N.T. pass., to be set on fire, to burn, to be inflamed, to glow with heat, as metal in a furnace, to be tried with fire.
muppa(w, to be fire-coloured, to be red, Matt. xvi. 2.
muppds, d, dv, fiery-red, fire-coloured, Rev. vi. 4.
mipwois, ews, 7, a burning, a confla- gration, Rev. XVill. 9, 183 severe trial, as by fire, 1 Pet. iv. 12.
mw, an enclitic particle, even, yet, used only in composition, pire, pndéra, &c.
mwréw, &, how, to sell, to trade, Matt. Xxi, 12.
m@Aos, ov, 6, a youngling, a foal, or colt, as Matt. xxi. 2.
mé-more, adv., used only after a nega- tive, not yet even, not at any time.
VOCABULARY.
[wunreda— Papa |
tupsw, @, ow, to harden, to render , fig.
mépwats, ews, H, hardness, of heart, callousness,
mows, an enclitic particle, in a manner, by any means.
mw@s, adv., interrog., how? in what manner? by what means? Also in exclamations, as Luke xii. 50; John xi. 36; with subj. or opt. (&v), implying a strong negative, Matt. xxvi. 54; Acts vill 31. Often (N.T.) in indirect interro- gations (classical, éxws) Matt. vi. 28, &e.
P,
P, p, pa, rho, r, and as an initial, p, rh, the seventeenth letter. As a numeral, p’ = 100; p= 100,000,
‘PadB, or ‘PaxdB, 7 (Heb.), Rahab.
‘PaBBt, 6 (Heb.), ** Rabbi,” my master, a title of respect in Jewish schools of learning.
paBBovi, or paBBovvt, 6 (Heb.), like paBSt, but of higher honour, my great master.
paBdi(w, tow, to scourge, to beat with rods, Acts xvi. 22; 2 Cor. xi. 25.
paBdos, ov, 7, a wand, rod, staff, Rev. xi. 1; 1 Cor. iv. 21; Matt. x. 10; a rod of authority, a sceptre, Heb. i, 8.
paBd-odxos, ov, 6 (€xw), the holder of the rods, a ee officer, lictor, Acts xvi. 35, 38.
‘Payad, 6 (Heb.), Ragau, Luke iii. 35.
pqgdi-ovpynua, aros, Td (iddios, easy, and %pyov, “an easy or careless deed”), an act of villainy, Acts xviii. 14.
padi-oupyla, as, 7, craftiness, villainy, Acts xiii. 10,
‘Paka (Heb., Chald. form), Raca!/ a term of contempt, Matt. v. 22 (see 158, ii.).
pdxos, ous, 76 (Shyvvu), a remnant torn off, a piece, Matt. ix. 16.
‘Paya, ) (Heb.), dat., -¢, Rama, Matt.
li, 18,
pavr(Lo—pdvvupe |
payvrifw, tow, to sprinkle, to cleanse ceremonially (ace.) by sprinkling, to purify from (dé).
payriopds, ov, 6, sprinkling, purifica- tion. ‘
pami(w, low, to smite with the hand, distinguished from faBdi¢w.
pdmioua, aros, 76, a blow with the open hand, a slap.
papts, tos, 4, a needle.
‘PaxdB, see ‘PdaB.
‘PaxnaA, 4) (Heb.), Rachel, Matt. ii 18
*PeBéxxa, ns, 7, Rebekah, Rom. ix. to.
peta, or fedn, ns, 4, @ chariot, Rev. XViii. 13.
‘Peupdy, or ‘Pepdy, 6, a Coptic word, Remphan, the Saturn of later my- thology, Acts vil. 43 (Heb., Chiun, Amos v. 26),
péw (F), pedow, to flow, John vii. 38.
péw (see pnul, efrov). From this obs. root, to say, are derived; act. perf., elpnka; pass., elpnuat; mst aor. pass., éppeOnv or éppnOny ; part., pndeis.
‘Pryor, ov, 74, Rhegium, now Rheggio, Acts xxviii. 13.
piryua, aros, 7d (pyyvums), what is broken, a crash, a ruin, Luke
vi. 49.
payvumt, phtw (or fioow, as Mark li. 22), to break, to rend, to burst, to dash against the ground, to break JSorth, as into praise, Gal. iv. 27.
piua, aros, 76, a thing spoken; (1) a word or saying of any kind, as com- mand, report, promise ; (2) a thing, a matter, a business,
‘Pnod, 6 (Heb.), Rhesa, Luke iii. 27.
phoow, see pryvups.
pnrwp, opos, 6, an orator, Acts xxiv. 1.
putas, adv., expressly, in so many words, 1 Tim, iv. 1.
pita, ns, 4, (1) @ root of a tree, or a plant; met., the origin, or source of anything ; fig., constancy, per- severance; (2) that which comes from the root, a descendunt, Rom. XV. 32,
pi(dw, @, dow, to root; perf., pass., part., ép6:Swuévos, firmly rooted ; fig., Eph, iii. 18; Col. ii. 7.
‘VOCABULARY.
115
pirh, Hs, (pirrw), a jerk, a twinkle, as of the eye, 1 Cor. xv. 52.
piti{w, tow, to move, as waves by the wind, James i. 6.
pimtéw, &, Ww, ist aor., éppupa; part., pias; to throw up, to cast off, or away, Acts xxil. 23.
pirrw, Ww, to throw, throw apart, Matt. ix. 36; to jerk, Luke iv. 35; Matt. xxvll. 5; to throw out, as anchors from a ship, Acts xxvii. 29; to lay doum, to expose, Matt. xv. 30.
‘PoBodu, 6 (Heb.), Rehoboam, Matt.
ys
‘Pddn, ns, % (Rose), Rhoda, Acts Xli. 13.
‘Pddos, ov, 7, Rhodes, Acts xxi. 2.
patnidy, adv. (fot{os, roaring, as of ° waves), with a noise, or sound, 2 Pet. iii. 10.
poudata, as, 7, a sword, as Rev. i. 16; fig., piercing grief, Luke ii. 35.
“PouBny, 6 (Heb.), Reuben, Rev. vii. 5. |
‘Pové, 7 (Heb.), Ruth, Mark i. 5.
‘Potvgos, ov (Lat.), Rufus, (1) Mark Xv. 21; (2) Rom. xvi. 13. Perhaps the same person.
pun, ns, 7, a narrow street, a lane.
piouc, coun, dep. mid., 1st aor., pass., épivcdnv, to draw, or snatch from danger, to deliver; 6 puduevos, the Deliverer.
pumapia, as, 7, filth, pollution, James i. 21,
pimapds, d, dv, sordid, filthy, defiled,
_ James ii, 2.
piros, ov, 6, filth, filthiness, 1 Pet. iii, 21.
pumdw, @, to be filthy, Rev. xxii. 11.
pious, ews, 2 (fe(F)o), a flux.
puris, idos, 7, @ wrinkle; fig., a spiritual defect, Eph v. 27.
‘Pwuaixds, h, dv, Roman, Luke xxiii. 8
38.
“‘Pwuatos, ov, 6, a Roman, a citizen of Rome.
‘Pouaiort, adv., in the Roman, or Latin tongue, John xix. 10.
‘Péun, ns, 7, Rome.
povyum, pdow, to strengthen; perf., pass., imper., epfwoo, &ppwobe, fare well, Acts XV. 29, XXili, 30.
116
=.
=, o, final s, oliypa, sigma, s, the eighteenth letter. As a numeral, o’ = 2003 6 = 200,000.
vaBaxGavi (Chald.), sabachthani, thou hast, or hast thou forsaken me?
Matt. xxvii. 46; Mark xv. 34;
from the Chaldee rendering of Ps.
pe ao
oaBao? (Heb.), sabaoth, hosts, armies; in the phrase, the Lorp (Jehovah) of hosts, Rom. ix. 29; James v. 4.
oaPPBaricuds, ov, 6, a keeping of sab- bath, Heb. iv. 9.
odBBaroy, ov, 75 (from Heb.), dat., plur., odBBaor(v), (1) the sabbath ; (2) a period of seven days, a week. In both senses the plural is some- times used.
cayivn, ns, n, a drag-net.
Saddovnaios, ov, 6, a Sadducee. of the sect in rived from the righteous.
Zain, 6 (Heb.), Sadok, Matt. i. 13.
calvw, to move, disturb, pass., 1 Thess. ili. 3.
odxios, ov, 6, a sack, sackcloth.
Badd, 6 (Heb.), Sala, Luke iii. 35.
Sarabina, 6 (Heb.), Salathiel, Matt. 1.32.
Zarauls, ivos, 7, Salamis, Acts xiii. 5.
Sadciu, 7, Salim, John iii. 23.
gadeiw, ow, to shake, to cause to shake; so, to excite, as the popu- lace, Acts xvii. 13; fig., to disturb in mind, 2 Thess. ii. 2.
Sarr, 7 (Heb.), Salem, Heb. vii. 1.
Sarudv, 6 (Heb.), Salmon, Matt.
Plur., eneral. Prob. de- eb. word for just,
i. 4.
Sadudvn, ns, 7, Salmone, Acts xxvii. 7.
addos, ov, 6, the rolling of the sea in a tempest, Luke xxi. 25.
odaAmvyt, vyyos, 7, a trumpet.
cadniCw, low (class, vytw), to sound a trumpet. For impers. use, 1 Cor. Xv, 52 (see 171).
cadmiorhs, ov, & (class, -''yKThs), a trumpeter.
Sardun, ns, 4h, Salome, wife of Zebe- dee, Mark xv. 40, Xvi. 1.
VOCABULARY.
[2—eapg
Saudpea, as, 7, Samaria, either (1) the district, or (2) the city, afterwards called Sebaste.
Sauapeiryns, ov, 6, a Samaritan.
Sauapeiris, dos, 7H, @ Samaritan woman.
Sauo-Oparn, ns, , Samothrace, Acts XVi. 11.
Sduos, ov, H, Samos, Acts xx. 15.
Sauouna, 6 (Heb.), Samuel.
Saupeov, 6 (Heb.), Samson, Heb. xi. 32.
cavddduoy, ov, 76, a sandal.
cavis, t5os, 4, a plank, a board, Acts XXvVii. 44.
ZaovaA, 6 (Heb.), Saul, (1) the king of Israel; (2) the apostle, only in direct address (see Savas).
campés, d, dv, rotten, hence useless ; fig., impure.
Sarpelpn, ns, 7, Sapphira, Acts v. 1.
Sdrpepos, ov, 6, a sapphire, Rev. Xxi. 19.
capydvn, ns, 4, & basket, generally of twisted cords, 2 Cor. xi. 33.
Sdpdes, wy, dat., eor(v), ai, Sardis, Rev. i, 11. .
odpdiwos, ov, 6, see next word.
cdpd.ov, lov, 7d, a sardine stone, blood or fresh coloured ; or carnelian.
capd-dvvt, vxos, 7, a sardonyx, a pre- cious stone, white streaked with red. :
Sdperra, wy, td, Sarepta, Luke iv. 26,
capkikds, 4, dv, fleshly, whether (1) sub- ject to carnal lusts and infirmities ; or (2) relating to the external con- dition.
odpkwos, 9, ov, fleshy, constituted of Jlesh, opp. to Al@wos, 2 Cor. iii. 3.
adpt, capkos, 7, flesh, the human body, man, human nature; waica odpé, every man, all men; kara odpKa, as a man; odpt nat aiua, flesh and blood, i.e., man in his weak and corrupt state; Civ ... weprmareiy Kare adpra, to live, to walk after flesh, denoting a carnal, worldly life. The word denotes consanguinity, natural relation, or descent, Mosaic rites, the external or ceremonial opp. to the internal and spiritual, Gal. iii, 30
Lapotx—Zipov|
Sapov>~x, 5 (Heb.), or Sepodx, Saruch, or Seruch (Serug), Luke iii. 35.
capdw, &, dow, to sweep, to cleanse with a broom.
Sdppa, as, 4, Sarah.
Sdpwy, wos, 6, Saron, Acts ix. 35.
Sarav, 6 (Heb.), and Satavas, a, the Adversary, Satan, the Heb. prop. name for the Devil, 5:dé8voAos ; met., for one who would do (consciously or unconsciously) the work of Satan, Matt. xvi. 23.
adtov, ov, 7d (see pddios), a seah, a measure equal to a modius and a half, Matt. xiii. 33; Luke xiii, 21.
SavAos, ov, 6, Saul, the apostle, gene- rally in this form (see Saova).
oBévvumi, oBéow, (1) to extinguish, to quench ; (2) fig., to restrain.
gearov, 7s, od (only masc. in N.T.), a reflex. pron., of thyself; dat., ceavtg, to thyself; acc., ceavrdy, thyself.
ocBaCouam, dep., pass., to stand in awe of, to worship religiously.
céBacua, aros, 76, an obiect of religious worship, 2 Thess. ii, 4; anything regarded as sacred, as altars, images, &c., Acts xvil. 23.
ocBaords, fh, dv, venerated, august, a title of the Caesars, Augustus, Acts xxv. 21. Hence, secondarily, Augustan, imperial, Acts xxvii. 1.
aéBoun, ‘dep., to reverence, to worship God, Mark vii. 7; of ceBowevor, the devout, ‘‘ proselytes of the gate.”
ceipt, as, 7, a chain, 2 Pet. ii. 4.
ceiopuds, od, 6, a shaking, as an earth- quake, Matt. xxiv. 7; @ storm at sea, Matt. viii. 24.
veiw, ow, to shake; fig., to agitate.
Sexovvdos, ov, 6 (Lat.), Secundus, Acts XX. 4.
Sereinaa, as, n, Seleucia, Acts xiii. 4.
oceAnvn, ns, n, the moon.
ceanvidfoua, to be lunatic, to suffer from periodical disease, as epilepsy.
Seuel, 6 (Heb.), Shimei, Luke ii. 26,
gepidaris, ews, 7}, flour, Rev. xviii. 13.
aeuvds, h, dv, (1) venerable, serious, of men; (2) honourable, of acts.
ceuvdrns, THTOS, h, dignity, seriousness,
VOCABULARY.
117
Zépyios, ov, 6, Sergius, Acts xiii. 7.
270, 6 (Heb.), Seth, Luke iii. 38.
Sn, 6 (Heb.), Shem, Luke iii. 36.
onualyw, ave, ist aor., éofuava, to signify, intimate.
onueiov, ov, 76, a sign, that by which a thing is known, a token, an in- dication, of Divine presence and power, 1 Cor. xiv. 22; Luke xxi. 7,11. Hence, especially, a miracle, whether real or unreal.
onpuedw, &, in mid., to mark for one- self, to note, 2 Thess. iii. 14.
aiwepov, adv., to-day, at this time, now; 7 (nuépa) onuepov, this very day, Acts xix. 40.
afjrw, to make rotten, 2nd perf., céonta, to become rotten, perish, James v. 2.
onpids, h, dv, adj., silken, neut. as subst., si/k, Rev. xviii. 12.
ahs, ontds, 6, a moth.
onté-Bpwtos, ov, moth-eaten.
abevdw, &, to strengthen, to confirm.
o.ayev, dvos, 7, the cheek, or jawbone.
avrydw, @, how, to keep silence, to keep a secret, Luke ix. 36; pass., to be concealed, Rom. xvi. 25.
atyn, Hs, 4, silence.
a.dhpeos, €a, evv, contr., ods, G, ovr, made of iron, Acts xii. Io,
al8npos, ov, 6, iron, Rev. xviii. 12.
Ziav, @vos, yn, Sidon. .
Z.dHns, la, dv, Sidonian, inhabitant of Sidon.
oudpios, tov, 6 (Lat.), an assassin, Acts xxl. 38.
olxepa, 76 (Heb. Chald. form), strong,
intoxicating drink, Luke i. 15.
Zidas, dat. a, acc. av, 6, Silas, contr. from Silvanus.
ZiAovavds, od, 6, Silvanus.
SaAwdu, 6, Siloam, or Siloah, Luke xiii, 4; John ix. 11.
oyurivoioy, tov, 7d (Lat., semicinctium), an apron, worn by artizans.
Siuwy, wvos, 6, Simon. Nine persons of the name appear to be men- tioned, (1) the Apostle Peter; (2) the Apostle Zelotes ; (3) brother of Jesus, Mark vi. 3; (4) Simon of Cyrene; (5) father of Judas Iscariot,
118
(6) a ‘‘certain Pharisee,” Luke vii. 40; (7) Simon, the leper, Matt. xxvil. 6; (8) Simon Magus, Acts viii. 9; (9) Simon, the tanner, Acts ix. 43.. Possibly (2) and (3) were identical ; see also (6) and (7).
Sa, +6 (Heb.), Sinai.
civam, ews, 7d, mustard, mustard-seed.
aowdav, dvos, 4, a linen cloth, a sheet or wrapper of linen.
cwid(w, to sift, as corn, to prove by trials and afflictions, Luke xxii. 31.
aiteutds, , dv, fed with corn, fatted.
oriotés, 4, dv, fed, nourished; ta oiriatd, Matt. xxii. 4, fatlings.
airo-uérpiov, tov, 76, a corn-ration, Luke xii. 42.
giros, ov, 6, wheat, corn; T& Gita, grain.
Sixdp, see Suxdp.
Siév, 6 or 76, Sion, the mountain ; met. (fem.), for the city Jerusalem ; and fig., for the church, the spiritual Jerusalem.
cwrdw, &, how, to be silent, whether voluntarily or from dumbness; to become still, as the sea, Mark iv. 39.
sKxavdarl(w, tow, to cause to stumble, pervert, to grieve (acc.); pass., to stumble, to be provoked, to be in- dignant. .
oKdydadroy, ov, 7d, a snare, a stumbling- block; fig., a cause of offence, or perversion.
oKxdrrw, yw, to dig.
oxdon, ns, 4, a boat, a skiff (as exca- vated from a tree).
oKédos, ous, 74, the leg.
oxéracua, ards, +6, clothing, 1 Tim. vi. 8.
Skevas. a, 6, Sceva, Acts xix. 14.
oxevn, Hs, n, furniture, fittings, Acts XXVii. 19.
oxedos, ovs, 74, (1) @ vessel, or utensil, to contain a liquid, or for any other purpose; fig., of recipients gene- rally, as of mercy, of wrath, Rom, ix. 23, 323 (2) am instrument, by which anything is done ; domestic, Matt. xii 29; of a ship, ‘‘ the gear,” Acts xxvii. 17; fig., of God’s servants, Acts ix. 15; 2 Cor. iv. 7.
VOUABULARY.
[Swa—orxoprrtos
oKnvh, fis, H, @ tent, an abode, or dwelling, the tabernacle reared in the wilderness, an idolatrous taber- - nacle.
oKnvo-rnyla, as, n, the fixing, or (met.) the feast, of tabernacles, John vii. 2.
oKivos, ovs, 76, a tent; fig., of the human body, 2 Cor. v. 1, 4.
oKnvo-roids, ov, 6, a tent-maker, Acts XViii. 3
oKnviw, &, dow, to frame or spread a tent, Rev. vil. 15; met., to dwell, John i. 14; Rev. xii, 12, xiii. 6, Rap ee A oe
oKhveua, aros, 76, a tent pitched, a dwelling, Acts vii. 46; fig., of the body, 2 Pet. i. 13, 14.
ola, as, h, (1) a shadow, a thick dark- ness, Matt. iv. 16 (LXX.); (2) @ Saint delineation, Col. ii. 17.
cKiptdw, &, how, to leap, for joy, exult,
oKAnpo-kapdia, as, 7, hardness of heart, perverseness.
oxdnpés, d, dv, hard, violent, as the wind, James ‘iii. 4; fig., grievous, painful, Acts ix. 5; stern, severe, Matt. xxv. 24.
oKxAnpérns, thos, 4, fig., hardness, of heart, obstinacy.
aKAnpo-Tpdxnros, ov, hard, or stiff necked ; fig., perverse, Acts vii. 51.
oxAnpivw, we, fig., to make hard, to harden, as the heart; mid., to harden oneself, to become obdurate, Acts xix. 9.
oKorids, a, dv, crooked ; fig., perverse, morose.
oKxddoy, oros, 6, a thorn; fig., a sharp infliction, 2 Cor. xii. 7.
gKoréw, @, (1) to look at, to regard attentively ; (2) to take heed (acc.), beware (uh).
oxords, ov, 6, the mark aimed at; kata oxordy, in accordance with the mark, i.e, aiming straight at it, Phil. iii. 14.
oxopri{w, ow, to disperse, to scatter abroad, as frightened sheep, John x. 123 to distribute alms, 2 Cor.
ix. 9. okoptios, tov, 6, a scorpion.
oKoreves—omhayxvitopar |
oxorewds, h, dv, dark, darksome.
CKoTia, as, n, darkness, privacy, Matt. x. 27; fig., spiritual darkness, or ignorance.
okoti(w, ow, in pass., to be ca hee as the sun, Matt. xiii. 24; fig., the mind, Rom. i. 21.
oxéros, ous, 75 (and ov, 6; see 82, a), darkness, physical, } Matt. xxvii. 453 moral, John ili. 19.
cxotdw, &, pass. only, to be darkened, Rev. xvi. 10.
cxiBadroy, ov, Té (perhaps from kvot BdAdew, to cast to the dogs), refuse, dregs, Phil. iii. 8.
Zins, ov, 6, a Scythian; met., for the uncivilized, Col. iii. 11.
oKvbp-wrds, dv, sad countenanced, stern, grim, Matt. vi. 16; Luke xxiv. 1%
oKUAAW, AB, pass., perf., ZrxvAua, to trouble, harass, tire.
okiaov, ov, 76, spoil taken from a foe, Luke xi. 22.
oKwAnkd-Bpwros, ov, eaten by worms, Acts xii. 23.
oKaéAnE, Kos, fig., torture.
opuapdySiwos, lyn, wov, made of emerald.
oudparydos, ov, 6, an emerald,
ouipva, ns, 7, myrrh.
Suipva, ns, 7, Smyrna.
Spupvaios, ov 6, fh, one of Smyrna, a Smyrne
te to ree with myrrh, Mark ‘xv 23.
Sddoua, wy, rd, Sodom.
Sodowev, or -uay, Gyros, Solomon.
copés, ov, 5, a bier, an open coffin.
ads, oh, adv, @ poss. pron., thy, thine (see 56).
govddpiov, tov, 7té (Lat.), a napkin, handkerchief.
Zovcdyva, ns, 7, Susanna, Luke viii.
copia, as, 7, wisdom, insight, skill, human, Luke xi. 31; or divine, 1 Cor. i. 21, 24.
codilw, trw, to make wise, to enlighten ;
6, @ gnawing worm ;
or @vos,
pass., to be devised skilfully, 2 Pet.
1. 16,
VOCABULARY.
119
aopéds, 4, dv, wise, either (1) in action, (2) in acquirement, learned, skilful, able ; (3) in philosophy, profound.
Sravia, as, 7, Spain, Rom. xv. 24.
onapdcow, tw, to tear, to convulse, to throw into spasms, Luke ix. 39.
onapyavdw, @, dow, perf., pass., part., eomapyavwpuevos, to swathe, to wrap im swaddling clothes.
orataddw, &, how, to live extravagantly, or luxuriously, 1 Tim. v. 6.
ondw, @, dow, to draw, to draw out, as a sword.
omeipa, ns, n, (1) a band or cohort of soldiers, the tenth part of a legion, Acts x. 1; (2) a military guard, John xviii. 3, 12.
oneipw, omep@, 1st aor., @omepa; pert., pass., €omapuat; 2nd aor., pass., éomdpny, to sow, or scatter, as seed ; to spread, or scatter, as the word of God. Applied to giving alms, 2 Cor. ix. 6; to burial, 1 Cor. XV. 42, 433 and fe spiritual effort generally, Gal. vi.
OTEKOVAATwWP, OpOS, ‘ (Lat.), a body guardsman, a soldier in attendance upon royalty, Mark vi, 27.
grévdw, to pour out, as a drink offer- ing, to offer in sacrifice,
omrépua, atos, td, a seed, produce, Matt. xiii. 33; children, offspring, posterity, John vii. 425 & remnant.
omeppo-Adyos, ov, 5, H, a trifler, Acts xvii. 18; i%¢, one who picks up trifles, as birds do seed.
cmeviw, ow, (t) to hasten, intrans., often adding to another verb the notion of speed, Luke xix. 5, 6 (2) to wish earnestly for (acc.), 2 Pet. ili, 12.
omhAaioy, ov, 74, & cave, a den.
omiAds, d5os, 4, a rock, occasioning ship= wreck ; of false teachers, Jude 12.
omidos, ov, a spot; fig., a blot, Eph, V. 273 2 Pet. ii. 13.
omtAdw, &, to stain, to contaminate.
omdayxvigoua, dep., with rst aor. pass., éomrayxviadny, to feel come passion, to have pity on (gen., or émi, dat. or acc., once epi, Matt, ix. 36).
120 -VOCABULARY.
omddyxva, wy, td, bowels; the inward parts, ‘‘the heart,” the gentler emotions, Philem. 12. ;
ondyyos, ov, 6, @ sponge.
oodds, ob, ns ashes,
omopd, as, H, seed, 1 Pet. i. 23.
ordpmos, dv, sown, neut. plur.; 7a ondpima, corn-fields, Matt. xii. 1.
amdpos, ov, 6, seed for sowing.
orovdd(w, dow, to hasten, to give dili- gence, to be in earnest (with inf.).
omovdaios, aia, aiov, diligent, forward ; adv., -ws, earnestly: neut. compar., also as adv., 2 Tim. i. 17; -os, Phil. ii. 28.
omovdh, fis, 7, (1) speed, haste; (2) diligence, earnestness.
omupls, fSos, 4, & hand-basket.
orddiov, ov, 7d, plur., orddiot, of, (1) a stadium, the eighth part of a Roman mile, John xi. 18; (2) a race-course or circus, for public games, 1 Cor. ix. 24.
orduvos, ov, 6, 7, an urn, or vase, for the manna, ‘Heb. ix. 4.
ordois, ews, 7 (ictnut), a standing up ; hence, (1) continuance, Heb. ix. 8 ; (2) an uproar, Mark xv. 7; (3) a contention, a violent controversy, Acts xy.-2.
orarhp, épos, mase., a stater, a silver 8 equal to the SlSpaxssoy, which
; Matt. xvii. 27.
a tout ov, 6, a cross; met., often of Christ’s death.
otavpdw, @, bow, to fix to the cross, to crucify; fig., to mortify, destroy, the corrupt nature.
oTapvAn, ns, 7, a grape, a cluster, or bunch of grapes.
ordxus, vos, 6, an ear of corn.
Srdaxus, vos, é, Stachys, Rom. xvi. 9.
oréyn, nS, i, & cover, a flat voof of a house, Mark ii. 4.
aréyw, to cover, to conceal, to bear with, 1 Cor. ix. 12, Xill. 7.
oreipos, a, dv, barren, not bearing children,
oréAdw, to set, in mid., to care or provide ,for, 2 Cor. vill, 20; to withdraw from (ard), 2 Thess. iii, 6.
[omdéyxva—ororxeta
oréupa, aros, Té, a crown, a garland, Acts xiv. 13.
orevaypds, ov, 6, a@ groaning, Acts Vili. 343; an aspiration im silent prayer, Rom. viil. 26.
ma hie tw, to groan, expressing grief,
er (kata), or desire.
sont » h, dv, narrow, Matt. vii. 13; Luke xiii, 24.
orevo-xwpéw, @, in pass., to be straitened, — to be distressed, 2 Cor. iv. 8.
orevo-xwpla, as, 7, Sebi distress or straits, 2 Cor. vi.
orepeds, d, dy, solid, as food, Heb. v. 12; fig., firm, stedfast, 1 Pet. Vv. 9.
otepedw, G, dow, to strengthen, con- jrm, establish, Acts ii. 16, xvi. 5.
oTepewpa, aTos, 76, Jirmness, ‘constancy.
Srepavas, a, 4, Stephanas.
orépayvos, ov, é, a crown, a garland, of royalty, of victory in the games, of festal joy ; often used fig.
Srépavos, ov, 6, Stephen, Acts vi., vii.
otepavdw, &, dow, to crown, to adorn, to decorate.
orhOos, ovs, 76, the breast.
orhkw (lornut, €ornna), to stand in the
attitude of prayer, Mark xi. 25; to stand firmly to, Rom. xiv. 4; to stand fast and strong in, Gal. v. I.
otnprypés, ov, 6, firmness, fixedness,
2 Pet. iii. 17.
ceapibe, tt, or fow, pass., perf., corhprypat, (1) to fix, to set firmly ; (2) to strengthen, confirm, to support.
otlyua, aros, 76, a mark or brand,
al. vi. 17; of the tokens of the
Apostle’s sufferings for Christ.
ortyph, 7s, h, a point of time, an instant, Luke iv. 5.
orlABw, to shine, to glisten, to be re- splendent, Mark ix. 3.
orod, as, h, a colonnade, a portico, a porch,
aroBds, ados, (or oriBds), a bough, a branch of a tree, Mark xi. 8.
oroxeia, ov, Td, elements, of nature, of knowledge, of the "world, Gal, iv. 3, 93 "i. 8, 20.
eroixéo —ovy-Kara-pypite |
oroixéw, &, how, to walk, to behave oneself (according to, by dat.).
oTOAn, 7S, 7, a robe, a long garment, a mark of distinction, Luke xv. 22.
ordua, atos, 76, (1) the mouth, gene. rally ; hence, (2) speech, speaking ; used for testimony, Matt. xviii. 16 ; eloquence, or power im speaking, Luke xxi. 15; (3) applied to an opening in the parched earth, Rev. xil. 16; (4) the edge, or point, e.g., of a sword, Luke xxi. 24.
otduaxos, ov, 6, the stomach, 1 Tim. ¥. 23:
otpareia, as, 7, warfare, military ser- vice; of Christian warfare, 2 Cor. Sas e Time 98.
oTpdreuua, aros, Td, (1) an army; (2) a detachment of troops, Acts Xxili. 10, 27; plur., Luke xxiii. 1.
orparevouat, coum, dep. mid., to wage war, as lusts against the soul, James iv. 1; to serve as a soldier, of Christian work, 2 Tim. li. 4; 1 Tim. i. 18.
orpar-nyds, od, 6 (&yw), (1) a leader of an army ; (2) a magistrate, or ruler, Acts xvi. 20; (3) the captain of the temple, Acts iv. 1.
oTparid, as, H, an army; met., a host,
‘ of angels, Luke ii. 13; the host of heaven, Acts vii. 42.
orpariérys, ov, 6, a soldier, as Matt. viii. 9; fig. of Christian teachers, 1 Fim. ii. 3
orparo-Aoyéw, &, how, to collect, or levy an army, tv enlist troops, 2 Tim. ii, 4.
orparomed-dpxns, ov, 6, the prefect, or commander of the emperor's guards, Acts xxvili. 16,
otpatémedov, ov, 76, an encamped army, a host, Luke xxi. 20.
otpeBAdw, w, to rack, to pervert, to wrest, as words from their proper meaning, 2 Pet. iii, 16..
otpépw, Yw, 2nd aor. pass., eorpddny, to turn, trans. (Matt. v. 39) or intrans. (Acts vii. 42), to change into (eis); pass., to turn one’s self, John xx. 14; to be converted, to be changed in mind and conduct, Matt. XViil. 3.
VOCABULARY,
121
atpnvidw, &, dow, to live voluptuously,) Rev. xviii. 7, 9.
aTpivos, ous, 76, profligate luxury, voluptuousness, revel, rivt.
arpovdioy, tov, 76d (dim, of orpov0ds), a small bird, a sparrow, Matt. x. 29, 31.
OTpwvviw, OF -vVUML, OTPOTw, PASS., perf., €rrpwua, to strew, to make a bed ; pass., to be strewed, or covered, with carpets over the couches,
aruyntés, dv; hateful, odious.
arvyvigw, dow, to become gloomy, or lowering, as the sky, Matt. xvi. 3.
orvaAos, or aTvAos, ov, 6, a pillar, any jirm support, Gal. ii, 9; 1 Tim. lil, 15.
oTwikos, h, dv, stoic, plur., the Stoics, Acts xvii. 18.
ob, gov, col, od, plur., ducts, thou, ye, the pers. pron. of second person (see 53).
ovy-yévera, as, H, kindred, family, Luke i. 61.
ovy-yevns, és, akin, as subst., a kins- man, relative, a fellow-countryman, Rom. ix. 3.
ovy-yvoun, 15, i, permission, leave, 1 Cor. vii. 6.
ouy-Ka0-nuot, to sit down with (dat. or pera, gen.).
auy-Kadlcw, ow, (1) to cause to sit down with, Eph. 1. 6; (2) to sit down with, Luke xxii. 55.
avy-kako-rabéw, @, to suffer evil or affliction jointly (with dat. com- mod., for, 2 Tim. i, 8.
ovy-Kadéw, @, éow, to call together ; mid., to call together to oneself.
ouy-KadvrTw, Ww, to conceal closely, to hide whully, Luke xii. 2.
ovy-kdumtw, vo, to bow down wholly, to oppress, Rom. xi. 10 (LX X.).
ovy-kata-Baivw, to go down with any one, as from Jerusalem to Czesarea, Acts Xxv. 5.
ouy-kaTd-Geois, ews, 7, consent, ment, 2 Cor. vi. 16.
ovy-kata-Tiénu, in mid., to give a vote with, to assent to (dat.), Luke XXiil. 51.
ovy-kata-wnoicw, in pass., to be voted or classed with (uetd), Acts i, 26.
agree-
122
ovy-Kepdvyum, dow, st aor., cuveré- para; pass., perf., ovyKéexpauc ; to mix with, to temper, 1 Cor. xii. 24; pass., to be mixed with, Heb. iv. 2.
avy-Kivéw, &, how, to move together, to put into commotion, Acts vi. 12.
- ouy-KAclw, ow, to inclose, to shut in, as fishes in a net; to give up one to the power of another, to make sub- ject to, Rom. xi. 32; Gal. iii. 22, 22.
auy-KAnpovduos, ov, 6, a joint-heir, i.e., a joint possessor or co-partner, Rom. viii. 17; Heb. xi. 9.
ovy-Kowwvew, &, to be a joint partaker with, Eph. v. 11; Phil. iv. 14.
ovy-kowwvds, od, 6, 7, a partaker with, a co-partner, an associate.
ovy-koul(w, to bear away together, as in burying a corpse, Acts vill. 2.
avy-xplyw, wa, to place together in order to judge of, to compare (acc., dat. ), to estimate, or explain by com- parison, 1 Cor. ii. 13.
auy-Kinmrw, to be bowed together, or bent double, Luke xiii. 11.
ovykupia, as, 7, a coincidence, a con- currence ; kata ovykuplay, by chance, Luke x. 31.
ovy-xaipw, 2nd aor. in pass. form, auvexdpny, to rejoice with, to rejoice together in, 1 Cor. xiii. 6; to con- gratulate, Luke i. 58; Phil. ii. 17, 18 (dat.).
ovy-xéw(F), also cvyxtw and cvyxitve, perf., pass., cvykéxuua, to confound, 2.€., (1) to startle, amaze, Acts ii. 6; (2) to throw into confusion, Acts xix.. 32; (3) to confute in argument, Acts ix. 22.
ovy-xpdoua, @uat, to have fellowship or association with (dat.), John iv. 9.
oty-xvois, ews, 7, confusion, commotion, uproar, Acts xix. 29.
vatin, &, how, to live together with, dat.
ov-Cevyvums, Ist aor., ovvéevta, to con- join (acc.), to unite, as man and wife.
av-(ntéw, &, how, to ask one another, to discuss, dispute, dat., or mpds, acc.
ov-Chrnois, ews, 7, questioning, dispu- tation.
VOCABULARY, [ovy-repdvvypi—ovp-PiBate
ov-(ntnths, od, 6, a disputer, as the Greek sophists, 1 Cor. i. 20.
at-(vyos, ov, 6, 7, a@ yoke-fellow, a coadjutor, Phil. iv. 3; perhaps a proper name, Syzygus.
ov-(wo-roréw, @, St aor., ocuve(wa- moinoa, to make alive with, to quicken together with, Eph. ii. 5; Coloss. ii, 13.
ouKduivos, ov, H, & sycamore-tree.
ovKy, 7s, 7 (contr. from -éa), a fig-tree.
ovKo-uwpala, as, 7 (or -€a), & sycamore- tree.
cixoy, ov, 76, a fig.
ovxo-daytéw, &, how, to accuse falsely, to defraud, Luke iii. 14, xix. 8 (gen. pers., acc. thing).
ovA-aywyéw, @, to plunder, to make a prey of, Col. ii. 8.
avAdw, &, how, to rob, to plunder, 2 Cor. xi. 8.
avA-AaAéw, 1st aor., cuveAdAnoa, to converse with, dat., pera (gen.), mpés (acc. ).
ovA-AauBdvw, ovadrAdboua, ouvelAnda, cuvédaBov, (1) to take together, to catch, to seize; (2) to conceive, as a female ; (3) mid., apprehend (acc.), to help (dat.).
ava-Aéyw, tw, to collect, to gather.
ova-AoylCouct, coum, to reckon to- gether, to deliberate.
ovA-Auméouat, oduat, pass., to be greatly grieved (én, dat.), Mark iii. 5.
cuu-Balyw, -Bhcoua, 2nd aor., cvvéBny; perf., part., 7d cuuBeBnkds ; an event, to happen, to befall, to occur.
ouu-BdAAw, 2nd aor., cuvéBadoy, to put together and compare, Luke ii. 19; Acts xx. 14; to dispute with, Acts xvii. 18 (dat. or mpés, acc.); to come up with, to encounter (dat.); mid., to confer, consult with, Acts iv. 15; to contribute, help to (dat.), Acts XViii. 27.
cup-Bacireiw, ow, to reign with; fig. to enjoy happiness with, 1 Cor, iv. 8.
cupu-BiBd(w, acw, (1) to unite, or knit together, Col. ii, 2, 19; (2) to put together in reasoning, and so, to con- clude, prove, Acts ix. 22; (3) & teach, instruct, 1 Cor, ii. 16,
oup-Bovredo—o-vprpuxos |
ovp-Bovaetw, to advise (dat.); mid., to take counsel together (iva or inf.),
ovu-Bobroy, tov, 7d, (1) mutual con- sultation, united counsel ; (2) a coun- cil, a gathering of counsellors.
oe -Bovaos, ov, 6, a counsellor, Rom.
. 34 (LXX.).
Seeks, 6 (Heb.), Simeon, or Simon (see Sluwv). The apostle Peter is so called, Acts xv. 14; 2 Pet. i. 1; and four others are mentioned, (1) Luke ii. 55 (2) Luke iii. 303 (3) Acts xiii. 3 (4) Rev. vii. 7.
oup- palais, ae , a fellow-disciple.
oup-paptupew, &, to’ bear witness to- gether with, to testify along with.
ovu-pepifw, in mid., to divide with, partake with (dat. ii 2) Co¥siis, 1%.
ouu-péroxos, ov, jointly partaking, Eph. iii. 6, v. 7.
Tvup-wiunThs, ov, 6, a _joint-imitator, a co- follower, Phil. iii 17.
ovp-moppos, ov, conformed to, gen., Rom. viii, 29; dat, Phil. iii, 21.
ovu-poppdw, &, to conform to (dat.), Phil. iii, to.
Cup-wabéw, &, how, to sympathize with, to have compassion on, dat.
ouu-rabhs, és, sympathizing, compas- sionate, 1 Pet. ili, 8.
oup-rapa-ylvoua, to come together (to, el, acc.), Luke xxili. 48; to stand by one, to support (dat. ee 2 Tim iv, .16.
ovpu-Tapa-KaAew, &, in pass., to be com- Sorted together, Rom. i. 12.
oup-mapa-AauBdvew, 2nd aor., ovpumapé- AaBor, to take up with, to take (acc. ) with one’s self, as companion, Acts Xil. 253 Gal. il, 1.
cup-Trapa-uévw, to remain, or continue with, Phil, i. 25.
ouu-mwdp-eyt, to be present with, Acts XXV. 24.
cup-racxw, to suffer together with, Rom. viii. 17.
oup-méumw, to send with, 2 Cor. viii. 18, 22.
oup-mept-AauBdyvw, to comprehend to- gether, to embrace, Acts xx. 10,
VOCABULARY. oy 123
ovp-mlyw, 2nd aor., cvvémoyv, to drink with, Acts x. 41.
oup-rAnpéen, @, to fill, to fill up, to fill fully, Luke viii. 23; pass., to be at hand, to have fully come, Luke ike: $15 ‘Acts ii. Ve
Cwe-nv liye, to choke, as weeds do plants, Mark iv. 7; to throng, to suffocate by crowding, to throng upon (ace.), Luke viii. 42.
oup-rorltns, ov, 6, a fellow-citizen, Eph. ii. 19.
oupu-ropevoua, (1) to accompany, to go go with (dat.), Luke vii. 11; (2) intrans., to come together, to as- semble, Mark x. 1.
oup-méc.ov, ov, Té (rlyw), a table party, a festive company, a feast, Mark Vi. 39.
ovu-mpecBirepos, ov, 6, a fellow-elder, 1.. Pet. v. 1.
oup-pdyw, see cvverbiw.
oup-pepw, 1st aor., cuvnveyKa, to bring together, to collect, Acts xix. 19; lo contribute, to conduce to, to be pro- Jitable to, 2 Cor, xii, 13 1 Cor. X. 23; part., 7d ovpupépor, good, profit, advantage, 1 Cor, vil. 35.
atiu-pnut, to assent to, to express agree- ment with, Rom. vii. 16.
guu-puaérys, ov, 6, one of the same on a fellow-citizen, 1 Thess. ii
ae -ouros, ov, grown together, planted together, conjoined with, Rom. vi. 5.
ouu-ptw, pass., 2nd aor., part., oup- gveis, pass., to grow at the same time, Luke viii. 7.
cup-pavew, & how, to agree with (dat. or petd, gen.), Matt. xviii. 19; Acts xv. 15; to be congruous to, Luke v. 36.
oup-pdvnois, ews, 4, accord, unison, 2 Cor. vi. 15.
cuu-dwvria, as, 7, @ concert, or sym phony, of instruments, music.
otp- “Paves, OY, harmonious, agreeing with ; ék suppadvov, by agreement.
ouu-Inplw, to compute, reckon up, Acts xix. I9.
cim-Voxos, adj., like minded, Phil, ii, 2.
(124
ctv, a prep. gov. dative, with (see 296). In composition, ody denotes association with. The final con- sonant changes to , x, A, or m, or is dropped, according to the initial letter of the word with which it is compounded (see 4, d, 5).
auy-dyw, aéw, (1) to bring together, to assemble ; pass., to be assembled, to come together; (2) to receive hos- pitably, Matt. xxv. 35.
cuvaywyh, fis, 7, an assembly, a con- gregation, synagogue, either the *place, or the people gathered in the place. See Synonyms.
cuv-aywviCouga, couat, to exert oneself with another, to aid (dat.), Rom. XV. 30.
cvy-abréw, &, how, to strive together for (dat. of thing), Phil. i. 27; or with (dat. of pers.), Phil. iv. 3.
ovy-abpoi(w, ow, to gather, or collect together, Acts xix. 25; pass., to throng together, Luke xxiv. 33.
cw-alpw, to reckon together, to take account with, Matt. xviii. 23, 24.
ovy-axudrwros, ov, 6, a fellow-captive,
_ or prisoner, Rom. xvi. 7. _ovy-akohoviéw, &, how, to follow with, to accompany, Luke xxiii. 49.
avy-arAl(w, in pass., to be assembled together with (dat. ), Acts i. 4.
cuv-ava-Balvw, to go up with (dat.), Mark xv. 41; Acts xiii. 31.
ovv-avd-Keiwo, to recline with, as at a meal, to sup with (dat.); part., of cvvavareimevot, the guests, Mark vi. 22,2
avv-ava-ulyvumt, pass., to mingle to- gether with, to keep (dat.), 2 Thess. ili, 14.
ovv-ava-mavoua, coua, to be refreshed together with (dat.), Rom. xv. 32.
cvv-ayTdw, @, how, (1) to meet with, to encounter (dat.), Luke ix. 37; (2) of things, to happen to, to befall, Acts xx. 22.
ouv-dyTnots, ews, H, a meeting with, an encountering, Matt. viii. 34.
cuv-ayti-AauBdyw, mid, to help to- gether with, to assist (dat.), Rom. viii. 26; Luke x. 40.
- VOCABULARY.
cuv-am-dyo, in pass., to be led, or
carried away im mind, Gal.-ii. 13 5 mid., to join oneself to, Rom. xii 16.
auv-aro-OvioKw, to die together with (dat.), Mark xiv. 31; 2 Tim. ii, 11,
ovy-ar-dAAvmt, in mid., to perish with (dat.), Heb. xi. 31.
ovv-amo-cTéA\Aw, to send together (acc. ), 2 Cor. xii. 18.
ovv-apuo-Aoyew, &, in pass., to be joined Jjitly or harmoniously together, Eph. li, 21, iv. 16,
ouy- -apwdteo, ow, to seize, or drag by force (dat.), Luke viii. 29; Acts vi. 12, XXvili, 15.
ovv-avidvw, in mid., to grow together.
ctv-Seruos, ov, as a knot, a band; met., a bond.
ovv-5ée, in pass., to be bound with any one, as fellow-prisoners, Heb. xiii. 3.
ouvr- Bokdtee: dew, in pass., to be glo- rified with (ovv), or together, Rom. vill. 17.
atv-dovdos, ov, 6, a fellow- slave, a fel- low-servant ; of ministers, the fel- low-servants of Christ, a colleague, Col. i. 7.
cuv-dpouh, 7s, 7, a running together, a concourse, Acts xxi. 30.
ouv-eyelpw, «pa, Ist aor., ouriryetpa; pass., ovvnyepOnv ; to raise. together, to raise with.
Suv-edpiov, ov, 76, a council, a tribunal, Matt. x. 17; specially, the Sanhe- drim, the Jewish council of seventy members, presided over by the High Priest ; the council hall, where the Sanhedrim met, Acts iv. 15.
guv-eidov, 2nd aor. of obs., present, to be conscious or aware of, Acts xiv. 6; perf., otvoida, part., ovver- das, to be privy to a design, Acts v. 2; to be conscious to one’s self (dat. ) of guilt (ace. ), 1 Cor. iv. 4.
auv-eldnois, ews, 7, the conscience, Rom. ii 15; 1 Pet. ii. 193 the sentence pronounced by the con-
science, 2 Cor. iv. 2, V. Il.
otv-eju, to be with (dat.).
oiv-et (elu), part., cuvlwy, to go or come with, to assemble,
cvy-e.o-€pX opa—ovv-Tedéo |
ovv-eo-epxouat, to go im, or come iM, with any one (dat.), John xviii. 15; to embark wig J ohn vi. 22.
owy-éx-5nuos, ov, 6, 7, a fellow-traveller, Acts xix. 29 ; 2 Cor. viii. 19.
ouv-exrextés, 4, dv, fellow - elected, 1 Pet. v. 13.
cuv-edadvw, -eAdow, to compel, to per- suade (acc. and cis), Acts vii. 26,
ouv-emt-wapTupec, , to bear joint wit- ness, Heb. ii. 4.
cuv-éroua, to attend, to accompany (dat. ).
ouv-epyéw, &, to co-operate with (dat.), to work together, 1 Cor. xvi. 16; Rom, viii. 28.
avv-epryés, dv, co-working, helping ; a subst., a joint-helper, a co- “worker, gen, of. person, obj. with é¢is, or dat., or (met. ), gen., 2 Cor. i. 24,
avv-epxoua (see 103, 2), to come, or go with, to accompany, to come together, to assemble; used of con- jugal intercourse, to come, or live together.
ovy-ecOiw, 2nd aor., cvvéparyoyv, to eat with, to live in familiar intercourse with (dat., or werd, gen.).
ovv-eors, ews (igus), a putting ligetlier: in mind, hence discernment ; met., the understanding, the source of discernment.
ow-erds, h, dv (inn), intelligent, pru- dent, wise.
ouy-ev-Boxéo, &, to approve together (dat.), to be also willing (inf.), 1 Cor. vil. 12, 13.
ovy-evwxXéw, @, IN pass., to revel with.
cvv-ed-lotnut, to rise together against (kard), to attack, Acts xvi. 22.
ouy-exw, tw, (1) to press together, con- strain; (2) to hold fast, as a pri- soner, fo stop, as the ears, the mouth; (3) to hem in, Luke viii. 453 (4) pass.. to be straitened, or re- pressed, aS by an unaccomplished purpose, to be pained, Luke xii. 50; (5) to be pressed or occupied with a
_ work, Acts xviii. 5.
guy-)doua, to delight in (dat.), Rom. Vil. 22.
to feast with,
- VOCABULARY.
125
guv-hOea, as, 7, a custom, a usage.
ouv-nriKierns, ov, 6, one of the same age, Gal. i, 14.
cwv-ddrtw, yw, 2nd aor., pass., ouve- tdpny, in pass., to be buried with, Rom. vi. 4; Col. ii. 12,
ovy-OAdw, @, fut., pass., ovvOrAacbh- coum, to break, to break in pieces, Matt. xxi. 44; Luke xx. 18.
auy-0AlBw, to throng, to press closely upon, Mark v. 24, 31.
‘ouy-Opinrw, to break down ; fig., with
kapdiay, to take away one’s fortitude, Acts xxi, 13.
ovy-inut, inf., ovviévat, part., cumey or cuvmets; fut., ouvjow; ist aor., ovvnKka; to put together, in mind; hence, to attend to (él, dat.), to consider, understand (acc.), to be aware (8r1), to be wise.
cvvistnu, also cunotdyw and ounordw, to place together, constitute; perf. and 2nd aor., intrans., to stand together ; to commend to esteem and confidence, Rom. xvi. 1; to declare, to show, to make known, 2 Cor. Vi. 4.
avy-odedw, to journey with, to accom- pany (dat.), Acts 1x. 7.
owv-odia, as, 4, a company travelling together, a caravan, Luke il. 44.
TuvoKew, &, how, to dwell together, as in marriage, 1 Pet. iil. 7.
ovy-orko-Souew, in pass., to be built up together, Eph. il, 22.
guv-omAréw, &, to talk with (dat.), Acts 272
owv-onopéw, @, to adjoin (dat.), Acts XVill. Jo
guv-oxh, as, 7, constraint, of mind ; hence, distress, disquiet, Luke xxi. 25.
guy-tdcow, tw, to arrange with, to charge, command, Matt. xxvi. 19, XXVil. 10.
guv-rédeia, as, 7, a finishing, a con- summation, an end.
ouy-Tehéw, @, ow, (1) bo bring to an end, Luke iv. 13; (2) to Sulfil, to accomplish, Rom. ix. 28; Mark xiii. 4; (3) to conclude, ratify, Heb. Vili. 8,
126
cuv-réuvw, to cut short, to bring to swift fulfilment, Rom. ix, 28.
cuv-Tnpew, &, (1) to preserve safely, to guard anxiously from harm, Mark Vi. 20; (2) to lay up in mind, Luke ii. 19.
ovy-tlOnut, in mid., fo set or place to- gether, as in agreement between two or more “para Luke xxii. 5; to assent, Acts xxiv. 9.
ouw-Tduws, ‘adv. , concisely, briefly, Acts XXiv. 4.
cuy-tpéxw, 2nd aor., avvédpauorv, to run together, as a multitude, Mark vi. 33; Acts ili, 11; fig., 1 Pet. iv. 4.
ovy-rpiBw, Ww, 2nd aor. pass., ouve- TplBnv, to break, to break in pieces, by_ crushing, Luke ix. 39; Rom. Xvi. 203 pass., perf., part., ouvre- rpsdvos, bruised, Mait. xii. 20.
TUY-TPIULUa, ATOS, nb, crushing ; fig., destruction, Rom. iii. 16 (LXX.).
avv-tpopos, ov, 6, brought up, or educated with, a comrade, Acts xili. 1,
ow-rvyxdvw, 2nd aor., cvvérvxor, to Salli in with (dat. ), Luke viii. 19.
Suvtvxn, mS, n, Syntyche, Phil. iv. 2.
ovv-vro-Kpivouat, dep., 1st aor., cvvutre- Kptiny, to dissemble, or feign together with, Gal. m2 3.
guy-vr-oupyéw, &, to help together with, 2 Cori, 11.
ow-wdive, to be in pain together, Rom. viii. 22.
gvv-wuogia, as, 7, a conspiracy by oath together, Acts xxii. 13.
Zupdxovca, ay, ai, Syracuse, Acts XXviii. 12,
Zupia, as, n, Syria.
Supos, ov, 6, a Syrian, Luke iv. 27.
Zupo- -polnaca, or Supo-powikiooa, as, m, an appellative, a Syrophenician woman, Mark vii. 26.
Sdpris, ews, acc. w, 7H, a quicksand, the Syrtis major, Acts xxvii. 17.
civw, to draw, to drag.
ov-crapdccw, tw, to convulse violently (ace.), Luke ix. 42.
oic-onpwov, ov, 7d, a concerted signal, a token agreed upon, Mark xiv. 44.
- VOCABULARY.
[ow-riave—edpayts
avo-cwuos, ov, united in the same body, fig., of Jews and Gentiles, in one church, Eph. iii. 6.
ov- et ov, 6, & ” eacarescrind + a0, Mark xv.
ov-orarikds, nt dy, commendatory,
+2 Cor, iii, 1.
av-cravpsw, @, to crucify together with (acc. and dat.); lit., as Matt. xxvii. 44; fig., as Gal. ii. 19.
gv-cTéAAw, (1) to swathe, as a dead body, Acts v. 63 (2) to contract, perf., pass., part., ’ contracted, short, t Cor. vii. 29.
gv-crevitw, to groan together, Rom, Vili. 22.
gv-oToxéw, &, to be correspondent with (dat.), Galiv. 25.
Tv-oTpario7 NS, ov, 6, a fellow-soldier, i.e, in the Christian service, Phil. il. 253 Philemon 2.
ov-aTpepe, yo, to roll or gather together, Acts xxviii. 3.
gv-oTpoph, 7s, 7, a gathering together, a concourse, Acts xix. 40; a gather- ing of conspirators, Acts xxill. 12.
ov-cxnuaTl(w, in pass., to conform. one- self, or to be assimilated to (dat.), Rom. xii. 2; I Pet. i. 14.
Zuxdp or Sixdp, 7, Sychar.
Zuxeu, (1) 4, Shechem, the prince, Acts vii. 16 ; 3 (2) 7, Shechem, the city, Acts vill. 19.
opayh, js, 7, (1) slaughter, Acts viii. 32; Rom. viii. 36 (LXX.); (2) met., a feast, or feasting, James Wi Ss
opay.ov, ov, 76, a slaughtered victim in sacrifice, Acts Vil. 42. :
oodlw, tw, pass., perf., rpaywar; 2nd ie eapary nv ; (1) to kill by violence,
to slay in sacrifice, Rev. v. 6, 93 (2) to wound mortally, Rev. xiii. 3. apdipa, adv., exceedingly, greatly, vehemently, as Matt. ii. 10. opodpas, adv., vehemently, Acts xxvii. 18,
opparyite, tow, to seal, to set a seal upon, (1) for security, Matt. xxvii. 66; (2) for secrecy, Rev. xxii. 10; (3) for designation, Eph. i. 13; or (4) for confirmation, Rom, xv. 28,
oppay’s—radarrwpée |
VOCABULARY.
127
cpowyis, ios, 7, (1) a seal, the instru- , Xérarpos, ov, 6, Sopater, or Sosipater,
ment, Rev. vii. 23 impression, whether for security and secrecy, as . Rev. v. 1; or for designation, Rev.
ix. 4; (3) the motto of a seal, 2 Tim. ii. 19; (4) that which the seal attests, the proof, 1 Cor. ix. 2.
oupdy, ov, 76, the ankle-bone.
rxeddv, adv., “nearly, almost.
TX Apa, ATOS, ‘a6, JSashion, habit ; 1 Cor. Vike <325 form, appearance, Phil. ii. 8. See Synonyms
TxiQw, low, to rend, to divide asunder, '
i.e, rocks, Matt. xxvii. 51; pass., .to be divided into parties, Acts xiv. 4.
oxiopa, aros, To, & rent, aS in a gar- ment, Mark ii. 21; a@ division, a dissension, ‘‘ schism,” 1 Cor. i. 10. See Synonyms.
axowlov, ov, Td (cxoivos, a rush), a cord, a rope, John ll. 15; Aets XXVii. 32.
ocxord(«u, dow, to be at leisure, to be empty. or unoccupied, Matt. xii. 44.
TXOAN, 7s, m (leisure), a school, Acts xix. 9.
cé(w, oéow, perf., céowka; pass., céowowat; Ist aor. pass., eowOny ; (1) to save, from evil or danger, Matt. viii. 25, xvi. 25; (z) to heal, Matt. ix. 21, 22; (3) to save, i.e., from eternal death, 1 Tim. i. 15; ‘part., pass., of ow(uevor, those who are being saved, Acts il. 47, 2.6, who are in the way of salvation.
gaya, aros, 76, a body, i.e., (1) any material body, plants, sun, moon, &e. ; (2) the living body of a man, as 1 Cor. xii. 12, or animal, James iii. 3; the glorified body, the body of CHRIST; céuata, Rev. xviii. 13, _ slaves ; (3) a dead body, a corpse, Acts ix. 40; (4) fig., a community, the church, the mystic body of
Christ, Col. i. 24; (5) met., for the,
entire man, the self, Rom. pa ie (6) substance, opp. to shadow, Col. i, 17.
cwphariKds, h, dv, of or pertaining to the body, 1 Tim. iv. 8; bodily, cor- noreal, Luke ill. 22; adv., -ws, corporeally, Col. ii. 9.
|
Acts xx. 4 (Rom. xvi. 21). gwpedw, ow, to heap up, to load, Bom. | xl. 20; 2 Tim, iii. 16.
Soc0érns, ov, 6, Sosthenes, Acts xviii. 17; 1 Cor. i 1. It is uncertain whether the same person is in- tended in both.
Zwolmatpos, ov, 6, Sosipater or Sopater, Rom. xvi. 21 (Acts Xx. 4).
cwrThp, joos, 6, a deliverer, preserver, a Saviour, specially of CHRIST.
cwrnpla, as, 7, welfare, prosperiiy, deliverance, preservation, from tem- poral evils, Acts xxvii. 34; Heb. xi. 7; Acts vii. 25; 2 Pet. iil, 15; specially salvation, from spiritual and eternal evils, Luke xix. 9.
gwrhpios, or, saving, healthful ; neut., Td owthpior, salvation, Luke iii. 6; Eph. vi. 17
cwppovew, &, ‘how, (1) to be of sound mind, Mark v. 15; (2) to be sober- minded, Rom. xii. 3; Titus ii. 6.
cwpporv.dw, to make sober-minded, to teach, to instruct, Tit. ii. 4.
awppovicuds, ov, 6, soundness of mind, sobriety, 2 Tim. i. WE
cwppdvws, adv., soberly, with prudence, moderation, Titus i li, 12,
cwhpocivn, ns, n, soundness of mind, sobriety, moderation, discretion.
o-ppwv, ov (cdos, oa@s (sound), and gpv), of sound mind, discreet, modest, 1 Tim, iii. 2; Titusi. 2.
T.
T, 7, tad, tau, ft, the nineteenth letter. Asa numeral, 7’ = 300; ,T = 300,000.
taBépva, ay, ai (Lat.), taverns ; Acts XXViil. 15, the three Taverns.
TaBibd, 7 7 (Chald. ), Tabitha, Acts ix. 36.
Tdyma, atos, T0, an order, or series, a re gular me thod, 1 Cor. xv. 23.
TaktTds, 7, oy, appointed, set, xii, 21.
Tadamwpen, @, how, to be distressed, to be in affliction, to be miserabie, James iv. 9.
Acts
PP
128
Tahamwpla, as, 7, affliction, distress, —
misery, Rom, ii. 16,
tadainwpos, ov, distressed, miserable,
TaAravTiaios, ala, aiov, of a talent weight, Rev. xvi. 21,
tddavrov, ov, 6, a talent, of silver or gold. The Jewish talent weighed
. 3,000 shékels, Ex. xxxviii. 25, 26; the shekel being about 4 oz. avoir- dupois.
wanda, 7m (Chald.), a damsel, Mark Vai.)
Toelov, ov, 76, a storehouse, a secret chamber.
taviv, adv. (ra vov, the things that now are), now, or im present cir- cumstances, according to present necessity,
Telus, ews, %, (1) order, regular arrangement, Col. ii, 53 (2) ap- pointed succession, Luke i, 8; (3)
_ rank, Heb. v. 6.
ramewés, h, dv (down-trodden), humble, in condition or in spirit, generally in a good sense.
Tarevo-ppoctyn, ns, %, lowliness of mind, humility, real, as Phil. ii. 3; or affected, as Col. ii. 18.
ranewsw, &, dow, to make or bring low, Luke iii. 5 ; to humble, to lower in esteem, 2 Cor. xii. 21; pass., to be humbled, Luke xviii, 14; to humble one’s self, James iv. 10.
Tamelvwots, ews, 7, humiliation, in cir- cumstances, Luke 1. 48; in spirit, James i. Io.
rapdcow, tw, to agitate, as water in a pool, John v. 4, 7; to stir up, to
- disturb in mind, with fear, grief, anxiety, doubt.
Tapaxn, 7s, 7, a stirring, John v. 4; a commotion, or tumult, Mark xiii. 8,
rdpaxos, ov, 6, a disturbance, Acts xix. 23; consternation, Acts xii. 18.
Tapoets, éws, 6, one of Tarsus,
Tdpoos, ov, n, Tarsus.
Taprapéw, @, dow, to thrust down to Tartarus, the classic name for Hell, 2 Pet. ii. 4.
tdoow, tw, (1) to constitute, arrange ; (2) to determine: mid., to appoint,
VOCABULARY.
[rodaumopta —Tededrns
tavpos, ov, 6, a bull, a bullock.
tavtd, by crasis for ta ard, the same things.
Taph, 7S, } (Odrrw), a burial, a sepul- ture, Matt. xxvii. 7.
tddos, ov, 6, a burial-place, a sepulchre, as Matt. xxiii. 27,
taxa, adv. (quickly), perhaps, Rom. Ws Te
Taxéws, adv. (taxvs), soon, shortly, Gal. 1. 6; hastily, Luke xiv. 21.
taxivds, h, dv, swift, shortly to happen, 2 Pet. i. 14.
taxos, ovs, Té (only in the phrase év Taxet), quickness, speed.
Taxus, ela, v, quick, swift; tax, TaxXLov, TAXLTTA, adverbially, swiftly ; more, most, speedily.
ve, conj. of annexation, and, both (see 403).
Teixos, ous, 76, a wall of a city, Acts 13.26;
Tekuhptoyv, ov, 76, a sign, a certain proof, Acts i. 3.
texviov, ov, 7d (dim. of réxvov), a little child, 1 John ii. 1, 12, 28,
Texvo-ryovew, @, to bear children, to be the mother of a family, 1 Tim. Vv. 14
texvo-yovla, as, 7, child-bearing, 1 Tim. ii. 15. For the interpretation of this difficult passage, see ‘‘ Anno- tated Paragraph Bible.”
téxvov, ov, 7d (rikTw), a child, a descendant; tig., a pupil, a fol- lower, an inhabitant, a partaker of any given character (gen.), worthy of (gen. of punishment).
texvo-tpopéw, @, to bring up children, 1 Tim. v. 10.
TéxTwy, ovos (compare téxvn), an artificer, a carpenter or smith.
TéAcios, ela, eiov perfect, as. (1) complete, in all its parts; (z) Jull grown, of full age; (3) spe- cially of the completeness of. Christian character, mature; adv., -ws, perfectly, to the end, 1 Pet, LRA
Tercdrns, THTOS, h, perfectness, Ohris- tian maturity, Col. iii, 14; Heb. Vi. 1.
s
reada—rO\do]
TeAcidw, @, dow, (1) to complete, to finish, as a course, a race, or the like;. (2) to accomplish, as time, or prediction, Luke ii. 43; John xix. 28; (3) to make complete, to expiate perfectly, Heb. vii. 19; pass., to die, Luke xiii. 32; to reach the perfect state, Phil. in, 12,
TéAelwars, ews, , completion, Fulfilment, Luke i. 45; perfect expiation, Heb. vil. 11.
TeAciwtts, ov, 6, one who makes per- fect, a finisher, Heb. xii. 2; comp. Heb. ii. 10.
TEAEO- popéw, @, to bring to maturity, as grain, Luke viii. 14.
TeAcuTaw, @, to end, to finish, ¢.g., life; so, to die, Matt. ix. 18; to le put to death, Mark vii. ro,
TereuTh, is, 7, end of life, death.
TEARW, @, ETO, rer éncke, TeTEAET MAL, éreAcaOnyv, (1) to end, to finish ; .(2) to fulfil, to accomplish, to go through ; (3) to pay off in full.
7é€Aos, ovs, Tb, (1) an end; (2) an accomplishment. Luke xxii. 373 (3) event or issue, Matt, xxvi. 58; (4) the sum, the principal end, or scope ; (5) an impost or tax, Matt. xvii. 25.
TteAovns, ov, 6, a toll-gatherer, a col- lector of customs, one who farms taxes, a ‘* publican.”
TeAdv.ov, ov, 76, @ toll-house, a col- lector’s © fice.
tépas, atus, 79, plur. only, wonders, portents, with onpeia, signs and wonders, Acts vil. 36; Jobn iv. 48. See Synony. ms.
Téprios, ov, 6 (Lat.), Zertius, Rom. XVi. 22.
TéprvAdus, XXIV. 1.
TETO UpaKoYTA, Sorty.
Tecoopacivta-eThs, és, of forty years, sage or time.
TéeTCapeES, Técoapa, gen., wv, four.
Teccapes-Kat-CéKarus, ord. num, , four- teenth.
Tetaptaios, ala, aiov, of the fourth (day), John xi. 39.
Térapros, n, ov, ord. num., fourth.
TeTpa-ywvos, ov, four-cornered,
ov, 6, Tertullus, Acts
VOCABULARY. 129
tetpddioy, lov, 7d, a quaternion, or guard of four soldiers,
TET pacia-X!AroL, a, a, four thousand,
TETpaKdoLot, at, a, four hundred.
TeTpa-unvos, ov, of four months, i.e., lapse (xpdvos) of that period, J Gin iv. 35.
ee, ots, 4, vdv, fourfold, Luke xix
TeTpd-mous, ovy, odvs, four -footed, Acts X. 125 Rom. i. 23.
TeTp-apxéw, @, to rule over, as & tetrarch (gen.), Luke iii. 1.
TeTp-dpxns, ov, 6, a ruler over a fourth part of a kingdom, a tetrarch, applied to rulers over any part, Luke Xiv. I.
TEevXwW, See TUYXAVM.
Teppdw, &, dow (téppa, ashes), to reduce to ashes, 2 Pet. i. 6.
Téxvn, ns, fn, (1) art, skill; (2) an art, - cr aft, a trade.
texvirns, ov, 6, an artificer, crafis- man, ‘Acts xix. 24; of the Divine . artificer, Heb. xi. 10.
tik, in pass., to be melted, 2 Pet. iii, 13.
tTnr-avy@s, adv. (THA, afar), far- shining, brilliantly, Mark viii. 25.
TyAiKovTLS, av’Tn, ovTO, dem. pron., 80 great.
Tnpéw, @, how, (1) to watch carefully, with good or evil design; (2) to guard ; (3) to keep or reserve; (4) to observe, as enactments or ordi- nances,
Tipnows, ews, 7, (1) a place of ward, a prison, Acts iv. 3; (2) observance, as of precepts, 1 Cor. vii. 19.
Tifep.ds, ddvs, 7, Tiberias, John vi. I, XXi. 1.
T:Bépios, ov, 6, Tiberius, Luke iii. 1.
tienus (see 107), (1) to place, set, put
forth, down, away, aside, &ec.; mid., to cause to put, or to put for one’s self ; (2) to constitute, to make, to render; mid., to assign, deier- mine.
TikTw, Téomat, 2nd aor., Erexcv; 8b aor. pass., é7éxéyv; to bear, te
bring forth, as females, the earth,
tiAAw, to pluck, to pluck off
130
Tipaios, ov, 6, Timeus, Mark x. 46.
Timdw, @, jaw, (1) to estimate, to value at a price, Matt. xxvii. 9; (2) to honour, to reverence.
7™mn, 7s, 7, (1) @ price, value, pre- ciousness, i.e., great value, 1 Pet. li. 7; (2) honour, a state of honour,
m. ix. 21; an honourable office, Heb. v. 4; an honourable use,
. 2 Tim. ii, 20, 21.
tims, ta, wr, of great price, precious,
- honoured
Tiyudtns, THTOS, H, preciousness, costli- ness.
Tiud-Oeos, ov, 6, Timotheus or Timothy.
Tino, wos, Timon, Acts vi. 5.
Tinwpéw, @, to punish (acc.).
Timwpia, as, 7, punishment, retribution,
X. 29.
Tivw, See iD Tiw.
vis, Ti, gen., twos (enclitic), indef. pron., any one (see 352).
is; ri; gen., tivos; an interrogative pron., who? which? what? (see 350).
ritdos, ov, 6 (Lat.), title, superscrip- tion, John xix. 19, 20.
Tiros, ov, 6, Titus. :
tl» or Tivw, tlow, to pay, to honour, ‘to pay justice,-i.e., to suffer punish- ment, 2 Thess. i. 9.
To, an enclit. part., truly, indeed.
TOL-"yap-ovV, consequently, therefore, 1 Thess. iv. 8; Heb. xii. 1.
rol-ye, although (in katrorye).
roi-vuy, indeed now, therefore, Luke Xx. 25; 1 Cor. ix. 26; Heb. xiii. 13; James ii. 24.
Toibo-5e, Todde, To1dySe, demonst. pron., of this kind, such, 2 Pet. i. 17.
ToLWWUTOS, ToOLA’TH, Tolo’To, demonst. pron., (1) such as, sometimes with ofos precedent, 1 Cor. xv. 48; as. such as, (2) such, i.e., 80 great, in a good sense, 2 Cor. xii. 2, 35 53 in a bad sense, Acts xxii. 22. With art., see 240.
Toixos, ov, 6, a wall, of a house, Acts xxii, 3; disting. from retxos, a wall of a city.
réxos, ov, 6 (a bringing forth), interest, usury, Matt. xxv. 27.
VOCABULARY.
[Tipatos—rpets
ToAudw, @, how, (1) to dare, to venture (inf.); (2) to have courage.
ToAunpérepov (comp. of ToAunpas, adv., boldly), the more boldly, Rom. XV. 15.
ToAunThs, ov, 6, a daring one, one over
‘ bold, audacious, or presumptuous, 2 Pet. ii. 10.
touds, 4, dv, in comp., Tou“mrepos, sharper, keener, Heb. iv. 12.
té~ov, ov, 76, a bow, Rev. vi. 2. >
cowdCion, iov, 76, topaz, Rev. Xxi. 20.
témos, ov, 6, (1) a place, i.e., a district, or region, or a particular spot in a region ; (2) the place one occupies, the room, an abode, a seat, a sheath Jor a sword; (3) @ passage in a book; (4) state, condition; (5) oppor- tunity, possibility.
TovovUTos, Toga’Tn, ToovovTo, demonst. pron., so great, so much, so long ; plu., so many.
Téte, demonst. adv., then.
tovvaytiov, for 7d évayriov, on the con- trary, Gal, ii. 7.
tovvoua, for 7d bvopa, by name, Matt. XXVIL 57.
tovtégtt, for Tovr’ that is; “*7.¢.,” Acts i. 19.
tovtTo, neut. of otros, which see.
tpayos, ov, 6, a he-goat.
tpdmre (a, ns, 7, a table (1) for food and banqueting ; (2) for money-changers, or business.
tpame(irns, ov, 6, a money-changer, a banker, Matt. xxv. 27.
Tpaipa, atos, T6, a wound.
TpavuartiCo, lorw, to wound, Luke xx. 12; Acts xix, 16,
tpaxnardifw, fow, in pass., to be laid bare, to be laid open, Heb. iv. 13.
TPaXNAOS, at é, the neck, as Luke XV. 203 » Jor life, Rom, xvi. 14.
Tpaxys, eia, v, Tough, uneven, as ways, Luke iii. 5; as rocks in the sea, Acts xxvii. 29.
Tpaxwviris, 150s, 4, T'rachonitis, the N.E. of the territory beyond Jordan.
tpeis, tpla, three,
zor,
Tpéuwo—T pos]
tpéuw, to tremble, to be afraid.
Tpépw, Opéww, perf., pass., TéPpaumat, to feed, to nourish, to sustain, Matt. vi. 26; to pamper, James v. 5.
Tpéxw, 2nd aor., edpauoy, (1) to run, in a race, 1 Cor. ix. 24; (2) to run, making an effort, Rom. ix. 16; (3) to run, or spread, aS a rumour, 2 Thess. iii. 1.
tpidkovra, indecl., thirty.
Tpia-Kéctot, at, a, three hundred.
tpiBodos, ov, 6, a triple-thorned shrub, a thistle, Matt. vii. 16.
tpiBos, ov, h, a path worn, a road, a beaten way.
Tpi-etla, as, 7, @ space of three years, Acts xx. 31. tpl(w, to grate, to gnash, as the teeth,
in severe pain, Mark ix. 18. tpi-unvos, ov, three months, neut. as subst., Heb. xi. 23.
tpls, num. adv., thrice.
Tpi-oreyos, ov, having three floors, neut., the third floor or story, Acts RX:;9.
Tpi-xtALo1, at, a, three thousand.
tpiros, n, ov, ord. num., third; neut., 7) ‘pitov, the third part, Rev. viii. 7; the third time, Mark xiv. 41.
tpixes, plur. of 6pit, which see. tpixwos, n, ov, made of hair, Rev. vi. 12.
tpduos, ov, 46, a trembling, e.g., from fear; se/f-distrust, Phil. ii. 12.
tpowh, hs, n, a turning, a change.
tpdmos, ov, 6, (1) manner; bv tpédror, as, Matt. xxiii. 37, &c.; (2) course of life, disposition, Heb. xii. 5.
Tpoto-popéw, &, how, to bear with the disposition or character of others, Acts xiii, 18, where perhaps the true reading is érpopopdpnoer, he bare them as a nurse.
tpoph, ns, n, food, nourishment, main- tenance.
Tpdpimos, ov, 6, Trophimus.
tpopds, ov, h, a nurse, 1 Thess. ii. 7.
Tpoxid, as, h, the track of a wheel, a path, fig., Heb. xi. 13.
tpoxds, ov, 6, a track of a wheel, a circle, a course, James ili. 6,
tpuBruov, tov, 76, a dish, a platter.
VOCABULARY,
131
Tpuydw, @, how, to gather, as in the 3 seta Luke vi. 44; Rev. xiv. 18, 19.
tpuyav, dvos, 7 (TpvGw), a turtle-dove.
Tpuuadid, as, 4, the eye of a needle, Mark x. 25.
tpimnua, atos, 76, a hole, the eye of a needle, Matt. xix. 24.
Tpipava, ns, 4, T'ryphena, Rom. XVi. 12.
tpupiw, @, how, to live luxuriously, to take one’s fill of pleasure, James Vv. 5.
Tpypaca, ns, 7%, Xvi. 12.
Tpwds, ddos, 7, T'roas, a city of Mysia, properly Alexandria Troas.
TpwytAdov, ov, 76, T'rogyllium, Acts D © SB
tpéyw, to eat, Matt. xxiv. 38 ( feasting and revelling).
Tuyxavw (Tvx- or Tevx-), fut., revtouen ; 2nd aor., @ruyov; perf., réruxa; (1) to attain, to get possession of (gen.), Luke xx. 35; Acts xxiv. 3; (z) to fall out, to happen, to happen to be, Luke x. 30; e téxo1, if at may be so, perchance, 1 Cor. xiv. 10; 2nd aor. part., tuxév, ordinary, commonplace, Acts xix. 11; neut,, tuxdv, what may be, perhaps, 1 Cor. Xvi. 6.
tuumaviCw, tow, to beat or scourge to death when stretched on a wheel, Heb. xi. 35.
Timos, ov, 6, (1) a mark, an impression, produced by a blow; (2) the figure of a thing, a pattern, ‘‘type;’ (3) an emblem, an example; (4) the form or contents of a letter; (5) a rule, a form of doctrine.
Ttimtw, Ww, to beat, to strike, as the breast in grief, Luke xviii. 13; to inflict punishment, Acts xxiil. 3; to wound or offend the conscience, 1 Cor. viii. 12.
Tipavvos, ov, 4, XIX. 9.
TupBa tw, to agitate, or,disturb in mind, Luke x. 41.
Tipios, ov, of Tyre, Tyrian.
Tupos, ov, 4, T'yre, a city of Phenicia.
Tryphosa, Rom,
Tyrannus, Acts
132
tuprds, h, 6v, blind, (1) physically, (2) mentally, 7.¢., ignorant, stupid, dull of "apprehension.
Tuprsw, @, dow, fig., to make blind, or dull of apprehension, John xii. 40 ; 2 Cor. iv. 4.
tuddw, @, éow, to raise a smoke ; pass., fig., to be proud, to be arrogant and conceited, 1 Tim. iii, 6.
Tip, in pass., part., smoking, dimly
burning, Matt. Xil. 20,
tudwvikds, h, dv, violent, tempestuous, like a whirlwind, Acts xxvii. 14.
Tixixos, ov, 6 (or Tuxinds), Tychi- chus.
ruxdév, see TUYXdVe.
ee
YT, v, dViAov, upsilon, u, the twentieth letter. As a numeral, v’ = 400; v= 4co,0c0c0, At the commence- ment of a word, v is always aspirated.
taxlyOivos, n, ov, ** hyacinthine,” of the
colour of the hyacinth, dark purple, Rev. ix. 17.
bdicwwOos, ov, 6, ‘hyacinth,” a purple gem, ‘‘jacinth,” Rev. xxi. 20,
bddwos, 7, ov, glussy, transparent, Rey. iv. 6,
Baros, ov, 7, a pellucid stone, like glass, crystal, Rev. xxi. 21.
bBpifw, ow, to treat with insolence or contumely, to abuse.
UBpis, ews, 7, (1) insolence, jcimaniietes 2 Cor. xii, 10; (2) damage, loss, Acts xxvii. 10.
bBpiorhs, ov, 6, an insolent, injurious man.
byiaivw, to be well, to be in health, Luke v. 31; fig., to be sound, in ({év) faith, doctrine, &c., Tit. i. 13; part., Sy.alvcoy, healthful, wholesome, of instruction, 1 Tim. i. 10,
iychs, és, (1) sound, whole, in health ; (2) fig., wholesome,’ of teaching, Tit. ik 8.
iypés, d, dv, moist, of a tree; green, i.€., full of sap, Luke xxiii. 31.
Sdpla, as, }, & water-pot, John ii. 6,
VOCABULARY.
[rupAds—Srr-avSpos
b8po-mroréw, &, to be a water-drinker, 1 Tim. v. 23.
ddpwrixds, 4, dv, dropsical, Luke xiv. 2,
dwp, bdaros, 7d, water; Fdara, waters, streams, also a body of water, as Matt. xiv. 28; Sdwp (av, living or running water ; fig., of spiritual . truth, John iv. 14.
beréds, ov, 6 (5, to rain), rain.
vio-Gegia, as, , adoption, sonship, in the Divine family here and here- after, Rom. ix. 4, viii. 15, 23.
vids, ov, 6, @ son, a child, Matt. _Xvii. 25; @ descendant; the offspring or young of an animal, ’ Matt. Xxi. 53 an adopted son, Heb. xi. 245 a disciple or follower, Matt. xii. 27 3 one who resembles (gen.), Matt. v.45; one who partakes of any quality or character, Luke x. 6; Jobn xii. 36; 6 vids rov avpdmov, Son of man (once only without art., John v. 27) very often used by our Lord of bimself (only once by another of him, Acts vii. 56); in reference to Dan. vii. 13 (sons of men denote men generally in Mark iii, 28; Eph. iii. §, only). For vids Ge08, Son of God, see 217, c.
vAn, ns, 7, wood, fuel, James iii. 5.
duets, plur. of ov, which see.
“Yuevaios, ov, 6, Hymenceus.
buérepos, possess. pron., your, as be- longing to, or as proceeding from.
iuvéw, @, how, (1) to sing, or recite hymns to, acc.; (2) to sing prawe.
tuvos, ov, 6, a hymn, a sacred song.
in-dyw, to go away, to take oneself away ; imperat., sometimes an ex- pression of aversion, begone, Matt. iv. 10; sometimes a farewell ouly, Matt. viii. 13, 32; to die, Matt. XXVi. 24.
trr- “acon, fis, 7, obedience, Rom. vi. 16.
br-axotw, ow, (1) to listen, as at a door, to tind who seeks admission, Acts xii. 13; (2) to hearken to, so as to obey (dat.).
tr-avdpos, ov, under @ husband, married, Rom. vii. 2.
in-avrde—ind]
br-ayrdeo, a, how, to meet (dat.).
tm-dvT nots, ses; h, &@ meeiing, John xii. 13.
brapiis, ews, H, goods, substance, pro- perty, Acts ii. 45; Heb. x. 34.
br-dexw, (1) to subsist; (2) to be originally ; (3) to be, Luke viii. 41; with dat. of pers., to have, to pos- sess; part., neut., pl., ra brdpxovta, things which one, possesses, goods, property, Matt. xix. 21.
tr-cixw, to yield, to submit to autho- rity.
im-evaytios, la, lov, opposite to, adverse, Col. ii. 14; as subst., an adversary, Heb. x. 27.
imép. prep., gov. gen. and accus. With gen., over, for, on behalf of ; with accus., above, superior to (see 803). Adverbially, above, more, 2 Cor. xi. 23. In composition, trep denotes superiority (above), or aid (on behalf of).
brep-aipw, in mid., to lift up oneself, to exalt oneself, to be arrogant, 2 Cor. xil. 7; 2 Thess. ii. 4.
brép-aKuos, ov, past the acme or flower of life, 1 Cor, vii. 36.
brep-dvw, ady. (gen.), above.
brep-avidvw, to increase exceedingly, 2 Thess, i. 3.
trep-Baivw, to go beyond, to over-reach, 1 ‘hess. iv. 6.
brep-BadAdvtws, adv., greatly beyond measure, 2 Cor. Xi. 23.
bmep-BdAAw, part., pres., drepBdAAwy, surpassing, super-eminent.
brep-Borh, 7s, 7H, excess, exuberance, surpassing excellence, pre-eminence ; Ka? tmeoBoAjy, as adv., exceedingly, Rom. vii. 13; 2 Cor. i. 8.
tep-eldov (see eldov), to overlook, to ~
wink at, to bear with, Acts xvii. 30.
bmep-éxewva, adv., beyond, farther, 2 Cor. x. 16.
iwep-ex-mepiogov, adv., beyond. all measure, in the highest possible degree, Eph, iii. 20.
imep-cx-relvw, to stretch out overmuch, 2 Cor. X. 14.
* Sarep-ex-xivoua, to be poured out over,
to overflow, Luke vi. 38.
VOCABULARY.
133
imep-ev-rvyxdvew, to intercede for Rom, Vili, 26,
brep-eéxw, to excel, to surpass (gen. ), to be supreme, 1 Pet. ii. 135 part., To bmepéxov, excellency, super- eminence, Phil. in 8.
birep- npavia, as, , pride, arrogance, Mark vii. 22.
brep-fpavos, ov (palyw, n connective), arrogant, haughty, James iv. 6.
bmep-Aiay, adv., very much, pre- eminently, 2 Cor. xi. 5, Xii. II.
brep-vindw, @, to be more than con- queror, Rom, viii. 37.
tmép-oyxos, tumid, ssi ie as lan- guage, 2 Pet. ii. 18.
imep-oxn, 7S, 7, eminence, superiority, authority, 1 Cor. ii. 1; 1 Tim. ii. 2,
brep-repioceiw, to superabound ; Rom. v. 20; pass., to be very abundant in (dat.), 2 Cor. vil. 4.
brep-mepicoas, adv., superabundantly, above measure, Mark vii. 37.
dmep-wAcovalw, to superabound, 1 Tim, i’ 14.
brep-uipdw, &, to highly exalt, to place in dignity and authority over all, Phil. ii. 9.
irep-ppovéw, &, to think over-highly of oneself, Kom. xii, 3.
brepgpov, ov, 76, the upper part of a house, an upper chamber, Acts 1 43.
br-éxw, to submit to, to undergo (acc.).
bm-hkoos, ov, listening to, obedient to (dat.), submissive.
bw-npetéw, &, to minister to, to serve (dat.).
bm-npéTns, ov, 6 (épérns, a rower), a
servant, attendant, specially (1) an officer, a lictor ; (2) an attendunt in a synagogue; (3) a minisier of the Gospel.
tmvos, ov, 6, sleep; fig., spiritual sleep, or slothfulness.
ind, prep., gov. gen. and accus., under. With gen., by, generally. signifying the agent; with accus., under, beneath, of place, of time, or of subjection to authority (see 804). In composition, bré denotes subjection, diminution, secrecy.
134
iro-BddAAw, to put under, to suborn.
bro-ypaupds, ov, 6, a pattern, an
example, 1 Pet. il. 21.
ird-Seryua, aros, 7d, (1) an example for imitation, or for warning ; (2) a typical representation, Heb. viii. 5, ix. 23.
ore Peers, to show plainly, as by placing under the eyes, to teach (dat. ).
bro-5éxoua, to receive as a guest, to entertain (acc. ).
bro-5éw, @, How, in mid., to bind on one’s sandals, Eph. vi. 15: ‘* san- dalled as to the feet.”
ird-dnua, aros, 76, a sandal.
td-dixos, ov, convicted, pronounced guilty, lit., ‘‘under penalty to” (dat. ), Rom. iii, 19.
iro-Giyiov, ov, 76, an animal under yoke, an ass.
brro-Cavvums, to undergird, as a ship for strength against the waves, Acts xxvil. 17.
bro-Kdtw, adv., underneath (as prep. with gen. ).
bro-xplvouat, dep., to act under a aoe to personate, to pretend (acc., inf,).
iné-xpiois, ews, 7, ‘‘stage playing,” hypocrisy, dissembling, 1 ‘Tim, iv. 2.
bro-xpiths, ov, 6 (**a stage player”’), a hypocrite, a dissembler, Matt. EV 9s -
tro-AaquBdyw, 2nd aor., iméAaBov, (1) to take up, to receive up, Actsi. 9; (2) to take up a discourse, to answer ; (3) to think, to judge, to suppose, Luke vii. 43.
brro-Aelrw, in pass., to be left behind, Rom. xi. 3.
iro-Atviov, ov, 7d (Anvds), the cavity forming the wine-vat, Mark xii. 1.
iro-Awmrdvew, to leave, to leave behind, t Pet. ii. 21.
iro-uévw, (1) to bear up under, to endure (ace.); (2) to persevere, to remain constant, Matt. x. 22; (3) to remain, or stay behind, Luke il. 43.
VOCABULARY.
[ brro-BaAXw—b1ro-xwpéw
bro-uivhoKw, Srouvhoew, rst aor. pass., breuvioeny, to remind (acc. of pers.), John xiv. 26; pass., to call to mind, to remember, Luke Xxil, 61.
imd-uynois, ews, h, (1) remembrance, recollection, 2 Tim. i. 5; (2) a putting in mind, 2 Pet. i. 13.
bro-uovn, 7s, 7, a bearing up under, endurance, perseverance, patient wating for (gen.).
bro-voéw, @, to conjecture, to suspect, Acts xxv. 18.
imé-vo.w, as, ), suspicion, 1 Tim. vi. 4.
imo-rAéw (F), 1st aor., dwérAevoa, to sail_ under shelter of (acc.), Acts XXVii. 4, 7.
bmro-mvéw (F), 1st aor., drémvevoa, to blow gently, of the wind, Acts XXVii. 13.
bro-mddi0v, ov, 74, & t footstool.
imé-oracis, ews, H, (1) @ basis or foundation ; (2) firm confidence, assured expectation, Heb. xi. 1; (3) Heheae reality, essential nature, Heb. i
btro- priicae €AG, 1st aor., dréoreAa, to éraw back, Gal. ii. 12; mid., to shrink, to draw one’s self back, Heb. x. 38 (from, by tod wh, with inf., Acts xx. 27).
bro-oTOAh, Hs, 7, a shrinking, a draw- ing back, Heb. x. 39.
bro-o7Tpépw, Yw, to turn back, to return, intrans.
bro-orpévyuput, or -wrviw, to strew under, Luke xix. 36.
bro-rayh, is, i, subjection, submission,
oaths <5
bro-rdoow, tw, 2nd aor. pass., dre- taynv, to place under, to subject ; mid., to submit oneself, to be obedient.
bro-Tidnus, to set or put under; mid., to suggest, to counsel, to advise.
bwo-rpéxw, 2nd aor., bré5pauor, to run under lee or shelter of, Acts xxvii. 16.
bro-rimwois, ews, 7, pattern, example, 1 Tim. i. 16; 2 Tim. i, 13.
io-pépw, ist aor., brhveyxa, to bear up under, to sustain, to endure.
iro-xwpew, &, how, to withdraw quietly, to retire, Luke ix. 10,
tm-wmdlo—Papés |
iw-wmid(w, to strike under the eye; hence, (1) to subject to hardship, 1 Cor. ix. 27; (2) to weary out, by repeated application, Luke xviil. 5.
is, tds, 6, n, a@ hog, boar, or sow, 2 Pet. ii. 22.
Boowros, ov, 7. hyssop, a stalk or stem of hyssop, John xix. 29; @ bunch of hyssop Jor sprinkling, Heb. ix. 19.
iorepéw, @, how, to be behind, to fall short, John li. 3; to come short of, gen., Rom. iii. 23; to fail of attain- mg (and), to be inferior to (gen.), 1 Cor. viii. 8; pass., to suffer need,
~ Luke xv. 14.
torépnua, waros, 74, (1) that which is lacking, or wanting to (gen.), Col.
i. 24; 1 Thess. ili, 10; (2) need, poverty.
borépnois, ews, %, poverty, penury, Mark xii. 44.
barepos, a, ov, compar., latter, 1 Tim. 15.85 neut, as an adv., last, after- wards, with gen., Matt. xxii, 273 Luke xx. 32.
ipaytés, fh, dv (dpatve, woven, John xix, 23.
bynrds, fh, dv, (1) high, elevated: (2) distinguished, _pre- -eminent.
itnro-ppovéw, @, to be high-minded, proud, assuming, Rom. «Oe 1 Tim. vi. 17.
toros, n, ov (superlat. of by, highly), highest, most elevated ; neut., plur., the highest places, the heights, i.e., the-heavens; 6 tyoros, the Most High, i.e., God, as dwelling in the heavens.
Syos, ous, 7d, height, opp. ‘to Bdéos, Eph. ui. 18; e& tous, from on high, ‘.e., from God. So és ios, to God, Eph. iv. 8; fig., elevation, dignity, James i, 9.
indw, @, dow, (1) to raise on high, to elevate, as the brazen serpent, and Jesus on the cross; (2) to exalt, to set on high, Acts ii. 33; (3) fo elevate, i.e., to raise from a lowly to a dignified condition ; (4) to exalt in estimation, Matt. xxiii. 12.
thpwua, atos, 76, height, Rom. viii. 39 ; citadel, fig., 2 Cor. x. 5. .
to weave),
VOCABULARY.
=
135
®, &, ¢, gi, phi, ph, the twenty-first
letter, As a numeral, ¢’ = 500; ) = 500, 000. gdyos, ov, 6, a glutton, Matt. xi,
19.
gdyw, see écblw.
pairdyns, ov, 6 (or pedovns), a cloak, or perhaps @ portmanteau, or case Jor books, &c., 2 Tim. iv. 13. (Lat., penula, » and v interchanged. )
galyw, gave, 2nd aor., pass., épdyny, to shine, to give light, 2 Pet. i. 19; pass., to be conspicuous, to appear, to seem to be thought; ra palvoucva, things seen, “* phenomena,” Heb. xl. 3; mid., lo appear in judgment, 1 Pet iv. 18.
éaréx, 6 (Heb.), Phaleg, Luke iii.
35.
gavepds, d, dv, apparent, manifest ; év To pavepg, as adv., manifestly, Matt. vi. 4, 6; externally, out- wardly, Rom. ii. 28. Adv., -ws, . clearly, Acts x. 3; publicly, Mark i. 45.
pavepdw, &, dow, to make apparent, to manifest, to disclose ; pass., to be manifested, made manifest, 1 Tim. lil, 16; 2 Cor. v. 11.
pavépwors, ews, 7, &@ manifestation (gen. obj.), 2 Cor. iv. 2; 1 Cor. iti 7,
pavds, ov, 5, a torch, a lantern, John Xviii. 3.
favovhaA, 6 (Heb.), li. 36,
paytdtw, to cause to appear; pass., part., 7d pavra¢duevor, the spectacle, Heb. xii. 21.
gpavtacia, as, i, show, pomp, Acts XXV. 23.
gdvtacua, atos, Td, a phantom, an apparition, Matt. xiv. 26; Mark Vi. 49.
odpayé, ayyos, 7, a valley, dell, or gorge, Luke iii. 5.
éapae, 6, Pharaoh, the title of ancient Egyptian kings.
fapés, 6 (Heb.), Phares, Matt. 1 35 Luke iii. 33.
Phanuel, Luke
136
gapioaios, ov, 6 (from the Heb. verb, to separate), a pharisee, one of the Jewish sect sO called.
papuakeia, as, h, magic, art, sorcery, enchantment, Gal. v. 20.
gapuareds, ews, 6, a magician, sorcerer, enchanter, Rev. xxi. 8.
gappards, ov, 6, 7, as hapuaxedts, Rev.
paois, ews, 7, report, information,
gdonw (freq. of nut), to assert, to affirm, to boast, Rom. i. 22.
paryn, 25, n, @ manger, a crib, Luke ii. 7; a stable, Luke xiii. 15.
. patdros, n, ov, vile, wicked, base, opp.
_ to ayalds.
péeyvyos, ovs, 76, brightness, splende.r, of the light of the moon, Mark xiii, 24; of a lamp, Luke xi.
1 BBs
eidouat, efooum, dep., (1) fo spare (gen.), Acts xx. 29; (2) to forbear (inf.), 2 Cor. xii. 6.
pedoucvws, adv., sparingly, parsi- moni -usly, 2 Cor. ix. 6.
Pépw, olow, Hvevra, hvexOnv (see 108), to bear, as (1) to produce fruit; (2) to carry, as a burden; (3) to bring; (4) to endure, to bear with, Rom. ix. 22; (5) to bring forward, as charges, John xviii. 29; (6) to uphold, Heb. i. 33; (7) mid., to rush (bear itself on), Acts ii, 2; ; to go on or advance, in learning, Heb. vi. 1.
pevyw, touat, Epvyor, to fice, to escape,
to shun (acc. or amd).
Sark, ucos, 6, Felix.
hun, ns, 7, & rumour, fame, Matt. ix. 26; Luke iv. 14.
nut, impf. 7 epny (for other tenses, see elmov, épew), to say, with on, dat. of pers., mpds (acc.), with pers., ace. of thing (once acc., inf., Rom. lii. 8).
Sjoros, ov, 6, Festus.
pidve, odor, perf., &p0axa, (1) to be before, to precede, 1 Thess, iv. 15; to come sooner than expected, Matt. xii. 28; (2) to arrive, attain (eis,
&xpt).
VOCABULARY.
[papicatos—rrla
poaptés, h, dv (pOelpw), corruptible, perishable, 1 Cor. xv. 53, 54.
pbéyyoua, ytouau, dep., to speak ene, to utter, Acts iv. 18.
Plelpw, Pepa, 2nd aor. pass., eoadony, to corrupt, physically or morally, to spoil, to destroy.
~O.vo-rwpivds, decaying, as fruit and leaves in autumn, Jude 12.
Podyyos, ov, 6 (Pbeyyoua), a sound, as of a musical instrument, 1 Cor, xiv. 7; the voice, Rom. x. 18.
PGovew, &, how, to envy (dat.), Gal. v. 26,
pOdvos, ov, 6, envy.
plopd, as, % (pelpw), corruption, destruction, physical or spiritual, 2 Petti..34, >
idan, ns, 7, @ bowl, a basin (not ** phial”), Rev., often.
gua- Eeuben: ov, loving goodness, or good men, Titus i. 8.
ir-adargeua, as, %, Philadelphia, Rev. esi
pir-adergla, as, 4, brotherly love, love of Christian brethren.
pir-ddeAgpos, ov, 6, %, loving one’s brethren, loving Christians.
piA-avipos, ov, 7, loving one’s hus- band. §
pir-avipwria, as, }, love of man, bene- volence, ‘* philanthropy.” gir-avOparws, adv., humanely, kindly. pir-apyvpia, as, 7, love of money, covetousness, 1 Tim, vi. 10. pir-dpyupos, ov, money-loving, covetous. plr-avros, ov, self-loving, selfish.
piréw, @, how, (1) to love; (2) to be accustomed to do, Matt. vi. 5; (3) to kiss, Matt. xxvi. 48. See Synonyms.
pian, ns, 7, a female friend (see gidros), Luke xv. 9.
gid-jdovos, ov, pleasure-loving; as subst., 2 Tim. iii. 4.
planua, aros, 76, a kiss, Luke vii. 45; Rom. xvi: 16, &e.
birnuwy, ovos, 6, Philemon.
bidntos (or PiAnrés), Philetus, 2 Tim. » ii. 17.
pirla, as, %, friendship, love, James iv. 4 (gen, obj.).
Pidvrhoios—ppayAdrov]
fiurmiows, ov, 6, a Philippian, Phil. lv. 15.
Gidirro, wy, of, Philippi.
&iAurmos, ov, é, Philip. Four of the name are mentioned : (1) John i. 44-47; (2) Acts vi. 5; (3) Luke lil, 1; (4) Matt. xiv. 3.
piAd-deos, ov, 6, 7, a lover of God, 2 Tim. iii. 4.
$:Ad-Aoyos, ov, 6, Philologus, Rom. XVi. 15.
piro-vexta, as, 7, love of dispute, con- tention, strife, Luke xxii. 24.
¢Ad-veikos, ov, strife-loving, contentious, 1 Cor. xi. 16,
pidro-tevia, as, strangers, xiii. 2.
giad-tevos,, ov, 6, hospitable, 1 Tim. iil. 2.
gido-mpwteiw, to love the first place, to affect pre-eminence, 3 John 9.
giros, 1, ov, loving, or dear; in et ae subst., a friend, a loved companion, or associate (gen. or dat.).
piro-copia, as, 4, philosophy, in N.T. of the Jewish traditional theology, Col. ii. 8.
pird- -gopos, ov, 6 (prop. adj.), wisdom- loving, in N.T. of Greek philoso- phers, Acts xvii. 18.
ptad-oropyos, ov, tenderly loving, kindly affectionate to (eis), Rom, xii. 10.
giad-texvos, ov, child-loving, affec- tionate, as a parent,
prro-rrpeopian, ovuat, dep., to make a thing one’s ambition, to desire very strongly (inf.), Rom. xv. 20; 2 Cor. v. 9; 1 Thess. iv. 11. :
piro-ppdves, adv., in a friendly or hospitable manner, Acts xxviii. 7.
pid-ppwy,. ov, friendly-minded, hos- pitable, 1 Pet. iti. 8.
pydw, @, dow, to muzzle, 1 Cor. ix. 9; to reduce to silence, Matt. xxii. 34; pass., to be silent, Matt. xxii. 12 ; of a storm, Mark iv. 39.
Sréywv, ovos, 6, Phlegon, Rom. xvi.
hn, hospitality, love of Rom. xii. 133; Heb.
14. paroyitw, to inflame, to fire with pas- sion, James iii, 6,
VOCABULARY.
137
pardé, taxied n, a flame, Luke xvi.
24. gavapéw, &, to prate, to talk idly against any one (ace.), 3 John 10. garvapos, ov, prating; as subst., an idle talker, 1 Tim. v. 13.
poBepés, d, dv, fearful, dreadful.
anys &, how, in N.T. only passive, to be afraid, to be terrified, some- times with cognate acc., Mark iv. 41; to fear (acc.), Matt. x. ani to reverence, Mark vi. 20; met., aiid piety towards (ace. ) Lake
50.
edonrnd ov, 76, a terrible sight, a portent, Luke xxi. 11.
¢éBos, ov, 6, (1) fear, terror, alarm, Matt. xiv. 26; (2) the object, or cause of fear, "Rom. xiii, 353 (3) reverence, awe, respect; (4) met. for piety, Kom. iii, 18; 1 Pet, i, 17.
SoiBn, ns, 7, Phebe, Rom. xvi. 1.
Sowlkn, ns, n, Phenice, or Phenicia.
point, ucos, 6, a palm-tree, a palm branch, J ohn xii. 13; Rev. vii. 9.
wei: kos, }, & prop. name, Phenice,
a city of Crete, Acts xxvii. 12.
govets, ews, 6, a murderer, a man- slayer.
govedw, ow, to murder, to kill.
pévos, ov, 6, murder, bloodthirstiness.
popéw, @, éow, to bear about, to wear, Rom. xiii. 4; John xix. 5.
pédpov, ov, 7d, (Latin), the forum (see “Amm10S), Acts XXVlii. 15.
pédpos, ov, 5 (pépw), a tax, on persons, distinguished from réAos, w tax on merchandize.
poprice, pass., perf., part., meopric- peévos, to load, to burden, to afflict.
popttov, ov, 7d, a burden, as (1) the freight, or lading of a ship; (2) the burden of ceremonial observances, Luke xi. 46; (3) the burden of responsibility, Gal. vi. 5.
gdptos, ov, 6, load, a ship's cargo, Acts xxvii. 10.
doprowdros, ov (Lat.), Fortunatus, 1 Cor. xvi. 17.
gparyérduov, lov, 7é (Lat.), a scourge, a whip, John ii, 15.
138
ppayedrAdw, &, to flagellate, to scourge with whips, Matt. xxvii. 26.
gpayuds, ov, 6, a hedge, a place en- closed by hedges, Luke xiv. 23.
gpdlw, dow, to tell, explain, interpret, Matt. xili. 36, xv. 15.
gpdoow, tw, 2nd aor. pass., édpdyny, to stop, as the mouth of lions, Heb. xi. 33; to put to silence, Rom. iii, 19.
ppéap, ppéaros, 76, a pit, a well.
dpev-amaraw, &, to deceive the mind, to impose upon (acc.), Gal. vi. 3.
ppev-andrns, ov, 6, a deceiver, impostor, Titus i. ro.
gpnv, gpevds, 7 (lit., diaphragm), plur., ai ppeves, the intellect, 1 Cor. XiV. 20.
dplicow, tw, to shudder, to quake from fear or aversion, James il. 19. /
ppovew, &, how (pphy), (1) to mind, to think (abs.); (2) to think, judge (ace.); (3) to set the mind and affec- tions on (acc.); (4) to observe, a time as sacred, Rom. xiv. 6; (5) with drép, to care for, Phil. iv. to.
opdévnua, aros, 7d, thought, regard, care for, Rom. viii. 6, vii. 27.
ppdvycis, ews, h, mind, understanding, Luke i. 17; Eph. i. 8
gpdviuos, ov, intelligent, wise, prudent ; adv., -ws, prudently, Luke xvi. 8.
gpovtifw, to take care, to be anxious, inf., Tit. iii. 8.
dpovpéw, &, to watch, to keep, as by a military guard, lit., 2 Cor. xi. 32; fig., Gal. iii, 23 (as if in custody) ; Phil. iv. 7 (in security); 1 Pet. 1. 5 (in reserve).
ppudoow, tw, to rage, as in a tumult, Acts iv. 25 (LXX.).
pptyavoy, ov, 76, a dry stick, a faggot stick, for burning, Acts xxviii. 3.
bpuyla, as, h, Phrygia.
biyeddos, ov, 6, Phygellus, 2 Tim.
ie. Sa gvyn, $s, h, fight, Matt. xxiv. 20, guaakh, as, 7, (1) a keeping guard, a watching ; (z) the guard, or men on guard ; (3) @ prison, imprisonment, 2 Cor. vi. 5; a@ watch in the night, Luke xii. 38.
VOCABULARY.
[payedrda—havew
guaakl{w, to imprison, to deliver into custody, Acts xxii. 19.
gudakrhpia, wv, ta (plur. of adj.), a safeguard, amulet, or charm, @ phylactery, or slip of parchment, with Scripture words thereon, and worn by some of the Jews as pro- tective.
gviaat, aos, 6, a keeper, sentinel.
guadcow, kw, (1) to keep guard, or watch over; (2) to keep in safety; (3) to observe, as a precept; (4) mid., to keep oneself from (acc, or a6), Luke xii. 15; Acts xxi. 25.
van, fis, 7, (1) a tribe, of Israel ; (2) race, or people,
piaror, ov, 74, a leaf.
dipaua, atos, 76, a mass, kneaded into consistency, a lump, as of dough, 1 Cor. v. 6; or clay, Rom. xi, 16.
gvoixds, h, dv, natural, as (1) according to nature; (2) animal; adv., -ws,\ physically, naturally.
gvoidw, &, to inflate, to puff up; pass., fo be insolent, or arro- gant.
plots, ews, H, generally, nature ; spe- cially, (1) natural birth, Gal. ii. 15; (2) natural disposition, instinct, pro- pensity, Eph. ii. 3; (3) long-esta- blished custom, 1 Cor. xi. 143 (4) native qualities, or properties, Gal. iv. 8
guvoiwos, ews, 7, elation of mind, boasting, 2 Cor. xii. 20,
gutela, as, 7, @ plant, Matt. xv. 13.
guteiw, ow, to plant, to set, abs., or with acc.; fig., of introducing the gospel, 1 Cor. iii. 6, 8.
giw, ow, 2nd aor. pass., inv; part., gveis; to spring up, intrans., Heb. xii. 15; pass., to grow, Luke Vili. 6,
gwaAreds, ov, 6, a burrow, a hole, Matt. xiii. 20,
pwvew, &, how, (1) to sound, to utter a sound or cry; (2) to cry, or call to, to invite (acc.); (3) to name, to denominate, acc, (nom. of title), John xiii, 13,
pov —xéprs|
govh, js, 9, (1) @ sound, musical or otherwise; (2) an articulate sound, a voice, ‘voices of the prophets,” Acts xiii. 27; (3) @ ery, as of pain, a language, dialect, 1 Cor. xiv. 10
gas, gwtdbs, 7d, contr. from ¢dos (ga-, to show, whence paivw, pnt), light; hence, that which causes light, Mark xiv. 54; lightning,.Acts ix. 3; plur., torches, the lights of heaven ; év dwri, in the light, i.e., in public: fig., light, spiritual, John viii. 12; Eph. v. 8; the gospel, which gives light, Matt. iv. 16; Jesus Christ, the source and giver of spiritual light, John i. 4, 5; perfect purity of Gon, 1 John i. 5.
gwornhp, pos, 6, (1) a luminary, Phil. ii. 15; (2) brightness, splendour, Rev. xxi. 11.
gwa-pdpos, ov, light-bearing, radiant, the name of the morning star, * Lucifer,” 2 Pet. i. 19.
gwrewds, h, dv, bright, luminous, Matt. Xvii. 5; spiritually enlightened, Luke 3,094, 36:
gwtifw, isw, pass., perf., meporioua ; Ist aor., épwric@ny ; (1) to enlighten, to shed light wpon (acc., but éxt in Rev. xxii. 5); (2) to bring to light ; (3) fig., to instruct, to make to understand, Eph. iii. 9.
gwtiouds, ov, 6, light, lustre, illumina- tion.—
X.
X, x, xi, chi, ch, guttural, the twenty- second letter. As a numeral, x’ = 600; .x = 600,000,
xalpw, xaphooum, 2nd aor., éxdpny, to rejoice, to be joyful; imp., xaipe, xalpere, hai! ! farewell ! inf., xaipew, greeting, Acts xv. 233
xdrala, as, 7, hail.
Xardw, & dow, 1st aor., pass., éxadrd- a0nv, to loosen, Mark ii. 43 to let down, Acts ix. 25.
XaAdaios, ov, 6, a Chaldean.
VOCABULARY.
139
xarerds, h, dv, (1) hard, difficult ; (2) . harsh, violent, Matt, viii. 28. ;
Xww-aywyéw, &, to bridle, strain.
xarivds, od, 6, a bit, a curb, James iil. 3.
xXdAkeos, ovs, 7, odv, made of brass, or copper, Rev. ix. 20.
XaAKevs, ews, 6, a worker in brass, or copper, a coppersmith.
xarAKknoayv, dvos, 6, a gem, including several varieties, a chalcedony.
xarniov, ov, 76, a brazen vessel.
XaAKo-AlBavoy, ov, Td, fine brass, white (from ldaban, Heb. for white), or shining brass, Rev. i. 15, ti. 8; or JSrankincense (AiBavos) of a gold colour, distinguished from silver- coloured.
xaAKds, ov, 6, copper, brass, money.
xopat, adv., on, or to the ground,
Xavady, 7, Canaan.
Xavavaios, aia, atov, Canaanitish; oi Xavavaio, the Canaanites.
Xupt, as, 7, joy, cause of joy, bliss,
att. XXV. 21, 23.
xdpayya, aros, 76, sculpture, Acts XVil. 29; engraving, a@ stamp, a sign.
XapaxThp, jpos, 6, an impress, a per- fect likeness, Heb. i. 3.
xdpat, axos, 6, a palisade, a mound Sor besieging, Luke xix. 43.
xaplfoua, flooua, dep., mid., pass. fut., xapicOjcoum, (1) to give, to grant, to bestow freely, Luke vii. 21; (2) to show favour to (dat.), Gal. iil, 18; (3) to forgive (dat., pers., ace. thing), 2 Cor. xil. ro; Eph. iv. 323; Col. ii. 13.
xadpis, wros, 7, (1) agreeableness, accept- ableness, Luke iv. 22; (2) favour, kindness, grace, especially God’s; (3) liberality, a benefaction, a gift; (4) met., the doctrines and blessings of salvation, Acts xilil. 43; Heb. xiii. 9; (5) specially the grace, or gift of the apostleship, Rom. xii. 3; xdpw exew, to return thanks ; xépw éxew mpds, to be in favour with ; xdpw, adverbially used, with gen, Jor the sake of, on account of.
to re-
140
xdpioua, atos, 76, a gift, a benefit,
z.e., God’s; used also for miraculous
gifts, 1 Cor, xil. 4, 9.
xapitéw, &, to make acceptable ; pass., to be favoured, Luke i. 28.
Xapidy, % (Heb.), Charran, Haran.
xiprns, ov, 6 (Lat.), paper, 2 John 12,
or
xdoua, aros, 76, a gap, a gulf, ** chasm,” Luke xvi. 26.
xe7tAos, ovs, 76, a lip; plur., language, dialect, 1 Cor. xiv. 21; fig., shore, Heb. xi. 12.
xemdtw, in pass., to be storm-beaten, or tempest-tossed, Acts xxvii. 18.
xeluappos, ov, 6, a storm-brook, a wintry torrent, John xviii. 1.
xemudy, dvos, 6, (1) a storm, a tempest, foul weather, Acts xxvil. 20; (2) winter, the rainy season, Matt. XXiv. 20,
xelp, és, 7, a hand; met., for any exertion of power. Used jor the power of God, the power of the Lord for help, Acts iv. 30, xi. 21; for punishment, Heb. x. 31.
xeip-aywyew, @, to lead by the hand, Acts ix. 8, xxii. 11.
xewp-aywyds, ov, 6, one who leads by the hand, Acts xiii, 11.
xeips-ypapoy, ov, 74, a hand-writing, a promissory note; fig., of the Mosaic law, Col. ti. 14. Y
xetpo-roinros, ov, made with hands, external.
xetpo-Tovéw, & (relyw), to elect by lifting up the hand, to choose by vote, to appoint, Acts xiv. 23; 2 Cor. Vill. 19.
xelpwv, ov, compar. of kaxds, worse, Matt. xii. 45; worse, severer, Heb.
X. 29. sapeviaie (Hebrew plural of cherub), the cherubim, the golden figures on the mercy-seat, Heb. ix. 5. xhpa, as, 7, a widow. xoés, adv., yesterday. xiAL-upxos, ov, 6, a commander of a thousand men, a military tribune. xiAids, dos, h, a thousand (subst. ).. xiAsot, a, a, a thousand (alj.).
VOCABULARY,
Xlos, ov, 7, Chios, Acts xx. 15.
xiTév, avos, 6, a vest, an inner gar- ment,
xidv, dvos, H, sna.
xAauts, vdos, 7, a Roman officer's cloak, most frequently scarlet, Matt. xxvii. 28, 31.
xAcuvdtw, to mock, scoff (abs.).
xA-apés, d, dv, warm, lukewarm.
XAén, ns, Chloe, 1 Cor. i. 11.
xAwpds, d, dv, (1) green, verdant ; (2) pale or sallow, Rev. vi. 8.
xis’, six hundred and sixty-six, Rev. xi. 18,
xoixds, h, dv, earthy, made of earth,
_ earthly, 1 Cor. xv. 47-49.
xoik, wos, 7, @ chenix, measure con- taining two sextarii (see féorns).
Xo%pos, ov, 6, a pig; plur., swine.
XoAdw, @, to be angry, to be incensed at (dat. ).
xoan, jis, (1) gall, fig., Acts viii. 23; (2) bitter herbs, such as wormwood, &c., Matt. xxvii. 34.
xdos, see xovs.
Xopativ, or Xopatelv, 7, Chorazin.
xop-nyéw, @ (&yw), Gk. to supply or furnish a chorus for the games: hence, to furnish, to supply, to give, 2 Cor. ix. 10; 1 Pet. iv. 11.
[xéprrpa—xprito
xopés, ov, 6, a dance with singing, —
**chorus,” plur., Luke xv. 25.
xopriQw, to feed, to satisfy (with, by
gen. or dé), xoprdoua, atos, 74, food, sustenance. xépros, ov, 6, grass, herbage, Matt,
26, Xouvas, a, 6, Chuza, Luke viii. 3. Xovs, ods, acc. xotv, dust.
vi. 30; springing grain, Matt. xiii, — 6.
Xpdouat, @uat, xpjoea, dep. (prop. mid. of xpdw), to use (dat.), to make use .of, to treat, Acts xxvii, 335
2 Cor, xiii. 10 (dat. om.). xpdw, or Kixpnut, xphow, to lend.
XpEia, as, 2,
(1) use, necessity, need,
plur., necessities ; (2) businéss, Acts —
vi. 3. xpe-wperrérns, ov, 6, a debtor.
xph, impers., it needs, it behoves, (acc. —
and inf.), James iii. 10, xpr¢a, to have need of, to need (gen.).
py
a
Xpfjpa—padyds]
xpiima, aros, 76, ‘fa thing of use,” money, Acts iv. 373 plur., riches, wealth
xpnuari(w, tow, to transact business ; hence, (1) to bear or take a name, to be called, Acts xi. 26; Rom. vii. 3; (2) to consult an oracle; pass., to receive a Divine response or moni- tion, Matt. ii. 123 Heb. viii. 5, &c.; hence act., to announce the Divine will, Heb. xii, 25.
Xpnwarionds, ov, 6, an oracle, Rom. xi. 4.
xphoimos, n, ov, useful, profitable.
XPios, ews, n, use, manner of using.
xpnorevoua, dep., to be kind to, willing to aid, 1 Cor. xiii. 4.
xpnoro-royla, as, n, a kind address ; in a bad sense, for a speech of pretended kindness, Rom. xvi. 18.
xpnords, h, dv, useful, good, gentle, kind; 1d xpnsrév, goodness, kind- ness. See Synonyms.
xpnorérTns, THTOS, Ty generally, Rom. iii. 12; cially, benignity, gentleness.
xploua, aros, 76, an anointing, an unction, 1 John ii, 20, 27.
xpioniavds, ov, 6, a Ohristian, Acts xl. 26, xxvi. 28; a@ follower of Christ, 1 Pet. iv. 16.
Xpiorés, od, 6 (prop. verbal adj. from xplw), the Anointed, the Messiah, THE CHRIST (see 217, e).
xplo, ow, to anoint, to consecrate by anointing, as Jesus, the Christ, Luke iv. 18; applied also to Christians, 2 Cor. i. 21.
xpovive, to delay, to defer, to tarry.
xpdvos, ov, (1) time, generally; (2) a particular time, or season, Matt. uu. 7; Actsi. 7. See Synonyms.
_ Xpovo-rpiBéw, &, to spend time, to wear away time, Acts ¥xs10;
Xpiceos, ous, 7, odv, golden.
xpuaiov, wv, gold, a golden ornament.
Xpuco- Bauer Atos, ov, gold-ringed on the Singers, James ii, 2.
xpvad-Aros, ov, 6, a golden stone, a gem of a bright yellow colour, ‘*a chrysolite,” or topaz, Rev. xxi. 20,
(1) goodness, (2) spe-
VOCABULARY,
141
xpvad-mpagos, ov, 6, a@ gem, of a greenish, golden colour, ‘a chryso- prase,” Rev. xxi. 20, xpuods, ov, 6, gold, anything made of gold, gold coin, or money.
xpvodw, @, to deck with gold, to gild.
Xpes, xpwrds, 6, the skin; met., the body, Acts xix. 12.
xwrds, h, dv, lame, crippled in the feet
Xapa, as, Hh, (1) a country, or region ; (2) the land opposed to the sea; (3) the country, dist. from town; (4) plur. ; jields, John iv. 35.
xwpéw, &, (1) to go, go forward, J ohn Vili. 373 (2) to give place for, to contain, John ii. 6, xxi. 25; fig., to admit, to comprehend, Matt. xix. 11; 2 Cor. vii. 2.
xwpt(w, low, to put apart, to separate, Matt. xix. 6; mid. (ist aor. pass.), to separate oneself, to depart, to go away (a6 or et), Acts i. 4, XViil, 1.
xXwpior, ov, 76, a field, a farm, @ possession; plur., possessions, Acts Iv. 34.
xwpls, adv., separately, by itself, John . XX. 7; as prep. gov. gen., apart Jrom, without, John xv. 5; Rom. lil, 21; besides, exclusive of, Matt. xiv. 21. e
Xapos, ov, 6 (Latin, *‘caurus’’), the N.W. wind; met., of that quarter - of the heavens, Acts xxvii. 12,
¥.
¥v, wv, Wi, pst, ps, the twenty-third letter. As a numeral, = 700; jv = 700,000,
Wdrro, Ware, to sing, to chant, accom- panied with instruments, fo sing psalms.
aruds, od, a psalm, a song of praise ; plur., the book of Psalms in the Old Testament, the Hagiographa, or division of the Scriptures in which this book stands first, Luke XXIV. 44.
142
Wevd-d3eAgos, ov, 6, a false brother, a pretended Christian.
Wevd-ar'arodos, ov, 6, a false or pre- tended apostle.
Wevdhs, és, false, deceiving, lying.
Wevdo-5:ddoKados, ov, a false teacher, a teacher of false doctrines.
Wevd0-Adyos, uv, false-speaking.
Wevdouqm, dep., coum, ist aor., épev- cipny, to deceive, to lie, to speak falsely, to lie to (ace.), Acts v. 3.
evdo-udptup, or -us, upos, 6, a false witness.
_ Wevdo-uaptupéw, @, to bear false wit-
NESS. evdo-naptupla, as, h, false testimony. Wevdo-mpoohrns, ov, 6, a false prophet,
one who in God’s name teaches false
things.
Weddos, ovs, 76, falsehood, lying, a lie, falsehord towards God, Rev. xxi. 27; idolatry, Rom. 1. 25
:vd6-xpioros, ov, 6, a pretended Mes- siah, Matt. xxiv. 24.
Yevd-dyupos, ov, falsely named, falsely called, ‘1 Tim, vi. 20.
Weiopa, atos, 76, falsehood, perfidy, Rom. iii. 7.
Wetorns, od, 5, a deceiver, liar, a per- Jjidious person.
wnrapdw, @, to touch, to feel, to handle (acc.), Heb. xii. 18; to feel after, as persons blind, or in the dark, fig., Acts xvil. 27.
Unoilw, iow, to reckon, to compute, Luke xiv. 28; Rev. xiii. 18.
Vipos, ov, 7, a small stone, a pebble, used as a counter, and for voting. Hence, a vote, Acts xxvi. 103; a die, a token, Rev. ii. 17.
yibupicuds, ov, 6, a whispering, a detraction, 2 Cor. xii. 20.
Wibupiorhs, ov, 6, a whisperer, a slan- derer, a detractor, Rom. i. 30.
Wixtov, ov, 76, a crumb.
yuxh, fis, 7, (1) the vital breath, the animal life ; (2) the human soul, as distinguished from the body; (3) the soul as the seat of the affections, the will, &c.; (4) the self (like Heb.), Matt. x. 39; (5) a human person, a» individual.
VOCABULARY.
[pev8-GSeAios-—aptopas
Wuxuds, 4, dv, animal, sensual.
Wvxos, ous, 76, cold, frosty.
Wuxpds, d, dv, cold, cool; fig., cold- hearted, Rev. iii. 15.
Wixw, 2nd fut. pass., Wuynroua, to cool; pass., to be cooled, to grow cold, Matt. xxiv. 12.
Youl(w, to feed by morsels, to spend in feeding, Rom, xii. 20; 1 Cor. Xiil. 3.
WYwuioy, tov, a bit, a morsel, a mouth- ul
oxen, to rub, to break in pieces, as ears of corn, Luke vi. 1..
Q.
2, w, & péya, Gmega, 6, the twenty- fourth letter. As a numeral, o’ = 800; ,w 800,000. Omega is put for the last, as Alpha for the first, Rev. i. 8, 11, xxi. 6, 13.
&, interj., used before the vocative where the appeal is emphatic: sometimes in simple address, and once in admiration, Rom. xi. 33.
°B7S, 6 (Heb.), Obed, Matt i. 5.
ode, adv., of place, hither, here. So in this life, Heb. xiii. 14; herein, in this matier, Rev. xiii. 10; de } de, here or there, Matt. xxiv. 23;
dn, Tis, N, an ode, a song. a hymn.
wdiv, ivos, n, the pain of childbirth, acute pain, severe calamity.
wdive, wea, to be in the throes, or pain, of childbirth ; fig., Gal. iv. 19.
Gos, ov, 6, a shoulder.
wvéouat, vipat, nooua, to buy (gen. of price).
wdy, vd, 76, an egg, Luke xii. 12.
dpa, as, 7, (1) a definite space, or time, —
-@ season; (2) an hour; (3) the © particular time for anything, Luke xiv. 17; Matt. xxvi. 45.
wpaios, aia, atov, fair, comely, beauti- Sul, Matt. xxiii, 27; Acts iii. 2.
wpioum, dep., mid., to roar, to howl, as a beast, 1 Pet. v. 8.
ds—apéatpos |
@s, an adv. of comparison, as, like as, about, as it were, according as, 2 Pet. i. 3; to wit, 2 Cor. v. 19; how! Rom. x. 15; as particle of time, when, whilst, as soon as; as intentional particle, so that (inf.), Acts xx. 24; das os eimeiy, so to speak, Heb. vii. 9.
‘Qoavvd; interj., Hosanna! (Heb., Ps. exviii. 25) Save now! a word of joyful acclamation, Matt. xxi. 9.
a@o-altws, adv., in the same way, in like manner as, likewise.
wo-cl, adv., as if, as though, as, about.
‘Noené, 4, Hosea, Rom. ix. 25.
&a-mep, adv., wholly as, just as, Matt. xii, 40; 1 "Cor. ViiL 5.
VOCABULARY.
143
ho-mep-el, ae «5 just as if, as it were, 1 Cor. xv.
&o-Te, conj., ss that (inf.), (see 391),
- therefore.
wrtov, tov, té (dim. of ods, the ear), an ear.
wpéAcia, as, 7}, profit, mee gain, Rom. iii. 1, Jude 16
Aperéw, &, how, to profit, to benefit, to help (ace., also acc. of definition); pass., to be profited, to have advan- tage, Matt. xvi. 26,
apermos, ov, profitable, beneficial, dat. of pers., Tit. iii. 8; ampds (acc.), of obj., 1 Tim, iv. 8; 2 Tim, iii, 16,
q@
Lh a he pot ae y ae i
ve ie srt: ie - 3 ty ; Rae & ¥ me “ Pee Fs
a
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
[The references are to the Pages, not to the Sections. For convenience, each letter in Greek is placed under the corresponding one in English. K and X are under C; 4, ¥, with 0, under P; and 0, with T, under 7.}
ABLATION, by the genitive . » 229
Abstract nouns, in connection with the article, 200; in the plural number, 219; in the Benny’, to express quality +, 283
Accents, the, 8 " Accentuation of the
_ several classes of words, and of the forms of declension and conjugation, under the proper sections.
Accessory clauses ‘ ; . 186
Accessory circumstance, by dative,246 ; by participle . ; ; 2 403
Accusative, like nominative in neuter nouns, 17; its general senses, 249 ; case of the object, 16, 249; subject of the infinitive verb, 253, 355; double accusative (nearer and remoter ob- ject), 252; accusative with passive verbs, 322 ; cognate accusative, 251 ; accusative of definition, 252; ad- verbial, 144 in elliptical construc- tions, 255; accusative of the infini- tive verb, 358. or other uses of the case, see 24.9, seg., and under Prepo- sitions.
‘** Accusative middle” p 31
Active voice, the, 58, 318; not always distinguishable in sense from the middle . 320
Adjectives, in three forms, 36; of two terminations, 37 ; comparison of, 42 ; classes of, 157; agreement of with substantive,291; usually placed after substantives, 382; with omitted sub- stantive, 291; with several substan- tives, 293; adjective with article,
191, 292; of plenty, &c., with geni- tive, 228; of worthiness, &c., with genitive, 240; adjective with genitive of relation, 240; with infinitive, 357 ; adverbially used, 2945 Ona with genitive . 230 Adverbs, the cases of nouns as, 144; derivative, 146; negative, 148, 369; in composition, 162; preceded by article, 191; of time, with genitive, 236; used as prepositions, 147, 3693 adverbs after yw, 319; adverbial phrases and combinations, 263, 272,
294, 368 Adversative conjunction, dé. . 376 Affirmative answers . . - 336
Agent, after passive verbs, 322; by trd, 276; apparently expressed by dative . 247
Alexander’s conquests, their effect on language . : ey 9:
Alexandrian, or compound aorist. 106
Alexandrian version of Old Testa- ment . ‘ - 168
Alford, Dean, 207, 227, 238, 297, 298,
373) 333) 34% 399 377 380
Alliteration P - 386 —
Alphabet, the Greek, 1; meaning ” the word . _ ‘ :
Also, even, by Kat ; 5 ve
Alternative expressions, 317 ; vee tions ‘ 315
Angus’s “ Handbook of the English Language,” 53, 2373 ; ‘* Bible Hand- book ” . Pe
Anacolouthon . gaa? 367, 334
146
Annexation, conjunctions of . 372 Antecedent, attraction of the, 311;
omission of the ; 4 ee Wy | Antithesis, conjunctions of, a 53
omitted Aorist, the first and second Batecliy identical in meaning, 89; first, act. and mid., 106; first and second, pass., 108 ; second, 8g, 103; aorists of deponent verbs, 110; force of the aorist, 331; distinguished from im- perfect, 326; distinguished from per- fect, 3345 aorist imperative, 338; subj unctive (and optative), 333, 340, 341; as future perfect, 348; infinitive, 354; participle, 360; indicative, with tv, in conditional sentences - 348 A piece, how expressed in Greek . 2€4 sk tad ih ast anomalies ° . 168, 385 Mpsdhcts , 3 : : - 346 Aposiopésis . ; . ; » 383
Apostrophe, the . ; ti Apposition, 184; by genitive . 233 Appropriative middle . A . 320
Aramean dialect, 167; words in rs New Testament
Aratus (or Cleanthes), quoted by se Paul
Arrangement of words ‘ ; Hi
Article, the, 16; declined, 17; syntax of the, 189, sq.; originally a demon- strative pronoun, 189 ; always signi- ficant, 193 ; often neglected in E. V., 197; with the Divine names, 202; position of article, 213 ; repetition of
_the, 213; article in enumerations, 215; omission of the, 217; article with infinitive, 357; with parti-
ciples. : : . - 365 ‘Aapicate, the . ° Spiny Association, by dative . . 242 Asyndeton .
381 Attic Greek contrasted with that of the New Testament , . 168 Attic augment . R » 103, 9! Attic future 105 Attraction, of the relative to the pre- dicate, 310; to the antecedent, 311; of the antecedent to the rela- tive. - 311 Attributive use of participles, 361, 365
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
Augment, 62; Attic or double, 103,
106 ; irregularities i Nie . 108 Augustus, in Latin and Greek . 176 Author or source, by genitive . 225
A- declension, the (first) . . 20
&-, intensive in composition . . 163 a-, negative in composition . » 163 &-, together in composition . ‘ bis
aya0ds, comparison of . ,
ayarn, with genitive in different pita tions : ; ; - 238
ayyeArAw, conjugated : : . 96
uve, &ywuev, intransitive . « 319
&yvum, augmentof . ‘ - 106 &yw, conjugated . : . 86, 103 adeAgds, ellipsis of : 4 eB ans (&50v, with eis) . oo eee &5icos, with infinitive . . + $87 -é@@, verbsin , a ‘ - 159 aiiés, declined . . ; Neale. aia, plural . ; . . + 20 -aivn, verbsin . . A » 159 aipéeo, defective . ‘ ‘ . 112 aipw, conjugated . ‘ F - 96 aiaxpds, comparison of : ee | aidv, declined . . . 26 alaves, plural use of . ‘ . 221 a&kovw, future of, 106; perfect, 109;
with genitive p . ; . 226 dAndiis, és, declined . 4 ogee AAG . - 375 GAdos and é frepos, 56; with article. 211 Gpaprdyve ? . 102
dy, potential with optative, 343; with relatives or conjunctions, requires in conditional
subjunctive, 343;
sentences, with acres . 348 7 a . 264 dvaréArw, transitive use 6 ob tic 318 avn, declined . . . oy 8 tvOpwmos, declined ° : Pate av? ay * ° « 257, $79 dvoiyw, augment tae ‘ » 109 avri, 257; withinfinitive . 359 tfvos, with genitive, 240; with infini-
tive. - 357
ard, 258 ; and bid, 286; and ex, 287 ; ;
adverbial phrases with . . 368 &rodidwut, active and middle . 320 AroAAds, declined , ° Se &pa and dpa, andoi: : - 378
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
Eparye ° ° ° a . + 379 “Apa, declined . a 1 ge éprew, future of . A f . 104 uipvas . y ‘4 A ‘ 34 &pti-, in composition . é “362 &oxnv, adverbial . ‘ ; - 368 avédvw, transitive use of 18
‘ ripe avtds, 7, 6, declined, 51; used for third personal pronoun, 303; emphatic nominative, 179; meaning self, 304 ; with article, the same, 209 ; comple- mentary to the relative, 312; avrds
_Tplros : " : ‘ + 302 avrov and airov . ‘ ‘ - 53 apinut, conjugated . o 328 apixveomat ° . - 102 apopifw, future of a : « 105 -dw, verbs in ° ‘ . + 159
B.
Benefit or injury, by dative . 245 Bengel, Dr. J. A. ‘ ‘ 0° 227 Both ... and, how expressed. » 373
Breathings, the . frag Burgon, Rev. J. W. , “Inspiration and
Interpretation” . ‘ » 292 Balyw . : : si 102, 303 Barro, transposition of stem-letters
in ‘ . . 107 Barroway Rlaxis ‘ ‘ . 234 Bamrrifw, future of é “ » 105
BaotAeds, declined P 32 Bacirkevw, transitive in the Old Testa-
ment : gE Bovaciw, why not chosen as a para- digm : : : . 69 BovAouat, augment of . ; . 106
Bois, declined 32 Bpéxet (called impersonal), true subject Of: . : ; - 180
C. ‘¢Qanaanite,” surname of Simon. 175 Cardinal numbers, the ; ge
Cases of nouns, 16, 256; as used with prepositions, 140, 255; cases of the infinitive, 357; case-endings, old, with adverbial force ° - 144
147
Causal conjunctions, 379 ; omitted, 381 Causal use of participles. - 364 - Causal middle . : p Ae is
Causative verbs . : . 159 Cause or motive by dative . . 246 Chiasmus . , 288, 387
Cities, plural names of, 3 S08 Cleanthes (or Aratus), quoted by St.
Paul ‘ i F ‘ - 388 Climax, the rising. F - 374 Coins, Latin names of . : . 171 Coins, measures, &¢., with numerals, 301 Collective nouns, with plural adjective,
185; with plural verb . 182 Combination of consonants. EMERY Commands by future tense . » 329 Common gender . F bam f
Comparative in -ay, paradigm, 433 comparative with genitive, 229, 294; elliptical, 296 ; emphatic compara- tive, 44, 296; comparative notion, by prepositions . . . 296
Comparison of adjectives : oe
Comparisons, ka! in 374
Complements of thesimple sentence, 186
Completeness, marked by aorist . 333
Compound imperfect, 328 ; future, 330;
perfect and pluperfect . 361 Compound relative . * vy 55 Compound sentences . . 186, 138 Compound words , ‘ . 161 Concessive use of participles . 364 Concord, the first, 181; the second,
184, 291; the third .
Concord, rational. See Synesis. Conditional sentences . 34.6, 375 Conditional use of participles . 364 Conjugations of verbs, the, 61; the second conjugation . ‘ . 114 Conjunctions, or pronominal adverbs,
146 ; the conjunctions classified, 150 ; with && followed by subjunctive, 343; syntax of the . ’ 372 Consonants, division of, 5 ; changes i in, 6, 7; changesin mute verbs . 82 Constructio ad sensum. See Synesis. © Constructio pregnans, 263, 267, 278, 279, 280, 289
Constructions, unusual, for emphasis, 383)
Contracted substantives, 245 adjec- tives, 37; pureverbs . 79, 8q.
. 309
148
Contraction of vowels . ° emg Contrast, emphatic, by negative . 370 Copula, the, 178; omissionof . 178 Copulative verbs. : : See tS Coronis, the ‘ 5, 44 Correlative pronouns, 573 ; adverbs, 146 Crasis . 0 5 in the early
Creeds, rhythmical,
church . 387 Customary actions by imperfect tense, 326 -k-, in the first aorist . ; . 124 SUT Sa . . eye Kabapl(w, future . ; d - 105 Kaj mat (325 Kae? SepBovhy eis SeepBontys . 289 kal, 372; with te, 373; with 3¢, 377; kal adp, 380; Kati omitted. » 382 Kaicap, Cesar, to whom applied in the New Testament ‘ : - 176 kaiw, stem and future . ORS ag
Kaxds, comparison of 44. kadéw, future of, 104; transposition of stem-letters . ‘ ° . 108 kaAds, comparison of . 6/43 Kdpver, stem and second aorist . 101 Katd, 270, 8g.; sometimes supposed with accusative of definition, 252; adverbial combinations with . 368
katnyooéw, With genitive . . 228 karérepa . ; " s 44,233 kerja : ‘ ‘ é ‘s + 825 Kepdvyype ; 135
Képas, Kpéas, stems and declension of, 33 kepdalvw, future and first aorist of, 106 Khpvé, declined . : ‘ 2 gO
kAaiw, stem and future > « 105 KkAdw, future . . 104 koul(w, future . > + TOR Kopévy ups ‘ . F é 9) 235 Kpewapan 125 cetiak conjugated, 96; ; its root, ‘deri-
vatives, and compounds . . 164 Kplvoua, middle force of . »° 320 Képios, with the article ; » 203 kioy, irregular . 5 > » 33 xalpew, as imperative . 5 . 360 xeAdw, future. . 104 xelp, omitted with adjective . 292 xéw, stem, fature, and aorist + 105
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
xpdoum, future of, 104; governs
dative . ; ° ‘ . 247 xen i : uate Xpurrds, with article . » 205
Xpucous (cos), 7, ody, declined 4. BF
D.
Dative case, the (singular always in -t, 17); its general senses, 16, 242; obsolete forms of, as adverbs, 144} dative of association, 242 ; of trans- mission, 243; of reference, 245; of accessory, 246; of time, 749 ; may be interchanged with éy (dat.), 287; with es (acc.), 288; usually placed after governing word ; - 382
‘* Dative middle” , » 320
Dativus commodi vel incommodi . 245
Death of Christ, prepositions respect- ing . . 275,289
Declensions ‘of substantives, the three, 16; similarity of the first and second,
20; nouns of variable . aa! Defective verbs . ; tu Deliberative subjunctive ‘ +. 9an
Demonstrative pronouns, 53, 307; with the article, 208 ; as equivalent to a clause. : . - 309
Dependent clauses. » 343
Deponent verbs . 83, note, rro
Design, expressed by genitive of infini- tive, 358 ; by infinitive with eis, rpds, 358. See Intentional.
Derivation . ° . e . 159
De Wette, Dr. . : ‘ . 25%
Dieresis . 4
Difficulties of interpretation, 187, 238
Digamma, the, 46; in substantives, 29; in verbs, 105. See under V.
Diminutives ; :
Diphthongs, 2 ; regularly ‘long, bat often counted short for accentua- tion . 21, 24, 107
Disjunctives, the ; . “397
Distributive numerals, 49; pronouns, 56
Divine names, with the article . 202
Donaldson, Dr. 225, 242, 249, 253
Double names of persons 174.
Dress, Latin names of in the ‘New Testament ‘ ami SS 2 892
Dual number, the - oe |
“ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
ddevw, stem Ps «” 863 davel(w, active and midale ‘ « G41 dé, conjunction ot antithests «1996 Bef, impersonal . : ; . Imt delxvuut, conjugated . : + 130 devrepdmpwros ; ° . . 164 dnAdw, conjugated j 80
did, 268; and éx, 285 5 and eis, 286; and aed, 286; ad év, 286; and wepl; 289; with genitive and ‘accusative distinguished . : ' . 270
diidonw, future . ‘ ; + 102 Tider, conjugated ‘ ; » 116 Sixaos, ala, aov, declined . + 1296 Avorerts : ° . ° » 292 Aids, Ala, o: 994 dfo7t, relative causal particle - 379 Boned, impersonal . : : a Jil doxéw, future of . : . . 102 ddéta, declined . d ; Shih BOR: Obvapat : - 125 duvarés, with infinitive - « 357 dvvw, stem and second aorist - 103 duo, declined : ; ‘ aa dvo-, in composition . : 083 SwdeKdpvadoy 164.
daa (or oikos, olxia), ellipsis Of). 23%
E.
Ecbatic and final herney : Elision of vowels Ellicott, Bishop, 210, 216, 229, fli 251, 255: 304, 323, 33%, 351, 360, 3713, 381 Ellipsis, with nominative, 223; with accusative, 255; of words of kin- dred before genitive, 231; of sub- stantives, with adjective, 291; of measures and coins, with numerals, 301; of the antecedent, with rela- tive, 312; with the subjunctive, 339; with the optative, 342; before
oe is
Va. ° é . : + 340 Elliptical questions, 3365 construc- tions - 383 Emphasis, by particles, 151} ; by i inser- tion of pronominal subject, 179; by the article, 195; by the order of words, 382; by repetition or ple- onasm , ° ‘ ‘ - 384
149
Emphatic comparison of adjectives, 44; verbs, 159; indefinite pronoun, 316 ; negatives, 340, 341; future, 331
Enclitics ; 9
English rendering of Greek letters, fe)
Enumerations, with article, 215; by
kal ...Te , « ‘ ‘ - 373 Epanodos . . 387 Epexegetic, rat, 373; : omitted 4) 374, Epiccene gender ‘ 18
Epimenides, quoted by St. Paul . 383 Epistolary aorist, the . ; +0 90 Ethical future, the : ‘ » 329 Liven, also, by Kat ‘ 374 Exhortations, substituted for state-
ments by New Testament tran-
Scribers . > é A » 340 édv, for &v, 343; for ei ay . - 347 Eavroi, -js, declined . 4 3 5m édw, future of . j ‘ . 104 eyeveTo ; : - 355
Eypaapa, epistolary aorist ‘ age ey, huets, declined . : 9 eee ei, in conditional sentences, 347; inter- rogative use of. : : - 336 -ea and -ela, terminations of nouns, 154. eiul, conjugated, 126; as copula, 178; as predicate, 179; with genitive, 236; withdative . 2 - 243 elu, togo . . e ‘ + 127 elroy . . 112 eis, 264; compared with be and did, 286, 289; with mpds, 288; with én, 288 ; with simple dative, 288 ; with infinitive, 358; adverbial combina-
tions ; . 368 eis, pia, ev, declined, 465 as aieaa pronoun, 300; for Tp@TOs . . 300
ex, et, 259; compared with did, “285 ; 3 ‘with dard, 287 5 3 adverbial combina-
tions ° ; : . 368 etre. ere . ‘ . - 377 gxaoros, anarthrous ; ¢ . 208
éxeivos, with article, 208; refers to remoter antecedent, 307; may refer to the nearer, 308; the emphatic
demonstrative ; - 308 éxdv, éxodoa, Exdv, declined . + 39 éAatyw, stem and ‘future . «Fae
$iaxurrérepos, double comparative, 45 &Acos, of variable declension + 34
150
éAciOepos, with > mh 24.5; with infini-
tive. ° ° < 357 eri Coo, fabiré ste 5 : Z 105 euavroi, -ns, declined . : :
ev, 261 ; compared with eis, Sid, 286, 289 ; interchanged with dative, 287; adverbial combinations, 368; with
infinitive . . ; 5 - 389 evvumt . P ‘ . , 935 eteor1, impersonal ‘ . oe aS -€0S, -oUs, adjectives in " eaS7 éravew, future of . ‘ . 104 érel, enor or causal 4 +279 erebh . : 4 . - 379 ereidhnrep : 4 ; : | 479 ereirep 379 éml, 277; compared with els, 288 ; in
adverbial combinations . . 368 émicramar . . - 125 cPXoH 112s and Siew ; - 326 éegbiw . R 112 €gTHs, Goa, ws, participle for sarnuds,
declined . ‘ - 40
Erepos and &AAos . , sO, eae ETOIMOs, with infinitive 357 €v-, as prefix, 162; how augmented, 106 ebplo neo, stem ; “ A - 102 “evs, substantivesin .
' *a55 -eiw. verbsin . ° . 159 ey’ o . - 379 exo, alternative stem, 102 3 constr uc-
tion of, with adverbs ; » 319
~€, verbs i in 159 éws, in combination with other adver bs, 369 ; with infinitive ° - 359
#, particle of comparison, 295; inter- changed with kal od, 370; disjunc- tive, 377; interrogative . » “a7s
fixo and pxoua . s « » 326
npea «825 Tepe, declined, 20; ellipsis ‘ot ok 292 Tt-, In composition . . 163 ~ns, -¢s, adjectivesin . . . 358
F.
Festivals, names of, in plural . 220 ©
Final, or intentional clauses » 349 First declension, paradigms > 20 Five clergymen, the, on the Epistle to
the Romans . ° . «ata
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
Forbes, Rev. Dr., on the Romans, 387 Foreign elements in New Testament Greek . . 167 Forgetting, verbs of, with genitive, 228 Frequentative verbs. : eA85D Fulness, want, &e., by genitive, 228 ;
by dative or eis . j ‘ 247 Future time, tenses expressing . ~ Future tense, its characteristic, 63 ;
liquid verbs, 95; in pure verbs, isis .
Attic future, 105; second future, 933
future imperfect, 330; future per-
fect (paulo-post future), 87, 110;
see also 348; force of the future,
329, sg. ; with ob wh, 330; indica-
tive, with % iva, 353; infinitive, 354;
participle, 364; future auxiliary
verbs i » 330 Futurity, certain, by present o! 325
G.
Galilee, or Tiberias, the Lake of . 241 Gender of nouns, 16; rules for deter- mining, 18; variable in some sub- stantives . 34. General for particular statements. 222 Genitive case, the (plural always in -wv), 17; exhibits the stem in the third declension, 26; adverbially used, 144; of personal pronouns for possessive, 303; genitive after the article, 190; different uses of the, 225, 8Q. ; usual position of the, 233, 382; genitives in different relations with the same noun, 241; genitive absolute, the, 241, 361; prepositions governing the genitive, 257; geni- tive after did, compared with accu- sative, 269 ; objective genitive, by possessive pronoun, 303; genitive in apposition with possessive pronoun, 307 ; genitive of infinitive, 357; ex-
pressing design or result . 358 Gospel, with genitive in different senses : » 239
Greek in Palestine. , . 167 Greek names in the New Testament, 175 Greek poetry, quoted by St. Paul, 388 Green, Rev. T. 8. « 223,333,950 Grotius on fulfilment of prophecy, 352
-ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
GOD LL gid OE, SG BE 8 BTGG OY yeypanmr an 3 ‘ : «343 yerdw, future of . - : - 104 ‘Yév0s, declined . * # ° 4a yevoua:, with genitive or accusative, 227 e ‘Yh, ellipsis of ; F e292 yivouat, stem and forms 102, 110 ywéoKo, stemand forms . . 103 ydvu, irregular substantive . si 43 yenyopéo . - 159 Lat na gg substantive, 3 ; ellipsis ‘ . 231, 292 H.
Hackett, Dr., on the Acts . SAF Hamilton, Sir W., ‘‘ Logic” . 194 Hebraisms, so called, often to be re- jected . - 300 Hebraistic use of ‘plural of blood, 220 $ superlative, 299; use of eis, 301 ; of relative and airdés, 312; causal sense in intransitive verbs, 318; use of participles, 364; combination of verbs : - 369 Hebrew, as spoken i in “Palestine, 167; words, 35; names in the New Tes- tament, 173; poetry, parallelism, 386 Hendiadys (€v 5:4 Suviv, one idea in two words), unnecessary . 232 (§258),369 Hiatus
: 4 Hinton, Rev. J. H. ,on the Romans, 387°
Historic present, the . é 325 Historical and principal tenses, 60, 324 Hymns in the New Testament - 337 Hyperbaton - 383 Hypothesis, fourfold form of 347
I.
Imparisyllabic declension, the . 20 Imperative mood, the, 58, 337 ; tenses in, 3333 subjunctive used. for, 34.0 5 infinitive, 360; future indicative i in prohibitions 329 Imperfect tense, the, 103, 326; distin- uished from aorist, 326; in con- itional sentences, with dy. 348 Imperfect tenses, properly so called, 60 Impersonal verbs, 111; singular and
151
plural, 180; often inereneaye oe called Improper prepositions, ‘the P 147, se Inchoative acts, by imperfect . 328 Inchoative or inceptive verbs, 102, 159 Indeclinable proper names . “84 Indefinite article, the . , . 300 Indefinite pronouns, the. 56, 315, 533 Indefinite tenses, the . Indefiniteness by omission of article, 21 Indicative mood, 58 ; the objective part of the verb, 323; in indirect inter- rogation, 345; interchanged with optative, 346; in conditional sen- tences, 348 ; apparent in intentional clauses, 353; with dore, 359; com-
pared with infinitive : - 360 Indirect form changed to direct . 385 Indirect interrogation . © tered Bib Indirect quotation + - 344 Individual actsin plural expressions, 221 Inferential conjunctions , - 378
Infinitive mood, the, 59; a verbal substantive, 354; with article, 192; with accusative subject, 253; as sub- ject, 355; as object, 356; expressing result, 356; oblique cases of, 357 ; with Bore, 359; for imperative, 300;
in modern Greek . Pa Inseparable declensions, the y ae Instrument, by dative. «AF an BS Instrumental, év . ‘ . 262 ‘Intensive use of participles . ' - 364 Intentional or final clauses, 349 ; par-
ticles 3 ‘ : a S502 352 Interjections : a hy. Interrogative, its sign, II; pronouns,
55> 3143 particles, 149, I 51; forms,
3353 7, 378; yap. - 380 Interrupted statements, i baad BS Investiture, by év : . 26% Irregular substantives . 23, 33
Irregular comparisons . . - 44
-la, substantivesin . ‘ 154 idopat, future of 8 . 104 ‘lepudAupa, or ‘Tepovoad he . » 34 -1(w, verbs in ‘ < 159
Tua, conjugated (in &epinus) «128 *Inoods, declined, 25 ; with article, 204 tkavos, with infinitive . + 357 -u6s, -iKq, -tkov, adjectivesin . 157
‘
152
10S, -OVv, pice Cary in : . 158 wa, with subjunctive for imperative, 34°; intentional, 350; explanatory, 350; iS it ever ecbatic 2 ? 35135 distin- guished from ét1, 350 ; from Sees. 349 tva ti; or ivart; . : ; - 314 tva manpésom 4 ; 31352 -wvos, -ivn, -tvov, adjectives ir in 15ST -tov (-dp.ov, -td.0v), substantives in. 155 -1os, -la, -wov, adjectives in . ; B57 -ickos (-icxn), substantives in J. ¥SS tornut, conjugated, 116; its two aorists, 124; transitive and _ intransitive tenses, 319; its compounds . 335 ixévs, declined . ; 4 erage
J. Jacob, Rev. Dr. . . 252 Jebb’s ‘* Sacred Literature” - 387 JEHOVAH, equivalent of the term in the Apocalypse ‘ . 224 Judicial words, Latin, in ‘the New Testament ° > . « F791
K.
Kiihner’s ‘‘Greek Grammar,” ed. by Jelf . . * . . . 328
L.
Lachmann . - 40, 180, 244, 340
Languages of Palestine . . 167
Languages not verbally coincident, 256
Latin influences on New Testament Greek, 168; words in the New ‘les-
tament, 171; ; names in the New Testament : - 176 Lee, Dr., on “Inspiration” - 222
Letters, names of the, neuter, 35 ; numeral signs . : . . 7s Lightfoot, Professor . 351 Likeness, unlikeness, &c., by dative, 243 Linus, possibly a Briton . 176 Liquid verbs, 94, 8g. ; change of shoud vowelinthestem . . - 108 Local genitive, 236 ; dative, 248; ac- cusative . < 254 Luther’s version of the New Testa- ment » 333
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
Aap Bdvw, stem and present, 102; future, 105; perfect . : . 109
AavOdwe, with participle . ”
Acie, second aorist of
Aevalvw, future and first aorist of, ‘as
Aéwy, declined : 30
Ava, ‘why not chosen as paradigm . 69
M.
Madvig’s ‘* Greek Syntax ” 342 Measures, coins, &c., with numerals, 301 Mediation, expressed by dd . 269 Menander, quoted by St. Paul . 383 Mental affection, verbs of, with gen- tive, 227; withdative . . 244 Meyer, Dr. . : - 237, 358 Middle voice, the, 58; its meaning, 319, sg. ; not always distinguishable in sense from active, 320; often a wonane eet: in form from pas- Sive . 323 Middleton, on the article with names of Christ, 205; on 2 Tim. in. 16, 210 Military terms, Latin, in the es Testament . . Minister of another’s will, by did, sok Modal dative, 246 ; participle - 363 Monadic substantives . 195, 207 Moods, the . . 58, 64, 323 af be tag nghent, 4s coeriniieiatone idiom
Noses or cause, by id, with wate sative . . - 276
Mutes, the, classified . ‘
Miiller, Max, Professor, 63, 22 5s 230
-wa (-uar-), substantives in . - 156 wabnreiw, transitive and intransitive, 318 baénths, declined 5 ° . 22
BaAAoY, | in Soe 44, 296 Maupwvas . ° . - 169 pavddyw, stem of. A + 102 pdprus, irregular in declension 33 péyas, declined, 40; comparison of, 43 mei(wy, comparative, declined, 43 ;
double comparative from, . 45 HéAc, impersonal : » Iit HeAAw, auxiliary future verb 330
nev and 5¢, 377 ; without dé * 379
Mevowye . » 379 évw, stems and formsof . . 102
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
Mecolas ‘ : . ° s(6 peta, 272, sq. 3 distinguished from cup, 2723 with infinitive (accusative), 3 59 wh and od, 148; wh in questions, 149, 3373; with imperative, 337; with optative, 342; negative intentional particle, 352; after verbs of fear- ing . . : ‘ : +: 954 Bh yevoiro! . 8 ‘ < - 342
harap, ellipsis of . : é 61233 enti, interrogative . : : 937 =, verbs in é . : . 114 felyvupet ‘ : : : ~ 134 puxpds, &, dv, declined, 36; comparison
of . yee i 44. pimvnockouc, stem of . ‘ « 103 -ués, substantives in . F » 154 -~Wwy, -mov, adjectivesin . - 158
Mwojjs, declined . Z . : pvorhpioyv, predicated of Christ . 311 N.
Names, proper, in the New Testament, of various languages, 173; use of
the article with ; : + 201 Neander on mpocevxh . + ey Negative adverbs, 148, 369; joined to
predicate, 301 ; emphatic, 330, 3413 with infinitive, 354; with participle, 60; followed by &AAd, 375; com- insti of negatives. « 370 Negative indefinite pronoun » 317 Negative questions ‘ $336 Neuter, forms alike in, 17 ; plural sub- ject, with singular verb, 181 ; pre- dicate, with masculine or feminine subjunctive : ass Neuter verbs, 58. See Intransitive. Nominative, the case of the subject, 180, 222; of personal pronouns omitted, 303; predicate after copu- lative verbs, 185; for vocative, with article, 213, 2243; suspended, 223 ; elliptic . : ee + 223 Number of nouns, 16, 219 ; of verbs, 61 Numbers, compound and _ distribu- tive. ‘ j ‘ : - 49 Numerals, the, 46, 300; with geni- tive, 235; adverbs . . + 130
v épeAnvotiKdy . . . ot vp
153
v, inserted in stems - 102, 115 vd, in the modern Greek infinitive, 3 51 veavias, declined . ? . oe vduos, with and without article . 217 vous, declined, 25 ; irregularities in, 34°
O.
Object of verbs, direct (or nearer, pri- mary), indirect (or remoter, second- ary), by different cases, 243, 252} direct object of a transitive verb in accusative, 249; may be omitted, 251; ‘‘internal,” 251; object (direct or indirect) of active the subject of passive, 322; object usually placed after governing verb , « 382
Object of comparison in genitive, 229, 2945 or by 4, 295; may be omitted . , ‘ . - 296
Object-sentences, 344, sq. ; sometimes found with accusative object, 346, 384
Objective genitive - 257,)8Qe
Oblique cases, why so called =. 16
Occasion, the, sometimes by ad, 258,
276
Old Testament, its influence on the New, 387. See Hebrew, Hebraistic,
Olshausen on fulfilment of prophecy, 352
Omission of article in defined phrases, 195; to mark indefiniteness, 217; of fossa links between clauses, 384. See Ellipsis.
Opposition, by aAAd . é 6 99%
Optative mood, the, 59; subjective, 323 3 in independent sentences, 342; in indirect interrogation, 345 ; opta-
tive and indicative combined, 346 ; in conditional sentences . - 348 -
Oratio obliqua ‘ ; + 344.
Ordinal numbers, the, 47; cardinal
used for . J ‘ . » 300 Origin, by genitive 245 Ostervald’s version quoted . + 25% Oxytone words . ‘ ‘ - 9
‘O, 7, 76. See Article. O- declension, the (second) . » 20
MRR esa) ors : 53, 208, 307 otxeror, ellipsis of . : ‘ «239 oikos, ellipsis of (or oikia) . » 231
bAAvmE. 4 : . . _ 134
154
dAos, with article ‘ 4 . 211 Suvume . : ° . ° $934 évivnut : % ° $ . 124 bvoua, use of : A . 224. otbs, -eta, -v, declined . ° . 038
érws and iva, distinction of . » 349 épdw, defective, 112; augment of, 103 és, 4, 8, declined, 54. See Relative. -os, neuter (stem, -es), substantives inv. . . 4 4 - 156 dar(cov), odv, declined . ; yee $4 dotis, rts, 8,71, declined, 54, 313. See Compound Relative. -ootyn, substantives in ; . 154 ér:, particle introducing object-sen- tences, 344; relative causal par- ticle ; ; ‘ - 399 ov, the objective negative particle, in questions, 337; distinguished from bh, 148, 3693 4 Bh, 330 3415 ov
Movoy ... GAAG Ka. : . . 374 ovv and dpa. ; . - 378 ovpavol, plural . . 221
ovros, declined, 53 ; with article, 208 ; demonstrative force, 307 ; may refer to the more distant antecedent, 308
ovros ... iva . : ; 5 » 350 bgeAor, as particle > : - 343 -éw, verbs in : ~~ e - 159 &, interjection, with vocative . 224
és, a particle of comparison, with pre- dicative participles . > - 365
@oei . : : gals ROR éore, ecbatic, with infinitive, 359; with indicative ; ° s 359 P. Parallelism, Hebrew . ° - 386 Parathetic compounds : - 161 Parisyllabic declension . * 20 Paronomasia % - 386 Paroxytone
. . . . 9
Partaking, verbs of, with genitive, 235 Participial constructions changed for the finite verb. : . Haas Participles, the, ¢9 ; in -wy, declension of, 39; in -ds, 38; tenses of, 59, 366; with article, 191; as relative and finite verb, 192, 215, 3653
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
general use of, 360, sg. ; predicative, 361; adjunct to predicate, 363; attributive, 365; adverbial, 363 ; in broken constructions - 367, 368 Particles, the, 150; emphatic suffixes, 553 separable in composition, 162 ; inseparable, 163. See Conjunctions, Partitive genitive + 234, 8g. Partitive plural . . ‘ + 220 Parts of speech . ‘ , 68S Passive voice, the, 58, 322 ; sometimes difficult to distinguish from the
middle . : : ‘ -: 982 Past time, tenses expressing - 60 Paul and Saul - 174, 175, 176
Paul, St., his name, with the article, 202 Perfect state, tenses expressing . 60 © Perfect tense, the, 108; of. liquid verbs, 95 ; second perfect, 93, 109; third person plural in -av, 109 ; per- fect passive, 109; force of the per- fect, 338; distinguished from aorist, 343 aorist may sometimes be ren- ered by, 331; ‘‘ present-perfect,”
3353 perfect imperative . - 338 Perisp6menon A , 9 Permission, by imperative . - 338 Person, in verbs. ; 61
acu endings, in verbs, origin of . . ° ° » «<6 Personal pronouns, 51, 303} niiaeees tive subject when unemphatic, omit- ted, 303; genitive of, for possessive pronoun, 231, 303; pleonastic use, 304; avrds for third person . 304 Peter, St., his name, with the article, 202 Place, by genitive, 236; by dative, 248; by accusative. . 254 Pluperfect tense, the, 109, 334. 1ts notion expressed by aorist . 332 Plural verb in general expressions, 180; neuter nominative with sin- gular verb, 181 ; verb with collective subject, 182; with several subjects,
183; of substantives, how used, .
219, sq. ; plural forms with singular force , ‘ ° . ° Political terms, Latin, in the New Tes- tament . . . . ° 372 Possessive genitive . + 230, 89. Possessive pronouns, the, 52, 306; unemphatic, by article, 201; wi
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
the article, 209; for objective geni- tive. 4 . . « 303 Postpositive particles ‘ F » 372 Prayer, its ts ai by wepi or bép, pes : by ta . Predicate, the, 1773 3 anarthrous, 5 with article, 193 ; participles 28 361, 8g. Predicative verbs , , . 178 Prepositions, use of, 140, 255; with genitive, 140, 2573; with dative, 141, 261; with accusative, 141, 264; with genitive and accusative, 141, 268; with genitive, dative, and accusative, 142, 277; table of, 142; incomposition, 162; combined, 163; preposition and case, after article, 190; adverbially used, 144, 368; interchange of prepositions, 256, 285, sg.; governing several words, 289; with infinitive, 358 ; corresponding adverbs, 147; 3 adverbs as ‘* improper prepositions” + 147 Prepositional phrases, without article, 207 Present time, tenses expressing . 60 Present tense, its stem, as modified, 90, 95, 101; force of the tense, 324, sq.; aorist rendered by, 330; present- -perfect, 3353 present and aorist distinguished in imperative, 3385 in ee 3403 in infini- tive. 354 Price, equivalent, &e. , by genitive, 24.0 Principal and historical tenses, 60, 324 Proclitics, the . é Prohibitions, by future indicative, saith ov, 3293 by subjunctive aorist, with BN > 340 Pronominal "subject, its omission and insertion . . ° + 179s 303 Pronouns, the, 51, 303 ; personal, 51, 303; possessive, 52, 306; demon- strative, 307; relative, 309; inter- rogative, 3143 indefinite, 17, 3143 distributive pronouns, with geni-
tive. . . : . + 235 Proparoxytone . oh eg Proper names, with article . 201, 8q.
ProperispOmenon : : gh eng Prophecy, Old ‘Testament . ‘aga Punctuation ° ° : Pap |
155.
Pure verbs, uncontracted, 78; con- tracted . ; < ie 99
mais, declined , * - 19 maAw-, in ose nat < . « 162 mapa. - 282, sq.
was, declined, 39; its use with article, 209; in Hebraistic negative, 3083 3 may- in composition . , 162 mari, declined, 31; ellipsis of . 231 avout, perfect passive of, 110; with
participle ‘ Re “ *, 363 mel0w, conjugated ‘ . - 86 mesvceo, future of . ‘ “ . He
meipdoua, future of 104 mepl, 2733; compared with did, 2893 :
with d:rép é ; + 289 Tiixus, genitive plural, ™NX@V «399 mlumpnit . 124 nlyw, present and ‘second aorist of, 101;
future, 105; first aorist passive, 108 nlrre, stem of, and second aorist, 103 ToT evo, conjugated ° ° » 69 TALw, stem of, “and future . + 105 TATOw, second aorist passive . 108
mdovros, of variable declension . 34 Tlver'ya &yov, with article . - 206 mye, stem of, and future . + 105 mony, declined . é . ‘ 3 méAts, declined . ; P
modus, declined, 40; comparison of,
44; with article . ° - 212 wr epos . 315 Tpdooe, second perfect Sa ° 93 mpais, or mpGos (ora) . « 40 ‘mpémet, impersonal ‘ + III mps, 260; with infinitive . 59
an, ™pos, 283, sq. ; compared with eis, 288; with infinitive (accusative) * 359 mpos pédvoy, adverbial . . » 359
mpooevxn, special sense of . « 237 mpocéxw, elliptical use of . - 251 Tpopnrevw, augment of ‘ - 106 mvAn, declined . : . -, 19 galvouc, with participle . » 362 pépw, defective . é d . 112 gevyw, future of . ° ° + 105 gnut . ‘ : ‘ ‘ «124 pedvw, stem of . ° ° + IOI giréw, conjugated . ,. » 80
156
gpopéw, futureof. 5135 tie ROG
Wnrapdw . : . . + 227 Q.
* sete pe deh del the, January,
1863 . - 206
Quirinius, governor of. Syria 294
Quotations, with article prefixed. 193
Quotation, direct and indirect . 344 R.
Rational Concord. See Synesis. Reciprocal force of middle . + 320
_ Redundancy, apparent, 304, 308, 384
~
Reduplicated stems, 102 ; of verbs in
“pe. Fe Reduplication, 623 varieties of . 108 Reflexive middle ; ° - 319 Reflexive pronouns . a $8, 3Qx Regimen, combined . ° - 289 Relation, by genitive . : - 239
Relative pronoun, the, 54; compound or indefinite, 313; relative and ante- cedent, 309; case of relative, how determined, 309; relative in appo- sition with a clause, 310; relative
and& . - 343 Remembrance, verbs ‘of, with geni- tive. ° - 228
Renewed mention, by article Repetition for emphasis. 334. Revelation, the Book of, anomalous forms and constructions in, 168, 385 Resolved tenses . - 328, 330, 261 Result, by genitive of caaiive 358;
. 197
y Bore . ° ° . * 359 Rhetorical we. ° . » 219 Rhythm in sentences . . - 387
Roberts, Dr., ‘* Discussions on a Gospels” . : Romans, Epistle to the, drpeaneled” a
parallelism . . . » 387 péw, stem and future . . + 105 piryvups . : ° ° . 134 pia, declined » 26 “pos, -pa, -poy, adjectives i in. ‘ + 157 pvoum, augmentof . . 103, 107 povyvus . . . . « 135
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
8.
Saul and Paul
Second declension, paradigms, 23, sq.
Second tenses, the, g1. See Aorist, Future, Perfect.
Sentences, simple and compound, 177, 186; how to analyse, 188; qualified by article, 192; objective, 3443
- 1745 175, 176
conditional, 346; intentional, 349; |
changed structure in, 385; non- completion of compound . + 385 Separable declension . - 20 Separation, verbs of, with eae
Septuagint version of the Old Testa. ment . ‘ ; nee
Shakespeare -
Singular number, the, 2193 ; singular verb, with neuter plural nominative, 181; singular for collective, by article. 196
Smith’s ‘‘ Dictionary of the Bible, » 294
Source or author, by genitive . 225 Space, by accusative . - 254 Speaker using the plural of himsel
‘¢ Sphere,” by ers 248 ; ee év - 262 Stem, the, 3 15; verbal, 61; ; modifica-
tions of 90, IOI, 115, 153, 154 Stier, Dr. . ; 366 Stuart, Dr. La New "Testament
Syntax”. © 229.
Subject, the (nominative), 1973 3 with article, 193; of the infinitive (ac- cusative), 253, 3553; of passive verbs + 322
Subjunctive mood, the, 593 Snnnadeal from verbs in be, 353 3 strictly sub- jective, 323, in independent clauses, 339; after relatives or particles with &y, 343; in indirect interrogations, 3455 aorist as future perfect, 348 ;
in conditional eb 347; in
intentional clauses . 34.9 etree genders of, " classified, 154; declensions of, 48, sg. ; syntax
of, 219, sg.; number, 219; case, 222; with prepositions, 255; fol- lowed by ey 3 573 wee used - 368
: .
j ‘
et
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
Substantive verb, the, as copula, 173; as predicate, 179; with genitive, 236; with dative. ‘ + 243
Substantivized phrases - 193, 366
Superlative degree, the, 42; with genitive, 235 3 ; use of, 298 ; Hebra- istic 299
Synesis, or " Rational Concord "(con- structio ad sensum), in verbs, 182 ; in adjectives, 185, 2923 in avrds, 305; in the relative . + 310
Synthetic compounds . - 161, 163
Syro-Chaldaic dialect . . . 167
-s, appended to oftw, wéxpi, ype. = 4.
odBBaroy, of variable declension. 34
cadri~w, future of, 105; elliptical use
aes : . : é + 180 odpxwwos and oapikds . . ‘rb geauTov, js, declined, 523 €avrov used.
for . ‘ ‘ © 305 onuatve, first aorist of / . - 106 -o1S, substantives in . . ° 155 oxia, declined . Mr
oxétos, of variable declension. 34. ometpw, stem and forms + 103, 106 orhKe ° Z - 124, 159, 335 oTpepe, transitive and intransitive, 319 oTpayyupt é ° . 2395 ov, dpeis, declined ; 51 ov Aéyeis, formula of affirmation, 336 ovv, 263; distinguished from perd, 264. caf, first aorist and perfect passive OFF ‘ ° ‘ EOF Tdppav, declined . ° . vis ie
:
‘< Taxing,” the, in Lukeii. 2 . 294 Telic and ecbatic particles . 350, 359 Temporal augment, the . ~- 62 Temporal use of participles . « 363 Tenses, scheme of, 60; principal and historical, 60; characteristic letters, 63; expressive of time and state, 324 ; tenses of the indicative, 324, sg. ; ‘of the imperative, 338; of the sub- junctive, 340; of the infinitive, 354; of the participles . - 360 Terminations of the verb, table, 65, 8q. Than, by genitive after. comparative, 229,294; by # . . ° + 295
157
Third declension, paradigms, 26, sg. 5 terminations of nominatives . 27 Time, by genitive, 236; by dative,
249; by accusative. ‘ + 254 Tischendorf » 211, 217, 244, 340 Transition, particles of « 373,875 Trench, Archbishop . - 2226 328 rabrd and Tatra . - « 54, 209 Taxus, comparison of . : «BS Te, with kal, ascensive : © S93 TEAEW, future of, 1043; with parti-
ciples. . : ° - 362 Tépas ; ; 3 it TégoapeEs, -a, declined . : o 4 TnAe-, in composition . . - 162 -Thp and -Twp, substantivesin . 155 -TNS, -THTOS, Substantives in - 155 -Tns, -Tov, substantives in , ~ tse TlOnut, conjugated é : . 716 Tydw, conjugated ; : - 80 tiun, declined . . ; a tis; ti; interrogative . ° » 314 T.s, Tt, indefinite . F : » 316 Tovyapovy P = $ 1275 Totvuy . * : : é » 379 TooovTos yg : 4 » 209
Tpels, T pla, declined ‘ :
Tpépe, perfect, active and passive, 110 Tpéxw, defective . . , nts TpiBw, conjugated. . : - 86 “7 p0V, substantives in . ;: es tUmtw, second aorist forms . Qe Baud Cw, future of : P + 105 @<Aw, how augmented, ro2z ; emphatic
future. . - 3390 @eds, with and without article . 202 Oyyavw, with genitive 7 ° S27 évyjnckw, stemandforms . “1048 Opavw, perfect passive . ° . I1o
Uz Unconscious versification . - 388
Bdwp, declension of, 33; omitted after
certain adjectives . . + 292 vids, ellipsis of . ’ » 231 “Teds @cov, with article. » 204 -Jvw, verbsin . ° °
ae
158
irép, 274, sq.; distinguished from avzf, 275; from zepi » 289 Y @ ; ‘ ‘ - 4176, 8g.
V.
Vaughan, Dr. C.J... 12494; 323 Verb, the, 58, 318; verbal stem, the, 61; denominative verbs, 1 59 ; classes of verbs, 159 ; verbal predicate, 178 ; concord of, 181, sg.; transitive, with accusative object, 249 ; some verbs both transitive and intransitive, 2 50 ; verbs with modal dative, 246; with cognate accusative, 251; with double accusative object, 252; verbs with genitive of secondary object, 226, 8]. 235 3- with dative, 242, sq. ; complemented by participles, 362 ; followed by infinitive, 356; com- bined with adverbial force, 369 ; verbal forms as adverbs . Verbal adjectives in rés, réos «69
Vocative case, the » 224 Voice, the distinction of 58, 318 Vowels, the ; 3 > ts em Vowel aorist, the . ‘ a ROS
Vau, v, a lost letter of the Greek alphabet, called, from its shape, F, Digamma, f{ being an old form of the gamma. ° . 46
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
F, as influencing the declension of
nouns, 29; the conjugation ot
VORB es : » 105 W.
Want, fulness, &c., by genitive . 228
Watts, Dr. ; ‘ + 202
Webster, Rev. W. . 255, 328, 351 Webster and Wilkinson’s ‘‘ New Tes- tament”. . ; . . 196 Wilderness of the temptation . 196 Winer’s ‘‘ New Testament Grammar,” 197, 203, 216, 220, 239, 257; 269, 272, 295, 297) 298, 304, 321, 328, 329, 37% 377 380, 384
Wish, expressed by optative . 342 Words, formation of . ‘ ee eh Words of one language not precisely coincident with those of another, 256
Z.
Zeugma . , ° ° - 383 Zampt, Dr. A. W., on Quirinius, 294
(dw, infinitive ; (iv, future. » 105 Zevs, genitive, Aids. ‘ . 34 Cévvumt, conjugated . ° » 130
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
[The letter s prefixed denotes the number of the paragraph in the chapter on Synonyms, }
I.—OLD TESTAMENT, CHIEFLY THE SEPTUAGINT.
Genesis.
. VER.
Leviticus. ( 1 . 2,
. 32
2 AS
Numbers.
Deuteronomy. 5
Joshua. 25 . .
175
1 Kings. CH. VER. PAGE 1.43. 318” 18. 44 . 198 45 198 2 Kings. Lay . 169 3 169 23. 10 169 1 Chronicles. 23. 31 34 Nehemiah. 5. 18 264, Psalms. es Se i 16. 10 232, 268 Sab Bg pel 890 25. 11 380 45. 1 248 51. 4 321 68. 18 251 103. .2 gor RIS... Bes - 258” 22 . © 266, 312 23°. 282, 293 20 +o * et 0) “198
CH.
25.
Proverbs. VER. PAGE 30 6) iste Fag Isaiah. 10 or. tie SES 14 197 i Arey Pa | 14 233 33 . 169 4 266 8 age eae 1 244 1 248 Jeremiah. 22 o/ 376 bs a 169 . Hosea. Gre. 370 Amos 26 . 270 12 313, 323 Jonah 8 « 1e@3Q99 Micah, Beige el eee
Ww
_ Matthew.
VER, PAGE 1. . 195, 205 Oe a> wade Set
Li. . 278
16 pin 305
9 Sots ae 48
18. . 207, 241,
362, 379
20 241, 271, 338
Zi. 179, 258,
395) 329, 379 22 2 « 191, 268, 352”
ose) e - AO7a 272
1. «. 197, 207,
241, 261, 263 2.. 245, 356, 379 3 . 34, 173N, 210 4 . 205, 282, 326 5. . 190, 379 6° . (261, 379, 816 he 197; 86 5:35, AR —o 350 O1bGe eos FAO
10+, 251 a 264. 12°. 354 13 242, 330,
358, 379
14. itr. 236 15 re Uae 18 . » 820
20. 222, 334, 379 A 352 1 ‘Te en ee 325 2. 379 3. - 379 4. "866, 274 Bis Fuse 273 ark 83, 234, 280,
314, 8 8 . . 240, 379 9. . 259, 379 aE Sie eK YE bl. 4) 28aj,290
12. . 247, 312
13... * 258,358
M4) 0. 928; om
lI.—NEW TESTAMENT.
ey) eer
‘ :
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES
Matthew. CH, VER PAGE <3 | ees 379 ee - 245 ) bs ar 106, 223, 259, 333 1. . 396n, 276 3. 204, 347, 35° 4. . 263, 279 ae Ses Biss Bin 858 BO is 5 ak SE Lhe 5.» 5:9445 437 Ce ir me. | 15s 255 17. ane ih” $70, 289 21 as 231,249 - 23... .. 239n, 306 24, .. ». 29%. 319 1-16 . «te Eg. 6. 366,268 2. 363, 384 3 hak 48, 329 3-1] ° 382 4-8 179 4. ey 5 40, 178, 194, 329 6.2 ae ie S60 8 . . 248 9 ode 385 10. 201, 329 st ° « 180 13 195, 262, 276 15 172, 190,
198, 277, 280
16. ce. B14, 938 _ IT «© 340, 375, 377 Wo. .. 35, 179, 301, 341
19 . 343 20 179, 294, 341, 343
21 179, 248, 288, 329
22 . 852, 170, 179, 244, 288
25 oe ee
Matthew.
28 6 8 « 6 682,936 30. os oe ee Se a
- + 263, 354 Ae ea mei BO. 2 Ae tag eee 179, 292, 313, 319, 374
40 9866, 321, 331 al "5 172 42 . oe: SE 44... 179, 275, 337 45. .- @ ..). +318 46 314 AT. os. eae 48. ‘Fag
l 85, 821, 285, 359
2. 325s 340 343 ae « es 4. 250 5. 329 O55 338 ‘ie 86, 363 8. . 359 Oi 303 9-11 338 10 . 277, 303, 374 12; “... a’. 0:0 ee 13, .. » . 29%, 208) 292, 314 16. . 3§0, 362 | a » gat 18. 263, 362 22. o So tpg 24. 169, 211%, 236, 300, 356 25 244, 345 26 Ris 205; 372 27... 364 28 866, 244, 274, 315 318 | ee ee 136 34
prion 191, 267
a le
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES
Matthew,
VER. PAGE L sets B98 2 . 287 D> mye RET BRO,
303, 315 6 . 191, 243, 387 Diageo pees
Bien a CEES 9. . 2525 337
§ ee week,
Boe 8 a ee Oe
13-15... 382
BO eee ore RES
15 oft SENSIS
16 . 258, 287, 337
20 oo jjange A BIG
21 301, 313
22 AIRE Da Y 5
23 224, 334
24 sa28F, 280, 313
2 A I Cor
1 ea 313
Gees ks, « , & 05409
29 184, 328 1 eas S2y hehe Se Rees 2 BS 6. BBS, HR a areas yc 9. 380
AG. og ef 399
Lh ar 179, 207
ine ge) eh 280
Ly roe 352
18 . 274
tt 300
24 . i.e MESS
25... 319, 337
26". os", sf hheRS
28 . 259, 354
4! ae ie 246
32. o .) 270 1. . 198, 307 Goats, es at See L &, face ae PS 5 Atel. a TEES teh. ae a RRO Be Sine \ ip el eee By cig tg eget
11 Sool hy ae" Se
13. 34, 334, 370%
TO en) eu SE
CH.
9.
10,
ll.
12,
Matthew. VER, PAGE 16 . 813,825, 289 17 mire 8 ZO 22 » + 358 28 336, 344 29 Lae Xo 34. 262 35. . 239M, 293, 327 36 274, 327 37 PI 1 Rees cy, 2 ty , oe ee pe eB RPE 4 6a, CS | i eri 15 » 263,295 18 . 265, 377, 377” +s | RE se 1, fo Bh ne 5 SE 22 . 270, 308, 330 Oe Wes. 5 1890 25 2» 350 26 so acs 27 *,, my od SES 28 852, 250 29 171, 240, 301 31 er ele 42 223, 292 | oF 362 age aid «1 eae 3 191, 196 5 . 830, 291, 323 7 » §5, 196 S . 136, 252, 375 P26 ME ee OES ae . 260 ta nage LY - 369 14. $3, 331 1G 5 he ge em 21 Wk hb meeeg 23 oe eee 25. 363, 384° 26. Mie nye x 28 - 284 re - 40, 258 30. Age 3 ee 183, 272 ee - 349 10. 228, 336
Matthew CH, VER. PAGE 1D. 2 i ge’, SLO ae ao) SOR IT» <n eee 1S a RA fet ee 20. . « 5) aloe 22. 387 ys aera $4 i hee PO's ss ke eee 29°. - 196 33. - 378 35. of 9g6 36. 223, 263 4], 42. , - 195,\217; 273 47 . o jmgi6 13.- 2. , . « 398 3 192, 244 4 192, 254, 263, 282 5. - 358 $5 327 13. xe y- 14. < is.) 9505-465 P| SEP aaa 227 20-23 . 308 se . 189 96s oa ee 25 . 197, 264, 359 25-40. 6 EFI 26. 197 29 . 148 30. «559 31. ook 32. - 359 35. op 52 38 . 178, 308 39 . - 194 47 . 870 52 “gaa 56 - 284 14 3. 236, 332 i oe Peay Le ae 272 ae 221 25s 301 2. 355 26... 258 27 6d eee 29 . 280
161
162 Ya’thew.
GH, VFR. PAGE 14. 31 236 314 gst 1, ~ 2 4 ~~ $296 aL, 308, 196, 308 . 12.:. = te nee se
cL Perr ae eat 78
G8 a Me. me 234 25 4 244
26 ote 198 Zeer f, . aad 30. 282 32. 223, 281 ols 235 16.63 ~. moh oe B:.% 315 14... -. 221, 300 1G... +. - 195,'204
18 « - 852, 178, 377, 386
ee yyy. = 3 Ze» *s © 330,'342 Ree wt. *. > 885, 331 26 o § 855, 211 a 343 Wedic: sae 326 4... 245, 356 BD... 214
9 + 242, 207 a2), 330
17 ° 369
26 : 348
22 . « 890 U4. -. - 198
2 Ah 26 : - 379 ele +» . 265 al ie - 297 Gls.>. oi E74.
7 a . 258
Siwy te 296,356
Oke a 252,298
| | ar a 352 12 ° 49, 243
sb tee a 295 Be eS Vt Caen
21 cae Ss TOU0
22. . 147, 369
23 o% et 6,438
UA, °° a's’ goo
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES,
Matthew. CH. VER. PAGE 15." 20--04(,° >. +5” 3at 28°. 5 ae Bore. +. te Hs EOF 5 - 80, 266 8 . 207, 284 CAs ce hie a RON 13. 306, 328, 349 $4 Moe 808 26 (5 - 300 ay *, 292, 347 18 . Tee 19 -, vw» 2808 22°. 328, 363 23 -. i 370 26°. 282 28. 162, 277, 280 We 22% 254 oe 261, 274 Bi; pig ae ‘ 376 ae s *s | 20g 10... oe ee i2<. 199, 243 19 +. oe 'e49 20 . . tans 21 2595 300 22-. 320, 330 23. 192, 377 28. 257, 356 30-34 + kee aoe PAS, ee ae Ege 4 - 352 Of «40 8. 182, 289 8-11 eye | 9-. 171, 196 az, - 198 16<.. ; gees aS. ere 19°. é te eee 23. 325, 378 25°. 5 Se he | er o 415 os. . 458 40 . - 340 42 266, 282, 293, 312 22,2. 333 Di ie "389, 307” 8.
+ 377
Matthew.
CH. VER, PAGE 22.10% 6. °: o* 374 16.4% - 368 7. «RIE
20° . 3AM
a ae 325 29: 0 ol nkOs 35 e 02309
37 - 855, 287, 989, 329
39 -. He Me 329
42 6 os 05
43 .-. » 062 5 re Se a ee . 170
15 -. (5° 6523 19% URNS sa Ve nals 89 yk 6 ee eee
24 . 198
27 . 86, 243, 377 28. . 86, 377 ne ee ee BS. -+s ~ 0 +e 852 arden.” 37 . Me. 198 39-. .- 196, 258 / Ss SERRE y 280, 341 65. » %e' 390
9 o => <s SR8O
12 . 212, 270, 358
16 <. +s 4s Sip eee 18. 267, 289 oe 191, 369 22. - 301 27. 29°. - 361 40 . 0° 428 45. “+s BES 25.1". 865, 313 4, o* a7 o4 327
8 . ia at ee 14. 307”
15 397 37. 335
40 . 281 26, °° 2: : 265) 273, 325 8 221
12 . . “278, 359
16 . . . . 302
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Matthew. CH. VER. . PAGE SUS UTER A ec a oh Ge 22 oe ee 23 263, 308 25 . 272, 336, 337 26 116”, 195 28: . 195, 366 32 254, 359 OSs * 3 o> 0 447 3D. 263, 341, 342 Mee ae! Che FN GTD 45 o SR3S 46 - “319 d3 . 171, 296 o4 . + ct GAS 55 . 835, 281 56 67, ee Se 59 . 211n 61 . + 269 63. vary G9. of) 400 73. 168, 380 ake &. ¢ T4279 5. | 320 ae e170 S. - 369. : ) a et 336 12. 254, 359 17 e* at 98S ps ae oe -925 23. ~ 380 24 . 329 26. . 171 7 chee. BIR 29 ot IREO 33 on eh ALIO 37... 221 40.. 366 44, ot eRe 46 170, 314 48. 1. «+ 221, 300 Ghee end we hc OSs 54. oe AO": 57 . © 85, 318 62-. ot ot ss Se rere ts yy 2 | OO Sa. set hz 8) 394, 28. 1-.+. - 148,236, 301, 376 rhe eee 332 Oxo melts 334
Matthew. , PAGE LB EVR es oh 394 9. 374 | 8 SR ae GS Sh oF i oa 819, 266, 279, 305, 318, 363 Mark.
By oe i205 Bs - 260 4. «- “EMag6 b's 313, 357 13 . o « 5962 lo . 870, 289 23. . «> ot, 258 24... .. 152, 191 Die. ears eae 29... 231 33. 211n 36. 190 39. 328 ) hee 269 4, 171 15. 359 19}. » 263 23. . 356 2. 345 5s « 832 13-26 373 | ie A - 169 1S. ¢ wx PERS 21: 282, 344 25 . - 344 ) Lan 351 19. . 274. >) as 337 24. ° 250 23. 294 rt ee 230 OOo phates eaae a one aney et V. tet E% 6 ot 248 Qe a ee BPE, 184 Dds od ‘sm gb gt 284 13.2% + 270, 3or 14., 47 ohh 325 AGe os ot BFR 925 Bhs opto te to ROL 22+ 0+ 6+ 0 4 6 300 23-454 319, 340
Mark. CH. VER, PAGE» B ZO ee 544 33 ona 198 35 sth; 231 41 ou. SPR aoe 42 .... 246, 380 6. 2 . Ra er ea 290 Oise s 270 To) 0 2 49, 237 Ble gh oy conn ges 1l 277 1G. se 312 21 *- 221, 249 ys ae 273 4 Sea 171 38. 221 40 223, 264 45 : 179 49 . ore hi O 50. os 6 E99 GO es ee s+ e349 7. & «+172, 320, 321 Bis ays - 170 LP 221 22; o* « o (299 25 . 313 R's. 198 3l . 264 34 ‘ 170 3D: «+ « 327 36: vs ce et > AE Sets 4 of R29 10-18 . 2.373 1S 4+ « 261 25 ‘ . 162 26 é . 326 34 é + 338 35 : o 33U 36 : . 211% 38 : ov ERS Oot Us ess 327 fee . 226 12... 28255397 IOs - 369 20 eo et 385 QT Ce fe ef el ae 34. 0? +.) 297 37+. > « +5279, 378 40-. oh et OR 41... 205; 341
163
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
43-47 . 45 .
AARON IOHPOODRHOSRES Some Som See ee coapwes
Mark. Mark. 7 Luke.
Pat CH. VER. PAGE CH. VER. PAGE
- 44,296 |14.19.. 49, 149, 272 WY eae Se
rar Ly) ED i es. 0 eaten . 206, 30°
» = bg6 BO oe ce eh ee Le 19 . 284, 3237, 331
< pw OES mL.Ga% ; 930) 342 aU 6 we SSR
oe Oe OO c..bole Aas SL ww ie | SRE SSO
: - 8, 266 HO de on BFOeRe Soc" «pe wees . 180, 306, 328 Bn vp a Mee es: 0 | 6 \, ae ew 10 goo SS a ep L : | SRP 9 ; ears Te Oy. (5s via RRO So .¢ «)* 923,280 «4 GOF,300 OS. ..., 269, 362 See eae ies.» 1 bike Os fa 4! a eeS BF Bi ok Peis beRAOS 46-52... . 221 61 . .- 828, 190 41. ce. oy 008 oS ae ol pEIO OO, kita y bs Sayeed ea 235 TERS oa wc CIRO cee ees
3 See D5. eae 46-55 . . . 387 $565.9 0b RSQ Gs i 03s 5ogg36 DO Se tee Ree os ETE ay is; eke wiaeed Sl. 4, 26575399 ar ary cya | Racists ss > WS 53, ..-.. 2289493 ey wa:0 WERES AD. serves 0 Ohanst | ere er . © «: 328 16.":. . 311 + mie eae ary Ty J papa 252 62 . x) ot'863 b Mike yer: BTC wees oY 207 G4 sw anaes Sr tte ate 325 <I I ee eb Lo OY ae eee) BAG aes eae 345 68-79 .*.. 2, 387 bake ite = % (R09 ee ss 0's .etieGe 7: ROS afer Ces peed. L OTMR soa est ARTO 16°." so ee puny: R66 312 | ON ers eS 7D: oe 6 et ROO ; 278, 341 Oi ese, 8715204 Srl... g7ees . 190 44. . 171, 334, 345 2. + 294, 299 Rate wh pipeeees et 8 4.. 861, 314, 358 s+ 6 © 278 RES FS 5. s at eae rie eee Tie Bag « / @38,Se2 veer peer. Ly,
. 287, 290 Zw. e, 296; 308 Bois. wy eee sits. i QOS ey ee 10‘... 210 3a3n Terman. Bis . 322 12 éi, ee ping ame, ease Dine. oc he eee LS) os, apenas ; 171, 300 Oey se SOF 18. a os staee © +, 221, 293 ae ge 0 207 Oe Se. a v1 eee Bs ee + 357» 389 374
. . . . . . . 32 ne Wwarhe Cl Lnuke. 20+ we. eee sie) ates EROS A, 1. , 3§3, 33% 379 29-32. . « 387 « 267, 289, 341 Ag ce. 0. WOT Sl... 210,273 2 ©. 30%, 349 Boe eye. 0 mgs " ERR ss a Ree Bee a, TE Of oo a0) shee oe, 330,362 Per Ss. 39 . 190, 272, 332 a ie a ere Gi ee we RO O1 sc 6 i's ne Lee ark awe pe ee Oe ce 0. MEST 48.5: < © 308, 332 py pen te Zor | APS 49... , 23%: 315 "a wens BDsist 's . 0, 0S BSD poe Se el cet eee
he
go 8
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Luke. VER. PAGE y OM aE ESA Bie ag cea? wee it Seen rh IG 4.6. 289,312 18. 4); .. -293)-323% Pek 6, 4) eget Mea. on #306 MEM sy i 4c) BGTO au ies: ab esse Paty ae. an OS BO 9. 6 wt SG Se ena. a eee | MRS Be 1D is a, IOP B24, 323%, 334 Horacs «eon era ict e PATS Seite ie. «. afi Re a6, ae SST: MB as BIT 923N BPW oS i'ey a RIIS Bip ie: s, B8g6e Beil o. 360, 20 ai was oitves SRP IU oss, 29%, 33°
eee go, anh 385
BE NG, ed ASSO Me 66. ey ARGO ee Gee ke a ate aera Ae 7 re) | Orr orrra SAE Cie Seo, aie ese Wine tet 0 ahh O8N Pee a, oe, Ain OS Pee lh. i. ERS A a fe 9 1 ERA OR RS yA Pee ge og EROS ee ae es ee pee RRS > Uo Pans, dy CAROD DR ius se) 6s S05
We hPa aes 34 . 321, 350, 380 SO ets, 2825 329 DE Oh os a, Ba Pe ee wee CS ar ee 1 44 . . 287, 307
> &
10.
Luke. VER. PAGE AY. oe ge Ae ee 385 48. . « « 369 Ds at 0* 84," 330 IBese - eel Te. 317 25 136, 375 SON dt er e948 45 362 46 ss «6 8 818 47 212 48 312 Bus 272 6. 108 ae 108 TOL oe an os: oe SES 13 . 277 15 821, $31 23 327 29 . 249 30 171, 182 33 270 39 271 41 373 45 264 49 344 52. oi Se 36g 54 213, 236 + ae 264 Pek les ee are Seg 8 ‘ oe 83r7 13... 197, 295, 347” AGS Co ar 64 16 SE197 23 331 24 331 25 21IN 1) A MEE Rey 28 223 30 314 31 330 34. 330 BD, a me's hh a 1 OIG oes +> 8h dn ee See 41 . 369 Mk én nee FSI 46. .. 193, 297 ki ce fe > -gghaba, 293, 33° Haas aalsereeere 94 Ta a> ot ee O90 Ie un os 6 wie 29S
11.
12.
13.
Luke.
PAGE
* 339, 342, 357
2212, 370 83 179 179 3°5 373 313 o* «@ 28% ot agg Pere yb! Pe) GO 163, 247 Aiea 5: 299%, 321 o ot 2330 839 - 358 «’ 385 we POE a" S00 en a iS e785 353 of” SEIN «* #2 S99 263, 305 ve aOR 852, 359 171, 301
°
eee e uw fo) [ee]
Luke.
CH. VER. PAGE Sa | a eer Ds . 266 9 Sar 320 aera ae 207 SO ae » 18” 145 B60 - 249 Siwkie se hee 105
» eee Se yy Setar - 184 OS is 332, 368
19 ctg92 24. 227 30. 208 OL + 261 ib 4+ oe as ‘ 296 15: 16, 242
19 . 357 20. 207, 226 26, 862 27. 326 29°. 254
3 ie ier 365 : ar 363 4. 229 Bites 23%:276
9 . 169, 259, 320
UD Se, lis) ooh O13 Bice» 3,969, 982 be ae TT:
nO 6, 20 . 323 fires ete 0s, (i220 Re ms. 8295 420 25... 191, 308 26... +0. +6 279 Pee 5 ETO ieee, 269,350 Bite ta, R52, 905
ee ye . 1236 Sie el oo 11EOS
a2 ss 2 11g 26
| Dae 9 - 344 D8 ig. Gite ie RRO RAR ce ae . 209 32. o 0 $828 34, o v0 {BRS BO. »'. 285,'330
(| a Cee eel 0 le een
19.
20.
21.
22.
Luke.
. VER, PAGE Seer 2.36 Sao.) MSR ee DD toe sey ae 378 OD es SIG S85 IS +s 0, wi =) 49 a4. Vb SGR, BOF eae 34.1 | * 373 35-43 . 2 eee “10 EMDE RS 2335 3. a. », 258m, 346 8. «235, 325 | - *369 or s18 20 ; 171 37%. &. 382,'292 BO, sce.) wy, “193 BO 6. eS. BMI 42, . en'-383 44... 257, 279 ae - 345 A - 378 ite - 369 Dae - 369 ) Ce gaa By ig sy ¢ 966 Her2 ROLS is - 358 20.. 165, 254 | 221 DD a" eke 504379 35. 214, 236, 354 Sas 221 5. Rae Ty Aree 386 12. «1 262 19 . 267, 335 22°. rs} ¥/ 24. 178 26... . . 221, 290 34. + 305 37. - 366 Oo. ww ue fe TQ 14. s..Jc one SESS 15... 246, 359 19.) .. 904;'366 20. .. 273,°359 a 377 2... . 297 BS. 2 357 BO... is 316
23.
24. .
aorDS =
Luke.
7 . - . . . . .
PAGE 193 254, 373 - 83, 383
of 26a st) S800 225 368 341 341 336 369 345 . 284. oto 905 375 314 Pe 5 207 207 204, 214 370 ; 301 o* ae + 334 ¢ 298 o SBS 22.4, 174 264. 253 357 812 328 358 361 + + 334 248 227 258 812 255
John.
194, 207, 284, 382 207 194 321
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES,
John. PAGE e224 eee 372
e es 220 185, 228, 282
+ 294%, 297; 299
257, 373 #308
¥ 169
5). ERO
348
206, 2.90, 348 ew em ah 196
196
301
301, 359 ia eee - 384
387
387
oo we Bee 361
> 6 246
. 824 es bes 334 +6 , ap 208 oe « 259
John.
16n,
238, 346
PAGE 184, 373 311, 342
o* 312 « 382 - 198 290, 380 - 169 + 273 » 346 engage «397 304, 340% ¢) 497 - 307 + 254 183, 211% we, 0/254 ee eK » 308 «i 86 « -327 369
med |
210 + 239 - 306 . 865
294
331
385 - 348 336, 347 + 241 182, 278 - 330 ee! 2212 221, 300 « 253 - 254 179, 337
167
John.
PAGE
4 208, 287, 309
e 222 ere ee os
YS ag! (eee eee
221, 377 © + ¢ 270, 374 ot gee 458, Ae ‘ 383
OG ei Oe YS Geran is Be Lien hee raat Gs aa eee BS 328 16 Pee ee os TF a Meh et eee Be So et ea 23. 211, 351 ya a er 4 nr ed SA a 02s) ee 35. «eee 36. < Ve aay 38 . on eee 41 . » 380 45 . 308 49 . 185 8 4. tae 9 - 49, 272 1G. 03 3" 9s age LY Geriatr Bethe f8 5 0 wha 368 29. 33% 333 400°... 334 ae "sto, 349 44. 2075 306, 331 SL. 341 ny CaN eg 183, 227 Be Sr oa 314 De ar ame O98? 60” a ae rt 2s. oi wi ee Sree ere 16-6 °. Se. ee pe ea SF 24°65 56 so eee BO 55's ey eee SS Rett | G3. eis Tee rn
ik;
12,
. . . 7 e ° : ° e . e ® a e e
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
ow e656 & ie) oo
CH. 13.
14,
15.
16.
17.
John. VER. PAGE EE OPM Say 2 §-. 2) 973, 198 Oy 202 neta ESO EI ac | 20.6 e* (83H 487 AE ee eg * ae g68 Se Ae 16 . o/ 12g0 BF 6065 9 0 BES 5 a Ber ba i ea on Se | eat a + 333 > a SE - 326 ae 268 7. 349 + ae ee eka 312 15 . 339 16. 1632 PT 8g ye ROB Beg At 0) 9 850 26 . 163n, 206, 252 27. 214, 387 Bets s * SEQ Bie. te) ‘sa? ie SOE oe ol Eh ee | B.t5'." 6. ty. 5 ESO Big sis Ne “S50 a eer he | Bry et ots Re EZ io: ele 44 808 a8. ete "es B99 20 4 . . . 347 22. o *s 349 25°. op age 26" ¢ +2 1206 Ss » te EF 2. 86, 351, 375 4. » te EOF 13. . 198, 206 ag‘ «; o ty *9R8 20-. +. * 2665975 2D +s *s ete 88D 24. 2's “s 320 BB 2 ve te OGO i a ee tet 29... - « 846 On“. “eo % ta “ESE 2 . 121M, 237, 353 3 » 824, 350 a i |
John.
CH. VER. PAGE ae oe oe 20 | Par pei et
10 . 209, 211, 306
| + eres - 352 15. . . 8&9, 292 Ly Soe - 194 OO -n* ce a eS 24. 0 10, OO 1852.3 198 5. . 179 BPs" - 179
8 2° 6° (279,204 ree 352
BD ei! 6 hia! fener
pt dae 5 vi a So 263
3 ° 315 24. » 332 28 . «sei ee 30 + 349 32 ¢ 9. tee ee bee eS BB. 5: oid) eee 37°. 259, 336, 337 it ek Reed ake o> TOF 13. - 169 yee tad ns | 19 . °172, 221, 227 BO ie ty Mast eee 24 . 340, 352 25-. 142, 174, 231, 282
- 7 er ee aa 232 Ra ia ae pes 28-80... 352 DO i 6 Pc ee 30 - 813, 106
Oh ceo MBE Re ee ie: ee Poe Rees Se Ee POMEL + 3 \ BO aos 265, 301
2 .-. 180, 290
1843, 211, 265 o ig Soaee + 43”, 145,
265, 294
21.
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
John VER. PAGE a 268 by otis . 284 12 284, 30C 14 ‘ - 344 16. 170 17 e505 19 ° 301 | ae 206 25 211, 342 28. ¢ °2¥4 oe 2.93 > Searie 108 6 . 258” 8 . 39 10. 258 ll 49, 228 13. - 384 14 334 15. 230, 231 15-17 816, 819 16% 231 17 Patient Ce 18 ‘ 332 19. 332 23 Pome eee Ch 2D. 6 ee 3,54 Acts. Tay 6022S; 2905-371, 329, 373) 377 pe AY camer age 7 2 8 3... 269, 359 Qo a 297,385 et S: @0R,"287 Yk kT Oo ana ae 8 RO ene: $29, 2374 Rs Gh” 27G2ae ORR peti 9 18" = 2° 38,250 cL eee - 169 Bore we FOR GIT ee ott ete TeOS 1-13 ‘ig Be Bt sys) + SRE rae ays 361 ce 206 10. 271 Ler 362 RA et Bog) 258
Acts,
CH. VER. PAGE y | Pe ey kt 22. 845, 311 24 > 4 387 25 265 27 . 852, 231, 268 29 «> s+ | S68) 373 31. 231, 268 34. 221 Da ERT 2 > 38 . 205, 266,279 5»: ae a 9a 45 , - 343 46... PR yy 7 re - 366 5 ee er 183 2. . 116n, 180, 326, 366
Bora? ow BSG4 4. qo on GGy BD. «+ egaG 7. 234, 364 Satie br <0 983 IOs a> a & 9g8 The or 0+ or 292 12 « - 958) 364 1S. os + 308 WD die ox et F952 ee es Wb 25 . 861 BEE Ds oi b> ga eee gsG 7 . 290, 293, 364 8 . . 206, 364 Dh er EO: ole AEE RE 13 wr a+ 964, 384 EB! oe girs = Vay BG ek Ga fe SFT 17. «> «>. 946,-282 18 . o's) «g6g 19: «6 295,364 | ae Serer. bk 21. ot 6 1364 Sey et Zoo * o> «hk wel aGe POs ot a oe BIS 7 Sar $62 Ee ae 333 ae ar aie $62 : 2 ere er lek. pL) SOD or eas, 36 CS i Wee 364
- 174, 245»
315, 363,
* 235, 141, 395, ‘272, «5 S50 206,
‘ "171,
319;
11,
12.
# 152, 336,
x.
od 343,
aol “I
o* .
267, 3
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Acts,
CH. VER PAGE AES 4 Pe aie Bee A By OE ee Pe 257
13. 7-12 fo HAT TS 9. 5 als vee
10 . 225, 337, 362
IB .s 6 0.:.2 2490
1B xe «oo 8 E25
20. . o~ soee4O
ae is 173%, 254
OF uy i - 266
23. « ow ees
3l . sero 33. 204. 34. $23
40 . «| 222
42 . « 267 45 . - 363
47 - 358 1&2 arere ~ - 189
5 ° 357
Di % 248
9. 357 n0.\. 201
OF ab ke oe ak 13. 867, 34, 260 06s cis ot AO DOS so rey 20 53 21... 4. 250, 318
5 Ae ioe os?
Be Pas winks eT
15. | 1: ss 246 a." 273
BD) 36. te) 182 SM er yee ee | 17. 310, 313, 323
Bis iet) Gs a PREFS
23. . 308, 360
28 . és ke
BS ee’, BI§,293
36. . 815, 310, 316, 319, 346
iGies. «is Ses ees DB. .o . 8855 384
4st 9 ougaz Doe 269 12. eRe 13.... 838, 237”
BD ce oT
16. . 815, 320, 356
18,
19.
20,
e
: 87, 68n,
. 262, 339,
he.) 6-6). bt te
210, 297 844, 297 + 837, 217 386 227, 340, 379 189, 383 842 368 2.52 354 \ 283 349 329 838 322 . 296 » 336 206 211 baz + 347 178 210" . 301 « 320 274 208 . 266 211M 297 385 380 347 380 357 175
ee. Ore > 6 Pate e-, © a5 o) Se
21.
22.
23.
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES,
Acts.
17%
f 296,
PAGE
865
: 815, 198, 258”
197
2cgn
813, 320 816, 849, 307, 321
- 362 227 296 868 369 ° ° 307 374 312 365 363
211 362 336 195, 198 167 ‘227
346,
322 33° : 356 eiate 920 oe set meee s bei
851, 246 254, 357 « « 317 299, 360 a Sf « -«, 269 xe U2Q8 144, 299 367 ° « 209 310, 364 399
2112
258n
Acts, CH. VER. PAGE 24.17 . . 269, 376 IS | o-* e. eeegTO 1g**, 278, 348 20 . wm ez 107 22. 297 23. 198 26%. 242 2 * OY 277 rae 2) S04 Su, 27170 Git, 2 278 105. 297, 361 IT «3 oF eh Gag 19, 844 ols, 176 23. F 272 253. ~ 396 26 .. 165, 278 4 EBA . 106 26.7 2-7 . 217 Dive 278 SB % 255, 271 4, o> OFF Bite 6 ut oes Glee og = oS 7 . 164, 312, 368 Be os + Sie. SSIS 14g ee + 5 to 267 1632" « 309 yo 310 24 . 201, 212 25%... «99 29... e+e 343 SOUS Rete ls. <9 8ES 32.» ora? ASS Py PR BOF 247 8.5 298 9.. s +34 10. 355 13. 36, 145, 298 14. ete) 870 16... = 247, 353 MDS as Pe ace ae Bae 20 ws « *e 357 RO: oie e ae 34... -. "142, 283 SB]; shia + a eae 88 io) 6 0s Ne g6 39 6 ow He 80 1348 43. 2 «© 83, 229
Stet.
Romans.
. e
8
345
. 828, 221, 232, 247;
231 239”
. 204n, 222
238 204
+ + 21%, 397
320 278
244, 317 + 317, 369
219 187 $58 356 258 283 233
72
Romans.
CH. VER, PAGE 2. 27 Cah ot. te 364 3. 2 . 253, 322, 377
a Rae ee Ds <9: ae BROS 46. wo gd 20 . 218, 301, 330 ana OS SO hears” 228," 332 25 - » 842, 849, 288, 321 a s+» 49%, 258 ees | YB, 979 a 378 30. 285, 379 3 ey 1167, 218, 375 aes | Sb 1 > 187 Mee ec ae« Oat Bs) 4) SO, OS, 266, 376 2 ron Sam © De tebe: REDO ADS. 2 233, 286 Poh bet, 2 10 ROO Eve ia 6 + £800 ek es % ve6o 18 bt ve ce 283 ED). e awe age (gO PD ’o . @) 7 B40; 303 22 Y Sv eee ee 266 sit. +» 260, 200, 34°, 340” Be ie tom ERO ee FR ae, a 238 Ser .4 (eases a5 $21, 275, 291, 380 Te 6 te lan (295 Bebe: 1851307 10 . . 286, 340n Tit. - 367 12s 208, "279, 386 LD cas ia. EROT 13-17 . 386 15-19 212, 347, 386 ie 366 18 . 239, 379, 386 20 - 163, 218
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Romans.
PAGE 245, 313, 242 266, 378
194, 329, 336 o ai'ed URES ° 308 » 821, 377 . 342 . 157 ee B55
© . 224, 233 - 34, 304
214, 255; 274 - .» 206
° «2 270
+ . 854, 330 - 170, 384 o . 285, °382 ° 279 . 369 233M, 364 .¢ .« (247 o .+ 347 163, 193,
209, 345
J
52
221, 277
266
» 234, 377, 382
347 «+ 347 olen RBS » - 03 968 304, 351 224, 387 eee
bea SRS 270, 386 212, 272 ‘ 292 6 sp, eee 265, 282
. 382
- 849, 335 e 239, 332 * s0l4s Same
+ 193, 395, 329 ° - 218
« - 295, 3°99 ; + 320 - 382 + 335 - 283 . 272 « 377 - 381
16,
.
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES, 173
Romans.
- VER.
4 . 195, 226,
a ee
ae Rats
LS eer 15 . 270, 297, | Fe ee as a a 24. 254, 25°. ane 26.
yy ie F 6.3 ‘ Be
1 By
14.
15.
9 att ee Meee: ake 25. 239N, 1 Corinthians. | Pe 2 323, a os 9. ite 10. a8 io aa 13. 266, Bs ‘ hk: SPP ‘ Ut ee eae Zk. 198, 25. 4 re ae a 1 179, 2 2550, 3. a) a 4, a 7 203, ae aire 13 855, 7 oe ar ae Beaty), ave’ 1 . 855, 157; > ee 4 855, Bae se. BOR
PAGE 304 242 216 275 339 206 332 206 357 355 364. 320 235 314 176” 314 175 175 175 211n
249
202 373 204, 269 34 231 336 356 234 1367 286 294 301 203 273 179 206 366 349 206 $55 855 179 383 317 376
1 Corinthians.
Thc. eats ea 203 \ 316, 318 Do, a Bagg82 WD... ee) ORI AUF Lc Se ty LB, ie. ea ees RO. hae, we, ant SS 17 - 311
20 f P 203, 34.6 ke or iz a eee
4. os fe 9S 5. 199, 260 6. 302, 353 8 . 136, 343 ee yy a ee BO } oF eae ee. ZI ss, Gara 4. ot ab64 SSS a Reo aaoe 1 és | 4G 3D Ce iy 262 9. 199, 244,
332, 333 Eee dic +, adi Caae L .. 278, 336;-421 2. 240, 347 4. sie: OS ae aaa! a04 eb « 309 8... 309, 373 ll. . 185, 309,
317, 332 16 « -. 380, 266 18 ‘ 250
19 eR sae iy Ring, SOS PaaS Waist i; a eee
Liv; ° 253 15 3338 BO. fy xT 345 19 185 25. - 365 y+. eae 333 3l . o. o) 247 32-34 eke 244 SA a. 6. ope 248 OT as @ 985 Marware mine AE Ly, 40 . .. . 86, 206
10,
11.
12.
1 Corinthians,
VER. PAGE 13. 342, 347 1 «se Se 2. 376 Oo on, je ee 10 . o Gwen. See 12. 237, 247 LY aap 15. 247, 263, 332 Rd. .', (o S5Gy 2am OS oe eae eee 26. : 379 A ae o, & 2FOn 2 266, 321 at oy ia 1928 Shy 328 TE ‘3 182, 285 13. o, ge Pee » 250 1G ck in eee Iie, «. 9am sae Th Biren eo 21. oy heey 2B 6, ge ee ee ys ieee ea ses oc 29 + 314 31 ; - 378 33 . 212 tj os NN aeG 2. 849, 376 4. 141, 270 Be yas bea ete 42 oss ap anre IS eis 356 i a | of gl a'2OO - + 316, 377
2 Sa atin ee F 23. a: ot. Sam 24. . 265, 366 25 . 147, 273, 304 DU 6, ok een a Rae OE dey a 30... 46,/ 995 SL oc ois Re ee Diente 343 ae 0, wee Ge ae o. -«) 286 erga . 286 13. .. 266, 380 14 si sek ee MG. 6s 6 el
74
13.
14.
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
1 Corinthians.
oer eo eo ew
¢ oe Ou 6 ee -« 6 iS] fe) pore “ w co Ww
268, 284, 368 et, 8 ip EO + 815, 376 fa * 4 B27 + 295, 347” : -' 330
34, 207, 296 » 855, 248 o «'s > 266
. 2 21 oe Ve Ce - I41, 264 207 oe 9 207, 331 05) B98 338 275
-'» 334 281, 297, 301
« 199
1 Corinthians.
VER. PAGE Ze i 'a @ fo vat 920 4 ee 180 ZO ie. 2. + 92a 276 - Ae a i Bho! ea hce et B08 Be is. 44. Vee) BAD 33... §, 821, 388 34. 6.246 839 37 348 a . 301 41 - ° 229 43. «fe 9O8 44. .- 855, 381 BBs et wo BEG 46... o 855 49+ + oie 2 340n | ee 183 OFS s+ 5 5 BO 54-57... . 387 BB». Mee so B52 Be 0 9: a* GOR Biloiiie n= S306 Sere 341 + Paar. | * y SAC <2) 8 BR seg Se QOF eis: OSI, S7O 2 Corinthians.
B x ve Ws 216 B. 5 i 5+ 0 G12 5 ° ° 269 8. 276, 357 9 . 165, 280, 351 | See | 12. «+ a 300 13... 350, 376 378 14. . 184, 368 EG 5 40») 0 800 | eee eerrary of 22. « ©3169, 233 2» Het) 374 3 . 280, 281, 333 4. . 260, 333 5. 6 3475 368 6. . 208, 297 Daa <n few RRS LO. 6 e+ 0) 1 G88 12. . 266, 376
2 Corinthians.
PAGE 358 s* ot oA 2ae + 192, 367
212, 361
238 275, 332
262, 306,
ote ae . .« 266
. - 7 oO . . . . . . . . - . . .* Ww & w Sean ~~
10.
ll.
12.
13.
1
2 Corinthians,
bo o
=)
Or
5 405, Thaw +>. 385, 13 ° . 3 .
Galatians.
269, » 274, 876,
1
4
6
7
8 = 9 a4 881, te BYE i oe 16 _ 22
23
: 328, 361,
wane
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
PAGE 308 144 357 266 352 275 I44 333 279 830 361 355 238 180 165 148 343 276 147 226 216 107 308 346 340 227 276 196 308 353 353 278 380 346 35° 238
286 289 324 876 S51 374 245 323% 262 361 366
Galatians, VER. PAGE 1 «> eF oF @ 269 yea a 366 Beg a OS 852 6 ss os ee on 916 Te 0+ S635 322 BO: gs 2h: aa ak 900 BE ana e 271 LD ies o> o 0928 13... «165, 360n 14. . 159; 375 16°. «- 2138, 30% UE, 43 “a. SESH 386 TD ict bee ee QO xs BIBS 27S 21°. « « 379 Lee ey -2agart Ae se see a 24s G6 ee es. 26RO6 a eer ae 10... . «218, 275 16 . 180, 278, 311 BB 55 RS EES > 4 a 214, 349 Es coe es eh ge aD 1 « 196, 230 6. 6 0) en F870 oe se a 19Oe WO. 6 cs cateeaee 8 346, 353 17 « ee 459 1D ees. eee 22. . 189, 300 Co re nie eee | BPs oe ot wt AO BOF 5 oe a BIS Oks e's . 249 tO Pe ge 343 aie 329 Li ats oe aut 22. . «. 481 24. © at a EGO 25. 347 Ll. . 352, 384 pa . 868 Sis +0 te te 386 5 . . 868, 330 9. 407, 362 ll .° 56, 332, 332” TDs Ree te? 246
175
Galatians, OH. VER. PAGE 6, 14 aig Aaa 15 or 269) et GRO 17 . 144, 236
Ephesians, LD oy ee 269 Sis '¢ ° 191,226 5 ew « « 269 O oe SF 232 IO”. et 190 ae ee 247 14 4 5s 849 AG: os 6 or ee Ge 20) os ek as 2b site ee age So of 68 SS eee 2, 3. 855, 248 4, ak yy, & Femi 2 a 247, 269, 3°9, 374 ee Poke, 8 be «229 TO o> - oo eee 20 . é( BS 21. cP ge aie 3. 8. » 45, 230 | 2 Re Og 10? stat 245% 15. 861, 210 18 . 235, 304, 321 19 . . 238, 247” BB, ot 6h eye 1-3 367 6. eon t ae 180, 251 9 . 193, 233, 298 10 oi) tet erteeen Ik s+ ae @8552189 16. . 239, 320 17> 6) 5 agageseg 18609 VS See 22 oe 2 Orme se 826 26s oie tr te $32 3 a ee 366 30 ol 6% eee 31 oN aca eee 32 o ta te BOR
ss
176 INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Ephesians. Philippians. Colossians.
CH. VER. PaGE | CH. VER. PAGE .| CH. VER. PAGE. Bere oie (ho ae | ey 6 PSB Ste ke Ree Se tek sees a's. = 864066, ” SoS 4 <e ax Pe Sida ia |) oa Sa 148, 310 9. . 813, $34 12.7» 406, 355 25.0 2s 234 12... 226, 237 145 oe ae TIT Dio Kea tle RES 13... . 264, 287 16. 178, 321 Bl ne xe de Aetngs 14... «+ 849 1B Ge so 2 206 DS 0 ca \ 0 he MOOT 162. aie cee ges 19 .. 843, 246, 305 BOs 6s he de iRgT 18 . . 844, 238 21 . . . . 238 3. 2 . e e ° 251 19 e . 251; 390 Bion! . os 5 oh275 3. 836, 178, 200 20. . 849, 264 31. .. 266, 330 5s .. 17,1259 Os cee eee PPX s ye ye oeRRgT Sia we He ne TAG 3S 22 . . 215, 310
Es sho ss 262 Gir is ce Regs 23.6. 0) GOIRS77 Duna 0.5) pata MO ier si 004)987_ |B. 1-4 2... a8 10 . ; 323 12 ..827, 332, 3477 3... 264, 334 14-16. 233 hes | | rs | Are 15. én ePhg26 16. . 843, 367 18 . e . 206 16 . . e . 360 4, 1 e e e ° 240 1 | 20... hs © 204; 310 10... 4 eee ees eho nek ebeS 33 BY yo. 0): 9299p 357 DD ie se 6 se ee Be Gets 0 0204 T Bie Bus - 6 if 1875 : | SEM
Bincek se ele vie ARGS aT. ss. 34S Philippians. : a aan ha 18 ist ea or ee | Sy ea 290 Bs Ne kw ne Comes 1 Thessalonians Re ee. Opa) be ie BQO ; Bio oe uy 42 g69 RO ive. ve: oe: me OE ee ee ee a Dis 9 > We 358 BS i: ie! aie TREES 5 lw te os Fae 10... 166, 267 22. ce ce oe 1276 7 wc oe .e IS Jl. + 252, )269 8 . . 195, 216 DZ ts» . 0 5298 . 10... xe. es ged DAL Vek iis, tT Colossians. » US ergs ers 346 15 . 815, 290, 317 Oi Giser 2 io ive Ss \ er Us J O15, 189 Ba hie se OES 4.1 « 253y 322 ay eee ie L489 B iat adhe ie RAR Gib 0's is ee 18-23 . . . 206 9.» 262, 962 12 . «© 2 240 IISc. 24.6 BO oe iw 0 14S wile cen ee QB ivot pw .« (392 10-12. . . 387 20 not wus, SRO 22 . 315, 321, 345 RL is ‘jee 30, OR92 BBs -'0 6 eee WL iet i> ie. ae paa4 BS n-\2 “Bite S88 4 es «0: « 9308 7 ae ote BO Be is we. ta he COE D2 cairns he See WS Sup s-9 ye . .0 BOD BO is) Jo ‘ye." a EXO AD ue 0 ie le 94S PO a ie ge cates 16. .8§ 221, 334 | ek DO ie wo See AT nate ae ie ORS |, Bed es iS
RE 23. « _230,'226 Bir. ib 1b SBOE Ba ie 0. 6 eee B6 .. @ we io £385 10 nm a ee 6. 81, 856, 356 Bi julie ‘ie BQET S os :.0 +970 879 Tite) ole eS BS te we a gee Delle te ee D5’ gigs BD BO co plitw: » TO 20° is os ee ee es a we. Se Eee > oi ce we BBS 15 . 195, 263, 342
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES,
1 Thessalonians.
VER, PAGE 16. 191, 217 iy os 0264 re 2 342 a . 351 a - 340 DS oie’ oun. vi eeROG Abe + 300 14. . 284 16-22 -- 338 23°: Pay yf 24. «» 366 AC, i ONES 26s 0. ot BION 2 Thessalonians.
Sis AR 361 ‘aa 253 LER, » 350 Tei... “S1G,350 | oe Sales ier Sr kaw SOR. 9%% Bee ev oe AOS 9°. . 197 | AREA Sy | eS 5 is be ° 206 15. £49, 25% 322 | ie 350 = hee 292 5. 238, 342 10. 380, 381 ll... « « 362 14. 321 17% 307.
1 Timothy.
3 363, 386 2 ere ee Siiss owt; 's,. SA B80 Gis fang HERES S sc: AATRESO Lt De 365 Ll.» £3, 253 13... . 363, 334 DE S56 0sci'e, «ER BOS IG 3e 5.0. 5 op 0th ZOO a= DO 262 tS eee "21, 274 Gries 05) 255 3°7
Ne
1 Timothy.
VER. PAGE ‘T « 384 Bon ope SESS 5. ‘ 228 Al 853 hs pray 321 14. 298 16. 248, 411, 387 Gy 528 anh 6h: CSR 11 | Maer Apert 14... 1% «<¢ 273 : ae rte: ey San ae 280 eer 230 Dhete sez.) 0) a 852 14-6: Ws 83 21. . 165 22) 4 440385 Voit. 6) Mts 47% DS pe. ans Oe Yo 3. «,, one gOS 4. 183, 274 ae 253 ae 199, 251, 382 13.. 211, 278 BA as me, «we get 15 828, 300 2 Timothy. 12s.) «. , BaGE SEF Lb ee « 365 2? ee . 298 18 . 145, 298 D . a! a 340 8 . . 239M, 334 aE 178, 194, 332, 382 pS: nee AY ops ght goed B68 Os eas Bie 6 owe BSS © oi: «5 1BSR274 9 is o) AB.BOS S57 Me 210 46... ‘ 210 + SaaS 365 Gs. de ee e835 Riek cic ecco y4 ht areas 4 213 13. 172 |
2 ciency VER. PAGE 12 SARS eae 320 1G: san 0. 0), 342 Lbs oy. 8:10, epaes Lh ae 176 SES c4 176 Titus. ae 307 7 UAL et 234 Ne ae 365 TDs ai conn e 293 1D area) 3 AZ ain i ae Se 0 hast GOS B+ ee 853 4. . «+ 198 Be dsb ecr ep eens Ras. 2+ 307 LE eis ialh ah) ete LE Geren iar 2 fe r 14s otis os 237 Eicsatiacria 3h 162 Ges: 269 Tian "247, 308 S oo» 8FH 228 TO™ iis ach egy Se OR LRG, 0's 'a.s SOG IAp a: - 062 9-1 ee UTS 13. ons ez Philemon. eR rare 3 Se mars) ene Wives. 4 Vee eee 1T%., ; 386 13 83, 275 20°. . 124, 34, 386 = § i TD i 350 23 183 24 "176, 183 Hebrews. 2 . 858, 217, 278 3... 53, 856, 233, 261, 320 Soest 2899207 a » | waraog Os ols ee 23s ka «Or
INDEX. OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
Hebrews. :
CH. VER. PAGE ‘holst. ae wemearer De én» «IQ, 252 14. - 83, 336 Agee ers 2: fg oh BOT 3. Aes Vere 5. - 244 Tons 280, 316 ee et ie 3 | wa. |. 65, 20am 275» 383
£0 % ’ 270 13. : 222 14. 235, 334 15. 269, 358 16. or ip RSG
» 6 ee « 283 Be . 860 12. 240, 353 Ee «316 ra oar + 242 a oy eee o:> bie POR 4. - 180 6. - 323” Bis - 349 9. 0 0 BOS M2. 165, 276 16. eo) 34 “B22. ; 253 4. pe OT Tid sie a VRE Se AES
8 . 312, 365, 386
BAe yO we, S30 12%. . 270, 380 I3*. ‘5a aad 3 ee rere 35 | en to | 234 Bae sia 9 5 34OR ed es wks, AT
OB. ges 6 B27 Ber tad cgi) BEF 13-16. . . 271 Te ow eNOS 16h i wt ve 988 (eS are 208 Gib. is Meee
4 . 56, 287, 383 Dit, +e te +0) SOS Debi Retss 08 20. -o 0 -« +189
Hebrews.
CH. VER, PAGE 7 2h... < 189, 203 Be te 4a RBA Be v0 Ga a OR ZO. ss x. be BQOS 7 EC 5 | he Se a ee Bie ie * 180,°322 Si. ts 4s AERO LO <6 ee a ce. POT AD +a sing Ho Se GS
1D ss + 0 gh 9ae 13. : 825 ce ery re ee ++ 220 Bs *s % 273) 300 Begs ek n cl BFO Bi... 5+ 049, -170,
276, 368
7. « $39, 236 10... 849, 232 12" ss. - 107; 28k 1S 0% eine +s) 826 Sh Ge it's BRBO 23 v4 . 222, 283 BO hs tp ve 66 1968 RGR ey ae +0 TRG oie isp see 5.5 lg ee: 7. 213, 316, 358 So; » “oa 9... B10, 299, 326 10. <0’ +0. <» ROE BO we i ete RTE Pe ce te Stee SOR ey a GB is. a 5' » *R74 ee eee OE op ey 5 9TO Bs xs. 4a: kp’ 3p, 298 BO ic «ste te BGO TB 2. ty BBs 928 ea ee. S -s. we tare egO DO 0 so +e (868 20 «0. re sa ite & BOD 1D. ts “ah ta 1309 | Sere. S| 1b. . 349 357 BT 0. se. 50 sagen | ree)
Hebrews.
CH. VER. PAGE WR2Es ea a Se 20+ i 6 ot PRED 28 . 87, 227, 366 ee
BL. sete hae | ee > 12, 1.. 831, 868, 379 2. . 234, 257
he; eaih> 228 || Pe ee 5 |b ae eee p< 1G fa) ae Mores 16° . « 352
17. -. 840, 273
20 ae 24. . 826, 283 27 oi o teO8 28 - 87, $33
16-3 ee
5 9 ya ee Gis . 203 8 . 378, 221 13. » 262 : | a +: are 18 . 0 wie aie a0. % . 298
6 ‘i eee 11 199 332 13. 240
27 eine 844 Bod seo te! ie PREG ee 197 } ere 4.» 232, 305
x
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
James. VER. PAGE 1G! . 81 20 a eS 22 . 328 23. a’ 3.376 25. . 246 1. - 859 4. ah) Sie 5. 55, 382 Gs asa 10 812, 125 ll 216, 292 bee 855, 361 Ly hee a's 1165 Sid 245 ks 369 5. 363 er 243 ALS 218 13. 147, 208n, Segint 163)". 359 iy Soe 246 I. "147, 319 3. 245, 266 4. viet RID Gs . 196 : 260 Lis ; 831 12. ‘ 261 14. ‘ 818 15 . : 838 Les ‘ 180 1 Peter. Wes 234 Biter gs 200; 232 Dae .) Sta, 236 8... 246, 364 QE TG on BOR 10. bs a4 DIZ ya mers 3 AT o- & 559g 966 AS a ae [B47 ZOseP eS se 278 23. 290 25. 203, 214, 221, 323” bees 210n y a Sea Has
1 Peter.
VER. PAGE GR 823, 837 7 « 197, 312, 383 9. 239 8475:849
13. 849
4 - 269
sy i . 367
a &° 367
19. 6 6 #237
21 ‘ « 395
ya o gah
DA. Nae: B35 327 1. . 307M, 353 ea aee ger eas . 307” eee . 367
IO see 82 357 14... wy °2§, 348
ty Oy wae eee eS |
WGP gd aes
20... » 215, 234
21 ‘ . 382 1 s (229, 320 Si. 1 #, *ZI9 Oo «oe =a 928 8. . « 20%, 261
AO ot ot ie, ee ERO
ll ..: 847, 221
A ey
WSs We 235
Uy phe pee 357 } ; 261 a : 261 7 i gon
te oe « HAC eas
Le. a ot 392
2 Peter. he’ 174, 216 Bie + 342 Bat! 247 4. 298 B53 5 Pe 77
10 . 215, 320, 342 12 ope BOs
14. 332 18 ee ee eas 19 . 298, 318, 367
20°. . 307, 367
21 2. 206
2 Peter VER. PAGE Be? a ticat eb ade a er - 386 Se ot oe Gigs 233 See - 298 15. - 248 | 181, 347 22. 846, 190 Patel 5166, 356 2. 241, 367 3. 8 «62785367 5. 286 114, 219 14, ‘ 248 1G 310 1S. 267 1 John. 1 . 207, 227, 334 De esas. eaten IF } a 5) wt 263K pe 274, 306n 4. oe Oe 5. 238 1S ee 292 4, 292 15. 238 19 . 349 his 303, 332 ta 350 3. 53 4% 65. '6m-F95 Uae ye 182 2 ae . 292 yaa | "363 re . 84 8 . 194, 332 ts ie 200, 274 il 347 16 238 17 273, 350 19: . ra 3. 184, 2385 350 6. 286 ik ae ie ae 20's) a re ae 2 John 1
INDEX OF SCRIPTURE PASSAGES.
2 John.
CH, VER. PAGE Be pep, heli Geant : ee ee ESE 308 Be, o) muteld 305 BO. a, So of 207 Dy: cto es ES 12. . 106, 172, 284
3 John. Bus: J. 9 Mek WB 4... « 45; 309 Deng oS. ZOD 6. o See4O Li wt. oy FS 9. . 306, 333 13... 2698932 Bt oe warts, 5: 284 Jude. Sy eee BRR 6. . «858, 214 Dis ha Rader OS | Eee a eS Bee ge see I RD lis verges; O78 19... 855, 206 7. a Sy: Baha Nc vg ie Oe Revelation.
lL 4... 196, 224 8. 35, 196 10 206, 262 ‘Be + 284 BBi 3 30, 361
2.10. » 199 14 , ++ 252 16 'v, “be . 262 ee ae - 170
ce “ays = BREN
Revelation.
CH. VER, PAGE
ll.
12,
oe Ae Mee se
2 ee. eae Dio. iat Tee oes D nies ey ee 20 .. .. 2318S B95 12 & ... .223, 304 15 i oe BRS Q1 in. 5, (2256261 Do Fajen a haigekOD ee ee he Sis ., 196;.264 On: 2. oi Sh Se 1D 8S, .. Fa
° +. 200 Boe % Uy WN IROR
ows ee gad 12-14... . 387 200, 277 Ese Whee BOs Drdiw )%.5 UO Da. tna beege Sips * we. 20m DE Ss Pio a $7 ee the oe]
ALG cme oe RIO
| eres se) 14. . 184, 199 By eg tg os O64 scape ib iy SES 235 a-18.. ski 295 O ME es. se CONS tts catia 4 gee
EI os Ce EON
RG 5 fe fe 0267 Bi Gels a OOS
ee Ce
4 ‘ 34.72 AD»... MG 904 BO. fo a 219 ek. ate 867 9 . « 825, 211” Be. ole 3 ob OE
17s 18.
19.
20. 21.
PARDON & SOM, PRINTERS,
PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON,
Revelation. VER. PAGH’ iY See 244 Br Ger ear $67 Bow: cep 4g 10. + or otigt 262 16. .- "s+ e+ 251218 18. 46 os s= 4 ee 10%.» 136 AD ae water oe 953 1S igs 2 26a, 357 2s % 300 Be ae ee
Ore 2+. eee 14 w+. . & SHR te oe
Bee ag a ae SER 10. 5 sé Hag gRe re ee eae |
Gas 6> eet Bae Oe ts eM ee IS *. 855, 172 BT. .-de so hse 809 21-23 342 22. ‘52: 3OP
ba, sn yeutzo
3. « we 170 4, a. 3 29 6. 170 9. é 824 iD ete é et 824 125 <4 867 pee . 300 y rie | f BD) Sg Ae
1 sgt ae 0 ee eee 207 1M 5. Fe ee ae LP ie. oo tegen 19g Die eee ae ee 381 Ah we ye ae eae 14 « Hes go See 16 . .
“#92 335
Publications of the Religious Cract Society.
: By THE SAME AUTHOR.
Bible Sketches and their Teachings. For Young People. By the Rev. Samuret G, GREEN, B.A. Feap. 8vo, each 2s, 6d. cloth boards.
First Series.—From the Creation to the Exodus of the Children of Israel.
Seconp Srrizs.—From the Israelites’ Entrance into Canaan to the ‘end of the Old Testament.
THIRD SERIES.—The Life of Christ.
Paragraph Bible with Emendations. —Tun Hoty Brsrz, _ according to the Authorized Versions, in Paragraphs and Sections ; with Emendations of the Text; also Maps, Chronological Tables and Marginal References. Royal quarto, large type. Complete in one volume. Cloth boards, 35s. - Vou. I.—Gernzsts To EstHer, 16s. Vou. Il.—Jos to Mauacut, 16s. Vou. III.—Tue New Testament, 10s. 6d.
The Annotated Paragraph Bible-—Tuer Op anp New Tzs- TAMENTS, according to the Authorized Versions, arranged ‘in Para- graphs and Parallelisms ; with Explanatory Notes, Prefaces, and New Selection of References. Maps and Engravings. Super-royal 8vo. Otp TESTAMENT, boards, 14s. New TESTAMENT, ditto, 7s. Ox_p AND NEw TESTAMENTS, complete in 1 vol., ditto, 20s. OxLp AND NEw TESTAMENTS, in 3 vols., boards, 22s. Larce Paper Eprrion, | vol., 28s.
(May be also had in calf and morocco binding, plain and elegant.)
Pocket Paragraph Bible; with Maps. 3s. cloth boards; | 4s, roan gilt; 5s. French morocco; 6s. Turkey morocco ; 7s. ditto, flexible back ; 8s. best morocco limp, with flaps ; 9s. with gilt clasp.
A Handbook of the English Tongue. By Josrpx Aneus, D.D., F.R.A.S., Examiner of English History and Literature to the London University. 12mo. 5s. cloth boards.
A Handbook of English Literature. By JoszraH Aneus, D.D., Examiner of English Literature, etc., at the London Univer- sity. 12mo. 5s. boards; 6s, 6d. extra boards.
A Handbook of Specimens of English Lnterature, By J. ANGUS, D.D. 12mo. 5s,;.6d, cloth boards, ;
Publications of the Religious Tract Society.
A New Introduction to the Study of the Bible. By H. P. BARROWS, D.D., Professor of Biblical Literature, New York. With Fac-similes of ancient MSS. 8ve. 6s. cloth boards.
The History of England to the Year 1852. By T. Miter,
A.M., F.R.G.S. 12mo. Two Maps. 5s. cloth boards,
The Elements of English History. By J. C. Curtis, B.A. For Schools and Families. 1s. limp cloth ; Is. 6d. half-bound.
The History of Greece. By the Rev. F. ARNOLD, B.A. With Maps and Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s, cloth boards.
The History of Rome. By.T. Mrmr, A.M., F.R.G.5, 12mo, Three Maps. 3s. cloth boards,
Elements of the History of Rome. By J. OC. Curtis, B.A. 24mo. ls. cloth ; ls. 6d, half-bound.
The Elements of Moral Science. By F. Wayuann, D.D., > Professor of Moral Philosophy. Notes and Analysis by JosErH ANGUS, D.D. 12mo. 3s. cloth. .
A Universal Geography : Historical, Mathematicai, Physical, and Political. By T. MILNER, A.M. Maps. 12mo.' 5s. boards.
Paleys Hore Pauline. With Notes and Supplementary Treatise, entitled HORAX APOSTOLICAS, By the Rev. Canon Birks, M.A., Professor of Moral Philosophy in the University of Cambridge. Witha Map. 12mo. 3s. boards.
Paley’s Evidences of Christianity. Introduction, Notes, and Supplement. By the Rev. Canon Birks. 12mo. 3s. cloth boards.
The Analogy of Religion. Also Fifteen Sermons. By Joseru BurLER, LL.D. With a Life of the Author, Analysis, etc. By J. ANGUS, D.D.. 3s: 6d. boards.
The New Biblical Atlas, and Scripture Gazetteer. Twelve superior Maps and Plans, with descriptive Letterpress. Super-royal 8vo. 2s, 6d. plain; 4s. outlines coloured; 6s. 6d. on imperial. , drawing paper, full coloured, and bound in boards.
56, PATERNOSTER ROW; 65, ST. PAUL’S CHURCHYARD; AND 164, PICCADILLY.
eT hed
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
‘BERKELEY
«
Return to desk from which borrowed.
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.” *_
29Apr"49AP
19Feb SSVLE FEB? 1955
1OAnP58TS REC'D LD MAR 27 4958
ONC 6g REC’D LD OL 9 4962
but 5
SNov'620L
REC'D LD JUN 3
INTERLIBRA AUG 16
UNIV. OF CA
NTERLIBRARY LOAN
4APR 1 7 1986 HY. OF CALIF., BERK. 19724 3
"77 - AMT 4
RY LOAN 1976
WIF., BERK,
LD 21-100m-9,48 (B399s16) 476
<
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
as
sea Nat
Cs Nes He ait
Cae aes ene aee
e
Se
a » At PEP OSE LAMENT OEY EONS L
YS
a.
alas cee: 0 Ns
Hat AAS UPd Feber; ae Ee coe Pea Rh
a RUAN
&,
i ; ON age NK ENA ROAR Aut TON a ae
in ea
oS eee
ae BNO!
=
ie G
* me BAMA ; ‘e MA Se Ne Mi pie sen v NGA Omit Luts ass pale , i Be Saeeethy ROR IN a Me ts uy i a vs UY Hinde ae en Hy POEUN OP. Astin any oy as Wa iveAR ona} vt AORN | Q ee NY Ne ee EAN
ne, * ane - ~
ryt Nah
ae vee Ba